Automation & Control Modicon Premium automation platform

Catalogue July 0 Automation & Control Modicon Premium automation platform Unity & PL7

Art. 8027 - MKTED2007EN Art. 67 - MKTED20EN Safety solutions using Preventa 200 Ethernet TCP/IP Transparent Factory Art. 0 - MKTED200EN 200 AS-Interface cabling system 200 Human/Machine dialogue Communication Control and Protection, Detection, Automation, Human/Machine dialogue 200 Control and Protection, Detection, Automation, Human/Machine dialogue, Communication Control and signalling units Art. 28697 - MKTED2990EN Telemecanique Components for Human-Machine interfaces Terminals and display units Art. 9699 - MKTED2000EN Automation and control Human/Machine interfaces An overview of the product range Control and protection, Detection, Automation, Human/Machine dialogue, Communication, Supervision, Panel-building and cabling accessories 200 To be issued Automation and control Mounting systems Art. 7026 - MKTED20EN 200 Automation and control Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies 200 200 Art. 70 - MKTED200EN Automation and control Automation and relay functions Human/Machine dialogue Supervision Panel-building and cabling accessories Automation

AUTC20080EN Distributed I/O Advantys STB AUTC2002EN 200 Modicon Momentum automation platform 2002 200 Art. 80262 - MKTED2007EN Automation and control Automation platform Modicon Quantum and Unity - Concept Proworx software Art. 80262 - MKTED20072EN Automation and control Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7 software 200 Automation platform Modicon TSX Micro and PL7 software 200 Art. 7098 - MKTED2002EN Art. 9600 - DIAED20006EN 200 Automation and control Telemecanique The essential Automation, Communication Art. 66692 - DIA7ED200006EN Art. 62 - DIA7ED200902EN 200 Motion control Lexium Art. 802660 - MKTED2009EN 200 Twin Line Motion control Soft starters and variable speed drives Art. 270 - MKTED2000EN 200 Art. 72 - MKTED200EN 200 Global Detection Electronic and electromechanical sensors 200 Motor starter solutions Control and protection components Control and protection Detection

General contents 0 Modicon Premium automation platform Welcome to the world of Telemecanique... page 6 New features in Unity Premium.... page 8 Premium processors - Unity selection guide...page /2 Unity processors...page /2 Unity slot-plcs...page / -2PL7selectionguide...page /2 PL7 processors...page /26 PL7 Slot-PLCs...page /2 2 Racks, I/O architectures and power supplies Power supply and fan modules....page2/2 Single rack configuration...page2/6 Multi-racks configuration without remote module...page2/8 Multi-racks configuration with remote module...page 2/2 Discrete and analog I/O - Discrete I/O modules...page /2-2 Analog I/O modules...page /20 - IP 20 distributed I/O modules...page /28 - IP 6/67 distributed I/O modules...page /2 - Tego Power installation system...page /7 Application-specific modules and solutions - Preventa safety modules....page/2-2 Counter ans electronic cam modules...page / - Motion control modules....page /28 - Integrated weighing system...page /6 - Warm Standby redundancy (PL7)....page /62 Communication Selection guide...page/2 - Ethernet TCP/IP network - Transparent Ready...page/8-2 CANopen machine bus...page /2 - AS-Interface sensor/actuators bus....page /6 - X-Way bus and network....page /6 - Modbus Plus network and Profibus DP/INTERBUS buses...page /88-6 Modbus SL, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links....page /98 6 Software 6- Unity software....page6/2 6-2 PL7 software...page 6/

7 Human/Machine Interfaces Magelis display units and terminals... page 7/2 Magelis ipc industrial PCs.... page 7/6 HMI software... page 7/8 OFS data server software... page 7/0 Tego Dial for Homme/Machine Interfaces.... page 7/ 8 Connection interfaces and power supplies 8- Telefast 2 pre-wired system... page 8/2 8-2 Phaseo power supplies for d.c control circuits.... page 8/20 9 Services Technical information Documentation... page 9/2 TSX PSY power supply module selection document... page 9/ Standards, certifications and environment conditions.... page 9/6 Optional conformal coating... page 9/9 Automation product certifications... page 9/0 Schneider Electric worldwide Addresses... page 9/2 Index Product reference index... page 9/8

Welcome Modicon Quantum automation platform 0 To the world of Telemecanique Modicon automation platforms A family of specialist automation platforms Process Applications Discrete Automation PC based control applications Modicon is the family name for a set of complementary automation platforms. They are characterized by their extendable memory capacity and increasing execution speed. Premium, an optimized platform for complex machinery, factory automation applications and infrastructure b Up to 7 Mb of program memory b Compact size and high density I/O modules b Extension racks for multirack architectures b Extensive catalog of sensor/actuator buses, machine buses and fieldbuses b Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port on many CPUs b Motion control, electronic cam, weighing and machine safety modules Quantum, an optimized platform for batch/process applications, with high levels of availability b Up to 7 Mb of program memory b Powerful process control library b Supports fieldbuses for batch/process applications b Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port on new CPUs b High performance Hot Standby solution b Special treatment to resist corrosive atmospheres Atrium, the slot PLC meeting PC Based requirements b All the functionality of a PLC integrated in a PC b No compromise of ruggedness or HMI integration 6

Welcome (continued) Modicon Quantum automation platform 0 To the world of Telemecanique Unity software A new organizer environment for high end Modicon platforms To complement the existing software catalog, Unity offers a common environment for Modicon Premium, Quantum and Atrium platforms. Based on the best standards in existing software offers, Unity is a high performance programming tool that can significantly increase productivity by means of: b State-of-the-art functionality b Optimum standardization enabling re-use of developments b Numerous tools for testing the program and improving system operation b New integrated diagnostic services The Unity software catalog also offers specialist software representing another major step towards Collaborative Automation : b Management of distributed control architecture projects b Design and generation of batch/process applications with PLC/HMI integration b Openness to developments in C language or in VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) Transparent Ready Web technology serving automation solutions Let us introduce you to the world of Transparent Ready - a world where products are compatible, interoperable and easy to maintain. With Transparent Ready, you can: b Use Ethernet in infrastructures from field level to MES level b Gain competitive advantage through the adoption of tried and tested technology b Reduce downtime via Web-based diagnostics b Create secure inter-factory communication worldwide b Control costs through the use of standards Collaborative Automation The new world of automation b Rather than opting for proprietary systems, Telemecanique has adopted market standards such as IEC languages, Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus IDA, XML, OPC, IT standards, etc. b Partnerships with recognized leading hardware and software specialists have been developed within the scope of the Collaborative Automation Partner Program in an effort to share technology more effectively. b You will be assured of designing the best solution without compromising on ease of integration. 7

Welcome platform 0 New features in Unity Premium New Premium CPUs With Unity, the range has been complemented by new, faster CPUs with increased memory capacity. Extension of the range b New high-performance TSX P7 p CPUs b New entry level CPUs with integrated CANopen b TSX P7 p CPU now available with integrated Ethernet port TSX P7 p Improved execution speed b 2-bit architecture for TSX P7 0p and p CPUs b Significant improvement in processing of complex arithmetic and instructions on arrays b Optimum performance with TSX P7 p CPUs: v 7 ns for a Boolean instruction (60 ns with PL7) v ns for a numerical instruction (80 ns with PL7) Memory enhancements b The whole internal memory can now be used for data when the PCMCIA extension is used. b Customizable program download to the PLC (with or without source code) b More memory: v up to 7 Mb for the program ( times more than with PL7) v up to 896 Kb for data (7 times more than with PL7) Communication enhancements b USB programming port for TSX P7 p and TSX P7 p CPUs b Integrated Ethernet port with active Web server and automatic E-mail transmission on event b Improved Ethernet performance, a true Plug and Play port b New master CANopen module supported by all CPUs b More INTERBUS and Profibus DP fieldbus connections. Enhancements in the process control offer b Doubling of the number of analog I/O, up to 2 channels b New library of process control blocks 28-EN_Ver.0.fm/2

Welcome (continued) platform 0 New features in Unity Premium New software Unity Pro a seamless continuation of PL7 Unity Pro has been designed primarily to ensure continuity with PL7 in order to cut training costs to a minimum. In addition, the PL7 application converter is included as standard in Unity Pro. Unity Pro boosts software productivity by means of b Standardization and reuse of: v nested structured data v unlocated symbolic data eliminating memory mapping v libraries of customizable functions or function blocks v function modules b Increased productivity during the design process through simplicity of use: v FBD language v several SFC sections (Grafcet) b Increased quality during testing and start-up phases: v PLC simulator on PC (offline mode) v new debugging tools b Reduction in machine downtimes during use: v simultaneous online modifications of variables and program sections v tracking of operator actions v troubleshooting b Simplified integration of third-party tools: v hyperlinks to any level of the project v XML import/export on any project element v access to the Unity Pro database and server Advanced Unity Pro specialist software b Unity Studio has the task of structuring distributed applications where several applications and devices communicate with one another via Ethernet. Unity Studio is particularly suitable for the needs of the manufacturing industry and infrastructure. b Unity Application Generator (UAG) is specialist software for developing and generating process control applications. Unity Application Generator is particularly suitable for the needs of continuous control in batch/process industries. b Unity Developer's Edition (UDE) is specialist software providing static or dynamic access to all Unity servers based on development in VBA, VB or C++. b Unity EFB Toolkit is specialist software for development in C language of tailor-made functions destined for integration in Unity Pro function libraries. b Unity SFC View is an Active X component designed for monitoring and diagnostics of SFC sequential applications from an HMI station. 28-EN_Ver.0.fm/

/0

Contents -Modicon Premium processors. - Premium processors - Unity Processors and slot-plcs selection guide...page/2 b Premium processors v Presentation.... page/ v Description.... page/ v Memory structure... page/8 v Characteristics.... page/0 v References... page/2 b Atrium slot-plcs v Presentation... page/ v Description... page/6 v TCP/X-Way software gateway... page/7 v Memory structure.... page/8 v Characteristics.... page/20 v References... page/2 b PCMCIA memory extension cards... page/22.2 - Premium processors - PL7 Processors and slot-plcs selection guide...page/2 b Premium processors v Presentation.... page/26 v Description.... page/27 v Characteristics.... page/28 v Memory structure.... page/0 v References... page/ b Atrium slot-plcs v Présentation... page/2 v Description... page/ v TCP/X-Way software gateway... page/ v Memory structure.... page/ v Characteristics.... page/ v References... page/ b PCMCIA memory extension cards... page/6 /

Selection guide platform Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs Unity Premium/Atrium platforms for Unity Pro software offer TSX 7 Cp configuration TSX 7 0p processor TSX 7 p processors. g Number of racks /6/8 slots (6slots) (according to rack type) 2 slots 2 In-rack inputs/outputs Discrete inputs/outputs 92 channels (module with 8, () 6, 2 or 6 channels) In-rack application-specific channels 26 channels (module with 8, 6, 2 or 6 channels) 2 channels (module with 8, 6, 2 or 6 channels) Analog inputs/outputs 2 channels (module with, 8 or 6 channels) 2 channels (module with, 8 or 6 channels) Max. no. of channels 8 Integrated counter module with 2 counter channels max. 0 KHz Counter Modules with 2/ counter channels max. MHz, single-channel electronic cam module Motion (2) Modules with /2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2// axes for analog control servomotors, modules with 8/6 axes with SERCOS digital link Weighing Modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels) Serial links TSX SCY in-rack communication modules ( application-specific channel) Serial link connections Modbus RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () master/slave PCMCIA modules and in-rack RS 8 master/slave modules Uni-Telway integrated RS 8 master/slave channel, RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () master/slave PCMCIA modules and in-rack RS 8 master/slave modules Jnet PCMCIA modules (), max. Character mode integrated RS 8 channel, RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () PCMCIA modules and in-rack RS 8 modules Bus connections AS-Interface actuator/sensor bus in-rack module 2 in-rack modules master V2 CANopen machine bus integrated PCMCIA module PCMCIA module () master V.02 INTERBUS fieldbus master V2 () or Profibus DP fieldbus master V0 class and 2 () Network connections Max.no.ofnetworks Integrated process control Number of channels Ethernet TCP/IP Fipway/Ethway/Modbus Plus modules Configurable loops Programmable loops Multiprotocol in-rack modules (Modbus TCP, Uni-TE, Global Data, I/O Scanning, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast server or FactoryCast HMI server Fipway module (), in-rack Ethway modules Modbus Plus (), Fipway () () modules, in-rack Ethway modules Memory capacity Without PCMCIA extension 96 Kb program and data 96 Kb program and data With PCMCIA extension 96 Kb data 28Kbprogram 96 Kb data 22Kbprogram Data storage 26 Kb (PCMCIA extension in upper slot on processor no. 0) USB programming port Power supply a 00 20 V or c 2 V non-isolated power supply module a 00 20 V, c 2 V non-isolated and c 2 8 V isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each rack. Premium processor Standard TSX P7 0M Integrated Ethernet TSX P7 6M (7) g Integrated CANopen TSX P7 Cp 02M TSX P7 02M Integrated Fipio TSX P7 M (8) Atrium slot PLC Standard Integrated Fipio Pages / /2 () The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O and analog I/O are cumulative. (2) axis = application-specific channel, except for SERCOS modules where, depending on the configuration, the module = 2 2 channels. () Insert the module into the lower PCMCIA slot on a processor (no. ) or into the external PCMCIA slot on a slot PLC (no. ). () Insert the module into the TSX SCY 2 60 in-rack communication module slot. () The INTERBUS and Profibus DP limits are not cumulative. /2

TSX 7 2p processors and slot PLCs TSX 7 p processors and slot PLCs TSX 7 p processors TSX 7 p processors. 6 8 02 channels (modules with 8, 6, 2 or 6 channels) 208 channels (modules with 8, 6, 2 or 6 channels) 80 channels (modules with, 8 or 6 channels) 28 channels (modules with, 8 or 6 channels) 2 2 6 26 channels (modules with, 8 or 6 channels) 2 channels (modules with, 8 or 6 channels) Modules with 2/ counter channels max. MHz, single-channel electronic cam module Modules with /2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2// axes for analog control servomotors, modules with 8/6 axes with SERCOS digital link 2-channel modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels) TSX SCY in-rack communication modules ( application-specific channel) RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () master/slave PCMCIA modules and in-rack RS 8 master/slave modules integrated RS 8 master/slave channel, RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () master/slave PCMCIA modules and in-rack RS 8 master/slave modules PCMCIA modules (), max. integrated RS 8 channel, RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () PCMCIA modules and in-rack RS 8 modules in-rack modules 8 in-rack modules PCMCIA module () in-rack module in-rack modules in-rack modules in-rack modules (+ software gateway with Atrium slot PLC) (+ software gateway with Atrium slot PLC) Multiprotocol in-rack modules (Modbus, Uni-TE, Global Data, I/O Scanning, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast server or FactoryCast HMI server and via software gateway with Atrium slot PLCs Modbus Plus (), Fipway () () module, in-rack Ethway modules 0 channels with max. loops channels with max. loops 20 channels with max. loops 0 channels with max. loops Library of EFB control blocks 60/92 Kb program and data (6) 92/208 Kb program and data (6) 20 Kb program and data 60 Kb program and data 768Kbprogram 60/92 Kb data.7 Mb program 92/208 Kb data 2Mbprogram 0 Kb data 7Mbprogram 896 Kb data 8 Mb (PCMCIA extension in upper or lower processor slot no. 0 and/or no. ) a 00 20 V, c 2 V non-isolated and c 2 8 V isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each rack. TSX P7 20M TSX P7 0M TSX P7 26M (7) TSX P7 6M (7) TSX P7 6M (7) TSX P7 6M (7) TSX P7 2M TSX P7 M TSX P7 M TSX P7 M TSX PCI 7 20M TSX PCI 7 M /2 and /2 / (6) The second value applies to the processor with integrated Fipio bus manager link. (7) The integrated Ethernet port requires of the available network connections. (8) The TSX P7 M processor does not support the CANopen bus PCMCIA module. /

Presentation platform Unity processors. Presentation Premium TSX P7 ppm and TSX P7 ppm automation platform processors manage the entire PLC station comprising: b Discrete I/O modules b Preventa safety modules b Analog I/O modules b Application-specific modules (counter, motion, weighing, communication) If the PLC station needs to extend across a certain distance, these modules can be distributed: b Either in several racks interconnected by Bus X (max. 700 m) b Or via one of the supported fieldbuses The processors are differentiated by their memory capacities, processing speeds, number of I/O, and number of communication ports. Depending on the model, they include: b to6racks b 92 to 200 discrete I/O b 2 to 2 analog I/O b to 6 application-specific channels. Each application-specific module (counter, motion control, communication () or weighing) accounts for or more application-specific channels. b to networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus, Ethway), to 8 AS-Interface buses b 0 or Fipio bus, 0 or CANopen or Modbus Plus bus and 0 to INTERBUS or Profibus DP fieldbuses b 0 to 0 process control channels, with one channel able to have up to loops Depending on the model, Premium processors also feature: b A 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX Ethernet TCP/IP port (RJ connector) b Communication via 2 terminal ports (TER and AUX) using Uni-Telway protocol or character mode (typically a 9 or Kbps programming terminal and an operator dialog terminal) b A USB type TER port (for the connection of a programming terminal) Each processor has 2 slots for a PCMCIA card: b An upper slot (no. 0) for memory extension cards (program, symbols, constants and/or data files) b A lower slot (no. ) for a network card (Fipway, Modbus Plus) or bus (CANopen, Fipio Agent, Modbus, Uni-Telway and serial links). Memory extension cards specifically for data storage can also be inserted into this slot. Premium application design and installation The installation of these Premium processors requires: b Unity Pro Medium, Large or Extra Large programming software. This is the same as the software used in the Quantum platform. b Optionally, depending on requirements: v The Unity Studio software suite used to design distributed applications v The Unity Application Generator (UAG) specialist software for modeling and generating process applications v Unity EFB toolkit software for developing EF and EFB function block libraries in C language v Unity SFC View software for visualizing and diagnosing applications written in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language /

Description platform Unity processors 8 2 6 7 Description of TSX P7ppM processors without integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port TSX P7 pm single-format processors and TSX P7 2p/pM double-format processors feature the following on the front panel: A display block with indicator lamps: v RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution). TSX P7 0M TSX P7 M v ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card) 2 v I/O lamp (red): Fault occurring on another module in the station or configuration fault v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on TER or AUX terminal port v FIP lamp (red): Activity on integrated Fipio bus (depending on model) TSX P7 20/0M 6 7 7 TSX P7 2//M 2 RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated An 8-way female mini-din connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal (RS 8) An 8-way female mini-din connector marked AUX for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal (RS 8) A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory card 6 A PCMCIA slot (no.) for a communication card or memory extension card for storing additional data TSX P7 02M 7 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P7 /2/M models) for Fipio bus communication (Fipio manager port) 8 An air recirculating heatsink (on TSX P7 02/pM models) 2 6 TSX P7 CA 02M/CD 02M Description of the processor and configurations with integrated CANopen port The TSX P7 02M processor and TSX P7 Cp 02M configurations (built around the TSX P7 02M processor) feature all or some of the following components: A non-extendable 6-slot TSX RKY 6 rack 2 A standard-format c 2 V non-isolated TSX PSY 60M or a 00 20 V TSX PSY 2600M power supply (see page 2/). A TSX P7 C02M processor with slot no. for the PCMCIA CANopen master V.02 card, complete with cable and tap junction (see page /). A slot (no. 0) for a PCMCIA format memory extension card A 2-channel 0 khz TSX CTY 2A counter module (see page /9). This module uses 2 of the application-specific channels provided by the processor. 6 Three single-format slots for any I/O module or Premium module 7 An air recirculating heatsink 8 A TSX P7 C02M processor with slot no. for the PCMCIA CANopen master V.02 card, complete with cable and tap junction These configurations are supplied already mounted and their component parts cannot be detached. /

Description (continued) platform Unity processors Description of TSX P7ppM processors with integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port TSX P7 6/26/28M double-format processors with integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port feature, on the front panel:. 2 6 7 8 A display block with indicator lamps: v RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution) v ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card) v I/O lamp (red): Fault occurring on another module in the station or configuration fault v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on TER or AUX terminal port 2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port featuring lamps: TSX P7 6/26/6M v RUN lamp (green): Ethernet port ready v ERR lamp (red): Ethernet port fault v COL lamp (red): Collision detection v STS lamp (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics v Two TX and RX lamps (yellow): Transmission/reception activity RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated An 8-way female mini-din connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal (RS 8) An 8-way female mini-din connector marked AUX for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal (RS 8) 6 A standard RJ connector for connection to the Ethernet TCP/IP 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX network 7 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory card 8 A PCMCIA slot (no.) for a communication card or memory extension card for storing additional data /6

Description (continued) platform Unity processors 2 TSX P7 /M 6 7 8 9 2 TSX P7 6/6M Description of TSX P7 p/pm high-performance processors Premium TSX P7 //6/6M double-format high-performance processors feature the following on the front panel: A display block with indicator lamps: b RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution) b ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card) b I/O lamp (red): Fault occurring on another module in the station or configuration fault b TER lamp (yellow): Activity on the AUX terminal port b FIP lamp (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus (on TSX P7 /M model). For the TSX P7 6/6M model (with integrated Ethernet port), this display block features 6 additional display lamps: v RUN lamp (green): Ethernet TCP/IP port ready v ERR lamp (red): Ethernet port fault v COL lamp (red): Collision detection v STS lamp (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics Two Tx and Rx lamps (yellow): Transmission/reception activity 2 A "Memory extract" button for extracting the PCMCIA memory extension card. The associated "Memory extract ready" display lamp indicates that this card can be extracted safely. RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated An 8-way female mini-din connector marked AUX for connecting a programming, adjustment or HMI terminal A USB type connector marked TER for connecting a programming terminal (requires the PC compatible connection cable reference UNY XCA USB 0, length. m, to be ordered separately) 6 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card 7 A PCMCIA slot (no.) for a communication card or memory extension card for storing additional data 8 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P7 /Mmodels) for Fipio bus communication (Fipio manager port) 9 An RJ type connector (on TSX P7 6/6M models) for connection to the Ethernet TCP/IP 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX network USB type terminal port The USB terminal port provides a useful data rate (2 Mbps) greater than that of the Uni-Telway terminal port available on Premium processors. The USB terminal port is compatible with Unity Pro programming software and OFS (OPC Factory Server) data server. TSX P7 p/pm processors can be connected to a USB bus comprising several peripheral devices. However: b Only one processor must be connected to the USB bus. b No device on the USB bus can be controlled by the PLC (modem, printer). /7

Memory structure platform Unity processors Processor without PCMCIA memory card Located data Unlocated data Memory structure The application memory is divided into memory areas physically distributed in the internal RAM memory and on 0, or 2 PCMCIA memory extension cards:. Internal RAM 96 to 08 Program, symbols and area for online program modification Constants Processor with PCMCIA memory card in slot no. 0 2 The application data area, which may be one of 2 possible types, is always in the internal RAM: b Located data corresponding to data defined by an address (e.g. %MW27) to which a symbol may be associated (e.g. Counting_rejects). b Unlocated data corresponding to data defined only by a symbol. This type of addressing removes the memory "mapping" managment constraints because addresses are assigned automatically. Internal RAM 96 to 896 Kb Located data Unlocated data 2 Area in internal RAM or PCMCIA memory card for the program and symbols. In the event of this area being in internal RAM, it also supports the area for modifying the program in online mode (). This area contains the program's executable binary code and IEC source code. The user selects the type of information to be stored in the PLC memory. Constants area in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 0) PCMCIA card (slot no. 0) 28 to 768 Kb Program and symbols Constants Storage of additional data 2 Storage area for additional data (slot no. 0 or no. ), e.g. for production data and manufacturing recipes Two memory structures are possible depending on whether the Premium processor is fitted with 0, or 2 memory extension cards: b Application in internal RAM. In this case, the application is entirely loaded in the processor s internal battery-backed RAM (2), the capacity of which depends on the processor model (96 to 60 Kb). Processor with data storage type memory card in slot no. 0 b Application in PCMCIA card. In this case, the internal RAM is reserved for the application data. The PCMCIA memory card (slot no. ) contains the program space (program, symbols and constants areas) (22 to 768 Kb). Certain types of PCMCIA memory card also host the data storage area (max. 6976 Kb). Internal RAM 96 to 60 Kb Located data Unlocated data Program, symbols and area for online program modification Constants 2 The presence of the symbols area with the program area is optional. Having the application symbols database on the PLC means that, when connected to a programming terminal not containing any applications, all the elements needed to debug or upgrade this PLC are available within the PLC. () If a PCMCIA card has been inserted, the memory used by program modification in online mode is located in this memory card (outside zones 2, and opposite). (2) The internal RAM memory is backed up by an optional battery ( years' battery life) located in the power supply module (see page 2/22). PCMCIA data storage card (slot no. 0) 096 or 892 Kb Storage of additional data /8

Memory structure (continued) platform Unity processors Processor with mixed type memory cards in slot no. 0 and data storage type memory cards in slot no. () Internal RAM PCMCIA card (slot no. 0) 96 to 896 Kb 28 to 768 Kb Located data Unlocated data Program and symbols Constants Additional data storage (zone A) 2 Memory structure (continued) Extension of the data storage area Memory cards reserved for data storage (096 or 892 Kb) are used to: b Access the data storage area when the application is entirely supported by the internal RAM. In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0. b Free up memory space to provide additional program space when the application is in the PCMCIA card (slot no. 0). In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted into PCMCIA slot no. (a part of it can be supported by the memory card in slot no. 0). Unity Pro programming software assists the application designer with the management of the structure and the occupation of memory space on the Premium PLC.. PCMCIA data storage card (slot no. ) 096 or 892 Kb Additional data storage (zone B) Protecting the application Regardless of the PLC memory structure (whether the application is located in the internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card), it is possible to protect this in order to prevent it being accessed (read or modify program) by only loading the executable code on the PLC. () TSX P7 20 processors and higher. A memory protection bit, set in configuration mode, is also available to prevent any program modification (via the programming terminal or downloads). Program modification in online mode This function is different from previous versions of Premium PLCs (with PL7 software) and now allows program code and data in different parts of the application to be added or modified in a single modification session (thus making modification unified and consistent with regard to the controlled process). This increased flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the program memory volume required. Any program modifications made in online mode require available program memory space at least equal in size to the combined size of all sections of the Unity Pro program affected by the same modification session. Depending on circumstances: b For a processor with memory extension card, the memory volume remaining available in the card for online modification is sufficient if the recommendations on page 2/22 are observed. b For a processor without memory extension card, users wishing to have the option of making modifications in online mode may select a processor according to: v The anticipated size of the application v The number and size of the program sections to be modified in online mode A memory extension card that only uses Flash Eprom technology (without additional SRAM) obviously cannot provide the function of program modification in online mode. /9

Characteristics platform Unity processors. Premium PLCs have been developed to comply with major national and international standards on electronic industrial automation equipment. See pages 9/6 to 9/ Standards, certification and environmental conditions. Characteristics and performance Type of processor Maximum configuration TSX P7 02M () TSX P7 0M TSX P7 6M TSX P7 M No. of racks /6/8 slots 6 2 slots 2 8 Max. no. of slots for modules 2 2 28 TSX P7 20M TSX P7 26M TSX P7 2M Functions Memories Max. no. in rack of () Integrated connections Maximum no. of connections Maximum capacity Maximum size of object zones Discrete I/O 92/26 (2) 2 02 Analog I/O 2 2 80 Process control 0(upto0simpleloops) channels Application-specific channels (counter, axis, weighing, and serial links) () 8 2 Ethernet TCP/IP Fipio manager (6 agents) Serial link link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 9.2 Kbps Network (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethway, Modbus Plus), none if integrated Ethernet is used (27 agents), none if integrated Ethernet is used AS-Interface bus 2 CANopen or Modbus integrated Modbus Plus bus CANopen Plus only INTERBUS or Profibus DP bus Without PCMCIA card Kb 96 prog. + data 60 prog. + data 92 prog. + data With PCMCIA card Kb 28 prog. 96 data 22 prog. 96 data 768 prog. 60 data 768 prog. 92 data Data storage Kb 26 6,8 (limited to 892 with current PCMCIA cards) Located internal bits bits 096 82 (% of internal memory) Located internal data Kb 6 for internal words %Mpi 6 for constant words %Kpi Unlocated internal Kb Unlimited (6) data Application structure Master task Fast task Auxiliary tasks Event tasks 2 ( of which has priority) 6 ( of which has priority) Execution time Without for PCMCIA card one instruction With PCMCIA card No. of Without Kinstructions PCMCIA card executed every ms With PCMCIA card System overhead Boolean µs 0.9 0.9 0.9 On word or fixed-point µs 0.2 0.2 0.2 arithmetic On floating points µs.7 2.60 (7).7 2.60 (7).7 2.60 (7) Boolean µs 0.2 0.2 0.2 On word or fixed-point µs 0.0 0.0 0.2 arithmetic On floating points µs.7 2.60.7 2.60 (7).7 2.60 (7) (7) 00% Boolean Kinst/.76.76.76 ms 6% Boolean and Kinst/.7.7.7 % fixed arithmetic ms 00% Boolean Kinst/ ms 6% Boolean and % fixed arithmetic Kinst/ ms.0.0.70 2.0 2.0 2. Master task ms.00.00.00 Fast task ms 0.0 0.0 0.0 () Identical characteristics for TSX P7 Cp02M configuration. (2) The first value is valid for a TSX P7 Cp 020M configuration, the second for a TSX P7 02M processor. () Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O, application-specific channels, and process control channels are cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, Fipio, Modbus Plus, etc.) or third-party bus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this maximum number. () Programmable loops using the CONT-CTL EFB control block library (in addition to configurable process control). () Serial links: Modbus, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links. /0

Characteristics (continued) platform Unity processors Premium PLCs have been developed to comply with major national and international standards on electronic industrial automation equipment. See pages 9/6 to 9/ Standards, certification and environmental conditions. Characteristics and performance (continued) Types of processor Maximum configuration Functions Memories TSX P7 0M TSX P7 6M TSX P7 M TSX P7 M TSX P7 6M No. of racks /6/8 slots 6 6 6 2 slots 8 8 8 Max. no. of slots for modules 28 28 28 Max. no. in rack of () Integrated connections Maximum no. of connections Maximum capacity Maximum size of object zones TSX P7 M Discrete I/O 02 208 208 Analog I/O 28 26 2 Process control channels Application-specific channels (counter, axis, weighing, and serial links) () (uptosimpleloops) 20 () (upto60simple loops) 2 6 6 TSX P7 6M 0 () (upto90simple loops) Ethernet TCP/IP Fipio manager (27 agents) (27 agents) Serial link link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 9.2 or Kbps x 2 Mbps USB link (TER), x 9.2 Kbps (AUX) link Network (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethway, Modbus Plus), 2if integrated Ethernet is used, if integrated Ethernet is used, if integrated Ethernet is used AS-Interface bus 8 8 8 CANopen or Modbus Plus bus INTERBUS or Profibus DP bus Without PCMCIA card Kb 92 prog. + data 208 prog. + 20 prog. + data 60 prog. + data data With PCMCIA card Kb 792 prog. 92 data 792 prog. 208 data 208 prog. 0 data Data storage Kb 6,8 (limited to 892 with current PCMCIA cards) 768 prog. 896 data Located internal bits bits 6,8 2,768 2,768 (% of internal memory) Located internal data Kb 6 for internal words %Mpi 6 for constant words %Kpi Unlocated internal Kb Unlimited (6) data 28 for int. words %Mpi 6 for const. words %Kpi Application structure Master task Fast task Auxiliary tasks Event tasks 6 ( of which has priority) 6 ( of which has priority) 28(ofwhichhas priority) 2 (timers) Execution time Without for PCMCIA card one instruction With PCMCIA card Typical Without program code PCMCIA card execution time for Kinstruction With PCMCIA card System overhead Boolean µs 0.2 0.09 0.07 (7) 0.07...0.0 (7) On word or fixed-point µs 0.7 0.0 0.07 (7) 0.0...0.060 (7) arithmetic On floating points µs.7...00 (7) 0. 0.6 (7) 0.8...0.6 (7) Boolean µs 0.7 0.08 0.07 (7) 0.07...0.0 (7) On word or fixed-point µs 0.2 0.0 0.07 (7) 0.0...0.060 (7) arithmetic On floating points µs.7...00 (7) 0. 0.6 (7) 0.8...0.6 (7) 00% Boolean Kinst/ 6.72.7 20.26 ms 6% Boolean and Kinst/..0.00 % fixed arithmetic ms 00% Boolean Kinst/ ms 6% Boolean and % fixed arithmetic Kinst/ ms.9.7 20.26..0.00 Master task ms.00.00.00 Fast task ms 0. 0.08 0.07. (6) Within the processor's data memory capacity limit. (7) Threshold values limited according to the type of instruction. /

References platform Unity processors. TSX P7 26/6M Ready-assembled TSX P7 02 processor configurations with integrated CANopen port These configurations, which are supplied already mounted, feature: b A non-extendable 6-slot TSX RKY6 rack b A TSX PSY 60/2600M DC or AC power supply b A TSX P7 C02M processor with a TSX CPP 0 CANopen bus kit b A TSX CTY 2A 2-channel 0 khz counter module I/O capacity () Capacity No. of bus/network Memory modules 92 discrete I/O 2 analog I/O channels application-specific channels () TSX 7 processors 96 Kb integrated 28KbonPCMCIA integrated CANopen bus network AS-Interface bus I/O capacity (2) Capacity Maximum number of Memory bus/network modules TSX 7 0p rack 26 discrete I/O 2 analog I/O application-specific channels 96 Kb integrated 28Kbon PCMCIA Process control channels 0 network AS-Interface bus Power supply V Reference (2) Weight kg c 2 TSX P7 CD 02M 2.90 a 00 20 TSX P7 CA 02M 2.900 Integrated port Reference () Weight kg CANopen TSX P7 02M 0.20 TSX P7 M TSX 7 p racks () 2 discrete I/O 2 analog I/O 8 application-specific channels 96 Kb integrated Max.22Kbon PCMCIA 0 network 2 AS-Interface buses CANopen bus TSX P7 0M 0.80 2 AS-Interface buses CANopen bus Ethernet TCP/IP TSX P7 6M network 2 AS-Interface buses Fipio TSX P7 M 0.20 TSX P7 20/0M TSX P7 26/6M TSX P7 /2/M TSX 7 2p 6 racks () 02 discrete I/O 80 analog I/O 2 application-specific channels TSX 7 p 6 racks () 02 discrete I/O 28 analog I/O 2 application-specific channels 60 Kb integrated Max.768Kbon PCMCIA 0 network AS-Interface buses CANopen bus () fieldbus () TSX P7 20M 0.20 AS-Interface buses CANopen bus () fieldbus () 92 Kb integrated Max.768Kbon PCMCIA 0 network AS-Interface buses CANopen bus () fieldbus () 92 Kb integrated Max. 792 Kb on PCMCIA 208 Kb integrated Max. 792 Kb on PCMCIA Ethernet TCP/IP TSX P7 26M Fipio TSX P7 2M networks TSX P7 0M 0.20 8 AS-Interface buses CANopen bus () fieldbuses () 2 networks Ethernet TSX P7 6M 8 AS-Interface buses TCP/IP CANopen bus () fieldbuses () networks Fipio TSX P7 M 0.60 8 AS-Interface buses CANopen bus () fieldbuses () () 2 of these channels are used by the TSX CTY 2A 2-channel 0 khz counter module integrated into the configuration. (2) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the different buses is not taken into account. () Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide: English, French, German, Spanish, and Italian. () Maximum number of TSX RKY EX/6EX/8EX racks (, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 2 EX rack with 2 slots is the same as using 2 racks with, 6 or 8 slots. () Fieldbus: INTERBUS or Profibus DP. /2

References (continued) platform Unity processors TSX 7 processor (continued) I/O capacity () Capacity Maximumnumberof Memory bus/network modules TSX 7-p 6 racks () 208 discrete I/O 26 analog I/O 6 application-specific channels 20/0 Kb integrated () Max. 208 Kb on PCMCIA Process control channels Integrated port 20 networks Ethernet 8 AS-Interface buses TCP/IP CANopenbus() fieldbuses () Reference (2) Weight kg TSX P7 6M. TSX P7 /M networks 8 AS-Interface buses CANopenbus() fieldbuses () Fipio TSX P7 M 0.60 TSX 7-p 6 racks () 208 discrete I/O 2 analog I/O 6 application-specific channels 60/896 Kb integrated () Max. 768 Kb on PCMCIA 0 networks 8 AS-Interface buses CANopenbus() fieldbuses () Ethernet TCP/IP TSX P7 6M networks 8 AS-Interface buses CANopenbus() fieldbuses () Fipio TSX P7 M 0.60 TSX P7 6/6M PCMCIA memory extension cards Premium processors can support up to 2 memory extension cards. However, useful memory capacity is limited to the maximum size defined for the processor model. See pages /22 and /2. Connection cables for PC programming terminal Description Use from to Universal cable for terminal port/rs 22 port Micro/Premium/Atrium mini-din port or TSX P ACC 0 unit (TER or AUX) RS 22D port on a PC terminal (9-way SUB-D) Length Reference Weight kg 2. m TSX PCX 0 0.70 TSX PCX 0 Cable for terminal port/usb port Micro/Premium/Atrium mini-din port (TER or AUX) USBportonaPC terminal 2. m TSX PCX 00 USB cable for terminal port/pc USB port Premium TSX 7 p/p Quantum 0 CPU 6p USBportonaPC terminal. m UNY XCA USB 0 () Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not counted. (2) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide. () Maximum number of TSX RKY EX/6EX/8EX racks (, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 2 EX rack with 2 slots is the same as using 2 racks with, 6 or 8 slots. () The second value corresponds to the capacity of the integrated RAM when the application program is supported by the PCMCIA card. () Fieldbus: INTERBUS or Profibus DP. /

Presentation platform Atrium slot PLCs Unity. TSX PCI 7 ppm Presentation Atrium TSX PCI 7 ppm slot PLCs are PC format cards (PCI 2-bit/2 MHz bus) to be integrated into a PC running under Windows 2000 or Windows XP. This combination of PLC and PC optimizes performance in applications requiring, for example, a higher level of communication, control or supervision functions. The slot PLC manages the entire PLC station, which comprises the same I/O modules as Premium processors (discrete, analog, application-specific and communication): b Locally, in one or more racks connected to Bus X on the Atrium slot PLC b Using remote I/O via the same fieldbuses Two types of Atrium slot PLC are available. They can both accommodate: b A maximum of 6 extendable TSX RKY ppex racks b A CANopen master bus function in their external PCMCIA slot Both have: b An internal PCMCIA slot (no. 0) to accommodate all types of memory extension card: program and symbols only, or mixed (program, symbols and data storage) b An external PCMCIA slot (no. ) to accommodate the network card (Fipway, Modbus Plus) or bus (CANopen, Modbus, Uni-Telway, Fipio Agent and serial link) This slot can also accommodate the or 8 MB SRAM memory extension card used to store additional data (see page /22). Their distinguishing characteristics are: b The short application program execution time b The program memory and data memory capacity b 80 or 28 "in-rack" analog I/O b 2 or 2 application-specific channels: Each application-specific module (counter, motion control, serial link, or weighing) accounts for or a number of application-specific channels. b or networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus, Ethway types), Ethernet TCP/IP network, or 8 AS-Interface buses V2., CANopen bus and or third-party fieldbuses (INTERBUS, Profibus DP) b 0 or process control channels Integrated communication Six means of integrated communication (communication that does not require the external rack to be connected on the slot PLC Bus X) are possible: b CANopen master, via a PCMCIA card that is inserted into the external slot on the slot PLC b Fipio manager, via a 9-way SUB-D type connector on the faceplate of the TSX PCI 7 M slot PLC b Ethernet TCP/IP, via the TCP/X-Way Windows-compatible gateway software, which communicates with the slot PLC via the PCI bus on the host PC (this software is either connected to an Ethernet port in the host PC, integrated into the motherboard or supplied on a PC format card) b INTERBUS master generation, via an additional PC format card, occupying an ISA bus slot and connected to the slot PLC via a ribbon cable that includes Bus X b Modbus Plus or Fipway, via a PCMCIA card that is inserted into the external slot on the slot PLC b Communication via a terminal port (TER) using Uni-Telway or character mode protocol, 9.2 or Kbps (typically a programming terminal or an HMI terminal) /

Presentation (continued) platform Atrium slot PLCs Unity Presentation (continued) TSX PSI 200 standalone power supply In order to enable standalone operation in the event of a PC power outage, a standalone c 2 V TSX PSI 200 power supply can be connected to a PCI or ISA bus slot to ensure continuity of service for the automation part of the system (only functions managed by the PC are disabled). Design and installation of Atrium applications. Installation of these new Atrium slot PLCs requires: b Unity Pro Medium, Large or Extra Large programming software. This is the same as the software used on the Quantum platform. b Optionally, depending on requirements: v The Unity Studio software suite used to design distributed applications v Unity Application Generator (UAG) specialist software for modeling and generating process applications v Unity EFB toolkit software for developing EF and EFB function block libraries in C language v Unity SFC View software for displaying and diagnosing applications written in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language The Atrium slot PLC is not supplied with any Windows driver or application type software programs. These are supplied with the Unity Pro, Unity Studio, Monitor Pro, Vijeo Look, OFS (OPC Factory Server), etc. software. They enable connection to the slot PLC via: b Uni-Telway and the TER port on the front panel b PCIway and the PC host's PCI bus b Ethernet TCP/IP (XIP) Typical architecture Ethernet TCP/IP Altivar Momentum Magelis IPC fitted with, for example: -AtriumTSXPCIslotPLC - Vijeo Look and Unity Pro software - TCP/X-Way gateway software - c 2 V standalone power supply Premium I/O extension racks Ethernet TCP/IP, CANopen, Fipio, Modbus Plus, INTERBUS By integrating an Atrium slot PLC card, the architecture shown opposite can be created using any compatible PC (equipped with PCI bus slots) and Magelis IPC industrial PC stations. This solution can provide a PLC architecture in which the I/O are: b Remotely located close to the machine or process via the fieldbus (): v Ethernet TCP/IP via the TLX CD GTW 0M gateway software v CANopen with TSX CPP 0 PCMCIA card v Fipio with the integrated port on the TSX PCI 7 M slot PLC v Modbus Plus with TSX MBP 00 PCMCIA card v INTERBUS with PC format slot PLC card, TSX IBX 00 ISA bus (link to TSX PCI 7 ppm slot PLC via ribbon cable) b And/or centralized in TSX RKY ppex extendable racks. TSX RKY ppex extendable racks connected on Bus X permit the use of application-specific modules and the setting up of AS-Interface bus segments. For example: v TCP/IP TSX ETY 0 or TSX ETY 0 Ethernet TCP/IP module (with Web server, FactoryCast server or TSX WMY 00 module (FactoryCast HMI server)) v INTERBUS TSX IBY 00 or Profibus DP TSX PBY 00 master module v TSX SAY 000 AS-Interface V2. master module v TSX CAY, TSX CFY or TSX CSY 8 (SERCOS) motion control modules () Corresponding to an integrated module solution on the host PC, without having to use modules on extension racks on Bus X. /

Description platform Atrium slot PLCs Unity. TSX PCI 7 ppm 2 6 Description Description of slot PLCs TSX PCI 7 ppm slot PLCs mechanically occupy two consecutive slots on the PCI bus, but only use one electrically (). They feature: b On the faceplate: A PCMCIA slot (no.) for a communication card or memory extension card for storing additional data 2 A 9-way female SUB-D connector for connecting Bus X to the first rack supporting the I/O modules and application-specific modules An 8-way female mini-din connector marked TER for connecting a programming terminal A RESET button causing a cold restart of the slot PLC when it is activated An ERR lamp (red); fault on the slot PLC or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory or communication cards) 6 A 9-pin male SUB-D connector (on TSX PCI 7 M model) for Fipio bus manager communication. b On the components side of the card: v or LEDs indicating the operating status (RUN, TER, BAT, I/O and FIP on the TSX PCI 7 M) v A slot for a backup battery for the slot PLC internal RAM memory v A slot (no. 0) for a PCMCIA format memory extension card v A Bus X line terminator circuit (type A) v A PCI bus connector for connection to the host PC Supplied with the slot PLC: Bus X line terminator (type B) to be installed at the end of the last of the I/O and application-specific module support racks. Description of the additional TSX PCI ACC remote Bus X faceplate 7 An additional faceplate, TSX PCI ACC, fitted with a 9-way male SUB-D connector, enabling the slot PLC Atrium to be located in the middle of its extension racks rather than at one end of them. TSX PCI ACC 7 Description of the c 2 V TSX PSI 200 power supply The c 2 V TSX PSI 200 power supply is inserted into a PCI bus slot located next to the TSX PCI 7 ppm slot PLC. It occupies one slot mechanically but no slots electrically. It can provide the power supply for one slot PLC. It features the following on the front panel: 8 9 8 A 9-way female SUB-D connector enabling a second remote Bus X to be connected (instead of using the TSX PCI ACC faceplate) 9 A -way female SUB-D connector for connection to the c 2 V power supply (male connector supplied) This power supply includes two ribbon cables for connection to the slot PLC, one for the power supply to the slot PLC and the other to ensure Bus X continuity. TSX PSI 200 () Atrium slot PLCs can also operate using just one PC slot: For this purpose, carefully unscrew and remove the external PCMCIA slot. /6

Gateway, setup platform Atrium slot PLCs Unity PC 2 SCADA OFS server Ethernet TCP/IP Uni-TE Premium Modbus TCP/X-Way gateway The TCP/X-Way software gateway performs 2 main functions for Atrium slot PLCs: b Communication using the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP protocol via the Ethernet TCP/IP card integrated in the PC b Data exchange in both directions with remote stations via the telephone modem in the PC This software interfaces with the Atrium slot PLC PCIway driver and automatically routes messages. The most common configurations are: v Via Ethernet network (diagram opposite). Access is made secure by checking incoming IP addresses, in a similar way to the Premium PLC Ethernet TSX ETY 0 module. The Global Data and I/O Scanning services are not supported. v Via modem link. Incoming calls are checked via the standard Windows password checking mechanisms. In addition to remote access with Unity Pro, the TCP/IP gateway enables communication with other stations that can be connected to a local Ethernet network (RAS (Remote Access Server) function).. Quantum Atrium slot PLC 2 Ethernet TCP/IP card or integrated port TCP/X-Way software gateway Setup Integration into the host PC To receive a TSX PCI 7 ppm Atrium slot PLC, the host PC must: b Run under Windows 2000 or Windows XP b Have a -bit MHz (c or. V) PCI bus b Have two consecutive slots available on the PCI bus (of which at least one must be a PCI type slot) The maximum number of slot PLCs per PC depends on the number of available PCI/ISA slots, the PC power supply rating (when the TSX PSI 200 power supply option is not used) and whether or not PCMCIA cards have been inserted into the slot PLC. The slot PLC is completely independent of the application running on the PC, in particular: b The standard PC command "Restart" () has no effect on the slot PLC operating modes (2). b Switching the PC off and then on again causes a warm restart of the application being managed by the slot PLC (restart without loss of application context). b The c 2 V standalone power supply allows the slot PLC to operate even in the event of a PC power supply outage. The host PC, equipped with Unity Pro software, can be used as a programming and setup terminal for the TSX PCI 7 Atrium slot PLC. Magelis IPC or PC with Atrium slot PLC Logical location on Bus X The Atrium TSX PCI 7 slot PLC logically occupies the same 2 slots as a Premium TSX P7 processor of the same type. The 2 slots in the TSX RKY rack with address 0 next to the TSX PSY power supply module must therefore remain unoccupied, see page /27. Premium extension Bus X Bus X Premium extension The TSX PCI ACC faceplate or TSX PSI 200 c 2 V power supply enables a second Bus X to be connected from Magelis IPC industrial PCs, thus forming a Y structure (see the diagram opposite, where the maximum length of each Bus X segment is 00 m). If they are not used, only one Bus X may be connected. Premium extension () "Ctrl-Alt-Del" command, followed by "Restart" or pressing the "Reset" button on the PC (if there is one). (2) Causes the loss of the PCI bus connection. /7

Memory structure platform Atrium slot PLCs Unity. Slot PLC without PCMCIA memory card Internal RAM 60 to 208 Kb Located data Unlocated data Program, symbols and area for online program modification Constants Slot PLC with PCMCIA memory card in slot no. 0 2 Memory structure The application memory is divided into memory areas physically distributed in the internal RAM memory and on 0, or 2 PCMCIA memory extension cards: The application data area, which may be one of 2 possible types, is always in the internal RAM: v Located data corresponding to data defined by an address (e.g. %MW27) to which a symbol may be associated (e.g. Counting_rejects). v Global unlocated data corresponding to data defined only by a symbol. This type of addressing removes memory "mapping" management constraints, as address are assigned automatically, and enables data to be structured. v DFB unlocated data, corresponding to data from DFB user function blocks. The size of this object zone is only limited by the size of the physical internal RAM memory available. 2 Area in internal RAM or PCMCIA memory card for the program and symbols. In the event of this area being in internal RAM, it also supports the area for modifying the program in online mode (). This area contains the program's executable binary code and IEC source code. The user selects the type of information to be stored in the PLC memory. Located data Constants area in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 0) Internal RAM 60 or 208 Kb Global unlocated data DFB unlocated data Storage area for additional data (slot no. 0 or no. ), e.g. for production data and manufacturing recipes Two memory structures are possible depending on whether the Atrium slot PLC is fitted with 0, or 2 memory extension cards: Program and symbols 2 b Application in internal RAM. In this case, the application is entirely loaded in the processor s internal battery-backed RAM (2), the capacity of which depends on the processor model (60 or 208 Kb). PCMCIA card slot no. 0 28 to 768 Kb Constants b Application in PCMCIA card. In this case, the internal RAM is reserved for application data. The PCMCIA memory card (slot no. ) contains the program space (program, symbols and constants areas) (max. 768 or 792 Kb). Certain types of PCMCIA memory card host the data storage area (max. 6976 Kb). Storage of additional data The presence of the symbols area with the program area is optional. Having the application symbols database on the PLC means that, when connected to a programming terminal not containing any applications, all the elements needed to debug or upgrade this PLC are available within the PLC. () If a PCMCIA card has been inserted, the memory used by program modification in online mode is located in this memory card (outside zones 2, and opposite). (2) The internal RAM memory is backed up by an optional battery ( years' battery life) located in the power supply module (see page 2/22). /8

Memory structure (continued) platform Atrium slot PLCs Unity Slot PLC with data storage memory card in slot no. 0 Internal RAM PCMCIA data storage card (slot no. 0) 60 or 208 Kb 096 or 208 Kb Located data Global and DFB unlocated data Program, symbols and area for online program 2 modification Constants Storage of additional data Memory structure (continued) Extension of the data storage area Memory cards reserved for data storage (096 or 892 Kb) are used to: b Access the data storage area when the application is entirely supported by the internal RAM. In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0. b Free up memory space to provide additional program space when the application is in the PCMCIA card (slot no. 0). In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted into PCMCIA slot no. (a part of it can be supported by the memory card in the slot). Unity Pro programming software assists the application designer with the management of the structure and the occupation of memory space on the Premium PLC.. Slot PLC with mixed type memory cards in slot no. 0 and data storage type memory cards in slot no. Internal RAM 60 or 208 Kb Located data Global unlocated data Unlocated DFB data Protecting the application Regardless of the PLC memory structure (whether the application is located in the internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card), it is possible to protect this in order to prevent it being accessed (read or modify program) by only loading the executable code on the PLC. A memory protection bit, set in configuration mode, is also available to prevent any program modification (via the programming terminal or downloads). PCMCIA card (slot no. 0) 28 to 768 Kb Program and symbols Constants 2 Program modification in online mode This function is different from previous versions of Premium PLCs (with PL7 software) and now allows program code and data in different parts of the application to be added or modified in a single modification session (thus making modification unified and consistent with regard to the controlled process). PCMCIA data storage card (slot no. ) 096 or 892 Kb Additional data storage (zone A) Additional data storage (zone B) This increased flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the program memory volume required. Any program modifications made in online mode require available program memory space at least equal in size to the combined size of all sections of the Unity Pro program affected by the same modification session. Depending on circumstances: b For a processor with memory extension card, the memory volume remaining available in the card for online modification is sufficient if the recommendations on page /22 are observed. b For a processor without memory extension card, users wishing to have the option of making modifications in online mode may select a processor according to: v The anticipated size of the application v The number and size of the program sections to be modified in online mode A memory extension card that only uses Flash Eprom technology (without additional SRAM) cannot provide the function of program modification in online mode. /9

Characteristics platform Atrium slot PLCs Unity. Characteristics and performance Type of processor TSX PCI P7 20M TSX PCI P7 M Maximum No.ofracks/6/8slots 6 configuration 2 slots 8 Max. no. of slots for modules 28 Functions Max. no. "in Discrete I/O 02 rack" of () Analog I/O 80 28 Process control channels 0(upto0simpleloops) (up to 60 simple loops) Application-specific channels 2 2 (counter, axis, weighing, and serial links) (2) Integrated connections Ethernet TCP/IP (uses the Ethernet TCP/IP port integrated in the host PC via the TLX CD GTW 0M gateway software) Fipio manager (27 agents) Memories Maximum no. of connections Maximum capacity Maximum size of object zones Serial link Network (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus, Ethway) linkwith2connectors(terandaux) 9.2 Kbps 2 (including Ethernet TCP/IP integrated into PC) link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX), 9.2 or Kbps (including Ethernet TCP/IP integrated into PC) AS-Interface bus 8 CANopen or Modbus Plus bus INTERBUS or Profibus DP bus, none if CANopen is used, 2 if CANopen is used Without PCMCIA card Kb 60 program and data 208 program and data With PCMCIA card Kb 768 program 60 data 792 program 208 data Data storage Kb 6,8 (limited to 892 with current PCMCIA cards) Located internal bits (% of bps 82 6 8 internal memory) Located internal data Kb 6 for internal words %MpWi, 6 for constant words %KpWi Global unlocated internal data Kb Unlimited, within the limits of the memory capacity of the slot PLC Application structure Master task Fast task Auxiliary tasks Event tasks 6 ( of which has priority) Execution time for one instruction Without PCMCIA card With PCMCIA card Typical program code execution time for Kinstruction System overhead Boolean µs 0.9 0.2 On word or fixed-point µs 0.2 0.7 arithmetic On floating points µs.7...2.60 () Boolean µs 0.2 0.7 On word or fixed-point µs 0.2 0.2 arithmetic On floating points µs.7...2.60 () 00% Boolean Kinst/ ms 6% Boolean and % fixed arithmetic Kinst/ ms.76 without PCMCIA card,.70 with PCMCIA card.7 without PCMCIA card, 2. with PCMCIA card MAST task ms.00.00 FAST task ms 0.0 0.2 6.72 without PCMCIA card.9 with PCMCIA card. without PCMCIA card.2 with PCMCIA card () Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and application-specific channels are cumulative. TheremoteI/O on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface/Uni-Telway/Fipio/Modbus Plus, etc.) or third-party bus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this maximum number. (2) Serial links: Modbus, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links. () Threshold values according to the type of instruction. Standalone power supply characteristics Type of power supply module TSX PSI 200 Primary Voltage Nominal V c 2 Limits (including ripple) V c 9.2 0(possibleupto6V) Current Nominal input value rms A y. at c 2 V Initial power-up at 2 C inrush A 00 at c 2 V I 2 t on triggering A 2 It on triggering As 0.0 Power line disturbance period ms y 7at2V,y at9.2v Built-in protection Via a 2 A time-delay fuse (complying with standards) Conformity to standards IEC -2 Insulation Dielectric strength Insulation resistance Primary/secondary and primary/earth Primary/secondary and primary/earth Vrms MΩ Non-isolated, internal 0 V connected to PC ground /20

References platform Atrium slot PLCs Unity TSX PCI 7 20M TSX PCI 7 M TSX PCI 7 slot PLCs I/O capacity () Capacities Maximum number Reference Memory Process control channels of bus/network modules (2) TSX PCI 7 20 6 racks () 02 discrete I/O 80 analog I/O 2 application-specific channels 60Kbintegrated Max.768Kbon PCMCIA TSX PCI 7 6 racks () 02 discrete I/O 208Kbintegrated 28 analog I/O Max. 792 Kb on 2 application-specific PCMCIA channels Software options () 0 network all types Ethernet TCP/IP network AS-Interface buses CANopen bus () fieldbus () Weight kg TSX PCI 7 20M 0.0 integrated Fipio networksalltypes Ethernet TCP/IP network 8 AS-Interface buses CANopen bus () third-party buses () TSX PCI 7 M 0.0 When connected to an Atrium slot PLC, the TCP/X-Way gateway software offer (supplied on CD-ROM) enables communication under the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP protocol using the Ethernet TCP/IP port integrated into the host PC.. PCMCIA memory extension cards Atrium slot PLCs can support up to 2 memory extension cards. However, useful memory capacity is limited to the maximum size defined for the slot PLC model. See pages /22 and /2. Description Use Site license Reference Weight kg TCP/X-Way gateway software Compatible with Windows 2000 or XP Single-station TLX CD GTW 0M 0 stations TLX CD0 GTW 0M 200 stations TLX CDUNT GTW 0M TSX PCI ACC Separate parts Description Use Sold in lots of Reference Weight kg Faceplate for remote Bus X Enables a second remote Bus X connection (9-way SUB-D connector) TSX PCI ACC c 2 V standalone power supply Enables the TSX PCI slot PLC to operate in TSX PSI 200 the event of a PC power supply outage Enables a second remote Bus X connection Batteries Internal RAM memory backup TSX PLP 0 0.00 0 TSX PLP 0 0.00 TSX PSI 200 () Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not counted. (2) Product supplied with multilingual installation guide: English, French, German, and Spanish. Supplied without software drivers. () Maximum number of TSX RKY EX/6EX/8EX racks (, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 2 EX rack with 2 slots is the same as using 2 racks with, 6 or 8 slots. () Fieldbus: INTERBUS or Profibus DP. () Other software compatible with Atrium slot PLCs: OFS data server software, Vijeo Look/Monitor Pro, supervisory software, see our catalog. /2

Presentation platform PCMCIA memory extension cards Unity. Presentation PCMCIA memory extension cards are used to extend the internal RAM capacity of Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs. Some of the cards can also be used on Quantum and Micro processors. Depending on the model, these cards can host: b Application program, symbols and constants b Additional application data b Or both PCMCIA memory extension cards All the cards are inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0 on Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs, i.e.: b The upper slot on processors b The internal slot on slot PLCs Two of these SRAM data storage memory cards can also be inserted into slot no., i.e.: b The lower slot on processors b The external slot on slot PLCs These cards support three types of data storage: b Application storage: Program, symbols and constants in a common space (28 Kb to 768 Kb, depending on the card model): v TSX MRP PpppK for SRAM memories v TSX MFP PpppK/M for Flash EPROM memories b Storage of the application and additional data, with 92 Kb to 7 Mb of application space and 7 Mb to 0 Kb of data storage space for additional data. The limit between these 2 spaces is configurable. The configurable cards are: v TSX MRP CpppK/M for SRAM memories v TSX MCP CpppK/M for Flash EPROM and SRAM memories b Storage of additional data, provided by Mb or 8 Mb TSX MRP F00pM SRAM memory cards These cards use 2 technologies: b Battery-backed SRAM Used in particular in the creation and debugging phases for the application program. These cards support: v All of the application's transfer and modification services in online mode v Additional data storage The memory is backed up by a removable battery integrated into the PCMCIA card. A second auxiliary battery is present to enable the main battery to be replaced without loss of data. b Flash EPROM Used once debugging of the application program is complete. It enables: v Backup battery life restrictions to be overcome v A global application transfer to be performed If it is used, the application cannot be modified in online mode. Program modification in online mode Only extension cards on which the program is stored in SRAM memory (TSX MRP PpppK/M. and TSX MRP CpppK/M) support online program modification. Users of processors fitted with memory extension cards who wish to modify or add program data in online mode must follow the two recommendations below: b Structure the application program in a number of sections of a reasonable size b Where possible, select one of the two extension cards recommended in the table below: Premium processors Atrium slot PLCs Cards recommended for program modification in online mode TSX P7 Cp TSX P7 0p All TSX MRP PpppK and TSX MRP CpppK/M/7 TSX P7 p TSX MRP P22K/P8K,all TSX MRP CpppK/M/7 TSX P7 2p TSX PCI 7 2p All TSX MRP CpppK/M/7 TSX P7 p TSX PCI 7 p TSX P7 p TSX MRP C002M, TSX MRP C00M, TSX MRP C007M TSX P7 p /22

References platform PCMCIA memory extension cards Unity Reminder of the memory characteristics of processors and slot PLCs Memory capacities without PCMCIA extension card (data, program, symbols, and constants in internal RAM memory): Premium processors Atrium slot PLCs TSX P7 Cp 02/ 02M TSX P7 0/M/ 6M TSX 7 20/ 26M TSX PCI 7 20M TSX P7 2 TSX P7 0/ 6M TSX P7 M TSX PCI 7 M TSX P7 / 6M TSX P7 / 6M In internal RAM 96 Kb 96 Kb 60 Kb 60 Kb 92 Kb 92 Kb 208 Kb 208 Kb 20 Kb 60 Kb Memory capacities with PCMCIA extension card(s) (data in internal RAM memory; program, symbols, constants, and data storage on PCMCIA card): Premium processors Atrium slot PLCs TSX P7 02M TSX P7 0/M/ 6M TSX 7 20/ 26M TSX PCI 7 20M TSX P7 2 TSX P7 0/ 6M TSX P7 M TSX PCI 7 M TSX P7 / 6M TSX P7 / 6M Data in internal RAM 96 Kb 96 Kb 60 Kb 60 Kb 92 Kb 92 Kb 208 Kb 208 Kb 0 Kb 896 Kb PCMCIA extension (program, symbols 28 Kb 22 Kb 768 Kb 768 Kb 768 Kb 792 Kb 792 Kb 792 Kb 208 Kb 768 Kb and constants) Data storage on PCMCIA () 26 Kb 6,8 Kb, limited to 892 Kb if the TSX MRP F008M PCMCIA card is used References Premium TSX P7 Cp/0p/p/2p/p/p/p processors and Atrium TSX PCI 7 2p/p slot PLCs support the memory extension cards listed below. There are two types of memory limit: b One associated with the type of processor or slot PLC (see above) b One associated with the model of PCMCIA memory card selected The lowest of these two limits defines the memory capacity available to the user for his/her application. PCMCIA memory extensions Use on processor Slot Memory size Reference Weight Application Data storage kg SRAM application memory extensions TSX 7 Cp Slot 0 28 Kb TSX MRP P28K TSX 7 0p 7 p 22 Kb TSX MRP P22K TSX PCI 7 2p/p 8 Kb TSX MRP P8K Configurable SRAM application/file memory extensions TSX 7 Cp Slot 0 96 8 Kb 2 0 Kb TSX MRP C8K TSX 7 0p 7 p TSX PCI 7 2p/p TSX 7 Cp Slot 0 92 768 Kb 76 0 Kb TSX MRP C768K TSX 7 0p 7 p 92 02 Kb 82 0 Kb TSX MRP C00M TSX PCI 7 2p/p 92 792 Kb 600 0 Kb TSX MRP C0M7 92 208 Kb 86 0 Kb TSX MRP C002M 92 072 Kb 2880 0 Kb TSX MRP C00M 92 768 Kb 6976 0 Kb TSX MRP C007M Flash EPROM application memory extensions r Duetobelaunchedin November 200 TSX 7 Cp TSX 7 0p 7 p TSX PCI 7 2p/p TSX 7 Cp TSX 7 0p 7 p TSX PCI 7 2p/p Slot 0 28 Kb TSX MFP P28K 22 Kb TSX MFP P22K 8 Kb TSX MFP P8K Slot 0 2 Kb TSX MFP P2K 02 Kb TSX MFP P00Mr TSX 7 2p 7 p, Slot 0 208 Kb TSX MFP P002Mr TSX PCI 7 2p/p 096 Kb TSX MFP P00Mr Flash EPROM and SRAM application/file memory extensions TSX 7 0p 7 p, TSX PCI 7 2p/p Slot 0 22 Kb 26 Kb TSX MCP C22Kr TSX 7 Cp TSX 7 0p 7 p, TSX PCI 7 2p/p SRAM file memory extensions TSX 7 2p 7 p TSX PCI 7 2p/p Slot 0 2 Kb 2 Kb TSX MCP C2Kr 208 Kb 02 Kb TSX MCP C002Mr Slot 0 or (2) 096 Kb TSX MRP F00Mr 892 Kb TSX MRP F008M Flash EPROM backup card () TSX 7 Cp Slot 0 96 Kb TSX MFP B096K TSX 7 0p/p Replacement parts Description Use Type Reference Weight kg Backup batteries PCMCIA SRAM memory card Main TSX BAT M02 0.00 Auxiliary TSX BAT M0 Handle PCMCIA memory card TSX P CAP 0.00 () Intended for the storage of manufacturing recipes and production data. Capacity depending on PCMCIA card model. (2) Memory extension card for file storage to be inserted into slot no. 0 if free, otherwise into slot no.. In the latter case, an application memory type or application memory and file storage type memory extension card is inserted into slot no. 0. () This card is pre-loaded and can be used to update the application program on a Premium PLC without having to use a programming terminal (the entire program must be located in the internal RAM).. /2

Selection guide platform Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs PL7 Premium/Atrium platforms for PL7 software offer TSX 7 p processors TSX 7 2p processors and T PCX 7 2p slot PLC.2 Number of racks (according to rack type) /6/8 slots 6 2 slots 2 8 "In-rack" I/O () Discrete I/O 2 channels (modules with 8, 6, 2 or 6 channels) Analog I/O 2 channels (modules with, 8 or 6 channels) "In-rack" application-specific channels 02 channels (modules with 8, 6, 2 or 6 channels) 80 channels (modules with, 8 or 6 channels) Integrated process control Configurable loops (0 channels with max. loops) Max. no. of channels 8 2 Counter Modules with 2/ counter channels max. MHz, single-channel electronic cam module Motion (2) Modules with /2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2// axes for analog control servomotors, modules with 8/6 axes with SERCOS digital link Weighing Modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels) Serial links "In-rack" communication modules ( application-specific channel) Serial link connections Modbus RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () master/slave PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 8 master/slave modules Uni-Telway integrated RS 8 master/slave channel, RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () master/slave PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 8 master/slave modules Character mode integrated RS 8 channel, RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 8 modules Jnet PCMCIA modules (), max. Bus connections AS-Interface actuator/sensor bus 2 "in-rack" modules "in-rack" modules master V2 CANopen machine bus master V.02 PCMCIA module () () INTERBUS fieldbus master V2 () "in-rack" module or Profibus DP fieldbus master V0 class and 2 () Network connections Max.no.ofnetworks Global Data, I/O Scanning (+ software gateway with Atrium slot PLC) Ethernet TCP/IP Multiprotocol "in-rack" modules (Modbus, Uni-TE, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast service and Factory Cast HMI services Communication modules Fipway () () and Modbus Plus () PCMCIA modules, "in-rack" Ethway modules Memory capacity Without PCMCIA extension 2 K words program and data 8/6 K words program and data (6) With PCMCIA extension 2 K words data 6 K words program 8/6 K words data (6) 60 K words program Data storage 28 K words 60 K words + 208 K words Symbol storage 28 K words Power supply Type of processor and slot PLC a 00 20 V, c 2 V non-isolated and c 2 8 V isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each rack. Standard TSX P7 0M TSX P7 20M Q Integrated Ethernet TSX P7 262M Q (8) Integrated Fipio TSX P7 M (7) TSX P7 2M Q Integrated Ethernet and Fipio TSX P7 282M (8) Atrium slot PLC Standard T PCX 7 20M Integrated Fipio Pages / () The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and process control channels are cumulative. () axis = application-specific channel, except for SERCOS modules where, depending on the configuration, the module = 2 2 channels. (6) Insert the module into the lower PCMCIA slot on the processor (no. ) or into the external PCMCIA slot on the slot PLC (no. ). (7) Insert the module into the PCMCIA slot on the TSX SCY 2 60 "in-rack" communication module. /2

TSX 7 p processors and T PCX 7 p slot PLCs TSX 7 p processors.2 6 8 02 channels (modules with 8, 6, 2 or 6 channels) 28 channels (modules with, 8 or 6 channels) Configurable loops ( channels with max. loops) 2 6 Modules with 2/ counter channels max. MHz, single-channel electronic cam module Modules with /2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2// axes for analog control servomotors, modules with 8/6 axes with SERCOS digital link Modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels) "In-rack" communication modules ( application-specific channel) RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () master/slave PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 8 master/slave modules integrated RS 8 master/slave channel, RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () master/slave PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 8 master/slave modules integrated RS 8 channel, RS 22D, RS 8 or BC () () PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 8 modules PCMCIA modules (), max. 8 "in-rack" modules PCMCIA module () 2 "in-rack" modules (+ software gateway with Atrium slot PLC) Multiprotocol "in-rack" modules (Modbus, Uni-TE, Global Data, I/O Scanning, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast service and Factory Cast HMI services Fipway () () and Modbus Plus () PCMCIA modules, "in-rack" Ethway modules 6/80 K words program and data (6) 96 K words program and data 80/96 K words data (6) 8 K words program 76 K words data 2 K words program (992 K words with PL7 V. or higher) 60 K words + 208 K words 208 Kwords (60 K words + 208 K words with PL7 V. or higher) 28 K words 26 Kwords (8 K words with PL7 V. or higher) a 00 20 V, c 2 V non-isolated and c 2 8 V isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each rack. TSX P7 0M Q TSX P7 62M Q (8) TSX P7 M Q TSX P7 M TSX P7 82M (8) T PCX 7 M / (8) Reduce the number of modules permitted (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) by when CANopen is used. (9) The second value corresponds to the processor with integrated Fipio bus manager link. (0)The TSX P7 M processor does not support the CANopen bus PCMCIA module. ()The integrated Ethernet port requires of the available network connections. Q Processor able to migrate from PL7 to Unity Pro by means of a simple processor operating system update (included in the Unity Pro software CD-ROM). /2

Presentation platform PL7 processors.2 Presentation Premium TSX P7 ppm and TSX P7 pp2m control system platform processors manage the entire PLC station comprising discrete or I/O modules, Preventa safety modules, analog I/O modules, and application-specific modules, which can be distributed over one or more racks connected on Bus X or on a fieldbus. TSX P7 processors The types of processor available are divided into various capacities according to memory, "in-rack" I/O, communication, and processing speed. According to the model: b to 6 racks or steps. b 2 to 200 discrete I/O b 2 to 26 analog I/O b 8 to 6 application-specific channels: Each application-specific module (counter, motion control, communication or weighing) accounts for or a number of application-specific channels. b to networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethway, Modbus Plus), 2 to 8 AS-Interface sensor/actuator buses, to 2 fieldbuses (CANopen, INTERBUS, Profibus DP), 0 or Fipio fieldbus, serial links (Modbus, Uni-Telway) b 0 to 20 process control channels Integrated communication According to the model, Premium processors include: b A 0 or 00 Mbps TCP/IP Ethernet port (RJ connection) b A Mbps Fipio bus link (bus manager) b Communication via 2 terminal ports (TER and AUX) using Uni-Telway or character mode protocol (typically a 9 or Mbps programming terminal and an operator dialog terminal) Each processor has a slot for a type III PCMCIA card for accepting a network card (Fipway, Modbus Plus), bus (CANopen (), Fipio Agent) or serial link (Modbus, Uni-Telway, character mode) Application design and installation Version V. PL7 Junior/Pro software can be provided in a variety of versions according to requirements: b Single-station b Multistation in the form of independent stations (Junior/Pro), remote stations connected to a server via a network (Pro OpenTeam for to 0 stations or Pro OpenSite for 0 or more stations), or as a client/server architecture via Thin Client type PC terminals (Pro Servi). These licenses are compatible with PC terminals running Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP operating systems. Migration of Premium processors Some Premium TSX P7 ppm processors compatible with PL7 software can migrate to become compatible with the Unity Pro software without the need for hardware modifications. This migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is achieved by means of the following software updates: b Processor operating system b Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port operating system This update is carried out using the OS-Loader tool, included in Unity Pro (see page 6/2). Once migrated, PL7 processors are equivalent to corresponding Unity processors. The following PL7 processors are able to migrate to Unity Pro (software migration): b TSX 7 2p: TSX P7 20/2/262M become TSX P7 20/2/26M respectively b TSX 7 p: TSX P7 0//62M become TSX P7 0//6M respectively b TSX 7 p: TSX P7 becomes TSX P7 M Note: Processor migration requires the use of new PCMCIA TSX MRP P/C, TSX MFP P/C memory references. See the equivalence table on page /6. () Not with TSX P7 M processor. Description: page /27 Characteristics: pages /28 and /29 Functions: page /0 References: pages /0 and / /26

Presentation (continued), description platform PL7 processors Presentation (continued) Migration of Premium processors (continued) Migration offers involving the replacement of the processor are offered for other product references. Please contact your Regional Sales Office for more information about these offers, which are only available for a limited period of time. They concern the following PL7 processors: b TSX P7 282M for migration to TSX P7 2M with TSX ETY 0 () b TSX P7 M for migration to TSX P7 M b TSX P7 M for migration to TSX P7 M b TSX P7 82M for migration to TSX P7 6M b TSX P7 82M for migration to TSX P7 6M b TSX P7 82M for migration to TSX P7 M with TSX ETY 0 () b TSX P7 82M for migration to TSX P7 M with TSX ETY 0 ().2 TSX P7 pm TSX P7 2p/p/M 2 6 7 2 6 7 TSX P7ppM processors without integrated Ethernet port Single-format TSX P7 pmprocessorsand double-format TSX P7 2p/p/M processors feature the following on the front panel: A display block with indicator lamps: v RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution) v ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card) v I/O lamp (red): Faults occurring on another module in the station or configuration fault v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on the terminal port v FIP lamp (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus 2 RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated An 8-way female mini-din connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal An 8-way female mini-din connector marked AUX for connecting a peripheral device A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card 6 A PCMCIA slot (no. ) for a MB SRAM communication or extension card for storing additional data 7 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P7 /2//M models) for Fipio bus manager communication TSX P7ppM processors with integrated Ethernet port Double-format TSX P7 262/282M and TSX P7 62/82M processors with integrated Ethernet port feature the following on the front panel: 2 2 TSX P7 262/62M 6 7 8 9 TSX P7 282/82M () The proposed TSX ETY 0 Ethernet TCP/IP module provides the same functions as the integrated Ethernet port on TSX P7 282/82M processors. However, the connection between the processor and the Ethernet module occupies one more slot than the PL7 processor to be migrated. Therefore, this type of migration requires a free slot in the Premium rack and modification of the converted Unity Pro application. A display block with indicator lamps: v RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution) v ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card) v I/O lamp (red): Faults occurring on another module in the station or configuration fault v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on the terminal port v FIP lamp (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus 2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port featuring lamps: v RUN lamp (green): Ethernet port ready v ERR lamp (red): Ethernet port fault v COL lamp (red): Collision detection v STS lamp (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics v Two TX and RX lamps (yellow): Transmission/reception activity RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated An 8-way female mini-din connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal. An 8-way female mini-din connector marked AUX for connecting a peripheral device 6 An RJ connector for connection to the Ethernet network 7 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card 8 A PCMCIA slot (no. ) for a MB SRAM communication or extension card for storing additional data 9 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P7 282/82/M models) for Fipio bus manager communication Presentation: page /26 Characteristics: pages /28 and /29 Functions: page /0 References: pages /0 and / /27

Characteristics platform PL7 processors.2 Premium PLCs have been developed to comply with major national and international standards on electronic industrial automation equipment.. See pages 9/6 to 9/ Standards, certification and environmental conditions. Characteristics and performance Types of processor Maximum configuration Functions () Memories TSX P7 0M TSX P7 M TSX P7 20M TSX P7 262M No. of racks /6/8 slots 6 2 slots 2 8 Max. no. of slots for modules 2 28 Max. no. of Discrete I/O 2 02 Analog I/O 2 80 Process control 0(upto0simpleloops) channels Application-specific 8 2 channels (counter, axis, weighing, and serial links) (2) Integrated connections Maximum no. of connections Maximum capacity Maximum size of object zones TSX P7 2M Ethernet TCP/IP Fipio manager (6 agents) (27 agents) Serial link link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 9.2 Kbps Networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus, Ethway), none if integrated Ethernet is used TSX P7 282M, none if integrated Ethernet is used AS-Interface bus 2 CANopen bus INTERBus or Profibus DP bus, none if CANopen is used Without PCMCIA card Kwords 2, program and data 8, program and data 6, program and data With PCMCIA card Kwords 6, program 2, data Data storage Kwords 28 2688 Located internal bits bits 096 82 (%Mi) 60, program 8, data Located internal data Kwords 0. for internal words %Mpi 2 for constant words %Kpi Application structure Master task Fast task Event tasks 2 ( of which has priority) 6 ( of which has priority) Execution time Without Boolean µs 0.0 0.9 per instruction PCMCIA card On word or fixed-point µs 0.62 0.2 arithmetic On floating points µs 2.6 With PCMCIA Boolean µs 0.60 0.2 card On word or fixed-point µs 0.87 0.2 arithmetic On floating points µs 2.6 No. of Without 00% Boolean Kinst/.2.76 Kinstructions PCMCIA card ms executed every 6% Boolean and Kinst/ ms % fixed arithmetic ms.0.7 System overhead With PCMCIA card 00% Boolean Kinst/ ms 6% Boolean and % fixed arithmetic Kinst/ ms.8.70 0.8 2.0 60, program 6, data Master task ms.0.0 (2).00.2 (2) Fast task ms 0.80 0. () Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O, application-specific channels, and process control channels are cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, Fipio, Modbus Plus, etc.) or fieldbus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this maximum number. (2) Serial links: Modbus, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links. Presentation: page /26 Description: page /27 Functions: page /0 References: pages /0 and / /28

Characteristics (continued) platform PL7 processors Premium PLCs have been developed to comply with major national and international standards on electronic industrial automation equipment. See pages 9/6 to 9/ Standards, certification and environmental conditions. Characteristics and performance (continued) Type of processor TSX P7 0M TSX P7 62M TSX P7 M TSX P7 M TSX P7 82M Maximum configuration Functions Memories No. of racks /6/8 slots 6 2 slots 8 Max. no. of slots for modules 28 Max. no. in rack () Integrated connections Maximum no. of connections Maximum capacity Maximum size of object zones Discrete I/O 02 200 Analog I/O 28 26 Process control (uptosimpleloops) 20(upto60simpleloops) channels Application-specific channels (counter, axis, weighing, and serial links) (2) 2 6 Ethernet TCP/IP Fipio manager (27 agents) Serial link link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 9.2 or Kbps Networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus, Ethway), 2 if integrated Ethernet is used AS-Interface bus 8 CANopen bus INTERBus, Profibus DP 2, if CANopen is used bus Without PCMCIA card Kwords 6, program and data 80, program and data With PCMCIA card Kwords 8, program 80, data, if integrated Ethernet is used 8, program 96, data 96, program and data 2/992 (), program 76, data Data storage Kwords 60 + 208 208/60 + 208 () Located internal bits bits 6 8 2 768 (%Mi) Located internal data Kwords 0. for internal words %Mpi 2 for constant words %Kpi Application structure Master task Fast task Event tasks 6 ( of which has priority) Execution time Without Boolean µs 0.2 0.06 for PCMCIA card On word or fixed-point one instruction arithmetic µs 0.7 0.08 On floating points µs 2.2. With PCMCIA Boolean µs 0.7 0.06 card On word or fixed-point µs 0. 0.08 arithmetic On floating points µs 2.. Typical Without 00% Boolean Kinst/ 6.66.28 program code PCMCIA card ms execution time 6% Boolean and Kinst/.76 9.09 for % fixed arithmetic ms Kinstruction System overhead With PCMCIA card 00% Boolean Kinst/ ms 6% Boolean and % fixed arithmetic Kinst/ ms..28.2 9.09 Master task ms.00.00 Fast task ms 0.2 0.9.2 () Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O, application-specific channels, and process control channels are cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, Fipio, Modbus Plus, etc.) or fieldbus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this maximum number. (2) Serial links: Modbus, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links. () The second value applies if PL7 Junior/Pro programming software V. or higher is used. Presentation: page /26 Description: page /27 Functions: page /0 References: pages /0 and / /29

Functions, references platform PL7 processors.2 Processor without PCMCIA card Internal RAM 2 to 96 Kwords Data Program Constants Application data (max. 0. Kwords) 2 Task descriptor and executable code Constant words, initial values and configuration Processor with PCMCIA card Internal RAM PCMCIA card (slot no. 0) 2 to 76 Kwords 6 to 2 Kwords 0. Kwords 2 Kwords 28/60 Kwords 28/26 Kwords Data Program Constants Storage of additional data Symbol storage Application data (max. 0. Kwords) 2 Task descriptor and executable code Constant words, initial values and configuration Depending on the model of PCMCIA card Protecting the application 2 2 Memory structure The application memory is divided into memory areas distributed physically in the internal RAM memory and the PCMCIA memory extension card(s): b The application data area is always in the internal RAM. b The application program area is in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card. b The constants area is in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card. There are two ways of organizing the application memory for TSX P7 p/2p/2p2/p/62//82 processors with or without a memory extension fitted in the form of a PCMCIA format card: Application in internal RAM The application is completely loaded into the processor s battery-backed internal RAM (), the capacity of which depends on the processor model (2 to 96 K words). For example, the TSX P7 p processor has 7. Kwords of application data and 2. Kwords of program, constants and system data (2). The memory space (2 Kwords) is shared between the application data, the program, the constants, and the system data (2). Application in the PCMCIA card (slot no. 0) The internal RAM is reserved for the application data. The PCMCIA card contains the program and constants (6 to 2 K words). The file storage area of 28 K or 60 Kwords (depending on the model of PCMCIA card) can be used in remote applications, for storing production data information, production recipes, etc. The symbols storage area of 28 K or 26 Kwords (depending on the model of PCMCIA card) enables the application symbols database to be stored on the PLC. Extension of the additional data storage area (slot no. ) This area, containing 28 or 60 Kwords, can be extended to up to 2699 Kwords by using an SRAM TSX MRP DS 208P/MFP 00M PCMCIA memory card. This card is inserted into the lower slot on TSX P7 2p/2p2/p/62//82M processors and can be used in conjunction with memory extension cards (type in the upper slot). Data in internal RAM The data area can be extended to up to 0. Kwords. It is only supported by the PLC's internal RAM memory. The PL7 Junior/Pro memory assists the application designer with the management of the structure and the occupation of memory space on the Premium PLC. Regardless of the PLC memory structure (whether the application is located in the internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card), it is possible to protect the application in order to prevent it being accessed (read or modify program) in online mode under PL7 Junior/Pro. A memory protection bit, set in configuration mode, is also available to prevent any program modification (via the programming terminal or downloading). Premium processor references TSX P7 p0/p/p62/p82m processors are equipped with: b A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for memory extension or SRAM memory card for the storage of additional data b A PCMCIA slot (no. ) for communication card or memory card for the storage of additional data b Two terminal ports (8-way female mini-din type), Uni-Telway or character mode TSX P7 processors are double-format modules (except TSX P7 p, which are single-format). TSX P7 p/62//82m processors enable program loading, via the terminal port, at a maximum speed of Kbps (limited to 9.2 Kbps for TSX P7 p/2p/2p2m processors. The integrated Fipio link (bus manager) on TSX P7 2/282///82M processors supports a maximum of 27 connection points. The link on the TSX P7 processor is limited to 6 connection points. () The internal RAM is protected by an optional battery, with years' battery life, located in the power supply module. (2) The system has a minimum reserve RAM memory area in the order of Kwords. Please refer to the PL7 TSX Micro/Junior/Pro TLX DOC PL7 M reference manual. Presentation: page /26 /0 Description: page /27 Characteristics: pages /28 and /29

References (continued) platform PL7 processors TSX P7 0M TSX P7 M TSX 7 processors I/O capacity () Capacity Maximum number Memory Process of bus/network control modules channels TSX 7 0 racks () 2 discrete I/O 2 integrated 0 network 2 analog I/O Kwords. Max. 2 AS-i buses 8 application-specific 6 Kwords on CANopenbus channels PCMCIA integrated Fipio network 2 AS-i buses Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP Reference (2) Weight kg TSX P7 0M 0.80 TSX P7 M 0.20.2 TSX 7 20 6 racks () 02 discrete I/O 80 analog I/O 2 application-specific channels 8 integrated Kwords. Max. 60 Kwords on PCMCIA 0 network AS-i buses CANopenbus() fieldbus () TSX P7 20M 0.20 AS-i buses CANopenbus() fieldbus () port TSX P7 262M TSX P7 20/0M 6 integrated Kwords. Max. 60 Kwords on PCMCIA 0 integrated Fipio network AS-i buses CANopenbus() fieldbus () integrated Fipio AS-i buses CANopenbus() fieldbus () TSX P7 2M 0.60 port TSX P7 282M TSX P7 2//M TSX P7 262/62M TSX 7 0 6 racks () 02 discrete I/O 28 analog I/O 2 application-specific channels TSX 7 0 6 racks () 200 discrete I/O 26 analog I/O 6 application-specific channels 6/80 integrated Kwords (). Max. 8 K words on PCMCIA network 8 AS-i buses CANopenbus() 2 fieldbuses () 2network 8 AS-i buses CANopenbus() 2 fieldbuses () 80/96 integrated Kwords (). Max. 8 Kwords on PCMCIA integrated Fipio networks 8 AS-i buses CANopenbus() 2 fieldbuses () 96/76 integrated Kwords (). Max. 2/992 K words on PCMCIA 20 integrated Fipio networks(7) 8 AS-i buses CANopenbus() 2 fieldbuses () PCMCIA memory extension cards TSX P7 0M 0.20 port TSX P7 62M TSX P7 M 0.60 TSX P7 M 0.60 port TSX P7 82M TSX P7 282/82M Premium processors can support up to 2 memory extension cards. However, useful memory capacity is limited to the maximum size defined for the processor model. See pages /6 and /7. () Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not included. (2) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide (processors and discrete I/O): English, French, German, Spanish, and Italian. () Maximum number of TSX RKY EX/6EX/8EX racks (, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 2EX rack (2 slots) is the same as using 2 racks with, 6 or 8 slots. () Using the CANopen bus reduces the number of possible fieldbuses (INTERBus/Profibus DP) by. () The second value corresponds to the integrated memory capacity when the processor is equipped with a PCMCIA memory card. (6) 992 Kwords with PL7 Junior/Pro software V. or higher. (7) networks with TSX P7 82M processor. Presentation: page /26 Description: page /27 Characteristics: pages /28 and /29 Functions: page /0 /

Presentation, configuration platform Atrium slot PLCs PL7.2 Presentation Atrium T PCX 7 ppm slot PLCs are PC format cards (6-bit ISA bus) to be integrated into a PC running under Windows 9/98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT. This combination of PLC and PC optimizes performance in applications requiring, for example, a higher level of communication, control or supervision functions. The slot PLCs manage the entire PLC station, which comprises the same I/O modules as Premium processors (discrete, analog, application-specific, and communication), and these modules can be distributed in one or more racks connected on the bus X. Two types of Atrium slot PLC are available to meet various user requirements: b Max. 6 racks b Max. 02 discrete I/O b 80 or 28 analog I/O b 2 or 2 application-specific channels: Each application-specific module (counter, motion control, communication or weighing) accounts for or a number of application-specific channels. b or networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethway, Modbus Plus), or 8 AS-Interface buses and or 2 fieldbuses (CANopen, INTERBUS, Profibus-DP) b 0 or process control channels Integrated communication Depending on the model, Atrium slot PLCs feature: b A Mbps Fipio bus link (bus manager) for the T PCX 7 M model b Communication via a terminal port (TER) using Uni-Telway or character mode protocol (typically a 9.2 or Kbps programming terminal and an operator dialog terminal) Each processor has a slot for a type III PCMCIA card for accepting a network card (Fipway, Modbus Plus), bus card (CANopen, Fipio Agent) or serial link card (Modbus, Uni-Telway, character mode) Application design and installation Version V. PL7 Junior/Pro software is available in a variety of versions according to requirements: b Single-station b Multistation in the form of independent local stations (Junior/Pro), remote stations connected to a server via a network (Pro OpenTeam for to 0 stations or Pro OpenSite for 0 or more stations), or as a client/server architecture via Thin Client type PC terminals (Pro Servi). These licenses are compatible with PC stations running Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP operating systems. Ethernet TCP/IP Altivar Momentum Fipio/Modbus Plus Magelis ipc "Atrium Pro" Type D CPU pack: - Atrium TPCX 7 20M slot PLC - Vijeo Look and PL7 Pro software Premium I/O extension racks Typical architecture By integrating an Atrium coprocessor card, the architecture shown opposite can be created using any compatible PC (fitted with ISA bus slots) and Magelis IPC industrial PC stations. This solution can provide a PLC architecture in which I/Os are: b Remotely located close to the machine or process via the fieldbus (): v Modbus Plus with TSX MBP 0 PCMCIA card v CANopen with TSX CPP 0 PCMCIA card b INTERBUS with PC format card, TSX IBX 00 ISA bus (link to Atrium slot PLC via ribbon cable) b And/or centralized in TSX RKY ppex extendable racks. TSX RKY ppex extendable racks connected on the bus X allow the use of application-specific modules and the installation of AS-Interface bus segments. For example: v TSX ETY 0 or TSX ETY 0 Ethernet TCP/IP module (with Web server, FactoryCast server) or TSX WMY 00 FactoryCast HMI module v INTERBUS TSX IBY 00 or Profibus DP TSX PBY 00 master module v TSX SAY 000 AS-Interface V2. master module v TSX CAY, TSX CFY or TSX CSY 8 (SERCOS) motion control modules () Corresponding to an integrated module solution on the host PC, without having to use modules on extension racks on bus X. Characteristics: page / References: page / /2

Description, installation platform Atrium slot PLCs PL7 7 6 2 8 Description TPCX7ppM slot PLCs mechanically occupy two consecutive slots (standard pitch of 20.2 mm) on the ISA bus but only use one electrically. A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card 2 A PCMCIA slot (no. ) for a communication card or SRAM memory extension card ( MB) for storing additional data A 9-way female SUB-D connector enabling the bus X to be connected remotely to an extendable rack A TER terminal port for the connection of a programming terminal or adjustment of a peripheral device A male 9-way SUB-D connector for connection to the Fipio bus (with T PCX 7 M) 6 An ISA bus connector for connection to the host PC 7 A slot for the slot PLC internal RAM backup battery 8 An additional plate (supplied as standard) fitted with a 9-way female SUB-D connector, enabling a second remote bus X to be connected.2 SCADA OFS server Ethernet TCP/IP TCP/X-Way gateway The TCP/X-Way software gateway performs 2 main functions for Atrium slot PLCs: b Communication using the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP protocol via the Ethernet TCP/IP card integrated in the PC b Data exchange in both directions with remote stations via the telephone modem in the PC PC 2 Uni-TE Premium Modbus This software interfaces with the Atrium slot PLC ISAway driver and automatically routes messages. The most common configurations are: v Via Ethernet network (diagram opposite). Access is made secure by checking incoming IP addresses, in a similar way to the Premium PLC Ethernet TSX ETY 0 module. Global Data and I/O Scanning services are not supported. v Via modem link. Incoming calls are checked via the standard Windows password checking mechanisms. In addition to remote access with Unity Pro, the TCP/IP gateway enables communication with other stations that can be connected to a local Ethernet network (RAS (Remote Access Server) function). Quantum Atrium slot PLC 2 Ethernet TCP/IP card or integrated port TCP/X-Way software gateway Setup Integration into the host PC ToreceiveanAtriumT PCX7ppM slot PLC, the host PC must: b Operate under Windows 9/98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT b Have a 6-bit 8 MHz ISA bus b Have two consecutive slots (standard pitch of 20.2 mm) available on the ISA bus A maximum of 2 T PCX slot PLCs can be connected to one PC. The slot PLC is completely independent of the application running on the PC, in particular: b The standard PC command "CTRL + ALT + DEL" has no effect on the slot PLC operating modes. b Switching the PC off and then on again causes a warm restart of the application being managed by the slot PLC. The installation of a communication driver (ISAway 9/NT) supplied with the slot PLC enables transparent communication between the host PC and the slot PLC. Equipped with PL7 Junior/Pro software, the host PC can be used as a programming terminal for the Atrium T PCX 7 slot PLC. Magelis ipc or PC with an Atrium PCX slot PLC Logical location on the bus X The Atrium T PCX 7 slot PLC logically occupies slot on the bus X rack. The slot in the TSX RKY rack with address 0 following the TSX PSY power supply module must therefore remain unoccupied (see page 2/9). Bus X Bus X A bus X line terminator is supplied with the PCX slot PLC. The additional plate 8 enables 2 X buses to be connected, creating a Y structure as shown opposite. Premium extension Premium extension Characteristics: page / References: page / /

Memory structure, characteristics platform Atrium slot PLCs PL7.2 Memory structure Slot PLC without PCMCIA memory card Internal RAM Slot PLC with PCMCIA memory card Internal RAM Data Program 2 Constants Data There are two ways of organizing the application memory for T PCX 7 20M/M slot PLCs with or without memory extension in the form of a type PCMCIA card: Application in internal RAM The application is loaded entirely in the slot PLC internal RAM with battery back-up ( years' battery life). For the maximum memory capacity of the internal RAM, see the characteristics below. Application in PCMCIA card The internal RAM is thus reserved for application data and system data (). The PCMCIA memory card contains the program and constants. (slot no. 0) PCMCIA card (2) Program 2 Constants Application data (including internal words, system words, function blocks, DFBs, etc.) 2 Task descriptor and executable code Constant words, initial values and configuration The PL7 Junior/Pro software assists the application designer with structure management and occupation of memory space for the Atrium slot PLC. () The system reserves a minimum RAM memory zone in the order of Kwords. Please refer to the PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro TLX DOC PL7 M reference manual. (2) In addition, there are certain models of PCMCIA card available, which provide memory zones for storing files and symbols (see page /7). Characteristics Type of slot PLC T PCX 7 20M T PCX 7 M Maximum configuration No. of racks /6/8 slots 6 2 slots 8 Max. no. of slots per module 28 Functions Max. number Discrete I/O 02 of channels Analog I/O 80 28 () Application-specific (counter, axis, 2 2 Memory () Max. number of connections weighing, serial links) (2) Integrated Uni-Telway (terminal port) Networks 2 (including Ethernet TCP/IP integrated (Ethway, Fipway, Modbus Plus) into PC) () CANopen INTERBUS or Profibus DP bus, none if CANopen is used 2, if CANopen is used Fipio bus manager (integrated) AS-Interface bus 8 Process control channels 0(upto0loops) (upto0loops) Real-time clock Yes Maximum capacity Maximum size of zones () (including Ethernet TCP/IP integrated into PC) () Without PCMCIA card Kwords 8 program and data 80 program and data With PCMCIA card Kwords 60 program 8 data 8 program 96 data Storage of additional data Kwords 2688 Internal words (% MWi/MDi/MFi) Kwords 0. Constants (% KWi/KDi/KFi) Kwords 2 Internal bits (%Mi) bits 82 6 8 Application structure Master task Fast task Event-based processing 6 ( of which has priority) Execution time per instruction Boolean µs 0.9/0.2 (6) 0.2/0.7 (6) On word or fixed-point arithmetic µs 0.2/0.2 (6) 0.7/0. (6) On floating points µs 2.6 2.2/2. No. of Kinstructions executed every ms Without PCMCIA card With PCMCIA card 00% Boolean Kinst/ms.76 6.66 6% Boolean and % fixed arithmetic Kinst/ms.7.76 00% Boolean Kinst/ms.70. 6% Boolean and % fixed arithmetic 2.0.2 System overhead MAST task ms FAST task ms 0. 0.2 () Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and application-specific channels are cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (AS-Interface/Uni-Telway/Fipio/Modbus Plus, etc.) or fieldbus (CANopen, INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this maximum number. (2) Serial links: Modbus, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links. () With TCP/X-Way software gateway and Ethernet port on host PC (integrated motherboard or PC format card). () Memory capacity for storing data or symbols on a PCMCIA card, see page /6. () The sum of the program memory, data and constants zones is limited by the total memory capacity. (6) The second value corresponds to the execution time when the slot PLC is fitted with a PCMCIA memory card. Presentation: page /2 References: page / /

References platform Atrium slot PLCs PL7 References PCX 7 slot PLCs TPCX7ppM slot PLCs are compatible with the PC ISA bus and have: b A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for memory extension b A PCMCIA slot (no. ) for communication card or memory extension card for storing additional data b A terminal port (8-way female mini-din), Uni-Telway or character mode b A remote bus X system for extendable racks b A male connector (9-way SUB-D) for Fipio bus link manager function (for model T PCX 7 M) b A bus X end of line terminator b OFS data server software (see page 7/) b ISAway 9/NT communication driver software (see page 6/7: X-Way communication drivers).2 The slot PLC mechanically occupies 2 consecutive slots but only uses one slot electrically on the ISA bus (long slot). 6-rack PCX 7 20 () I/O capacity (2) Capacities Maximum Memory Process control channels number of bus/network modules 02 discrete I/O 80 analog I/O 2 application-specific channels 8 integrated Kwords Max. 60 Kwords on PCMCIA 0 network AS-ibuses CANopen bus () fieldbus Reference () Weight kg T PCX 7 20M 0.0 T PCX 7 20M 6-rack PCX 7 0 () I/O capacity (2) Capacities Maximum Memory Process control channels number of bus/network modules 02 discrete I/O 28 analog I/O 2 application-specific channels 80/96 integrated Kwords data () Max. 8 Kwords on PCMCIA integrated Fipio networks 8AS-ibuses CANopen bus () 2 fieldbuses Reference () Weight kg T PCX 7 M 0.0 Memory extension cards TPCX7pp slot PLCs can receive memory extension card. However, useful memory capacity is limited to the maximum size defined for the processor model. See pages /6 and /7. Software options T PCX 7 M When connected to an Atrium slot PLC, the TCP/X-Way gateway software offer (supplied on CD-ROM) enables communication under the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP protocol using the Ethernet TCP/IP port integrated into the host PC. Description Use Site license Reference Weight Kg TCP/X-Way gateway software Compatible with Windows 2000 or XP Single-station TLX CD GTW 0M 0 stations TLX CD0 GTW 0M 200 stations TLX CDUNT GTW 0M () Maximum number of TSX RKY EX/6EX/8EX racks (, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 2 EX rack with 2 slots is the same as using 2 racks with, 6 or 8 slots. (2) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not included. () Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide (processors and discrete I/O): English, French, German, Spanish, and Italian. () Using the CANopen bus reduces the number of possible fieldbuses (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) by. () The second value corresponds to the integrated memory capacity when the processor is fitted with a PCMCIA memory card (type ). Presentation: page /2 Characteristics: page / /

Presentation platform PCMCIA memory extension cards PL7.2 Presentation PCMCIA memory extension cards are used to extend the internal RAM capacity of Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs. Depending on the model, these cards are designed to: b Receive the application program and constants b Store additional application data b Store various application object symbols b Or all three New offer for Premium and Atrium under PL7 From November 200, the old TSX MRP/MFP pppp PCMCIA memory extension cards offer, which was specific for Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs under PL7, will be replaced by a new offer. This offer is supported by: b TSX Micro PLCs under PL7 b Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs under Unity Pro and PL7 b Quantum processors under Unity Pro The table below indicates equivalences between the old and new versions. If migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is envisaged, or more new references may correspond to each old reference. PCMCIA SRAM memory extension (slot no. 0) Use Max. memory size Old reference All TSX 7 and PCX 7 types TSX 7 20 TSX 7 0 TSX 7 0 PCX 7 20 PCX 7 0 PL7 Data application storage Symbol storage (until the end of October 200) Do you envisage migration from PL7 to Unity Pro? (P indicates "PL7 program") Recommended new reference (from November 200) 2 Kwords TSX MRP 02P No Yes TSX MRP P28K 28 Kwords TSX MRP 22P No Yes TSX MRP P8K 6 Kwords TSX MRP 06P No Yes, P < 2 Kwords TSX MRP P22K Yes, P > 2 Kwords TSX MRP P8K 28 Kwords TSX MRP 26P No Yes () TSX MRP P8K Yes () TSX MRP C768K 28 Kwords TSX MRP 028P Yes, P < 6 Kwords TSX MRP P8K No Yes, 6 Kwords < P < 0 Kwords TSX MRP C8K Yes, P > 0 Kwords TSX MRP C768K 28 Kwords 28 Kwords TSX MRP 228P No Yes () TSX MRP C768K Yes () TSX MRP C0M7 26 Kwords TSX MRP 026P Yes, P < 0 Kwords TSX MRP C768K No Yes, 28 Kwords < P < 208 Kwords TSX MRP C00M Yes, P > 208 Kwords TSX MRP C0M7 60 Kwords 28 Kwords TSX MRP 26P No Yes TSX MRP C0M7 Yes (2) TSX MRP C002M Yes () TSX MRP C00M 8 Kwords 60 Kwords TSX MRP 8P Yes () TSX MRP C0M7 No Yes () TSX MRP C002M TSX 7 0 2 Kwords 26 Kwords TSX MRP 02P Yes, P < 26 Kwords TSX MRP C0M7 Yes, 26 Kwords < P < 8 TSX MRP C002M Kwords No Yes, P > 8 Kwords TSX MRP C00M 992 Kwords 60 Kwords 8 Kwords TSX MRP C007M PCMCIA Flash EPROM memory extension (slot no. 0) All TSX 7 and PCX 7 types 2 Kwords TSX MFP 02P No Yes TSX MFP P28K 28 Kwords TSX MFP 22P No Yes TSX MCP C22K 6 Kwords TSX MFP 06P No Yes, P < 2 Kwords TSX MFP P22K Yes, P > 2 Kwords TSX MFP P8K 28 Kwords TSX MFP 26P No Yes TSX MCP C22K 28 Kwords TSX MFP 028P No Yes TSX MFP P8K TSX 7 20 TSX 7 0 TSX 7 0 PCX 7 20 PCX 7 0 PCMCIA SRAM memory extension (slot no. ) TSX 7 20 208 Kwords TSX MRP DS 208P No Yes TSX MRP F00M TSX 7 0 TSX 7 0 Flash EPROM PCMCIA backup card (slot no. 0) TSX 7 0 2 Kwords TSX MFP BAK02P No Yes TSX MFP B096K () Selection based on the PL7 program memory volume in relation to the data storage memory volume. (2)IfsymbolsdonotneedtobestoredonthePCMCIA. () If data does not need to be stored on the PCMCIA. /6

Presentation, references platform PCMCIA memory extension cards PL7 PCMCIA memory extension cards All memory cards (with the exception of TSX MFP P00M/TSX MRP DS 208P for SRAM data storage) are inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0 on Premium processors (upper slot) and Atrium slot PLCs (internal slot). The TSX MFP P00M/TSX MRP DS 208P data storage card is inserted into slot no. only on Premium processors (lower slot) and Atrium slot PLCs (external slot on faceplate). With PL7, these cards support four different types of storage: b Application storage: Program and constants in a common area of between 6 and 2 Kwords, in the SRAM or Flash EPROM memory. b Application and additional data storage, comprising an application area of between 6 and 8 Kwords and a data storage area of 28 or 60 Kwords designed for additional data, in the SRAM or Flash EPROM and SRAM. b Application, additional data and symbol storage, comprising an application area of between 2 and 2 Kwords, a data storage area of 28 or 60 Kwords designed for additional data, and a symbols area of 28 or 26 Kwords, in the SRAM or Flash EPROM and SRAM. b Additional data storage provided by an SRAM with a capacity of 2 M words. These cards use 2 technologies: b Battery-backed SRAM. Used in particular in the creation and debugging phases for the application program. These cards support all application transfer and modification services in online mode and the storage of additional data. The memory is backed up by a removable battery integrated into the PCMCIA card. A second battery, which acts as an auxiliary for the first, provides backup for the main battery should information be lost. b Flash EPROM. Used once debugging of the application program is complete. It enables restrictions in terms of the service life of backup batteries to be avoided and supports global application transfer. If a Flash EPROM is used, the application cannot be modified in online mode..2 References If future migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is envisaged, see the equivalence table opposite for the new equivalent reference. PCMCIA type I SRAM memory extension (slot no. 0) Use Max. memory size Old reference TSX 7 0 0 PCX 7 20/0 TSX 7 20 0 PCX 7 20/0 PL7 Data application storage Symbol storage (until the end of October 200) New reference (from November 200) Weight 2 Kwords TSX MRP 02P TSX MRP P28K 6 Kwords TSX MRP 06P TSX MRP P22K 28 Kwords TSX MRP 22P/26P TSX MRP P8K 28 Kwords 26 Kwords 8 Kwords TSX MRP 028P TSX MRP C8K 28 Kwords 28 Kwords TSX MRP 228P TSX MRP C768K TSX MRP 026P TSX MRP C00M 60 Kwords 28 Kwords TSX MRP 26P TSX MRP C0M7 60 Kwords TSX MRP 8P TSX MRP C002M TSX 7 0 2 Kwords 26 Kwords TSX MRP 02P TSX MRP C00M 992 Kwords 60 Kwords 8 Kwords TSX MRP C007M PCMCIA type I Flash EPROM memory extension (slot no. 0) TSX 7 0 0 PCX 7 20/0 2 Kwords TSX MFP 02P TSX MFP P28K 6 Kwords TSX MFP 06P TSX MFP P22K 28 Kwords TSX MFP 22P/26P TSX MCP C22K 28 TSX MFP 028P TSX MFP P8K Kwords TSX 7 20 0 PCX 7 20/0 PCMCIA type III Flash SRAM memory extension (slot no. ) TSX 7 20 0 208 TSX MRP DS 208P TSX MRP F00M Kwords PCMCIA Flash EPROM backup card TSX 7 0 2 Kwords TSX MFP BAK02P TSX MFP B096K Replacement parts Description Use Type Reference Weight kg Backup batteries TSX MRP P/Cpppp Main battery TSX BAT M02 (2) 0.00 TSX MFP P00M PCMCIA SRAM Auxiliary battery memory TSX BAT M0 Handle PCMCIA memory TSX P CAP 0.00 () With PL7 Junior/Pro software V. or higher. (2) Replace the old order reference for the TSX MRP pppp PCMCIA SRAM memory with order reference TSX BAT M0. kg /7

2 2/0

Contents 2 - Racks, I/O architectures and power supplies 2 Power supply and fan modules b Description... page2/2 b Characteristics.... page2/ b Functions... page2/ b References... page2/ b Dimensions and mounting... page2/ Single rack configuration b Presentation, description... page2/6 2 b References... page2/7 b Dimensions and mounting... page2/7 Multi-racks configuration without remote module b Presentation... page2/8 b Description... page2/9 b Racks addresses... page2/9 b References... page2/0 b Dimensions and mounting... page2/ Multi-racks configuration with remote module b Presentation... page2/2 b Description... page2/ b References... page2/ 2/

Description platform 2 Power supply and fan modules Description of power supply modules TSX PSYppp0M power supply modules provide the power supply for each rack and the modules installed on it. 2 The power supply module is selected according to: 2 7 6 TSX PSY 2600M b The mains electrical supply: c 2 V, c 2...8 V, a 00...20, a 200...20 V b The required power: standard format or double format model. TSX PSYppp0M power supply modules comprise: Display block comprising: v OK lamp (green), on if voltages are present and correct. v BAT lamp (red), on if the battery is faulty or missing. v 2 V lamp (green), on when the sensor voltage is present (according to model). 2 RESET pencil-point pushbutton causing a warm restart of the application. 8 Slot for a battery which protects the internal RAM memory of the processor. 7 6 TSX PSY 00M 2 Cover to protect the front panel of the module. Screw terminal for connecting: v To mains supply. v The alarm relay contact. v The sensor power supply for a.c. supplies (according to model). 6 Opening for cable clamp. 7 Fuse located beneath the module and protecting: v 2 VR voltage on the non-isolated d.c. supply with TSX PSY 60. v Primary voltage on the other power supplies. 8 0/220 voltage selector (according to model). Description of fan modules TSX FAN ppp fan modules installed above the racks of Premium PLCs provide forced air convection, in order to maintain an even ambient temperature inside the enclosure and to eliminate the various hot spots that may exist. Fan modules are required whenever the ambient temperature is between 60 C and 70 C (forced ventilation enables the ambient temperature in the enclosure to be loweredby0 C)(). Three types of fan module are available: c 2 V, a 0 V and a 220 V. According to the modularity of the racks used: b One fan module for a or 6 position rack, b Two fan modules for an 8 position rack, b Three fan modules for a 2 position rack. 2 TSX FAN ppp fan modules comprise: Connection terminal for the fan module power supply, the internal temperature probe and the associated LED or preactuator. 2 Earth terminal. Two mounting holes for the fan module. Shuttered air outlets. () For an ambient temperature between 2 C and 60 C, the use of fan modules increases the MTBF. Characteristics: page 2/ 2/2 Functions: page 2/ References: page 2/

Characteristics platform 2 Power supply and fan modules Characteristics Type of power supply module TSX PSY 60M TSX PSY 60M TSX PSY 20M Primary Voltage Nominal V c 2 c 2 c 2...8 Limit (ripple included) V c 9.2...0 () c 9.2...60 (possibleuptovforhinevry2h) Frequency Nominal/limit Hz Currency Nominal input rms A. at c 2 V 2.7 at c 2 V atc 2 V. at c 8 V Initial start up at 2 C (2) inrush A 00 at c 2 V 0 at c 2 V at c 2 V at c 8 V I²t on activation A ² s 2. 20 0 at c 2 V at c 8 V It on activation As 0.2 0. 7atc 2 V 6atc 8 V Duration of Main supply (accepted) ms micro breaks Integrated protection By fuse x 20, time-delayed. A Secondary Power Total useful (typical) W 0 0 0 Output c V Nominal voltage V Nominal current A 7 7 Power (typical) W Output c 2 VR () Nominal voltage V U mains - 0.6 U mains - 0.6 2 Nominal current A 0.6 0.6 0.8 Power (typical) W 9 9 Output c 2 V sensors Integrated protection on outputs () Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages Conformity to standards IEC 2 Isolation Dielectric withstand Insulation resistance Primary/secondary and primary/earth Primary/secondary and primary/earth No Byfusex20, time-delayed A Veff Non isolated, internal 0 V connected to PLC earth 2000-0/60 Hz - min MΩ 0 Type od power supply module TSX PSY 2600M TSX PSY 00M TSX PSY 800M Primary Voltage Nominal V a 00...20 a 00...20/200...20 Limit (ripple included) V a 8...26 a 8...0/90...26 a 8...0/70...26 Frequencys Nominal/limit Hz 0 60/7 6 Current Nominal input rms A 0. at a 00 V 0. at a 20 V Initial start up at 2 C (2) I inrush current A 7 at a 00 V 7 at a 20 V I²t on activation A²s 0.6 at a 00 V 2.6 at a 20 V It on activation As 0.0 at a 00 V 0.067 at a 20 V.7 at a 00 V 0. at a 20 V 8 at a 00 V 8 at a 20 V ata 00 V 2ata 20 V 0. at a 00 V 0. at a 20 V Duration of Mains supply (accepted) ms 0 0 0 micro breaks Integrated protection By fuse x 20, time-delayed, A Secondary Power Total useful (typical) W 26 0 77 () Output c V Nominal voltage V Nominal current A 7 Power (typical) W 2 7 Output c 2 VR () Nominal voltage V 2 2 Nominal current A 0.6 0.8 Power (typical) W 9.7 at a 00 V 0. at a 20 V 0 at a 00 V 60 at a 20 V at a 00 V 8ata 20 V 0. at a 00 V 0. at a 20 V Output Sensors A 0. 0.8.6 (TBTS) c 2 VC Integrated protection on outputs () Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages Conformity to standards IEC 2 Isolation Dielectric withstand Insulation resistance Primary/secondary and primary/earth Primary/secondary and primary/earth Veff 2000-0/60 Hz - min 000-0/60 Hz - min MΩ 00 () When supplying modules with relay outputs, the range is reduced to 2.6 26. V. (2) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously and for sizing protection devices. () Output c 2 V for supplying relays of modules with relay outputs. () Output c 2 VR, cannot be accessed by the user and is protected by a fuse located beneath themodule(x20,a,typemedium) () 77 W at 60 C, 8 W at C, or 00 W at C using TSX FAN fan modules. 2 Description: page 2/2 Functions: page 2/ References: page 2/ 2/

Functions platform 2 Power supply and fan modules Functions Alarm relay The alarm relay located in each power supply module has a volt-free contact which can be accessed on the connection screw terminal of the module. The operating principle is as follows: 2 b Module alarm relay located on the processor rack (rack 0): in normal operation, PLC in RUN, the alarm relay is activated and its contact is closed (state ). Whenever the application stops, even partially, occurrence of a blocking fault, incorrect output voltages or loss of mains power, the relay de-energizes and the associated contact opens (state 0). b Alarm relay of power supply modules located on other racks (racks to 7): when the module is powered up and if the output voltages are correct, the relay is activated and its contact is closed (state ). When the mains power is lost or if the output voltages are incorrect, the relay de-energizes (state 0). Back-up battery Each power supply module has a slot reserved for a battery which provides the power supply to the internal RAM memory located in the processors, in order to ensure that data is saved when the PLC is switched off. The duration of data back-up is one year. The battery must be changed as soon as the BAT lamp (red) on the front panel lights up. RESET pushbutton Pressing this pushbutton, which is located on the front panel of the power supply module, triggers a sequence of service signals which is the same as that for: b A power break when the pushbutton is pressed b A power up when the pushbutton is released These operations are expressed by the application as a warm restart. Sensor power supply The TSX PSY 2600M/00M/800M a.c. power supply modules have an integrated power supply which provides a voltage of c 2 V to supply the input sensors. Connection to this sensor power supply can be accessed via the module screw terminal. The available power on c 2 V depends on model (0,/0,8/,6 A), see characteristics page 2/. Description: page 2/2 2/ Characteristics: page 2/ References: page 2/

References, dimensions, mounting platform 2 Power supply and fan modules References Each TSX RKY p/pex rack must be equipped with a single or double format power supply module (slot marked PS). The power required to supply each TSX RKY rack depends on the type and number of modules installed in the rack. It is therefore necessary to establish a power consumption table rack by rack in order to determine the TSX PSY power supply module most suitable for each rack. Power supply module Power Available power () Format Reference Weight supply c V c 2 VR c 2 VC Total (2) kg c 2 V non W W 0W Standard TSX PSY 60M 0.0 isolated () W 9W 0W Double TSX PSY 60M 0.780 2 TSX PSY 2600M c 2...8 V isolated a 00 20 V a 00 20 V a 200 20 V W 9W 0W Double TSX PSY 20M 0.890 2 W W 2 W 26 W Standard TSX PSY 2600M 0.0 W 9 W 9 W 0 W Double TSX PSY 00M 0.620 7 W 8 W (SELV) 77 W Double TSX PSY 800M 0.70 Accessories Description Use Quantity Reference Weight kg Battery Internal RAM memory backup (position battery TSX PLP 0 0.00 in power supply modules) 0 batteries TSX PLP 0 0.00 TSX PSY 00M TSX FAN ppp Fan modules Description Use Power supply Reference Weight kg Fan modules For TSX RKY p or () TSX RKY pex racks c 2 V TSX FAN D2P 0.00 a 00 20 V TSX FAN AP 0.00 a 200 20 V TSX FAN AP 0.00 () Voltages c Vandc 2 VR for power supply to Premium modules, voltage c 2 VC for supplying power to input sensors. The sum of absorbed power on each voltage (c V, c 2 VR and c 2 VC) should not exceed the total power of the module. (2) Product supplied with a RAM memory backup battery and multilingual installation guide (racks and power supplies) English, French, German, Spanish and Italian. () The internal 0 V of the module is connected to the PLC earth. () One fan module for rack with or 6 positions, two fan modules for rack with 8 positions and three fan modules for rack with 2 positions. Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. Dimensions/mounting TSX FAN pp Side view Front view Fan module mounting 8 8 0 6 88,9 8, Description: page 2/2 Characteristics: page 2/ Functions: page 2/ 2/

Presentation, description platform 2 Single rack configuration Presentation TSX RKY ppp racks form the basic elements of the Premium control system platform withasinglerack(6,8or2positions). These racks provide the following functions: 2 b Mechanical function: they enable all the modules of a PLC station (power supply, processor, discrete I/O, analogue I/O, application-specific modules) to be fitted. b Electrical function: they enable connection to the bus (Bus X) and provide distribution of: v power supplies required for each module in the same rack, v data and service signals for the entire PLC station where this has several racks. TSX FAN ppp fan modules installed above the racks of Premium PLCs provide forced air convection, in order to maintain an even ambient temperature inside the enclosure and to eliminate the various hot spots that may exist (voir page 2/2). 8 7 9 6 2 Description TSX RKY ppp racks comprise: Metal frame. 2 Slots for anchoring the module pins. 8-way female /2 DIN connectors for module-rack connections (the first connector is reserved for the power supply module). Locating slot for the power supply module. Tapped holes for fixing the module. 6 Four holes for mounting the rack. 7 Position for rack address label. 8 Position for station network address label. 9 Two earth terminals for earthing the rack. 2/6

References, dimensions, mounting platform 2 Single rack configuration TSX RKY 6 Dimensions, mounting TSX RKY Common side view, 60 () a 200 (2) Mounting of racks on AM PA perforated plate Front view : TSX RKY 6 exemple 6 () Non-extendable racks Description Non-extendable racks, for single rack configuration Type of modules to be installed TSX PSY power supply, TSX P7 processor, I/O modules, application-specific modules Connection accessories () Limits of electromagnetic emissions, see () page 9/7. Capacity Reference Weight kg 6 positions TSX RKY 6 ().70 8 positions TSX RKY 8 ().70 2 positions TSX RKY 2 2.0 Description Use Comprising Unit reference Weight kg Protectivecovers (Sold in lots of ) Mountingscrews M6x2 (Sold in lots of 0) Unoccupied position on TSX RKY p or TSX RKY pex racks Mounting for TSX RKY p or TSX RKY pex racks a TSX RKY 6 26.6 TSX RKY 8. TSX RKY 2 82.6 () With screw terminal bloc (2) With HE 0 or SUB-D type connectors Installation rules screw-on covers TSX RKA 02 0.00 Captive screw and washer with hexagonal slotted head TSX ACC VA62 0.0 2 AF-EA6 6 8,7 trous() a b 8,7 88,9,,, 0 0 () 0 () 00 a 00 () a a (2) (2) (2) a a a () on AM ED profiles AF-CF6 88,9 = = a b a 0 mm TSX RKY 6 2. 26.6 () Equipment or enclosure TSX RKY 8 7.8. (2) Cable ducting or clip TSX RKY 2 6. 82.6 () 0mmwithTSXFANppP fan module () For mounting on panel: the diameter of the fixing holes must be sulficient for an M6 screw a () TSX RKY 6 fan module per rack TSX RKY 8 2 fan module per rack TSX RKY 2 fan module per rack 2/7

Presentation platform 2 Multi-racks configuration without remote module 2 Composition of a PLC station 2 00 m max. (without bus X remote) Using TSX RKY 6/8/2 standard racks, it is possible to constitute a PLC station with Premium processors, with just a single rack. Using TSK RKY EX/6EX/8EX/2EX () extendable racks, a PLC station can be constituted which comprises up to: b racks for a station with TSX 7 0 processor, b 6 racks for a station with TSX 7 20, 7 0, 7 0, 7 0 Premium processor or Atrium slot-plcs. The racks are connected to each other by bus X extension cables 2. Bus X The racks distributed on bus X are connected to each other via bus X extension cables whose total length is 00 m maximum. Using TSX REY 200 bus X remote modules enables the length of bus X to be increased to a maximum of 2 x 0 m (see page 2/2). The racks are connected to each other using TSX CBY pp0k bus X extension cables which are connected to one of the two 9-way SUB-D connectors on each extendable rack. The incoming cable from another rack can be connected to either the right or left-hand connector. Line terminations The two extendable racks located at the ends of the line must have a TSX TLY EX line terminator fitted on the unused 9-way SUB-D type connector, except when using PCX 7 coprocessors where the line terminator is supplied with the coprocessor module. Presentation of extentable racks TSX RKY ppex racks form the basic elements of the Premium control system platform. These racks provide the following functions: b Mechanical function: they enable all the modules of a PLC station (power supply, processor, discrete I/O, analogue I/O, application-specific modules) to be fitted. b Electrical function: they enable connection to the bus (bus X) and provide distribution of: v power supplies required for each module in the same rack, v data and service signals for the entire PLC station where this has several racks. To meet user requirements, several types of rack are available in order to make up PLC stations comprising to 6 racks maximum distributed over bus X with a maximum cumulative length of 00 meters. TSX FAN ppp fan modules installed above the racks of Premium PLCs provide forced air convection, in order to maintain an even ambient temperature inside the enclosure and to eliminate the various hot spots that may exist (see page 2/2). 2/8

Description, functions platform 2 Multi-racks configuration without remote module Description TSX RKY ppp racks comprise: 0 8 7 9 6 2 Metal frame. 2 Slots for anchoring the module pins. 8-way female /2 DIN connectors for module-rack connections (the first connector is reserved for the power supply module). Locating slot for the power supply module. Tapped holes for Mounting the module. 6 Four holes for mounting the rack. 7 Position for rack address label. 8 Position for station network address label. 9 Two earth terminals for earthing the rack. 0 Microswitches for coding the rack address (on extendable racks). Two 9-way female SUB-D connectors for the remote connection of bus X to another rack (on extendable racks). 2 Address rack n (with power supply standard format) less-significant most-significant PS 00 0 02 0 0 PS 08 09 0 2 Rack addresses Address 0: this address is always assigned to the rack which holds the processor. This rack can be located in any position on the line. Addresses to 7: these can be assigned in any order to all the other extendable racks of the station. As the two racks with,6, or 8 slots which make up each pair can have the same address on the bus X, position numbers are defined as follows: b Rack n less-significant : position 00 to xx (02, 0 or 06); rack n most-significant : position08toyy(0,2or). b Each rack with 2 slots holds an address (with position 00 to 0). PS 00 PS 00 0 02 0 0 0 06 0 02 0 0 0 06 Installing the various modules on the standard or extendable rack with address 0 The rack with address 0 must contain a power supply module and the processor module. For Premium PLCs which have two types of power supply (standard or double format), the position of the processor (standard or double format) will depend on the type of power supply used. Using a standard format power supply module: b The power supply module systematically occupies position PS. b The processor module must be installed in position 00/0 (00 with standard format processor). b The other modules are installed from position 02 (0 with standard format processor). Using a double format power supply module: b The power supply module systematically occupies positions PS and 00. b The processor module must be installed in position 0/02 (0 with standard format processor). b The other modules are installed from position 0 (02 with standard format processor). PS 00 0 02 0 0 0 06 PS 00 0 02 0 0 0 06 Installing the various modules on extendable racks with addresses to 7 Each rack must have either a standard format or double format power supply module. Using a standard format power supply module: b The power supply module systematically occupies position PS. b The other modules are installed from position 00 onwards. Using a double format power supply module: b The power supply module systematically occupies positions PS and 00. b The other modules are installed from position 0 onwards. 2/9

References platform 2 Multi-racks configuration without remote module 2 TSX RKY 6EX TSX TLY EX Extendable racks Description Extendable racks for multi-racks configuration (maximum 6 racks) () Type of modules to be installed TSX PSY power supply, TSX P7 processor (main rack), I/O modules, application-specific modules Connection accessories Capacity Reference Weight kg positions TSX RKY EX.60 6 positions TSX RKY 6EX.00 8 positions TSX RKY 8EX.780 2 positions TSX RKY 2EX 2.0 Description Use Comprising Length Unit reference Weight kg Daisy chaining cables Bus X (total length 00 m maxi mum) (2) Cable on reel Line terminators (sold in lots of 2) Protective covers (Soldinlotsof) Bus X connectors (Soldinlotsof2) Installation of connectors Mounting screws M6x2 (Sold in lots of 0) Between TSXRKYpEX racks Length to be fitted with TSX CBY K9 connectors Compulsory on the 2TSXRKYpEX end racks Unoccupied position on TSX RKY p or TSX RKY pex racks For TSX CBY 000 cable ends Mounting of TSX CBY K9 connectors Mounting for TSX RKY p or TSX RKY pex racks 2x9-way SUB-D connectors Cable with free ends, 2linetesters 2x9-waySUB-D connectors labelled A and B m TSX CBY 00K 0.60 m TSX CBY 00K 0.260 m TSX CBY 00K 0.60 2 m TSX CBY 20K.260 8 m TSX CBY 80K.860 28 m TSX CBY 280K 2.860 8 m TSX CBY 80K.860 0 m TSX CBY 00K.060 72 m TSX CBY 720K 7.260 00 m TSX CBY 000K 0.060 00 m TSX CBY 000 2.20 TSX TLY EX 0.00 screw-oncovers TSX RKA 02 0.00 2x9-waySUB-D connectors 2crimpingpliers, pen() Captive screw and washer with hexagonal slotted head TSX CBY K9 0.080 TSX CBY ACC 0 TSX ACC VA62 0.0 () 6 racks TSX RKY EX/6EX/8EX maximum (, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 2EX (2 slots) is the same as occupying 2 racks with, 6 or 8 slots. (2) 2 x 0 m maximum when using the TSX REY 200 bus X remote module (see page 2/2). () Installation of connectors on the cable also requires a wire stripper, a pair of scissors and a digital ohmmeter. 2/0

Dimensions, mounting platform 2 Multi-racks configuration without remote module TSX RKY Common side view, Front view : TSX RKY 6EX example a TSX RKY EX 87.9 TSX RKY 6EX 26.6 TSX RKY 8EX. TSX RKY 2EX 82.6 6 () 60 () a 200 (2) 2 () With screw terminal bloc (2) With HE 0 or SUB-D type connectors Mounting of racks on AM PA perforated plate Installation rules AF-EA6 6 8,7 trous() a b 8,7 88,9,,, 0 0 () 0 () 00 a 00 () a a (2) (2) (2) a a a () On AM ED profiles AF-CF6 = 88,9 = a a b a 0 mm TSX RKY EX 70. 87.9 () Equipment or enclosure TSX RKY 6EX 2. 26.6 (2) Cable ducting or clip TSX RKY 8EX 7.8. () 0mmwithTSXFANppP fan module TSX RKY 2EX 6. 82.6 () TSX RKY EX/6EX fan module per rack () For mounting on panel: the diameter of the fixing holes must TSX RKY 8EX 2 fan module per rack be sulficient for an M6 screw TSX RKY 2EX fan module per rack 2/

Presentation platform 2 Multi-racks configuration with remote module Presentation 2 Bus X for Premium PLCs can be used to connect eight 2 position racks or sixteen, 6 or 8 position racks, distributed over a maximum length of 00 metres (see page 2/9). For applications requiring longer distances between racks, the bus X remote rackmaster module: TSX REY 200 can be used to increase this distance up to a maximum of 0 metres without reducing performance. The bus X remote system is electrical. Using the bus X remote rackmaster module will not result in any loss of performance in reading or controlling I/O. The bus X remote system comprises: b One TSX REY 200 module called the master located on the rack at address 0 (rack supporting the processor 2 and the main bus X ). This module has 2 channels used to locate 2 bus X segments remotely at a maximum distance of 20 metres. b One or two TSX REY 200 modules called slaves located on each extendable rack. b Each slave module is connected to the master module by a TSX CBRY 200 cable, which the user should cut and fit with TSX CBRY K connectors as required (cabling does not require any special equipment). Each end of the bus should be fitted with a TSX TLY EX line terminator 6. 6 Bus X 00 m 6 2 Remote location of bus X at 20 m max. 6 Bus X 6 00 m Remote location of bus X at 20 m max. 6 Bus X 00 m 6 Implantations The rules for installing the bus X remote rackmaster module, TSX REY 200, are as follows : b Bus X remote rackmaster module acting as a master. It is installed on the rack at address 0 supporting the processor with : v The power supply module systematically occupying position(s) PS (and 00). The processor module must be installed in position 0 (and 02 if it is a double format processor). v The bus X remote rackmaster module, TSX REY 200, can be installed in any position after 02 (or 0 if it is a double format processor). b Bus X remote rackmaster module acting as a slave. It is installed in an extendable rack (located on an extendable bus X segment) in any position apart from the positions dedicated to the power supply module. Description: page 2/ References: page 2/ 2/2

Description, references platform 2 Multi-racks configuration with remote module Maximum distances for remote location From one remote system, the maximum permitted distances from the processor are shown in the table below: Types of modules References Bus X remote system Discrete inputs (a) TSX DEY ppp 20 m Discrete outputs TSX DSY ppp Preventa safety module TSX PAY ppp Discrete I/O (b) TSX DMY 7 m less then the Analogue I/O (c) TSX AEY ppp/asy ppp lenght of bus X Counting/motion modules (d) TSX CTY pa/cty 2C/CAY 2/CAY/ CFY p Weighing module TSX ISP Y0/Y AS-Interface bus module TSX SAY 00/000 SERCOS motion module TSX CSY 8/6 Remote location of Communication module TSX SCY 260/60 bus X not permitted Ethernet modules TSX ETY pppp Fieldbus modules TSX IBY 00/PBY00 (a) TSX DEY 6FK (version 06) 22 m less then the (b) TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK lenght of bus X (c) TSX AEY 80/6 TSX ASY 0 (version ) (d) TSX CTY 2C/CCY 28 TSX CAY 22/2/ Description 2 2 The front panel of the bus X remote rackmaster module TSX REY 200 comprises: A display block with 6 indicator lamps: v RUN indicator: module running v ERR indicator: module has internal fault v I/O indicator: module has external fault v MST indicator: module acting as master or slave v CH0 indicator: channel 0 operating v CH indicator: channel operating 2 -way SUB-D 9 connector for the connection of channel 0. -way SUB-D 9 connector for the connection of channel. References Description Operation Number of channels Reference () Extendable racks /6/8/2 positions See page 2/0 Weight kg Bus X remote Master/slave 2 TSX REY 200 rackmaster module Connection cables and accessories Description Use Length Reference Weight kg Bus X cables Connection of two 20 m TSX CBRY 200 supplied on a drum TSX REY 200 modules Class C flame resistance Cable for daisy chain mounting (2) 20 m TSX CBRY 200F -ways SUB-D 9 connectors (soldinlotsof) Connections for bus X cable TSX CBRY K TSX REY 200 Description Use Composition Reference Weight kg Line terminators (soldinlotsof2) Must be fitted on eachtsx RKY pex end rack 2 x 9-way SUB-D connectors TSX TLY EX 0.00 () Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide. (2) Mobile installations: cables as per VDE 72, part 60/H: - for use on cable drag chain with minimum bend radius of 7 mm, - for use on gantry crane (strikethrough: portal support), subject to compliance with conditions for use such as acceleration, speed, length etc: contact our regional branch office for further information. - not authorized for use on robots, or multi-axis applications. Presentation: page 2/2 2/

/0

Contents - Discrete and analog I/O. - Discrete I/O modules Selectionguide:Inputandinput/outputmodules...page/2 Selectionguide:Outputmodules...page/ b Discrete I/O modules v Principle, description... page/6 v Characteristics.... page/9 v References... page/ v Connections.... page/7.2 - Analog I/O modules Selectionguide:Inputandoutputmodules...page/20 b Analog I/O modules v Presentation, description... page/22 v Functions... page/2 v Characteristics.... page/2 v References... page/26. - Distributed I/O systems Selectionguide:IP20inputs/outputs...page/28 Selectionguide:IP20TBXdiscreteI/OonFipiobus...page/0 b TBX distributed discrete I/O modules v Presentation, functions... page/2 v Description... page/ v Characteristics... page/6 v References... page/0 v Connections.... page/2 v Dimensions and mounting... page/ Selectionguide:IP20TBXanalogI/OonFipiobus...page/6 b TBX distributed analog I/O modules v Description... page/8 v Characteristics... page/0 v References... page/ v Connections.... page/ Selectionguide:IP6/67splitterboxesandmodules...page/2 b TBX discrete I/O IP 6 modules on Fipio bus... page/ b Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus... page/60 b Discrete I/O IP 6 modules on INTERBus.... page/70. - Specialized I/O b Tego Power installation system v Presentation.... page/7 v Associations with Modicon automation platforms... page/76 /

Selection guide platform Discrete I/O modules Applications Connecting inputs to screw terminal blocks for bare wires fitted with either cable ends or open/closed cable tags. Type c c or a a Voltage 2 V 8 V 2 V 8 V 00 20V Modularity (Number of channels) 8 isolated channels 6 isolated channels Connection Via 20-way screw terminals: TSX BLY 0 Isolated inputs IEC 2 conformity Type 2 Isolated outputs Logic Positive Negative Sensor compatibility acc. toiec972standard 2 wire c/a, wire PNP c any type 2wirec/a, wirenpn c any type 2 wire c/a Fallback IEC 2 conformity Protection Logic Type of discrete input and I/O modules TSX DEY 08D2 Pages /2 Compatibility with Tego Tego Dial installation system Tego Power TSX DEY 6D2 TSX DEY 6D TSX DEY 6A2 TSX DEY 6A TSX DEY 6A Compatibility with Telefast pre-wired system Type of passive connection sub-bases Connection sub-bases Input adaptor sub-bases Maniature ( or 72 mm) Standard (06 or mm) /2 Large width (9 mm) Type of adaptor sub-base Solid input relays Plug-in relays Type of cables fitted with HE0 connectors

Connecting inputs to screw terminal blocks for bare wires fitted with either cable ends or open/closed cable tags Connecting inputs to HE 0 connectors with preformed cables with flying leads, rolled ribbon cables or multicore cables Connecting inputs to HE 0 connectors with preformed cables with flying leads, rolled ribbon cables or multicore cables. a c 200 20 V 2 V 8 V 2 V 6 isolated channels 6 fast isolated channels 2 isolated channels 6 isolated channels 2 isolated channels Via 20-way screw Via 20-way HE 0 connectors terminals: TSX BLY 0 Type Type Positive 2 wire c/a 2wirec/a,wirePNPc any type 6 isolated inputs and 2 isolated outputs 0. A Event-triggered fast inputs Programmable reflex inputs and outputs Output fallback may be configured, with continuous monitoring of output control and output reset in case of internal fault Yes Protected Positive TSX DEY 6A TSX DEY 6FK TSX DEY 2D2K TSX DEY 6D2K TSX DEY 2DK TSX DMY 28FK TSX DMY 28RFK /2 / Tego Dialbase 8I/8O APE B2M (see page /76) Communication module APP CH, control and power splitters APP 2RH2 8 ou 6 channels, with or without LED, with commom or 2 terminals per channel passive connection sub-bases 6 channels c VTTL,c 2 V, c 8 V, a V or 20 V, 2 terminals per channel adaptor sub-bases ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S2, ABE 7H6R0, ABE 7H20Eppp ABE 7H6S2, ABE 7H6R2, ABE 7H6Rp, ABE 7H6R2p, ABE 7H6Rp, ABE 7H6Cpp ABE 7H6S ABE 7H6R20 ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S2, ABE 7H6R0, ABE 7H20Eppp, ABE 7H2R0 ABE 7H6Rp, ABE 7H6R2p, ABE 7H6Rp, ABE 7HCpp, ABE 7H6S2, ABE 7H6R2, ABE 7H2Rpp ABE 7H6S ABE 7S6E2pp ABE 7P6Fpp TSX CDP pp ou ABF H20pp0 /

Discrete output selection guide platform Discrete I/O modules Applications Connecting ouptuts to screw terminal blocks for bare wires or wires fitted with either cable ends or open/closed cable tags (minimum cross-section 0.28 mm 2, maximum. mm 2 ). Type c transistor c our a relay Voltage 2 V 8 V c 2 V, a 2 20 V Current 0. A 2A 0. A A 0.2 A A(lth) Modularity (number of channels) 8 channels, protected 6 channels, protected 8 channels, protected 6 channels, protected 8 channels not protected 6 channels not protected Connection Via 20-way screw terminals: TSX BLY 0 Isolated outputs Fallback Output fallback may be configured, with continuous monitoring of output control and output reset in cse of internal fault IEC 2 conformity Yes Output fallback may be configured Protection Protected Not protected Logic Positive Types of discrete output module TSX DSY 08T2 Pages / TSX DSY 08T22 TSX DSY 6T2 TSX DSY 08T TSX DSY 6T TSX DSY 08R TSX DSY 6R Compatibility with Tego installation system Compatibility with Telefast pre-wired system Type of passive connection sub-bases Tego Dial Tego Power Connection sub-bases Input adaptor sub-bases Maniature ( or 72 mm) Standard (06 or mm) Large width (9 mm) Type of adaptor sub-base Solid input relays Plug-in relays Type of cables fitted with HE0 connectors /

Connecting ouptuts to screw terminal blocks for bare wires or wires fitted with either cable ends or open/closed cable tags (minimum cross-section 0.28 mm 2, maximum. mm 2 ) Connecting outputs to HE 0 connectors with preformed cables with flying leads (cross-section.2 mm 2 ), rolled ribbon cables (cross-section 0.08 mm 2 ) or multicore cables (cross-section 0.2 mm 2 ). c our a c relay a triac c transistor relay c 2 8 V 2 V a 2 20V 2 20 V 8 20 V 2 20 V A(lth) A(lth) 2Aper channel Aper channel 8 channels, protected 6 channels, protected Aper channel 6 channels, not protected 0. A per channel 2 channels, protected 6 channels, protected Via 20-way screw terminals: TSX BLY 0 Via 20-way HE 0 connectors Output fallback may be configured Output fallback may be configured, with continuous monitoring of output control and output reset in case of internal fault Yes Protected Not Protected protected Positive TSX DSY 08RA TSX DSY 08RD TSX DSY 08S TSX DSY 6S TSX DSY 6S TSX DSY 2T2K TSX DSY 6T2K / Tego Dialbase 8I/8O APE B2M (see page /76) Communication module APP CH, control and power splitters APP 2RH2 8 or 6 channels, with or without LED, with common or 2 terminals per channel 8 or 6 relay channels with N/O, or 2 C/O or transistor, c 8 V, c 2 V, a 2 20 V or 2 terminals per channel ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S2 ABE 7H6S2 ABE 7H6F ABE 7S08S2pp, ABE 7R08Sppp, ABE 7S6Sppp, ABE 7R6Sppp ABE 7P08T0, ABE 7R6Tppp, ABE 7P6Tppp TSX CDP pp ou ABF H20pp0 ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S2 /

Principle platform Discrete I/O modules. 2 Connecting modules with screw terminal blocks Discrete I/O module terminal blocks have a device for automatically transferring the coding when first used. This prevents manipulation errors when a module is replaced. This coding ensures electrical compatibility for the type of module. Each terminal can accept bare wires or wire with cable ends with open tags. The capacity of each terminal is: b Minimum: x 0.2 mm 2 wire (AWG 2) without cable end. b Maximum: x 2 mm 2 wire (AWG ) without cable end or x. mm 2 wire (AWG ) with cable end. Screw connection terminal blocks are equipped with captive screws. The maximum terminal block capacity is 6 x mm 2 (AWG 7) wires + x. mm 2 (AWG ) wires. Connecting modules with HE 0 connectors Preformed cable with 20 wires, 22-gauge (0.2 mm 2 ) Used for simple and direct wire to wire connection of the I/O of the module with connectors to the sensors, preactuators or terminals. This preformed cable comprises: b An insulated HE0 2 connector at one of the ends, with 20 x 0. mm 2 cross-section sheathed wires. b At the other end, flying leads differentiated by a colour code conforming to standard DIN 700. TSX CDP 0: metres long, TSX CDP 0: metres long, TSX CDP 00: 0 metres long. Rolled ribbon cable with sheath, 28-gauge (0.08 mm 2 ) Preformed cable Used for connecting I/O of modules with HE 0 connectors to Telefast 2 fast wiring 2 connection and adaptation interfaces. This cable has 2 HE 0 connectors and a rolled ribbon cable with sheath with 0.08 mm2 cross-section wires. Given the small cross-section of the wires, it is recommended for use with low current I/O only (00 ma maximum per output). TSX CDP 02: metre long, TSX CDP 202: 2 metres long, TSX CDP 02: metres long. 6 Connection cable, 22-gauge (0.2 mm 2 ) Used for connecting the I/O of modules with HE 0 connectors to Telefast 2 fast wiring 2 connection and adaptation interfaces. This cable has 2 insulated HE 0 connectors 6 and a cable for carrying higher currents (00 ma maximum). 6 2 TSX CDP 0: 0. metres long, TSX CDP 0: metre long, TSX CDP 20: 2 metres long, TSX CDP 0: metres long, TSX CDP 0: metres long. TSX CDP 00: 0 metres long. Rolled ribbon and connection cable Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 /6 References: pages / and / Connections: pages / to /7

Principle (continued), description platform Discrete I/O modules Connection to Tego Dial and Tego Power systems TSX DEY 6FK/2D2K/6D2K input modules and TSX DSY 2T2K/6T2K output modules are specially designed for use in conjunction with Tego Dial and Tego Power systems (). The modules are easily connected using a TSX CDP pp connecting cable 2 to the Dialbase sub-base APE B2M installed on the Dialpack terminal equipped with a panel which enables operator dialogue. 2. 2 () See pages /70 and 7/. Description Discrete I/O modules are standard format ( slot). They have a plastic case which ensures IP 20 protection of the electronics. I/O modules with screw terminal connection A display block for channels and module diagnostics. 2 A removable screw terminal for direct connection of the I/O to the sensors and preactuators, TSX BLY 0 (connectors to be ordered separately). A pivoting cover for accessing the terminal block screws and holding the identification label. A rotating support containing the module locating device. 2 I/O modules with connection via HE 0 connector A display block for channels and module diagnostics. 2 HE 0 connectors, protected by a cover. They are used to connect the I/O to sensors and preactuators either directly, or via Telefast 2 connection sub-bases. Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 References: pages / and / Connections: pages / to /7 /7

Functions platform Discrete I/O modules Functions I/O assignment Each module is functionally organised into groups of 8 channels. Each group of channels can be assigned a specific application task. Reactivation of outputs If a fault has caused an output to trip, the output can be reactivated if no other terminal fault is present. The reactivation command, defined during configuration, can be automatic (reactivation every 0 seconds) or controlled via the program. Reactivation is carried out in groups of 8 channels. This function can be accessed onmodules with solid state d.c. outputs. For relay and triac output modules protected by fuse, the same type of reactivation (automatic or via program) is necessary after replacement of one or more fuses.. RUN/STOP command An input can be configured to control the RUN/STOP mode for the PLC. The command is accepted on a rising edge. A STOP command via an input takes priority over a change to RUN via the terminal or via a network command. Output fallback When an application is placed in STOP mode, outputs must be set to a state which is not harmful to the application. This state, known as the fallback position, is defined for each module when its outputs are configured. This configuration enables the choice between: b fallback: channels are set to state 0 or depending on the fallback value entered. b maintain: outputs retain the state they were in before the PLC stopped. Diagnostic functions b module diagnostics: any exchange fault preventing normal operation of an output module or fast input module is signalled. Similarly, any internal module fault is signalled. b process diagnostics: sensor/preactuator voltage check, terminal block presence check, short-circuit and overload check, sensor voltage check, preactuator voltage check. Specific functions of the TSX DEY 6FK and TSX DMY 28 FK module inputs b Latching: accepts particularly short pulses with a duration of less than the PLC scan time. b Event input: enables events to be accepted and ensures their immediate processing (processing on interrupt). These inputs are associated with event processing (EVTi) and defined in configuration mode where: i = 0 to for TSX P7 0 processors, i = 0 to 6 for TSX P7 20/0/0 and coprocessors Atrium T PCX. b Event processing can be triggered on a rising edge (0 ) or falling edge ( 0) of the associated input. A masking/unmasking function for TSX DEY 6FK/DMY 28FK inputs is available in online mode. b Programmable input filtering: inputs are equipped with filtering which can be configured for each channel. Inputs are filtered by a fixed analogue filter which ensures a maximum immunity of 0. ms for filtering line interference and by a digital filter which can be configured from 0. to 7. ms in increments of 0. ms. Reflex and timer functions for the TSX DMY 28RFK module Can be used to create applications which require a faster response time than the FAST task or event processing (< 00 µs). These control system functions are executed in the module and are independent of the PLC task. They are programmed using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software in configuration mode. Removal when powered up Due to their integrated devices, I/O modules (including application-specific modules) can be removed and connected while powered up. Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 /8 References: pages / and / Connections: pages / to /7

Functions (continued), characteristics platform Discrete I/O modules Functions (suite) 2/ wire compatibility Type of input All wire c sensors, PNP c 2 V type positive logic c 2/8 V type 2 positive logic c 2 V negative logic a 2/8 V a 00 20 V type 2 a 200 20 V type 2 All wire c sensors, NPN Telemecanique 2-wire c sensor or others with the following characteristics: - residual voltage, closed < 7V - minimum switching current < 2. ma - residual current, open <. ma 2-wire c/a sensor 2-wire a sensor () In nominal voltage range a 220 20 V. Compatible Characteristics Environment Conformity to standards NFC 6 80, IEC 66, IEC 2, UL 08, UL7 6C, CSA 22 2 n 2 Temperature derating Characteristics at 60 C are ensured for 60 % of inputs and 60 % of outputs at state () (). Characteristics of input modules c 2/8 V Type of module TSX DEY 08D2/6D2 TSX DEY 6D TSX DEY 6A2 TSX DEY 6FK TSX DEY 2D2K TSX DEY 6D2K Number of inputs 8/6 6 6 6 2 6 2 Connections Screw terminal Nominal input values Voltage V c 2 (pos. logic) Screw terminal c8 (pos. logic) Screw terminal c 2 (neg. logic) HE 0 connector c 2 (pos. logic) Fast inputs HE 0 connector c 2 (pos. logic) HE 0 connector c 2 (pos. logic) Current ma 7 7 6... 7 TSX DEY 2DK HE 0 connector c 8 (pos. logic) Sensor supply (ripple included) V 9 0 8 60 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 8 60 Input limit values At state Voltage V 0 Ual- V 0 Current ma 6, 6. 6. 6. (pour U=0V) At state 0 Voltage V 0 Ual- 0 Current ma 2 2 2... 2 Impédance d'entrée à l'état KΩ 7.6 6. 6. 6. Temps de réponse Typique ms 0 Configurable from 0. to Maximum ms 7 7 20 7. 7 7 7 Conformité IEC 2 Type 2 Type 2 Type 2 Type Type Type Type 2 Compatibility 2-wire/-wire prox. sensor IEC972 IEC972 IEC972 See table on page /9 IEC 97 2 Isolation resistance MΩ >0 at c 00 V Dielectric strength Veff 00-0/60 Hz for minute Type of input Current sink Resistive Current sink Consumption See page 9/ Dissipated power No. = No. of channels W + 0. Nb +0.Nb +0.Nb.2+0.Nb +0.Nb. + 0.Nb 2+ 0. Nb Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 Connections: pages / to /7 /9

Characteristics (continued) platform Discrete I/O modules Characteristics of a.c. input modules Type of module TSX DEY 6A2 TSX DEY 6A TSX DEY 6A TSX DEY 6A Number of inputs 6 6 6 6 Nominal input values Voltage V a 2 a 8 a 0 a 220 Current ma 6 2 Frequency Hz 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 Sensor supply (ripple included) V 20 26 0 2 8 2 70 26 Input limit values At state Voltage V 0 29 7 9 Current ma 6 6 6 6 At state 0 Voltage V 0 20 0 Current ma Input impedance at state for 2 V KΩ.6.2 9.2 20 Response time Typical ms 0 0 0 Maximum ms 20 20 20 20. IEC2conformity Type 2 Type 2 Type 2 Type 2 Compatibility 2-wire/-wire prox. sensor IEC972 Isolation résistance MΩ >0atc 00 V Dialectic strength Veff 00-0/60 Hz for minute Type of input Resistive Capacitive Consumption Seepage9/ Dissipated power W 0,89 0.86 0.8 0.97 Characteristics of solid state modules with terminal block Type of module TSX DSY 08T2/6T2 TSX DSY 08T22 TSX DSY 08T TSX DSY 6T Output nominal values Voltage V c 2 c 2 c 8 c 8 Current A 0. 2 0.20 Output limit values Voltage V 9 0 9 0 8 60 8 60 Current/channel A 0.62 2..2 0. Current/module A /7 7 Leakage current At state 0 ma <0. < < <0. Residual voltage V <.2 <0. < <. Min. load impedance W 8 2 8 92 Response time.2 ms 200 µs 200 µs.2 ms Switching frequency on inductive load Hz 0./LI2 Built-in protection Against overvoltages Yes, by Transil diode Against inversions Yes, by reverse mounted diode, use a fuse on the + 2 V or + 8 V of the preactuators Against short-circuits and Electronic tripping on reactivation (automatic or via program) overloads Preactuator voltage detection threshold V 6 Isolation resistance MΩ >0sousc 00 V Dielectric strength Veff 00-0/60 Hz for minute Consumption See page 9/ Nominal power Dissipated W /.. 2.2 2. Per output x module current + (0.7 W) +(0.2 W) + (0. W) + (0.8 W) Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 Connections: pages / to /7 /0

Characteristics (continued) platform Discrete I/O modules Characteristics of 0 VA relay output modules Type of module TSX DSY 08R/6R Voltage a.c. Nominal V a 2 20 Limit V a 20 26 d.c. Nominal V c 2 2 Limit V c 0 Thermal current A Voltage V 2 8 0 220 a.c. load AC-2 duty, Power VA 0 () 0 (6), 0 () 0 (6), 220 () 220 (6) resistive d.c. load AC- and AC- duty, inductive DC-2 duty, resistive DC- duty, inductive Power VA 2 () 0 (0), 2 (8) 0 (), 0 (7), 0 (2) 0 (), 0 (9) 0 (6), 220 () Power W 2 (6), 0 () Power W 0 (8), 2 (6) Response time Activation ms <8 Deactivation ms <0. Type of contact Normally open Built-in protection Against averloads and short-circuits Against a.c. inductive overvoltages None, each channel or group of channels must have a fast blow fuse None, an RC circuit MOV (ZNO) peak limiter circuit appropriate to the voltage must be mounted in parallel across the terminals of each preactuator Against d.c. inductive overvoltages None, a discharge diode must be fitted across the terminals of each preactuator Isolation resistance MΩ > 0 at c 00 V Dielectric strength Veff 2000-0/60 Hz for minute Consumption See page 9/ Dissipated nominal power W 0.2 W + (0.2 W x No. of outputs at ) () For 0. x 0 6 operating cycles. (2) For 0. x 0 6 operating cycles. () For 0. x 0 6 operating cycles. () For 0. x 0 6 operating cycles. () For 0.7 x 0 6 operating cycles. (6) For x 0 6 operating cycles. (7) For. x 0 6 operating cycles. (8) For 2 x 0 6 operating cycles. (9) For x 0 6 operating cycles. (0)For x 0 6 operating cycles. ()For 0 x 0 6 operating cycles. Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 Connections: pages / to /7 /

Characteristics (continued) platform Discrete I/O modules Characteristics of 00 VA relay output modules Type of module TSX DSY 08RD TSX DSY 08RA Operating a.c. Nominal V a 2 20 voltage Limit V a 20 26 d.c. Nominal V c 2 0 c 2 8 Limit V c 9 c 9 60 Thermal current A. Voltage V 2 8 00 20 220 20 a.c. load AC-2 duty, Power VA 00 () 00 (6) 220 (6) 0 (6) resistive 200 () 0 () AC- and AC- duty, inductive Power VA 0 () 20 (0) 0 (8) Voltage V 2 8 00 0 2 8 d.c. load DC-2 duty, Power W 0 (6) 00 (6) 220 (6) 2 (6) 0 (6) resistvie 00 () 200 () 0 () 0 () 00 () DC- duty, inductive Power W 20 (8) 0 (6) 0 (8) 00 (6) 0 (8) 220 (6) 0 (8) 2 (6) Response time Activation ms <0 Deactivation ms < Type of contacts 2x2 O/F,2x2 F Built-in Against averloads and short-circuits Interchangeable 6. A fast blow fuse per common protection Against overvoltages RC circuit and Ge-Mov 2 (8) 0 (6) 20 () 0 (7) 220 (2) 20 () 0 (9) 220 (6) 0 () Isolation resistance MΩ >0atc 00 V Dielectric strength Veff 2000-0/60 Hz Consumption See page 9/ Dissipated nominal power No: number of outputs at W 0.2 + 0.2 Nb Characteristics of triac output modules Type of module TSX DSY 08S TSX DSY 6S TSX DSY 6S Operating a.c. Nominal V a 8 20 a 2 20 voltage Limit V a 26 a 20 2 Permissible current A 2 A per channel - 2 A per module Response time Activation ms 0 Deactivation ms 0 A per channel - 2 A per module A per channel - 2 A per module Built-in Against overvoltages Ge-Mov protection Against averloads and short-circuits Fast blow fuse per common < A Non interchangeable fireproof protection per common, 0 A Isolation resistance MΩ >0atc 00 V Dielectric strength Veff 2000-0/60 Hz Consumption See page 9/ See page 9/ Dissipated power 0. W + W/A per output 0.8 W + W/A per output 0.8 W + W/A per output () For 0. x 0 6 operating cycles. (2) For 0. x 0 6 operating cycles. () For 0. x 0 6 operating cycles. () For 0. x 0 6 operating cycles. () For 0.7 x 0 6 operating cycles. (6) For x 0 6 operating cycles. (7) For. x 0 6 operating cycles. (8) For 2 x 0 6 operating cycles. (9) For x 0 6 operating cycles. (0)For x 0 6 operating cycles. ()For 0 x 0 6 operating cycles. Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 Connections: pages / to /7 /2

Characteristics (continued) platform Discrete I/O modules Characteristics of solid state output modules with connector Type of module TSX DSY 2T2K TSX DSY 6T2K Logic Positive Operatingvoltage d.c. Nominal V c 2 (ripple included) Limit V c 9 0, possible up to V, limited to hr per 2 hr period Permissible current A 0. A per channel, -.2 A per module 0. A per channel, - A per module Filament lamp max power W.2 Residual voltage V <. for I = 0. A Response time ms.2 Paralleling of outputs Yes: max Leakage current ma < 0. for U = 0 V Compatibility with d.c. inputs IEC and 2 Built-in protection Against overvoltages Against overloads and short-circuits Yes, transil diode Automatic trip after ms Against polarity inversion Reverse diode (place a A fuse on the 2 V) Load impedance At state W > 220 Isolation resistance MΩ >0atc 00 V Dielectric strength Veff 00-0/60 Hz for minute Consumption See page 9/ Dissipated power W.6 W + 0. W/output 2. W + 0. W/output Characteristics of I/O mixed modules with connector Type of module TSX DMY 28FK/TSX DMY 28RFK Fast inputs c 2 V Solid state outputs c 2 V Nominal values Voltage V c 2 c 2 Current ma. 00 Filament lamp max power W 6 Output limit values At state Voltage V Current ma At state 0 Voltage V Current ma. Sensor power supply (ripple included) V 9 0(possibleupto 0V,limitedtoin every 2 hours) Output limit values Voltage V 9 0 () Current/channel A 0. Current/module A Leakage current At state 0 ma < Residual voltage At state V <.2 Minimum load impedance W 8 Filter time Default ms Configurable ms 0. 7. (at intervals of 0.) Response time (2) ms 0.6 Type of input Current sink Paralleling of inputs () Yes Switching frequency on Hz 0./LF IEC -2 conformity Yes type Built-in Against overvoltages Yes, by transil diode protection Against inversions Yes, by inverted diode. Fuse required on + 2 V of preactuators Against short-circuits and overloads ms Compatibility 2-wire proximity sensor Yes (Telemecanique sensor and <. ma leakage current) -wire proximity sensor Yes. Preactuator voltage detection threshold V 6 Isolation resistance MΩ >0atc 00 V Dielectric strength Veff 00-0/60 Hz for minute Consumption See page 9/ Dissipated power W.2 + 0. x no. of inputs at Temperature derating Characteristics at 60 C Ensured for 60 % of inputs at state Ensured for 60 % of the maximum current of the module () V possible for hour in every 2 hour period. (2) All outputs are equipped with an electro-magnet rapid demagnetisation circuit. Discharge time for electro-magnets < L/R. () This characteristic enables several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module, or on different modules for input redundancy. Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 Connections: pages / to /7 /

References platform Discrete I/O modules References Discrete input modules Type of current c Input voltage 2 V (pos. log.) Connection IEC 2 Modularity () conformity (no. of channels) Screw terminal block 6 isolated inputs Reference (2) Weight kg Type 2 8 isolated inputs TSX DEY 08D2 0.00 TSX DEY 6D2 0.00 TSX DEY 08D2 8 V (pos. log.) 2 V (pos. log.) Screw terminal block HE 0 connector Type 2 6 isolated inputs Type 6 isolated fast inputs () TSX DEY 6D 0.00 TSX DEY 6FK 0.00 2 isolated inputs TSX DEY 2D2K 0.00 6 isolated inputs TSX DEY 6D2K 0.70. TSX DEY 6FK TSX DEY 2DK a 0/60 Hz 2 V (neg. log.) 8 V (pos. log.) Screw terminal block HE 0 connector 2 V Screw terminal block 8 V Screw terminal block 00...20 V Screw terminal block 200...20 V Screw terminal Type 2 6 isolated inputs Type 2 2 isolated inputs Type 2 6 isolated inputs Type 2 6 isolated inputs Type 2 6 isolated inputs Type 2 6 isolated inputs TSX DEY 6A2 0.0 TSX DEY 2DK 0.0 TSX DEY 6A2 0.0 TSX DEY 6A 0.20 TSX DEY 6A 0.20 TSX DEY 6A 0.60 block () By connector: module supplied with cover. By screw terminal block: connection block to be ordered separately. (2) Multilingual Discrete I/O Quick Reference Guide included with each TSX P7 p0m processor. TSX DM 7p installation manual to be ordered separately (see page /29). () Module with isolated fast inputs (filtering from 0. to 7. ms) which can activate the event task. Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 Connections: pages / to /7 /

References (continued) platform Discrete I/O modules TSX DSY 6T2 References (continued) Discrete output modules (screw terminal block not supplied) Type of Output Connection IEC 2 Modularity Reference (2) Weight current voltage () conformity (no. of channels) kg c solid state 2 V/0. A (pos. log.) Screw terminal block Yes 8 protected outputs TSX DSY 08T2 0.20 c ou a relay 2 V/2 A (pos. log.) 2 V/0. A (pos. log.) 8 V/ A (pos. log.) Screw terminal block Screw terminal block Screw terminal block 8 V/0.2 A Screw (pos. log.) terminal block 2 V 0.A HE 0 per channel connector (pos. log.) c 2 V/ A, a 2 to 20 V/ A Screw terminal block Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 protected outputs 6 protected outputs 8 protected outputs 6 protected outputs 2 protected outputs 6 protected outputs 8 outputs, not protected 6 outputs, not protected TSX DSY 08T22 0.0 TSX DSY 6T2 0.0 TSX DSY 08T 0.20 TSX DSY 6T 0.0 TSX DSY 2T2K 0.00 TSX DSY 6T2K 0.60 TSX DSY 08R 0.0 TSX DSY 6R 0.80. TSX DSY 6T2K c 2 to 8 V/ A, a 2 to 20 V/ A Screw terminal block Yes 8 protected outputs TSX DSY 08RA 0.20 c relay a triac 2...20 V A 2...20 V A/channel 8...20 V A/channel Screw terminal block Screw terminal block Screw terminal block Yes Yes Yes 8 protected outputs 6 outputs, not protected 6 protected outputs TSX DSY 08RD 0.70 TSX DSY 6S 0.80 TSX DSY 6S 0.0 8...20 V Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08S 0.0 2 A/channel terminal outputs block () By connector: module supplied with cover. By screw terminal block: connection block to be ordered separately. (2) Multilingual Discrete I/O Quick Reference Guide included with each TSX P7 p0m processor. TSX DM 7p installation manual to be ordered separately (see page /29). Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 Connections: pages / to /7 /

References (continued) platform Discrete I/O modules Discrete I/O modules Number of I/O Connection No. and type No. and type IEC 2 Reference (2) () of inputs of outputs conformity 28 HE 0 connector 6 fast (pos. log.) () Weight kg 2, solid Input, type TSX DMY 28FK 0.20 state c 2 V/0. A protected Output, Yes. TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK TSX BLY 0 2 reflex or time-delayed c 2 V/0, A protected Input, type TSX DMY 28RFK 0.0 Connection terminal block Designation Use Reference Weight kg Screw connection terminal block 20-way To be ordered separately TSX BLY 0 0.00 with each I/O module with screw terminal block connection Connecting cables for I/O modules fitted with HE 0 connectors Description Constitution Use Section Length Reference Weight kg 20-wire pre-formed cable HE0 connector with colour coded flying leads 0.2 mm 2 m TSX CDP 0 0.00 m TSX CDP 0 0.660 0 m TSX CDP 00.20 Rolled ribbon connecting cable 2HE0 connectors for Telefast 2 system 0.08 mm 2 m TSX CDP 02 0.090 2m TSX CDP 202 0.70 m TSX CDP 02 0.20 TSX CDP p0 Connecting cables 2HE0 connectors for Telefast 2 system 0.2 mm 2 0. m TSX CDP 0 0.08 m TSX CDP 0 0.0 2m TSX CDP 20 0.280 TSX CDP p02 m TSX CDP 0 0.0 m TSX CDP 0 0.670 0 m TSX CDP 00.80 TSX CDP p0 0 2 0 2 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 Simulator sub-base Designation Use Reference Weight kg 6-channel Telefast 2 simulator Comprises 2 HE 0 connectors which allow it to be inserted between the PLC I/O ABE 7TES60 0.0 sub-base for discrete module and the Telefast I/O sub-base I/O ABE 7H/P/R/S. Enables display, forcing, inhibiting or continuity of discrete I/O () By connector: module supplied with cover. (2) Multilingual discrete I/O Quick Reference Guide included with each Premium processor. TSX DM 7 2p installation manual to be ordered separately (see page /29). () Module with isolated fast inputs (filtering from 0. to 7. ms) which can activate the event task. ABE 7TES60 Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 Connections: pages / to /7 /6

Connections platform Discrete I/O modules TSX DEY 08D2 TSX DEY 6D2 TSX DEY 6D TSX DEY 6FK FU + Sensor 0V c+2v 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Inputs 0 2 6 7 FU + Sensor 0 V c + 2 V 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Inputs 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 FU + Sensor Inputs Capteurs Sensor I00-> 0 blanc marron 2 2 2 vert jaune gris rose 6 7 6 bleu rouge 8 7 9 8 noir violet 0 9 0 gris-rose rouge-bleu 2 2 blanc-vert marron-vert 7 9 6 8 0 2 blanc-jaune jaune-marron 6 6 7 + 2 V blanc-gris 7 8 gris-marron 8 0 V FU 9 blanc-rose + 9 20 20 c + 8 V 0 V rose-marron Inputs Entrées 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 FU: 0. A fast-blow fuse FU: 0. A fast-blow fuse FU: 0. A fast-blow fuse FU: 0. A fast-blow fuse TSX DEY 2D2K/6D2K/2DK TSX DEY 6A2 (negative logic) TSX DEY 6A2/6A/6A/6A C Inputs A Inputs Sensor 2 Sensor 0 2 2 2 6 6 7 6 8 6 7 8 9 7 8 7 0 8 9 0 9 0 9 2 0 2 2 2 6 6 7 6 c UV c UV 7 8 7 8 FU FU + 9 20 + 9 20 0 V 0 V Sensor + FU c UV 0 V FU: 0. A fast-blow fuse D B 8 2 9 2 0 2 6 6 7 8 7 8 9 9 0 2 6 7 8 20 6 8 60 62 7 9 6 6 FU + c UV 0 V 9 9 0 2 6 7 8 20 6 8 20 22 2 26 28 0 7 9 2 2 2 27 29 - + FU Sensor 2 V 0 V FU: 0. A fast-blow fuse 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Inputs 0 2 6 8 0 2 7 9 FU Sensor a UV a UV: a 2 V for TSX DEY 6A2 a 8VforTSXDEY6A a 0 V for TSX DEY 6A a 220 V for TSX DEY 6A FU: 0. A fast-blow fuse 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Inputs 0 2 6 8 0 2 7 9. TSX UV A B C D DEY 2D2K c 2V I00 V I6 V DEY 2DK c 8V I00 V I2 V 7 DEY 6D2K c 2V I00 V I6 V I2 V 7 I8 V 6 20-wire preformed cable TSX CDP pp: correspondence between HE 0connector pin and colored of wire, see table on page /9. Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 References: pages / and / /7

Connections (continued) platform Discrete I/O modules TSX DSY 08T2 TSX DSY 08T22 TSX DSY 6T2/6T TSX DSY 08T + Preactuors 0 2 6 7 0 V FU2 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Outputs 0 2 6 7 Preactuors 0 2 6 7 + FU2 0 V 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Outputs 0 2 6 7 Preactuors 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 0 V + UV FU2 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Outputs 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 Preactuors 0 2 6 7 + FU2 0 V 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Outputs 0 2 6 7. FU2: 6. A fast-blow fuse FU2: 6 A fast-blow fuse UV: c 2 V for TSX DSY 6T2 c 8 V for TSX DSY 6T FU2: fast-blow fuse 6. A for TSX DSY 6T2 0 A for TSX DSY 6T FU2: 0 A fast-blow fuse TSX DSY 2T2K/6T2K TSX DSY 08R/6R TSX DSY 08RA/08RD Preactuors 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 6 7 0 V - + FU2 c + 2 V Preactuors 8 9 0 2 6 7 8 9 60 6 62 6 0 V + - FU2 c + 2 V C 2 7 9 6 8 0 2 6 7 8 9 20 D 2 7 9 6 8 0 2 6 7 8 9 20 Outputs 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 6 7 Outputs 8 9 0 2 6 7 8 9 60 6 62 6 Preactuors 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 0 V - + FU2 c + 2 V Preactuors 6 7 8 9 20 2 22 2 2 2 26 27 28 29 0 0 V - + FU2 c + 2 V 7 9 A B 2 6 8 0 2 6 7 8 9 7 9 20 2 6 8 0 2 6 7 8 9 20 Outputs 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 Outputs 6 7 8 9 20 2 22 2 2 2 26 27 28 29 0 Preactuors 0 2 FU 6 FU 8 0 FU 2 FU a 9 20V ou c 2 V 7 9 FU:fusetoberatedaccordingto load For protection of integrated outputs, see page 20/ 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Outputs Q0 2 C0-6 7 C-7 8 9 0 C8-2 C2- UV Preactuors R0 R R2 R T0 T T2 T 6 7 () Q0 Q C0- C2- Q2 Q Q C- Q Q6 C6-7 Q7 UV: a 9 20 V or c 9 60 V for TSX DSY 08RA c 2 0 V for TSX DSY 08RD FU: 6. A fast-blow fuse () Connection must be made for c 2 V or a 2 V power supply 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Outputs () () () FU FU FU FU FU2: 2 A fast-blow fuse A B C D TSX DSY 2T2K Q00 V Q6 V TSX DSY 6T2K Q00 V Q6 V Q2 V 7 Q8 V 6 20-wire preformed cable TSX CDP pp: correspondence between HE 0connector pin and colored of wire, see table on page /9. Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 References: pages / and / /8

Connections (continued) platform Discrete I/O modules TSX DSY6S TSX DSY 6S TSX DSY 08S Preactuors 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 PN FU FU FU FU 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Outputs Q0 2 C0-6 7 C-7 8 9 0 C8-2 C2- Preactuors 0 2 7 9 N P 8 20 V 6 8 0 2 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Outputs Q0 2 C0- FU 6 7 C-7 FU 8 9 0 C8- FU 2 C2- FU Preactuors 0 PN 8 20 V 2 6 7 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 7 9 7 9 Outputs Q0 C0- FU 2 C2- FU C- FU 6 7 C6-7 FU FU: Fusible 6. A fast-blow fuse FU: interchangeable A fast-blow fuse FU: interchangeable A fast-blow fuse TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK. Préactionneurs Preactuors 0 V + 6 8 20 22 2 26 7 9 2 2 2 27 FU2 + 2 V blanc marron vert jaune gris rose bleu rouge noir violet gris-rose rouge-bleu blanc-vert marron-vert blanc-jaune jaune-marron blanc-gris gris-marron blanc-rose rose-marron Q6 -> 27 Outputs Sorties Q6 2 7 8 9 20 6 2 22 7 8 2 2 9 0 2 26 2 27 6 7 8 9 20 Capteurs I00-> Inputs Entrées Sensor 0 blanc marron 2 2 vert jaune gris rose 6 6 bleu rouge 7 8 noir 8 violet 9 0 0 gris-rose 2 rouge-bleu 2 blanc-vert marron-vert blanc-jaune jaune-marron 6 7 9 + 2 V blanc-gris gris-marron 7 8 FU blanc-rose + 9 20 rose-marron 0 V FU2: 2 A fast-blow fuse FU: Fusible 0. A fast-blow fuse 20-wire preformed cable TSX CDP pp: correspondence between HE 0 connector pin and colored of wire, see table on page /9. white 2 brown green yellow grey 6 rose 7 blue 8 red 9 black 0 violet grey/rose 2 red/blue white/green brown/green white/yellow 6 yellow/brown 7 white/grey 8 grey/brown 9 white/rose 20 rose/brown Characteristics: pages /9 to /2 References: pages / and / /9

Selection guide platform Analog I/O modules Applications Analog inputs Type of I/O Low level isolated inputs, thermocouples, temperature probes Thermocouple inputs High level inputs with common Type Multirange Multrange Voltage/current.2 Range Voltage ±0V,±V,0 0V,0 V, V Current 20 ma, 0 20 ma, external shunt supplied Thermocouple, temperature probes B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouples Pt 00, Pt 000, Ni 000, 2 or -wire temperature probes -80 +80mV ±0V,0 0V,0 V, V 0 20 ma, 20 ma Thermocouples B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U Modularity channels 6 channels 8 channels Isolation Between channels: a 280 V rms Between bus and channels: a 780 V rms Between channels and earth: a 780 V rms Between channels: ± c 00 V Between bus and channels: a 000 V rms Between channels and earth: a 000 V rms Between channels: common point Between bus and channels: a 000 V rms Between channels and earth: a 000 V rms Read time 0 ms 20 ms (normal scan) 70 ms/channel used (fast scan) 27 ms (normal scan) ms/channel used (fast scan) Response time User-definable filtering 0 to 68. s User-definable filtering 0.0 Te to 0.02 Te (Te: module scan time) User-definable filtering 0to.s Resolution 6 bits 6 bits 2 bits Connection 20-way screw terminal: TSX BLY 0 Two 2-way SUB-D connectors 2-way SUB-D connector or 2 Telefast 2 sub-bases (ABE 7CPA2) or Telefast 2 sub-base (ABE 7CPA02/0) Type of module TSX AEY TSX AEY 6 TSX AEY 800 Pages /26 /20

Analog outputs point High level isolated inputs between channels High level input with common point Isolated outputs between channels Outputs with common point Voltage/current ±0V 0 20 ma, 20 ma.2 6 channels 8 channels channels 8 channels Between channels: common point. Between bus and channels: a 000 V rms Between channels and earth: a 000 V rms Between channels: ± c 200 V Between bus and channels: a 000 V rms Between chanenls and earth: a 000 V rms Between channels: common point Between bus and channels: a 000 V rms Between channels andearth: a 000 V rms Between channels: a 00 V rms Between bus and channels: a 00 V rms Between channels and earth: a 00 V rms Between channels: common point Between bus and channels: a 000 V rms Between channels and earth: a 000 V rms ms (normal scan) ms/channel used (fast scan) User-definable filtering 0to6.0s 26. ms (normal scan). ms/channel used (fast scan) User-definable filtering 0to.82s ms 2. ms ms 2 bits 6 bits bits + sign bits + sign for voltage bits for current Two 2-way SUB-D connectors 2-way SUB-D connector 2-way SUB-D connector 20-way screw terminal: TSX BLY 0 2-way SUB-D connector or via 2 Telefast 2 sub-bases (ABE 7CPA02/0) or Telefast 2 sub-base (ABE 7CPA02/) or Telefast 2 sub-base (ABE 7CPA0/2) or Telefast 2 sub-base (ABE 7CPA02) TSX AEY 600 TSX AEY 80 TSX AEY 20 TSX ASY 0 TSX ASY 800 /26 /2

+ + Ð Ð N N 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 22 2 26 28 0 2 + + Ð Ð 7 9 7 9 2 2 2 27 29 N N 2 6 8 0 2 6 8 20 22 2 26 28 0 2 7 9 7 9 2 2 2 27 29 Presentation, description platform Analog I/O modules Presentation Analog I/O modules for Premium PLCs are equipped with : b Either one 2-way SUB-D connector (TSX AEY 20/800/80 and TSX ASY 800) b Or two 2-way SUB-D connectors (TSX AEY 600/6) b Or a screw terminal block (TSX AEY, TSX ASY 0) They can be installed in any position in TSX RKY ppp racks except for the positions reserved for power supply modules. Analog I/O modules can be removed while the PLC is powered up. The maximum number of analog channels in a Premium configuration depends on the processor used, see pages /20, /2, /28 and /. Description The front panels of TSX AEY/ASY analog I/O modules comprise: A display and module diagnostics block. 2 A connector for receiving the screw terminal block. 2 A rotating support containing the module locating device..2 7 A removable screw terminal for direct connection of the I/O to the sensors and preactuators TSX BLY 0 (to be ordered separately). A pivoting cover for accessing the terminal block screws and holding the identification label. Connection using screw terminal block 6 Connection using SUB-D connector 6 A screw terminal block encoder. 7 A 2-way SUB-D connector for connecting the sensors. Nota : The TSX ASY 800 modules have on the front panel a screw terminal for external 2 VR connection. See page /26. Connection principle for TSX AEY/ASY modules with SUB-D connector The Telefast 2 pre-wired system simplifies the installation of modules by providing access to the inputs (or outputs) at the screw terminals. Connection is via a TSX CAP 00 metre shielded cable equipped with SUB-D connectors at either end. Premium (extension rack) TSX CAP 00 TSX CAP 00 GND GND ABE 7CPA02 GND GND ABE 7CPA0/ b The Telefast ABE 7CPA02 sub-base enables 8 channels to be connected. b The Telefast ABE 7CPA0/ sub-base enables the connection of 8 channels and: v provides channel by channel supply for 2 and -wire sensors with c 2 V (for sub-base ABE 7CPA0), v channel by channel isolated supply for 2 and -wire 2 V sensors (for sub-base ABE 7CPA), v ensures continuity of current loops when the SUB-D connector is removed, v protects the current shunt within the modules against overvoltages. b The Telefast ABE 7CPA2 sub-base enables 6 thermocouples to be connected. The terminal block is fitted with a temperature probe for cold junction compensation. Characteristics: pages /2 and /2 References: pages /26 and /27 /22

Functions platform Analog I/O modules TSX AEY 20, 800/80, 600 analog input modules TSX AEY ppp modules are high level analog input modules with inputs for the TSX AEY 20 module, 8 inputs for TSX AEY 800/80 modules and 6 inputs for the TSX AEY 600 module. Used with sensors or transmitters, they perform monitoring, measurement and process control functions for continuous processes. Depending on the choice made during configuration, TSX AEY 20/800/80/600 modules offer the following ranges for each of their inputs ± 0 V, 0 0 V, 0 V, V, 0 20 ma, 20 ma. Functions b Scanning of input channels, protection against overvoltages, adaptation of signals by analog filtering, scanning by solid state multiplexing. b Adaptation to input signals: gain selection, drift compensation. b Digitisation of signals: 2-bit analog/digital conversion for TSX AEY 800/600 and 6 bit analog/digital conversion for TSX AEY 20/80. b Converting input measurements to user format: recalibration coefficient, filtering, scaling. b Module monitoring: conversion circuit test, range overshoot test, terminal block presence test, watchdog test. b Isolation of input channels on TSX AEY 80. b Fast processing of inputs ( ms) on TSX AEY 20. TSX AEY /6 analog input modules The TSX AEY module is a multirange input module with channels isolated from each other. Depending on the choice made during configuration, the following ranges are available for each of its inputs: b thermocouples B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, U or - + 6 mv electrical range. b 2 or -wire Pt 00, Pt 000, Ni 000 temperature probe, or ohmic range: 0 00 ohms, 0 80 ohms. b High level ± 0 V, 0 0 V, ± V, 0 V (0 20 ma with external shunt) or V, 20 ma ( 20 ma with external shunt). b The TSX AEY 6 module is an analog input module with 6 thermocouple inputs. Depending on the selections made during configuration, the following range is available for each of the input channels (supporting a common mode between them of c 20 V or a 280 V): b Thermocouples B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T or U, or electrical range - 80 mv + 80 mv.2 Functions b Scanning of input channels, gain selection according to input signals, multiplexing. b Digitisation of input signals. b Converting input measurements to user format: recalibration coefficient, linearisation, cold junction compensation, filtering, scaling. b Module monitoring: conversion circuit test, range overshoot test, terminal block presence test, sensor link test, watchdog test. TSX ASY 0, 800 analog output modules The TSX ASY 0 module has analog outputs isolated from each other, and the TSX ASY 800 module has 8 outputs with common point. Depending on the choice made during configuration, the modules offer the following range for each of its outputs: ± 0 V, 0 20 ma and 20 ma without external supply. Functions b Protection of the module against overvoltages. b Adaptation to the different actuators: voltage or current output. b Conversion of digital signals to analog signals ( bits + sign for TSX ASY 0 and bits + sign for TSX ASY 800). b Transforming application data into data which can be used by the digital/analog converter. b Module monitoring and fault indication to the application: converter test, range overshoot test, terminal block presence test, watchdog test. Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software performs configuration and debugging functions: b Choice of modules used. b Configuration of channels according to the type of module: scanning (normal or fast), cold junction compensation (internal or external), range, filtering, display format, task (MAST or FAST), detection of terminal block presence, wiring check. b Debugging, access to certain parameter settings, module/channel diagnostics, forcing, calibration. Characteristics: pages /2 and /2 References: pages /26 and /27 /2

Characteristics platform Analog I/O modules Characteristics of analog input modules Type of input module TSX AEY 800 TSX AEY 600 TSX AEY 80 TSX AEY 20 Number of channels 8 6 8 Input range ±0V,0 0V,0 V, V,0 20mA, 20mA Analog/digital conversion 2 bits 6 bits Read time Normal scan ms 27 29.7 Fast scan ms x (no. of channels used + ). x (no. of channels used +).2 Max.error ±0V 0 V 0 0 V V At 2 C %FS 0.9/0. () 0 60 C %FS 0.22/ 0. () 0 20 ma 20 ma 0./0. () 0.2/ 0.6 () 0.22/0. () 0./ 0.2 () ±0V 0 V 0 0 V V 0 20 ma 20 ma ±0V 0 V 0 0 V V 0 20 ma 20 ma 0.2 0. 0.2 0. 0.2 0.2 0.0 0.9 0.2 0.2 0. 0. Isolation Betw. ch. and bus V rms 000 Betw. ch. and earth V rms 000 Between channels c V Common point ± 200 Common point Common mode between channels None ±200 None Max. overvoltage/overcurrent on the inputs ± 0 V voltage ± 0 ma en current Standards IEC Consumption ma See page 9/ Type of input module TSX AEY Number of channels 6 Input range b B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouples or electrical range : - +6mV b Pt 00, Pt 000, Ni 000 2 or -wire temperature probes, or ohmic range: 0 00 Ω, 0 80 Ω b ± 0 V, 0 0 V, ± V, 0 V (0 20 ma with external shunt) or V, 20 ma ( 20 ma with external shunt) b B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouples or electrical range: -80...+80mV Analog/digital conversion 6 bits 6 bits Read time Normal scan ms 0 70 ms/channel Fast scan ms Max. error At 2 C %FS See page /2 See page /2 0 60 C %FS See page /2 See page /2 Isolation Betw. ch. and bus V rms 780 000 Betw. ch. and earth V rms 780 000 Between channels V rms 280 Common mode V a 20 or c 00 between channels and earth a or c 200 between channels c 20 between channels and earth c 20 between channels or a 280 Max. overvoltage/overcurrent on the inputs ± 0 V powered up without 20 Ω external resistance c ± 0 V in differential mode ± V powered down without 20 Ω external resistance ± 2 ma powered up/down without 20 Ω external shunt Standards Sensor: IEC 8, IEC 7, DIN 760, DIN 70, NFC 2 0 PLC: IEC Consumption ma See page 9/ () The st value corresponds to the max. error of the TSX AEY 800 module, the 2 d, to the TSX AEY 600. References: pages /26 and /27 /2

Characteristics (continued) platform Analog I/O modules Input range for TSX AEY Voltage/current range ± 0V 0 0 V ± V 0 V V 0 20 ma Max. error at 2 C %FS () Max. error at 0 60 C %FS () Temperature probe range Pt 00 Pt 000 Ni 000 Max. error at 2 C C.2 2. 20 ma 6 mv 0 000 Ω 0 80 Ω 0.27 0.6 0.27 0.22 0.27 0.6 0. 0.9 0. 0.22 0.0 0.9 0.0 0. 0.6 0.69 0.86 0. 0.27 0.8 Max. error at 0 60 C C 2. 2 Thermocouple range B E J K L N R S T U Max. error at 2 C CI (2) C. 6. 7. 7.8 7. 6 6 6.6 6.6. CE () C...8 2. 2 2.2... Max. error at 0 60 C CI (2) C 8. 8. 9. 0. 9.8 8.7 2 8.8 7. CE () C..2.8.7.. 7.7 8..2. Input range for TSX AEY 6 Thermocouple range B E J K L N R S T U Max. error at 2 C () C 2. 0.8 0.9 0.9. 2. 2.2 Max. error at 0 60 C () C.2..6..7 2..7...2 Characteristics of analog output modules Type of output module TSX ASY 0 TSX ASY 800 Number of channels 8 Output range ± 0 V, 0 20 ma and 20 ma, output supplied by PLC (or 2 V SELV external on TSX ASY 800, see page 8/) Analog/digital conversion bits + sign bits + sign (voltage), bits current Conversion time ms 2, Maximum resolution Voltage output.2 mv (), current output 0.2 µa (6) Voltage output.28 mv, current output 2.6 µa Output load Voltage output, impedance > kω, load < 0. µf, current output, impedance < 600 Ω, load < 00 µh Measurement error as a % of FS Voltage output, FS = 0 V %FS 0. to 2 C, 0.7 from 0 to 60 C ±0.to2 C, ± 0.28 from 0 to 60 C Current output, FS = 20 ma %FS 0.2 to 2 C, 0.98 from 0 to 60 C ±0.2to2 C, ± 0.2 from 0 to 60 C Isolation between channels and bus V rms 00 000 Isolation between channels and earth c 00 V 000 V rms Isolation between channels V rms 00 Common point Type of protection Short-circuits and overload Max. voltage without damage V ±0 Standards IEC Consumption ma See page 9/ () %FS: error as a % of full scale. (2) IC: with internal cold junction compensation. () EC: with external cold junction compensation (with class A Pt 00 probe on channel 0). () Max. errors, regardless of type of internal or external cold junction compensation (via Telefast sub-base or with class A Pt 00 probe). () Value given for TSX ASY 0 (software version: II > 0), for TSX ASY 0 (software version: II 0). This value is.88 mv. (6) Value given for TSX ASY 0 (software version: II > 0), for TSX ASY 0 (software version: II 0). This value is 9.77 µa. References: pages /26 and /27 /2

References platform Analog I/O modules Analog input modules Type of inputs Analog, high level with common point Input signal range ±0V, 0...0 V, 0... V,... V, 0...20 ma,...20 ma Resolution Connection No. of channels 6 bits x 2-way SUB-D connector fast channels Reference () Weight kg TSX AEY 20 0.0 TSX AEY 800/20 Analog, low level isolated ±0V, 0...0 V, 0... V,... V, ±V, 0...20 ma,...20 ma, -...+ 6 mv, 0...00 Ω, 0...80 Ω, temperature probe, thermocouple 6 bits Screw terminal block (2) channels TSX AEY 0.20.2 TSX AEY 600/6 Analog, high level with common point ±0V, 0...0 V, 0... V,... V, 0...20 ma,...20 ma 2 bits x 2-way SUB-D connector 2x2-waySUB-D connectors 8 channels TSX AEY 800 0.0 6 channels TSX AEY 600 0.0 Analog, low level isolated ±0V, 0...0 V, 0... V,... V 0...20 ma...20 ma 6 bits x 2-way SUB-D connector 8 channels TSX AEY 80 0.0 TSX ASY 0/AEY Thermocouple ±6mV, (B,E,J,K,L,N, R, S, T, U) 6 bits 2 x 2-way SUB-D connectors 6 channels TSX AEY 6 0.0 Analog output modules Type of outputs Analog, isolated Output signal range ±0V, 0...20 ma,...20 ma Resolution Connection No. of channels bits + sign Screw terminal block (2) Reference () Weight kg channels TSX ASY 0 0.0 TSX ASY 800 Analog with common point ±0V, 0...20 ma,...20 ma bits + sign x 2-way SUB-D connector 8 channels TSX ASY 800 () () Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. (2) TSX BLY 0 screw terminal block not supplied. To be ordered separately. () The number of TSX ASY 800 modules is limited to per rack with standard format power supply, to 2 per rack with double format power supply (when this supplies the c 2 V voltage required by outputs). Characteristics: pages /2 and /2 /26

References (continued) platform Analog I/O modules Connection accessories Description Telefast 2 sub-bases Compatible Use with module TSX AEY 800 Distribution of 8 channels on TSX AEY 80 screw terminals TSX AEY 600 TSX ASY 800 (2) Type of Reference () terminal block Weight kg Screw ABE 7CPA02 0.290 ABE-7CPA0p TSX AEY 20 Distribution of 8 channels with TSX AEY 800 common point on screw TSX AEY 600 terminals, protected sensor supply, continuity of current loops during disconnection, protection against overvoltages Screw ABE 7CPA0 0.0 TSX AEY 80 Distribution of 8 isolated channels on screw terminals, channel by channel sensor supply (without common point), protection against overvoltages Screw ABE 7CPA 0.0 TSX AEY 6 Distribution of 6 channels on screw terminals, integrates temperature probe for external cold junction compensation Screw ABE 7CPA2 0.60 TSX AEY 20 TSX ASY 0 () Distribution of channels on screw terminals Spring ABE 7CPAE 0.0 Screw ABE 7CPA2 0.200 Connection cables TSX AEY 20 Link between 2-way SUB-D TSX CAP 00 0.670 TSX AEY 800 TSX AEY 80 connectors of analog I/O modules and TSX AEY 600 ABE 7CPAppsub-bases TSX AEY 6 Length m () TSX ASY 800 TSX ASY 0 Link between. m ABF Y2S0 0.00 module and ABE 7CPA2 sub-bases 2m ABF Y2S200 0.60 () m ABF Y2S00 0.70.2 m ABF Y2S00 0.920 Screw terminal 20-way TSX AEY TSX ASY 0 To be ordered separately with each I/O module for connection via screw terminal block Screw TSX BLY 0 0.00 TSX BLY 0 Setofresistors TSX AEY Adaptation for current range (supplied with TSX AEY ) TSX AAK2 0.020 () Product supplied with a bilingual quick reference guide: French and English. (2) Can be used with TSX AEY 20 module. () Can be used with TSX ASY 0 module by using the ABF Y2Spp0p cables. () Necessity to use two TSX CAP 00 cables to connect the ABE 7CPA2 sub-base. () Includes the TSX BLY 0 20-way screw terminal block. Characteristics: pages /2 and /2 /27

Selection guide platform Distributed I/O systems Applications TBX distributed I/O Type of bus or network Fipio Max. nunber per connexion points monobloc module 2baseunits. Max. number of connexion points 27 Discrete inputs/outputs Number of channels 6 I et 6 O 6 I, 2 O, 6 O, 8 I/8 O et 8 I/2 O Input voltage c 2 V c 2 V, c 8 V Output voltage c 2 V and relay c 2 V, a 20 V and relay Analogue inputs/outputs Base units I, 2 O et 6 I/2 O Counting Other types Type of distributed I/O TBX CpP TBX DpS Pages /0 /28

Momentum distributed I/O Advantys OTB distributed I/O Advantys STB distributed I/O solution Ethernet Modbus Plus Fipio DeviceNet Profibus DP INTERBUS Ethernet CANopen Modbus SL (RS 8) Ethernet CANopen Modbus Plus Fipio DeviceNet Profibus DP INTERBUS base module + 7 Twido I/O expansion module 2 modules 26 to 2 points depending on the type of bus or network. 6I,2I,8O,6O,2O,0I/8O,6I/8O,6I/2Oet 6 I/6 O 2 I/8 O, 8 I, 6 I, 8 O, 6 O, I/ O et 6 I/8 O 2I,I,6I,2O,O,6O c 2 V, a 20 V and a 20 V c 2 V, a 20 V c 2 V, a V and a 20 V c 2 V, a 20 V and a 20 V and relaiy c 2 V and relay c 2 V, a /20 V and relay BasesI,8I,6IandO Modules I, 8 I, 2 O et 2 I/ O Modules2Iand2O Base 2 channels 0 khz/200 khz Module channel 0 khz 6 I/ O a 20 V and Modbus port module M processeur module (programming under Concept or ProWORX) Parallel interface module for Tego Power applications Parallel interface module for TeSys modèle U starter-controllers 70 ADp OTB po DM9LPr STB Dpp/App Consult our catalogue Momentum automation platform r Available later Consult our catalog Advantys OTB distributed I/O Consult our catalogue Advantys STB distributed I/O /29

Selection guide platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules Applications Distributed discrete inputs on Fipio bus Degree of protection IP 20 Voltage c 2 V c 8 V Output current. Modularity 6 channels 6 channels (transistors) Possible extension 2 channels maximum per connection point Proximity sensor compatibility IEC Type Type 2 Protection against overloads Additional functions Wiring check Integrated Output fallback Programmable filter Integrated Latching states Integrated Type of modules TBX CEP 622 TBX DES 622 TBX DES 6C22 TBX DES 6F22 TBX DES 6 Pages /0 /0

Distributed discrete outputs on Fipio bus Distributed discrete I/O on Fipio bus c 2 V a 2/20 V Inputs c 2 V Inputs c 2 V Inputs 0. A 6 F 0 VA c 2 V c 2/8 V c 2 V Outputs c 2 V Outputs a 2/20 V, c 2 V 2 F 00 VA 6 F 0 VA 0. A 2A 0.A 2 F 0 VA 8 F 0 VA a20 V Outputs a20 V 8 F 00 VA 6 channels (transistors) 6 channels (Relay) 2 channels (Relay) 6 channels (Relay) 8 channels Inputs/ 8 channels Outputs (transistors) 6 channels I/O programmables 8 Inputs channels 2 Outputs channels (Relay) 8 Inputs channels 8 Outputs channels (Relay) 8 Inputs channels 8 Outputs channels (Relay). 2 channels maxi per connection point 2 ou 2 channels maxi per connection point 2 ou 20 channels maxi per connection point Type 2 Protected Not Protected Protected Not Protected Protected Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated TBX CSP 622 TBX DSS 622 TBX DSS 6C22 TBX CSP 62 TBX DSS 2 TBX DSS 62 TBX DMS 6C22 TBX DMS 6C222 TBX DMS 6P22 TBX DMS 02 TBX DMS 62 TBX DMS 6S /

General, functions platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules General, functions Decentralising I/O meets the requirements of both users and machine manufacturers while maintaining performance comparable with that of a centralised structure: b The volume of wiring associated with discrete and analog sensors and actuators is reduced. b Mechanical constraints associated with wiring ducts are eliminated. b The time required for designing and testing connections is reduced. b Machine or plant availability is maximised. b Installations are more flexible and meet requirements more closely due to the number and type of modules. b Protection for use in harsh environments, TBX IP 6 dust and damp proof models. Premium Dust and damp proof TBX Fipio TBX ATV TBX TBX AS-Interface bus. TBX distributed I/O modules, dust and damp proof or not, are a simple response to control system architectures distributed on a fieldbus. They are integrated into Schneider Electric PLC X-Way communication architectures by means of the Fipio fieldbus, which conforms to the Fip standard. TBX distributed I/O modules are addressed by the Unity Pro or PL7 application program as In-rack I/O, with which they can coexist. TBX distributed I/O modules are connected to Premium bus manager processors or Atrium PCX coprocessors via the Fipio fieldbus (maximum number of modules per Fipio bus, see page /72). The range of TBX distributed I/O modules includes the following modules: b Monobloc or modular discrete I/O modules (IP 20), see page /0. b Dust and damp proof monobloc discrete I/O modules (IP 6), see page /8. b Dust and damp proof discrete I/O modules (IP 67), see page /68. b Modular analog I/O modules (IP 20), see page /0. TBX monobloc and modular modules IP 20 Protection of transistor and triac outputs All transistor outputs have a protection mechanism which detects an overload or a short-circuit on the load when an output is active. This type of fault is displayed and deactivates the output. This fault is accessible to the application program when testing the fault bits. Reactivating transistor and triac outputs When an output is no longer active following a fault, it must be reset in order to reactivate it. It can be reactivated automatically or via a command from the application program, depending on the selection made during the software configuration. Characteristics: pages /6 to /9 /2 References: pages /0 and / Connections: pages /2 to /

Functions (continued) platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules TBX modular modules IP 20 TBX modular discrete modules have many functions, which are defined in the table below: TBX reference DES 6C22 DSS 6C22 DES 6F22 DMS 6P22 DSS 622 DSS 2/62 DMS 02/62 DMS 6S Wiring check Programmable filtering Latching states Configuration of channels as I or O Output fallback Assignment of channels to application tasks Function available DMS 6C22 DMS 6C222 Input wiring check The input wiring check function continuously checks the quality of the connection between the sensor and the distributed I/O module and discriminates between a closed or open state of the sensor and a short-circuit or open circuit. When a fault appears, the fault bit for the channel is activated before changing the input to state 0. After the fault has disappeared, if the sensor is closed, the input changes to state before the fault bit is deactivated. The input wiring can be enabled as required for each channel during software configuration. Output wiring check The output wiring check function continuously checks the quality of the connection between the actuator and the module and detects a faulty actuator or its connection (open circuit or short-circuit). The output wiring check can be enabled as required for each channel during software configuration.. Programmable filtering This function offers the possibility to choose, during software configuration, the filtering to be assigned to the inputs : normal or fast. Filtering can be configured for groups of 8 channels (channels 0 to 7 or channels 8 to ). Fast filtering is analog, with a typical value of 0.7 ms. Normal filtering is provided by a digital filter of ms in conjunction with an analog filter of 0.7 ms. By default, inputs are configured for fast filtering. Latching stats This function enables pulses lasting more than 2 ms on a rising edge to be recognised. This information is latched during a PLC scan in order to be processed in the Unity Pro or PL7 application program. Configuring the channels as input or output This function enables the channels to be defined as input channels or output channels. This can be: 6 inputs maximum and 0 output (this is the default configuration), inputs and output, 8 inputs and 8 outputs. Output fallback All modular TBX module outputs can be set to a specific state on a fault. Several choices are possible: Fallback to 0 (default fallback position), Fallback to, Maintain state: the output maintains the state ( or 0) which it was at when the fault occurred, Fallback value defined by the user program. This choice is made for groups of 8 channels (channels 0 to 7 or channels 8 to ) during software configuration. Assigning module channels to several tasks Each base unit is functionally divided into groups of 8 consecutive channels (channels 0 to 7 and channels 8 to ), called functional channel groups. Each channel group in a TBX module can be assigned, during software configuration, to a specific application task (fast, master or auxiliary task). Characteristics: pages /6 to /9 References: pages /0 and / Connections: pages /2 to / /

Description platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules Monobloc distributed I/O modules IP 20 TSX CEP/CSP monobloc I/O modules comprise: 2 6 A 9-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the Fipio bus via a TBX BLP 0 connector. 2 dip switches for coding the Fipio address together with an address coding label. A location for the user's module/connection point identification label. An I/O display window. A screw clamp for earthing the module. 6 A removable screw terminal block (with terminal label) for wiring the sensors, preactuators and power supplies.. 2 Modular distributed I/O modules IP 20 Base units The base units are designed to be used with: b A TBX LEP 020/00 communication module to constitute a base module. b A TBX CBS 00 cover and cable to constitute an extension module. They enable direct connection of sensors and preactuators. They are available as input base units, reference TBX DES ppp, output base units, reference TBX DSS ppp and mixed base units, reference TBX DMS ppp. TBX DES/DSS/DMS modular I/O base units comprise: A female /2 DIN connector for connection to the TSX LEP 020/00 communication module. 2 A removable screw terminal block (with terminal label) for wiring the sensors, preactuators and power supplies. A screw clamp for earthing the base unit. A location for the user's station/module identification label. An access flap to 2 dip switches for adjusting the leakage current for the wiring check and the filter times (slow or fast). 2 Fipio bus communication modules The TBX LEP 020/00 communication modules enable dialogue with the PLC via the Fipio bus. They are fixed to the base unit by screws. A female /2 DIN connector, protected by a flap, is used for connection to the extension base unit. The Fipio address is assigned using 6 dip switches. An I/O display window indicates locally the state of the module and of the base unit and the extension I/O. TBX LEP 020/00 communication modules comprise: A 9-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the Fipio bus via a TBX BLP 0 connector. 2 dip switches for coding the Fipio address together with an address coding label. A location for the user's module/connection point identification label. An I/O display window. An access flap for the female /2 DIN connector for connecting the extension base unit. Characteristics: pages /6 to /9 / References: pages /0 and / Connections: pages /2 to /

Description (continued) platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules 2 I/O display window RUN DEF COM I/0 0 8 0 8 9 9 2 0 2 0 2 2 6 6 7 7 Each monobloc I/O module and communication module has an I/O display window which contains all the information to be displayed: A RUN lamp (green), device operating. 2 A DEF lamp (red), steady if the device is faulty, flashing if there is a communication fault on the Fipio bus. A COM lamp (yellow), Fipio frame sent and received. 6 2 An I/O lamp (red), sensor or preactuator fault (short-circuit, open circuit, loss of voltage). Sixteen lamps 0 to (red), steady when channel active, flashing if channel faulty. 6 Sixteen lamps 0 to (red), steady when channel active, flashing if channel fault (corresponds to extension module channels). Cover and cable for extension base units The TBX CBS 00 comprises a cover and a connecting cable. The cable connects the extension base unit to the communication module. The cover, attached to the base unit by screws, protects the connector and gives the extension module (base unit and cover) a similar size and shape to that of the base module. The TBX CBS 00 cover and cable unit comprises: A flexible connecting cable with two male /2 DIN moulded connectors for connecting thetbx LEP 020/00 communication module to the base unit. 2 A cover to be fixed to the base unit. A location for the user's module/connection point identification label.. Characteristics: pages /6 to /9 References: pages /0 and / Connections: pages /2 to / /

Characteristics of modules and input base units platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules Type of modules TBX DES 622 TBX DES 6C22 TBX DES 6F22 Modularity 6 6 6 Nominal input values Voltage V c 2 c 2 c 2 Current ma 7 7 Sensor supply (ripple included) V c 9 0 c 9 0 c 9 0 Input limit values At state Voltage V Current ma 6 for V 6 for V 6forV At state 0 Voltage V < < < Current ma 2 2 2 Input impedance kω.6.. Logic Positive Positive Positive Response time Change from 0 to Fast filter ms 8. 0.. () Slow filter ms 7. 0. 8. () Change from to 0 Fast filter ms 8. 0.. () Slow filter ms 7. 0. 8. () Protection against polarity inversion Sensor supply Reverse parallel diode Dissipated power Per module (with 60 % load) W. 2.6 2.6 Typical current consumed Module supply ma 20 0 (+0 if extension) 0 (+0 if extension) Sensor supply ma 0 70 70. Type of input Resistive, conforms to Current sink, conforms to IEC type 2 IEC type 2 Sensor common To +ve of supply Compatible output modules TBX transistor outputs TBX transistor outputs (2) TBX transistor outputs External line Line resistance W < 00 with volt-free contact, < 00 with 2-wire proximity sensor Open line leakage resistance kω > 0 with volt-free contact, > 00 with 2-wire proximity sensor Isolation Dielectric strength between inputs Veff 00 at 0/60 Hz for min and earth Insulation resistance MΩ > 0atc 00 V Type of modules TBX CEP 622 TBX DES 6 Modularity 6 6 Nominal input values /6 Voltage V c 2 c 8 Current ma 7 7 Sensor supply (ripple included) V c 9 0 c 8 60 Input limit values At state Voltage V > 7 > 0 Current ma 2 for V 6 for 0 V At state 0 Voltage V < < 0 Current ma. 2 Input impedance kω. 6.7 Logic Positive Positive Response time Changefrom0to ms Changefromto0 ms Protection against polarity inversion Module supply Series diode Sensor supply Reverse parallel diode Dissipated power Per module (with 60 % load) W.9. Typical current consumed Module supply ma 90 20 Sensor supply ma 70 (with 60 % load) Type of input Resistive, conforms to IEC type To +ve of supply TBX transistor outputs Current sink, conforms to IEC type 2 Sensor common Compatible output modules External line Line resistance W < 00 with V-free contact < 00 with 2-wire prox.sensor Isolation References: pages /0 and / Open line leakage resistance kω > 0withV-freecontact > 200 with 2-wire prox. sensor > 0 with V-free contact, > 00 with 2-wire prox. sensor Dielectric strength between inputs Veff 00 at 0/60 Hz for min and earth Insulation resistance MΩ >0 at c 00 V () Normal or fast programmable filter. (2) Only with transistor outputs having wiring check function. Connections: pages /2 to /

Characteristics of modules and output base units platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules Type of modules TBX CSP 622 TBX DSS 622 TBX DSS 6C22 Modularity 6 6 6 Loads Voltage V c 2 c 2 c 2 Nominal current A 0. 0. 0. Tungsten filament lamp W 8 8 8 Limit values Voltage (ripple included) V c 9 0 c 9 0 c 9 0 Logic Positive outgoing current Response time Change from 0 to ms Change from to 0 ms Leakage current At state 0 ma <0. <0. <2 Residual voltage At state V <0. <0. <0. Built-in protection Against overloads Yes (thermal) Against overvoltage Against polarity inversion Zener diode Reverse parallel diode Load common Typical current consumed To -ve of supply Module supply ma 00 0 0 Alimentation préactionneurs ma (except active outputs) (exc. active outplus) Dissipated power Per module (with 60 % load) W.7.. Compatibility d.c. Yes Yes Yes input modules Load impedance At state W >0 >0 0 < z < 000. Isolation Dielectric strength between inputs Veff 00 at 0/60 Hz for min and earth Insulation resistance MΩ > 0atc 00 V Type of modules TBX CSP 62 TBX DSS 2 TBX DSS 62 Modularity 6 2 6 Loads Voltage V a 2 26 c 2 Permissible d.c. power Permissible a.c. current a 2 26 c 2 8 a 2 26 c 2 DC-2 resistive W 2 0.2x0 6 manœuvres 0 2 V 0.2x0 6 manœuvres 2 0.2x0 6 manœuvres 0 8 V 0.x0 6 manœuvres DC- inductive W 0 0 6 manœuvres 2 2 V 0.2x0 6 manœuvres 0 0 6 manœuvres 2 8 V 0.x0 6 manœuvres AC-2 resistive A -0/220 V 0.2x0 6 man. 0.-0/220 V 2x0 6 man. -2/8 V 0.x0 6 man. 2-2 V 0.2x0 6 manœuvres AC- inductive A 0.-2/8 V 0 6 manœuvres -2 V 0.2 0 6 manœuvres 2-0/220 V 0.x0 6 man. -0/220 V.x0 6 man. 2-2/8 V 0.x0 6 man. -2 V 0.x0 6 manœuvres -0/220 V 0.2x0 6 man. 0.-0/220 V 2x0 6 man. -2/8 V 0.x0 6 man. 2-2 V 0.2x0 6 manœuvres -2/8 V 0 6 manœuvres 0.-2/8 V 0 6 manœuvres 0.-8 V 2x0 6 manœuvres () -2 V 0.2 0 6 manœuvres (2) Thermal current A 7 Typical current consumed Module supply (with 60 % load) ma 9 0 2 V 70 8 V 2 Response time Change from 0 to ms <0 <0 <0 Change from to 0 ms <20 <20 <20 Built-in protection Against overloads and short -circuits Against inductive overvoltage No No (for a useanrcorgmov,andforc use a reverse diode) Compatibility input modules Isolation d.c. Yes Dielectric strength between inputs Veff 00 at 0/60 Hz for min and earth Insulation resistance MΩ > 0atc 00 V () 00 VA - 0/20 V 0 6 operations, 20 VA - 0/20 V X0 6 operations. (2) 0 VA - 0/220 V 0 6 operations, 0 VA - 8/220 V 0 7 operations. References: pages /0 and / Connections: pages /2 to / /7

Characteristics of I/O base units platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules Type of modules TBX DMS 02 TBX DMS 62 TBX DMS 6S Input modularity 8 8 8 Nominal Voltage V c 2 c 2 a 20 input values Current ma Sensor supply (ripple included) V 9.2 0 9.2 0 92 2 Input limit values At state Voltage V >7 Current ma 6 for V 6 for V 6 At state 0 Voltage V < < <20 Current ma 2 2 Input impedance kω.6.6 0 Logic Positive Positive Positive Response time Change from 0 to Change from to 0 7 7 Dissipated power Per module (with 60 % load) W 2.6.7 6 Typical current consumed Module supply ma (+0 if extension) 80 (+0 if extension) 60 Sensor supply ma 7 7 7 Type of input Resistive, conforms to standard IEC type 2. Sensor common Compatible output modules To +ve of supply TBX transistor outputs External line Line resistance kw < 00 with volt-free contact, < 00 with 2-wire proximity sensor Open line leakage resistance kω > 0 with volt-free contact, > 00 with 2-wire proximity sensor Outputs modularity 2 8 8 Loads Voltage V a 2 26 c 2 Permissible d.c. power DC 2 resistive DC inductive a 2 26 c 2 W 2 0.2x0 6 manœuvres W 0 0 6 manœuvres a 9 2 Triac W 9 per output at 60 C at 2 C Relay Permissible a.c. current AC 2 resistive A - 0/220 V 0.2x0 6 operating cycles 0. - 0/220 V 2x0 6 operating cycles - 2/8 V 0.x0 6 operating cycles 2-2V0.2x0 6 operating cycles AC inductive A 0.-2/8V0 6 operating cycles - 2 V 0.2 0 6 operating cycles Thermal current A Response time Change from 0 to ms 0 0 80 Change from to 0 ms 20 20 20 Built-in protection Against overloads and short -circuits Against inductive overvoltage No No Yes No (for a use RC or GMOV, and for c use a reverse diode) Compatibility input modules d.c. Yes No Isolation Dielectric strength between Veff 00 at 0/60 Hz for min inputs and earth Insulation resistance MΩ > 0atc 00 V References: pages /0 and / /8 Connections: pages /2 to / () 0 VA - 0/220 V 0 6 operating cycles, 0 VA - 8/220 V 0 7 operating cycles.

Characteristics of I/O base units (continued) platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules Type of modules TBX DMS 6C22 TBX DMS 6C222 TBX DMS 6P22 Input modularity 8 8 8 6 Nominal input values Voltage V c 2 c 2 c 2 Nominal current ma 7 7 Sensor supply (ripple V c 9.2 0 c 9.2 0 c 9.2 0 included) Input limit values At state Voltage V 7 7 Current ma 6for7V 6 for V 6 for V At state 0 Voltage V < < < Current ma 2 2. 2 Input impedance kω...6 Logic Positive Positive Positive Response time Change from 0 to Fast filter ms 8. 8. Slow filter ms 0 0 0 Change from to 0 Fast filter ms 8. 8. Slow filter ms 0 0 2 Protection against polarity inversion Sensor supply Diode inverse en parallèle Dissipated power Per module (with 60 % load) W. 8. 6. Typical current consumed Module supply ma 0 (+ 0 if extension) (+ 0 if extension) 0 Sensor supply ma 7 Type of input Current sink, conforms to conforms to IEC type 2 Resistive, conforms to IECtype2 Input common To +ve of supply Compatible output modules TBX transistor outputs External line Line resistance kω < 00 with volt-free contact < 00 with 2-wire proximity sensors Open line leakage resistance kω 200 or 00 > 0 with 2-wire prox. sen. > 00 with 2-wire prox. sen.. Outputs modularity 8 8 0 8 Loads Voltage V c 2 c 2 c 2 Nominal current A 0. 2 () 0. Tungsten filament lamp W 8 8 Limit values Voltage (ripple included) V c 9 0 c 9 0 c 9 0 Logic Positive Positive Positive Response time Change from 0 to ms. Change from to 0 ms. Leakage current At state 0 ma <2. <2. <0. Residual voltage At state V <0. <0.8 <0. Built-in protection Against overloads Yes (thermal) Yes (current limitation) Yes (thermal) Against overvoltage Yes (Zener diode) Yes (Zener diode) Yes (Zener diode) Against polarity inversion Yes (reverse diode) Yes (reverse diode) Yes (reverse diode) Load common To -ve of supply Compatibility input modules d.c. Yes(ifz< kω) Yes Load impedance At state W 0<z<000 >0 Isolation Dielectric strength between inputs and earth Veff 00 at 0/60 Hz for min Insulation resistance MΩ > 0 at c 00 V () Temperature derating: total output current per base unit 6 A at 0 C, 8 A at 60 C. References: pages /0 and / Connections: pages /2 to / /9

References platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules Monobloc input module (IP 20) Type of current Input voltage Modularity (no. of chan.) IEC 2 conformity Reference Weight kg c 2 V 6 Type TBX CEP 622 0.820 Monobloc output modules (IP 20) Type of current Output voltage Modularity (no. of chan.) Channel characteristics Reference c transistor Weight kg 2 V 6 0. A protected TBX CSP 622 0.880 TBX CpP 6pp a ou c relay a 2/20 V c 2 V 6 0 VA not protected TBX CSP 62 0.960 Input base units (IP 20) () Type of current Input voltage Modularity (no. of chan.) IEC 2 conformity Reference Weight kg c 2 V 6 Type 2 TBX DES 622 0.0 TBX DES 6pp 6, contrôle de Type 2 TBX DES 6C22 0.0 filerie 6, filtrage Type 2 TBX DES 6F22 0.0 progr. 8 V 6 Type 2 TBX DES 6 0.0. TBX DSS 6pp Output base units (IP 20) () Type of current Output voltage Modularity (no. of chan.) Channel characteristics Reference c transistor a ou c relay Weight kg 2 V 6 0. A protected TBX DSS 622 0.80 a 2/20 V c 2/8 V 0. A protected wiring check 2 00 VA not protected TBX DSS 6C22 0.80 TBX DSS 2 0.60 a 2/20 V c 2 V 6 0 VA not protected TBX DSS 62 0.60 I/O base units (IP 20) () Type of current c transistor Input voltage Output voltage c 2 V c 2V 8E/8S0.A protected Modularity IEC 2 (no. of chan.) conformity Reference Weight kg Type 2 TBX DMS 6C22 0.0 8E/8S2A protected Type 2 TBX DMS 6C222 0.0 a ou c relay c 2 V a 2/20 V c 2 V Programmable Type 2 TBX DMS 6P22 0.0 de 6 E/0 S à 8E/8S0.A protected 8E/2S(2) Type 2 TBX DMS 02 0.0 8E/8S(2) Type 2 TBX DMS 62 0.70 a triac a 20 V a 20 V 0/60 Hz 8E/8S() Type 2 TBX DMS 6S 0.70 () Requires the TBX LEP 020/00 communication module to constitute a base, requires the TBX CBS 00 cover and cable unit to constitute an extension. (2) 0 VA outputs, not protected. Characteristics: pages /6 to /9 Dimensions: page / /0

References (continued) platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules Fipio communication modules Description Connection Reference Weight kg Communication modules for I/O base units Fipio fieldbus on TBX discrete or analog IP 20 I/O base units TBX LEP 00 0.280 TBX LEP 020/00 Fipio fieldbus on TBX discrete IP 20 I/O base units TBX LEP 020 0.280 Connection terminal block Tap link or daisy-chained on Fipio bus TBX BLP 0 0.080 TBX BLP 0 Accessories () Description Use Sold in lots of Unit Reference Weight kg Cover and connecting cable For extension on TBX base units TBX CBS 00 0.00 TBX CBS 00 Earthing strip For connecting cable shielding on TBX terminal block TBX GND 0 0.060 TBX GND 0 Inter-terminal Channel commons on connection comb TBX terminal block (9 terminals per comb) TBXRV0 0.020 TBX RV 0 8-channel simulator with/without line check function 8 inputs displayed TBX SEP 08 0.20. 8 inputs displayed TBX SSP 08 0.0 () For Fipio bus connection accessories, see pages /86 and /87. Characteristics: pages /6 to /9 Dimensions: page / /

Connections platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules Monobloc I/O modules TBX CEP 622 input c 2 V TBX CSP 622 output c 2 V TBX CSP 62 relay output. 0 +IS 9 ÐIS 8 I 7 +CS 6 I -CS I +CS 2 I2 -CS 0 I 29 +CS 28 I0 27 -CS 26 I9 2 +CS 2 I8 2 -CS 22 I7 2 +CS 20 I6 9 ÐCS 8 I 7 +CS 6 I ÐCS I +CS 2 I2 ÐCS 0 I 9 +CS 8 I0 7 ÐCS 6 +IS ÐIS +SV 2 ÐSV For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. + For -wire prox. sen. + + For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. -wire prox. sen. 2-wire prox. sen. + 2Afuse Sensor supply + c 2 V Module supply c 2 V +OS ÐOS O +CA O -CA O +CA O2 -CA O +CA O0 -CA O9 +CA O8 -CA O7 +CA O6 -CA O +CA O -CA O +CA O2 -CA O +CA O0 9 7 29 27 2 2 2 9 7 9 7 ÐCA +OS ÐOS +SV ÐSV 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 2 A fuse Preactuator + supply c 2 V () + Module supply c 2 V NC NC O C, O NC O C2, O2 NC O C0, O0 NC O9 C8,9 O8 NC O7 C6,7 O6 NC O C, O NC O C2, O2 NC O C0, O0 N NC N +SV ÐSV 9 7 29 27 2 2 2 9 7 9 7 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 + Preactuator supply Preactuator supply 2 Preactuator supply 0 Module supply c 2 V Input base units TBX DES 622/6C22/6F22 input c 2 V TBX DES 6 input c 8 V 0 +IS 9 ÐIS 8 I 7 +CS 6 I -CS I +CS 2 I2 -CS 0 I 29 +CS 28 I0 27 -CS 26 I9 2 +CS 2 I8 2 -CS 22 I7 2 +CS 20 I6 9 ÐCS 8 I 7 +CS 6 I ÐCS I +CS 2 I2 ÐCS 0 I 9 +CS 8 I0 7 ÐCS 6 +IS ÐIS +SV 2 ÐSV For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. + For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. () Fast-blow fuse must be fitted to sensor supply. (2) With TBX DES 6C22. + For -wire prox. sen. Sensor supply + 2Afuse c 2 V + Module supply c 2 V -wire prox. sen. 2-wire prox. sen. Volt-free contact (2) 0 +IS 9 ÐIS 8 I 7 +CS 6 I -CS I +CS 2 I2 -CS 0 I 29 +CS 28 I0 27 -CS 26 I9 2 +CS 2 I8 2 -CS 22 I7 2 +CS 20 I6 9 ÐCS 8 I 7 +CS 6 I ÐCS I +CS 2 I2 ÐCS 0 I 9 +CS 8 I0 7 ÐCS 6 +IS ÐIS +SV 2 ÐSV For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. + + For -wire prox. sen. + Sensor supply c 8 V + Module supply c 8 V For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. -wire prox. sen. 2-wire prox. sen. Characteristics: pages /6 to /9 /2 References: pages /0 and / Dimensions: page /

Connections (continued) platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules Output base units TBX DSS 622/6C22 output c 2 V TBX DSS 2 output relay TBX DSS 62 output relay +OS ÐOS O +CA O -CA O +CA O2 -CA O +CA O0 -CA O9 +CA O8 -CA O7 +CA O6 -CA O +CA O -CA O +CA O2 -CA O +CA O0 9 7 29 27 2 2 2 9 7 9 7 ÐCA +OS ÐOS +SV ÐSV 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 2 A fuse + Preactuator supply + c 2 V () Module supply c 2 V NC NC O,NC C O,NO NC O0,NC C0 O0,NO NC O9,NC C9 O9,NO NC O8,NC C8 O8,NO NC O7 C6,7 O6 NC O C, O NC O C2, O2 NC O C0, O0 N NC N +SV ÐSV 9 7 29 27 2 2 2 9 7 9 7 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 Supply. Preactuator N Ph relay outputs N/O and N/C 8 relay outputs N/O Ph Preactuator supply 0 N + Module supply c 2 V or 8 V NC NC O C, O NC O C2, O2 NC O C0, O0 NC O9 C8,9 O8 NC O7 C6,7 O6 NC O C, O NC O C2, O2 NC O C0, O0 N NC N +SV ÐSV 9 7 29 27 2 2 2 9 7 9 7 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 Preactuator supply N Ph Preactuator supply 2 Ph N Ph Preactuator supply 0 N + Module supply c 2 V. () Fast-blow fuse must be fitted to preactuator supply. Characteristics: pages /6 to /9 References: pages /0 and / Dimensions: page / /

Connections (continued) platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules I/O base units TBX DMS 6C22 c 2V0.AI/O TBX DMS 6C222 c 2 V 2 A I/O TBX DMS 6P22 programmable c 2V0.AI/O. +OS ÐOS O +CA O -CA O +CA O2 -CA O +CA O0 -CA O9 +CA O8 -CA I7 +CS6,7 I6 ÐCS I +CS, I ÐCS I +CS2, I2 ÐCS I +CS0, I0 ÐCS +IS ÐIS +SV ÐSV 9 7 29 27 2 2 2 9 7 9 7 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 + For -wire prox. sen. + + + Afuse + + Module supply c 2 V NC ÐOS O +OS, O NC O +OS2, O2 NC O +OS0, O0 NC O9 +OS8,9 O8 NC I7 +CS6,7 I6 ÐCS I +CS, I ÐCS I +CS2, I2 ÐCS I +CS0, I0 ÐCS +IS ÐIS +SV ÐSV 9 7 29 27 2 2 2 9 7 9 7 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 Preactuator supply + c 2 V () 20 A fuse + + + Afuse + Sensor supply c 2 V () + Module supply c 2 V -wire pro sen. 2-wire pro sen. Volt-free contact 0 +S 9 ÐS 8 I/O 7 +C 6 I/O -C I/O +C 2 I/O2 0to8 -C 0 outputs I/O 29 max. +C 28 I/O0 27 For -wire prox. sen. -C 26 I/O9 2 +C 2 I/O8 2 -C 22 For -wire prox. sen. I7 2 +C 20 I6 9 For -wire prox. sen. ÐC 8 I 7 -wire +C 6 + prox. I sen. ÐC For -wire prox. I 2-wire sen. +C prox. 2 + I2 sen. ÐC 0 For -wire prox. sen. I 9 +CS 8 I0 7 ÐC For -wire prox. sen. 6 6Afuse +S + Preactuator and ÐS sensor supply +SV + c 2 V () 2 Module supply ÐSV c 2 V TBX DMS 02 relay I/O TBX DMS 62 relay I/O TBX DMS 6S triac I/O NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC O9 C8,9 O8 NC I7 +CS I6 ÐCS I +CS I ÐCS I +CS I2 ÐCS I +CS I0 ÐCS +IS ÐIS +SV ÐSV 9 7 29 27 2 2 2 9 7 9 7 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. + + For -wire prox. sen. + Sensor supply c 2 V + Preactuator supply NC NC O C, O NC O C2, O2 NC O C0, O0 NC O9 C8,9 O8 NC I7 +CS I6 ÐCS I +CS I ÐCS I +CS I2 ÐCS I +CS I0 ÐCS +IS ÐIS +SV ÐSV 9 7 29 27 2 2 2 9 7 9 7 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 Preactuator supply N Ph + For -wire prox. sen. -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. 2-wire sen. prox. + sen. For -wire prox. sen. For -wire prox. sen. + Sensor supply c 2 V + Module supply c 2 V O C O C O C O2 C2 O C O0 C0 O9 C9 O8 C8 I7 C I6 C I C I C I C I2 C I C I0 C 9 7 29 27 2 2 2 9 7 9 7 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 N Supply a 20 V Preactuator (2) Ph Sensor supply a 20 V Module supply a 20 V () Fast-blow fuse must be fitted to preactuator and sensor supplies. (2)7Afuseincludedinthebaseunit. Characteristics: pages /6 to /9 / References: pages /0 and / Dimensions: page /

Dimensions, mounting Modicon Pemium automation platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules Dimensions TBX CEP/CSP modules TBX DES/DSS/DMS base units with TBX LEP 020/00 or TBX CBS 00 module 6 2 22 87 72 Mounting TBX CEP/CSP/DES/DSS/DMS on AM PA/PB/PC perforated mouting plate 20 TBX CEP/CSP/DES/DSS/DMS on AM DP200 or AM DE200 rail 22 27 72 AF-EA Fixed by screws with captive washer M x 6 AF-VA6 8,. Nota : In order to ensure correct operation of TBX modules in severe electromagnetic conditions, the modules must be mounted on metal supports correctly connected to earth. The base module and the extension module must be installed on the same plate, or the same rail, or on rails connected to each other by a metal crossbar. Mounting vertically Mounting side by side mini 2 maxi Mounting one above by other mini 2 maxi 0 mini 80 maxi Characteristics: pages /6 to /9 References: pages /0 and / Connections: pages /2 to / /

Selection guide platform TBX distributed analog I/O modules Applications Distributed analog inputs on Fipio bus Type of I/O High level inputs Temperature probe inputs Thermocouple inputs Type Voltage Current Pt 00, Pt 000, Ni 000 Range ±V ±0V 0 20 ma 20 ma ±20mV ±0mV ±200mV ±00mV B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T Modularity channels. Isolation a 00 V ms between channels a 00 V ms between channels and earth a 00 V ms between supply and channels a 00 V ms between supply and earth Acquisition period for the complete module 00msin 0Hzmode(channels) 0msin 60Hzmode(channels) Resolution 2 bits + sign Restitute time Input filtering st order with user-definable time constant Fallback position Type of module TBX AES 00 Pages / /6

DistributedanalogI/OonFipiobus Distributed analog outputs on Fipio bus Voltage/current inputs Voltage/current outputs Voltage/current outputs Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current 0 V ±0V 0 20 ma 20 ma ±0V 20 ma 0 20 ma ±0V 20 ma 0 20 ma 6 channels 2 channels No isolation between input channels a 00 V ms between output channels a 00 V ms between input channels and output channels a 00 V ms between supply and channels a 00 V ms between supply and earth. 2. ms 2 bits (including sign) bits + sign bits bits + sign bits ms At zero value on internal module fault At the last value or at a value defined by the user on Fipio communication fault TBX AMS 620 TBX ASS 200 /7

Description platform TBX distributed analog I/O modules Decentralising the I/O meets the requirements of both users and machine manufacturers while maintaining performance comparable with that of a centralised structure. Distributed analog I/O modules complete the TBX range of distributed I/O modules. They provide general discrete I/O module functions with the benefit of: b Connection to the Fipio fieldbus. b Wiring system. b Size. Distributed analog I/O base units offer a wide range of analog inputs for acquisition of high and low level measurements, both voltage and current. Three modular base units are available: b multi-range inputs, TBX AES 00. b 6 high level inputs (voltage/current), 2 outputs (voltage/current), TBX AMS 620. b 2 outputs (voltage/current), TBX ASS 200. A TBX LEP 00 communication module is required when or 2 analog base units (base or extension) are connected at any Fipio fieldbus connection point. The number of analog channels for TBX base units of the same type is limited to008. Description Modular analog base units Distributed analog I/O base units comprise: 2-way female /2 DIN connector for connecting to the TBX LEP 00 communication module.. 2 Removable screw terminal block (with terminal label) for wiring the analog sensors and actuators. 2 Screw clamp for earthing the base unit. Location for user's identification label. Fipio communication module 2 The TBX LEP 00 communication module comprises: 9-way male SUB-D type connector for connecting to the Fipio fieldbus. 2 Five dip switches for setting the Fipio address together with an address coding label. Location for the user's module/connection point identification label. I/O display window. Access cover for 2-way female /2 DIN connector for connecting the Extension base unit. Cover and cable for extension modules The TBX CBS 00 cover and cable unit comprises: Flexible connecting cable with two 2-way male /2 DIN moulded connectors for connecting the base unit to the TBX LEP 00 communication module. 2 2 Cover to be fixed to the discrete or analog I/O base unit. Location for the user's module/connection point identification label. Functions: page /9 Characteristics: page /0 References: page / Connections: page / /8

Functions platform TBX distributed analog I/O modules Modular TBX base unit combinations Analog base units require a TBX LEP 00 communication module for connecting the connection point to the Fipio fieldbus. As they are modular in structure, discrete and analog base units can be used in the following combinations: Mix of modules () Base Extension Communicator Base unit Base unit Cover TBX LEP 00 TBX ApS ppp TBX LEP 00 TBX ApS ppp () TBX DpS ppp () TBX CBS 00 TBX LEP 00 TBX ApS ppp TBX ApS ppp TBX CBS 00 Base TBX LEP 00 TBX DpS ppp () TBX ApS ppp () TBX CBS 00 Extension () In the case of the Premium automation platform, the combinations of base units and extensions on any one Fipio connection point must be of the same type (it is not possible to mix discrete I/O and analog I/O). Functions TBX AES 00 analog modules, with high level (voltage or current) or low level (temperature probe or thermocouple) isolated inputs, TBX AMS 620, with 6 high level isolated inputs (voltage or current) / 2 isolated outputs (voltage or current), and TBX ASS 200, with 2 isolated outputs (voltage or current) offer the following functions:. Input channels b Measurement acquisition v selection of the input range for each channel and first order filtering with user-configurable time constant. b Processing v automatic linearization (TBX AES 00), v integral cold junction compensation for thermocouples (TBX AES 00). b Operation v conversion of measurements into standard units or temperatures whose parameters can be defined by the user. b Checks v recalibration and self-calibration of each channel in relation to an internal reference (TBX AMS 620), v checking input value overruns (± % of the selected range), v checking the sensor link. Output channels b Output range selection v voltage or current for each module channel. b Output fallback On a communication fault with the PLC, the user can select: v fallback of the output to a defined value, v to maintain the output at its previous value, v On an internal module fault, all the outputs on the same module fall back to zero. b Output protection Output modules are protected against: v open circuit overloads, v short-circuits. All these parameters are selected during software configuration. Description: page /8 Characteristics: page /0 References: page / Connections: page / /9

Characteristics platform TBX distributed analog I/O modules. Type of base unit TBX AES 00 TBX AMS 620 TBX ASS 200 Analog input modularity channels 6 channels Input ranges mv ±20 mv ±0 mv ±200 mv ±00 V ± 0 V ±0 ma 0 20 ma 20 Temperature probes Pt 00, Pt 000, Ni 000 Thermocouples B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T Special characteristics Self-calibration No Yes Automatic linearization Yes Yes Resolution 2 bits + sign 2 bits Acquisition period Rejection (0 Hz) For entire module ms For channels: 00 (0 Hz mode) 0 (60 Hz mode) For 6 channels: 2. Serial mode db 0 Common mode db > 0 for ± 20 mv db >90for±0V Maximum error at 2 C/60 C ±0V %FS 0.2/0.99 0.20/0.29 0 V %FS 0.2/0.99 0./0.22 0 20 ma %FS 0.2/0.99 0.2/0. 20 ma %FS 0.2/0.99 0.2/0. Low level %FS 0.90/.69 () External resistors (supplied with TBX AES 00 module) Useas 20or0 20mA Ω 20 at 0.% parallel on the input Permitted overload Voltage V ±0 ±0 ±0 Current ma ±2 ±0 ±0 Isolation (2) Between input channels Vrms 00 Non-isolated Between output channels Vrms 00 00 Between channels and earth Vrms 00 00 00 Between channels and supply Vrms 00 00 00 Between supply and earth Vrms 00 Common mode voltage (2) permitted during operation between channel and earth and between channels Temperature Operation C 0 Storage C - 2 + 70 V c ±00 Vrms 7 0 Type of base unit TBX AES 00 TBX AMS 620 TBX ASS 200 Analog output modularity 2 channels Output ranges Voltage V ±0 Current ma 20, 0 20 Resolution Voltage bits + sign Current bits Refresh period Per channel ms Load impedance Voltage Ω 000 Current Ω 600 Leakage current Current µa 0 (0 20 ma) Maximum error at 2 C/60 C Voltage %FS 0./0.7 Current %FS 0.2/0.98 () Accuracy at low level covers the whole ± 20 mv, ± 0 mv range, the middle of the range for Pt 00, Pt 000 and Ni 000, with any orientation, and the middle of the range for B, E, J, K, N, R, S and T thermocouples. (2) Voltage in volts rms 0/60 Hz for minute. Description: page /8 Characteristics: page /0 References: page / Connections: page / /0

References, connections, dimensions platform TBX distributed analog I/O modules References TBX ApS pp0 Analog base units () Type of input/output Input 2 bits + sign Number of channels channels (2) Ranges Reference Weight kg ±V,±0V,±20mV,±0mV,±200mV TBX AES 00 0.280 0 20 ma, 20 ma, Low level ± 00 mv Thermocouples B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T Temp.probes Pt 00, Pt 000, Ni 000 Isolated output bits 2 channels ± 0 V, 0 20 ma, 20 ma TBX ASS 200 0.280 High level input 2 bits isolated output bits 6 channels ± 0 V, 0 V, 0 20 ma, 20 ma TBX AMS 620 0.280 2 channels ± 0 V, 0 20 ma, 20 ma TBX LEP 00 Connections, dimensions () Communication module and accessories Description Connection Reference Weight kg Fipio communication module Fipio fieldbus on TBX base units TBX LEP 00 0.280 Cable connector Tap link or daisy chain to Fipio fieldbus TBX BLP 0 0.080 Replacement part Setofresistors 20 Ω ±0.% Adaptation for TBX AES 00 current range TSX AAK2 0.00 () Requires TBX LEP 00 communication module to constitute a base unit, requires TBX CBS 00 cover and cable unit to constitute an extension. (2) Set of resistors TSX AAK2 for adaptation to current range supplied. TBX AES 00 input TBX AMS 620 input/output () TBX ASS 200 output NC -R NC +R NC -R2 NC +R2 NC -R NC +R NC -R0 NC +R0 NC NC NC -IS -I 2/ +I 2/ -I2 /2 +I2 /2 -I 0/ +I 0/ -I0 +IS -I0 NC +SV SV 9 7 29 27 2 2 2 9 7 9 7 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 ch. - ch. + ch. 2- ch. 2+ ch. - ch. + ch. 0- ch. 0+ Terminals for connecting 20 Ω resistor when using the channel in 0 20 ma or 20 ma current range Terminal - current source (2) channel - Channels 2 to daisy chained(2) channel + Channels 2 to daisy chained(2) channel 2- Channels to 2 daisy chained (2) channel 2+ Channels to 2 daisy chained (2) channel - Channels 0 to daisy chained (2) channel + Channels 0 to daisy chained (2) channel 0- + Terminal + current source (2) channel 0+ Power supply 2/8 V NC 9 NC NC 7 NC NC Com7 Com7 O7i O7u NC NC 29 Com6 Com6 27 O6i O6u 2 Com Com 2 R I 2 R I 9 Com Com 7 R I R2 I2 Com Com R I 9 R0 I0 7 NC NC NC +SV SV 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 Output voltage reference Channel 7 Channel 7, current output Channel 7, voltage output Output voltage reference Channel 6 Channel 6, current output Channel 6, voltage output Input voltage reference Channel, current input Channel, voltage input Channel, current input Channel, voltage input Input voltage reference Channel, current input Channel, voltage input Channel 2, current input Channel 2, voltage input Input voltage reference Channel, current input Channel, voltage input Channel 0, current input Channel 0, voltage input + Power supply 2/8 V NC 9 NC NC 7 NC NC Com Com Oi Ou NC NC 29 Com0 Com0 27 O0i O0u 2 NC NC 2 NC NC 2 NC NC 9 NC NC 7 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 9 NC NC 7 NC NC NC +SV SV 0 8 6 2 0 28 26 2 22 20 8 6 2 0 8 6 2 Voltage reference Channel Channel, current output Channel, voltage output Voltage reference channel 0 Channel 0, current output Channel 0, voltage output + Base unit Power supply 2/8 V. () Dimensions the same as for TBX discrete I/O module: see page /. (2) Inputs to be used for wiring temperature probes. () To use an input channel as a current input, link terminals li and Ri of the corresponding channel. Description: page /8 Functions: page /9 Characteristics: page /0 /

Selection guide platform IP 6/67 splitter boxes and modules Splitter box and module type Passive splitter boxes Monobloc I/O splitter boxes and modules Telefast, ABE9 splitter boxes Advantys, FTB splitter boxes TBX, I/O modules 0877 087. Fielbus type CANopen DeviceNet Profibus DP INTERBUS Number of inputs/outputs 8 I/O, 6 I/O 6I,8I+8O,2I+O, 6 I/O, 8 I + 8 I/O Fipio 8 I, 6 I, 8 O and 6 O Type of signal c 2 V digital Functions Connection of to 6 sensors/actuators Type of input/output connectors M2 Degree of protection IP 67 IP 6 Housing type Plastic Plastic and metal Zamac Module type ABE 9 FTB TBX EEP/ESP Pages Consult our catalogue IP 67 splitter boxes /6 /2

Modular I/O splitter boxes TSX EpF, I/O modules 70 EDp, I/O modules Modules on AS-Interface cabling system Advantys, FTM splitter boxes 087 087 0 087 0 Fipio INTERBUS AS-Interface CANopen DeviceNet Profibus DP. 8I,6I,8I/Oand8O 6 I or 6 O Ior2I Oor2O I Ior2I Oor2O 8 I, 6 I, 8 I/O and 6 I/O discrete I or O analogues c 2 V discrete and analogue Connection of to 8 sensors/actuators Connection of to 26 sensors/actuators per bus module M8 M2 M8 M8 and M2 IP 67 IP 6 IP 67 Plastic Metal Plastic TSX EpF 70 EDI/EDO ASI MEp +ASIBp ASI MMOp XZ SpA FTM r /68 /7 Consult our catalogue AS-Interface cabling system Consult our catalogue IP 67 splitter boxes r Available st half 200 /

General, functions platform TBX discrete I/O IP 6 modules on Fipio bus General Decentralising the I/O meets the requirement of both users and machine manufacturers while maintaining performance comparable with that of a centralised structure. In the same way as distributed I/O modules, TBX dust and damp proof modules are used to create distributed control systems, which offer increased availability of installations. They also offer the possibility of locating the I/O interfaces close to the process or machines, in harsh environments (water jets, dust, etc). TBX modules are addressed by the application program as In rack I/O, with which they can coexist. TBX dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules are connected to Premium processors via the Fipio fieldbus (maximum number of modules per Fipio bus, see page /80). TBX dust and damp proof I/O modules offer: b Compact interface elements. b Easy setup and connection: v sensors and actuators are directly connected to dust and damp proof standard connectors, v tools are available for local testing and diagnostics of both the interfaces and those devices which are connected to them. TBX dust and damp proof I/O modules with IP 6 protection conform to the following test standards: v UL, NEMA, v CSA, v IEC 6A, v NFC 680, v to the CNOMO EO 0 0 recommendation, v to the NF 6 60 FIP standard.. Functions TBX dust and damp proof distributed discrete I/O modules offer identical functions to those of the modular TBX I/O modules: Reference TBX EEP 08C22 TBX EEP 622 TBX ESP 08C22 TBX ESP 622 Wiring check Outputs fallback Assignment of I/O channels to application tasks Function available TBX EEP 08C22/622 dust and damp proof distributed input modules The TBX EEP 08C22 input module (8 channels c 2 V) and the TBX EEP 622 input module (6 channels c 2 V) have the following functions: b Wiring check providing line check via short-circuit, open circuit or earth line detection. b Assignment of each group of 8 input channels (channels 0 to 7 or 8 to ) to a specific application task (fast, master or auxiliary task). TBX ESP 08C22/622 dust and damp proof distributed output modules The TBX ESP 08C22 output module (8 channels c 2 V) and the TBX EEP 622 output module (6 channels c 2 V) have the following functions: b Transistor output protection, detection of overloads or short-circuits which can be used by the user program (channel by channel or for all 8 or 6 module channels). b Reactivation of transistor outputs, choice of automatic reactivation or by user program. b Wiring check providing line check via short-circuit, open circuit or earth line detection. b Output fallback state: on module fault, maintains the state of the outputs at their last value or at a configured value (state 0 or ) channel by channel. b Assignment of each group of 8 output channels (channels 0 to 7 or 8 to ) to a specific application task (fast, master or auxiliary task). Characteristics: page /7 / References: page /8 Connections: page /9

Description platform TBX discrete I/O IP 6 modules on Fipio bus Description TBX EEP/ESP 08C22 modules Dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules are monobloc type in an IP 6 casing and comprise: 8 female M2 type fast connectors for connecting the sensors or preactuators. 2 8 channel status indicator lamps. status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication. A dust and damp proof connector for connection to the Fipio bus, and to the c 2 V power supply. 2 For output modules, a c 2 V preactuator power supply connector. Connector to be ordered separately: b TBX BLP 0 dust and damp proof connector which can also be used for coding connection points. b For output modules, a TBX BAS 0 dust and damp proof power supply connector. TBX EEP/ESP 622 modules Dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules are monobloc type in an IP 6 casing and comprise: 8 female M2 type fast connectors for connecting the sensors or preactuators ( connector for 2 channels). 2 6 channel status indicator lamps (yellow lamps for even channels and green lamps for odd channels). status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication. A dust and damp proof connector for connection to the Fipio bus, and to the c 2 V power supply.. 2 For output modules, a c 2 V preactuator power supply connector on the left side. Connector to be ordered separately: b TBX BLP 0 dust and damp proof connector which can also be used for coding connection points. b For output modules, a TBX BAS 0 dust and damp proof power supply connector. Characteristics: page /7 References: page /8 Connections: page /9 /

Connection principles platform TBX discrete I/O IP 6 modules on Fipio bus Connection principles TBX dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules require a c 2 V power supply. This supply can be provided: b Via a TBX FP ACC 0 dust and damp proof network junction box. In this case, the TSX FP CFp00 tap link cable 2 is required which is a screened twisted pair 0 W with 2 conductors carrying the c 2 V supply for the modules. The mechanical and chemical resistance characteristics for this cable are suitable for use in harsh environments. Directly to the TBX BLP 0 connector on the dust and damp proof TBX module.in this case, a tap link off the trunk cable is made using the TSX FP ACC T-junction box with the TSX FP CCp00 tap link cable (double twisted pair 0 Ω). DustanddampproofTBX Premium 2 Fipio a 2 V TBX a 2 V a 2 V 2. Daisy chaining dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules using a TBX FP ACC 0 T-junction box Using a TBX FP ACC 0 junction box up to 0 TBX dust and damp proof modules can be daisy chained. Since power is carried to the TBX dust and damp proof I/O modules via the TSXFPCFp00 tap link cable 2, the length of the tap links depends on the type of c 2V power supply and the number of TBX dust and damp proof modules daisy chained on the same tap link. The lengths in metres are given in the table below: Number of TBX dust and 2 6 7 8 9 0 damp proof modules in daisy chain c 2 V ± % supply 26 87 6 2 6 27 2 c 2 V ± % supply 22 6 77 7 7 27 2 2 c 2 V ± 0% supply 77 8 0 2 20 7 Characteristics: page /7 /6 References: page /8 Connections: page /9

Characteristics platform TBX discrete I/O IP 6 modules on Fipio bus Type of inputs module TBX EEP 08C22 TBX EEP 622 Modularity 8 6 Nominal input values Voltage V c 2 Current ma 7 Sensor supply V c 9.2 0 (ripple included) Input limit values At state Voltage V Current ma 6 for V At state 0 Voltage V < Current ma 2. Input impedance kω. Logic Positive Response time Change from 0 at ms 6 Change from at 0 ms 6 Protection against Sensor supply Reverse mounted parallel diode Series diode polarity inversion Dissipated power Per module (with 60 % load) W 2.6 2.7 2 V Typical currents consumed Module supply ma 0 9 (at 2 V) Sensor supply ma 70 00 (at 2 V) Type of inputs Current sink, conforming to IEC type 2 Sensor common Compatibility output modules To +ve of supply TBX transistor outputs of the same voltage External line Line resistance Ω < 00 with volt-free contact, < 00 with 2-wire priximity sensor Open line leakage kω > 0 with volt-free contact, > 00 with 2-wire priximity sensor resistance Isolation Dielectric strength between Veff 00 at 0/60 Hz for min inputs and earth Insulation resistance MΩ > 0atc 00 V Temperature Operation C 60 Storage C - 2 + 70. Type of outputs module TBX ESP 08C22 TBX ESP 622 Modularity 8 6 Loads Voltage V c 2 Nominal current A 0. Tungsten filament lamp W 8 Limit values Voltage (ripple included) V c 9.2 0 Logic Positive outgoing current Response time Change from state 0 to ms Change from state to 0 ms Leakage current At state 0 ma < 2 Residual voltage At state V < 0. Built-in protection Against overloads Yes (thermal) Against overvoltages Zener Diode Against inverse polarity Reverse mounted parallel diode Series diode Load common To ve of supply Typical currents consumed Module supply ma 0 07 (at 2 V) Preactuator supply ma (except actives outputs ) (at 2 V) Dissipated power Per module (with 60 %load) W..7 (at 2 V) Compatible input d.c. Yes modules Load impedance At state Ω 0 < Z < 000 Isolation Dielectric strength between Veff 00 at 0/60 Hz for min inputs and earth Insulation resistance MΩ > 0atc 00 V Temperature Operation C 0 60 Storage C - 2 + 70 Characteristics: page /7 References: page /8 Connections: page /9 /7

References platform TBX discrete I/O IP 6 modules on Fipio bus TBX EEP 08C22 Dust and damp proof monobloc discrete I/O modules Type of module Operating voltage Modularity Characteristics Reference (no. of channels) Weight kg Input c 2 V 8 Conforming to IEC type 2 Wiring check function TBX EEP 08C22 0.0 6 Conforming to TBX EEP 622 0.0 IEC type 2 Output c 2 V 8 0. A protected TBX ESP 08C22 0.80 Wiring check function 6 0. A protected TBX ESP 622 0.80 TBX ESP 622 TSX FP ACC Accessories () Type of module Characteristics Reference Weight kg Dust and damp proof junction box Tap link off trunk cable Holds female 9-way SUB-D connector Zamac casing Tap link off trunk cable including wires for c 2 V supply. Holds female 9-way SUB-D connector Zamac casing TSXFPACC 0.660 TBX FP ACC 0 0.680 Dust and damp proof connector for TBX modules Tap link or daisy chaining with adress coding TBX BLP 0 0.20 Dust and damp proof supply connector for TBX output modules c 2 V preactuator power TBX BAS 0 0.20 supply for TBX ESP 08C22/622 output modules. () For other Fipio accessories and connection cables, see pages /86 et /87. TBX BLP 0 TBX BAS 0 Characteristics: page /7 /8 References: page /8 Connections: page /9

08 Connections, dimensions, mounting platform TBX discrete I/O IP 6 modules on Fipio bus Connections TBX EEP 08C22 inputs Mechanical contacts 2-wire prox.sen. -wire prox.sen. 2 2 - + 2 - + TBX EEP 622 inputs Mechanical contacts 2-wire prox.sen. -wire prox.sen. 2 2 - + - 2 - + + - TBX ESP 08C22 outputs Direct wiring Wiring with amplification - + 2-2 +. Outputs TBX ESP 622 Direct wiring Wiring with amplification Preactuator supply via TBX BAS 0 connector - + 2 - a 2 V 2 - - 2 + + + Dimensions, mounting TBX EpP pp22 inputs/outputs 2 9, () (2) 69, 7,9 2 20, () General: page / Characteristics: page /7 () For TBX ESP 08C22/622 (2)TBX BLP 0 connector () 2 holes Ø. References: page /8 /9

Presentation, architecture platform Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus Presentation Decentralising the I/O meets the requirements of both users and machine manufacturers while maintaining performance comparable with that of a centralised structure. Fipio bus dust and damp proof I/O modules are used to create distributed control systems by removing the need for enclosures, improving connections and thus increasing the availability of installations. These IP 67 protection modules also offer the possibility of locating the standard I/O interfaces used in the processes or machines in harsh environments (oil jets, water jets, dust etc).. Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro programming software is used for the software configuration and installation of the dust and damp proof I/O modules on the Fipio bus. There are types of Fipio bus dust and damp proof I/O module: b Input module, 8 channels, c 2 V IEC type 2: TSX EEF 08D2. b Input module, 6 channels c 2 V IEC type 2: TSX EEF 6D2. b Mixed module, 8 IEC type 2 inputs/8 x 0. A transistor outputs, c 2 V: TSX EMF 6DT2. b Output module, 8 channels, 2 A transistor outputs, c 2 V: TSX ESF 08T22. Furthermore, this new module design offers a number of special functions: b Remote power supply: the Fipio modules, inputs, and Fipio communication power supplies are provided using a single cable. Each remote power supply can be used to power up to modules. b A daisy-chained module can be changed without interrupting the bus. b An operator terminal can be connected at any point on the bus. b Short-circuits in the sensor power supply can occur without causing the bus to malfunction. b A Fipio bus fast connection system using cables and M2 connectors. b A sensor/preactuator fast connection system using an M2 connector. The Fipio bus dust and damp proof I/O modules conform to the following standards and approvals: b IEC. b CNOMO. b Fipio certification. b DIN. b UL certification. b CSA certification. bemark. Architecture Premium Fipio TBX c 2 V TSX EpF c 2 V TSX EF ACC 99 c 2 V preactuator Momentum TSX EpF Fipio Characteristics: pages /6 and /6 Connections: pages /6 to /67 Dimensions, mounting: page /6 References: pages /68 and /69 /60

Architecture (continued), description platform Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus 6 7 2 Architecture (continued) The Fipio fieldbus is a standard relating to communication between different automation components where the IP 67 dust and damp proof I/O are located remotely. Each segment supports up to IP 67 I/O modules over a maximum distance of 000 meters. Because the IP 67 I/O modules have a remote power supply, the voltage drops caused by the connected modules limit the maximum distances between each T-junction box (from the one which provides the c 2 V power supply) and the remote powered IP 67 I/O modules. For the calculation of these distances, see page /66. The use of electrical or electrical/fiber optic repeaters allows the connection of up to 98 IP 67 I/O modules on segments over a maximum distance of,000 meters. Description TSX EEF 08D2 and TSX EEF 6D2 modules Dust and damp proof input modules are monobloc type in an IP 67 casing and comprise: 7 7 6 8 8 female M2 type fast connectors for connecting the sensors (2 input channels per connector for the 6-channel model). 2 8 or 6 channel status indicator lamps. status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication. Dust and damp proof male M2 type connector for connection of the Fipio bus, the c 2 V power supply for the sensor and the internal electronics of the module. Access to the addressing micro-switch. 6 or 2 sensor power supply fault indicators. 7 9 slots for channel and module referencing labels (0 labels supplied). 2 Two sealing plugs for M2 connectors are supplied with every module. 8 6 TSX ESF 08T22 module Dust and damp proof output modules are monobloc type in an IP 67 casing and comprise: 8 female M2 type fast connectors for connecting the preactuators. 2 8 channel status indicator lamps. status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication. Dust and damp proof male M2 type connector for connection of the Fipio bus and the power supply for the internal electronics of the module. Access to the addressing micro-switch. 6 2 preactuator power supply presence indicators. 7 A male 7/8 type connector for connecting the two c 2 V preactuator power supplies. 8 9 slots for channel and module referencing labels (0 labels supplied).. 7 Two sealing plugs for M2 connectors are supplied with the module. 6 8 9 2 TSX EMF 6DT2 module Dust and damp proof I/O modules are monobloc type in an IP 67 casing and comprise: 9 6 8 female M2 type fast connectors of which are for connecting the sensors and for the preactuators (2 input channels or 2 output channels per connector). 2 6 channel status indicator lamps. status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication. Dust and damp proof male M2 type connector for connection of the Fipio bus, the c 2 V power supply for the sensor and the internal electronics of the module. Access to the addressing micro-switch. 6 2 preactuator power supply presence indicators. 7 A male 7/8 type connector for connecting the two c 2 V preactuator power supplies. 8 sensor power supply fault indicator. 9 9 slots for channel and module referencing labels (0 labels supplied). Two sealing plugs for M2 connectors are supplied with the module. Characteristics: pages /6 and /6 Connections: pages /6 to /67 Dimensions, mounting: page /6 References: pages /68 and /69 /6

Description (continued) platform Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus 2 TSX EF ACC 2ppp Fipio bus connecting cables TSX EF ACC 2ppp cables are used to carry Fipio bus signals and the c 2 V power supply for the sensors and the internal electronics of TSX EEF/ESF/EMF modules. They comprise: A trunk cable, with a 0 Ω shielded twisted pair and a. mm 2 power supply pair, 0.2,,, 7, 2 or 2 m long depending on the model (radius of curvature 0 mm, Ø 9. mm). At one end: 2 An insulated IP 67 male connector, with M2 type ring, 6-way for Fipio connection to the preceding module n- (or to the upstream T-junction box). At the other end: an insulated double connector comprising : An IP 67 female connector, with M2 type ring, 6-way for connection to module n. An IP 67 female connector, with M2 type thread, 6-way for an outgoing cable of the same type for connection to the next module n+ (or to the downstream T-junction box). Use of this cable on the dust and damp proof I/O modules: b Locks access to the module's Fipio addressing microswitch. b Ensures continuity of the Fipio bus even if the module is disconnected (when replacing a module, for example). Patented system.. 2 TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction box The IP 6 T-junction box comprises: A male M2 type soldering connector for connecting the Fipio bus (incoming and outgoing). 2 A male 7/8 type connector for connecting the c 2 V power supply for the remote powered modules, fitted with a protective plug. A female M2 type connector for connecting the Fipio bus (outgoing), fitted with a sealing plug. An access cover for the 9-way femalesub-d connector used for connecting an operator terminal. Characteristics: pages /6 and /6 Connections: pages /6 to /67 Dimensions, mounting: page /6 References: pages /68 and /69 /62

Functions, characteristics platform Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus Functions Remote dust and damp proof I/O modules integrate the following monitoring devices : b Inputs: v power supply fault monitoring in groups of 8 channels. Indicated on the front panel by the SF and SF2 indicator lamps (red). v module fault monitoring. Indicated on the front panel by the ERR indicator lamp (red). One fault bit for the whole module is available at PLC processor level for use by the user program. b Outputs: v preactuator power supply presence monitoring in groups of channels. Indicated on the front panel by the US and US2 indicator lamps (green). A power supply presence bit is associated with each indicator lamp. v short-circuit monitoring for each channel. Indicated on the front panel by an indicator lamp for each channel (red). There is one fault bit per channel (for 8 channel modules) or per group of 2 channels (for mixed modules). In addition, there is one bit per group of channels which can be used to reset the channels remotely. v module fault monitoring. Indicated on the front panel by the ERR indicator lamp (red). One fault bit for the whole module is also available. Environmental characteristics In the case of the TSX EMF 6DT2 mixed module, a diagnostic bit allows the origin of the power supply fault to be determined (input or output power supply). Type of module TSX EEF 08D2/EEF 6D2/ESF 08T22/EMF 6DT2 TSX ACC 99 Temperature Operation C 0...60 Storage C 0...60 Degree of protection IP 67 IP 6 Altitude m 0...2000 Vibration resistance Testing in progress. Protection against shocks Operating positions gn/ ms All positions Input characteristics Type of module TSX EEF 08D2 TSX EEF 6D2 TSX EMF 6DT2 Inputs channels Number 8 inputs 6 inputs 8 inputs (8 outputs, see page /6) Groups of channels 2 Conforms to IEC 2 Yes, type 2 Proximity sensor 2-wire/-wire Yes compatibility Nominal values Voltage V c 2 (positive logic) Current ma 7 Sensor power supply (ripple included) V c 9.2...0 Inputs limit values Voltage At state 0 V < At state V Current At state 0 ma < 2 At state ma 6toV Built-in protection against short-circuits ma 0 per channels group Typical response State0to ms. time Stateto0 ms. Sensor power supply monitoring V c...8 Isolation Between channels None Between bus and internal logic V a 00 Consumption ma 80 with -two-wire sensor inputs 0with0two-wiresensor inputs () () () + 0mA per additional input and + 0 ma per -wire sensor input. See consumption page /6 Connections: pages /6 to /67 Dimensions, mounting: page /6 References: pages /68 and /69 /6

Characteristics (continued) platform Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus Outputs characteristics Type of module TSX ESF 08T22 TSX EMF 6DT2 Type of outputs Solid state Solid state Outputs channels Number 8 outputs 8 outputs (8 inputs, see page /6) Groups of channels 2 groups of channels Nominal values Voltage V c 2 Current A 2 0. Outputs limit values Voltage V c 9.2...0 Current per channel A 2. 0.62 Current per group of channels At 0 C A 8 2 At 60 C A.8.2 Leakage current at state 0 ma < Residual voltage at state V < 0. to 2 A < 0. to 0. A Response time ms < 0. (resistive load) Preactuator power supply monitoring V c...8 Built-in protection Against overvoltage Yes, by transil diode Against short-circuits and overloads A. by thermal circuit-breaker. by thermal circuit-breaker. Isolation Between channels of the same group Non Between output channel groups Vrms a 60 Between output channel groups and internal logic Between input channels and output channels Vrms a 60 Vrms a 60 Between bus and internal logic V a 00 Consumption ma 80 with outputs at state () 0withtwo-wiresensor inputs and output at state () (2) () + 0 ma per additional output at state. (2) + 0 ma per additional input and + 0 ma per -wire sensor input. Connections: pages /6 to /67 /6 Dimensions, mounting: page /6 References: pages /68 and /69

Connections, dimensions, mounting platform Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus Connections TBX EEF 08D2 inputs Mechanical contacts 2-wire sensors -wire sensors 2 2 - + 2 - + TBX EEF 6D2/TSX EMF 6DT2 inputs Mechanical contacts 2-wire sensors -wire sensors 2 2 - + 2 - + + - - TBX ESF 08T22 outputs TBX EMF 6DT2 outputs Direct wiring Direct wiring Preactuator power supply 2 Dimensions, mounting TSX EpF inputs/outputs () + - 2 60 2 + - - + () + Power supply 2 c 2 V - a 2 + Power supply c 2 V 07 -, (2). 77 9 200 a e TSX EpF +TSXEFCT0 222 87 TSX EpF +TSXEFCF0 22 () TSX EF CT 0 (2) 2 oblongs holes Ø. () TSX EF ACC pppp 8 2 e TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction box Rear mounting Front mounting 8 22 80 8 2 22 80 = 6 2 = 20 2 80 0 = 0 = 80 20 Characteristics: pages /6 and /6 References: pages /68 and /69 /6

Connections platform Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus Dust and damp proof input/output wiring system 8 c 2 V 2 2 9 c 2 V 2 9 2 9 9 A 0. c 2 V 9 7 9 9 9 c 2 V 9 9 9 6 6 A: Mainjunctionbox B: Remote powered T-junction box B /66 Control of c 2 V voltage drop The dust and damp proof I/O module power supply is carried by Fipio cables, which means that the maximum distance from each TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction box depends on the type of c 2 V power supply and the number of I/O modules. The power supply voltage of the last module must be no lower than 9.2 V. Typical voltage drops are given in the table below (): Number of input/output modules Distance between T-junction box (used with c 2 V remote supply) and last input/output module m 0 20 0 0 7 00 2 0 200 20 00 V 0.09 0.8 0.28 0.6 0.7 0.9.2..9 2. 2.8 0 V 0.7 0. 0. 0.86..7 2. 2.6... V 0.2 0. 0.7.2.9 2...7 6.2 7. 20 V 0.2 0.6 0.98.6 2...9 6. 8.2 9.8 2 V 0. 0.8.2 2 6 8. 0 2 0 V 0.8 0.96. 2..6.8 6 7.2 9.6 2. () The typical values are given for connecting 2-wire sensors. If using -wire sensors, apply a coefficient of.77 to these voltage drop values. Example: Use of a 2 V ± % power supply. Over a distance of 00 m and connecting 0 dust and damp proof I/O modules. The voltage drop is (2 x 0.97) -.8 = 8.8 V (which is less than the permitted 9.2 V). It is necessary to insert a second c 2 V power supply via a TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction box (distance to be defined and verified according to the installation topology). Characteristics: pages /6 and /6 Dimensions, mounting: page /6 References: pages /68 and /69

Connections (continued) platform Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus T-junction box TSX EF ACC 99: IP 6 Fipio bus T-junction box, used to connect the c 2 V power supply intended for dust and damp proof I/O. It also has a 9-way female SUB-D connector for an operator terminal. This box also serves as the main Fipio bus junction box A as well as for connecting the c 2 V T-junction power supply (example B). Connectors 2 TSXEFCF0:IP 67 female soldering connector with M2 type ring, 6-way for connection of Fipio bus and c 2 V power supply. This type of connector is used at the ends of TSX FP CA/CC/CP/CR p00 cables. TSX EF CM 0: IP 67 male soldering connector with M2 type ring, 6-way for connection of Fipio bus and c 2 V power supply. This type of connector is used at the ends of TSX FP CA/CC/CP/CR p00 cables. TSXEFCF0: IP 67 female 7/8 type screw connector, -way for c 2 V power supply connection. This type of connector is used for the c 2 V power supply of the TSX ESF/EMF I/O modules and the TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction box. The maximum current permitted for each connector contact is 8 A. TSX EF CM 0: IP 67 male 7/8 type screw connector, -way for connection to a TSX EF CT 0 T-connector used for the c 2 V preactuator power supply. 6 TSXEFCT0: IP 67 7/8 type T-connector, -way for daisy-chaining the c 2 V preactuator power supply. The maximum current permitted for each connector contact is 8 A. 7 TSX EF CF 02: IP 67 female soldering connector with M2 type thread, 6-way for extending Fipio TSX FP CP p00 cables. 8 TSXFPACC2or TSXFPACC2: 9-way SUB-D connectors for Fipio/Fipway connection to PLC. Used for daisy chain or tap link connection (90 output high or low, output high or low). Cables 9 TSX EF ACC 2pppp: trunk cable, a 0 Ω shielded twisted pair and a. mm 2 power supply pair. Fitted with an M2 male connector and a double M2 female/female connector. 0 TSXFPCPp00: trunk cable, a 0 Ω shielded twisted pair and a. mm 2 power supply pair (Ø 9. mm). Wire ends free to fit IP 67 M2 type soldering connectors TSX CF 0/02 and TSX CM 0. TSX FP CC p00: tap link cable, double shielded twisted pair 0 Ω (Ø 8 mm) for normal environments and use inside buildings. Wire ends free to fit IP 67 M2 type soldering connector TSX CM 0. 2TSX FP CA p00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 0 Ω (Ø 8 mm) for normal environments and use inside buildings. TSX FP CR p00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 0 Ω (Ø 8 mm) for harsh environments and use outside buildings. Wire ends free to fit IP 67 M2 type soldering connectors TSX CF 0/02 and TSX CM 0.. Other components TSX EF ACC 7: IP 67 M2 type line terminator, to be placed at one or both ends of the segment, depending on the use. TSX FP ACC 7: IP 20 line terminator (set of 2), to be placed at one or both ends of the segment, depending on the use. TSX FP CG 0p0: tap link connecting cable for TSX FPP 0 PCMCIA card for FT 200 terminal,tsx Micro/Premium PLC and PC compatibles. Calculation of bus length The total length of a bus is the sum of all the lengths of the trunk cables plus all the lengths (multiplied by 2) of the tap link cables. i.e. in the example opposite, the length of the cables is: 2 + 9 + 0 +(2x ). Characteristics: pages /6 and /6 Dimensions, mounting: page /6 References: pages /68 and /69 /67

References platform Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus Dust and damp proof input/output modules (IP 67) Number of I/O 8 8, c 2 V No,type No, type of inputs of outputs Inputs Connection characteristics via IECtype 2 8 female M2 positive connectors logic 8,solid state c 2 V/2A 8 female M2 connectors Reference Weight kg TSX EEF 08D2 0.00 TSX ESF 08T22 0.0 TSX ESF 08T22 6 6, c 2 V IECtype 2 8 female M2 positive connectors logic 8, c 2 V 8, solid IEC type 2 8 female M2 state c positive connectors 2 V/0.A logic TSX EEF 6D2 0.00 TSX EMF 6DT2 0.0 Fipio bus connection accessories Type Use No. () Fipio bus T-junction box M2 male M2 female 7/8 male Trunk cable tap-off via two M2 connectors Remote c 2 V power supply distribution via 7/8 connector PC compatible terminal connection via 9-way female SUB-D 9 connector Reference Weight kg TSX EF ACC 99 0.7. TSX EEF 6D2 TSX EMF 6DT2 M2 type soldering connectors Female Equipment for TSX FP CA/CC/CP 2 TSX EF CF 0 0.080 bus cables Male Equipment for TSX FP CA/CC/CP TSX EF CM 0 0.080 bus cables Female Extension for TSX FP CA bus trunk 7 TSX EF CF 02 0.07 cables 7/8 type screw connectors Female Equipment for c 2 V preactuator TSX EF CF 0 0.00 power supply TSX EF ACC 99 Male Equipment for c 2 V preactuator power supply TSX EF CM 0 0.00 T c 2 V preactuator power supply 6 TSX EF CT 0 0.09 daisy chain on TSX EpFI/Omodules TSXEFCF0 TSX EF CM M2typelineterminator Male To place at the ends of the Fipio segment requiring IP 67 protection TSX EF ACC 7 0.08 TSXEFCF02 IP 20 connection accessories for Fipio bus Type Use No. () 9-pin SUB-D connectors Female zamac Bus connection for Fipio manager output on Premium PLCs Reference Weight kg 8 TSXFPACC2 0.080 Female insulating Bus connection for Fipio manager output on Premium PLCs 8 TSXFPACC2 0.00 TSXEFCT0 Line terminator (setof2) 2-wire connection To place at the ends of the Fipio segment (IP 20 protection) Other Fipio accessories () For key to numbers, see pages /66 et /67. TSXFPACC7 0.020 Seepage/86 TSX EF ACC7 TSXEFCF0 Characteristics: pages /6 and /6 /68 Connections: pages /6 to /67 Dimensions, mounting: page /6

References (continued) platform Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus Fipio bus connecting cables Type Use No. () Length Reference Weight kg Trunk cables with M2 moulded connections (patented) Ø 9. mm, shielded twisted pair, pair,.mm 2 for remote power supply Fipio bus and c 2 V power supply Equipped with male M2 connector and double female M2 connector 9 0.2 m TSX EF ACC 2002 0.2 m TSX EF ACC 200 0.0 m TSX EF ACC 200 0.80 7m TSX EF ACC 2070.020 2 m TSX EF ACC 2020.6 TSX EF ACC 20pp Trunk cables to be fitted with M2 connectors Ø 8 mm, shielded twisted pair 2 m TSX EF ACC 2020.80 Fipio bus, for use in 2 00 m TSXFPCA00.680 normal environments (2) inside buildings 200 m TSXFPCA200 0.920 00 m TSXFPCA200 0.000 Ø 9. mm, shielded twisted pair, pair,.mm 2 for remote power supply Tap-off cables Ø 8 mm, 2 shielded twisted pairs Replacement parts Fipio bus, for use in 2 00 m TSXFPCR00 7.680 harsh environments () and outside buildings or in garland 200 m TSXFPCR200.920 () 00 m TSXFPCR00 0.000 Fipio bus and c 2 V 0 00 m TSXFPCP00.680 power supply To be fitted with M2 connectors,according to use 00 m TSXFPCP00 0.000 Fipio bus tap-off (between 2 TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction boxes) 00 m TSXFPCC00.680 200 m TSXFPCC200 0.920 00 m TSXFPCC00 0.000 Use Unit reference Weight kg Strip of 0 referencing labels For referencing I/O modules and I/O channel connectors XZ LG0 0.00. IP 67 seling plugs For M2 type connectors (order in multiples of 0) XZ LG02 0.00 For M2 type connectors 70 XTS 00 00 0.0 () For key to numbers, see pages /6 et /67. (2) Normal environment: v without special environmental restrictions, v operating temperature between + C and + 60 C, v fixed installations. () Harsh environment: v resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder splashes, v up to 00 % humidity, v saline environment, v significant variations in temperature, v operating temperature between - 0 C and + 70 C, v mobile installations, v Use in garland: radius of curvature = 0 x cable diameter (either 80 or 9 mm). For other special restrictions, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Characteristics: pages /6 and /6 Connections: pages /6 to /67 Dimensions, mounting: page /6 /69

Presentation, description platform Discrete I/O IP 6 modules on INTERBUS bus Presentation Decentralising the I/O meets the requirements of both users and machine manufacturers while maintaining performance comparable with that of a centralised structure. Momentum dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules (IP 6) are used to create, via the INTERBUS bus, distributed control systems, which offer increased availability of installations. They also offer the possibility of locating the I/O interfaces close to the process or machines, in harsh environments (water jets, dust, etc). These 70 EDp modules must be controlled by an INTERBUS master module, such as the TSX IBY 00 Premium PLC module or TSX IBX 00 coprocessor. They are only connected to an installation remote bus. The installation remote bus terminal module is used for the tap link to this installation remote bus. Momentum dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules with 6 x c 2 V inputs or 6 x 0. A/c 2 V outputs offer: b Compact interface elements. b Easy setup and connection. Momentum dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules have been designed to conform with the main international standards concerning electronic industrial control equipment: b Specific requirements for programmable controllers: operating characteristics, immunity, ruggedness, safety etc. b NF C 6 80, IEC 2. b Immunity to electrostatic discharges: IEC 80.2 level.. These products, marked e, satisfy the requirements of the European directives and conform to the applicable harmonised standards. These products are approved by the INTERBUS club. Description Momentum dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules 70 EDp 6 00 are monobloc type in an IP 6 casing and comprise : A 9-way connector for connection to the installation remote bus (in). 2 A 9-way connector for connection to the installation remote bus (out). 6 7 6 status indicator lamps for inputs or outputs. Two holes for fixing the module on a mounting plate. Eight connectors for input or output channels. 6 A c 2 V auxiliary power supply connector (for the 70 ED0 6 00 output module). 7 Three or four diagnostics indicators (depending on the model). 8 Space for self-adhesive identification label. Connector to be ordered separately: v For output modules, TBX BAS 0 dust and damp proof power supply connector. 8 2 Characteristics: page /72 References: page /7 Connections: page /7 Dimensions: page /7 /70

Connection principle platform Discrete I/O IP 6 modules on INTERBUS bus Connection principle Momentum dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules are connected to the installation remote bus of an INTERBUS bus. This installation remote bus is a tap link of the remote bus to which a c 2 V power supply is added via an installation remote bus terminal module. The number of I/O modules on the installation remote bus is limited by the current consumption of the modules and connected sensors. Total consumption should not exceed. A. The current consumption of the actuators is not included in the calculation, since these are supplied separately. The maximum length of the installation remote bus cable is: b Between the installation remote bus terminal module and the first I/O module: 0 m. b Between two I/O modules: 0 m. b Between the installation remote bus terminal module and the last I/O module: 0 m. Premium d < 00 m 2 2 Installation remote bus TSX SUP d < 00 m. 2 2 2 2 TSX SUP d < 0 m Installation remote bus d < 0 m Momentum Installation remote bus terminal module 70 ENO 96 00. 2 Dust and damp proof distributed I/O module 70 EDp 6 00. Sealing plug 70 XTS 00 00. Characteristics: page /72 References: page /7 Connections: page /7 Dimensions: page /7 /7

Characteristics platform Discrete I/O IP 6 modules on INTERBUS bus Type of input module 70 EDI 6 00 Modularity 6 Nominal input values Voltage c V 2 Current ma 00 (0 % active inputs), 60 (00 % active inputs) Sensor supply (ripple included) c V 9.2 0 Input limit values At state Voltage V Current ma 2. 0 At state 0 Voltage V < Current ma < 2 Input impedance kω.6 Logic Positive Response time Changefromstate0tostate ms Changefromstatetostate0 ms Dissipated power Per module W.9 (0 % active inputs), 2. (00 % active inputs) Per channel W 0. Compatibility with INTERBUS output module Yes Isolation Dielectric strength between inputs and earth c V 70formin Insulation resistance MΩ > 0 at c 00 V Temperature Operation C 0 60 Storage C -2 +70 Relative humidity Without condensation 9 % Altitude m 0 2000. Degree of protection IP 6 Type of output module 70 EDO 6 00 Modularity 6 Loads Voltage c V 2 Nominal current A 0. Limit values Voltage (ripple included) c V 9.2 0 Logic Positive Response time Changefromstate0tostate ms Changefromstatetostate ms Leakage current At state 0 ma < Residual voltage At state V <0. Built-in protection Against short- circuits Yes (thermal) Against overloads Automatic reset Typical currents consumed Mains power supply ma 200 (0 % active outputs), 80 (00 % active outputs) Auxiliary power supply ma 80 (0 % active outputs), 220 (00 % active outputs) Dissipated power Per module W.9 (0 % active outputs), (00 % active outputs) Compatibility with INTERBUS input module Yes Isolation Dielectric strength between outputs and c V 70formin earth Insulation resistance MΩ > 0atc 00 V Temperature Operation C 0 60 Storage C -2 + 70 Relative humidity Without condensation 9 % Altitude m 0 2000 Degree of protection IP 6 References: page /7 /72 Connections: page /7 Dimensions: page /7

References, connections, dimensions, mounting platform Discrete I/O IP 6 modules on INTERBUS bus 70EDI600 70 EDO 6 00 Connections, dimensions, mounting References Dust and damp proof monobloc distributed discrete I/O modules Type of module Inputs c Operating voltage Modularity (nb of chan.) 2 V (pos.log.) 6 isolated inputs IEC 2 Conformity Reference () Weight kg Type 70EDI600 0.20 Outputs c 2 V 6 protected Yes 70 EDO 6 00 0.80 0. A outputs Accessoires de raccordement Description Use Reference () Weight kg Installation remote bus terminal module () Sealing plug Dust and damp proof power supply connector for output module Tap-off from remote bus to installation remote bus Enables communication of distributed I/O and INTERBUS master module To be fitted at end of installation remote bus c 2 V preactuator power supply for 70 EDO 6 00 output module 70 ENO 96 00 70 XTS 00 00 0.0 TBX BAS 0 0.20 Connection cables Description Length Reference () Weight kg Installation remote bus cables preformed with dust and damp proof M2 connectors, composite pure material 0. m TSX IBI CP DD9 00 m TSX IBI CP DD9 00 m TSX IBI CP DD9 00 7m TSX IBI CP DD9 070 2 m TSX IBI CP DD9 20 2 m TSX IBI CP DD9 20 Documentation Description Language Reference Weight kg Installation manual English 870USE0000 () Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide. 70 EDI 6 00 inputs Mechanical contacts 2-wire sensors -wire sensors. 2 2 - + 2 - + + - - 70 EDO 6 00 outputs Direct wiring Wiring with amplification Preactuator supply via TBX BAS 0 connector - 2 + - - + 2 + 2 - + Dimensions, mounting (2) 6 7 92, () 2 80 () For 70 EDO 6 00 module. (2) 2 holes for M x 6 screws. Characteristics: page /72 /7

Presentation platform Installation system Tego Power for motor power-stater components 6 General presentation Tego Power is a modular system which standardises and simplifies the implementation of motor power-starters with its prewired control and power circuits. Hence, installation of a motor power-starter is quick, simple, safe and flexible with no wires needed for connection. In addition, this system enables the motor power-starter to be customised at a later date. The system reduces maintenance time and optimises panel space, by reducing the number of terminals, the amount of ducting and intermediate interfaces. Two solutions are offered : b A solution using Quickfit technology for TeSys motor power-starter components with spring terminals : model d contactors (9 to 2 A) and the GV2-ME motor circuit-breaker. b A solution for TeSys motor power-starter components with screw terminals : model d (9 to 8 A) and model k (6 to 2 A) contactors and GV2 motor circuit-breakers. Tego Power Design definition software This software on CD-ROM enables the motor power-starter application to be graphically defined according to the circuit-breakers and contactors used. It determines which Tego Power products are required for the application. Referencing labels can also be created for the starters. System for Quickfit technology TeSys motor power-starters with spring terminals. 2 2 7 The motor power-starters concerned are those formed by combining : b GV2-M circuit-breakers, b with 9 to 2 A model d (LC) contactors. Consisting of simple parts, Tego Power Quickfit technology is used to create motor starter assemblies up to kw/00 V. The main components which make up this range are : For the power circuit b a power kit comprising, for each starter, a plate for mounting the contactor and the circuit-breaker, and the two power connection modules 2, b a power splitter box for 2 or starters, b an upstream terminal block 6 for a power supply up to 6 A (6 mm 2 ), b a downstream terminal block 7 for connecting the motor power supply cables and the earth cables (6 mm 2 ). For the control circuit b a control splitter box for 2 or starters, with control-command data on HE 0 connector. The data on to 8 starters can be fed back directly to the PLC via an 8I/8O or 6I/8O Telefast cable or to a fieldbus module (AS-i, Fipio, CANopen, DeviceNet, INTERBUS, Profibus) (see opposite page). b a control circuit connection module which plugs directly into the contactor and the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module concentrates the motor starter control-command data. It integrates the circuit-breaker status data in the prewiring of the contactor control circuit. System for TeSys motor power-starters with screw terminals The motor power-starters concerned are those formed by combining : b GV2 circuit-breakers (mainly GV2-ME and GV2 P), b with 6 to 2 A model k contactors (LC, LP, LC2, LP2, LP, LP) and 9 to 8 A model d contactors (LC). 2 The main components which make up this range are : b modular sub-bases for 2 or direct or reversing contactors, consisting of a prefabricated power busbar system and a control-command circuit. These sub-bases can be combined to form a variable configuration of 2,, 6 or 8 direct starters. b the sub-base interconnection kit to interconnect the control and power circuits on two sub-bases. b connection blocks 2 and which perform the following three functions : v ensure the mechanical fixing of the motor starter to the modular sub-base, v connect the power terminals of the contactor and circuit-breaker, v connect the auxiliary contact and A-A2 coil terminals to the modular sub-base. /7

Presentation (continued) platform Installation system Tego Power for motor power-starter components Communication modules General Communication modules are used to send I/O data from a Tego Power motor powerstarter configuration to the PLC. The communication modules is selected according to the type of connection required: b in parallel mode (modules, terminal blocks or HE 0), b or in serial mode on the bus (AS-i bus, INTERBUS, Fipio, Profibus DP, CANopen or DeviceNet modules). The communication modules are the same, whether the TeSys motor power-starter system uses spring or screw terminals. 2 Modules in a TeSys motor power-system with spring terminals Motor power-starters can be connected to a PLC or a bus in two ways : b by direct connection from the control circuit splitter box with starters, with an HE 0 connector (8I/8O) or two HE 0 connectors (6 I and 8 O), b by a Tego Power module using an APP-2CX adaptor plate 2.. Modules in a TeSys motor power-starter system with screw terminals A module is mounted by direct mechanical assembly on the modular sub-base, with no screws or accessories. The electrical connection between the modular sub-base and the communication module is made using an HE 0 connector. /7

Compatibility platform Tego Dial/Tego Power installation system Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces and Tego Power for motor power-starter components Automation platform Tego Dial components Tego Power components Type Modularity of connection to the PLC Compatible I/O modules Tego Dialbase 8 I/8 O Tiego Dialbase 6 I Communication module or control splitter box with 8 I/8 O APE B2M APE B2E APP CH, APP 2RH/H TSX Micro platform. Tego Dial Tego Power 8 inputs TSX DMZ 6DTK + 8 outputs 6 inputs TSX DMZ 6DTK () + 6 outputs 6 inputs TSX DMZ 6DTK/28DTK 8 inputs TSX DMZ 6DTK + 8 outputs 6 inputs TSX DMZ 6DTK + 6 outputs Premium platform Tego Dial Tego Power Quantum platform 6 inputs + 6 outputs TSX DEY 6FK/2D2K/6D2K TSX DSY 2T2K/6T2K 6 inputs TSX DEY 6FK/2D2K/6D2K 6 inputs + 6 outputs TSX DEY 2D2K/6D2K/6FK TSX DSY 2T2K/6T2K () Tego Dial 2 inputs + 2 outputs 0 DDI 00/0, 0 DDI 8 00, 0 DD0 00/0 () 2 inputs 0 DDI 00/0, 0 DDI 8 00 Tego Power 2 inputs + 2 outputs 0 DDI 00/0, 0 DDI 8 00, 0 DD0 00/0 Advantys STB discrete I/O Tego Power 6 inputs + 8 outputs STB EPI () For the connection of a second Dialbase APE B2M, use 2 x TSX DP pp connecting cables. /76

Connection accessories Control splitter box 6 I/6 O Control splitter box Splitter box 6 I + 6 O in2x(8e+8s) Splitter box 6to2x8 Telefast connecting cables APP 2RH2/H APE R628 ABE 7ACC 02 TSX CDP pp ABF M2Hpp0 STB XCA 00p 2 (2) (). 2 2 (2) () 2 (2) 2 () 2 APP 2R2E (2 motor-starters) APP 2RE ( motor-starters) () (2) 8 I + 8 O remain available. To connect a second APP-CH module or APP-2ppp 8 E + 8 S control splitter box, use a additional TSX CDP pp cable. () 8 O remain available on ABE-7ACC02. To connect them a second AAP-2ppp 6 I/8 O control splitter box, use a additional TSX CDP pp cable. () For 8 motor-starters, to use 2 APP 2RE control and power splitters. /77

/0

Contents - Application-specific modules and solutions. - Preventa safety modules and solution b Use of Preventa safety modules... page/2 b Preventa safety modules... page/ b Preventa safety controllers... page/0.2 - Application-specific counter modules Selectionguide:counterandelectroniccammodules...page/ b 0 khz counter modules... page/6 b MHz measurement and counter module... page/20 b Electronic cam module... page/2. - Motion control modules Selectionguide:motioncontrolmodules...page/28 b Twin Line offer presentation... page/0 b Lexium offer presentation... page/2 b Modules for stepper motors... page/ b Modules for servomoteurs... page/8 b SERCOS motion control modules... page/8. - Integrated weighing system b ISP Plus weighing modules v Presentation.... page/6 v Description... page/7 v Functions... page/8 v Characteristics.... page/9 v References... page/60. - Warm Standby redundancy (PL7) b Presentation/principle... page/62 b Functions... page/6 b References... page/66 b Connections... page/67 /

Presentation platform Use of Preventa safety modules Safety Production workshops and technical building installations are subject to increasing requirements in terms of machine safety..2 A good machine is a safe machine, combining: b Safety of personnel (machine is not dangerous). b Availability of the production tool (machine operational at any time). b Safety is achieved by: v simultaneously optimising safety and availability, v using basic principles: redundancy, self-monitoring, etc, v considering reliability (failure determining the behavior of the machine in a specified position, positive safety features), v ease of maintenance. The machinery directive and the work equipment directive The machinery directive A machine manufacturer is required to conform to the machinery directive. The machinery directive (89/92/EEC, 9/6/EEC, 9//EEC and 9/68/EEC) is designed to ensure the free circulation of machinery and safety components in European Union countries and to improve the level of safety for personnel. Harmonised European standards establish technical specifications which comply with the minimum safety requirements defined in the corresponding directive. Manufacturers must produce machinery which conforms to safety requirements. The work equipment directive The user is required to ensure that his range of machines conforms to the use of work equipment by workers at work directive. Directive 89/6/EEC lays down the minimum objectives for protection in the working environment and in particular concerns the use of products. The directive specifies the general framework of preventative measures which should be taken in the workplace. Safety and automated systems All dangerous areas must be identified and have restricted access, controlled in a secure manner, ie. any breakdown or careless operation must leave the automated system in a safe position. It should be noted that the use of safety products does not necessarily mean that the machine conforms to the machinery directive. It is the operation, wiring, compatibility and scheme used, which make the entire machine safe. It is more important to think in terms of safety solutions rather than safety products. Groupe Schneider, safety specialists Groupe Schneider, specialists in safety, has a range of several thousand products, all concerned directly or indirectly with safety. Some of these products are exclusively designed for safety. Preventa safety module Mushroom head emergency stop button Two-handel control Safety module integrated in PLC For further details on components for safety applications, please consult our specialist catalogue. /2

Presentation (continued) platform Use of Preventa safety modules Non-controlled safety systems KM KM The control signal from the protection device (emergency stop pushbutton illustrated to the left) acts directly on the power contactor of the machine. In this type of scheme, the risks of simple faults are: b emergency stop button being shorted. b KM contactor sticking. When the operator presses an emergency stop button, the instruction is not processed, and another sequence can begin following the emergency stop, despite the presence of the fault. In the case of failure, the safety function () is compromised. Therefore, a reliable intermediate relay system must be used. KM () A safety function is a function whose non-execution or untimely execution results in the immediate placement of the equipment into a non-hazardous position. Safety system controlled by a Preventa safety module M Feedback loop.2 KM6 KM KM KM Emergency stop Run KM6 KM6 Preventa safety module Redundancy KM KM6 M KM and KM6 contactors with mechnically linked contacts Independent safety circuits Preventa safety modules provide a reliable interposing relay function by eliminating the risks of: b A control circuit fault (inputs). b A power circuit fault (outputs). b A fault on an internal safety module component. The safety function remains operative whenever any one of these faults occur. For the use of mechanically linked contacts CA2-DN22/DN, LC-D09/D8/D2, LP-D09/D8/D2 with contacts which can be used in the feedback loop, please consult your Regional Sales Office. /

Presentation, functions platform Preventa safety modules type TSX PAY Presentation TSX PAY safety modules integrated in the Premium PLC combine : v the simplicity of use of Preventa safety modules v the high performance of PLC diagnostics in addition to the advantages of a standard PLC (extended choice of I/O, simplicity of setup, flexibility for hardware and software developments, etc). TSX PAY safety modules incorporate in a single module, a Preventa (XPS) hard-wired safety block and an electronic data acquisition unit for complete diagnostics of input contacts and the state of outputs in the safety system. TSX PAY safety modules are used to safely interrupt one or more Emergency stop or safety stop control circuits according to the standards EN 6020- and EN 8. The proven safety of hard-wired technology and the performance of Premium PLCs make the TSX PAY modules the optimum solution for creating machines which are more available, safer, more compact and lower in cost. Premium + TSX PAY Solution for applications requiring safety systems and high-performance diagnostics The solution, integrated safety modules, enables complete diagnostics on the entire safety system. This diagnostics quickly locates the faulty contact, pushbutton cables, or limit switch, without additional contacts on the inputs and without any additional wiring. TSX PAY safety modules have their own power supplies and operate independently of the PLC processor..2 K TSX PAY modules are suitable for Emergency stop and limit switch monitoring applications, demanding a level of safety up to category according to standard EN 9- (parts of control systems relating to safety). K M Functions TSX PAY modules offer the following functions: b Monitoring of to 2 double or single pushbutton contacts, Emergency stop and limit switches for safety guards for an Emergency stop or immediate stop safety system (Emergency stop category 0 according to standard EN 8). b Hard-wired safety block identical to Preventa XPS safety modules: v 2 or N/O (normally open) safety outputs, v 2 double contact inputs. b Safety block independent of the Premium PLC processor: the PLC does not operate on the safety module. b 28 LEDs on the module display block: for complete diagnostics of the safety system. b Electronic data acquisition units for complete diagnostics of the safety system: v read the status of the 2 inputs (image of the status of the 2 pushbuttons or limit switches) v read the enable input, v read the feedback loop, v read the safety outputs control, v monitor the external power supply of the module. This electronic data acquisition is designed so that the safety function is not compromised by any failure. If the safety system uses more sensors, it is possible to connect several TSX PAY modules. Characteristics: page /7 / References: page /8 Connections: page /9

Operation Modicon Premium automation platform Preventa safety modules type TSX PAY TSX PAY 262 module schematic To ensure the safety function irrespective of the first failure, it is compulsory to use: b For the inputs: Emergency stop pushbuttons or safety limit switches with double contacts b For the outputs: if relaying is necessary, use a guided contact relay b Onthemodulepowersupply:anFprotectionfuse(seepage/7characteristics). 2 V 0 V S2 S F S2 S/S22 S/S2 B A A2 Ix,2 Ix, TSX PAY 262 S2 S S S0 - et 2-2 Y-Y2/S: Y2/S-S: Y-Y: S2 à S22: S0 à S2: A-A2: B: L(+) N(-) K K S2/S222 S22 Y K Y2/S F2 Functional diagrams Emergency stop function Input channel (+) (S2 to S22) Input channel (-) (S0 to S2) Feedback loop Y-Y2/S S Y Y S2 S/S02 S2/S2 S/S02 S0 K 2 2 K2 Ix,2 Safety logic Ix, Ix, Ix,0 K2 K Safety outputs, volt-free Feedback loop Run enable Choice of reactivation mode, see page /9 2 contacts on (+) input channel 2 contacts on (+) input channel c 2 V external power supply Selection of double or single contact wiring Power supply voltage On K Emergency stop not activated I s o l a t i o n Bus interface Bus Emergency stop activated.2 Start-up button Y2/S-S N/O Output - N/O Output 2-2 N/O Key 0 Protective function with automatic start-up Power supply st switch 2 nd switch voltage Guard closed Input channel (+) (S2 to S22) Input channel (-) (S0 to S2) Feedback loop Y-Y2/S Shunt to Y2/S-S N/O Output - N/O Guard opens Output 2-2 N/O 200 ms max Key 0 Characteristics: page /7 References: page /8 /

Description, connection principle platform Preventa safety modules type TSX PAY Description TSX PAY safety modules comprise on the front panel : 2 6 A rigid IP 20 casing to hold and protect the electronic card. 2 A display block (2 LEDs) showing operating modes, faults and the status of the safety system. A high density -way SUB-D connector for connecting the safety system. A 6-way removable screw terminal block for connecting the safety outputs. Marking for labelling the safety outputs. 6 Marking for the external power supply of the module. Connection principle Two types of connection for TSX PAY safety modules are available: Standard wiring A TSX CPP 0 three metre cable is fitted with a -way SUB-D moulded, elbow connector at one end, and flying leads differentiated by a colour code at the other end. This wiring system conforms to the standard EN 9-..2 Fast wiring Using the Telefast 2 pre-wired system facilitates the installation of TSX PAY safety modules by giving access to inputs on the safety system via screw terminals. Connection is carried out using TSX CPP p02 cables fitted with -way SUB-D moulded, elbow connectors at both ends. The Telefast ABE 7CPA sub-base enables the connection of 2 double or single contact inputs, the power supply, reset inputs and the feedback loop. This wiring system conforms to the standard EN 9-. Characteristics: page /7 /6 References: page /8 Connections: page /9

Characteristics Modicon Premium automation platform Preventa safety modules type TSX PAY Standards and certifications Type of modules TSX PAY 262 TSX PAY 282 Standards Machine Machine electrical EN 6020- ou IEC 20-, EN 292 equipment Emergency stop equipment EN 8 Product Machine safety-parts of control systems relating to EN 9- category, EN 088 pr IEC 608 (SIL ) safety PLC Specific requirements IEC 6-2 (EN 6-2), CSA 22-2, UL 08 Product certifications General characteristics BG, UL, CSA Power supply Nominal voltage V c 2 Operating voltage limit V c 9,2 0 Fault indication V c < 20 Maximum consumption ma 200 Protection by external F fuse Conforming to IEC 97-- A gg Consumption on internal V ma < 0 Isolation kv (overvoltage category III, degree of pollution 2) Characteristics of discrete inputs Modularity Emergency stop or limit 2 double or single contacts switch discrete inputs Reset PB input Feedback loop input Reset PB monitoring input Double or single contact selection input Logic Positive IEC conformity Type Courant d'appel Maximum A 0, Isolation between input and earth Veff 00-0/60Hzformin Power Dissipatedinthemodule W <.2 Characteristics of safety relay outputs Modularity 2 volt-free outputs volt-free outputs Operating voltage limit a.c V a 9 20 d.c V c 7 27 Maximum thermal current (Ithe) A 2, Minimum current ma 0 a.c. load Inductive Voltage V a 2 a 8 a 0 a 220 AC- duty Power VA 60 20 280 0 d.c. load Inductive Voltage V c 2 DC- duty Power (L/R = 00 ms) VA 60 Response timee ms <0 Type of contact AgCdO gold plated External protection of outputs by F2 fuse Cross-section of connecting cables Isolation between input and earth Environment Conforming to IEC 97-- A gg Without cable end mm 2 0.2 2. With cable end mm 2, Insulation voltage conforming V 00 to DIN VDE 00 part 2 Test voltage Veff 00-0/60 Hz for min Temperature Operation C 0 C +60 C Storage C -2 C +70 C Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 29 IP 20 References: page /8 Connections: page /9 /7

References Modicon Premium automation platform Preventa safety modules type TSX PAY TSX PAY 262 Safety modules Type of input c 2 V 2 Emergency stops or limit switches (double or single contacts), reset button, feedback loop, reset monitor Safety outputs Connections Reference () Weight kg 2N/O (volt-free) 2. A (Ithe) N/O (volt-free) 2. A (Ithe) Inputs: -way SUB-D connector Outputs: screw terminal (supplied) TSX PAY 262 0.0 Inputs: -way SUB-D connector TSX PAY 282 0.90 Outputs: screw terminal (supplied) Connection accessory Description For Type of connector on Reference Weight connection on TSX PAY 2p2 kg screw terminal Telefast 2 sub-base for TSX PAY 2p2 modules Safety system, reset,monitoring and loop inputs Power supply c 2 V SUB-D, -way ABE 7CPA 0.290 TSX PAY 282 Connecting cables Use From TSX PAY 2p2 module For fast wiring -way SUB-D connector To Length Reference Weight kg ABE-7CPA sub-base m TSX CPP 02 0.60 2m TSX CPP 202 0.260.2 m TSX CPP 02 0.60 ABE-7CPA For standard wiring -way SUB-D connector Flying leads with colourcoded wires m TSX CPP 0 0.0 () Product supplied with a multilingual quick reference guide. Characteristics: page /7 Connections: page /9 /8

Connections Modicon Premium automation platform Preventa safety modules type TSX PAY Input channel connection schemes Wiring input channel: single contact Wiring 2 input channels: double contacts S2 S S S S6 S7 S8 S9 S20 S2 S22 S2 + 2 V 0 V ( ) (+) F S0 S2 S2 S22/S S2/S S2/S S2/S6 S62/S7 S72/S8 S82/S9 S92/S20 S202/S2 S22/S22 S222/S2 S22 B A A2 Single contact wiring is not suitable for applications which require acategoryorsafetylevel. Not all faults are detected, a short-circuit on a contact is not detected. When using less than 2 single contacts, connect the input terminals which are not being used. For applications with more than 2 single contacts, it is possible to use several TSX PAY modules by wiring the outputs in series. Double contact wiring of the inputs is necessary for creating applications which require a category or safety level. When prompted, all the first faults are detected and located. A short-circuit between the 2 inputs is detected. When using less than 2 double contacts, connect the input terminals which are not being used. For applications with more than 2 double contacts, it is possible to use several TSX PAY modules by wiring the outputs in series. Safety output connection schemes S0 S S2 S S S S6 S7 S8 S9 S0 S S2 S22 S2 S20 S9 S8 S7 S6 S S S S2 Reset function configurations + 2 V 0 V (+) F ( ) S0 S/S02 S2/S2 S/S22 S/S2 S/S2 S6/S2 S7/S62 S8/S72 S9/S82 S0/S92 S/S02 S2 S22 S2/S222 S22/S22 S2/S202 S20/S92 S9/S82 S8/S72 S7/S62 S6/S2 S/S2 S/S2 S/S22 S2 B A A2.2 ) K K 2 K2 K Y K Y2/S 2 K F2 L(+) Y Y2/S S Y Y Y Y2/S S Y Y Automatic start-up Manual reset without start button monitoring 2 K KK K6 K2 Y2/S /2 / K K K6 K F2 L(+) The design of a category or immediate stop system requires redundancy and checking, on request, of the power supply breaker devices. The wiring of N/C contacts (K and K) enables this check on each request. Relays K and K must be mechanically linked contact relays. K Y F2 L2(+) Y Y2/S S Y Y Manual reset with start button monitoring When TSX PAY modules cut the power directly, it is necessary to connect the terminals Y and Y2/S. Characteristics: page /7 References: page /8 /9

Presentation Modicon Premium automation platform Preventa safety controllers Type XPS MC XPS MC6X with screw connector XPS MCTS6 Presentation Safety controllers XPS MCppX are designed to meet the requirements of safety applications requiring conformity to category of standard EN 9-. b They are available in 2 versions: v XPS MC6X with 6 inputs and 8 independent safety outputs, v XPS MC2X with 2 inputs and 8 independent safety outputs. v The safety inputs are supplied by the various control outputs, in such a manner so as to monitor for short-circuits between the inputs, short-circuits between each input and earth or the presence of residual voltages. The controller, assisted by the control outputs, continuously tests all the connected inputs. As soon as an error is detected on an input, all the outputs associated with this input are disconnected. Safety outputs associated with other inputs remain active. v The 0 safety outputs comprise contact guided relay outputs and 6 solid-state outputs. b Safety controllers XPS MC incorporate a Modbus communication interface for configuration and diagnostics. The Modbus interface enables the controller to be connected to a PC, PLC or an operator dialogue terminal. b Configuration of the safety functions is carried out using software XPS MCWIN. 22 certified safety functions are available with this software and they are easily assignable to the safety outputs. The safety functions have multiple combination possibilities and various starting conditions. XPS MC2X with screw connector XPS MCTS2 b Safety controllers XPS MCppX can be fitted as required: v with screw connectors XPS MCTSpp, v or with spring clip connectors XPS MCTCpp. v These connectors are to be ordered separately..2 Safety functions The safety functions are certified in accordance with category of standard EN 9- and configurable in the XPS MC controller using software XPS MCWIN. Main safety functions Emergency stop monitoring, with or without time delay, or 2-channel wiring. Two-hand control (type III-C conforming to EN 7-). Guard monitoring with or 2 limit switches. Guard monitoring for injector presses and blowing machines. Magnetic switch monitoring. Sensing mat monitoring. Light curtain (type conforming to EN 696, relay or solid-state output) monitoring. Zero speed detection. Dynamic monitoring of hydraulic valves on linear presses. Monitoring safety stop at top dead centre on eccentric press. Safety time delays. "Muting" function of light curtains. Enabling switch monitoring, 2 or contact. Characteristics: page /2 References, dimensions: page / /0

Description Modicon Premium automation platform Preventa safety controllers Type XPS MC Description Front face of controllers XPS MCppX 2 6 LED display and system diagnostics. 2 Solid-state safety output and "muting" indicator light terminals. Power supply (c 2 V) and relay safety output terminals. Control output terminals for power supply to safety inputs and safety input terminals. RJ type connector. 6 RESET button (reinitialisation). Controller XPS MC2X with screw connector 7 9 LED details 2 PWR CNF E In E Ex RUN COM 6 8 Illuminated display PWR: green LED, power on. 2 CNF: yellow LED, on or flashing in configuration mode. E In: red LED, internal error. E Ex: red LED, external error. Run: green LED, on or flashing depending on service mode. 6 COM: green LED, controller communicating via TER connection. 7 green LEDs, solid-state outputs. 8 green LEDs, relay outputs. 9 green LEDs, inputs..2 Operator dialogue terminal (Magelis) Modbus PLC (Premium) Operator dialogue terminal (Magelis) 2 Network architecture b Safety controllers XPS MCppX communicate on the Modbus network for diagnostics using an operator dialogue terminal (Magelis) or an industrial PLC (Premium). For direct connection to a Magelis operator dialogue terminal, use the following connection accessories: Adaptor XPS MCCPC, 2 Connecting cable XBT Z968. XPS MC XPS MC XPS MC PC 2 XPS MC Profibus DP LUF P7 XPS MC b Safety controllers XPS MCppX communicate with a PC, running software XPS MCWIN, for configuration of the safety functions. Connection accessories: Adaptor XPS MCCPC, 2 Connecting cable TSX PCX 0. b Safety controllers XPS MCppX communicate on the Profibus DP network using communication gateway LUF P7. Characteristics: page /2 References, dimensions: page / /

Characteristics Modicon Premium automation platform Preventa safety controllers Type XPS MC Characteristics Controller type XPS MC6X, XPS MC2X Product designed for max. use in safety related parts of Category conforming to EN 9- control systems Supply voltage V c 2 ± 20% Maximum consumption W 2 Fuse protection A 6 gl max. Start button monitoring Yes/No (depending on configuration selected) Control circuit voltage 28.8 V/ ma (between input terminals C-I to C8-I6, resp.l2) Calculation of wiring resistance RL Ω 00 max, maximum cable length: 2000 m (Between input terminals) Synchronisation time between inputs s Depending on configuration selected Outputs Relay Voltage reference Potential Free Safety circuit 2 N/O per function ( N/O total) (-, 2-2, -, -) Breaking capacity in AC- VA C00: inrush 800, maintained 80 Breaking capacity in DC- 2 V/. A L/R = 0 ms Thermal current (Ithe) for each group of 2 outputs A 6foroutputand2fortheother,or for both outputs. Current limit A Ith y 6 (with several relay output circuits simultaneously loaded) Output fuse protection A glor6fastacting Minimum current ma 0 () Minimum voltage V 7 () Solid-state Breaking capacity 2 V/2 A Safety circuit 6 solid-state (O, O2, O, O, O, O6) Current limit A Ith y 6. (with several relay output circuits simultaneously loaded.2 Electrical durability Consult our catalogue Safety solutions using Preventa Response time on input opening ms < 20 < 0 for a safety mat Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 00 (degree of pollution 2 conforming to IEC 6067--, DIN VDE 00 part ) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp.) kv (overvoltage category III, conforming to IEC 6067--, DIN VDE 00 part ) LED indicators 0 (XPS MC6X), 6 (XPS MC2X) Temperature Operating C -0 + Storage C -2 +8 Degree of protection IP 20 conforming to IEC 6029 (connector and enclosure) Connections Type (2) Separate plug-in screw connector XPS MCTSpp Separate plug-in spring clip connector XPS MCTCpp Power supply and relay output terminals conductor Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.2 2. mm², AWG 2-2 With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.2 2. mm² With bezel, flexible cable: 0.2 2. 2 conductors Without cable end mm² Solid or flexible cable: 0.2. With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.2. mm² Double, with bezel, flexible cable: 0.. Double, with bezel, flexible cable: 0. Tightening torque of screw contacts Nm 0. 0.6 Wire stripping length mm 0 Other terminals conductor Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.. mm², AWG 28-6 With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.2. mm² With bezel, flexible cable: 0.2 0. 2 conductors Without cable end mm² Solid cable: 0. 0. Flexible cable: 0. 0.7 With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.2 0. mm² Double, with bezel, flexible cable: 0. Enclosure fixing (conforming to DIN EN 0022) Metal adaptor for fixing on standard mm rail () The controller is also capable of switching low power loads (7 V/0 ma minimum) provided that the contact has not been used for switching high power loads, causing possible contamination or wear of the gold layer on the contact tips. (2) To be ordered separately. Presentation: page /0 /2 Description: page / References, dimensions: page /

References, dimensions platform Preventa safety controllers Type XPS MC References Safety controllers (connector not included) Number of Number of outputs Reference Weight inputs Relay Solid-state kg 6 6 XPS MC6X 0.820 2 6 XPS MC2X 0.80 XPS MC6X with screw connector XPS MCTS6 XPS MC2X with screw connector XPS MCTS2 Connector (to be ordered separately) Description For use with Reference Weight kg Screw connectors XPS MC6X XPS MCTS6 0.080 XPS MC2X XPS MCTS2 0.0 Spring clip connectors XPS MC6X XPS MCTC6 0.080 XPS MC2X XPS MCTC2 0.0 Accessories (to be ordered separately) Description Usage Length From To (m) Connecting cables XPS MCppX Reference Weight kg Magelis operator 2. XBT Z968 0.80 dialogue terminal PC 2. TSX PCX 0 0.70 TSX PCX 0 XPS MCCPC Adaptor Link between XPS MCppXandPCorXPS MCppX XPS MCCPC 0.0 and Magelis operator dialogue terminal Configuration software CD-ROM XPS MCWIN 0.200 For Windows 9, 98, NT, Me, 2000 and XP. Power supply unit c 2 V ABL 7RP20 2.200 Dimensions, mounting XPS MCppX.2 () 9 6, 7 7 = = 0 7 6 9, 6 () With connector XPS MCTSpp: mm. With connector XPS MCTCpp:. mm. Presentation: page /0 Description: page / Characteristics: page /2 /

Selection guide platform Counter and electronic cam modules Applications Counter modules Number of channels 2 channels channels Frequency per channel 0 khz 0 khz Module cycle time ms 0 ms Counter/measurement input Counting pulses c 2 V Up to 0 khz: - Proximity sensor type 2 - Mechanical contacts Incremental encoder Up to 0 khz : - c 0 0 V - c VRS22withzeromarker Absolute encoder.2 Reflex inputs/outputs Per channel: -inputsc 2 V: enable, preset and read - input c 2 V line check, incremental encoder power supply - 2 reflex outputs c 2 V Counting capacity 2bits+sign(0to+67772pointsor±67772points) Functions Downcounting with preset input, upcounting with reset to zero input Up/down counting with preset input, configurable upcounter input: - upcounter input/ downcounter input - up/down counter input and direction input - Incremental encoder with phase-shifted signals Processing Inputs: counter enable, counter preset, read current value Comparison: - Downcounting, to value 0 - Upcounting, 2 thresholds and setpoint - Up/down counting, 2 thresholds and 2 setpoints Reflex outputs: - Downcounting function, passage through zero output - Upcounting function, passage through setpoint value output - Up/down counting function, 2 user-definable outputs - Up/down counting function, 2 user-definable outputs Events User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (threshold crossing, setpoint crossing, preset or reset, enable, capture) Connection - -way SUB-D connectors ( per counter channel, direct or TSX TAP S pp accessory) - HE 0 connector for auxiliary I/O and power supply - Telefast 2 system (ABE 7CPA0, ABE 7H08R0/6R20) Type of module TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY A Page /9 /

Fast counter and measurement module Electronic cam module 2 channels channel 00 khz ms Up to MHz: - Proximity sensor type 2 - Mechanical contacts 00 khz in multiplication by, 20 khz in multiplication by : - c 0 0 V - c VRS22withzeromarker Power supply c Vouc 0 0 V: - SSI absolute encoder up to 2 bits - Parallel absolute encoder up to 2 bits (with Telefast ABE 7CPA sub-base) Per channel : - 2 inputs c 2 V : preset and read - enable input or c 2 V output, configurable - 2 reflex outputs c 2 V - programmable frequency output 2 V - encoder power supply input c V/2V - proximity sensor compatible inputs 2 V type I - 2 track outputs 2 V/0. A protected.2 2 bits + sign (0 to + 6 777 2, upcounting) or 2 bits + sign (- 6 777 2 to + 6 777 2, downcounting, up/down counting). Up to 2 bits for SSI absolute encoder 26 to 2 768 points per cycle and from to 2 768 cycles,(absorbs play on reverse) Up/down counting with preset input, configurable counter input: - upcounter input/ downcounter input - up/down counter input and direction input - Incremental encoder with phase-shifted signals Measurement 2: - SSI absolute encoder - Parallel output absolute encoder with ABE 7CPA sub-base Processing of 28 cams/2 tracks (of which 2 with direct output) Output update cycle: - 0 µs for 6 cams - 00 µs for 6 cams - 200 µs for 28 cams Two capture registers Control/recalibration of axis slip Inputs: counter enable, counter preset, read current value Comparison: 2 thresholds Reflex outputs: 2 user-definable outputs Speed monitoring Special functions Cam profiles: basic types (position, monostable, brake) Associated functions: - Elimination of axis backlash, position recalibration - Measurement capture - Switching feedforward - Parts counter User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (crossing of thresholds or modulo value, preset, enable, capture) User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (cams, track, adjustment, read, etc.) - way SUB-D connectors ( per counter channel, direct or TSX TAP Spp accessory) - HE 0 connector for reflex I/O and power supply - Telefast 2 system (ABE 7CPA0, ABE 7H6R20, ABE 7CPA) TSX CTY 2C TSX CCY 28 /2 /26 /

Presentation, description, operation platform TSX CTY 2A/A counter modules Presentation Counting functions are required for counting parts or events, grouping objects, incoming or outgoing flow control, and measuring the length or the position of elements. Premium PLCs perform these functions using TSX CTY 2A/A counter modules which have a counting frequency of 0 khz maximum. In a Premium PLC configuration, the number of TSX CTY counter modules is added to the number of other application-specific modules (communication, motion control and weighing). See pages /0 and /. They can be disconnected while powered up. Counter modules are characterised by the number of channels : b 2 channels with downcounting, upcounting and up/down counting functions for the TSX CTY 2A module, b channels with downcounting, upcounting and up/down counting functions for the TSX CTY A module. The parameters of these functions are set by software configuration. The modules accept c Vorc 0 to 0 V solid state output sensors (incremental encoders, proximity sensors, photoelectric detectors) and mechanical contact output sensors (in this case the counting frequency is limited to 00 Hz). Description The front panel of TSX CTY 2A (2-channel) and TSX CTY A (-channel) counter modules comprises: One -way SUB-D type connector per channel for connecting: b Counting sensors or incremental encoder. b Sensor power supply. b Encoder supply feedback for checking it is correctly supplied..2 TSX CTY 2A 2 TSX CTY A 2 2 One 20-way HE0 type connector for 2 channels for connecting on each channel: b Auxiliary inputs: preset, enable. b Reflex outputs. b Power supplies for auxiliary I/O and incremental encoders. Rigid casing which: b Holds the electronic card. b Locates and locks the module in its slot... CH2 CH0 RUN ERR CH CH I/O Module diagnostic LEDs: b Module diagnostics: v Green RUN LED: module operating, v Red ERR LED: internal fault, module failure, v Red I/O LED: external fault. b Channel diagnostics: v Green CHp LED: channel diagnostics available. Operation block diagram Block diagram of a channel Configuration and adjustment %KW, %MW Configuration parameters Discrete sensor or incremental encoder signals Incremental encoder input Sensor inputs %Q, %QW %I, %IW Upcounting and/or downcounting function with processing: - measurement comparison with 2 thresholds and 2 setpoints - event management Auxiliary I/O processing Counter enable input Read input Preset input Reflex output 0 Reflex output Characteristics: page /9 /6 Connections: page /8 Counter modules are set up using PL7 Junior/Pro software (see page 6/9). References: page /9

Characteristics platform TSX CTY 2A/A counter modules Electrical characteristics Type of modules TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY A Modularity 2 channels channels Frequency on counter inputs khz 0 maxi 0 maxi Consumption ma see page 9/ see page 9/ Dissipated power W. typical (6 maxi) 8 typical (. maxi) Sensor power supply check yes yes Module cycle time ms 0 Event processing response time ms Acceptance of event-triggered input (enable/read/preset) and positioning of: - reflex output on TSX CTY 2A/A: ms - discrete module output; TSX DSY 8T22: 2. ms; TSX DSY 2T2K:.2 ms Input characteristics Type of input Counter inputs (IA/IB/IZ) Auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, read) Nominal values Voltage V 2 2 Current ma 8 8 7 Limit values Voltage V. 9...0(uptoVpossible, limit hr per 2 hr period) 9...0 (up to V possible, limit hr per 2 hr period) At state Voltage V 2. Current ma >.7 (for U = 2. V) > 6 (for U = V) >6(forU=V) At state 0 Voltage V.2 Current ma < (for U =.2 V) <2(forU=V) <2(forU=V) Logic Positive Positive Positive Sensor voltage check response time At loss of 2 V ms <2. At return of 2 V ms ms Input impedance For nominal U W 00 00 00 For U = 2. V W > 270 (RS 22 compatibility) Response time Maximum permissible frequency 0 khz with incremental <20µs encoder Immunity.6 ms with mechanical contact Type of input Resistive Resistive Current sink.2 IEC conformity Type 2 Type 2 2-wire proximity sensor compatibility 2-wire/-wire 2-wire/-wire Output characteristics Type of output Auxiliary outputs (2 par channel) Nominal voltage V c 2 Voltage limits V 9...0 (up to V possible, limit hr per 2 hr period) Nominal current ma 00 Maximum voltage drop when ON V <0. Leakage current ma <0. Switching time µs < 20 Electrostatic discharge time s L/R Switching frequency on inductive load Hz F<0.6/(LI 2 ) Compatibility with d.c. inputs IEC 2 compatibility Protections against overloads and short-circuits Protection against channel overvoltages Protection against polarity inversions All positive logic inputs with input resistance < kω yes Current limiter and thermal tripping (reactivated via program or automatically) Zener diode between outputs and + 2 V Diode reverse-mounted on supply References: page /9 Connections: page /8 /7

C C C C 2 7 9 2 6 8 Connections, dimensions platform TSX CTY 2A/A counter modules Connections Examples of connecting counter inputs 2 ++ + + Countersensor c 2 V supply 28 + 2 VDC 26 0 VDC 27 Telefast 2 0 VDC 2 TSX CTY A Channel 2 Channel 0 Channel Channels 2 and Channel Channels 0 and GND ABE 7CPA0 0 2 6 7 8 9 20 2 22 2 2 2 26 27 28 29 0 2 EPSR 8 IZ 6 IZ + 2 V IB 0 IB + 2 V 8 + + Z B -wire PNP proximity sensor IA IA + 2 V + A GND ++ Auxiliary I/O Supply c 2 V Q Q0 Reflex outputs.2 6 ++ 200 00 00 Telefast 2 20 0 0 202 02 02 20 0 0 20 0 0 20 0 0 206 06 06 ABE 7H6R20 + ABE 7BV20 Incremental encoder 2 TSX TAP S 0/2 connector TSX TAP S 0 TSX TAP S 2 IB - 7 NC NC 7 NC 2 Power ret. 8 IB + V 2 NC 8 IB + 2 V IZ + V 9 NC IZ + 2 V 9 NC IZ - 0 0 V NC 0 0 V IA + V NC IA + 2 V NC 6 IA- 2 +V 6 NC 2 +0 0V TSX CCP S cable with connector TSX CAP S connector TSX CDPpp preformed cable 6 TSX CDPpp2orTSXCDPpp rolled ribbon or preformed cable with connectors 207 07 07 208 08 08 209 09 09 20 0 0 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 ICapt IVal IPres Q Q0 ICapt0 IVal0 IPres0 Encoder power supply 0 20 09 209 08 208 2 2 06 206 0 20 0 20 02 0 00 + + + + + + Read Enable Preset Reflex outputs Read Enable Preset Channel Channel 0 Dimensions Connection interface for incremental encoder TSX TAP S 0/2 70,, Mounting through enclosure (dust and damp proof) - cut-out Ø 7, - maximum panel thickness mm. 27, 8 7 Characteristics: page /7 References: page /9 /8

References platform TSX CTY 2A/A counter modules TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY A Counter modules Type of input Characteristics Nb of channels 2/-wire prox.sensors PNP/NPN, c 2 V, Incremental encoder, c V RS 22, c 0 0 V Totem Pole Counting 0 khz Cycletimems Counting 0 khz Cycletime0ms Connection accessories Description For connecting Connector type on TSX CTY pp SUB-D connectors (soldinlotsof2) Telefast 2 connection sub-bases Reference () Weight kg 2 TSX CTY 2A 0.20 TSX CTY A 0.0 Rep. Unit Reference Weight kg Counter sensors or SUB-D, -way TSX CAP S 0.00 incremental encoder Counter sensors and c 2 V power supply SUB-D, -way ABE 7CPA0 0.00 ABE 7CPA0 Additional terminal block Auxiliary inputs, c 2 V power supply and c V/0 0 V encoder power supply HE 0, 20-way (for 2 channels ) ABE 7H6R20 0.00 20 shuntedterminals (Soldinlotsof) ABE 7BV20 0.00 for ABE 7H6R20 sub-base ABE 7H6R20 Connection interfaces for incremental encoder Encoder c VRS22 SUB-D, -way 2 TSX TAP S 0 0.260 Encoder c 0...0 V SUB-D, -way 2 TSX TAP S 2 0.260 Totem Pole Connecting cables.2 Description From TSX CTY pp module To Rep. Length Reference Weight kg TSX TAP S pp Cables (cross-section 0.20 mm 2 ) -way SUB-D connector ABE 7CPA0/ ABE CPA sub-bases or TSX TAP Spp (-way SUB-D connector) 0. m TSX CCP S 00 0.0 m TSX CCP S 00 0.60 2. m TSX CCP S 0.00 20-wire preformed cables (00 ma max.) Auxiliary inputs, Free end with colour-coded c 2 V power wires supply and c V/0 0V encoder power supply (HE 0, 20-way moulded connector) m TSX CDP 0 0.00 m TSX CDP 0 0.660 0 m TSX CDP 00.20 TSX CCP S ppp TSX CDP p0 Rolled ribbon cable (00 ma max.) Auxiliary inputs, c 2 V power supply and c V/0 0V encoder power supply (HE 0, 20-way connector) ABE 7H6R20 6 m TSX CDP 02 0.090 Telefast 2 sub-base 2m TSX CDP 202 0.70 (HE 0, 20-way connector) m TSX CDP 02 0.20 Connecting cables (00 ma max.) Auxiliary inputs, c 2 V power supply and c V/0 0V encoder power supply (HE 0, 20-way connector) ABE 7H6R20 6 0. m TSX CDP 0 0.08 Telefast 2 sub-base m TSX CDP 0 0.0 (HE 0, 20-way connector) 2m TSX CDP 20 0.280 m TSX CDP 0 0.0 m TSX CDP 0 0.670 () Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. TSX CDP p02 TSX CDP p0 Characteristics: page /7 /9

Presentation, description, operation platform TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module Presentation The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module is used with fast machines requiring precise measurements with short cycle times and high input frequencies (timber machines, packing machines, etc). The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module provides the standard functions (speed monitoring, reflex outputs, etc) enabling a simple position control function to be performed by the application program. The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module also enables special functions to be managed. Description TSX CTY 2C 2 The front panel of a TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module comprises: One -way SUB-D connector per channel for connecting: v Counting sensors or incremental encoder, v SSI absolute encoder or parallel output encoder with ABE 7CPA sub-base, v Sensor power supply, v Encoder power supply feedback for checking it is correctly supplied. 2 One 20-way HE0 connector for connecting on each channel : v Auxiliary inputs: preset, enable and read, v Reflex outputs, v Programmable frequency output, v Power supplies for auxiliary I/O and encoders..2 CH0 RUN CH ERR I/O Rigid casing which: v Holds the electronic card, v Locates and locks the module in its slot... Module diagnostic lamps: v Module diagnostic: - Green RUN: module operating. - Red ERR lamp: internal fault, module failure. - Red I/O lamp: external fault. v Channel diagnostic: - Green CHp lamp: channel diagnostics available. Operation block diagram Block diagram of a channel: Configuration and adjustment %KW, %MW Configuration parameters Discrete sensor signals or incremental encoder or SSI absolute encoder Incremental encoder input Detector inputs SSI absolute encoder inputs Parallel output encoder inputs %Q, %QW %I, %IW Upcounting/downcounting function and measurement with processing: - measurement comparison with 2 thresholds - event management - speed monitoring Auxiliary I/O processing Enable input () Read input Preset input Reflex output 0 Reflex output Output 2 () Programmable frequency output Counter modules are set up using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software (see pages 6/6 or 6/6). This requires the use of TSX P/PCX 7pp2/M processors and Atrium TPCX7 pp2m/m coprocessors. () The enable input and output 2 cannot be used simultaneously. Characteristics: page /2 References: page /2 /20

Characteristics platform TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module Electrical characteristics Type of module Modularity Frequency on counter inputs TSX CTY 2C 2 channels Counting: MHz. With phase-shifted signal encoder: multiplication by : 00 khz, multiplication by : 20 khz Consumption ma seepage9/ Dissipated power W 7typical(0max.) Sensor power supply check Yes Module cycle time ms (for 2 channels) Event processing response time Input characteristics ms Acceptance of event-triggered input (enable/read/preset) and positioning of - a reflex output: ms - discrete output modules TSX DSY 8T22: 2.ms;TSX DSY 2T2K:.2 ms. Type of input Counter inputs Auxiliary inputs (IA/IB/IZ or SSI absolute (IA/IB/IZ ) (preset, enable, read) encoder) Nominal values Voltage V 2 2 Current ma 8 6 8 Limit values Voltage V. 9...0 (up to V possible, limited to hr per 2 hr period) 9...0 (up to V possible, limited to hr per 2 hr period) At state Voltage V 2. Current ma >.6 (for U = 2. V) > 6 (for U = V) >6(forU=V) At state 0 Voltage V.2 Current ma < (for U =.2 V) <2(forU=V) <2(forU=V) Logic Positive Positive Positive Sensor voltage check response At loss of 2 V ms <2. time At return of 2 V ms <0 Input impedance For nominal U W 00 00 00 Input impedance for U = 2. V (RS 22 compatibility) W > 270 Response time µs <0 Type of input Resistive Resistive Current sink IEC conformity Type 2 Type 2 Proximity sensor compatibility 2-wire/-wire 2-wire/-wire Output characteristics Type of output Auxiliary outputs (2 per channel).2 Nominal voltage V c 2 Voltage limits V 9...0 (up to V possible, limited to hr per 2 hr period) Nominal current ma 00 Maximum voltage drop when ON V <0. Leakage current ma <0. Switching time µs < 20 Electrostatic discharge time s L/R Switching frequency on inductive load Hz F<0.6/(LI 2 ) Compatibility with d.c. inputs IEC 2 compatibility Protection against overloads and short-circuits Protection against channel overvoltages Protection against polarity inversions All positive logic inputs with input resistance < kω Yes Current limiter and thermal tripping (reactivation via program or automatically) Zener diode between outputs and + 2 V Diode reverse-mounted on supply References: page /2 /2

C C C C 2 7 9 2 6 8 platform TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module Connections Examples of connecting counter inputs ++ + + 2 TSX CTY 2C Channel 0 Channel 0 Channel Channel 6 GND ABE-7CPA0 ++ + + Telefast 2 0 2 6 7 8 9 20 2 22 2 2 2 26 27 28 29 0 2 GND.2 ++ ++ 200 00 00 7 9 2 6 8 Connections, dimensions Counter sensor c 2 V supply power 28 + 2 VDC 26-0 VDC 27 Telefast 2-0 VDC 2 EPSR 8 IZ 6 IZ + 2 V IB 0 IB + 2 V 8 + - + Z B -wire PNP proximity sensor ABE-7CPA 0 2 6 7 8 9 20 2 22 2 2 2 26 27 28 29 0 2 IA IA + 2 V + A GND 7 8 Telefast 2 20 0 0 202 02 02 20 ABE-7H6R20 + ABE-7BV20 Incremental encoder 2 SSI serial absolute encoder fitted with its cable Parallel output absolute encoder TSX TAP S 0/2 connector TSX TAP S 0 TSX TAP S 2 IB - 7 NC NC 7 NC 2 Ret. Alim 8 IB + V 2 NC 8 IB + 2 V IZ + V 9 NC IZ + 2 V 9 NC IZ - 0 0 V NC 0 0 V IA + V NC IA + 2 V NC 6 IA - 2 + V 6 NC 2 + 0 0 V TSX CCP Sppp cable with connectors 6 TSX CAP S connector 7 TSX CDPpp preformed cable 8 TSX CDPpp2 or TSX CDP pp rolled ribbon or preformed cable Auxiliary I/O c 2 V power spply 0 0 20 0 0 20 0 0 206 06 06 207 07 07 208 08 08 209 09 09 20 0 0 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 Q Q0 Q ICapt IVal IPres Q Q0 Q ICapt0 IVal0 IPres0 Encoder power supply 0 20 09 209 08 208 2 2 07 07 06 206 0 20 0 20 0 02 0 00 + + + + + + V Reflex output Frequency output Read Channel Enable Preset Reflex output Frequency output Read Channel 0 Enable Preset Reference voltage Dimensions TSX TAP S 0/2s 70, Mounting through enclosure (dust and damp proof): -cut-outø7 - maximum panel thickness mm 27, 8 7 Characteristics: page /2 References: page /2 /22

References platform TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module Measurement and counter module Type of input Characteristics Rep Nb of channels Reference () Weight kg 2/-wire prox.sensors PNP/NPN, c 2 V, Incremental encoder, c V RS 22, c 0 0 V Totem Pole Counting Cycle time ms 2 TSX CTY 2C 0.0 SSI serial or parallel output absolute encoders with ABE 7CPA sub-base Cycle time ms TSX CTY 2C Connection accessories Description For connecting Connector type on TSX CTY 2C Rep. Unit reference Weight kg SUB-D connector (soldinlotsof2) Counter sensors or incremental encoder SUB-D, -way 6 TSX CAP S 0.00 ABE 7CPA0 Telefast 2 connection sub-base Counter sensors and c 2 V power supply Auxiliary inputs, supply c 2 V and encoder supply c V/0 0 V SUB-D, -way ABE 7CPA0 0.00 HE 0, 20-way (for 2 channels) ABE 7H6R20 0.00 ABE 7H6R20 Additional terminal block Adaptor sub-base for TSX CTY 2C module (2) 20 shunted terminals for ABE 7H6R20 sub-base Parallel output absolute encoders c V,c 0 0 V (Order in multiples of ) ABE 7BV20 0.00 SUB-D, -way ABE 7CPA 0.00 TSX TAP S pp Connection interfaces for incremental encoder Encoder c V RS 22 Encoder c 0...0 V Totem Pole SUB-D, -way TSX TAP S 0 0.260 SUB-D, -way TSX TAP S 2 0.260 Connecting cables Description From TSX CTY 2C module To Rep. Length Reference Weight kg.2 Cables (cross-section 0.20 mm 2 ) -way, SUB-D connector ABE 7CPA0/ ABE CPA sub-base or TSX TAP Spp accessory (-way, SUB-D connector) 0. m TSX CCP S 00 0.0 m TSX CCP S 00 0.60 2. m TSX CCP S 0.00 20-wire preformed cables (00 ma max.) Auxiliary inputs supply Free end with flying c 2 V and encoder leads supply c V/0 0 V (20-way, HE 0 moulded connector) 7 m TSX CCP 0 0.00 m TSX CDP 0 0.660 0 ms TSX CDP 00.20 TSX CCP S ppp TSX CDP p0 Rolled ribbon cables (00 ma max.) Auxiliary inputs supply ABE 7H6R20 c 2 V and encoder Telefast 2 sub-base supply c V/0 0 V (20-way, HE 0 (20-way, HE 0 connector) connector) 8 m TSX CDP 02 0.090 2m TSX CDP 202 0.70 m TSX CDP 02 0.20 Connecting cables (00 ma max.) Auxiliary inputs supply ABE 7H6R20 c 2 V and encoder Telefast 2 sub-base supply c V/0 0 V (20-way, HE 0 (20-way, HE 0 connector) moulded connector) 8 0. m TSX CDP 0 0.08 m TSX CDP 0 0.0 2m TSX CDP 20 0.280 m TSX CDP 0 0.0 m TSX CDP 0 0.670 () Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. (2) Enables multiplexing of 2 absolute encoders on the same channel (up to absolute encoders when using 2 ABE 7CPA adaptor sub-bases). TSX CDP p02 TSX CDP p0 Characteristics: page /2 References: page /2 /2

Description, operation platform TSX CCY 28 electronic cam module Premium Encoder Motor Track outputs Preactuators The TSX CCY 28 module performs the electronic cam function for an animated axis of a rotary movement in a single direction, alternating, cyclical (with periodic arrival of parts for processing) or endless (with random arrival of parts for processing). The axis is managed by an incremental or absolute encoder. The TSX CCY 28 electronic cam module manages, independently, up to 28 cams which may be spread over a maximum of 2 tracks to which 2 discrete physical outputs and 8 logic outputs may be assigned. Processing is structured in groups of 8 tracks each, with groups 0 and associated with the module connector 0 and groups 2 and with connector. The TSX CCY 28 module can be used for the following functions: elimination of axis backlash, position recalibration, capturing measurements (part length, number of points per revolution, angle of arrival of parts, slip, etc), anticipation of switching, parts counter, generating events. Like all application-specific modules, the TSX CCY 28 module can be installed in any slot of a Premium PLC, except those dedicated to the power supply and the processor. Description The front panel of the TSX CCY 28 electronic cam module comprises : 6 One -way SUB-D connector for connecting the incremental or absolute encoder. 2 One 20-way HE 0 connector for connecting the track outputs on groups 0 and (connector 0). One 20-way HE 0 connector for connecting the track outputs on groups 2 and (connector ). One 20-way HE 0 connector for connecting the auxiliary inputs and the encoder power supply..2 TSX CCY 28 2 CH0 RUN ERR I/O 6 Rigid casing for the following functions: v Holding the electronic cards, v Attaching and locking the module in its slot. 6 Module diagnostic indicator lights: v Module diagnostics : - green RUN indicator lamp: module on, - red ERR indicator lamp: internal fault, module defective, - red I/O indicator lamp: external or application fault. v Channel diagnostics: - green CH0 indicator lamps: channel diagnostics operative. Operation Block diagram of channel Configuration + adjustment %KW.%MW Configuration parameters Servo loop Encoder inputs Track outputs %O, %QW %I, %IW Processing Auxiliary input processing Recalibration input Read input Read input 2 The electronic cam module is set up using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro (version.) and requires the use of processors with software version.. Characteristics: page /2 /2 References: page /26 Connections : page /27

Characteristics platform TSX CCY 28 electronic cam module Operating characteristics Number of cams Number of tracks Position encoder inputs Controlled outputs Associated functions Electrical characteristics Modularity axis Max.frequency on encoder input SSI absolute CLK transmission frequency khz 200 encoder 8to2bits Incremental encoder x khz 00 x khz 20 Current drawn by On internal V with internal module ma 660 the module (typical) fan during operation On 2 V sensors/preactuators ma (auxiliary inputs and track outputs On 0 0 V (use of an SSI encoder and single 2 V power supply) ma 28 position, monostable, brake type 2 (2 directly associated with the 2 physical outputs, 8 logic) Incremental with RS 22/8 line emitter or Totem Pole output Absolute with SSI serial link Absolute with parallel outputs (via ABE 7CPA adaptor sub-base) 2 discrete outputs 2 V, 0. A Elimination of axis backlash, position recalibration, measurement capture, switching feedforward, parts counter, generation of events Power dissipated in the module (typical) W 7 Monitoring of sensor/preactuator power supplies Yes Output refresh cycle µs 0(upto6cams),00(upto2cams),200(upto28cams) Input characteristics Type of input Encoder inputs (IA/IB/IZ) Auxiliary inputs with RS 22 with 0 0 V (recalibration, capture 0, capture ) Logic Differential inputs Positive or negative Positive Nominal values Voltage V 2 2 Current ma 0. 8 Sensor power supply V. 9 0(possibleuptoVlimitedtohrin2hrs) Limit values At state Voltage > Current ma >.8 > > At state 0 Voltage V - < < Current ma -.8 <2 <. Input impedance for nominal U Ω 00 000 Type of input Resistive Resistive Resistive Response time µs <00 Conformity with IEC Type Compatibility w. 2-wire sensors Yes (with 2 V) Compatibility w. -wire sensors Yes (with 2 V) Output characteristics Type of output Track outputs Nominal values Voltage V 2 Current ma 00 Limit values Voltage V 9 0(possibleuptoVlimitedtohrin2hrs) Max.current Per output for U c 0 or V ma 600 Per connectorr A 6 Per module A 2 Maximum power for tungsten filament lamp W 0 Switching frequency on an inductive load Hz < 0.6/LI 2 Electro. discharge time s <L/R Preactuator voltage monitoring threshold Compatibility with d.c. inputs OK V >8 Fault V < All positive logic inputs whose input resistance is < kω Protection Against overloads and short-circuits By current limiter and thermal circuit-breaker Against overvoltages on outputs By Zener diode between the outputs and the + 2 V Against polarity inversions By reverse diode on the power supply Conformity with IEC 2 Yes.2 References: page /26 Connections : page /27 /2

References platform TSX CCY 28 electronic cam module Electronic cam module Type of output Characteristics Nb of axes Incremental encoder SuppliedwithVor0 0V,withRS22/8,orV Totem Pôle outputs (2) 00 khz counting w. incremental encoder Reference () Weight kg TSX CCY 28 0.80 Absolute encoder RS 8 serial or parallel () Acquisition 200 khz with serial absolute encoder TSX CCY 28 TSX TAP Spp Connection accessories Description For connection of Type of connectors on TSX CCY 28 SUB-D connector (sold in lots of 2) Connection interfaces for incremental encoder SSI absolute/incremental encoder c V RS 22/RS 8 encoder -way SUB-D -way SUB-D Ref. () Unit reference Weight kg TSX CAP S 0.00 6 TSX TAP S 0 0.260 c 0 0 V Totem Pôle -way SUB-D 6 TSX TAP S 2 0.260 ABE 7CPA Telefast 2 connection sub-base Auxiliary inputs, c 2 V encoder power supply 20-way HE 0 ( per module) ABE 7H6R20 0.00 Track outputs 20-way HE 0 ( per 2 groups) ABE 7H6R20 0.00.2 ABE 7H6R20 TSX CDP p0 Adaptor sub-base Absolute encoder with parallel outputs (6to2bits) c V, 0 0 V -way SUB-D Connection cables Description From To Ref. () Cables with connectors TSX CCY 28 module -way SUB-D connector Connection cables (00 ma max.) TSX CCY 28 module 20-way insulated HE 0 connector TSX TAP S pp interface or ABE 7CPA adaptor sub-base (-way SUB-D connector) ABE 7H6R20 sub-base (20-way HE 0 connector) ABE 7CPA 0.00 Length Unit reference Weight kg 0. m TSX CCP S 00 0.0 m TSX CCP S 00 0.60 2. m TSX CCP S 0.220 7. 9 0. TSX CDP 0 0.08 TSX CDP 0 0.0 2 TSX CDP 20 0.280 TSX CDP 0 0.0 TSX CDP 0 0.670 Preformed cables with flying leads (00 ma max.) TSX CCY 28 module 20-way insulated HE 0 connector Auxiliary inputs, power supply signals (free end) 8 TSX CDP 0 0.00 TSX CDP 0 0.660 TSX CDP p0 () Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. (2) Totem Pole encoder with complementary Push/Pull outputs. () Absolute encoders with parallel outputs with ABE 7CPA adaptor interface. () Diagram references (see page /27). TSX CCP S ppp Characteristics : page /26 Connections : page /27 /26

7 9 2 6 8 C C C C 2 Connections Examples of encoder connections a 2 6 ++ ++ 200 00 00 20 0 0 202 02 02 20 ABE-7H6R20 Telefast 2 0 0 20 0 0 Examples of auxiliary input connections 20 0 2 0 206 06 06 207 07 07 208 08 08 209 09 09 C 20 C 0 C 0 C Connections platform TSX CCY 28 electronic cam module Auxiliary input sensor c 2 V power supply 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 07 207 08 208 0 20 0 02 00 0 07 + + + + 0/0 V + V 0 V Read input Read 2 input Recalibration input Encoder supply monitoring Encoder supply + + GND ABE-7CPA Telefast 2 0 2 6 7 8 9 20 2 22 2 2 2 26 27 28 29 0 2 TSX CCY 28 8 9 ++ ++ 200 00 00 Telefast 2 ABE-7H6R20 Incremental or absolute encoder Incremental or absolute encoder with 2-way DIN connector output 2 V RS 22/8 Totem Pole incremental encoder Absolute encoder with parallel outputs TSX CAP S connector TSX CCP Sppp cable with connectors 6 TSX TAP S 0/2 connector TSX TAP S 0 TSX TAP S 2 IB- 7 NC NC 7 NC 2 Sup.Ret. 8 IB + V 2 NC 8 IB + V IZ + V 9 NC IZ + 2 V 9 NC IZ - 0 0 V NC 0 0 V IA+V NC IA+2V NC 6 IA - 2 + V 6 NC 2 + 0 0 V 7 TSX CDPpp cable with connectors 8 TTSX CDPp0 preformed cable with flying leads 9 TSX CDPp0 cable with connectors 8 7 20 0 0 202 02 02 20 0 0 20 0 0 Example of track output preactuator connection Track output preactuator c 2 V power supply 20 0 0 206 06 06 207 07 07 208 08 08 209 09 09 20 0 0 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 0 209 09 208 08 207 07 206 06 20 0 20 0 20 0 202 02 20 0 200 00 2 Track Q/, Track 2 Q/,2 Track Q/, Track 0 Q0/, Track 7 Q0/2,7 Track 6 Q0/2,6 Track Q0/2, Track Q02, Track Q0/2, Track 2 Q0/2,2 Track Q0/2, Track 0 Q0/2,0 + 2 V commons Groups and Groups 0 and 2.2 Dimensions Connection interface for TSX TAP S 0/2 incremental encoder Enclosure feedthrough mounting (dust and damp proof) - cut-out Ø 7, 70, - maximum panel thickness mm. 27, 8 7 Characteristics: page /2 References: page /26 /27

Selection guide platform Premium motion control modules Applications Motion control modules for stepper motor Motion control modules for servomotors Compatible with: - Lexium MHDA servodrives with analog setpoint - Altivar ATV 8/8/68 variable speed drives Number of axes axis 2 axes 2 axes axes Frequency per axis 87 khz Counter: 00 khz with incremental encoder Counter input Per axis: Translator inputs c V, negative logic (translator loss of step checks) Per axis: Incremental encoder c V, RS 22/RS 8 or Totem pole SSI serial absolute encoder 6 to 2 bits c 0 0 V Parallel output absolute encoder 6 to 2 bits c /0/0 V with Telefast 2 conversion sub-base (ABE 7CPA) Control outputs Per axis: RS 22 translator outputs, TTL V compatible (+/- pulses, boost, enable, reset loss of step check) Per axis: analogoutput±0v,bits+sign,.2 Auxiliairy input/output Per axis: 6discreteinputsc 2 V output c 2 V (brake control) Per axis: discrete I/O c 2 V (homing cam, event, recalibration, input/ output for servodrive control reflex output c 2 V Counter capacity 2 bits + sign (± 6 777 2 points) Functions Servo Control on individual linear axis Processing Open loop control of the position of a moving part on a limited linear axis according to motion control functions supplied by the PLC processor Axis parameter setting, adjustment and debugging using PL7 Junior/Pro and Unity Pro software Positioning of a moving part on an axis according Axis parameter setting, adjustement and debugging using Events User-definable activation of the event-triggered task Connection - -way SUB-D connector for translator - 20-way HE 0 connector for auxiliary I/O - Telefast 2 system (ABE 7H6R20) - 9 and -way SUB-D connectors for encoder input - HE 0 connector for auxiliary inputs - Telefast 2 system (ABE 7CPA0, ABE 7H6R20, - Specific accessories (TSX TAP MAS) Type of modules TSX CFY TSX CFY 2 TSX CAY 2 TSX CAY Page /7 / /28

Motion control modules for servomotors Compatible with Lexium MHDA servodrives equipped with optional card SERCOS 2 axes axes axes 8axes 6 axes Acquisition: 200 khz with SSI serial absolute encoder or parallel output SERCOS ring: M bauds Per axis: - Incremental encoder c V, RS 22/RS 8 or Totem pole, - SSI serial absolute encoder 2 to 2 bits Parallel output absolute encoder 2 to 2 bits c /0/0 V with Telefast 2 conversion sub-base (ABE 7CPA) Per SERCOS digital link servodrive setpoint Per SERCOS digital link emergency stop) Per SERCOS digital link.2 Servo control on individual infinite axis Follower axes (dynamic ratio) Realtime correction of servodrive offset Flying shear on position or event () Servo control on individual linear or infinite axis Linear interpolation on 2 or axes Realtime correction of servodrive offset Individual linear or infinite axis Linear interpolation on 2 to 8 axes Follower axes (6 slaves) by gearing or camming Manual mode (JOG and INC) () Special functions, see page /0 to motion control functions supplied by the Premium PLC processor PL7 Junior/Pro and Unity Pro software (2) Axis parameter setting, adjustment and debugging using PL7 Junior/Pro software (direct or via TSX TAP Spp ), speed reference ABE 7CPA), 2 SMA type connectors for plastic (or glass) fiber optic cable TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY 2 TSX CAY TSX CSY 8 TSX CSY 6 () Function not available with Premium platform under Unity Pro software. (2) The Unity Pro software is not compatible with the TSX CSY 6 module. / /29

The Twin Line range platform Presentation ±0V Encoder TLD Discrete I/O Twin Line servodrives and SER brushless motors are the latest additions to the Schneider Electric range of motion control products. In response to the demands of an ever widening range of industrial applications, we have created the most flexible servodrives possible, so that they can be economically integrated into machine designers' preferred architectures. Twin Line TLD and TLC servodrives Controlbuilt-intoPLC Premium and Quantum automation platforms offer, as part of their interface ranges, axis control modules with analog outputs for position control functions: TSX CAY, multi-axis control modules (2 to axes), or 0 MSB 000 single-axis control modules. These modules, associated with Twin Line TLD modules, offer unequalled ease of integration and installation of motion control (intelligent position control) in the automation sequence. TLC Discrete control Twin Line TLC servodrives are fitted with a position controller that can be easily controlled via the discrete input/output lines of a PLC. This simple configuration, offering all the precision of Twin Line servodrives, is for applications involving a small number of axes, with little synchronization and rarely requiring adjustment of servodrive settings..2 Field bus Control by industrial field bus The Twin Line TLC range of servodrives offers, in addition to built-in position control in the servodrive, a wide choice of communication bus connections. This possibility of communication via industrial field buses widens the range of applications by facilitating remote adjustment and maintenance operations. TLC TLC TLC Programmable motion controller In order to respond to applications which also require straightforward sequential control with field bus inputs/outputs, Twin Line TLC 6 servodrives are motion controllers which can be programmed in graphic or textual automation languages, compliant with the standard IEC 6-. TheTwinLineTLC 6 servodrive naturally occupies the master position of multi-axis applications managed by Twin Line TLC servodrives. Field bus SER brushless motors PLC TLC 6 TLC TLC The technology of SER brushless motors means they are well-suited to the most demanding dynamic and precision applications within continuous torque ranges from 0. to. Nm. They are fitted with a thermal probe protection system and a single turn or multiturn SinCos Hiperface integrated sensor. Depending on the model, they are fitted with: b Failsafe holding brake. b IP or IP 6 degree of protection. b Gearboxes of ratio :, : or 8:. /0

The Twin Line range platform Association of SER brushless motors and Twin Line servodrives SER brushless motors (IPorIP6) Twin Line TLD and TLC servodrives (IP20orIP) TLp p2 TLp p TLp p6 TLp p8 A/70W single phase A/.kW -phase 6A/kW -phase 6 A / 8 kw -phase SER 6 L S 2,000 rpm () 0./0.8 Nm SER 6 L S 0./. Nm SER 6 L 7S 0./. Nm SER 66 L S 0./. Nm SER 66 L S 0./.6 Nm SER 66 L 7S 0./2. Nm SER 68 L S 0.7/. Nm SER 68 L S 0.7/.9 Nm SER 68 L 7S 0.7/ Nm SER 6A L S 0.7/. Nm SER 6A L S 0.9/2. Nm SER 6A L 7S 0.9/.6 Nm.2 SER 9A L S 6000 rpm ()./2. Nm SER 9A L 7S./ Nm./ Nm SER 9B L S.2/2.2 Nm.2/2.2 Nm 7.8/2.2 Nm SER 9B L 7S 8/2.2 Nm 8/2.2 Nm SER 9C L S 2./.8 Nm 2./.8 Nm 2.9/. Nm SER 9C L S 2.9/6.8 Nm 2.9/6.8 Nm 2.9/. Nm SER 9C L 7S 2.9/. Nm 2.9/. Nm SER 9D L S./6. Nm./6. Nm.6/. Nm SER BA L S 6000 rpm () 2./.6 Nm 2./.6 Nm.6/. Nm.6/8 Nm SER BA L S./7.6 Nm./7.6 Nm.6/8 Nm SER BA L 7S.6/2.8 Nm.6/2.8 Nm.6/8 Nm SER BB L S /6 Nm /6 Nm 6/9 Nm 6.6/2 Nm SER BB L S /8 Nm /8 Nm 6.6/9. Nm 6.6/2 Nm SER BB L 7S 6.6/ Nm 6.6/ Nm 6.6/2 Nm SER BC L S 00 rpm ()./8. Nm./8. Nm 8./27 Nm 0/8 Nm SER BC L 7S 8./6. Nm 8./6. Nm 0/8 Nm 0/8 Nm SER BD L D 8.7/26.8 Nm./0 Nm SER BD L 7S 7.9/.7 Nm 7.9/.7 Nm./9 Nm./8 Nm 0./0.8 Nm The st value corresponds to the continuous stall torque, 2 nd value corresponds to the peak stall torque Selected example: themotor SER 6 L S associated with the TLp p2 answers to the demands of applications servodrive requiring at most 0. Nm of continuous stall torque, 0.8 Nm of peak torque and a maximum mechanical speed of 2,000 rpm. () Maximum mechanical speed. /

Lexium offer platform Lexium motion control Presentation Analog setpoint or digital link mode Stand alone mode with integral position indexer The axis control offer is intended for machines which simultaneously require high performance servo motion control, associated with PLC sequential control. Position control system Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum automation platforms offer a range of interfaces including axis control modules providing a position control function. These modules are: b Analog output modules: v TSX CAY, multi-axis control (2 to axes) for Premium, v 0 MSB, single-axis control for Quantum b Modules with SERCOS digital link: v TSX CSY, controls up to 6 servodrives for Premium, v MMS, controls up to 22 servodrives for Quantum. Lexium MHDA servodrive.2 Lexium servodrives provide solid state switching, current (or torque), speed and position control. Three types of servodrive, each available in 7 current ratings (.,, 6, 0, 20, 0 and 70 A permanent rms), are available: b + 0 V analog setpoint, controlled by position control module of PLC. b Stand alone mode with integral position indexer, controlled by: v discrete inputs/outputs (), v CANopen bus, v Modbus Plus network, Fipio bus or Profibus DP bus (). b SERCOS high speed digital link () allows Lexium servodrives to be controlled by PLC position control module. Lexium brushless motors Brushless motors are synchronous, -phase motors. They are equipped with a builtin sensor which can be a resolver or a SinCos Hiperface absolute encoder. They are provided with or without holding brake. Two ranges of motors are available: SER motors They are equipped with Neodynium Iron Borium (NdFeB) magnets and provide a high power density within a confined space, as well as large velocity dynamic that meet all machine requirements. They have: b IP or IP 6 protection. b With or without gearbox. These gearboxes are offered with three speed reduction ratios :, : and 8:. b Smooth shaft end (2) (for the model without gearbox) or with key (for the model with gearbox). BPH motors Their design, with samarium cobalt permanent magnets, ensures perfect rotation even at low speed. Depending on the model, they have: b IP 6 or IP 67 protection (IP for BPH 0 motor). b Keyed or smooth shaft ends. Configuration and installation Motion control applications are designed and installed using: b PL7 Junior/Pro (for Premium PLCs) software. b Concept (for Quantum PLCs) software. b Unity Pro (for Premium or Quantum PLCs) software. Unilink user software, in association with Lexium servodrives, provides configuration and adjustment of the parameters for these servodrives. () Requires use of an optional card (one slot available per MHDA servodrive). (2) Shaft end with key for the model without a gearbox, please contact our Regional Sales Office. /2

Lexium offer platform Association of brushless motors and Lexium servodrives SER brushless motors (IPorIP6) Digital Lexium MHDA servodrives Lexium BPH brushless motors (IP6orIP67) MHDA MHDA MHDA MHDA MHDA MHDA MHDA 00p00 008p00 07p00 028p00 06p00 2A00 98A00. A rms A rms 6 A rms 0 A rms 20 A rms 0 A rms 70 A rms 0./. Nm 8,000 rpm BPH 02 S 0.9/.9 Nm./. Nm 6,000 rpm BPH 07 N SER 9A L7S 6,000 rpm./2. Nm./ Nm SER 9B LS 6,000 rpm 2.2/. Nm 2.2/8.0 Nm./2. Nm 2./.8 Nm 6,000 rpm BPH 072 N SER 9C LS 6,000 rpm 2.9/.7 Nm 2.9/9. Nm.7/7.2 Nm./. Nm 6,000 rpm BPH 092 N SER BA LS 6,000 rpm.6/9.2 Nm.6/. Nm SER BA LS 6,000 rpm.6/8.2 Nm.6/ Nm.2 6.0/. Nm 6.0/20. Nm 6,000 rpm BPH 09 N SER BB LS 6,000 rpm 6.6/2 Nm 6.6/20 Nm SER BB LS 6,000 rpm 6.6/.8 Nm 6.6/2 Nm 7./.6 Nm 7./9. Nm 6,000 rpm BPH 2 N 6.8/. Nm 0./9 Nm 6,000 rpm BPH N SER BC LS 6,000 rpm 0/7 Nm 0/28 Nm SER BC L7S,000 rpm 0/6 Nm 0/2 Nm./8 Nm 2/0 Nm,000 rpm BPH 22 N SER BD LD 6,000 rpm./29 Nm SER BD L7S,000 rpm./2 Nm./8 Nm./2 Nm 7/2 Nm,000 rpm BPH 2 N 2/7. Nm,000 rpm BPH 902 N 6/7 Nm,000 rpm BPH 90 K 6/76.2 Nm,000 rpm BPH 90 K 7/7 Nm,000 rpm BPH 907 K 90/6 Nm 00/20 Nm,000 rpm BPH 90A K./2. Nm For a SER motor, the st value corresponds to continuous stall torque max., the 2 nd value corresponds to peak stall torque max../. Nm For a SER/Lexium BPH motor, the st value corresponds to continuous stall torque max., the 2 nd value corresponds to peak stall torque max. Example: The SER BB LS motor associated with the MHDA07 servodrive meets the requirements of applications requiring a 6.6 Nm continuous stall torque max, 2 Nm peak stall torque max. and 6,000 rpm mechanical speed. /

Presentation, description platform TSX CFY /2 modules for stepper motors Presentation Fip Premium Amplifier The TSX CFY /2 stepper motor axis control range is intended for machines which simultaneously require motion control by stepper motor associated with sequential control by programmable controller. The TSX CFY module controls, via an amplifier for stepper motor, axis (channel 0). The TSX CFY 2 module controls 2 axes (channels 0 and ). They accept amplifiers with: b RS 22 or TTL V inputs (negative logic). b RS 22 or c V NPN open collector outputs. Motor In a Premium PLC configuration, the number of TSX CFY motion control modules should be added to the other application-specific modules (communication, counting, axis control and weighing). Description.2 2 TSX CFY TSX CFY 2 CH2 CH0 RUN ERR CH CH I/O 2 The front panel of TSX CFY /2 stepper control modules comprises: One -way SUB-D connector per channel for connecting: v Amplifier inputs. v Amplifier outputs. v Amplifier input power supply. 2 One 20-way HE 0 connector for connecting: v Auxiliary inputs: per axis, homing cam, emergency stop, limit switches (+ and -), event, external stop. v Brake outputs ( per axis). v External power supplies for sensors and preactuators. Rigid casing which: v Holds the electronic card. v Locates and locks the module in its slot. Module diagnostics lamps: v Module diagnostics: - green RUN lamp: module operating, - red ERR lamp: internal fault, module failure, - red I/O lamp: external fault. v Axis diagnostics: - 2 green CHp lamps: axis diagnostics available. Operation block diagram Operating characteristics are described on page /6. Stepper control modules are set up using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro and Unity Pro software. Configuration + adjustment %KW.%MW Configuration parameters Pulse generator Amplifier enable output A/B pulse outputs Reactivation of loss of step output Boost output Amplifier fault input Loss of step check input SMOVE function %O, %QW Processing Auxiliary I/O processing Cam input (homing) + and limit switch input Emergency stop input Event input External stop input %I, %IW Brake output Characteristics: pages / and /6 / References: page /7 Connection: page /6

Characteristics platform TSX CFY /2 modules for stepper motors Electrical characteristics Type of module TSX CFY TSX CFY 2 Modularity axis 2 axes Maximum pulse frequency khz 87.6 87.6 Consumption c V ma 0 60 c 2 V ma 0 00 Power dissipated in the module Typical W.8.6 Sensor power supply check Yes Yes Input characteristics Inputs Amplifier inputs Auxiliary inputs Logic Negative Positive Nominal values Voltage V 2 Current ma. 7 Limit values Voltage V 9...0(uptoVpossible,limitedtohrper 2 hr period) At state Voltage V < 2 Current ma > 6 (for U = V) At state 0 Voltage V >.6 < Current ma <2(forU=V) Input impedance for nominal U kω. Input immunity µs Loss of step input: to 0: µs Homing cam and event inputs: < 20 ms Amplifier fault input: to 6 Limit switch, emergency stop and external stop inputs: to 0 Monitoring of external power supply for sensors and preactuators Voltage for OK state V > 8 Voltage for fault state V < Immunity OK V fault ms > Immunity fault V OK ms <0.2 Type of input Resistive Current sink IEC conformity Type 2 Sensor compatibility 2-wire/-wire Output characteristics Outputs Amplifier outputs Brake outputs ( per axis) Type of output RS 22, TTL V open collector NPN Open collector, PNP compatible Output differential voltage V ± 2 (load resistance 00 Ω) Short-circuit current ma < 0 Permissible common mode voltage V 7 Permissible differential voltage V 2 Voltages Nominal V c 2 Limit V 9...0(uptoVpossible,limitedtohrper 2 hr period) Currents Nominal ma 00 Leakage ma <0. Maxi ma 62 (for U = 0 or V) Maximum voltage drop when ON V c < Switching time µs <20 Compatibility with DC inputs All positive logic inputs with input resistance <kω IEC -2 compliance Yes Protection against overloads and short-circuits Via current limiter and thermal tripping (reactivated via program or automatically) Short-circuit check on each channel One signalling bit per channel Protection against channel overvoltage Zener diode between outputs and c + 2V Protection against polarity inversions By diode reverse-mounted on supply References: page /7 Connection: page /6 /

C C C C 2 Characteristics (continued), connections platform TSX CFY /2 modules for stepper motors Operating characteristics Control Pulse, frequency from 0 to 87 khz + and - outputs or +/- outputs and direction Paths Trapezoidal speed profile with minimum movement frequency Operating modes OFF Module inactive DIR DRIVE MAN Module operating as pulse generator Motion controlled by operator: v visual control of movement v incremental movement AUTO Movement sequence controlled by PLC program. Movements are described using a syntax similar to that of ISO language. Movements may be expressed in absolute or relative terms (in relation to either the current position or a home point). Operation is possible in "step-by-step" mode. Checks Environment Amplifier, limits switches, Emergency stop Motion Check correct execution by software position limits, loss of step Optional commands Control Parameters Check consistency of commands Check validity of parameters Boost, brake Connections TSX CFY /2 stepper control module connections.2 + pulses pulses (or direction) Boost Amplifier enable Reactivation of step loss check Amplifier check Loss of step check Amplifier () Twin line TLD 0 servodrive with PULSE-C option Axis 0 Axis Axis 0 or TSX CFY /2 TSX CAP S connector 2 TSX CDPpp cable with connector TSX CDPp0 preformed cable with connector TSX CDPp6 cable with connector 2 ++ ++ ÐÐ 200 00 00 Telefast 2 20 0 0 202 02 02 ABE 7H6R20 20 0 0 20 0 0 20 0 0 Axes 0 and Auxiliary I/O c 2 V Power supply 206 06 06 207 07 07 208 08 08 209 09 09 20 0 0 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 Q0 Q0 I I2 I I I I0 I I2 I I I I0 2 2 22 2 0 20 09 209 08 208 07 207 06 206 0 20 0 20 0 20 02 202 0 20 00 200 + + + + + + 0 + 0 + 0 + 02 + 0 + 00 + Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð RI RI Brake output Output axis Brake output Output axis 0 Limit switch Limit switch + External stop Inputs axis Emergency stop Event Homing Limit switch Limit switch + External stop Inputs axis 0 Emergency stop Event Homing () Type of amplifier b With RS 22 interface: v RS 22 compatible inputs, v RS 22 outputs. b With open collector, NPN interface: v TTL/ V source compatible inputs, v Open collector, NPN outputs ( V power supply from TSX CFY /2 module). Characteristics: pages / and /6 References: page /7 /6

References platform TSX CFY /2 modules for stepper motors Motion control modules for stepper motors Description To control Connections to connectors No. of Reference Weight SUB-D, -way HE 0, 20-way axes () kg Motion control modules for stepper motors Amplifier I/O TSX CFY 0.0 Amplifier with RS 22 I/O, c V TTL and O c Vwith open collector Auxiliary I/O, c 2 V power supply 2 TSX CFY 2 0.80 TSX CFY Connection accessories Description TSX CFY p connector Type of connector on TSX CFY p module SUB-D connectors Amplifier SUB-D, -way ( per axis) Sold in lots of 2 N Unit Weight (2) reference kg TSX CAP S 0.00 Telefast 2 connection sub-base Auxiliary I/O for axes 0/, c 2 V power supply HE 0, 20-way ( for 2 axes) ABE 7H6R20 0.00 TSX CFY 2 ABE 7H6R20 Additional terminal block Connecting cables Description Cables (cross-section 0.2 mm 2 ) 20 shunted terminals for ABE 7H6R20 sub-bases From module TSX CFY p 20-way HE 0 connector Order in multiples of ABE 7BV20 0.00 To N (2) Length Reference Weight kg ABE 7H6R20 2 0. m TSX CDP 0 0.08 sub-base (20-way HE 0 molded connector) m TSX CDP 0 0.0 2m TSX CDP 20 0.280.2 m TSX CDP 0 0.0 m TSX CDP 0 0.670 Preformed cables 20-way HE 0 (cross-section 0.2 mm 2 ) connector Auxiliary I/O for m TSX CDP 0 0.00 axes 0/, 2 V c power supply (flying leads at I/O end) m TSX CDP 0 0.660 TSX CDP p0 0 m TSX CDP 00.0 Cables for Twin Line TLD 0p amplifier -way SUB-D connector Twin Line TLD 0p amplifier with PULSE-C option (-way female SUB-D connector) () Includes a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: French and English. (2) For key, see page /7. 2m TSX CXP 26 6m TSX CXP 66 TSX CDP p0 Characteristics: pages / and /6 Connection: page /6 /7

Description platform TSX CAY modules for servomotors Premium Description Lexium servodrive Motor The TSX CAY pp servo loop positioning axis control range is intended for machines which require simultaneous high performance motion control together with sequential control by programmable controller. Depending on model: b The TSX CAY 2/22 modules control 2 individual axes. b The TSX CAY /2 modules control up to individual axes. b The TSX CAY module control interpolated linear axes. They can be used with ± 0 V analog input servodrives such as Lexium 7D/7D HP, and Twin Line TLD servodrives. TSX CAY pp modules can be installed, like all application-specific modules, in any location on a Premium PLC rack..2 TSX CAY 2/22 TSX CAY /2 6 2 6 2 The front panel of TSX CAY pp axis control modules comprises: One -way SUB-D connector per axis for connecting an incremental or absolute encoder. 2 One 9-way SUB-D connector for all axes for connecting: v "speed reference" analog output for each axis. One 20-way HE 0 connector for all axes for connecting: v Auxiliary inputs for servodrive control, v External power supply for servodrive I/O. One 20-way HE 0 connector for 2 axes (0/ or 2/) for connecting: v Auxiliary inputs: homing cam, Emergency stop, event, recalibration. v High speed outputs. v External power supplies for sensors and preactuators. Rigid casing which: v Holds the electronic card. v Locates and locks the module in its slot. 6 Module diagnostic lamps: v Module diagnostics: - green RUN lamp: module operating, - red ERR lamp: internal fault, module failure, - red I/O lamp: external fault. v Axis diagnostics: - green CHp lamps: axis diagnostics available. Operation Block diagram of an axis Configuration + adjustment %KW.%MW Configuration parameters Servo loops Encoder input Servodrive speed reference output SMOVE function %O, %QW Processing Auxiliary I/O processing Cam input (homing) Event input Recalibration input Emergency stop input Drive fault input %I, %IW Drive enable output High speed output Axis control modules are set up using PL7 Junior/Pro or Unity Pro software. TSX CAY 22/2/ modules require the use of TSX P7 pp2m/m/m processors and Atrium TPCX7 pp2m/m coprocessors or TSX PCI 7ppM. Flying shear function of the TSX CAY 22 module requires the version. of PL7 Junior/Pro software (function not available with Unity Pro software, version.0). Characteristics: pages /9 and /0 /8 References: pages / and /2 Dimensions: page /7

Characteristics platform TSX CAY modules for servomotors Operating characteristics Type of module TSX CAY 2/22 TSX CAY /2 TSX CAY Servo loop Proportional with feedforward and gain switching Period ms 2 Paths Speed profile Trapezoidal or parabolic Resolution Minimum 0. position unit per point Maximum 000 position units per point Length of axis Minimum TSX CAY 2: 2,000 points TSX CAY : 2,000 points TSX CAY : 26 points TSX CAY 22: 26 points TSX CAY 2: 26 points Maximum 2,000,000 points Speed Minimum,000 points/min Maximum 270,000 points/min Acceleration (from 0 to VMAX) Minimum s 0 Maximum ms 8 6 Operating modes OFF Measurement mode, inhibition of servo loop The module operates in current speed and position acquisition mode DIR DRIVE MAN AUTO Direct drive mode, inhibition of servo loop The module operates in analog output mode only Motion controlled by operator: b visual control of movement b incremental movement Movement sequence controlled by PLC program. Movements are described using a syntax similar to that of ISO language. Movements can be expressed in absolute or relative terms (eitherinrelationtocurrentposition,toacapturedpositionorinrelationtoahomepoint). Operation is possible in "step by step" mode, by motion stop/start, by speed correction.2 FOLLOWER The n axis of the module is governed by: b either the 0 axis of the same module b or a command profile transmitted by the application program Checks Environment Encoder link, drive present, Emergency stop Motion Commands Parameters Check correct execution of movements (following error, in-position band, software position limits) Check consistency of commands Check validity of parameters Functions Type of module TSX CAY 2 TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY TSX CAY 2 TSX CAY Linear interpolation, 2/ axes Yes Limited axes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Infinite axes Yes Yes Yes Follower axes Static ratio Yes Yes Dynamic ratio Yes Yes Correction of servodrive offset Yes Yes Yes Flying shear On position or on event with infinite master axis and linear slave axis Yes (see page /8) Characteristics: pages /9 and /0 References: pages / and /2 Connections: pages / to /6 /9

Characteristics (continued) platform TSX CAY modules for servomotors Electrical characteristics Type of module TSX CAY 2 TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY TSX CAY 2 TSX CAY Number of axes 2 axes 2 axes axes axes axes Maximum frequency at counter inputs SSI absolute encoder 6 to 2 bits 2 to 2 bits 6 to 2 bits 2 to 2 bits 2 to 2 bits CLK transmission frequency khz 200 Incremental encoder x khz 00 x khz 20 khz as input or MHz as counter Consumption c V ma 00 00 c 2 V ma 0 Current drawn by the module Typical ma (20 max) 22 (0 max) on the 0/0 V encoder at 2 V (2 V absolute encoder) Power dissipated in the Typical W 7.2 (. max) 0 (7 max) module Sensor power supply check Yes Yes.2 Input characteristics Type of input Counter inputs c V (IA/IB/IZ) Servodrive check inputs ( per axis) Logic Positive Positive Positive Nominal values Voltage V 2 2 Current ma 8 8 8 Auxiliary inputs (homing, event, recalibration, Emergency stop) Limit values Voltage V. 9...0 (up to V possible, limited to hr per 2 hr period) 9...0 (up to V possible, limited to hr per 2 hr period) At state Voltage V 2. (OK state) Current ma >.7 (for U = 2. V) >. (for U = V) > 6 (for U = V) At state 0 Voltage V.2 (fault state) Current ma < (for U =.2 V) <.(foru=v) <2(forU=V) Voltage/encoder feedback check Presence check Input impedance for nominal U Ω 270 000 000 Type of input Resistive Resistive Current sink IEC compliance Type Type 2 2-wire sensor compatibility Yes (all prox. sens. 2 V) -wire sensor compatibility Yes (all prox. sens. 2 V) Output characteristics Type of output Analog outputs ( per axis) Drive enable ( relay output per axis) High speed outputs ( per axis) Range V ±0.2 Resolution bits + sign Value of LSB mv.2 Nominal voltage V c 2 c 2 Voltage limit V 0 9...0 (up to V possible, limited to hr per 2 hr period) Current ma 00 nominal Maximum current ma. 200 (resistive load at 0 V) 62(forU=0orV) Minimum permitted load V/mA Maximum voltage drop when ON V < Leakage current ma <0. Switching time <ms <00µs Compatibility with DC inputs All positive logic inputs with input resistance < kω IEC compliance Yes Protections against overload and short-circuits Current limiter and thermal tripping Protection against channel overvoltage Zener diode between outputs and + 2 V supply Protection against polarity inversions Reverse-mounted diode on supply References: pages / and /2 /0 Connections: pages / to /60 Dimensions: page /7

References platform TSX CAY modules for servomotors Motion control modules for servomotors TSX CAY 2p TSX CAY Type of input Characteristics Functions No. of axes () Incremental encoders 00 khz counter Servo control on independent c V RS 22, c 0 0 V with incremental linear axis Totem Pole () Absolute encoders RS 8 serial or parallel () encoder, Acquisition 200 khz with serial absolute encoder Servo control on independent linear or infinite axis Follower axes Realtime correction of servodrive offset Flying shear () Connection accessories Description Connection Type of connector on TSX CAY pp module SUB-D connectors (lot of 2) Incremental/SSI absolute encoder Speed references Reference (2) Weight kg 2 TSX CAY 2 0.80 TSX CAY 0.60 2 TSX CAY 22 0.80 TSX CAY 2 0.60 Servo control on linear or infinite axis Linear interpolation on 2 or axes Realtime correction of servodrive offset TSX CAY 0.60 SUB-D, -way ( per axis) SUB-D, 9-way ( per TSX CAY module) No. (6) Reference Weight kg TSX CAP S 0.00 7 TSX CAP S9 0.00 Connection interface for incremental encoder Incrementalencoder SUB-D, -way c V ( per axis) RS 22/RS 8 6 TSX TAP S 0 0.260 Splitter block Speed references to servodrives SUB-D, 9-way ( per TSX CAY module) TSX TAP MAS 0.90.2 Telefast 2 connection sub-bases Speed references SUB-D, 9-way ( per TSX CAY module) ABE 7CPA0 0.00 TSX CAY p TSX TAP S Auxiliary inputs, HE 0, 20-way High speed outputs, ( for 2 axes) I/O power supply c 2 V, encoder power supplies c /2 V ABE 7H6R20 0.00 TSX TAP MAS ABE 7CPA0 Adaptor sub-base Servodrive control signals, I/O c 2 V power supply HE 0, 20-way ( per TSX CAY module) ABE 7H6R20 0.00 Parallel output SUB-D, -way ABE 7CPA 0.00 absolute encoders (6to2bits) c V,c 0 0 V () TSX CAY /2/ modules, double format. (2) Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French () Totem Pole encoder with complementary Push/Pull outputs. () Parallel output absolute encoders with ABE 7CPA adaptor interface. () Flying shear function available with TSX CAY 22 module. Requires version.. of PL7 Junior/Pro software. Function not available with Unity Pro software. (6) For key, see pages / to /6. ABE 7H6R20 Characteristics: pages /9 and /0 Connections: pages / to /6 Dimensions: page /7 /

References (continued) platform TSX CAY modules for servomotors Cables with SUB-D connectors From To No. () TSX CAYpp module, -way SUB-D connector TSX TAP S 0 interface, or ABE 7CPA adaptor sub-base (-way SUB-D connector) Length Reference Weight kg 0. m TSX CCP S 00 0.0 m TSX CCP S 00 0.60 2. m TSX CCP S 0.220.2 TSX CAYpp ABE 7CPA0 sub-base 8 2. m TSX CXP 2 0.270 module, or TSX TAP MAS block 9-way SUB-D (-way SUB-D connector) connector (speed reference) 6m TSX CXP 6 0.80 Preformed cables with SUB-D connector fitted at end and free end (servodrive side) TSX CAY pp Speed reference for 9 6m TSX CDP 6 0.790 module, or servodrive: Lexium MHDA, TSX TAP MAS Twin Line TLD or other block (cross-section 0.20 mm2) Connecting cables with HE 0 connector TSX CAY pp ABE 7H6R20 sub-base 0 0. m TSX CDP 0 0.08 module, (20-way (20-way HE 0 moulded m TSX CDP 0 0.0 HE 0 connector) connector) 2m TSX CDP 20 0.280 (00 ma max.) m TSX CDP 0 0.0 m TSX CDP 0 0.670 Preformed cables with HE 0 connector fitted at end and free end (servodrive side) TSX CAY pp Auxiliary inputs, high speed m TSX CDP 0 0.00 module, (20-way outputs, control signals, power HE 0 connector) supplies (free end) 20-wire (00 ma max.) m TSX CDP 0 0.660 Connecting cables for Lexium MHDA servodrive TSX CAY pp Simulated incremental 2 2m TSX CXP 2 0.20 module, way encoder feedback SUB-D connector (9-way SUB-D connector) (encoder input) 6m TSX CXP 6 0.70 Simulated absolute encoder 2m TSX CXP 2 0.20 feedback (9-way SUB-D connector) 6m TSX CXP 6 0.70 TSX CDP pp Connecting cables for Twin Line TLD servodrive TSX CAY pp TLD servodrive with module, way ESIM-C/2-C module SUB-D connector Simulated incremental (encoder input) encoder feedback (-way SUB-D connector) 2m TSX CXP 2 () 6m TSX CXP 6 () TLD servodrive with SSI-C module Simulated absolute encoder feedback (-way SUB-D connector) 2m TSX CXP 27 6m TSX CXP 67 TSX CDP p0 Connecting cables for NUM MDLA servodrive (2) TSX CAY pp NUM MDLA modular speed 6 2. m TSX CXP 2 0.220 module, drive (encoder input) -way SUB-D (-way, high density, connector SUB-D connector) 6m TSX CXP 6 0.70 TSX TAP MAS block, 9-way SUB-D connector Speed reference on NUM MDLA modular speed drive (2-way SUB-D connector) 7 2. m TSX CXP 22 0.0 Cables fitted with splitter block for Altivar AC drive TSX CAY pp Speed reference for 8 m VY XCA 0.00 module ATV 8/8/8F AC drives for asynchronous motors () For key, see pages / to /6. (2) See page 9/6. Characteristics: pages /9 and /0 /2 Connections: pages / to /6 Dimensions: page /7

2 7 9 2 6 8 C C C C 2 7 9 2 6 8 Connections platform TSX CAY modules for servomotors Connections for TSX CAY modules General connections Examples of encoder connections Examples of speed reference signal connections 2 2 GND + + 8 Telefast 2 ABE 7CPA0 0 2 6 7 8 9 20 2 22 2 2 2 26 27 28 29 0 2 9 20 8 6 2 0 + + + 8 6 + GND ++ ++ 200 00 Telefast 2 20 0 202 02 20 0 20 C 0 C 20 C 0 C 7 GND-ANA link (terminals,, and 9) 2 6 Vref Axis Vref 2 Axis 2 Vref Axis Speed drive with differential inputs Common (0 V) Ref Ref + GND 9 Vref 0 Axis 0 Ref Common GND Axis 2 Axis 0 Speed drive with 2-wire input Axis Axis TSX CAY 0 206 06 207 07 Power supply c 2 V 208 08 209 09 20 0 2 22 2 2 2 2 Example of speed drive connection (auxiliary I/O) 0 0 20 20 0 0V Drive check input Drive enable 2 V Axis GND + + Telefast 2 0 2 6 8 20 22 2 26 28 0 2 00 0 02 ABE 7H6R20 0 0 0 06 07 08 09 0 2 0 2 0 20 200 00 0V Drive check input Drive enable 2 V Axis 0.2 ABE 7CPA 7 9 2 2 2 27 29 P 0 Incremental or absolute encoder 2 V RS 22 incremental encoder Parallel output absolute encoder TSX CAP S connector TSX CCP Sppp cable with connectors 6 TSX TAP S 0 connector IB- 7 NC 2 Sup. Ret. 8 IB + V IZ + V 9 NC IZ - 0 0 V IA + V NC 6 IA - 2 + V 7 TSX CAP S9 connector 8 TSX CXP 2/6 cable with connector 9 TSX CDP 6 preformed cable with connector 0 TSX CDPpp cable with connector TSX CDPp0 preformed cable with connector ++ ++ 200 00 00 Telefast 2 20 0 0 202 02 02 ABE 7H6R20 20 Power supply c 2 V auxiliary I/O sensors 0 0 20 0 0 20 0 0 206 06 06 207 07 07 208 08 08 209 09 09 20 0 0 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 Example of auxiliary I/O connection 2 0 20 09 209 08 208 2 2 07 207 06 206 0 20 0 20 08 09 0 + + + + + + + + 02 + 0/0 V V 00 0 V 0 High speed output Recalibration Event Emergency stop Homing High speed output Recalibration Event Emergency stop Homing encoder power supply Q0 I I2 I I0 Q0 I I2 I I0 Axes and Axes 0 and 2 Characteristics: pages /9 and /0 References: pages / and /2 Dimensions: page /7 /

2 Connections (continued) platform TSX CAY modules for servomotors Connection example for Lexium MHDA servodrives 2 8 ++ ++ 200 20 202 20 20 20 206 207 208 209 20 2 22 2 2 2 00 0 02 0 0 0 06 07 08 09 0 2 2 C C C C TSX CAY 2 Telefast 2 00 0 02 ABE 7H6R20 0 0 0 06 07 08 09 0 2 ++ ++ 00 0 02 0 0 0 06 07 08 09 0 2 2 C C C C Incremental encoder SSI absolute encoder X 6 9 9 black blue brown X -In+ -In- Com TSX TAP MAS r To other Lexium servodrives Power supply c 2 V 0 Lexium MHDA servodrive 0 2 22 2 2 Enable servodrive OK +2V Power supply c 2 V auxiliary I/O sensors 0 Telefast 2.2 200 00 20 0 202 02 20 0 20 0 20 0 206 06 207 07 208 08 209 09 20 0 2 22 2 2 2 2 ABE 7H6R20 22 2 8 Common Input Connection example for Twin Line TLD servodrives with ESIM -C/2-C option ++ ++ 200 20 202 20 20 20 206 207 208 209 20 2 22 2 2 2 00 0 02 0 0 0 06 07 08 09 0 2 C C C C Incremental encoder with module ESIM-C/2-C Absolute encoder with SSI-C option M Simulated encoder feedback 9 6 8 9 black blue brown 7 8 6 TSX CAY 2 TSX TAP MAS r Power supply c 2 V To other Twin Line servodrives Twin Line TLD servodrive Speed reference, auxiliary servodrive I/Os 00 0 02 0 0 0 06 07 08 09 0 2 0 Telefast 2 ABE 7H6R20 2 Incremental or absolute encoder TSX CCP Sppp cable with connector (encoder feedback) 6 TSX TAP S 0 connector 8 TSX CXP 2/6 cable with connector Characteristics: pages /9 and /0 / 9 TSX CDP 6 preformed cable with connector 0 TSX CDPpp cable with connector TSX CDPp0 preformed cable with connector References: pages / and /2 Dimensions: page /7 2 TSX CXP 2/6 cable with connector (simulated incremental encoder feedback) TSX CXP 2/6 cable with connector (simulated SSI absolute encoder feedback) TSX CXP 2/6 cable with connector (simulated incremental encoder feedback) TSX CXP 27/67 cable with connector (simulated SSI absolute encoder feedback)

C C C C 2 Enable Ref. power supply Connections (continued) platform TSX CAY modules for servomotors Connection example for Altivar ATV-8F speed drive (for asynchronous motors) 8 TSX CAY 2 ++ Power supply c 2 V 0 ++ Telefast 2 () 00 0 02 0 0 0 06 07 08 09 0 2 200 00 20 0 202 02 20 0 20 0 20 0 206 06 207 07 208 08 209 09 20 0 2 22 2 2 2 2 8 ABE 7H6R20 TSX TAP MAS 9 A+ A B+ B Z+ Z 0V +V 0 2 22 2 To other drives Drive fault black blue brown A A A/ B B/ 0V LI LI RB RA AIA AIB COM.2 ATV 8F speed drive (2) Axis 0 Incremental encoder 8 TSX CXP 2/6 cable with connector 9 TSX CDP 6 preformed cable with connector 0 TSX CDPpp cable with connector 8 VY XCA cable with connector and adapter sub-base Characteristics: pages /9 and /0 References: pages / and /2 () For auxiliary I/O connections (for example: Emergency stop, homing, etc), see the connections on page /. (2) The speed drive must be programmed as "Macro configuration General use". For other ATV 8F speed drive connections, please see our specialist catalog "Progressive starters and speed servodrives". Dimensions: page /7 /

Connections (continued) platform TSX CAY modules for servomotors Connection example for NUM MDLA modular speed drives 6 7 J2 J J 8 NUM MDLA TSX CAY 2 7 J TSX TAP MAS 8 TSX CXP 2/6 cable with connector 6TSX CXP 2/6 cable with connector 7TSX CXP 22 cable with connector NUM MDLA Connection example for distribution of speed references for speed drives.2 9 8 Drive TSX CAY 2 9 TSX TAP MAS 8 TSX CXP 2/6 cable with connector 9 TSX CDP 6 preformed cable with connector Drive Characteristics: pages /9 and /0 /6 References: pages / and /2 Dimensions: page /7

Dimensions platform TSX CAY modules for servomotors Dimensions TSX TAP S 0 connection interface for incremental encoder 27, 70, 8 7 Mounting in enclosure feedthrough (dust and damp proof) b Ø7cut-out, b Panel thickness mm maximum TSX TAP MAS speed reference splitter block for speed drives 6 = 80 = = 0 = 80 Mounting on DIN rail with LA9-DC9976 accessory..2 Characteristics: pages /9 and /0 References: pages / and /2 Dimensions: page /7 /7

SERCOS architecture, system overview platform SERCOS TSX CSY 8/6 motion control module Architecture Fiber optic cables SERCOS ring network Lexium MHDA servodrives (with SERCOS option card). SER/Lexium BPH motors.2 SERCOS (SERiaI COmmunication System) is a communication standard which defines the digital link (exchange protocol and medium) between a motion control module and intelligent servodrives. It is defined in European standard EN 69. Using the SERCOS distributed architecture allows application I/O (position encoder, emergency stop, etc.) to be connected directly to the intelligent servodrives, reducing the cost of connection. The fiber optic digital link permits high speed exchanges (2 or M bauds) while ensuring a high level of immunity in disturbed industrial environments. The SERCOS range in the Premium control system platform comprises: b Two TSX CSY 8/6 axis control modules which can each control up to 6 servodrives via a SERCOS ring. The module calculates the path and interpolation for several axes (position mode). Access to the other modes (speed and torque) is possible with the assistance of Schneider Electric application services. b. A to 70 A Lexium MHDA servodrives with digital link (equipped with SERCOS option card). The servodrives manage the position loop, speed loop and torque loop, and ensure power conversion to control the motor. The encoder feedback information is sent to the servodrive (current position, current speed). b SER/Lexium BPH brushless motors. These have permanent magnets delivering a high power-to-weight ratio, resulting in excellent dynamic speed response in a compact unit. The Lexium range offers all the accessories required (filter choke, braking resistor, etc.) and a full set of connectors. System overview The system overview presents the various functions performed by the different parts of the multi-axis control system. PL7 Junior/Pro, Unity Pro Unilink PLC Premium/Atrium Application program Bus X SERCOS TSX CSY 8/6 module Linear or infinite independent axes 2to8-axislinear interpolation Follower axes (6 slaves) by gearing or profiled cams Lexium MDHA servodrive (with SERCOS option card). Interpretation of commands Position loop Speed loop Current loop Power conversion SER/Lexium BPH motor Speed Position SERCOS ring (to servodrive network) Characteristics: pages /0 and / Functions: pages /2 and / References: page / Links: page / /8

System overview (continued), description platform SERCOS TSX CSY 8/6 motion control modules System overview (continued) PL7 Junior/Pro or Unity software via the Premium platform terminal port can: b Declare TSX CSY 8/6 SERCOS modules () in the PLC configuration. b Configure the functions and define the parameters for the axes used. b Program the movements in the PLC application. b Adjust the parameters via the operating codes (parameters, TSX CSY module and Lexium MHDA servodrives with SERCOS option card). b Test and debug the application. Unilink software, via the RS 22 terminal port for the Lexium MHDA servodrive (with SERCOS option card), can: b Define types of Lexium MHDA servodrives (with SERCOS option card and SER/Lexium BPH motors. b Adjust the parameters for Lexium MHDA servodrives (with SERCOS option card), back them up to EEprom memory in the drive and save them on a compatible PC. Description 6 7 2 The TSX CSY 8/6 SERCOS axis control modules comprise: A SMA-type connector, marked Tx, for connecting the servodrives using the SERCOS ring fiber optic transmission cable. 2 A SMA-type connector, marked Rx, for connecting the servodrives using the SERCOS ring fiber optic reception cable. Rigid cases, double format, in order to: b Support electronic cards b Attach and lock the module in its slot. Module diagnostic lamps: b RUN LED (green): LED ON indicates module operating correctly. b SER LED (yellow): flashing LED indicates data transmission and reception on the SERCOS network b ERR LED (red): v LED ON indicates internal module fault, v flashing LED on module start up indicates communication fault, incompatible configuration or application missing. b I/O LED (red): LED ON indicates external fault or application fault. b INI LED (yellow): flashing LED indicates module is reinitializing. Channel diagnostic LEDs (green): LED ON indicates axis operating normally; OFF: configuration fault; flashing: serious error on axis: b to 8: display of 8 real axes (2).. b 9 to 2: display of imaginary axes (2). b to 6: display of remote axes (2). b 7 to 20: display of coordinated sets. b 2 to 2: display of follower sets. 6 A pencil point button to initialize the module. 7 Two mini DIN type 8-way connectors for Schneider Electric use..2 () TSX CSY 6 module can not be implemented with Unity Pro V2.0 software. (2) to 6: display the 6 axes (real, imaginary or remote) with module TSX CSY 6. Characteristics: pages /0 and / Functions: pages /2 and / References: page / Links: page / /9

Characteristics platform SERCOS TSX CSY 8/6 motion control module Characteristics Electrical characteristics TSX CSY 8 TSX CSY 6 SERCOS ring network Type Industrial medium complying with standard EN 69 Topology Medium Ring Fiber optic cable Baud rate Mbauds by default Cycle time () (independent axes) Maximum number of segments ms 2axes axes 8 axes 2 axes axes 8 axes 2 axes 6 axes 2 2 2 2 2 9 7 Length of segment m 8 max. with plastic fiber optic cable, 0 max. with glass fiber optic cable Bus X Distance m 00 max. (2) between TSX CSY 8 axis control module and the Premium processor SERCOS certification () TSX CSY 8/6 modules comply with SERCOS CEI/EN 69 certification and with the tests determined by IGS (Interest Group SERCOS). Certification N Z0000 Power consumption for c V voltage ma 800 Power dissipated in the module W 9(typical) Operating characteristics TSX CSY 8 TSX CSY 6 Number of channels 2 configurable (0 to ), channel 0 used for SERCOS ring configuration.2 Type of axes Real axes (connected to a servodrive) Imaginary axes (channels 9 to 2) 8 (channels to 8) 6 (channels to 6) may be dynamically configured as real axes, imaginary axes or remote axis. Remote axes () (channels to 6) Setofaxes coordinated (channels 7 to 20). Each set allows linear interpolation of 2 to 8 axes followers (channels 2 to 2). Each set can comprise a maximum of 7 axes: master/6 slaves in gearing or camming Cam profile 7 (channels 2 to ). Used to create the electronic cams with linear or cubic interpolation between profile points () ms default value. Values may be programmed according to number of axes. (2) Without the use of a TSX REY 200 bus X remote module. () For further certification details, see pages 9/0 and 9/. () Determine external position using an encoder connected to the servodrive position input. Architectures pages /8 and /9 Functions: pages /2 and / References: page / Links: page / /0

Characteristics (continued) platform SERCOS TSX CSY 8 Premium motion control module Characteristics (continued) Main functions Programming Movements b Homing, absolute, relative, or continuous b Immediate movement, or queued, to a given position b Speed override possible b Acceleration and deceleration parameters may be set for each axis motion control () b Synchronisation on start and desynchronisation on stop for a slave axis on a master axis, in a given position () b Crossover counter () Special functions b Position sensor and distance measurement between two edges on one or two discrete inputs on the drive. This can be applied to a real or auxiliary axis (position measurement via external encoder) b Count probe: counts the edges on a discrete input on the drive over a period of time b Fast index: starts a movement on an event b Registration move: position capture on an edge of the discrete input on the drive b Rotary Knife: cuts using a rotary knife. Synchronizes a circular axis on a linear axis and controls a discrete output on the drive Other special functions The development of all other special function is possible with the assistance of our application services. Please consult our Regional Sales Offices. Configuration /adjustment Stop/start functions SERCOS ring Acceleration/deceleration b Fast stop, stop on configured deceleration profile b Temporary stop b Restart of stopped movement b Choice of stop method (): v Faulty slave: master is not stopped. master stops normally according to pre-determined deceleration ramp or Servo-driven master emergency stop v Faulty master: slave stops normally according to pre-determined deceleration ramp or Servodriven slave emergency stop b On Emergency Stop: calculation of slave axis deceleration ramp alignment with master axis so that all set axes stop in synch. () b Emergency Stop: axes may be allowed to "freewheel" or may be stopped according to predetermined () Bus cycle time, traffic on the bus, optical power on the fiber, SERCOS loop diagnostics Ramp values, ramp type (rectangular, triangular and trapezoid), choice of units, maximum acceleration adjustment.2 Speed Speed units, default speed, maximum speed, speed override Other settings Target window, rollover, software limits Set of follower axes Following of master axis by gearing or camming (cam profile), threshold position of master triggers the following, bias value when synchronizing an axis, monitoring of master/slave positions, master offset for follower axis Set of coordinated axes Type of interpolation: linear Cam profile Value of an existing point of a cam profile, number of points (000 max.), type of interpolation, table addresses State of a movement or axis Moving, accelerating, decelerating, homing, in position, faulty, etc. Diagnostics b Drive fault, axis currently reading data, following error, overvoltage, undervoltage, overcurrent, power supply fault b Availability of master axis fault information for a given axis set () b Multiaxis motion path control according to common tolerance for all axes in the motion, with alarm feature. Access available only with TSX CSY 6 module () Implementation of the TSX CSY 8, release u. requires the use of the PL7 Junior/Pro application, version u.. Access available only with TSX CSY 6 module. Architectures pages /8 and /9 Functions: pages /2 and / References: page / Links: page / /

Functions platform SERCOS TSX CSY 8/6 motion control modules Software setup () When setting up application-specific functions, screens specific to SERCOS axis control functions can be accessed via PL7 Junior/Pro or Unity software for configuration, adjustment, debugging and documentation of applications. These services are performed by editors which can be directly accessed from the basic screen using icons in the tool bars. Windows relating to the editors can be simultaneously displayed on one screen (example: it is possible to program using the program editor and simultaneously define the symbols in the variables editor). Declaring the SERCOS motion control modules Parameter entry screens for application-specific functions can be accessed via the configuration screen by clicking on the slot. Example: configuration in which a TSX CSY 8/6 module has been defined..2 Configuring the module The configuration editor provides assistance with entering and modifying the values of the various axis configuration parameters. These parameters enable the operation of the axis control module to be adapted to the machine which is to be controlled. Axis configuration parameters are: b Units of measurement. b Resolution. b Maximum and minimum limit positions. b Maximum speed. b Accelerating/decelerating. This data relates to the machine and cannot be modified by the program. The following configuration screen can be used to declare the 6 axes as real, imaginary or remote measurement axes in module TSX CSY 6. () The setting up screens require the version u. of PL7 Junior/Pro software TLX CD/RCD PL7J/P PM/2M/M/M or Unity Pro UNY SPU pfu CD 0. Architectures pages /8 and /9 Characteristics: pages /0 and / References: page / Links: page / /2

Functions (continued) platform SERCOS TSX CSY 8 motion control modules Software setup (continued) Adjusting the modules These parameters are associated with operation of the axes. They generally require the operations on and movements of the moving part to be known. These parameters are adjusted in online mode (they are initialized during configuration, in offline mode). They concern: b Maximum speed. b Resolution. b Servocontrol parameters. b Accelerating/decelerating. Debugging the modules In online mode, the configuration editor also provides the user with a control panel screen, giving a quick visual display which can be used to control and observe the behavior of the axis. The TSX CSY 8/6 () module associated with PL7 Junior/Pro software (2) provides manual mode for running continual (JOG) or incremental (INC) motion commands without prior programming..2 () Auto/Manu mode requires the use of TSX CSY 8 module, version u.2. (2) Requires the use of PL7 Junior/Pro version u.. Mode not available with Unity Pro version 2.0. Architectures pages /8 and /9 Characteristics: pages /0 and / References: page / Links: page / /

References platform SERCOS TSX CSY 8/6 motion control module References The TSX CSY 8/6 multiaxis control module has 2 application-specific channels which are only counted when they are configured in the Premium application (using PL7 Junior/Pro or Unity Pro software). The maximum number of application-specific channels allowed depends on the type of processor: Type of processors TSX/7 p TSX/7 2p PCX 7-20 PCI 7-20 Maximum number of application-specific channels TSX/7 p PCX 7- TSX/7 p PCI 7-8 2 2 6 6 TSX/7 p Description Functions Number of axes Reference Weight kg Multiaxis control modules SERCOS digital servodrives control 8 real axes imaginary axes remoteaxes TSX CSY 8 0.20 6 axes (real axes, imaginary axes or remote axes) TSX CSY 6 () TSX CSY 8 6: Connection accessories Description Connection Length Reference Weight kg Plastic fiber optic cables fitted with SMA-type connectors (curvature radius: 2 mm min.) Lexium MHDA servodrive pppn00/a00 (with SERCOS option card) 0. m 990 MCO 000 0 0.00 0.9 m 990 MCO 000 0 0.80. m 990 MCO 000 0 0.260.2. m 990 MCO 000 0.770 6. m 990 MCO 000 2.80 22. m 990 MCO 000 7.070 7. m 990 MCO 00 2.90 Sets of plastic fiber optic connections Description Composition Reference Weight kg Set of fiber optic cables and SMA-type connectors 2 SMA-type connectors 2 insulating sleeves Plastic fiber optic cable, length 0 m 990 MCO KIT 0 Fiber optic cable installation tool Tools for making up cables to required length from a 990MCOKIT0kit Includes stripping tool, crimping pliers, 2 W/0 V cutting tool, and instructions for use 990 MCO KIT 00 Separate item Description Use Reference Weight kg PC to TSX CSY 8/6 connectors connection cable (length 2 m) Used to download the servodrive operation configuration file for the servodrives present on the SERCOS ring (2) Used to download specific functions developed by our Industrial Applications Department. TSX CCT 200 0.00 () The TSX CSY 6 module is compatible with version. of the PL7 Junior/Pro software application with the Motion software add-on update included on the TSX CSY 6 module CD-Rom. Version. of PL7 Junior/Pro includes this software add-on. The TSX CSY 6 module is not compatible with Unity Pro version 2.0 software. (2) The add-on can be downloaded when the default configuration file is not adapted to the configuration required. Architectures: pages /8 and /9 Characteristics: pages /0 and / Functions: pages /2 and / Links: page / /

Connections platform SERCOS TSX CSY 8/6 motion control module Connections SERCOS ring with servodrives (example) TX RX SERCOS network ring RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX X X X X 2 2 2 2 2 Servodrive Servodrive Servodrive Servodrive 2 Servodrive TSX CSY 8/6: multiaxis control module for Premium. 2 MHDA pppn00/a00 Lexium servodrives fitted with the SERCOS AM0 SER 00 V000 option card. 990 MCO 000 pp: plastic fiber optic cables fitted with SMA type connectors. TX Transmission..2 RXReception. Architectures: pages /8 and /9 Characteristics: pages /0 and / Functions: pages /2 and / References: page / /

Presentation platform ISP Plus integrated weighing system The ISP Plus weighing range, when used with the Premium PLC, enables the automation of machines combined with weighers or installations 2 Weighing module The TSX ISP Y00 standard format weighing module is the central part of the weighing system. It has: b A measurement input which will take up to 8 sensors. b A sealable link for the display unit. b Two discrete reflex outputs for weigher doser applications..2 2 Weight indicator The TSX XBT H0 remote display unit displays the measured weight with no prior configuration. When the link to the weighing module is sealed, this display unit then becomes the main display unit for commercial transactions. The TSX ISP Ymodule/display unit assembly conforms to OIML recommendations and is e approved for class lll weighers (6000 scale divisions) and for class llll weighers (000 scales divisions). Accesories Junction boxes, cables and test circuit. /6

Description platform ISP Plus integrated weighing system When a TSX ISP Y0 weighing module is plugged into a Premium programmable controller, it is possible to go beyond the scope of a simple weighing application. The PLC manages not only the entire weighing environment, but also the whole of the machine or industrial process associated with the weighing system. In a Premium configuration, the number of TSX ISP Y0 weighing modules must be added to the other dedicated modules (TSX SCY 260 communication, TSX CTY counting, TSX CAY/CSY axis control and TSX CFY movement control). The maximum permissible is: b 2 dedicated modules with TSX P7 0p processor. b dedicated modules with TSX P7 p processor. b 2 dedicated modules with TSX P7 2p processor. b 6 dedicated modules with TSX P7 p processor. b 2 dedicated modules with TSX P7 p/p processor. 2 Description Weighing module The TSX ISP Y0 weighing module has the following on the front face: A SUB-D 9-way female connector for the dedicated RS 8 serial link to the weight indicator. 2 A screw terminal block for connecting the 2 discrete reflex outputs (outputs used with threshold detection). A SUB-D -way female connector for the indicator input channel (0 samples per second, from to 8 load cells). Module sealing device, if required. Weighing indicator Weight values are displayed on a TSX XBT H00 weight indicator (supplied with the TSX ISP Yp unit). The weight indicator is pre-configured. It has the following on the front face: An LCD, back-lit display screen with line of 20 characters (height 9 mm). 2 An area for affixing the instrument rating plate..2 2 The back is equipped with: v A plug-in screw terminal block for c 2 V supply. v A SUB-D 2-way female connector for connection to the TSX ISP Y0 weighing module (0 metres maximum). Strain gauge type load cells and connection accessories Consult your Regional Sales Office. /7

Functions, implementation platform ISP Plus integrated weighing system Functions The weighing module with its associated display unit constitutes a weighing indicator. The module incorporates numerous functions specific to weighing: b Continuous weighing (in g, kg, t, lb, oz ) and flow calculation (weight variation). b Filtering of measurements by several methods (9 filtering options). b Tare (automatic/manual) and preset tare. b Automatic reset. b Weighing stability control. b Threshold detection with extrapolation of the cut-off point: positioning of local discrete outputs to the nearest millisecond. b Assisted calibration: the module calculates the zero point and the gradient. b Calibration parameters saved in the module (EEPROM) and in the Premium processor. b Forced calibration: fast replacement of a failed module and restarting using the previous calibration parameters. b Locking of the configuration, sealing of the module and its connections to the load cells and weight indicator. b Continuous formatting and transmission of measurements to the PLC. b Transmission of measurement validity data (validity, stability, nett/gross ). b Transmission of diagnostic data from the module and its connections. b Configuration, calibration and debugging via Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro screens. b Most of the operating parameters can be modified and most of the functions can be run by PLC program..2 Configuration Setting up the weighing module Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software allows complete setting up of the weighing system (configuration, calibration and debugging). Configuration This covers: b The measuring data of the weigher. b Filtering of measurements. b The flow calculation method. b The tare. b Data format. b Stability criteria and zero point management method. b Threshold monitoring for positioning of discrete outputs. Weigher calibration Weigher calibration The module itself calculates the gain and the offset to be applied to the electronic weighing system. Calibration is carried out in two phases: b Measurement of the dead load. b Measurement of a standard weight. Forced calibration allows immediate restarting of the system in the event of a module failure; the new module is configured automatically. Debugging Debbuging The dedicated weighing screen provides the following dynamic display: b The measurement in progress. b The operating state of the module. It also allows fast modification of setting parameters (filtering, flow, threshold values ). Instructions and parameters that can be modified by the program in real time with the module. These parameters and instructions can be monitored from an operator dialogue type device and/or a supervisory device connected to the Premium. /8

Characteristics platform ISP Plus integrated weighing system Electrical characteristics of weighing module TSX ISP Y0 Measurement input weigher per module measurement input Resolution Measuring rate 08 76 points (20 bits) 0 measurementss per second Input impedance MΩ > Input load cells Number that may be connected Maximum of 8 x 0 Ω load cells, connected in parallel Supply voltage V c 0 Supply type d.c. Cabling distance m 00(withoutlossofaccuracywithloadcells) Discrete reflex outputs Number 2 positive logic transistor outputs, for sack weighing, filling and sort/check weighing. Nominal voltage V c 2 Nominal current ma 00 Response time ms discrimination. The point at which the thresholds are crossed between 2 measurements is calculated by polling to the nearest millisecond. Weight indicator output Physical interface RS 8 non isolated Binary flow Kbit/s 9.6 Remote connection distance m 0 (maximum) Consumption ma See pages 9/ and 9/ Environment Weights and measures See page /28 The weighing module associated with its weight indicator conforms to OIML recommendations. It is e approved for class III (up to 6000 divisions) and class IIII (up to 000 divisions) weighers in accordance with European circular 90 8 of 20th June 990..2 Minimum voltage division µv e certification SDM n 97.06 - Revision of june 999 Characteristics of weight indicator TSX XBT H00 Display Type of screen LCD back-lit Number of lines Number of characters line used for weighing applications 20 per line Character size (height) mm 9 Alimentation Nominal voltage V c 2 non isolated Limit voltages V c 8 0 Consumption W 0 Environment Conforming to standards IEC 2, EN 6 2, UL 08, CSA C22 2 n Temperatures Operation: 0 0 C. Storage: - 20 + 60 C Degree of protection Front face : IP 6. Back: IP 20, conforming to IEC 29 and NF C 20 00 Function Signalling signallamp /9

References platform ISP Plus integrated weighing system TSX ISP Y0 ISP Plus weighing module Description Composition Reference () ISP Plus weighing modules ( weigher per module) (2) Weight kg Standard format module (sealable) - Load cell input 0 meas./s (for to 8 load cells), - 2 reflex discrete outputs (for threshold detection), - RS 8 output (for display) TSX ISP Y0 0.20 - Module TSX ISP Y0. - Indicator XBT H00 (LCD back-lit, preconfigured display). - Module/weight indicator connecting cable (length m) TSX ISP Y.020.2 TSX ISP Y SM PS7 SF2 PY0 Accessories for maintenance test (supplied with a m cable) Function For use with Mounting Reference Weight kg Load cell simulation ISP Plus all models Separated SM PS7 0.20 Test circuit (voltage) ISP Plus and ISP7 A Separated SM PS8 0.00 Junction boxes for load cells Material Number of load cells Reference Weight kg Metal () SF2 PY0 0.800 Intrinsically safe junction box () This box is installed in the weighing system between the weighing indicator and the junction box in which the load cells are grouped. Its function is to limit any peak voltages and to limit the current to 00 ma in the event of a short circuit. The load cells and junction box are the only devices located in the explosive environment; the weighing indicator is located in a safe environment. Description For use with Marking Reference Weight kg Zener barrier box All types of load cells and weighing indicators Remote weight indicator EEx ib II B EEx ib II C SM PY2 2.800 Description Reference () Weight kg Weight indicator for connection to the weighing module TSX XBT H00 Description Module/weight indicator connecting cable Length m Reference Weight kg SF CPY00 0.00 0 SF CPY00.00 SF CPY0.700 20 SF CPY020 2.200 2 SF CPY02 2.800 0 SF CPY00.00 () Supplied with multilingual Installation manual as standard: French and English. (2) The setup of weighing modules requires of Unity Pro V2.0 or PL7 Junior/Pro V.min. software. () When a weighing system is located in an explosive environment, a metal junction box must be used. () Equipment approved by the Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques (LCIE) (Central Laboratory for the Electric Industries). SM PY2 TSX XBT H00 /60

References (continued) dimensions platform ISP Plus integrated weighing system References (continued) SF PY2ppp Dimensions Junction boxes SF2 PY0 Descritpion For connection to Length m Indicator cable: 6-core with SUB-D type -way connector for ISP Plus Junction box SF2 PY0 Zener barrier box SM PY2 Reference Weight kg SF PY200 0,00 0 SF PY200,00 20 SF PY2020 2,200 0 SF PY200,00 0 SF PY200,00 0 SF PY200,600 60 SF PY2060 6,900 80 SF PY2080 9,000 20 SF PY220,00 200 SF PY2200 22,00 00 SF PY200,00 9 80 2 6 2, 7 99,7 8 28 20 (2) () 76, 0.2, 6, () Weight indicator TSX XBT H00 Flush mounting Fixing by or 6 press-in fasteners (supplied) (onto6mmthickpanel) Zener barrier box panel mounting SM PY2 0 2, 8,8,8, 89,6 6,2 02 6, 7 6,2 202 60 /6

Presentation platform Premium Warm Standby redundancy Presentation The Premium Warm Standby redundancy offer ensures continuity of operation for a control system based on a Premium platform in the event of failure of: b Central processing and communication functions. b All or part of the I/O system. It is based on the Normal/Backup redundancy principle with complete redundancy of the main processing and communication functions, the use of simple I/O shared on a Fipio bus and/or redundancy of in-rack I/O. It covers all availability requirements when the purpose of the PLC is to monitor an installation in continuous operation, signal incidents to a control station, and transmit command instructions from the supervision manager to various locations on an extensive site. It is aimed at processes which can tolerate a lack of control on the part of the PLC lasting to 2 s (average time for changeover from the Normal to the Backup unit). Areas of application: b In the commercial sector: v centralised technical management of a public facility (tunnel, airport, etc), v control/monitoring of a water treatment or distribution station, v electrical technical management. b In the industrial sector: v food and beverage processing, v slow chemical processes, v level/temperature monitoring, etc. Operational safety and availability The Warm Standby architecture ensures that the control system functions are available, irrespective of the failure of any system component. Operational safety in control systems: V Safety: capacity of an entity to present no danger to people, goods and the environment Capacity to provide a specific service during the cycle V Availability: capacity of an entity to be operational, at any given moment or for a given period of time V V Reliability: capacity of an entity to perform a service within a given time Ease of maintenance: capacity of en entity to be maintained or returned to operational state within a given time. V Maintenance logistics :capacity of an organisation to provide the necessary maintenance resources Safety Safety PLCs Standard PLCs Premium Warm Standby solution Availability References: page /66 Connections: page /67 /62

Principle platform Premium Warm Standby redundancy Principle The Premium Warm Standby architecture combines physical redundancy of the PLC with Normal/Backup type operation. Only the Normal PLC processes the application and generates the outputs. The Backup PLC applies the outputs generated by the Normal PLC, performs self-diagnostics and permanently diagnoses the Normal PLC. In event of a malfunction on the Normal PLC, the Backup PLC takes control and then becomes the Normal PLC (the faulty PLC, previously Normal, becomes the Backup ). Optimum availability of the application is ensured by: b Automatic or manual Normal/Backup changeover. b Smooth changeover on the actuators. b Updating of the Backup" PLC on each cycle. b Signalling of the faulty component. b Online repair. b Transparent supervision (SCADA). Ethernet TCP/IP network 2 Modbus bus Essential elements for redundancy TSX PSY power supply 2 TSX P7 M/M processor TSX ETY 0 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module 6 7 Optional elements for redundancy TSX ETY 20 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module TSX SCY 260 communication module with TSX SCP Modbus protocol PCMCIA card TBX TSX Micro 6 7 TSX PSY power supply TSX DpY discrete I/O modules Shared elements on the Fipio bus Momentum Fipio bus Premium. Elements which can be redundant are: b The main rack. b The main rack power supply. b The processor. Possibly accompanied by: b Discrete input modules. b Discrete output modules. b One or more extendable racks with their power supply. b One or more Ethernet TCP/IP network or Modbus bus communication modules. Elements of the Fipio bus shared between the Normal and Backup PLCs are: b Discrete or analog input modules (Momentum or TBX). b Discrete or analog output modules (Momentum or TBX). b One or more TSX Micro/Premium agent PLCs (these can support the entire range of I/O: discrete, analog or application-specific). References: page /66 Connections: page /67 /6

Functions platform Premium Warm Standby redundancy. Functions Normal and Backup PLC functions The Normal and Backup PLCs are physically and functionally identical, but their role is differentiated according to their status: Normal or Backup. The Normal Premium PLC: b Executes the application. b Updates the outputs and inputs (in-rack and on the Fipio bus). b Provides communication functions with peripheral devices. b Sends its database to the Backup PLC. b Recovers diagnostic information from the Backup PLC. b Generates its own diagnostic information as well as that of the Premium Warm Standby architecture. The Backup Premium PLC: b Executes part of the application. b Reads the state of the in-rack inputs. b Updates its in-rack and Fipio outputs according to the state of those of the Normal PLC. b Provides communication functions with peripheral devices. b Recovers diagnostic information from the Normal PLC. b Generates its own diagnostic information as well as that of the Premium Warm Standby architecture. Management of shared I/O on Fipio bus The Fipio bus manages I/O exchanges on Fipio devices. The Normal PLC is an arbitrator for the active Fipio bus while the Backup PLC is an arbitrator for the passive Fipio network. Due to the characteristics of the Fipio bus, only the Normal PLC reads the physical inputs on the Fipio bus and controls the physical outputs on the Fipio bus. The Backup PLC does not access the Fipio bus. During each cycle, the Backup PLC receives the values of the I/O on the Fipio bus from the Normal PLC via the inter-plc Ethway link (TSX ETY 0 module) and applies them to its own outputs. This updating of the memory enables smooth Normal/Backup changeover by maintaining the state of the I/O during changeover. Management of Normal/Backup states Malfunction of one of the following elements automatically causes a Normal/Backup changeover: b Main rack power supply. b PLC processor. b TSX ETY 20 communication module. b Fipio bus connected to the integrated processor port. For all other elements, Normal/Backup changeover can be customised (manual changeover). Management of optional redundant I/O For redundant inputs, the sensor information is transmitted simultaneously to the Normal and Backup PLCs via the 2 input modules placed in each PLC. Two Telefast 2 6-channel sub-bases, ABE 7ACC0 with redundant inputs and ABE 7ACC with redundant outputs, can be used to perform this double wiring easily using preformed HE 0 connector connection cables, (see page /67, refs.,, 20 and 2). The output values are only generated by the application processing of the Normal PLC. This sends its commands to the corresponding output modules. During each cycle, the Backup PLC receives the Normal PLC output values via the inter-plc Ethway link (TSX ETY 0 module) and applies them to its own outputs. This updating enables smooth Normal/Backup changeover by maintaining the state of the outputs during changeover. Management of supervision transparency (SCADA) Transparent communication with level 2 (supervisor, third-party device, etc) during changeover of the PLC in Normal mode to the PLC in Backup mode is provided by the TSX ETY 20 Ethernet TCP/IP modules, using a unique IP address. Communication with a redundant architecture is therefore similar to that for a simple architecture. This transparency is identical in Modbus with the use of the TSX SCP PCMCIA card (Modbus protocol in RS 8) installed in the TSX SCY 260 communication module. References: page /66 Connections: page /67 /6

Functions (continued), software setup platform Premium Warm Standby redundancy Functions Ring topology for shared equipment on the Fipio bus To improve the availability of shared equipment on the Fipio bus, it is possible to create a Fipio redundant ring using fibre optics. The fibre optic ring can then be used to: b Maintain normal operation in the event of a break at some point on the fibre optic medium. b Increase the immunity of the Fipio bus in environments with high levels of electromagnetic interference. Ethernet TCP/IP network Optical fibre Premium Momentum Premium OZD FIP G fibre optic transmitter (see page /8). Software setup A Premium Warm Standby redundant architecture is set up using PL7 Pro software (), in exactly the same way as a standard non-redundant process is set up. It is, however, necessary to apply the rule that the application program of both the Normal and Backup PLCs must be completely identical.. Redundancy entails certain special features which, if taken into account at the start of the development task, are very simple to set up using the additional Premium Warm Standby application design software TLX CD/CD WSBY P0E. This software can be perform the following functions: b Taking account of Normal/Backup states during program execution. b Sharing the database between the 2 PLCs via DFB user function blocks and EF elementary function blocks. b Management of redundant in-rack I/O. b Management of shared I/O on the Fipio bus. () Warm Standby non compatible with Unity Pro software. References: page /66 Connections: page /67 /6

References platform Premium Warm Standby redundancy References Description Type Reference () Software packages for setting up a Warm Standby redundant architecture on Premium Weight kg Equipment with station (equiped with PL7 Pro) TLX CD WSBY P0E Equipment with stations (equiped with PL7 Pro) TLX CD WSBY P0E Designation Type Reference Weight kg Ethernet TCP/IP communication module for Premium Warm Standby architecture Identical to those of the TSX ETY 0 module (see page /0). For the Warm Standby architecture, this module also provides: - transparent addressing during changeover - diagnostics of the architecture (self-tests, state of the Ethernet link and of the TSX ETY 20 dual module), - la maintenance with access to the "backup" PLC TSX ETY 20 0.270 Additional compatible elements The Warm Standby architecture presented on page /6 shows, among other things, the essential elements for redundancy. Compatible standard modules can be added to this minimum configuration according to the requirements of the process being automated.. Elements for redundancy (sold in lots of 2) (2) b Bus X remote system: v TSX REY 200 Bus X remote module, for increasing the length of Bus X to 2x0 m. b Communication: v TSX ETY 20 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module, for communication with level, v TSX SCP Modbus communication PCMCIA card, for Modbus Slave communication with transparent addressing for third-party devices. This card should be inserted in the slot in the TSX SCY 260 communication module. b Discrete and analog I/O: v TSX DEY ppk discrete input modules with HE 0 connectors with ABE 7ACC Telefast 2 redundant sub-bases, v TSX DSY ppk discrete output modules with HE 0 connectors with ABE 7ACC0 Telefast 2 redundant sub-bases, v TSX DMY ppk discrete mixed I/O modules with HE 0 connectors with ABE 7ACC/0 Telefast 2 redundant sub-bases, v TSX AEY/ASY analog,tsx CTY/CCY counter, TSX CAY/CSY/CFY axis control and TSX ISP weighing modules. These modules cannot be used as elements for redundancy, but can be used as elements shared via the Fipio agent Premium PLCs. Shared elements on the Fipio bus b TBX distributed I/O modules: v TBX LEP 00 Fipio communication module for base units, v TBX DES/DSS/DMS discrete I/O base units, v TBX AES/ASS/AMS analog I/O base units, v TSX EEF/ESF/EMF dust and damp proof discrete I/O base units. b Momentum I/O modules: v 70 FTN 0 0 Fipio communication module, v 70 ADI/ADO/ADM discrete I/O base units, v 70 AAI/AAO/AMM analog I/O base units. b Fipio agent PLCs: v Premium PLC, can take all I/O and application-specific modules, v TSX Micro PLC, can take all I/O and application-specific modules. b Other shared elements: v OZF FIP G fibre optic transmitter, can be used to create a Fipio bus fibre optic ring, v TSX FP ACC 6 Fipio electrical repeater, increases the length of the bus by the creation of segments, each 000 m maximum. () Product supplied with setup manual in English. (2) The TSX AEY/ASY I/O analog modules, the TSX CTY/CCY/CAY/CSY/CFY/ISPY application-specific modules are no redundancy elements. They can be used as shared elements with Fipio agent Premium PLCs. Connections: page /67 /66

Connections platform Premium Warm Standby redundancy Example of architecture with redundant I/O and shared I/O on Fipio bus Ethernet TCP/IP network 2 6 2 6 6 7 8 9 7 7 8 7 8 9 0 0 20 20 TBX 2 Momentum 2 TSX RKY pex: Premium extendable rack. 2 TSX PSYppppM: power supply module. TSX P7 M/M: Premium processor with integrated Fipio link. TSX ETY 0: Ethernet TCP/IP network module. TSX ETY 20: Ethway/Ethernet TCP/IP network module. 6 TSX SCY 260: communication module for type III PCMCIA card. 7 TSX DSYppK: discrete output modules, for redundancy. 8 TSX DEYppK: discrete input modules, for redundancy. 9 TSX LEP 00: Fipio communication module for TBX base units with TSX BLP 0 connector. 0 TBX DES 6pp: distributed discrete output TBX base units, shared. TBX DSS 6pp: distributed discrete output TBX base units, shared with TBX CBS 00 cache/cable. 2 70 FNT 0 00: Fipio communication module for Momentum base unit with TSX FPP ACC2 connector. 70 ADI/AAI/ADMppp: discrete or analog I/O Momentum base unit. ABE 7ACC/0: Telefast 2 sub-bases for redundant I/O. ABE 7p6ppp: Telefast 2 connection sub-bases. 6 LA DT2U: time-delay relay designed to desynchronise starting of the Normal PLC and the Backup PLC during simultaneous power-up. 7 TSX SCP : type III PCMCIA card for Modbus Slave communication. 8 90 NTW 000pp: preformed connection cable with RJ connector, for interconnecting TSX ETY 0 modules (shielded twisted pair). 9 TSXFPCAp00: Fipio bus trunk cable, shielded twisted pair. 20 TSX CDPp: preformed connection cable with HE 0 connector (length = 0.,, 2,, or m). 2 ABF H20H008: preformed connection cable with HE 0 connector (length = 0.08 m).. References: page /66 /67

Contents - Communication Selectionguide:networks,busesandseriallinks...page/2. - Ethernet TCP/IP network - Transparent Ready b Architectures...page /8 b Embedded Web servers v Presentation...page /0 v Standard Web server...page /2 v FactoryCast Web server...page / v FactoryCast HMI Web server...page /6 b Ethernet TCP/IP communication services v Presentation...page /22 v Standard Ethernet services....page /2 v I/O Scanning service....page /26 v FDR replacement service for faulty devices...page /27 v Global Data service....page /28 v NTP time synchronization service (Unity Pro)...page /29 v SMTP electronic mail notification service (Unity Pro)...page /0 v SNMP service protocol...page / v TCP Open optional service...page /2 b Performances...page / b Processors with integrated Ethernet port and Ethernet modules...page/8 b Ethernet infrastructure ConneXium wiring system v Presentation, installation principles....page /0 v Hubs, transceivers, switches, gateways and cables....page /6.2 - CANopen machine bus b CANopen PCMCIA card...page /2. - AS-Interface sensor/actuator bus b AS-Interface master module...page /6 b Phaseo regulated power supplies for AS-Interface...page /60 /0

. - X-Way bus and networks b Communication architecture... page/66 b Fipio bus manager function..... page /70 b Fipio bus Agent function... page /7 b Fipwaynetwork... page /78 b Fipio/Fipwayoptictransceiver... page /82 b Fipio/Fipway wiring system... page/8 b Ethernet TCP/IP network (0BASE interface)... page/88. - Network and fieldbus b Modbus Plus network... page/90 b Profibus DP fieldbus... page/9 b INTERBUS fieldbus... page/96.6 - Serial links b Modbus SL serial link... page /00 b Uni-Telway serial link.... page /0 b Jnet serial link... page /08 b Asynchronous serial links... page /0 b Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports... page /2 /

Selection guide platform Ethernet CPUs and modules Transparent Ready Applications Network type Processors with built-in TCP/IP Ethernet port (heterogeneous industrial local area network) Type of network Ethernet TCP/IP Structure Physical interface 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX (RJ) Method of access CSMA-CD Data rate 0/00 Mbit/s Medium Double twisted pair Fiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system Configuration Maximal number of devices Maximum of 6 stations per network Maximum length 00 m max. between hub and terminal device Number of networks/station 0 () 2 () () Other built-in port Fipio bus manager function Fipio bus manager function Basic services Services TCP/IP Uni-TE/Modbus message handling Services X-Way Inter-network X-Way routing, X-Way/Uni-Telway routing, module diagnostics Ethway Embedded Web serverservices Basic services "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics "Data Editor" access to PLC variables and data FactoryCast services Factory Cast HMI services Transparent Ready communication services I/O Scanning (6 stations) Global Data Network management (SNMP) FDR server for automatic reconfiguration (BOOTP/DHCP protocols) Type of processor Module format Double format processor Type of module TSX P7 6M TSX P7 262M TSX P7 26M TSX P7 282M TSX P7 62M TSX P7 6M TSX P7 82M TSX P7 6M TSX P7 6M Page /8 () Excluding embedded Ethernet port. /2

Ethernet TCP/IP modules (heterogeneous industrial local area network) 0BASE (AUI), 0BASE-T (RJ) 0BASE-T, 00BASE-TX (RJ) CSMA-CD 0 Mbit/s 0/00 Mbit/s Triaxial cable or double twisted pair Fiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system Double twisted pair Fiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system to depending on processor or slot-plc used Uni-TE message handling, common words, application to application "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics "Data Editor" access to PLC variables and data Alarms viewer Graphic Data Editor Display of user Web pages (. Mb available) Alarms viewer alarm display Graphic Data Editor graphic object editor Display of user Web pages (8 Mb available) FactoryCast HMI services (2) I/O Scanning (6 stations) Global Data FDR server for automatic reconfiguration (BOOTP/DHCP) TCP Open TCP Open All types of Premium processors TSX P7 p/7 2p/7 p/7 p and Atrium slot-plc T PCX/TSX PCI 7 2p/7 p Standard format module TSX ETY 0 TSX ETY 0 WS TSX ETY 0 TSX ETY 0 TSX WMY 00 :9 /9 (2) FactoryCast HMI services : HMI database, E.mail with automatic sending on events, interpreted math and logic functions, connection to relational databases and simulator tool. /

Selection guide (continued) platform Network and bus modules Applications Local area network conforming to Modbus Plus standard Local area network conforming to Fip Type of network or bus Modbus Plus Fipway Structure Physical interface Modbus Plus standard Fip standard Method of access Rotating token Bus managed by bus arbitrator Data rate Mbit/s Mbit/s Medium Twisted pair Twisted shielded pair Fibre optic via transceivers or repeaters Configuration Maximal number of devices 2 per segment 6 on all segments 2 per segment 28 on all segments Maximal length 0 m per segment 800 m with repeaters 000 m per segment 000 m maxi with repeaters Number of links/station max. to depending on the model of processeur Services Message handling - Write/read varaibles - Global database - Peer Cop service -Uni-TE - COM/shared table - Application-to-application - Telegram Type of processor All type of Premium processor and Atrium slot-plc Nature of module PCMCIA type III card on processor/slot-plc PCMCIA type III card on processor/slot-plc and on TSX SCY 260 module Type of module TSX MBP 00 TSX FPP 20 Pages /9 /79 /

CAN fieldbus Open industrial sensor/actuator bus conforming to AS-Interface standard Modbus open industrial bus Bus CANopen V.02 AS-Interface Modbus ISO 898 V2 AS-Interface standard RS 22D RS 8 isolated 20 ma CL RS 8 isolated CSMA/CA, multi-master Master/slave Master/slave 20 Kbit/s... Mbit/s according to distance 67 Kbit/s 9.2 Kbit/s max. Twisted shielded pair 2-wire AS-Interface cable Twisted shielded pair 27 slaves + discrete, analog or security devices 2 devices max. 8 slave addresses max. 2 devices max. 27 slave addresses max. From20m(Mbit/s) 200m(20Kbit/s) 00 m 200 m with repeaters m in RS 22D 000 m in RS 8 00 m in 20 ma CL or intégrated link max. 2 to 8 depending on the model of processor According to power consumption (see page 9/2) 00 m - Implicit PDO exchange - Explicit SDO exchange or CAN function block - Explicit PDU CAN exchange Transparency of exchanges with sensor/actuator devices Modbus master/slace RTU or ASCII Modbus functions (read/write bits and words, diagnostic ) All type of Premium processor (except TSX P7 /) and Atrium slot-plc All type of Premium processor and Atrium slot-plc PCMCIA type III card on processor/slot-plc Standard format module PCMCIA type III card inserted on () Standard format module TSX CPP 0 TSX SAY 000 TSX SCP p (2) TSX SCY 60 built-in link TSX SCY 260 / /7 /00 () Premium processor/atrium slot-plc and TSX SCY 260 communication module. (2) At the end of reference, replace p by : RS 22D, by 2: 20mACLorby: isolatedrs8. /

Selection guide (continued) platform Network, bus and serial link modules Applications Local area network conforming to Fip Uni-Telway multicomponent industrial bus 2 2 Type of network or bus Fipio (Agent) Fipio (gestionnaire de bus) Bus Uni-Telway Structure Physical interface Fip standard RS 8 non-isolated RS 8 isolated Method of access Bus managed by bus arbitrator Master/slave Data rate Mbit/s 9,2 Kbit/s max. () Medium Twisted shielded pair Fibre optic via transceivers or repeaters Twisted shielded pair Configuration Maximal number of devices 2 per segment, 28 on all segments (limited to 6 with TSX P7 M processor ) Maximal length From 000 m to 000 m (depending on the medium use) with repeaters (excluding programming terminal) 28, (96 slaves addresses max.) 0 m 000 m min20macl Number of links/station max. max. According to power Services Message handling -Uni-TE - Periodic data exchange - Application-to-application - Transparent exchange of remote I/O - Uni-TE Client/Server 20 bytes (28 bytes on - Application-to-application 20 bytes (28 bytes - Transparency of all devices on X-Way architecture Type of processors All type of Premium processor and Atrium slot-plc TSX P7 p/pm TSX P7 p82m T PCX 7 M TSX PCI 7 M All type of Premium processor and Atrium slot-plc Nature of module PCMCIA type III card on processor or slot-plc Built-in on the processor or slot-plc Uni-Telway built-in link Standard format module Type of module TSX FPP 0 2 Built-in link AUX 2 on processor terminal port TSX SCY 260 Pages /7 /7 /0 /6

Jnet proprietary industrial local network INTERBUS industrial fieldbus Profibus industrial fieldbus Jnet INTERBUS Profibus DP RS 22 RS 8 isolated 20 ma CL RS 8 isolated 20 ma CL RS 8 isolated RS 8 Rotating token Master/slave generation Master 9,2 Kbit/s 00 Kbit/s 9,6 Kbit/s...2 Mbit/s according to lenghtofbus Twisted shielded pair Twisted shielded pair, Fiber optic, infra-red... Twisted shielded pair, Fiber optic or infra-red 2inRS22D, 28 in RS 8, 6 in 20 ma CL 2 (6 if SMC PLC in the network) 2 slaves max. with 2 bus terminal blocks max. 00 m 200 m depending on network topology 26 slaves 00 m max. (inter-station bus) 200 m (9,6 Kbit/s), 800 m with repeaters 00 m (2 Mbit/s), 00 m with repeaters consumption(see page 900/2) maxi ou 2 depending on the type of Premium processor/atrium slot-plc terminal port) on terminal port) via the master Shared table pwith a total of 28 words (6 words if SMC PLC in the network) - Data process implicit exchange - Pre-processing - Logical addressing - Segmentation - Read/write access for DP slave I/O data - Data transfer for slave diagnostics - Parametering and monitoring requests - Inter-master dialog not supported All type of Premium processor(except TSX 7 p) and Atrium slot-plc PCMCIA type III card on processor or slot-plc and on TSX SCY 260 module PCMCIA type III card on TSX SCY 260 module Standard format module PC card on ISA bus Standard format module TSX SCP p () TSX JNP 2 TSX JNP TSX IBY 00 TSX IBX 00 TSX PBY 00 /07 /97 /9 () At the end of reference, replace p by : RS 22D, by 2: 20mACLorby: isolatedrs8. /7

Architecture platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Logical Ethernet communication architecture Company Intranet Internet Site Site 2 Enterprise MES ERP Site Unix Windows Linux Factory HMI + SCADA Workshop Industrial PC Quantum Quantum Quantum ETHERNET TCP/IP Premium. Dialog terminal Quantum PLC Momentum ME Distributed I/O Robot Gateway Servodrive Inputs/outputs Workshop Workshop 2 MES: Manufacturing Execution System (production management system) ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning (integrated management software packages) HMI/SCADA: Human/Machine Interface/Supervision Control And Data Acquisition Gateway: Bridge to sensor/actuator bus, to installed base network, field bus, etc. /8

Architecture (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Physical Ethernet communication architecture Router Site Router WAN Provider Specialized link Frame Relay ATM Internet Provider Public telecommunications network, ADSL Site Site 2 Router Firewall RAS Switches (VLAN) or routers (max. 0 switches) Switch Switch Switch Redundant optical ring ERP 00BASE-FX Full Duplex Switch Half Duplex,00 m max. MES Collision domain 2 Switch 00 m max. 00 m max. 00 m max. Hub Fiber optics Quantum Premium Quantum 00BASE-TX Hub Hub Transceiver Momentum ME. Third-party device Hub Gateway 20 m maximum Magelis ipc VijeoLook Robot 00 m max. TSX Micro Collision domain Momentum 00 m max. ATV8 Premium AS-Interface bus Collision domain () () In general, several collision domains should be defined in order to increase the architecture surface and improve performance. See pages / to /. /9

Presentation platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers Presentation FactoryCast HMI Web server user FactoryCast Web server In line with the Transparent Ready approach, TSX Micro, Premium, Quantum, Momentum, Advantys STB distributed I/O and ATV drive automation platforms provide transparent access to data in realtime using Web-based technologies via their Ethernet TCP/IP or FactoryCast communication module. The Transparent Ready communication modules in automation platforms integrate Ethernet TCP/IP services (Modbus TCP/IP messaging, SNMP network management functions, etc.) and provide the following Web functions: b Standard Web server b FactoryCast Web server b FactoryCast HMI Web service. Standard Web server Ethernet TCP/IP PLC module services Standard Web server Standard Web services can be used to execute diagnostic and maintenance functions on automation system installations locally or remotely using a simple Internet browser: b PLC system and I/O module diagnostics, PLC error display ( Rack Viewer pages ready to use) b Display and adjustment of PLC variables ( Data Editor pages ready to use) The embedded Web server is a realtime PLC data server. All the data can be presented in the form of standard Web pages in HTML format and can therefore be accessed using any Internet browser that supports the integrated Java code. The standard functions provided by the Web server are supplied ready to use and therefore do not require any programming at either PLC level or at the level of the PC device supporting the Internet browser. FactoryCast Web server In addition to providing standard Web services, the FactoryCast Web server can be used to control and monitor automation system installations both locally and remotely. The following functions are available: b Management of system alarms and PLC application with partial or global acknowledgment ( ready to use pages for the Alarm Viewer function) b Application graphics diagnostics (customized graphical views created by the user using the Graphic Data Editor function) b Graphics control via animated Web pages created by the user and stored in the FactoryCast module FactoryCast Web servers can also be used to customize control, diagnostics and maintenance interfaces via user-defined Web pages and Web pages transferred to the module using FactoryCast configuration software (maximum available memory required is 8 Mb). FactoryCast HMI Web server In addition to the FactoryCast Web functions, the FactoryCast HMI Web server provides HMI Web functions, which are executed in the module itself: b Realtime HMI database management, independent of the PLC processor b Arithmetic and logical calculations based on HMI data b Connectivity with relational databases b Transmission of electronic messages (e-mail) FactoryCast HMI is an active Web server, which can be used to execute HMI functions integrated in a PLC module. This eliminates the need for communication via polling to update the HMI/SCADA database. In FactoryCast HMI modules, the HMI functions are executed without affecting the PLC application program and therefore the cycle time. /0

Selection platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers Selection of Telemecanique Transparent Ready modules () Products Reference Web server integrated Standard Class B20 Quantum automation Processors 0 CPU 6 0 platform 0 CPU 6 60 FactoryCast Class C20/C0 FactoryCast HMI Class D0 Modules 0 NOE 77 0 0NOE77 0 NWM 00 00 Premium automation platform Processors TSX P7 262 M TSX P7 282 M TSX P7 62 M TSX P7 82 M TSX P7 6 M TSX P7 26 M TSX P7 6 M TSX P7 6 M TSX P7 6 M Modules TSX ETY 0 TSX ETY 0WS TSX ETY 0 TSX WMY 00. TSX Micro automation platform Modules TSX ETZ 0 TSX ETZ 0 Momentum automation platform ME processors 7 CCC 960 20 7 CCC 960 0 7 CCC 980 20 7 CCC 980 0 Modules 70 ENT 0 0 70 ENT 0 02 Advantys STB distributed I/O Altivar ATV 8/8 variable speed drive Network interface module Card STB NIP 222 VW A80 FactoryCast is a range of PLC modules associated with their configuration software and combines the following features: b Realtime communication functions based on Ethernet TCP/IP b Predefined Web pages, which enable advanced installation diagnostics b The capacity to store dynamic user-defined Web pages () Electrical Distribution products of Merlin Gerin. /

Functions platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, standard Web services Standard Web services Remote Web clients Thin Client PC Web client Internet Magelis Smart ipc Firewall Intranet Thin Client Web client Premium + Web server TSX Micro + Web server Quantum + Web server. Rack Viewer and Data Editor functions are supported by the Ethernet TCP/IP modules of the following: b TSX Micro platform b Premium platform b Quantum platform b Momentum platform b Advantys STB distributed I/Os b FactoryCast modules See module reference on page /7. These functions can be accessed using a standard Internet browser connected to the network. They are ready to use and secure (password-protected). They can be used locally or remotely via: b Intranet b A modem and RAS server b Internet. /2

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, standard Web services Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics function The Rack Viewer function (PLC rack display) can be used for PLC system and I/O diagnostics. It displays the following in realtime: b LED status on the front panel of the PLC b The PLC version b The hardware configuration of the PLC including the status of the system bits and words b Detailed diagnostics of all I/O module channels or application-specific channels in the configuration Quantum hardware configuration Premium main rack hardware configuration Data Editor read/write function for PLC data and variables The Data Editor function can be used to create tables of animated variables for realtime read/write access to lists of PLC data. The variables to be displayed can be entered and displayed either symbolically (S_Pump 2) or by their address (%MW99). These variables only support write access if this option has been enabled using the FactoryCast configuration software. A second password must be entered and verified when writing a value to a variable. Various animation tables containing specific application variables to be monitored or modified can be created by the user and saved in the Ethernet TCP/IP module.. Variables table /

Functions platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast Web server FactoryCast Web server Remote Web client Modem + RAS server Magelis Smart ipc Firewall Internet Intranet Thin Client Web client Premium + Web server Quantum + Web server TSX Micro + Web server. In addition to standard Web services, FactoryCast modules (see selection table on page /) support the following functions: b Alarm Viewer b Creation and display of graphical views via an online graphics editor (Graphic Data Editor supplied) b Hosting and display of Web pages created by the user FactoryCast configuration software (supplied with FactoryCast modules) is required for the last 2 functions. AlarmViewerfunction Alarm Viewer is a ready-to-use password-protected function. Based on the diagnostics buffer managed in the PLCs (specific memory area used to store all diagnostic events), this function is available with the Premium/Atrium platforms (with PL7 or Unity software) and the Quantum platform (with Unity software). This function can be used to process alarms (display, acknowledgment and deletion) managed at PLC level by the system or using diagnostic function blocks known as DFBs (system-specific diagnostic function blocks and application-specific diagnostic function blocks created by the user). AlarmViewerpage The diagnostics viewer is a Web page comprising a list of messages, which displays the following information for each alarm: b Its state b The type of associated diagnostic function block (DFB) b Its geographical area b The dates and times of the occurrence/removal of a fault. /

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast Web server FactoryCast Web server (continued) Graphic Data Editor function This function can be used to create graphical views online, animated by PLC variables. These views are created using a library of graphic objects, which are predefined by simple copy/paste operations. The object parameters are set according to user requirements (color, PLC variables, labels, etc.). The graphic objects provided, which are the basic elements of the view, are as follows: b Analog and digital indicators b Horizontal and vertical bar charts b Boxes for displaying messages and entering values b Pushbutton boxes b Functions for recording trends b etc. The views created can be saved in the FactoryCast modules. These customized graphic objects can be reused in user Web pages that have been created using standard software for editing HTML pages. Function for hosting and displaying user Web pages In addition, FactoryCast Web modules have 8 Mbytes of memory (), whichis accessed in the same way as a hard drive and can be used to host user-defined Web pages. These Web pages can be created using any standard tool (2) that enables creation and editing in HTML format. These pages can be enhanced by inserting animated graphic objects linked to PLC variables. These animated objects are provided in the Graphic Data Editor supplied with FactoryCast. The Web pages created can be used, for example, to: b Display and modify all PLC variables in realtime b Create hyperlinks to other external Web servers (documentation, suppliers, etc.) This function is particularly suitable for creating graphic screens used for the following purposes: b Display, monitoring, diagnostics b Generation of realtime production reports b Maintenance help b Operator guides. Configuration software for FactoryCast Web servers The configuration software for FactoryCast Web servers is supplied on CD-Rom with every FactoryCast module (TSX Micro, Premium or Quantum). The software is used for the configuration and administration of the Web server embedded in these modules. The software is compatible with Windows 9/98, Windows 2000, Windows NT.0 and Windows XP operating systems. It offers the following functions: b Access security management b Definition of user names and associated passwords for accessing Web pages b Definition of access to variables authorized for modification b Saving/restoration of an entire website b Transfer of Web pages created locally by the user on their PC workstation to the FactoryCast module and vice versa. () Memory is not affected in the event of power outages or if the PLC is reinitialized. (2) For example, Microsoft FrontPage. /

Presentation platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast HMI Web server FactoryCast HMI Web services The FactoryCast HMI range comprises two Web server modules embedded in the PLC (one for the Premium platform and one for the Quantum platform) and FactoryCast HMI application development software (to be ordered separately). These modules have the same Web functions as FactoryCast modules, namely: b Ethernet TCP/IP communication functions: v TCP/IP messaging service with Modbus TCP and Uni-TE TCP protocols v SNMP agent for standardized network management, which supports standard MIB II and private Transparent Ready MIB. b Standard Web and FactoryCast services: v Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics functions, see page /, v Data Editor read/write functions for PLC variables, see page /, v Alarm Viewer alarm display functions, see page /, v Graphic Data Editor online graphical editor functions, see page /, v Function for hosting and displaying user Web pages, see page /. FactoryCast HMI modules also provide the following specialized HMI Web services: b Realtime database management specific to the module, combining PLC data acquisition and the management of local internal variables. b Arithmetic and logical calculations for pre-processing data. b E-mail with automatic transmission triggered by a specific process event.. b Connection to the SQL Server, MySQL and Oracle relational databases for archiving data for tracking or logging. By simply setting parameters, the FactoryCast HMI application development software can be used to set up these functions in an intuitive and user-friendly way. A simulation mode, which is integrated in the software, can be used to test the operation of the FactoryCast HMI application without a module and without the need for a physical connection to a PLC, thereby simplifying debugging. Functions: Pages / to /6 Description: Page /7 Characteristics: Page /7 References: Page /7 /6

Presentation (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast HMI Web server Architectures FactoryCast HMI Web servers can be integrated in various architectures: b Installations that require a flexible and cost-effective HMI solution. b Hybrid architectures supplementing conventional SCADA systems. b Architectures where a direct link is required between automation systems and information management levels (IT link). Relational database Thin Client Flexible Web HMI solution Ethernet TCP/IP IPC The use of Web-based technologies means that FactoryCast HMI can replace conventional HMI or SCADA solutions in applications where architectures require a flexible multistation HMI, thus providing a temporary nomadic remote control function. Premium + Web server Quantum + Web server These architectures consist of: b Several PLCs networked on Ethernet, which have FactoryCast HMI Web server modules. b One or more PC terminals with Thin Client interface equipped with a simple Web browser. b If necessary, a relational database in which FactoryCast HMI can archive data directly from the automation system. FactoryCast HMI modules read PLC data and execute HMI services (E-mail, interpreted calculations, connection to relational databases, updating Web pages) at source in the PLC, without affecting the PLC program or the scan time. Premium TSX Micro This solution provides: b A reliable HMI application, which is executed at source in a robust PLC device. b An integrated multistation interface and remote access that is easy and cost-effective to set up ( Thin Client terminal). b An HMI application that is easy to maintain (the application is housed in a single location on the server side). b Preventive maintenance via E-mail. b Greater availability of data archiving done from source.. Nomad HMI Hybrid architectures SCADA Vijeo Look MIS IT links In this type of architecture, FactoryCast HMI supplements conventional SCADA systems. SCADA Vijeo Look or Monitor Pro software meets the requirement for centralizing information for global supervision from a central site. Intranet Combining a FactoryCast HMI solution and a conventional SCADA solution enables: b Simplification of the SCADA application by locating some of the SCADA processing at source, at PLC level. b Increased availability of the traceability function due to the direct connection between FactoryCast HMI modules and relational databases. b Powerful ready to use remote diagnostics capacities. b Nomadic stations to be connected to the Intranet or Internet via Thin Client PC or PDA devices. Premium + Web server Quantum + Web server Functions: Pages / to /6 Description: Page /7 Characteristics: Page /7 References: Page /7 /7

Functions platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast HMI Web server MIS IT links Nomad HMI Intranet Direct links with the information management levels In this type of architecture FactoryCast HMI eliminates the need for intermediate devices (gateways), which are expensive to install and maintain, by establishing a direct link between the automation levels and the global information management levels (MES, ERP, etc). The PLC directly archives information from the automation system in relational databases, which allows a collaborative automation system to be set up, making it easier to share data in real time. This solution results in: b Simplified architectures b Lower installation, development and maintenance costs b Increased reliability of information (the data is collected at source) b Greater availability of data archiving Premium + Web server Quantum + Web server Relational database Database connection PLC data FactoryCast HMI realtime database Thin Client Magelis Smart ipc Web page display Interpreted calculations Specialized HMI services PLC acquisition and realtime database With an internal architecture similar to that of an HMI/SCADA system, FactoryCast HMI modules manage their own variable database in realtime, independently of the PLC program. It is this variable database that is used to execute various functions, including internal processing, archiving, alarm, E-mail, etc. Variables in this realtime database are updated using the automation system data acquisition service. This service becomes operational once the following parameters have been set in the FactoryCast HMI software: b Direct import of PLC variable/symbol databases (no double entry). b Definition of the frequency of acquisition (period at which this variable is updated).. Transmission of E-mail Note: A FactoryCast HMI application running in a Premium configured FactoryCast HMI module can access also the remote PLC variables in the architecture via a transparent network (X-Way/Uni-TE transparent protocols). FactoryCast HMI modules Characteristics: b Maximum number of I/O variables per application: 000 variables from PLCs b Maximum number of internal variables per application: 00 b Acquisition frequency: 00 ms, minimum Description: Page /7 /8 Characteristics: Page /7 References: Page /7

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast HMI Web server Specialized HMI services (continued) E-mail transmission The FactoryCast HMI module can, on a specific event, send E-mail completely autonomously to a predefined list of E-mail addresses. This function is executed independently of the PLC program. The event that triggers the E-mail may be associated with the following: b A PLC variable (I/O, internal variable) b An alarm, a threshold overshoot b A machine or process state b An operator action, etc. When an E-mail is sent to a destination E-mail address, it must pass through an SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server. This server receives the E-mail and waits for the recipient to acknowledge it. The E-mail service is compatible with all SMTP servers. A return address can be defined should delivery to the destination address fail. Characteristics: b Configuration of the SMTP server: Compatible with all SMTP servers b Maximum number of E-mail: 00 b Contents of E-mail messages: Free text with embedded dynamic variable values (from the PLC) and hypertext links (unlimited) Connection to relational databases The FactoryCast HMI module can be connected directly and completely autonomously to the following remote relational databases: b SQL Server b MySQL b Oracle This connection enables all internal or process data to be archived so that it can be logged and traced. The data can be archived (written) periodically and/or on a specific event. These variables can either be from PLCs (I/O bits, internal bits, internal words and registers) or local to the module. The FactoryCast HMI Roll Over function checks the size of tables by managing the maximum number of records. This circular data archiving function automatically deletes the oldest data and can be accessed by simply setting parameters in the FactoryCast HMI software.. Characteristics: b Number of databases that can be connected: b Number of tables that can be written per database: 0, maximum b Number of columns per table: 0, maximum b Type of database supported: Oracle, SQL Server and MySQL b Automatic table creation: The FactoryCast HMI server automatically creates a table in the database if one does not already exist Calculation functions The FactoryCast HMI server can carry out various arithmetic and logical operations on a combination of variables from the HMI database and does this independently of the PLC processor. These calculations include, for example, scaling, formatting, logic processing for event triggering, etc. This calculation function is provided in the form of spreadsheets where the formulae are defined in cells. The spreadsheets are interpreted and processed by the server. The result of each formula is associated with a new internal variable. The processing of each spreadsheet is initiated by a trigger. Presentation: Pages /2 to / Description: Page /7 Characteristics: Page /7 References: Page /7 /9

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast HMI Web server FactoryCast HMI application development software FactoryCast HMI application development software, referenced TLX CD FCHMI VM, provides multiproject management and complete control of FactoryCast HMI applications, during both the development and the debugging phases, thanks to the online mode and simulation mode (operational when the system is offline) options. This software enables the intuitive and user-friendly setup of HMI functions by simply setting parameters using a tree structure of the application and can be used for complete management of the Web site: b Setting parameters for HMI functions: v Configuration of PLC interfaces: Import symbol databases and set parameters for the acquisition period v Configuration of spreadsheets v Configuration of E-mail v Configuration of connections to databases. b Management of the Web site: v Management of the Web site tree structure (creation/deletion of HTML folders and files) v Management of default Web site pages v Management of user Web site pages () v Graphic object editor for animating Web pages v Launch of the system editor for HTML pages (FrontPage or similar) v Up/downloading/comparison of Web pages in online mode v Debugging of Web pages in online mode or in simulation mode (including animations and Java beans) b Simulation mode The application and the Web site (including animations and Java beans) can be debugged in either online or simulation mode, which enables operation to be tested without a FactoryCast HMI module and without a physical connection to a PLC, thus simplifying debugging. An integrated graphics editor in the FactoryCast HMI software can be used to easily customize the following graphic objects: bar charts, gauges, LEDs, curves, cursors, operator input fields, alphanumeric display fields, buttons, etc. User Web pages are created graphically using an external HTML editor (FrontPage or similar, not supplied). FactoryCast HMI includes a plug-in for FrontPage 2000. This plug-in makes it easier to set up animations, which enable PLC variables to be accessed in realtime in the HTML pages created by the user. They are created in the HTML editor by simply inserting customized graphic objects (FactoryCast Java beans). () Creation of user Web pages: User Web pages created in the FactoryCast HMI environment are actual animated supervision screens and can be used to monitor your process. Based on HMI Web technology, they enable realtime access to PLC variables thanks to the FactoryCast graphic objects library (FactoryCast Java beans). Presentation: Pages /2 to / Description: Page /7 Characteristics: Page /7 References: Page /7 /20

Description, characteristics, references platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast HMI Web server Description 2 The TSX WMY 00 (for Premium platform) and 0 NWM 00 00 (for Quantum platform) modules are equipped with the following on the front panel: A display block, which indicates the module status and the transmission status of the Ethernet TCP/IP network. 2 An RJ connector (with Premium/Quantum) and an MTRJ connector for a 00BASE-FX interface (with Quantum). TSX WMY 00 To be ordered separately: Accessories and connecting cables, see Ethernet ConneXium wiring system (see page /0). Characteristics 0NWM0000 FactoryCast HMI module type TSX WMY 00 0 NWM 00 00 Modicon automation platform Premium Quantum Communication services Interface 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX 00BASE-TX and 00BASE-FX Connection type Point-to-point connection (via a standard RJ connector), which enables the formation of a (0BASE-T/00BASE-TX) star network (the stations are linked to ConneXium hubs or switches). Number of stations 6 stations maximum per network Transmission speed 0/00 Mbit/s with automatic speed recognition Ethernet communication services Network management SNMP agent, supports standard MIB II and private Transparent Ready MIB TCP/IP services Uni-TE v Client/server mode v Client/server requests of 26 bytes (synchronous mode) v Client/server requests of K byte (asynchronous mode) Modbus v Client/server mode v Asynchronous requests of 26 bytes X-Way services v X-Way inter-network routing v X-Way/Uni-Telway routing v Module diagnostics Web server services Embedded Web server Standard services v Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics v Data Editor access to PLC data and variables FactoryCast services v Alarm Viewer alarm display v Graphic Data Editor graphic object editor v Display of user Web pages (8 Mb available) FactoryCast HMI services v HMI database (000 variables, maximum) v E-mail transmission (00, maximum) v Connection to SQL Server, MySQL and Oracle databases: connection to databases max., 0 tables maximum in write mode per database; v Interpreted arithmetic and logical calculations v Simulator for debugging the HMI application offline. References TSX WMY 00 Ethernet TCP/IP Transparent Ready modules Embedded Web server FactoryCast HMI Name and description FactoryCast HMI Premium module FactoryCast HMI Quantum module Speed Reference Weight kg 0/00 Mbit/s TSX WMY 00 0.0 00 Mbit/s 0 NWM 00 00 - FactoryCast HMI installation software (to be ordered separately) Name and description Use Operating system Reference Multilingual FactoryCast HMI () Development and Windows 2000, debugging of the HMI Windows XP application Weight kg TLX CD FCHMI VM 0.0 () Includes documentation in electronic format. 0 NWM 00 00 Presentation: Pages /2 to / Functions: Pages / to /6 /2

Presentation platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Presentation Transparent Ready products allow transparent communication on a single Ethernet TCP/IP network. Services Network management Time synchronization Global Data Automatic FDR reconfiguration Web server E-mail TCP Open Message handling Modbus I/O Scanning Applications Transport Link Physical SNMP NTP RTPS DHCP TFTP FTP HTTP SMTP Modbus UDP TCP IP Ethernet 802. and Ethernet II MIB Transparent Ready. In addition to universal Ethernet services (HTTP, BOOTP/DHCP, FTP, etc), the Transparent Ready device communication services designed for use in automation applications include: b Modbus TCP messaging for class 0, 20 or 0 devices. b I/O Scanning service for class 0 devices. b FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) for class 0, 20 or 0 devices. b SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) network administration for class 20 or 0 devices. b Global Data, for class 0 devices. b Pass band management for class 0 devices (see performance levels on pages / to /7). b NTP (Network Time Protocol) time synchronization for class 0 devices. b Notification of SMTP events via E-mail for class 0 devices. b TCP Open, optional, for class 0 devices. The following pages present the various options available through all of these services in order to facilitate the optimum choice of solutions when defining a system integrating Transparent Ready devices. /22

Functions platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Functions Standard Ethernet services HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol (RFC9) The HTTP protocol (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) is used for transmitting Web pages between a server and a browser. HTTP has been used on the Web since 990. Web servers embedded into Ethernet TF devices are at the heart of the Transparent Ready concept, and are used to provide easy access to devices anywhere in the world from a standard browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. BOOTP/DHCP (RFC) BOOTP/DHCP is used to automatically provide the devices with the IP parameters. This avoids having to manage the addresses of each device individually. Management is instead performed in a dedicated IP address server. DHCP protocol (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used to automatically assign the devices their configuration parameters. DHCP is an extension of BOOTP. DHCP protocol is made up of 2 components: b One for providing the IP network address, b One for providing the IP parameters specific to the device from a DHCP server. Telemecanique devices can be: b BOOTP clients allowing automatic recovery of an IP address from a server, b BOOTP servers enabling a device to distribute IP addresses to the network stations. Telemecanique uses standard BOOTP/DHCP protocols for its Faulty Device Replacement service (FDR). FTP File Transfer Protocol (RFCs 99, 2228, et 260) File Transfer Protocol (FTP) provides basic file sharing elements. Many systems use FTP protocol to exchange files between devices. Transparent Ready devices implement FTP for transferring certain data to or from devices, in particular when downloading firmware or user Web pages.. /2

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Functions (continued) Standard Ethernet services (continued) NTP Network Time Protocol (RFC 0) NTP (Network Time Protocol) is used to synchronize the time of a client or server device from a time server. Depending on the network used, it provides the following time precisions based on the UTC: b Several milliseconds on a local area network (LAN). b Several tens of milliseconds on a wide area network (WAN). SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (RFC 082) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is an E-mail transmission service. It is used to send E-mail between a sender and a recipient via an SMTP E-mail server. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (RFCs, 6 et 7) The Internet community developed standard SNMP for managing the different components of a network through a single system. The network management system can exchange data with SNMP agent devices. This function enables the manager to view the status of the network and devices, modify their configuration and feed back alarms in the event of failure. Transparent Ready devices are SNMP-compatible and can be integrated naturally in a network managed via SNMP. COM/DCOM Distributed Component Object Model COM/DCOM (Distributed Component Object Model) or OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) is the name of the technology used in Windows components. This enables Windows applications to communicate transparently. These technologies are used in the OFS Data server software.. /2

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Modbus TCP/IP function codes dec hexa Bits access Read of n input bits 02 02 Read of n output bits 0 0 Exceptional read status 07 07 Write output bit 0 0 Write of n output bits 0F Read of input word 0 0 Read of n input words 0 0 Write output word 06 06 Write of n output words 6 0 Read device ID / 2B/0E Example of Modbus TCP/IP function codes supported for accessing data and diagnostics Functions (continued) Modbus communication standard Modbus, the industrial communication standard since 979, has been combined with Ethernet TCP/IP, which supports the Internet revolution, to make Modbus TCP/IP, a completely open Ethernet protocol. The development of a connection to Modbus TCP/IP requires no proprietary component or license purchase. This protocol may be easily combined with any device supporting a standard TCP/IP communication stack. Specifications can be obtained free of charge from the website: www.modbus-ida.org. Modbus TCP, simple and open The Modbus application layer is very simple and universally recognized. Thousands of manufacturers are already implementing this protocol. Many have already developed a Modbus TCP/IP connection and many products are currently available. The simplicity of Modbus TCP/IP enables any small field team, such as an I/O module, to communicate over Ethernet without the need for a powerful micro-processor or a lot of internal memory. Modbus TCP, high-performance Because of the simplicity of its protocol and the high speed of 00 M bits/s Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP delivers excellent performance. This means it is possible to use this type of network in real-time applications such as I/O Scanning. Modbus TCP/IP, one standard An identical application protocol is used for Modbus serial link, Modbus Plus or Modbus TCP. This therefore makes it possible to route messages from a network to another without changing protocol. As Modbus is implemented above the TCP/IP layer, users can also benefit from the IP routing which enables devices located anywhere in the world to communicate without having to worry about the distance between them. Schneider offers an entire range of gateways for interconnecting a Modbus TCP/IP network to already existing Modbus Plus or Modbus serial link networks. For further details, consult our regional sales office. The IANA institute (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) has assigned Schneider port TCP 02 (Well known port), which is reserved for the Modbus protocol. This protocol will shortly be also subject to an RFC (Request For Comments), documents which form standard references within the Internet community.. Modbus TCP/IP characteristics Maximum size of data: b Read: 2 words or registers. b Write: 00 words or registers. /2

INPUT A INPUT A OUTPUT + B OUTPUT + B Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Functions (continued) I/O Scanning service Word table Read Write Ethernet TCP/IP Input words Output words of devices. The I/O Scanning service can be used to manage the exchange of distributed I/Os on the Ethernet network after a simple configuration operation, with no need for special programming. The I/Os are scanned transparently by means of read/write requests according to the Modbus Master/Slave protocol on the TCP/IP profile. This principle of scanning via a standard protocol enables communication with any device which supports a Modbus server on TCP/IP. This service can be used to define: b An %MW word zone reserved for reading inputs. b An %MW word zone reserved for writing outputs. b Refresh periods independent of the PLC scan. During operation, the module: b Manages the TCP/IP connections with each of the distributed devices. b Scans the devices and copies the I/Os into the configured %MW word zone. b Feeds back status words so that correct operation of the service can be monitored from the PLC application. b Applies the preconfigured fallback values in the event of a communication problem. An offer of hardware and software products which enable the I/O Scanning protocol to be implemented on any type of product which can be connected to the Ethernet network (please consult: www.modbus-ida.org). Characteristics: b Each station can exchange a maximum of 20 words. b Maximum size in the PLC managing the service: v 2 K words %MW in inputs and 2 K words %MW in outputs with manager PLC (6 stations max.), v K words %MW in inputs and K words %MW in outputs with manager PLC (28 stations max.). I/O Scanning service diagnostics I/O Scanning service diagnostics can be performed in ways: b By the application program from a data field specific to the PLC. b From the debugging screen in the installation software. b From the PLC system diagnostics function viewed with the Internet browser on a PC station. /26

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Functions (continued) Replacement service for faulty devices (Faulty Device Replacement) The Faulty Device Replacement service uses the standard BOOTP, DHCP, file management and TFTP technologies with the objective of simplifying Ethernet device maintenance. It enables a faulty device to be replaced by a new product while guaranteeing its detection, reconfiguration, and automatic restart by the system, without difficult manual intervention. The principal steps are: b A device using the FDR service is faulty. b Another similar device is taken from the maintenance pool, preconfigured with the role_name (or identifier) of the device that is out of service, then reinstalled on the network. b The FDR server can be: v Premium processor with embedded Ethernet, v Quantum processor with embedded Ethernet, v Premium Ethernet module: TSX ETY, v Quantum Ethernet module: 0 NOE 77, detects the new addition, configures its IP address and transfers all configuration parameters to it. The substituted device verifies if all the parameters are indeed compatible with its own characteristics, then switches to operating mode.. /27

INPUT A INPUT A OUTPUT + B OUTPUT + B Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Functions (continued) Global Data service Ethernet TCP/IP Distribution group Data exchange of Ko max. IP multicast 29.2.2.2 The Global Data service ensures data exchanges in real time between stations belonging to the same distribution group. It is used to synchronize remote applications, or share a common database among several distributed applications. The exchanges are based on a standard producer/consumer protocol, guaranteeing optimal performance while maintaining a minimum network load. This RTPS (Real Time Publisher Subscriber) protocol is promoted by the IDA (Interface For Distributed Automation) organization, and has already been adopted as a standard by several manufacturers. IP multicast 29.2.2.20 Distribution group 2 Data exchange of Ko max.. Characteristics: A maximum of 6 stations can participate in Global Data within the same distribution group. Each station can: b Publish one 02-byte variable. The publication period can be configured from to n periods of the MAST task of the processor. b Subscribe to between and 6 variables. Validity for each variable is controlled by Health Status Bits, linked to a refresh timeout configurable between 0 ms and s. Access to a variable element is not possible. The total size of the subscribed variables reaches K contiguous bytes. In order to optimize Ethernet network performance further still, Global Data can be configured with the multicast filtering option, which together with switches in the ConneXium range, perform data broadcasting only on Ethernet ports, where there is a Global Data service subscriber station. If these switches are not used, Global Data is transmitted in multicast on all switch ports Global Data service diagnostics The diagnostics screens use a color code to show Global Data status: b Configured/not configured/faulty. b Published/subscribed. Unity Studio software suite: single Global Data entry point The Unity Studio software suite is the key component required on design office workstations used for designing and structuring distributed industrial automation projects. The Unity Studio Global Data view enables the definition of Global Data distribution groups and the configuration of settings for published and subscribed station variables. During generation at each station level, this setting configuration is saved automatically to station files, thereby ensuring: Editeur de Global Data b Guaranteed consistency of communication between the distributed applications in question. b Maximum productivity with respect to station configuration tasks. b Minimized risk of errors. /28

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Functions (continued) NTP time synchronization service Presentation Power supply Processor Internal clock Ethernet module (S)NTP client NTP request Ethernet network NTP server NTP response Premium/Quantum The time synchronization service is based on the NTP (Network Time Protocol) which is used to synchronize the time of a client or a server on Ethernet TCP/IP from a server or another reference time source (radio, satellite, etc). Operation Unity module and processor used Ethernet modules Ethernet modules with Unity processor TSX ETY 0 TSX ETY 0 TSX P7 02M TSX P7 pm TSX P7 2pM TSX P7 pm TSX P7 pm TSX P7 pm The Ethernet TCP/IP communication modules in the Modicon Quantum Unity V2 and Premium Unity V2 automation platforms have an NTP client component. These modules can connect to an NTP server using a client request (unicast), in order to update their local time. The module clock is updated periodically ( to 20 seconds) with an error of less than 0 ms for standard processors and less than ms for high performance processors. If the NTP server cannot be reached, the Ethernet TCP/IP module switches to a standby NTP server. Predicted typical time service precision Clock synchronisation () Event synchronisation Time stamping (2) ± ms typical ±0msmax. ± ms typical ± ms max. = Clock synchronisation precision + = Clock synchronisation precision +. 0NOE770 0NOE77 0 CPU 0 0 CPU 2U 0 CPU U ± ms typical ±0msmax. Fast task time + I/O time 0 CPU 6 0 0 CPU 6 60 0 CPU 67 60 ± ms typical ± ms max. I/O time () Time difference between field input and central NTP server. (2) Assuming input connected to the interrupt module. The PLC processor clock is therefore itself updated with a precision of ms for standard processors and ms for high performance processors. A function block is available for reading this clock. In each PLC application, events or variables can be time-stamped. The Ethernet module is configured via a Web page. The time zone can be configured. A time synchronization service (NTP) diagnostic Web page is also available. Information on the time synchronization service (NTP) is also available in the Transparent Ready private MIB, which can be accessed via the SNMP network management service (see above). /29

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Functions (continued) Electronic mail notification SMTP service Introduction This simple mail notification service is a programmed service that allows PLC applications to report by exception conditions monitored by the PLC. The automation controller can automatically and dynamically create electronic mail to alert specified users with data, alarms and events - whether the recipients are local or remote. Note: This service is available on the latest Premium and Quantum Ethernet modules & CPUs, when operating with Unity Pro software. A more comprehensive mail service, independent of the PLC application, is available on the FactoryCast HMI active web server modules (see page /). Usage A simple yet powerful mechanism is used. Predefined email headers are linked together with the body of the mail which is created dynamically from the latest information in the automation application. The user logic program can trigger the message based on a predefined event or condition. Using a function block, one of predefined headers is selected and an email message with variable information and text (up to a maximum of 20 bytes) is created and sent directly from the PLC. Each of the three mail headers contains these common predefined items email recipient list, sender name and subject. This information can be defined and updated by an authorized administrator using the configuration web pages.. Message creation and delivery The PLC application selects the appropriate header. The system architect may define the mail headers to indicate differing importance levels. For example : b Header could be URGENT problem reported by PLC 0, b Header 2 might be WARNING at substation 0, b Header could be INFO message from water system. Differing lists of recipients between the three headers help to ensure that the right information quickly flows to the right recipients. The application can then add pertinent information to the body of the mail message such as the specific device, process or location. Completed mail is then sent to an electronic mail server for expeditious distribution to the interested parties. These recipients could be engineers, managers, process owners etc. Security Each mail message can be protected by an optional login and password that is authenticated by the SMTP mail server. If, for additional security, the site s mail installation has changed the TCP port number from the default of 2, the port number can be changed in the PLC email configuration (via secured web page access). Configuration An authorized administrator can use a web page to easily configure the mail service. For each of the three mail headers, the sender; recipient list and subject message can be defined. The electronic mail server connection information such as IP address and security information can also be set from the web page. Diagnostics As all other Ethernet services in Premium and Quantum systems, the Mail Service has a Diagnostic Web page showing the complete, up to the second, status. Remote Monitoring These products provide diagnostic information for remote management applications following the SNMP network management standard. Information for the mail service is included in the Schneider Electric private MIB which is publicly available. /0

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Functions (continued) SNMP service protocol The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) protocol is used, from a network management station, to monitor and control all Ethernet architecture components and thus ensure rapid diagnostics if a problem occurs. It is used to: b Query devices such as computer stations, routers, switches, bridges or terminal devices (DTE) in order to view their status. b Obtain statistics for the network on which the devices are connected. This management software respects the traditional Client/Server model. However, in order to avoid confusion with other communication protocols using this terminology, we prefer to use the expression: b Network manager for the Client application running on the computer station. b SNMP agent for the server application that runs on the device. Transparent Factory can be managed by any SNMP network manager, including HP Openview or IBM Netview. Standard SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used to access configuration and management objects included in the MIB (Management Information Base) for the devices. These MIBs must comply with certain standards in order to be accessed by all managers on the market. However, depending on the device complexity, manufacturers can add certain objects to the private databases. The Transparent Factory private MIB includes management objects specific to the Telemecanique offer. These objects simplify installation, implementation, and maintenance for Transparent Factory products in an open environment using standard network management tools. The Transparent Factory products support 2 SNMP network management levels: b Standard MIB II, a first level of network management, can be accessed via this interface. It lets the manager identify the devices forming the architecture and retrieve general information on the configuration and operation of the Ethernet TCP/IP interfaces. b MIB Transparent Factory interface; management of the Transparent Factory devices is improved via this interface. This MIB includes a set of data that enables the network management system to supervise all the Transparent Factory services. The Transparent Factory private MIB can be downloaded from the Web server from any Ethernet Transparent Factory module in a PLC.. /

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready TCP Open optional service Presentation TSX ETY 0 WS/0 Premium platform Ethernet modules support a number of communication protocols based on the TCP/IP standard. Among these, the Modbus protocol has public specifications and its simplicity recommends it for the needs of communication with third-party devices. Ethernet TCP/IP profile Modbus protocol Direct Socket access (TCP Open) Modbus TCP IP ISO 8802.2-ISO 8802. ISO 8802. Ethernet 0/00 M bit/s. However, for certain applications, it may prove necessary to use other protocols. This is the case when, for example, users wish to integrate Premium platforms into existing architectures which use a particular communication protocol, possibly a proprietary one. To meet these needs for open access, 2 interface levels are included in the Telemecanique offer: b A library of basic functions, which can be used in C language, enables direct access to the socket interface on TCP. The user can thus create his own communication functions using SDKC development software and take advantage of the ease of use which this program offers in terms of development and debugging. Once generated, these function blocks are used in the application like any standard PL7 programming software function block. b A library of basic function blocks known as EFs, which can be used directly in the application programs with PL7 language. These are the same as functions developed in C language seen earlier, but are designed for use by non-computer specialists. These EF function blocks are not modifiable. Functions Operating in TCP connection client/server mode, the basic functions on the Berkeley socket interface enable: b Management of 6 connections on the Open profile out of a maximum of 2 b Creation of sockets and their attachment to any TCP port. b Switching of these sockets to "listen for a connection request from a remote client" mode. b Opening of a connection. b Transmission and reception of data on these connections (8 bytes max.). b Closing this connection. /2

Functions (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready TCP Open optional service (continued) Description The TCP Open offer consists of a CD-ROM containing the TCP/IP function libraries. Open access on TCP is only possible via TSX ETY 0WS () and TSX ETY 0 Ethernet modules. With open access on TCP, all the basic functions of these modules can be used. The TCP/IP TLX CD TCP 0M function library comprises: b The SDKC program enhancement library that provides access to the module TCP/IP socket functions b The user's manual in English (no printed version) b EF elementary communication function blocks (Socket/Bind/Listen/Accept/ Shutdown/Close/Send/Receive/Select/Set_Socket Option/Connect) for installation using PL7 software (version u V.) b Higher level EF function blocks, provided by way of example, which can perform more advanced functions such as the complete sequence for establishing or closing a connection, or sending or receiving data. The source files for all these EF blocks are also supplied b An example of a PL7 application communicating with a TELNET application on a PC If customised function blocks are needed both the SDKC program for C language TLX L SDKC PL7M (with PL7) or UNYSPUZUCD20E(with Unity Pro) and the library of function blocks TCP Open TLX CD TCPAE should be installed on the development station. Setup precautions The development of C language functions requires compliance with certain setup precautions: b To set up these services, the user should be familiar with the TCP/IP profile b In addition, since the SDKC program enables access to all the PLC internal resources, all the necessary precautions should be taken when developing EF communication blocks to avoid endangering the PL7 application, especially on the commonly fragile operating modes such as cold/warm restarts, response to a fault, etc b The user should also take care to maintain the requests from the different communication profiles at a level compatible with the performance required by the application b Finally, it is the responsibility of the client application software (PL7 or C program) to manage the operating modes for communication which may be specific to the application, for example the behavior if a remote device fails to respond or in the event of a break in connection. For these different reasons, we recommend that you consult your Regional Sales Office to ensure that your TCP protocol open access project is feasible. () Open access on TCP requires TSX ETY 0 WS modules, version u PV 0 and SV 2.9. In addition, it should be integrated on a configuration with a TSX P7 pp processor (or TSX P7 pp2 version > V.). /

Performances platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Performances Selecting the communication architecture When selecting an architecture, it is advisable to take performance into account at the earliest possible stage. For this, the designer must: Have a clear idea of his needs as regards: v quantity and type of devices to be interconnected, v volume and type of exchanges, v expected response times, v environment. 2 Compare his needs with the characteristics of the offers available and be aware that the precise performance level between any 2 points on an architecture is dependent on the weakest link in the chain, which can be: v a function of the hardware, v but also a function of the applications (size, architecture, OS, machine power, etc.) which are often poorly defined at this stage of project. Select the most suitable architecture. The objective of the following pages is to answer the second point by explaining the performance of the different components which constitute an Ethernet architecture, concentrating on the following 2 aspects: b Processing capacity in terms of volume of exchanges (see pages /29 and /0). b Application response time (see page /). Introduction. As in any communication system, the performance of an Ethernet architecture is linked to numerous parameters which depend on the: b Hardware used: v network bandwidth, v resources of module or CPU with Ethernet embedded, v processor resources (PLC, PC or other CPUs). b Application services used: v Modbus (or Uni-TE) industrial messaging handling service, v Global Data service, data scanning between PLC, v I/O Scanning service, data scanning of distributed I/O, v Others (Web access, TCP Open communication). The difficulty in determining the correct size of an architecture is due to the fact that the majority of these parameters are linked. Nota : For purposes of simplification, the values shown in the tables which follow have been reduced. If these are adhered to, correct operation of the architecture is ensured. If the performance levels obtained are not sufficient, please consult our Regional Sales Office for a more detailed study. Nota : The performance levels indicated depend relatively little on the size of messages. Limiting factors have much more to do with the number of messages. It is therefore necessary to group as much useful information as possible within the same message using the most suitable Modbus request. Processing capacity in terms of volume of exchanges The methodology presented below in steps can be used to determine the message processing capacity on Ethernet TCP/IP. Step : calculation of exchanges necessary for the application Using the tables below, calculate the exchanges necessary for the application, i.e. for each station on the architecture and for each service used, the number of messages to be transmitted and received per second. Messages transmitted per second from Station A Station B Station N Messages per second sent to Station A Station B Station N Total number of messages received per station Total number of messages transmitted per station E E2 Ei Network load Cru = Σ [R Ri, E Ei] Not applicable R R2 Ri /

Performances (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Performances Step 2: station processor processing capacity, system requests Using the table below, compare the total number of messages received via the Modbus and Uni-TE service for each station (value R, R2 or Ri) with the station processor processing capacity. If the result of this initial calculation is positive, go to step. PremiumorAtriumplatform Messages being received Messages being transmitted Communication by EFs or EFBs (PL7 or Unity Pro) Modbus requests TSX 7 0 mes/cyc Does not constitute a () TSX 7 20 8mes/cyc limiting factor TSX 7 0 2 mes/cyc TSX 7 0 6 mes/cyc TSX 7 0 (2) 6/20 mes/cyc Quantum platform Messages being received Messages being transmitted Communication by EFs or EFBs (Concept, ProWORX or Unity Pro) Modbus requests () CPU 02/0 () mes/cyc mes/cyc CPU 0 (2) mes/cyc mes/cyc CPU 2p mes/cyc mes/cyc CPU p mes/cyc mes/cyc CPU 6 p0 (2) 6 mes/cyc () mes/cyc CPU 67 60 (2) 6 mes/cyc () mes/cyc mes/cyc: number of messages being received per cycle from the PLC master task (typical cycle from 0 to 00 ms). Step : bus or network module processing capacity Processing capacity of Ethernet connections Premium Ethernet TCP/IP TSX ETY 0/20 TSX ETY 0WS For each station, compare the total number of messages received (Σ [values Ri, Rj] and the total number of messages transmitted (Σ [values Ei, Ej] for station N, for example) with the bus or network processing capacity shown below. If the result of this second calculation is positive, go to step. TSX ETY 0/0 TSX WMY 00 () TSX P7 0/20/0/0 TSX P7 0 Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP 0 NOE 77 pp 0 NWM 00 00 () 0 CPU 6 0/60 0 CPU 67 60 Message transactions 60 transactions/s 0 transactions/s 00 transactions/s 0 transactions/s 0 transactions/s. Scanning I/O polling Service not available 2000 transactions/s 2000 transactions/s 2000 transactionsis 2000 transactions/s Global Data subscriptions 800 transactions/s 800 transactions/s 800 transactions/s 800 transactions/s Characteristics summary b Modbus requests: v 2 words or registers in read access, v 00 words or registers in write access. b Global Data: 02-word published variable, subscription to a maximum of 6 variables, with a maximum size of 2 K %MW. b I/O Scanning with maximum size in the PLC managing the service: v 2 K %MW in input and 2 K %MW in output with manager PLC limited to 6 stations, v K %MW in output and K %MW in output with manager PLC limited to 28 stations (TSX P7 0, 0 CPU 6 0/60 and 0 CPU 67 60). () A temporary overload on several PLC cycles, due, for example, to an adjustment terminal or the temporary connection of an Internet browser, is acceptable. (2) Only with Unity Pro. () Only with Concept/ProWORX. ()WithUnityProversionV2.0,message/cyclewithversionV.0. () I/O Scanning and Global Data services are not available for TSX WMY 00 and 0NWM0000. /

Performances (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Performances Step : bus or network module processing capacity (continued) Network bandwidth management in the Ethernet TCP/IP modules The bandwidth management service shows load level for the Ethernet module. This enables the user to monitor any drift and anticipate possible problems. Ethernet module load is indicated in ways: b Anticipated load in the PL7 configuration screen. b Actual load in the PL7 diagnostics/debugging screen, as well as in Web diagnostics pages. The load is displayed as a bar graph, animated in real time. b In the SNMP interface for access to the SNMP network manager. The bandwidth is shown as a percentage for each of the following services: b Modbus (and Uni-TE) message handling. b I/O Scanning. b Global Data. b Other. Step : network load In spite of the large bandwidth of an Ethernet Network (00 Mbit/s), the user must ensure that the actual application load does not exceed 2 to 0 % of the hypothetical network capacity. If this should occur, this load must be reduced via a switched architecture (use of switches). See page /8. Event CT Report TT CT CT CT NAT NAT Station Application response time For the Modbus (or Uni-TE) messaging handling service PLC-module processor exchanges are synchronous with the PLC cycle, in the same manner as the input/output exchanges. When an event appears, (input switching to for example), a message can only be transmitted after this input has been taken into consideration (start of the following cycle) and the PLC program has been executed, i.e. approximately. cycles after the event has appeared.. CT2 CT2 Station 2 Action Network access time (NAT) shown in the table below as ms, totals the module transit time and the delay before the message can be transmitted across the network. Processing Modbus message Premium Ethernet TCP/IP Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP requests TSX ETY 0/20 TSX ETY 0WS TSX ETY 0/0 TSX WMY 00 0 NOE 77 pp 0 CPU / pp 0 CPU 6 0/60 0 CPU 67 60 TSX P7 0...7 0 0 CPU / p NetworkaccesstimeNAT <2ms <0ms <xxms <0ms Transaction time TT includes the delay between the transmission of a message from a client station, its reception by a server station 2, processing the request, sending back the response and its acceptance by station (update of an output for example). As the block diagram above shows: b The duration of the transaction will be between: TT= 2xCT+2xNAT<TT<xCT+CT2+2x NAT b Average duration is: TT ave =xct+0.xct2+2xnat For the Global Data service Top synchro Transaction time TT CT CT CT Publication NAT Subscription NAT Return synchro Publication Station CT CT Station 2 The transaction time (TT) includes the delay between publication of a Global Data by station, its reception and processing by remote station 2 and its retransmission to the initial station : For an exchanged variable: b If CT < ms, transaction time: TT = to 6 x CT b If CT u 0 ms, transaction time: TT = x CT /6

Performances (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Performances Application response time (continued) I/O Scanning service CT Ethernet TCP/IP RT Manager The RT application response time include the delay between getting data from a remote input and up dating remote output. It includes PLC application treatment time. Hub This RT response time is composed of following parameters: Input Device Output Device 2 Input TMod In TIOS In TNet NxCycleT TIOS Out TNet TMod Out Response time (RT) Output b TMod In and TMod Out: response time of the read/written device excluding the input circuit transition (TMod depends of the device, but commonly between to 8 ms). b TIOS In and TIOS Out: time between two scanning of the same read device (0. ms x number of device scanned and at least the pooling rate configured. TIOS is executed in parallel of the CPU cycle time, so could be hidden for the RT response time). b N: number of PLC CPU cycles. b CycleT: CPU cycle time. b Tnet: propagation time on the network (depending of the application, but commonly Tnet is 0.0 ms at 0 Mbit/s and 0.00ms at 00 Mbit/s). The RT response time could be estimated using the following formulas: b TRmin, minimal response time with TIOS hidden and CycleT: TRmin = Tmod In + 0 x TIOS In + Tnet + x CycleT + 0 x TIOS Out + Tnet + TMod Out. b TRtypic, typical response time (with 0, TIOS hidden and 2 CycleT: TRtypic = TMod In + 0. x TIOS In + Tnet + 2 x CycleT + 0. x TIOS Out + Tnet + TMod Out b TRmax, maximal response time with TIOS not hidden and CycleT: TRmax = TMod In + TIOS In + Tnet + x CycleT + TIOS Out + Tnet + TMod Out The TMod In and TMod out response time are shown below: Type of distributed I/O Response time Mini Typical Maxi Momentum 70 ENT 0 02 TMod In ms ms ms TMod Out ms ms ms Momentum 70 ENT 0 0 TMod In or TMod Out ms 6ms 8ms Advantys STB NIP 222 TMod In or TMod Out 2ms ms ms The TIOS In and TIOS Out times mesured between two scanning are shown below: Time (ms) 2 20 0 0 Mesured TIOS (Network with switches) 0 20 0 0 0 60 Number of scanning products /7

Description, characteristics, references platform Processors with integrated Ethernet port Description 7 2 2 7 6 8 9 TSX P7 6M, TSX P 26pp/282/6pp/6/82/6M double format processors () with built-in Ethernet port include the following on the front panel: A display block with LEDs relating to the processor. 2 A display block relating to the built-in Ethernet port. An 8-way female mini-din connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal. A USB connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal. An 8-way female mini-din connector marked AUX for connecting an RS 8 peripheral device. 6 A standard (RJ) connector for 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX interface. 7 A slot for a PCMCIA memory extension card. 8 A slot for a PCMCIA communication or data storage memory extension card. 9 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P7 282/82M models) for Fipio bus manager link.. Characteristics Type of module Unity Pro software TSX P7 6M TSX P7 26M TSX P7 6M TSX P7 6M TSX P7 6M PL7 Pro software TSX P7 2p2M TSX P7 62M TSX P7 82M Transparent Class Ready Standard Web server services Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Ethernet TCP/IP advanced communication services B0 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration functions and PLC variables Modbus TCP messaging (read/write data words) I/O Scanning Yes (between 6 stations) Yes (28 stations) Global Data Yes FDR server Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters SMTP E-mail notification Yes SNMP network administrator Yes Pass band management Yes Structure Physical interface 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX (RJ) Data rate 0/00 Mbps with automatic recognition Medium Twisted pair Premium processor References No.ofdiscreteI/O 2 02 208 No.ofanalogI/O 2 80 28 26 2 No. of application-specific channels 8 2 2 6 Max. no. of network connections (including integrated link) Other TCP/IP Uni-TE TCP Client/server requests: 28 bytes in synchronous mode and Kb in asynchronous mode communication service X-Way Yes Operating temperature 0 + 60 C Relative humidity 0...9% non condensing during operation Degree of protection IP 20 Power supply Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor Conformity to standards IEC/EN 6-2, UL 08, CSA 00-, FM Class Division 2 Group A/B/C/D, e LED indicators Ethernet network status (RUN), transmission/reception activity (TX/RX) Collision detection (COL), Ethernet link diagnostics (STS), Ethernet port fault (ERR) LEDs specific to the operation of the processor (RUN, ERR, I/O, TER and FIP) Description Processors with integrated Ethernet link Class B0 Discrete I/O Reference Analog I/O App-sp. chann. Unity software PL7 software Weight kg 2 / 2 / 8 TSX P7 6M 0.02 02 / 80 / 2 TSX P7 26M TSX P7 262M 0.02 TSX P7 282M (2) 02 / 28 / 2 TSX P7 6M TSX P7 62M 0.02 208 / 26 / 6 TSX P7 6M TSX P7 82M (2) 0.02 208 / 2 / 6 TSX P7 6M () Except TSX P7 6M processor, single format. (2) Also has an integrated Fipio bus manager link. TSX P7 6/6M TSX P7 26/28/6/8ppM /8

Presentation, description, characteristics, references platform Ethernet network module Presentation 2 TSX ETY ppp modules are single format modules which are installed in a rack slot on Modicon Premium PLC stations or Modicon Atrium coprocessors. A configuration can take from to network modules, depending on the type of processor. TSX ETY 0/0 WS/0/0 Ethernet modules route X-Way and Uni-TE messages transparently from a TCP/IP network to an X-Way network and vice versa. Description The front panel of TSX ETY ppp modules comprises: A display block indicating the state of the module. 2 A standard connector for 00BASE-TX and/or /00BASE-T interface (RJ) depending on the model. A standard connector for 0BASE interface (AUI). Four thumbwheels for defining the station number and network number. Characteristics Type of module TSX ETY 0 TSX ETY 0 WS TSX ETY 0 TSX ETY 0 TSX WMY 00M Transparent Ready services Class A0 C0 B0 C0 D0 Standard Web server Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration functions and variables FactoryCast configurable Web server Yes Yes User Web pages (available size) Yes (. Mb) Yes (8 Mb) FactoryCast HMI active Web server Yes () Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Modbus TCP messaging (read/write data words) Ethernet TCP/IP advanced communication services I/O Scanning Yes (between 6 stations) Global Data Yes FDR server Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters NTP time synchronization Yes SMTP e-mail notification Yes SNMP network administrator SNMP agent TCP Open Option Option Pass band management Yes Structure Physical interface 0BASE-T (RJ)/0BASE (AUI) 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX (RJ) Data rate 0 Mbps 0/00 Mbps with automatic recognition Medium Twisted pair/aui cable Twisted pair Network module Operating temperature 0 + 60 C Relative humidity 0...9% non condensing during operation Degree of protection IP 20 Power supply Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor Other TCP/IP communication service Uni-TE TCP Client/server requests: 28 bytes in synchronous mode and Kb in asynchronous mode Ethway/X-Way Uni-TE, common words Conformity to standards IEC/EN 6-2, UL 08, CSA 00-, FM Class Division 2 Group A/B/C/D, e LED indicators Ethernet network status (RUN), transmission/reception activity (TX/RX) Collision detection (COL), Ethernet port fault (ERR). References TSX ETY 0/0 WS TSX ETY p0/wmy 00 Description Data rate Transparent Ready class Ethernet TCP/IP modules FactoryCast HMI software TCP Open software (2) Reference Weight kg 0 Mbit/s A0 TSX ETY 0 0.70 C0 TSX ETY 0 WS 0.70 0/00 Mbit/s B0 TSX ETY 0 0.0 C0 TSX ETY 0 0.0 D0 TSX WMY 00 0.0 HMI application development and debugging in TSX WMY 00 TLX CD FCHMI VM SDKC, C language development TLX LSDKC PL7M TCP Open function block library TLX CD TCPAE () Database management, arithmetic and logic calculations, automatic e-mail transmission on process event, connection to relational databases. (2) With TSX ETY 0 WS and TSX ETY 0 modules. /9

Presentation, characteristics platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium wiring system Presentation Industrial Ethernet networks can use various standards. In each case, a set of rules must be respected when determining what topology will be produced and with what performance level. The ConneXium offer comprises a complete family of industrial products used to build a network architecture: hubs, switches, transceivers and cables. Wiring rules pertaining to the ConneXium offer are described on pages / to /9. Characteristics General characteristics for industrial Ethernet standards Standard Date rate (Mbit/s) 0BASE 0 Thick coaxial cable (yellow) Medium Type of connector Useable bandwidth (on automation network) Advantages -way SUB-D (AUI) 8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s Cost, Ethway compatibility 0BASE-T 0 Twisted shielded pair (SFTP) () RJ 8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s Cost 0BASE-FL 0 Fibre optic (generally 62./2 multimode 00 µm (2) ST or MT-RJ 8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s Immunity, confidentiality 00BASE-TX 00 Shielded twisted pair (SFTP) RJ 0 %, i.e. 0 Mbit/s Data rate (x 0) 00BASE-FX 00 Fibre optics SC or MT-RJ 0 %, i.e. 0 Mbit/s Immunity. () SFTP cables (Shielded and Foiled Twisted Pair) are available in 2 versions: v UL 8 vertical tray, NFC 2070 level C, IEC 2-. v Reaction to fire compliant with NFC 2 070 # class C2 and IEC 2-, Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) and UL 8 VW. (2) The mutimode fiber is Low Smoke Zero Halogen as per HD.62-7, with reaction to fire complying with NFC 2 070 # class C2 and IEC 2-. Installation principles The Ethernet 802. Link Layer is based on a collision detection mechanism (CSMA CD). Each station (DTE, Data Terminal Equipment) sends its data when necessary and verifies if the frame has been correctly propagated. If a collision with a frame sent by another station is detected, the station repeats the message after a timeout, which increases the network load and thus the probability that another collision will occur. The transceivers or hubs (repeaters) are used to regenerate the signal once the physical limits of the medium have been reached. They also propagate collisions, if there are any. Because of the transmission time needed to send data from one end of the network to the other, a maximum network length exists, beyond which collisions might not be detected by the sender. For this reason, and for each technology, a network size limit has been set. This is described as the maximum network diameter within a same collision domain. Presentation: page /0 Installation rules: pages /0 to / /0

Installation rules platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium wiring system Architectures in a same collision domain Various architectures may exist, depending on each standard: b Line or bus topology, using transceivers. b Star network topology, using hubs. b Tree network topology, using hubs. Transceivers are also used for transmitting signals between 2 dissimilar media such as fiber optic and twisted pair cables. In addition, the hubs (or concentrators) are also used to transmit signals among several media (ports). The transceivers and hubs are plug and play devices. Line or bus topology DTE DTE Star topology DTE Tree topology Transceiver Hub Hub DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE 0BASE 0BASE-T, 0BASE-F, 00BASE-TX, 00BASE-FX 0BASE-T, 0BASE-F, 00BASE-TX, 00BASE-FX Note: in the information that follows, the terms hubs and repeaters are used interchangeably. Rule : to respect the maximum network diameter within a same collision domain Depending on the Ethernet standard employed, the network size can vary. To define the correct architecture, the 2 constraints of maximum segment length and maximum network diameter must be respected. The Schneider Electric ConneXium performances make it possible, in some situations, to surpass the limits of the 802. standard.. Ethernet standard Type 0BASE Maximum segment length (physical limit) According to standard 802. 00 m (0 m for a drop cable) With ConneXium products Maximum network diameter (limited by collisions) According to standard 802. With ConneXium products.800 m (2.800 m with fiber optic segment) 0BASE-T 00 m 00 m.000 m 0BASE-FL or mixed (FL and T) 2.000 m.00 m () 00BASE-TX 00 m 200 m 00BASE-FX in Half Duplex 00BASE-FX in Full Duplex () Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation. 2.00 m.00 m () 2 m 228 m or 2 m between 2 DTE devices 2.000 m,000 m with multimode.000 m with monomode () 228 m or 2 m between 2 DTE devices Presentation: page /0 Installation rules: pages /0 to / /

Installation rules (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium wiring system Installation rules (continued) Rule 2: for each technology, respect the following rules within the same collision domain 0BASE Between 2 DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) devices, a maximum of 2 repeaters or repeater with 2 half-repeaters (half-repeaters ensure transmission between a copper and a fiber optic medium): b Drop cable, 0 m length max., b One segment, 00 m length max., b Between 2 fiber optic half-repeaters, 000 m length max. Examples: b All copper,,800 m length max. Segment Segment Segment 00 m 00 m 00 m DTE 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m Hub/repeater Hub/repeater DTE b Mixed copper/fiber optic, 2,800 m length max. Segment Segment Segment 00 m 00 m 00 m,000 m DTE 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m Hub/repeater Half-repeater Half-repeater 0BASE-T/0BASE-F DTE. Between 2 DTE devices, a maximum of segments and hubs (or repeaters). b Topology of segments and hubs (or repeaters): each 0BASE-FL segment must have a length of < 00 m. b Topology of segments and hubs (or repeaters): the 0BASE-FL inter-repeater segments must have a length of <,000 m, and the 0BASE-FL segments between hub and DTE devices must have a length of < 00 m. Examples: In the following 2 topologies, distances are usually given for the 0BASE-T standard, with distances for the 0BASE-F standard within parentheses. Hub/repeater Hub/repeater 00 m (00 m) DTE 00 m (00 m) 00 m (00 m) Hub/repeater Hub/repeater 00 m (00 m) DTE 00 m (00 m) Maximum 00 m in 0BASE-T, 2,00 m in 0BASE-F. Hub/repeater Hub/repeater Hub/repeater DTE 00 m (00 m) 00 m (,000 m) 00 m (,000 m) DTE 00 m (00 m) Maximum 00 m in 00BASE-TX, 2,800 m in 00BASE-FX Presentation: page /0 Installation rules: pages /0 to / /2

Installation rules (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium wiring system Installation rules (continued) Rule 2: for each technology, respect the following rules within the same collision domain (continued) 00BASE-TX/00BASE-FX This Ethernet standard defines 2 classes of hubs (or repeaters): b Class hubs: Maximum of hub in a same collision domain. b Class 2 hubs (for ConneXium repeaters): Maximum of 2 hubs in a same collision domain. Examples: In the following topologies, distances are usually given for the 00BASE-TX standard, with distances for the 00BASE-FX standard within parentheses. Class hub/repeater Class hub/repeater DTE 00 m 00 m (200 m) DTE DTE 60 m 60 m 200 m max. in 00BASE-TX, 00 m in mixed 20 m max. in 00BASE-FX DTE Class 2 hub/repeater Class 2 hub/repeater 20 m max. in 00BASE-TX, 26 m in mixed m DTE DTE 00 m 00 m ( m) Class 2 hub/repeater Class 2 hub/repeater DTE 28 m 00 m 00 m DTE. 228 m max. in 00BASE-FX Presentation: page /0 Installation rules: pages /0 to / /

Installation rules (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium wiring system Architectures with several collision domains Switched devices enable the limits of the above-described architectures to be increased. Switches are used for communicating between 2 or more collision domains. Communication for the upper layers is guaranteed among the different ports and collisions at the link layer level are not propagated (filtering). Switches are plug and play devices that can be remotely administered via SNMP or HTTP. They essentially contribute 2 functions: b Extension of the architecture to surpass the maximum network diameter. b Improvement of performance by a better allocation of bandwidth due to reduction in collisions and network load. In addition, switches in the ConneXium range support multicast filtering via the standard GARP/GMRP protocol, which optimizes performances of the Global Data service. With these products, multicast frames are transmitted only on switch ports where stations subscribing to the Global Data service are connected. ConneXium switches also support the Faulty Device Replacement (FDR) service, as well as the Transparent Ready private MIB for managing devices via the SNMP network management protocol. Rule : to be respected when switches are used b Switches are DTE devices that can be connected to hubs or directly connected to devices. Rules and 2, mentioned previously, thus apply. b When 2 switches are connected, the line can be in Full Duplex, which removes the risk of collisions and allows the effective data rate to be doubled. The rules related to the collision domain thus do not apply, and only those imposed by the physical limits should be observed. For example, 2 switches may be connected on their 00BASE-FX ports via a fiber optic cable,000 m in length. Examples: Collision domain Collision domain 2. DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE Switch Site Site 2 Switch Switch 2 DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE Collision domain Switch used to isolate several collision domains (reduction of the network load in order to improve performance). Switches used to extend the architecture to provide a link between 2 buildings, for example. Maximum distances: b 00BASE-TX: 00 m between 2 switches. b 00BASE-FX: 2,000 m between 2 switches,,000 m with ConneXium switches and up to 0 km using monomode optical fiber (outside supply). Presentation: page /0 Installation rules: pages /0 to / /

Installation rules (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium wiring system Routers In general, routers are used at the Enterprise's network level, in order to link different units or sites. They are sometimes associated with security functions such as firewalls for filtering remote access. A router must be configured to enable it to recognize where messages must be routed. Routing mechanisms are based on the IP address. Stations are grouped on the same subnet according to their IP addresses and their subnet mask. Every message addressed to a remote network will be transmitted to the router, which ensures routing to the correct destination. All of our Ethernet modules can be configured with a default gateway address and a subnet mask, complying with the IP standard. On the factory floor level, a switch is less expensive than a router, performs better, and is easier to install ( plug and play ). Redundancy The architectures previously described can be created to have greater availability by using hubs or specific switches, linked to redundant copper or fiber optic rings. If the ring is broken, communication is seamlessly restored in less than 00 ms. These products are available with the possibility to create a redundant power supply. Associated with the Warm or Hot Standby offers, they guarantee maximum availability of the automation installations. The various possible redundant topologies are: 0 Mbit/s copper or fiber optic redundant ring topology, with redundant hubs. 2 00 Mbit/s fiber optic ring redundant topology with redundant switches: maximum commutation time from the normal line to the emergency line of 00 ms for a redundant ring with 0 switches.. 00 Mbit/s redundant fiber optic multiple ring topology with redundant switches: maximum commutation time from the normal line to the emergency line of 00 ms. DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE,00 Mbit/s fiber optic ring 0 Mbit/s copper or fiber optic redundant ring 00 Mbit/s fiber optic ring Redundant switches DTE DTE DTE DTE Redundant hubs DTE Fiber optic ring 2 Fiber optic ring DTE DTE DTE DTE 2 Presentation: page /0 Installation rules: pages /0 to / /

Presentation, characteristics, references platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium hubs Presentation Hubs (or concentrators) are used for transmitting signals between several media (ports). Hubs are plug and play devices that do not need any configuration. The use of hubs (or concentrators) makes it possible to create the following topologies: b Star topology using hubs. b Tree topology using hubs. See Cabling system page /. Hub DTE DTE Hub Hub Hub DTE DTE DTE DTE Star topology Tree topology Hub DTE Hub DTE DTE Ring topology (with 99 NOH 0 0) Hub Characteristics and references. Hubs Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type x 0BASE-T ports x 00BASE-TX ports x 0BASE-T ports Shielded connectors RJ Medium Shielded twisted pair Line length 00 m Optical fiber ports Number and type 2 x 0BASE-FL ports Connectors ST (BFOC) Medium Multimode optical fiber Line length 00 m (0 70 ft) () Optical budget With 0/2 or 62.2/2 µm fiber:. db: Topology Number of cascaded hubs max. 2max. max. Number of hubs in a ring max. Redundancy P and P2 redundant power supplies P and P2 redundant power supplies, redundant optical ring Power supply Voltage c 2 V (8 2 V), safety extra low voltage (SELV) Power consumption 80 ma (0 max. at c 2 V) 20 ma (270 max. at c 2 V) 60mA(0max.atc 2 V) Removable terminal -pin Operating temperature 0 + 60 C (2 0 F) Relative humidity 0 9% non condensing Degree of protection IP 0 IP 20 IP 0 Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 0 x 2 x 80 (.7 x.92 x.) 7 x x (. x. x.) 80 x 0 x 8 (.8 x. x.7) Weight kg (lbs) 0.0 (.7) 0.20 (0.) 0.900 (.98) Conformity to standards cul 6090, UL 08 and CSA 2, UL 60 and CSA 2 Class Division 2, e, GL FM 80, FM 6 Class Division 2 FM 80, FM 6 Class Division 2 LED indicators Power, activity, link Power, activity, link, error Power, activity, link, collision Alarm contact Power supply failure, permanent fault in hub, faulty link status of TP port (volt-free contact A max. under c 2 V) Reference 99 NEH 0 0 99 NEH 00 99NOH00 () Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation. /6

Presentation, characteristics, references platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium transceivers Presentation The use of ConneXium transceivers makes it possible to perform the following: b Creation of linear fiber optic bus topologies, for products with twisted pair cable Ethernet connection. b Interfacing products with twisted pair cable Ethernet connection with fiber optic cable. Transceivers are plug and play devices that do not need any configuration. See Cabling system page /. ConneXium transceivers provide fiber optic connections for transmission in areas subject to interference (high levels of electromagnetic interference) and for long distance communications. DTE DTE DTE Linear topology on optical fiber Characteristics and references Transceivers Interfaces Copper cable port Number and type x 0BASE-T port x 00BASE-TX port Shielded connectors RJ Medium Shielded twisted pair Line length 00 m (28 ft) Optical fiber ports Number and type x 0BASE-FL port x 00BASE-FX port Connectors ST (BFOC) SC Medium Multimode optical fiber Line length 00 m (0 70 ft) () Signal attenuation. db with 0/2 µm fiber. db with 62./2 µm fiber 8 db with 0/2 µm fiber db with 62./2 µm fiber Redundancy P and P2 redundant power supplies Power supply Voltage c 2 V (8 2), safety extra low voltage (SELV) Power consumption 80 ma (00 max. at c 2 V) 60mA(90max.atc 2 V) Removable terminal -pin Operating temperature 0 + 60 C (2 0 F) Relative humidity 0 9% non condensing Degree of protection IP 0 IP 20 Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 0 x x 80 (.7 x.7 x.) 7 x x (. x. x.) Weight kg (lbs) 0.20 (.) 0.20 (0.0) Conformity to standards cul6090,ul08andcsa2,ul60andcsa2classdivision2,e, GL FM 80, FM 6 Class Division 2 LED indicators P and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port status Alarm contact Power supply failure, permanent fault in hub, faulty link status of TP port (volt-free contact A max. under c 2 V) Reference 99 NTR 00 0 99 NTR 0 00 () Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation.. /7

Presentation, characteristics, references platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium switches Presentation DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE Collision domain Collision domain 2 Collision domain DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE 00 Mbit/s optical ring DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE Switches (see Cabling system page /8) are used to increase the limits of architectures based on hubs or transceivers, by separating collision domains. Higher layer communication is provided between the ports, and collisions at link layer are not propagated (filtering). They therefore improve performance by better allocation of the pass band due to the reduction of collisions and the network load. Certain Connexium switches also enable redundant architectures to be created on twister pair copper or fiber optic ring. Switches are plug & play devices that do not need any configuration. They can also be administered remotely via the SNMP or HTTP protocols for monitoring and diagnostics purposes. Characteristics and references. Switches Unmanaged Shielded twisted pair and optical fiber, unmanaged basic Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type x0base-t/ x0base-t/ x0base-t/ x0base-t/ x0base-t/ 00BASE-TX ports 00BASE-TX ports 00BASE-TX ports 00BASE-TX ports 00BASE-TX ports Shielded connectors RJ Medium Shielded twisted pair Max. distances 00 m (28 ft) Optical fiber ports Number and type x 00BASE-FX port 2 x 00BASE-FX ports x 00BASE-FX port 2 x 00BASE-FX ports Connectors SC Medium Multimode fiber Monomode fiber Fiber length 00 m (0 70 ft) () 000m(920ft)() Optical budget 8 db with 0/2 µm fiber 6 db with 0/2 µm fiber db with 62./2 µm fiber Topology Number of switches Cascaded Any Redundant in a ring Power supply redundancy P and P2 redundant power supplies Power supply Voltage c 2 V c 2 V (8 2 V), safety extra low voltage (SELV) (9.2 0 V) Power consumption 00 ma (20 max.). W.9 W. W.9 W Removable terminals -pin -pin Operating temperature 0 + 60 C (2 0 F) Relative humidity 0 9% non condensing Max. 9% non condensing Degree of protection IP 20 Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 7.2 x x (2.96 x.6 x.69) 7xx (. x. x.) Weight kg (lbs) 0.90 (0.2) 0.0 (0.72) 0. (0.7) 0.0 (0.72) 0. (0.7) Conformity to standards UL08,CSA 00, EN 6-2 LED indicators Power supply, ETH link status, 0/00 Mbps cul 6090, UL 08 and CSA 2, UL 60 and CSA 2 Class Division 2, e, GL P and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, transmission activity Alarm contact Activity, power supply failure, permanent fault in hub, faulty link status of TP port (volt-free contact A max. under c 2 V) Reference 99NES200 99 NMS 2 0 r 99 NMS 2 02 r () Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation r Available later. 99NSS20 r 99 NSS 2 02 r /8

Presentation, characteristics, references (continued) platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium switches Characteristics and references (continued) Switches Unmanaged, copper Managed, copper Managed, copper + fiber Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 8 x 0BASE-T/ 00BASE-TX ports x 0BASE-T/ x 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX ports 00BASE-TX ports 2 x 00BASE-TX ports Shielded connectors RJ Medium Shielded twisted pair Max. distances 00 m (28 ft) Optical fiber ports Number and type 2 x 00BASE-FX ports Connectors SC Medium Multimodeopticalfiber Fiber length 00 m (0 70 ft) () Optical budget 8 db with 0/2 µm fiber db with 62./2 µm fiber Ethernet services FDR client, SNMP, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, Web based configuration Topology Number of switches Cascaded Any Redundant in a ring 0 max. Redundancy P and P2 redundant power supplies Power supply Voltage c 8 2 V, safety extra low voltage (SELV) Power consumption 2mA(290max.) 7. W 9W Removable terminals -pin Operating temperature 0 + 60 C 0 + C Relative humidity 0 9% non condensing Degree of protection IP 20 Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 7xx (. x. x.) 0 x x mm (. x.6 x.7) Weight kg (lbs) 0.20 (0.72) 0.60 (.00) Conformity to standards cul6090,ul08andcsa,ul60andcsa2classdivision2,e, GL LED indicators P and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, P and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, redundancy management Alarm contact Power supply failure, permanent fault in hub, faulty link status of TP port (volt-free contact A max. under c 2 V) Redundancy health Reference 99 NES 8 00 99 NES 7 00 99 NOS 7 00 () Depends on the optical fiber budgt and fiber attenuation... /9

Presentation, characteristics, references platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium gateways Presentation ConneXium communication gateways are used for interconnecting the following: b Modbus/Ethernet TCP/IP b Modbus Plus/Ethernet TCP/IP by providing multiple ports to adapt to the different architectures. Characteristics and references. Gateways Functions Communication gateway Ethernet/Modbus serial link Ethernet/Modbus Plus Interface for programming Ethernet/Modbus Ethernet Ethernet/Modbus Plus Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Modbus SL (RS 22/RS 8 serial link) Modbus TCP messaging SNMP Agent RTU/ASCII frame Data rate 0. K.2 Kbps Modbus TCP messaging Modbus TCP messaging SNMP Agent Modbus Plus (RS 8 network) Token bus, HDLC synchronous mode Data rate Mbps Configuration Local or remote by Telnet in Local using DOS Local or remote () hyper terminal mode Interfaces Ethernet TCP/IP port Type x 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX x 0BASE-T x 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX x 0BASE2 x 0BASE Shielded connectors RJ RJ, BNC and AUI RJ Medium Shielded twisted pair Max. distances 00 m (27 ft) Serial port Type x Modbus SL x Modbus Plus Shielded connectors RJ 9-way SUB-D connector Medium Shielded twisted pair Shielded twisted pair (single or double) Power supply Voltage c 9 0 V, a 0/220 V (a 9. V 22 V), 7 6 Hz a 9 2V Power consumption W A Operating temperature 0 + 60 C 0 + 0 C Relative humidity 20 90% non condensing 0 9% non condensing Degree of protection IP 20 Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) x 9 x 60 (.8 x.7 x 2.6) 22 x 229 x 28 (.80x9.0x9.80) Weight kg (lbs) 0.00 (.0).260 (9.0) Conformity to standards UL, CSA, FM 6 Class UL 08, CSA 2, e Division 2 LED indicators Activity, status, diagnostics Power Reference 7CEV0020 7 CEV 200 0 7 CEV 200 0 r () Local with additional keyboard and monitor, via a dedicated screen for basic diagnostic and configuration. Remote, via intuitive Web pages for full configuration and diagnostic. r Available later /0

Presentation, references platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium connection cables Presentation ConneXium shielded connection cables are available in two versions to meet current standards and approvals: b Standard EIA/TIA 68 shielded twisted pair cables: These cables conform to the EIA/TIA-68 standard, category, IEC 80/EN 07 class D. Their fire behavior conforms to NFC 2070# class C2 and IEC 22/, Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH). b UL and CSA 22. approved shielded twisted pair cables: These cables are UL and CSA 22. approved. Their fire resistance conforms to NFPA 70. 90 NTp 000 pp References Standard EIA/TIA 68 shielded twisted pair cables Description Pre-equipped at both ends Length m(ft) Straight-through shielded twisted pair cables 2 RJ connectors For connection to terminal devices (DTE) Reference Weight kg 2 (6.6) 90NTW00002 (6.) 90NTW0000 2 (9.) 90NTW0002 0 (.2) 90NTW0000 80 (262.) 90NTW00080 90 NOC 000 0 Description Pre-equipped at both ends Length Reference Weight kg Crossed cord 2 RJ connectors shielded twisted pair For connections between cables hubs, switches and transceivers (6.) 90 NTC 000 0 (9.2) 90 NTC 000 0 0 (.2) 90 NTC 000 0 80 (262.) 90 NTC 000 80 UL and CSA 22. approved shielded twisted pair cables Description Pre-equipped at both ends Length Reference Weight kg Straight-through 2 RJ connectors shielded twisted pair For connection to terminal cables devices (DTE) 2 (6.6) 90NTW00002U (6.) 90NTW0000U 2 (9.) 90NTW0002U 0 (.2) 90NTW0000U 80 (262.) 90NTW00080U. 90 NOT 000 0 Description Pre-equipped at both ends Length Reference Weight kg Crossed cord 2 RJ connectors shielded twisted pair For connections between cables hubs, switches and transceivers (6.) 90 NTC 000 0U (9.2) 90 NTC 000 0U 0 (.2) 90 NTC 000 0U 80 (262.) 90 NTC 000 80U 90 NOR 000 0 Fiber optic cables Description Pre-equipped at both ends Length m(ft) Glass fiber optic cables for terminal devices (DTE) to hubs, switches and transceivers Reference Weight kg SC connector and (6.) 90 NOC 000 0 MT-RJ connector ST (BFOC) connector and (6.) 90 NOT 000 0 MT-RJ connector 2 MT-RJ connectors (6.) 90 NOR 000 0 /

Presentation platform CANopen machine bus Presentation Originally used in the automotive industry, CAN is increasingly used in general industry. Several fieldbuses based on CAN lower layers and components are available. The CANopen machine bus conforms to the ISO 898 international standard, promoted by the CAN In Automation association, which consists of users and manufacturers and offers an excellent assurance of open access and interoperability due to its standardised devices and communication profiles. Premium TSX Micro Advantys STB Lexium MHD Twin Line TLC CANopen bus From to 27 slaves ATV 8 ATV 8/8F TeSys model U Tego Power FTB CN FTB CN The CANopen bus is a multimaster bus which ensures reliable deterministic access to realtime data in control system devices. The CSMA/CA protocol is based on broadcast exchanges, sent cyclically or on an event, which ensures optimum use of the passband. A message handling channel can also be used to define slave parameters. The bus uses a double shielded twisted pair, on which 27 devices maximum are connected by daisy chaining. The variable data rate between 20 Kbit/s and Mbit/s depends on the length of the bus (between 0 and 000 m). Each end of the bus must be fitted with a line terminator..2 The CANopen bus is a set of profiles on CAN systems, possessing the following characteristics: b Open bus system. b Data exchanges in real-time without overloading the protocol. b Modular design allowing modification of size. b Interconnection and interchangeability of devices. b Standardised configuration of networks. b Access to all device parameters. b Synchronisation and circulation of data from cyclic and/or event-controlled processes (short system response time). b Interoperability between numerous international manufacturers. Description: page / /2 Characteristics: page / References: page /

Connectable devices, description platform CANopen machine bus TeSys model U Altivar ATV Advantys FTB Twin Line TLC Connectable devices The TSX CPP 0 module performs the role of the master on the CANopen bus, and other Telemecanique devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are: b TeSys model U starter-controllers. b TeSys model d using the Tego Power installation assistance system. b Advantys STB distributed I/O. b Advantys FTB, IP 67 monobloc I/O splitter boxes. b Advantys FTM, IP 67 modular I/O splitter boxes. b Altivar, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.8 kw. b Altivar 8, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.7 7 kw. b Altivar 8F, variable speed drives with flux vector control for asynchronous motors 0.7 kw. b Twin Line TLC servodrives for brushless motors 6 A. b Lexium MHDA servodrives for brushless motors. 70 A. Are also compatible: b Any third-party device which conforms to the CANopen standard profile. b Any CAN device which uses CAN V2.0B identifiers on the ISO 898 physical layer. The TSX CPP 0 PCMCIA card supports the V.02 CANopen standard with in particular the heartbeat network management. Example of connectable devices on the CANopen bus 2 Description The Modicon TSX Micro/Premium platforms connect to the CANopen bus by means of the TSX CPP 0 type III PCMCIA card inserted in the processor or coprocessor communication port slot. The TSX CPP 0 machine bus CANopen set comprises: A PCMCIA card, type III with fixing screws. 2 A tap junction equipped with one 9-way SUB-D connector for connecting the CANopen bus. A connection cable length 0. m, interdependent of the PCMCIA card and the tap junction..2 TSX CPP 0 Presentation: page /2 Characteristics: page / References: page / /

Characteristics platform CANopen machine bus Software setup The CANopen bus is configured using dedicated SyCon () software, which should be ordered separately, reference SYC SPU LFp CD28M. This software is used: b To describe all devices connected on the bus. b To generate the.co file including the informations relating to the devices connected. This extension file is imported into the PLC application via the PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software. If the configuration file is too large in relation to the TSX Micro/Premium processor capacity (see characteristics table), it is possible to load the master configuration directly by inserting the TSX CPP 0 card in a PCMCIA port (type III) on the PC on which SyCon software has been installed. Example of SyCon configuration devices screen In PL7, it is possible to configure the CANopen bus card so that the PLC processor/tsx CPP 0 card exchanges are executed at the same rate as the master task or the fast task. The process data exchanged with the slaves can be accessed by %MW standard words, the number of which depends on the type of processor and the task in which the module has been declared. PL7 standard function blocks are used to define the device parameters. Nota : In addition to supporting the CANopen protocol which uses V2.0A standard CAN identifiers on bits, the card enables direct access to the CAN link layer via CAN V2.0B identifiers on 29 bits, used by the majority of CAN devices. In certain applications this enables simultaneous control of CANopen devices and dedicated CAN products..2 Characteristics () The SyCon field bus configurator software also makes it possible to describre the I/O configuration of Profibus DP bus for Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum platforms and the I/O configuration of INTERBUS bus for Modicon Quantum platform. Type of bus CANopen Structure Type Industrial bus Physical interface ISO 898 Topology Devices linked by daisy-chaining Access method CSMA/CA, multimaster, producer/consumer, prioity information Transmission Data rate 20 Kbit/s Mbit/s depending on the length of bus Medium Double shielded twisted pair Physical configuration Number of devices 27 max. Length of bus according to data rate Mbit/s 800 Kbit/s 00 Kbit/s 20 Kbit/s 2 Kbit/s 0 Kbit/s 20 Kbit/s m 20 00 20 00 000 200 Segments Number maxi(repeaters) No. of devices per 6 devices 2 devices 6 devices segment Max. length of m 70 90 20 segment Equivalent length of a repeater m Premium PLCs and Atrium slot-plcs Software configuration Micro TSX 7 2 00/0 22 00/0 7 0p 7 p 7 2p 7 p 7 p 7 p Size of configuration data () Ko 0 8 0 2 6 2 6 Max. size of CANopen I/O data Master task words 26 %MW 8 %MW 2 %MW 02 %MW 8 %MW Fast task words 2 %MW 8 %MW 6 %MW 28 %MW 26 %MW () This size can be exceeded if the configuration is loaded in the memory of CANopen PCMCIA card via the SyCon software. Presentation: page /2 / Description: page / References: page /

References platform CANopen machine bus References CANopen machine bus set Description Services No. of module per PLC/PC CANopen master V.02 PCMCIA card (type III) - PDO cyclic exchanges -CMS message handling (SDO) - management of bus operating modes onmicro TSX 7 2/22 onpremium TSX P7 () onatrium TPCX Use Reference Weight kg Supplied with a tap junction and cable length 0. m TSX CPP 0 0.20 Sycon configuration softwares TSX CPP 0 The SyCon software is the configurator for machine bus and field bus of Telemecanique. It supports the buses: b CANopen for TSX Micro et Premium platforms. b Profibus DP for Premium et Quantum platforms. b INTERBUS for Quantum platform. The SyCon tool includes also the device description for Telemecanique I/O modules. Description Type Reference Weight kg SyCon V2.8 configuration software licenses (2) SyCon V2.8 configuration software update Single (station) SYC SPU LFU CD28M Group ( stations) SYC SPU LFG CD28M Team (0 stations) SYC SPU LFT CD28M Site(upto0stations) SYC SPU LFF CD28M Single (station) SYC SPU LRU CD28M SyCon V2.8 configuration software upgrade for previous version Group ( stations) SYC SPU LUG CD28M Team (0 stations) SYC SPU LUT CD28M Site(upto0stations) SYC SPU LUF CD28M () Unauthorized on TSX P7 /M Premium processor. () A software kit of single type ( station) including PL7 Micro et Sycon softwares is also available, see page 6/7..2 Presentation: page /2 Description: page / Characteristics: page / /

Presentation, description platform TSX SAY master module for AS-Interface bus Presentation TSX SAY 000 master module for the AS-Interface bus enables the Premium PLC to act as the AS-Interface bus master. Premium + TSX SAY 000 Sensors XVA column AS-Interface bus XBL keyboard T XALbuttonbox Intelligent sensors Motor starter ASI ABL power supply The bus comprises a master station (Premium PLC) and slave stations. The master that supports the AS-Interface profile successively interrogates the devices connected on the AS-Interfacenterface bus and stores the data (status of sensor/actuators, operational status of devices) in the PLC memory. Communication management on the AS-Interfacenterface bus is completely transparent with regard to the PLC application program. TSX SAY 000 master module with the AS-Interface M2E profile (AS-Interface V2) manages: b Discrete slave devices (a maximum of 62 devices organized in 2 banks, A/B, with addresses each), b Analog devices (a maximum of devices in bank A) b Safety interfaces (a maximum of devices in bank A). The maximum number of TSX SAY 000 modules per PLC station is either 2,, or 8, depending on the type of processor installed (see page /7). An AS-Interface power supply must be used for powering the various devices on the bus. Ideally, this PSU should be situated nearest to the stations with the largest power demands.. Description TSX SAY 000 2 TSX SAY 000 AS-Interface bus master module is standard format modules. Modules of this format are designed to slot into any position on the Premium PLC rack like any Input/Output module or application-specific module. The modules feature, on the front panel: A display unit comprising indicator lamps showing the module operating modes: v RUN indicator lamp (green): module operating, v ERR indicator lamp (red): module fault, v A/B indicator lamp (green): display of group of 2 slaves, v I/O indicator lamp (red): AS-Interface bus I/O fault. 2 A display unit comprising 2 indicator lamps for diagnostics of the AS-Interface bus and of each slave connected to the bus depending on the A/B push button selected (). Two or three indicator lamps specific to the module: See diagnostics on page /7. Two push buttons: See diagnostics on page /7. One -way male SUB-D connector for connection to the AS-Interface bus (female screw connector supplied). () Depending on the selection made with the A/B push button, the first slaves (standard address settings) or the last slaves (extended address settings with AS-Interface V2) are displayed. /6

Diagnostics, references, connections platform TSX SAY master module for AS-Interface bus Diagnostics TSX SAY 000 module (AS-Interface V2) The two indicator lamps on the front panel of the TSX SAY 000 module that correspond to the two push buttons are used for diagnostics at module level: Indicator lamps marked: PWR: FAULT: AS-Interface bus fault AS-Interface power supply present Push buttons marked: A/B: selection of slave group on display unit 2 MODE: module Off line/on line The display unit on the front panel of the TSX SAY 000 master module allows simplified local diagnostics to be performed by displaying the slave devices on the AS-Interface bus. Detailed diagnostics for each of these slave devices can be carried out via the ASI-TERV2 adjustment console. TSX SAY 000 References Description Number per PLC AS-Interface bus master module () for Premium PLCs and Atrium Slot-PLCs for 7 Cp for 7 0p 2 for 7 p for 7 2p 8 for 7 p 8 for 7 p 8 for 7 p Protocol and profile Number of I/Os (2) AS-Interface Maximum of 62 discrete M2E devices Maximum of analog devices () safety devices Reference Weight kg TSX SAY 000 0.0 Connection accessories Description Supply Length Reference Weight kg AS-Interface bus ribbon cables (yellow) For AS-Interface bus 20 m XZ-CB 020.00 0 m XZ-CB 00.00 00 m XZ-CB 00 7.000 () The -way SUB-D connector for connection to the AS-Interface cable is supplied with the module. (2) These maximum values cannot be cumulated: see the characteristics on page /9. () Supports analog devices that have between and input or output channels. Connections TSX SAY 000 module Brown wire. Blue wire AS-Interface ribbon cable /7

Software setup platform Master modules for AS-Interface bus Software setup The AS-Interface bus is configured using Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software. The services offered are based on the principle of simplicity: b Management of profile tables, parameters and data by the master (this management is transparent to the user). b Topological I/O addressing: each AS-Interface slave declared on the bus is assigned a topological address on the bus. This is transparent to the user. b Each sensor/actuator for the AS-Interface bus interfaces is treated as an in-rack I/O by the TSX Micro/Premium PLC. AS-Interface bus configuration All devices on the AS-Interface bus are configured implicitly using the following sequence of screens: b Declaration of the AS-Interface bus master module v The TSX SAZ 0 module is always inserted and declared in position no. on TSX 7 0/2/22 TSX Micro automation platforms. DeclarationoftheTSXSAZ0TSXMicromodule v TSX SAY 000 modules can be inserted into any position on Premium automation platforms or Atrium slot-plcs (except positions reserved for processors and power supplies). b Configuration of AS-Interface slave devices Using the configuration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices corresponding to all interface I/Os on the AS-Interface bus. Depending on its type, the configuration for each device consists of defining, as appropriate:. Configuration of slave devices in TSX SAY 000 v Schneider Electric AS-Interface devices. The user selects the AS-Interface device catalog reference from the various discrete, analog, or safety interfaces listed. This selection automatically determines the AS-Interface profile and the parameters associated with each interface. v Third-party AS-Interface device. The user can use Uniti Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior software to manage a customized list of sensors/actuators of different brands. This list, specifying the AS-Interface profile and parameters, is compiled to meet the needs of the user. Programming After configuration, the I/Os connected on the AS-Interface bus are processed by the application program in the same way as an in-rack I/O of the PLC, using either the address (e.g. %I\.0\6.2, input 2 of slave 6 of the AS-Interface bus), or the associated symbol (e.g. Start_conveyor). Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software has an integrated function block library containing the specific diagnostic DFBs for AS-Interface bus. Its check for the appearance of any error on the AS-Interface (bus or slaves). /8

Diagnostics, characteristics platform Master modules for AS-Interface bus Diagnostics 2 Diagnostics performed using the centralized display unit of the TSX Micro platform or using the display unit of TSX SAY 000 module can be completed using a PC terminal on which Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software has been installed. The terminal connected to the TSX Micro/Premium PLC is used to perform diagnostics of the operating state of the AS-Interface V TSX SAZ 0 master module, the bus and the slave devices on the bus. For the AS-Interface V2 TSX SAY 000 master module, the diagnostics are identical to those of the AS-Interface V module, and in addition, take into account developments in the M2E standard. Diagnostics are performed using a single screen divided into four sections providing information on: Diagnostics of the TSX SAY 000 module using PL7 Status of the TSX SAZ 0 or TSX SAY 000 module (RUN, ERR, I/O). 2 Status of the AS-Interface channel connected to the module. Faulty interface (or slave). Data relating to any selected interface (profile, parameters, forcing, etc). In the event of an AS-Interface module or channel fault, a second screen can be accessed, which clearly shows the type of fault, which may be at internal or external level. Characteristics Type of module TSX SAZ 0 TSX SAY 000 AS-Interface profile M2(AS-Interface V) M2E (AS-Interface V2) Type of addressing Standard Standard and extended Product certification AS-Interface No. 200, Pending IEC 6 2 Ambient air temperature Operation 0 +60 C. Storage -2 +70 C. Degree of protection IP 20 Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 68 2 6. Fc tests. Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 68 2 27. EA tests. Number of connectable interfaces (or slaves) With standard addressing slaves With extended addressing slaves Type of connectable interfaces With standard addressing Discrete I/Os (I/O) Discrete I/Os (I/O) () Analog I/Os (a maximum of channels) Safety interfaces With extended addressing Discrete I/Os (I/O) Bus connection Module power supply Display/diagnostics By terminal block inside module (polarity locating device) By -way SUB-D connector (included with the module) Via power supply integrated into the host platform of the module Via: v centralized display unit on TSX Micro PLC or via the display unit of TSX SAY 000 module v use of the Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software diagnostics function v use of the ASI-TERV adjustment console (infrared link) () If the interfaces are connected using extended addressing, the type of discrete I/Os is I/O (instead of I/O).. /9

Presentation Modicon Premium automation platform Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies for AS-Interface Power supplies for AS-Interface Consistent with the standard Phaseo line, the range of ASI ABL power supplies is designed to deliver a d.c. voltage, as required by networks operating under the AS-Interface protocol. Three versions are available to meet all needs encountered in industrial applications, in enclosures, cells or floor-standing enclosures. These single-phase, electronic, switch mode power supplies guarantee the quality of the output current, in accordance with the electrical characteristics and conforming to standard EN 029. PE N L 00-20V 2 V AS-i : 2, A ASI ABLB002 b ASI ABLB00p Operating on a 00 to 20 V a.c. supply, this power supply delivers a voltage of 0 V d.c. Available in 2. and.8 A ratings, the parallel output terminal blocks allow the bus to be connected separately to the slaves and the master. Input and output LEDs allow fast and continuous diagnostics. AS-i + AS-i GND AS-i + AS-i GND. () AS-Interface AS-Interface master module Reset PE N L 00-20V 2 V AS-i : 2, A ASI ABLD002 AS-i + AS-i GND + 2 Reset AS-i + AS-i Fault Fault Fault + ON OFF TEST RESET GND AS-Interface AS-Interface master module Earth fault (2) b ASI ABLD00p Operating on a 00 to 20 V a.c. supply, this power supply delivers a voltage of 0 V d.c. Available in 2. and.8 A ratings, it allows diagnosis and management of earth faults on AS-Interface networks. In the event of an earth fault, the Phaseo power supply trips out, thus stopping dialogue on the bus. Restarting is only possible after deliberate acknowledgement of the fault. Two I/O are provided, which may be used to monitor status. The parallel output terminal blocks are used to connect the bus separately to the slaves and the AS-Interface master. Input, output and fault LED s allow fast and continuous diagnostics. Warning: the earth (GND) (2) connection must be made. In the event of disconnection, the built-in detector becomes inoperative. To obtain earth connection diagnostics, it is recommended that an ASI ABLB00p power supply be used together with insulation relay RMO PAS 0. PE N L 00-20V 2 V AS-i :,8 A ASI ABLM02 2 V - A 2 0, V AS-i b ASI ABLM02 Operating on a 00 to 20 V a.c. supply, this product delivers two d.c. outputs which are totally independent in the way they operate. Two output voltages - 0 V d.c./2. A (AS-Interface supply) and 2 V d.c./ A - are available, so making it possible to supply the control equipment without an additional power supply. Input and output LEDs allow fast and continuous diagnostics. + AS-i + AS-i GND AS-i + AS-i GND () Recommended connection. (2) Compulsory connection. 2 V d.c. control () AS-Interface master AS-Interface module Characteristics: page /6 References: page /6 Dimensions: page /6 /60 Schneider Electric

Characteristics Modicon Premium automation platform Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies for AS-Interface Technical characteristics Type of power supply ASI ABLB002 ASI ABLB00 ASI ABLD002 ASI ABLD00 ASI ABLM02 Functions Supply to the AS-Interface system 2 V c supply Product certifications UL 08, CSA 22-2 n 90 Conforming to standards Safety EN 6090, TÜV EMC EN 008-, IEC 6000-6-2, EN 022 class B Low frequency harmonic currents No Input circuit LED indication Orange LED Input voltage Rated values V a 00 20 Permissible values V a 8 26 Permissible frequencies Hz 7 6 Efficiency at nominal load % >8 >80 Current consumption 0. 0. Current at switch-on A <0 Power factor >0.6 Output circuit LED indication Green LED Nominal output voltage V c 0 (AS-Interface) c 2 Nominal output current A 2..8 2..8 2. Precision Adjustable output voltage V 00 to 20 % Line and load regulation % Residual ripple - interference mv 00-0 Micro-breaks Holding time for I max andvemin ms 0 Protection Short-circuit Permanent/automatic restart after elimination of the fault Overload. In Overvoltage Tripping if U >.2 Un U>. Un Undervoltage Tripping if U < 0.9 Un U<0.8 Un Operating characteristics Connections Input mm 2 2 x 2. screw terminals + earth Output mm 2 2 x 2. screw terminals + earth, multiple output Environment Storage temperature C -2to+70 Operating temperature C 0 to + 60 (derating from 0) Maximum relative humidity 9 % (without condensation or dripping water) Degree of protection IP 20 (conforming to IEC 29) Vibration EN 6-2 Operating position Vertical MTBF h > 00000 (conforming to Bell core, at 0 C) Dielectric strength Input/output 000 V/0 Hz/ mm Input/earth 000 V/0 Hz/ mm Output/earth (and input/output) 00V/0Hz/mm Input fuse incorporated Yes (not interchangeable) Emissions Conducted/radiated Class B (conforming to EN 022) Immunity Electrostatic discharge EN 6000--2 ( kv contact/8 kv air) Electromagnetic EN 6000-- level (0 V/m) Conducted interference EN 6000-- level (2 kv), EN 6000--6 (0 V) Mains interference EN 6000--. Presentation: page /60 References: page /6 Dimensions: page /6 Schneider Electric /6

Characteristics, selection platform Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies for AS-Interface Output characteristics Derating The ambient temperature is a determining factor which limits the power that an electronic power supply can deliver continuously. If the temperature around the electronic components is too high, their life will be significantly reduced. The graph below shows the power (in relation to the nominal power) which the power supply can deliver continuously, according to the ambient temperature. P/Pn (%) 0 20 00 80 60 0 20 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 60 70 Maximum operating temperature ( C) Selection Upstream protection of power supplies for use on the AS-Interface system Mains supply a V single-phase a 20 V single-phase Type of protection Single-pole Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker GB2 CBpp Gg fuse Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker Gg fuse 2-pole GB2 DBpp C60N GB2 DBpp C60N ASI ABLB002 GB2 pb07 MG27 () 2A GB2DB06 MG26() 2A ASI ABLB00 GB2 pb08 MG28 () A GB2DB07 MG7() 2A ASI ABLD002 GB2 pb07 MG27 () 2A GB2DB06 MG26() 2A ASI ABLD00 GB2 pb08 MG28 () A GB2DB07 MG7() 2A ASI ABLM02 GB2 pb07 MG27 () 2A GB2DB06 MG7() 2A () UL certified circuit-breaker. Function diagram. 6 7 0 N L + 2 2 V AS-i : 2, A AS-i + AS-i GND AS-i + AS-i GND 2 8 9 ON/OFF DDT 2 Supply AS-i + AS-i, and GND () AS-i + or 0 6 7 8 9 AS-i () Reset () Reset () Test Fault AS-i Fault + Fault () () () () (2) (2) (2) (2) Relay off Relay on Input at state 0 or contact open Input at state or contact closed LED off LED on () 0 ms min. (2) ms. () 20 ms. () Warning: the earth fault detector will only operate if the earth (GND) terminal is connected. Presentation: page /60 Characteristics: page /6 References: page /6 Dimensions: page /6 /62 Schneider Electric

References, dimensions, schemes platform Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies for AS-Interface ASI ABL regulated switch mode power supplies Mains input voltage 7 6 Hz Output voltage Nominal power Nominal current Auto-protect reset Earth fault detection Reference Weight V c V W A kg 00 20 single-phase wide range 0 72 2. auto no ASI ABLB002 0.800.8 auto no ASI ABLB00.00 72 2. auto yes ASI ABLD002 0.800.8 auto yes ASI ABLD00.00 0 + 2 2 x 72 2. + auto no ASI ABLM02.00 Dimensions Common side view ASI ABLB002 ASI ABLM02 Mounting on and 7 mm rails ASI ABLD002 ASI ABLp00 20 20 20 8 Schemes ASI ABLB00p ASI ABLD00p ASI ABLM02 N AS-i + L Filter AS-i GND AS-i + AS-i GND N AS-i + L Filter AS-i GND + ON/ OFF AS-i + AS-i Fault detector GND 2 Set N + L Filter AS-i + AS-i GND AS-i + AS-i GND. 2 V Presentation: page /60 Characteristics: page /6 Selection: page /62 Schneider Electric /6

Communication architecture platform Level Ethernet Monitor Pro Ethernet TCP/IP (Uni-TE, Modbus) Level 2 TSX Micro Ethernet TCP/IP (Uni-TE, Modbus) TSX ETZ TSX ETZ Modbus bus Uni-Telway bus Modem Premium ATV 28 Modem Level ATV 8 TSX Micro Fipway/Modbus Plus TSX Micro TSX Micro Magelis AS-Interface bus XAL control station. Nano Nano Intelligent sensor Nano Nano /6

Magelis ipc () Digital HP Service Global Data Ethernet TCP/IP (Modbus) Quantum + Web serveur Premium + Web serveur Quantum Ethernet Magelis ipc I/O Scanning Premium Momentum Modbus Plus TSX Micro Premium Bridge Premium ATV 8 TXBTFMagelis Premium I/O extension rack Sensors Quantum. AS-interface bus Premium I/O extension rack T AS-interface bus Motor starter Bus X XAL control station Intelligent sensors XBL keypad T Motor starter () PC industriel Magelis ipc in configuration Thin Client : PC having only Windows and an Internet browser. /6

X-Way and the OSI model platform X-way communication X-WayandtheOSImodel The communication architecture of the programmable TSX Micro/Premium PLCs, like that of TSX 7 or TSX model 0 PLCs, is compliant with the OSI model. Telegram 7 Application 6 Presentation Common words/shared table Application-to-application communications Uni-TE Uni-TE Modbus () Session Transport TCP Network X-Way addressing system IP 2 Link Uni-Telway WorldFip ISO 8802 Ethernet ISO 8802 Ethernet Physical RS 8 9.2 Kbps WorldFip Mbps ISO 8802 0 Mbps ISO 8802 0/00 Mbps Uni-Telway Fipio/Fipway Ethway Ethernet TCP The physical layer enables the physical transmission of data signals between 2 systems via a medium. In order for a network to operate correctly, and to ensure full security of personnel in compliance with IEC 2, it is necessary to implement the wiring recommendations described in the reference manual TSX DR NET F X-Way communication (or in the TSX CD DMTE E CD-ROM Technical documentation ). The application layer concerns application programs, data exchange and cooperation conventions. This layer provides the following services: b Industrial Uni-TE message, available on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX PLCs. b Distributed COM database available on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX PLCs, or Shared Table service available on TSX Micro/Premium PLCs. b Periodical data exchange on Fipio bus, see page /72. b Application-to-application communication. b Telegram.. Size of requests Ethway, Ethernet Fipway Fipio Uni-Telway TCP/IP () Uni-TE service 26 bytes (2) 28 bytes 28 bytes 20 bytes () COM service 26 word database () 28 word database Application-toapplication 26 bytes 28 bytes 28 bytes 20 bytes () Telegram 6 bytes ()EthwaynotavailableonTSXMicroPLC. (2) K bytes with requests executed as a background task. () 28 bytes on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX model 0 terminal port, 2 bytes on TSX 7 20/7 20/2. () COM service not available with Ethernet TCP/IP. Uni-TE services The Uni-TE protocol is the industrial message handling system supported by the X-Way communication architecture. It operates on the question/answer or request/confirmation principle. A device which supports the Uni-TE protocol can be a: b Client: this device initiates communication. It asks a question (reads), transmits data (writes) or sends an instruction (Run, Stop, etc.). b Server: this device executes the service requested by the client and sends a confirmation after execution. /66

X-Way and the OSI model (continued) platform X-way communication The services provided depend on the type of device (PLC, numerical controller, programming terminal, supervision station, etc.). Depending on its function, each device can be Client and/or Server. A Client PLC can access other devices on the architecture via its application program: It can read/write objects on another PLC or numerical controller, select programs on a numerical controller, etc. Network transparency When connected to any station in the network or directly connected to the Fipway/ Ethernet TCP/IP network, a programming terminal can communicate with any other station in the network (as if the terminal were physically connected to the PLC with which it is dialoguing). Network transparency also applies between stations connected to different segments of the same multinetwork architecture. COM service and Shared Table service (exclusive services one from another) The COM service is made up of a set of dedicated words called common words. Each Fipway/Ethway network station may or may not access the database (in read only or read/write mode). All PLC stations exchanging common words (2 stations on Fipway, 6 stations on Ethway) are allocated, in a dedicated database (28 words for Fipway, 26 words for Ethway), a write zone (set at words for the Fipway network, and variable from to 6 words for the Ethway network) per TSX Micro/Premium station. COM words are updated automatically during each scan of the general sequential program (master task) without the intervention of the application program. The Shared Table service can be used to exchange a table of internal words divided into as many zones as there are TSX Micro/Premium PLCs which comprise the Fipway network. The exchange principle is based on the broadcasting, by each PLC, of a word memory zone (broadcast zone) to the other PLCs on the network. Each network station is allocated an exchange table comprising 28 internal words for the 2 PLCs that share the service, with a broadcast zone assigned to each PLC, variable from to 2 internal words. Application-to-application communication This consists of using the user application program to send word tables between 2 devices, which may be TSX Micro/Premium and TSX PLCs. This service is particularly suitable for: b Sending alarm messages from a PLC to a supervision station. b Exchanging data tables between two PLCs controlled by the application programs of the transmission and destination device. b Sending broadcast messages to all stations and devices. Telegram The telegram service available on Fipway is a special case of application-toapplication messages. It enables short messages to be sent and received on a priority basis (maximum 6 characters). A telegram from a TSX Micro/Premium PLC is sent immediately without waiting for the end of the cycle. The telegram is received by the TSX Micro/Premium PLC in: b The event-triggered task (processed as soon as the message arrives in the network card). b The fast task or master task (when scanning the reception function). b A PLC can only process one telegram at a time.. Use in a multinetwork The X-Way communication architecture is designed to cover multinetwork applications capable of dealing with problems of: b Concentration, the architecture is particularly suitable for feedback of supervision data to a higher level. b Redundancy, each PLC monitors the correct operation of both networks to which it is connected. If one of the networks should fail, all traffic could be transferred to the valid network. b Inter-network communication. These architectures comprise several network segments which are interconnected by bridge PLC stations. Transparent communication is then offered between the entire architecture. /67

Presentation, connectable devices platform Fipio bus manager function Presentation Premium (Bus manager) Magelis IPC Magelis XBT, CCX7 Produits Tiers Momentum TBX Fipio Dust and damp proof TBX Micro (Agent) ATV Premium (Agent) AS-i AS-interface gateway The Fipio fieldbus is a standard means of communication between different control system components. It enables 27 devices to be connected at the connection point integrated in the processor. This fieldbus conforms to the WorldFip standard based on producer/consumer mechanisms. It is designed for remote location of l/o up to km away and enables a third-party Schneider Alliances device to be installed. The bus arbitrator (manager) can be a : b Premium PLC TSX P 7 p/2p/282/p/p/82/m. b Atrium slot-plc T PCX 7 /TSX PCI M. Characteristics see page /7. Fipio bus accessories and connecting cables, see pages /82 to /8. Connectable devices. Schneider Electric devices which can be connected on the Fipio bus include: b Micro/Premium Agent function (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 0 card). b CCX 7 operator panel (version 2. ) (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 0 card). b Magelis XBT-F graphic screen terminal (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 0 card) PCMCIA TSX FPP 20 card. b Le PC industriel Magelis IPC (via carte PCMCIA TSX FPC 0M). b Advantys STB distributed I/O (with STB NFP 222 network interface module). b Momentum distributed discrete, analogue or application-specific l/o (with 70 FNT 0 0 communication module version u.0). b TBX distributed discrete () or analogue l/o (IP 20) with TBX LEP 00 communication module version.2. b TBX distributed discrete dust and damp proof l/o (IP 6) (2) or TSX EpF (IP 67). b ATV 8/8/8F variable speed drive (via VW-A80/ card) and ATV 68 (via VW-A680 card). b TBX SAP 0 Fipio/AS-Interface gateway (2). b Partner products (see below). Fipio bus openness Collaborative Automation Partner Program is a programme of cooperation between Schneider Electric and its partners, offering automation products (hardware and software), system integration and other services to complement the Schneider Electric offer. The programme was established to improve the connection of devices from other control system suppliers on the Fipio bus. Connection of a wide variety of different brands of sensors and actuators offers the end user a choice of global, high-performance and low-cost control system solutions. () WorldFip mode is only supported by TBX discrete I/O modules version.. (TBX LEP 020). (2) WorldFip mode is only supported by modules version 2.0. Description: page /69 References: page /7 /68

Description, software setup platform Fipio bus manager function Fipio bus openness (continued) Schneider Electric has integrated specific WorldFip mechanisms into its PLCs and software in order to make them accessible to any automation system engineer without any particular expertise in this area. Schneider Electric products and partner products connected on Fipio then automatically reap the following benefits: simplified description of architectures and configuration of equipment, and also simple control system development and programming, operation and maintenance. Find out more about the Collaboprative Automation Partner Program at: www.collaboratveautomation.schneider-electric.com Description TSX P7 p/m () processors and the T PCX P7 /M slot-plc have on the front panel: A 9-way SUB-D connecdiscr. for connection to the bus via the TSX FP ACC 2/2 connector. TSX P 7p82M TPCXP7M Software setup Configuration Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software offer configuration screens which enable the declaration and immediate and intuitive configuration of the remote devices connected on the Fipio bus. 2 Each circle represents one connection point. 2 Clicking on a circle accesses the catalogue of devices which can be connected. Once confirmed, the Fipio bus configuration will appear. Processors fitted with the integrated Fipio link can manage 28 connection points on the bus (addresses 0 to 27). See page /70 for the table detailing limitations according to processor and type of device. Diagnostics. The diagnostic functions of the Fipio bus, integrated in the Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software, very quickly identify a fault on: b The bus medium. b Remote devices. 2 A graphic representation of the architecture displays the defective devices in red. 2 More detailed diagnostics can be accessed by double-clicking. In addition, special screens display an overview of all the faults appearing on the bus or on any device. On request, these faults can be recorded for later analysis. () The TSX P7 /M processor is a single format module. Presentation: page /68 References: page /7 /69

Maximum configuration platform Fipio bus manager function. Maximum configuration Product family Reference Base size (bytes) The Fipio bus enables a maximum of 28 devices to be connected. This limit can, in certain cases, be restricted depending on the type of bus manager processor and on the devices which are connected on the bus. The maximum number of devices which can be connected depends on: b The maximum size of memory space available for Fipio data which is v 920 bytes for TSX P7 p/2p/282/p processors and the T PCX 7 /TSX PCI 7 M slot-plc, v 20 bytes for the TSX P 7 p/82/m. b The total number of bytes consumed by each device (see table below). Extension size (bytes) Maximum number of connection points TSX P7p 2p/p p/p Maxi number of Fipio devices () 6 27 27 ATV 8/8 With VW-A80 card 808 2 2 62 ATV 8/8/8F With VW-A8 card 280 62 62 62 ATV 68 With VW-A680 card 280 62 62 62 Lexium MHDA With AM0 FIP 00V000 card 2 62 62 62 CCX 7 T CCX 720 F/FPS, 92 T CCX 7p0 L/LPS Magelis XBT-F With TSX FPP 0 card 2 62 62 62 Magelis IPC, compatible PC With TSX FPP 20 (address 6) Inductel, read/write stations XGK-S02, XGP-S0202 With 808 2 2 62 VW-A80 card Advantys STB STB NFP 222 82, 896, or 280 (2) 62, 06 or 7 26 Momentum 70 ADI ppp/ado ppp, 70 ADM 0 0/, 70 ARM 70 0/90 0/0, 70 ADM 690, 70 ARN 20 90, 70ARM700/900 70 AAI 00 00/20 0, 70 AAO 20 00/92 00, 70 AEC 920 00, 70AMM09000 82, 896 or 280 (2) 62 98 98 808 2 2 98 70AAI000 20 0 0 92 TBX () TBX AES 200/ASS 00() 2 62 70 26 272 9 9 26 (2/ chan. extens.) TBX AMS 620 8 9 9 26 272 (2 chan. extens.) ( chan. extens.) 28 6 () (8 chan.extens.) TBX CEP 622/CSP 622/62 2 TBX DES 6pp/DMS6pp/DSS6pp 2 62 8 26 (extension) 62 6 () 6 () TBX DSS 2 2 (extension) 62 72 8 () TBX DMS 02 2 (extension) 62 72 02 () TBX EEP/ESP 08C22/622 (IP 6) 2 62 6 26 TBX SAP 0 808 2 2 7 I/O IP 67 TSX EEF 08D2/EEF 6D2 82 62 98 98 TSX ESF 08T22/EMF 6DT2 808 2 2 98 Micro/Premium Agent With TSX FPP 0 card 2 62 62 62 FipConnect profile FRD C2 82 62 26 FRD C2P 7 22 FSD C8 896 62 0 26 FSD C8P 808 2 2 7 FSD M8 00 62 90 26 FSD M8P 92 8 8 09 FED C2 280 62 7 26 FED C2P 20 0 0 92 FED M2 2 62 66 26 FED M2P 28 8 8 87 Not applicable () Address 6 is reserved for the programming and diagnostic terminal. (2) Depending on the I/O number of island. () Do not mix discrete and analogue base units on the same Fipio connection point. () The number of analogue channels for TBX base units (AES, ASS or AMS) is limited to 008. () The number of channels for TBX base units (DES, DMS or DSS) is limited to 208. 0 0 0 0 00 () 8 () /70

Application services, references platform Fipio bus manager function Application services TSX P7 M When using the bus manager function, the application services supported by the Premium PLCs are: b Remote l/o Remote l/o modules are addressed by the PL7 application program as In rack l/o, with which they can of course coexist. This service enables the exchange of l/o status variables and output command variables. These exchanges are carried out in a cyclical and deterministic manner and without intervention from the application program. The manager also manages remote devices (configuration) in an aperiodic manner, without intervention from the application program. b Uni-TE service X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for MMI, diagnostics and control functions (requests of 28 bytes maximum). b Application-to-application service This service consists of sending tables between 2 devices under the control of their respective application programs (requests of 28 bytes maximum). b Terminal transparency Terminals connected on a higher level X-way network or on the manager PLC terminal port communicate with the devices on the bus. This is also the case when the terminal is connected at the priority address 6. TSX P7 2//M TSX P7 /M Processors and coprocessor Type and max. no. of racks TSX P7 pm racks TSX P7 2pM TSX P7 282M 6 racks TSX P7 pm 6 racks TSX P7 pm TSX P7 82M 6 racks TSX P7 M 6 racks With software Reference () Weight kg Unity Pro Voir page /2 PL7 Junior/Pro Voir page / Unity Pro Voir page /2 PL7 Junior/Pro Voir page / Unity Pro Voir page /2 Unity Pro Voir page / PL7 Junior/Pro Voir page / Unity Pro Voir page / T PCX 7 M Accessories and connecting cables () Description Use Material Reference Weight kg Female connectors (9-way SUB-D) Processors and slot-plcs with Fipio integrated link Polycarbonate black TSX FP ACC 2 0.00 (IP 20) Zamac TSX FP ACC 2 0.080. () For other accessories and Fipio bus connecting cables, see pages /82 and /8. TSX FP ACC 2 Presentation: page /68 Description: page /69 /7

Presentation platform Fipio bus Agent function Presentation Premium (bus manager) Lexium Momentum TSX Micro (Agent) CCX 7 Fipio bus ATV 8 Intelligent sensors Premium (Agent) XAL keyboard Bus AS-Interface Motor starter T TSX Micro (TSX 7 2/22) or Premium PLCs, fitted with a TSX FPP 0 PCMCIA card on their integrated communication channel, are agents on the Fipio bus. The bus manager is a TSX P 7 p/2p/282/p/p/82/m, Atrium slot-plc T PCX 7 /TSX PCI M. The Fipio bus enables I/O to be remotely located close to the devices to be controlled (Momentum, Altivar, etc). The Agent function enables offline processing, by locating a TSX Micro PLC close to the machine. In addition to the standard Fipio services (see pages /66 to /67), TSX Micro (TSX 7 2/22) and Premium PLCs allow exchanges of input and output variables with the bus manager PLC. These exchanges are performed cyclically, automatically and without the involvement of the application program at the same rate as the task for which the agent PLC has been configured. For characteristics, Fipio bus wiring system and connection accessories, see pages /82 to /8.. Application services The application services supported by TSX Micro (TSX 7 2/22) and Premium Agent function PLCs are: b Uni-TE service, X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for operator dialogue, diagnostics and control functions (requests of up to 28 bytes). b Application-to-application communication service, which consists of the transmission of tables between 2 devices controlled by their respective application programs (messages of up to 28 bytes). b New periodic data exchange service for exchanging a 6 word table between the bus manager PLC and the Premium Agent PLC. Sofware setup see page /7. Characteristics: page /7 /72 References: page /7 Description: page /7

Characteristics platform Fipio bus Agent function Characteristics The Fipio industrial fieldbus is standard of communication between various control system components. It conforms to the WorldFip standard. Type of bus/network Fipio bus Structure Type Open industrial fieldbus conforming to WordFip standard Topology Devices linked by daisy-chaining or tap link connections Maximum length m 000 Access method Producer/consummer principal Management by fixed arbitrator Transmission Mode Physical layer in baseband on shielded twisted pair, conforming to NF C 6 60 Data rate Mbit/s Medium 0 Ω shielded twisted pair, 62./2 ou 0/2 fibre optic using electrical/fibre optic repeaters Configuration Number of devices Per segment 2 connexion points per segment Maxi 28onallsegments Segments Number Unlimited Length m 000 maxi per electric segment 000 maxi per optical segment Services Input/output exchanges Periodic and deterministic exchanges of variables between bus manager PLC and Agent PLC (6 %MWi consecutive words: 2 %MWi for transmmission and 2 %MWi for reception) Uni-TE Point-to-point requests with confirmation report: 28 bytes maximum, can be used by all devices connected to the same X-Way architecture (access by the Client device to the Server device system functions). Application-to-application Point-to-point messages: 28 bytes maximum between 2 devices, can be used by all TSX Micro()/Premium/TSX Serie 7 Security Control characters in each frame and acknowledgement of point-to-point messages conforming to standard NF C 6 60 () TSX 7 2/22 only. Presentation: page /72 References: page /7 Description: page /7 /7

Software setup, description platform Fipio bus Agent function Software setup Each TSX Micro/Premium PLC Fipio Agent uses 6 %MWi consecutive internal words to exchange periodic data. The first 2 words are reserved for sending data to the manager, and the remaining 2 are reserved for receiving data from the manager. Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro application-specific screens allow the configuration of the Fipio Agent PCMCIA card. This consists of: b Indicating the connection point number ( to 27). b Indicating the address at the beginning of the 6 %MW word table reserved for sending data to and receiving data from the manager. Description TSX Micro (TSX 7 2/22)/Premium PLCs have a slot in the processor for a type III PCMCIA communication card. This can be fitted with a TSX FPP 0 Fipio bus connection card. The TSX FPP 0 card comprises: 2 A protective cover. 2 A removable cover with fixing screws giving access to the 20 way miniature connector. Two indicator lamps: v ERR lamp: card fault, link fault, v COM lamp: transmission or reception of data. Connector to be ordered separately: TSX FP CG 00/00, or m cable for connecting the TSX FP ACC tap junction (on 9-way SUB-D connector).. Presentation: page /72 /7 Characteristics: page /7 Description: page /7

References platform Fipio bus Agent function TSX FPP 0 TSX FP ACC References Fipio bus connection component Description Composition Use Reference Weight kg Fipio Agent function card typeiiipcmcia Version V.8 On TSX Micro processors (TSX 7 2/22), Premium processors and Atrium slot-plcs TSX FPP 0 0.0 Fipio bus connection accessories () Description Use Reference Weight kg Insulated bus cable connector (in black polycarbonate, IP 20) Trunk cable tap link, supports 2 x 9-way female SUB-D connectors (for TSX FP CG 00/00 PCMCIA card cable), for connection of TBX dust and damp proof module c 2 V supply TSXFPACC 0.090 Dust anddamp Trunk cable tap link TSXFPACC 0.660 proof bus cable connector TSX FP ACC Fipio bus connection cables () Description Use From To Cables for PCMCIA card TSX FPP 0 TSX FP ACC card (miniature cable connector connector) (9-way SUB-D connector) Length Reference Weight kg m TSXFPCG00 0.20 m TSXFPCG00 0.0 TSX FP CG 00/00 () For other Fipio bus accessories and connection cables, see pages /8 and /8.. Presentation: page /72 Characteristics: page /7 References: page /7 /7

Presentation platform Fipway network Presentation Ethernet TCP/IP Magelis ipc Premium Fipway TSX Premium Bus X TSX 7 20 TSX Micro The Fipway network is an open local area network for communication between the various TSX Micro, Premium and TSX Series 7 PLCs using the X-Way services. Communication conforms to the FIP standard with access via a bus arbitrator. TSX Micro (TSX 7 2/22) and Premium PLCs can be connected to a Fipway network using a Fipway PCMCIA card which is inserted in each processor or into the TSX SCY 260 (Premium) communication module. Supported X-Way services (see pages /66 to /67) are: b Uni-TE services. b Distributed database (COM) or Shared Table. b Telegram (service only available when the PCMCIA card is inserted in the processor). b Application-to-application communication. For characteristics, Fipway network wiring and connection accessories, see pages /82 to /8.. Characteristics: page /77 /76 References: page /78 Performances: page /79

Characteristics platform Fipway network Characteristics The Fipio industrial fieldbus is standard of communication between various control system components. It conforms to the WorldFip standard. Type of bus/network Fipway network Structure Type Open industrial fieldbus conforming to WordFip standard Topology Devices linked by daisy-chaining or tap link connections Maximum length m 000 Access method Producer/consummer principal Management by fixed arbitrator Transmission Mode Physical layer in baseband on shielded twisted pair, conforming to NF C 6 60 Data rate Mbit/s Medium 0 Ω shielded twisted pair, 62./2 ou 0/2 fibre optic using electrical/fibre optic repeaters Configuration Number of devices Per segment 2 stations Maxi 6 stations Segments Number Unlimited Length m 000 maximum per electrical segment 000 maximum per optical segment Services COM () Distributed database: 28 mots maximum 0or%NWiwordsforTSXMicroandPremiumstationwithaddresses0to Shared table() Uni-TE Application-to-application Shared table of internal words: 28 words maximum to 2 % MWi words per TSX Micro and Premium station with addresses 0 to (2) Point-to-point requests with confirmation report: 28 bytes maximum, can be used by all devices connected to the same X-Way architecture (access by the Client device to the Server device system functions) Point-to-point messages: 28 bytes maximum between 2 devices, can be used by all TSX Micro ()/Premium/TSX Serie 7 Telegram Point-to-point priority messages: 6 bytes maximum between 2 Premium () or TSX Series 7 stations with addresses 0 to. Security Control characters in each frame and acknowledgement of point-to-point messages conforming to standard NF C 6 60 () The COM and Shared table service are mutualy exclusive. (2) Service reserved for TSX Micro and Premium PLCs. () Service only available when Fipway PCMCIA card is installed in the processor. Presentation: page /76 References: page /78 Performances: page /79 /77

Performances, description platform Fipway network Performances The operating principle of a Fipway network gives ensured, constant network cycle times whatever the traffic and number of stations (2 to 6). This enables the Fipway network to be updated (addition or removal of stations) without changing the performance. Event Report Maximum transmission time b Telegram (TLG): priority application messages are transmitted in less than 0 ms (one telegram per station). b Common words (COM): the database of common words is updated every 0 ms. b Shared Table: the exchange table is updated every 0 ms. Uni-TE message handling system: Uni-TE or standard application-to-application messages are normally transmitted in less than 80 ms (0 ms for stations with addresses below 2). Where there is a large amount of traffic, some messages can wait for several cycles before being transmitted. The network characteristics enable a maximum of 20 messages of 28 bytes per second to be transmitted. Device CT CT CT CT Fipway network NCT NCT Device 2 CT2 CT2 Action The performance can be improved by inhibiting the Telegram service in the network. With such network characteristics, the response time at application level depends almost exclusively on the processing capacity of the devices which are connected. For example, the remote loading of a 0 K word program takes less than two minutes on a network with normal load. CT=Cycletimeofdevice. NCT = Cycle time of Fipway network. CT2=Cycletimeofdevice2. The response time must be evaluated by the designer of each application in relation to the devices connected. The processing time of a device can vary from one to two cycle times as a function of asynchronous operation. Connectable devices TSX 7 PLCs Magelis ipc industrial PC Magelis operator dialogue terminals. Connection via Fipio/Fipway integrated link or via the TSX FPM 00 module of TSX/PMX model 0 PLCs. Connection via the TSX FPG 0 module of TSX720TSXMicro PLCs. Equipped with TSX FPC 0M for PC compatible (ISA bus). They access all devices in the X-Way architecture. The various X-Way drivers are available on CD-ROM. Connection via the TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card. Presentation: page /76 /78 Characteristics: page /77 References: page /78

Description, references platform Fipway network Description 2 TSX Micro/Premium PLCs have a slot on the processor for a type III PCMCIA communication card. This can be fitted with the TSX FPP 20 fipway network connection card, which is also inserted into the TSX SCY 260 communication module slot. The TSX FPP 20 card comprises: Protective cover 2 Removable cover with fixing screws for access to the 20-way miniature connector Two indicator lamps: v ERR lamp: card fault, link fault, v COM lamp: data transmission or reception. Connector to be ordered separately: TSX FP CG 00/00, or m cable for connection to the TSX FP ACC /ACC T-junction box (on 9-way SUB-D connector). References TSX FPP 20 Description Fipway card Number per Premium PLC with720 with70 with720 with70 with70 Use Type lll slot on, - TSX Micro -PremiumPLC - Atrium slot-plc - TSX SCY 260 module Composition typelll PCMCIA card Reference Weight kg TSX FPP 20 0.0 Communication module See page /0 For Premium PLC or Atrium slot-plc - isolated 2 wire RS 8 integrated channel (Half-duplex) -slotfortypelll PCMCIA card 2 channels TSX SCY 260 0.60 TSX SCY 260 SetofX-Way drivers for PC compatible Includes all X-Way drivers CD-Rom TLX CD DRV 20 M Connection cables and accessories () Description Use From To Cables for PCMCIA TSX FPP 20 card (miniature connector) TSXFPACC/ box (SUB-D 9-way connector) Length Reference Weight kg m TSXFPCG00 0.20 m TSXFPCG00 0.0. TSX FP CG 00/00 () For other Fipway network accessories and connection cables, see pages /8 and /8. Presentation: page /76 Characteristics: page /77 Performances: page /78 /79

Presentation platform Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver Presentation The OZD FIP G optic transceivers are particularly adapted for use with applications which are subject to harsh electrical environments or which are distributed over large areas: b Public buildings. b Large-scale industrial sites. b Water treatment and distribution. b Transport and highway tunnel infrastructures, etc. The OZD FIP G optic transceiver enables conversion of a FIP electric interface to 2 FIP optic interfaces and vice versa. As a result, it allows redundant ring topologies to exist; these improve installation availability even when a line is broken at a point in the medium. In these situations, the length of the bus or the Fipio/Fipway ring can reach 20 Km, with a maximum of 2 Fipio or 20 Fipway transceivers. See characteristics on page /8. These characteristics may be increased using mixed topologies such as 2 serial optic rings or 2 serial optic buses; please consult our regional office. Wiring system Premium CCX 7 2 6 6 2 6 6 Optic ring 6 6 6 2 6 2 6 2 6. TSX Micro or Premium + TSX FPP 0 Third party Momentum Magelis ipc + TSX FPC 0M OZD FIF GG: Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver. 2 TSXFPCAp00: 0 Ω shielded twisted pair trunk cable (diameter 8 mm) for use in standard environments and inside buildings. TSXFPCG0p0: tap-off connection cable for TSX FPP 0/20 PCMCIA module card for TSX Micro/Premium PLCs. TSXFPACC/:T-junction box. It also has two 9-way female SUB-D connectors for connecting any device which connects to the bus by a PCMCIA card. TSX FP ACC 2/2: 9-way female SUB-D connector for Fipway/Fipio connection using daisy chaining or tap link connection. 6 TSXFPACC7:line terminator to be placed at each segment end. TSX LES 6: terminal block for TSX Series 7 PLC, which performs the address coding. Characteristics: page /8 References: page /8 /80

Presentation (continued), characteristics, references platform Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver Performances Fipio bus operating mode and performance on fiber optics After configuration in Fipio mode, the processor scans the various application devices according to the software configuration: b Image variables of the input values and of the output command values of a configured device are scanned as quickly as possible on the bus, whilst respecting the existing relationships between periods of different tasks which use these devices. b Appearance or disappearance of a configured device is detected on the bus within a maximum time of 200 ms. b Exchanges occur at the rate defined by the programmer, from 0 to 20 Uni-TE messages per second. The network cycle time is double that of the electrical bus when OZD FIP G transceivers are used. Fipway bus operating mode and performance on fiber optics The operating principle is identical to that on an electrical network, in that the number of stations is limited to 2 and the transmission time is as follows: b For the Common words and Shared Table services, updating of the entire database is carried out every 0 ms maximum. For Uni-TE message handling, the network characteristics are used to transmit a maximum of 20 messages of 28 bytes per second. Characteristics (with OZD FIP G optic transceivers) () Type of bus/network Fipio bus Fipway network Structure Type Open industrial support conforming to Fip standard Topology In redundant rings or in a line with simple redundant links Access method Producer/consumer principle Management by a fixed arbitrator Producer/consumer principle Management by an automatically elected arbitrator Transmission Mode Multimode (860 nanometres) Data rate Mbit/s Medium (2) Fiber optic 0/2-7 dbm or 62./2 - dbm Inter-repeater distance 2,00 m for 0/2 and 2,800 m for 62./2 Configuration No. of connection points 2 optic transceivers 20 optic transceivers Services References Maximum no. of devices No.ofsegments Length Maximum optic distance between 2 OZD FIP G transceivers Tap links Description Optic transceiver Fipio/Fipway () 6 Fipio devices can be connected to the same fiber optic transceiver 6 stations can be connected to the same fiber optic transceiver but the maximum number of stations is 2 The loop (or fiber optic line) is similar to a non cascadable segment Maximum circumference of the ring (or length of the line): 20 km,00 m, with the following on the ring or the line: 2 optic transceivers 2,000 m, with the following on the ring or the line: < 2 optic transceivers,000 m, with the following on the ring or the line: 2 optic transceivers From the OZD FIP G fiber optic transceiver, the maximum length of the electrical tap link is 00 m Same as page /66 except for the Telegram service, which is not available with OZD FIP G fiber optic transceiver. Max. number of transceivers 2 with Fipio 20 with Fipway Connectable devices Fipio bus Fipway network Reference Weight kg - TSX Micro/Premium/Atrium - TBX remote I/Os with TBX LEP 0 - Remote Momentum I/O TSX Micro, Premium, Atrium (with TSX FPP 20 OZD FIP G 0.00 - CCX 7 panels (version 2.) PCMCIA card) - Magelis ipc industrial PCs -Lexiumdrives,etc.. TSX Micro/Premium PLC connection components () OZD FIP G Description Use Composition Reference Weight kg Fipway card TSX FPP OZD 200 0.0 TSX 7 2/22 Micro PLC, Premium processor, Atrium slot-plc typeiii PCMCIA card Fipio card agent function TSX 7 2/22 Micro PLC, Premium processor, Atrium slot-plc typeiii PCMCIA card TSX FPP 0 0.0 TSX FPP 20/0 () These characteristics can be increased using mixed topologies; please consult our regional office. (2) Devices connected on electrical tap links are compatible with the WorldFip physical layer. () For TSX FP ACC 8M fiber optic electrical repeater, see page /8. () For accessories and connection cables, see pages /8 and /8. Presentation: page /80 /8

Connections platform Fipio bus and Fipway network Fipio bus and Fipway network wiring system TSX Micro Agent Premium Agent Magelis XBT F Magelis ipc Compatible PC CCX 7 FipConnect third-party products TSX 7 20 Premium bus manager Momentum Lexium, ATV 8/8/68 FipConnect third-party products TSX SAP 0 TBX (IP 20) TSX 7 20 Premium (bus manager) Momentum Lexium, ATV 8/8/68 FipConnect third product TSX SAP 0 TBX (IP 20) 9 0 9 0 or or 7 Daisy or 7 8 chaining 6 8 6 2 V or 2 or 2 or 2 2 V Daisy Fiber optic link chaining 2 2 V or 2 Daisy chaining TSX Serie 7 model 0 with PCMCIA TSX Series 7 model 0 Integrated link TSX Series 7 model 0 Integrated link Proof I/O IP 6 or IP 67 (). F Connection to Fipway network and Fipio bus Connection to Fipway bus Connection to Fipio bus () Dust and damp proof I/O modules on Fipio bus for IP 6 modules: TBX EEP/ESP modules and connections, see pages / to /8, IP 67 modules: TSX EEF/ESF/EMF modules and connections, see pages /60 to /69. Connectable devices Devices to be connected on Fipio Boxes Connectors TSX FP TSX FP TSX FP TBX FP ACC 8 ACC 6 ACC 7 ACC0 TSX EF ACC99 TSX FP TSX FP TBX ACC 2 9 ACC2 9 BLP0 0 TBX BLP0 TBX BAS0 Premium Fipio Agent D D Premium bus manager D D C/D C/D TSX Micro Fipio Agent D D Lexium D D C/D C/D ATV 8E D D C/D ATV 8H/P/F, ATV 68/68F D D C/D CCX 7 D D Industrial Magelis ipc PCs D D XBT F Magelis terminals D D PC compatible D D Momentum D D C/D C/D TBXIP20 D D C/D TBX IP 6 with telealimentation C/D (2) C/D C/D () TBX IP 6 without telealimentation D () D D () IP 67 I/O C/D TBX SAP 0 AS-i gateway D D C/D Devices to be connected on Fipway Boxes Connectors TSX FP ACC 8 TSX FP TSX FP TBX FP ACC 6 ACC 7 ACC0 TSX EF ACC99 TSX FP TSX FP TBX ACC2 9 ACC2 9 BLP0 TBX BLP0 Premium D D TSX Micro D D TSX Series 7 model 0 (integrated link) D D C/D TSX Series 7 model 0 (PCMCIA) D D TSX 7 20 D D C/D C/D XBT F Magelis terminals D D Magelis ipc industrial PC D D PC compatible D D LUF P Modbus gateway D D C/D C/D TBX BAS0 recommended connection C: connection by daisy chaining possible connection D: connection by tap link () Possible if only one TBX IP 6 module is used. (2) The connection by daisy chaining with the TBX FP ACC 0 connection box is only possible with the first TBX module on Fipio bus. () The TBX BAS connector is only used for TBX IP 6 output modules. /82

Connections (continued) platform Fipio bus and Fipway network Cables TSXFPCAp00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 0 Ω (8 mm diameter) for normal environments and use inside buildings. 2 TSXFPCFp00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 0 Ω andx.mm 2 pair for remote supply (9. mm diameter) for harsh environments and use outside buildings. TSX FP CCp00: tap link cable, shielded twisted pair 0 Ω ( 8 mm diameter) for normal environments and use inside buildings. TSXFPCG0p0: tap link connecting cable for PCMCIA TSX FPP 0/20 communication card for TSX Micro/Premium/TSX Series 7 PLCs, FT 200 terminals and PC compatibles. Connection to the bus is via a 9-way SUB-D connector on the TSX FP ACC/ACC junction box. TSXFPCE00: tap link connecting cable for TSX FPC 0 or FCP FPC 0 PC communication card (ISA bus) for Magelis ipc and PC compatibles. Connection to the bus is via a 9-way SUB-D connector on the TSX FP ACC /ACC junction box. Connection boxes 6 TSXFPACC: Polycarbonate IP 20 junction box: provides tap link from the trunk cable to connect device via TSX FP CCp00 tap link cable or several devices in a daisy chain. 7 TSXFPACC: IP 20 box for connecting 2 PC or PCMCIA cards (TSX FPP 0, TSX FPC 0, TSX FPP 20/200, FCP FPP 0) on a 9-way SUB-D connector. 8 TSX FP ACC: IP 6 junction box. It also has a 9-way female SUB-D connector for any device which is connected to the bus via a PCMCIA card (in this case, the box is IP 20). TSX EF ACC99: IP 6 junction box for IP 67 I/O modules, see page /67. Connectors 9 TSX FP ACC2 and TSXFPACC2:9-way female SUB-D connector for Fipway/Fipio connection (TSX FP ACC 2 connector for TSX 7 20 micro-plc for example). Used for daisy chain or tap link connection (90 output high or low, output high or low). 0 TBX BLP0: connector for TBX I/O modules (IP 20). TSX LES6: connecting cable for TSX/PMX model 0 PLCs. Used for address coding. 2 TSXFPACC6: electrical repeater: used to increase the number of stations (max 6) and the length of the network by creating an additional segment of up to 000 m (a maximum of repeaters in cascade giving a network length of 000 m). TSX EF Cppp: dust and damp proof connectors for IP 67 I/O modules, see page /69.. Other elements TSXFPACC8M:fibre optic/electrical repeater: used to connect electrical segments via a fibre optic link (particularly suitable for zones with a high level of interference) or to connect a fibre optic device. TSXFPACC7: Line terminator, to be installed at both ends of a segment. TSX FP JF020: fibre optic jumper (length 2 m). For fibre optic connection of the TSX FP ACC 8M repeater to a patch panel. The maximum length of the fibre optic cable (62./2) between 2 repeaters is 000 m. TSX EF ACC7: line terminator, to be installed at both ends of a segment requiring IP 67 protection, see page /69. TSXFPACC9: network wiring test tool. This is used for testing the continuity of segments, the connections of the various devices and the installation of line terminators. /8

References platform Fipio bus and Fipway network Fipway network/fipio bus connection accessories () TSX FP ACC 2 Description Use Rep. Reference Weight kg Female connector for TSX FPG0p module (TSX 7 micro-plcs) Connection by daisy chaining Zamac material 9 TSX FP ACC2 0.080 Female isolating Connection by daisy chaining connector for devices with or tap link black polycarbonate material IP 20 9-way SUB-D connectors 0 TSX FP ACC2 0.00 Insulated bus connection Trunk cable tap link (for connecting the c 2 V 6 TSX FP ACC 0.20 box power supply of TBX dust and damp proof modules) (black polycarbonate, IP 20) TSXFPACC Dust and damp proof bus connection box (Zamac material, IP 6) Trunk cable tap link supports 2 x 9-way SUB-D female connectors (for PCMCIA card cable TSX FP CG 00/00) For connecting c 2 V power supply of TBX dust and damp proof modules Trunk cable tap link, supports x 9-way female SUB-D connector (for PCMCIA card cable TSX FP CG 00/00) 7 TSX FP ACC 0.090 8 TSX FP ACC 0.660 TSX FP ACC Line terminators (soldinlotsof2) Trunk cable tap link via 2 M2 connectors Remote c 2 V power distribution via 7/8 connector PC compatible terminal connection via 9-way female SUB-D connector TSX EF ACC99 0.7 2 impedance adaptors TSX EF ACC7 0.020 TSX FP ACC Electrical repeater (IP 6) Increases the length of the network or bus by 2 TSX FP ACC6 0.20 allowing the connection of 2 segments of up to 000 meach Electrical/fibre optic repeater (IP 6) Used to connect (via patch panel) an electrical segment (000 m max.) and a fibre optic segment (000 m max.) TSX FP ACC8M 0.620 TSX EF ACC99 FIP wiring test tool Used to test each cable segment of the network TSX FP ACC9 0.00. Fipio/Fipway communication cards PCMCIA cards Type III cards See pages /7 and /79 ISA bus PC card Fipio/Fipway connection card for PC compatible Card with short format on ISA bus Windows 9/98 and Windows NT compatible TSX FPC0M 0.0 () The characteristics and performances of the Fipio bus or Fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP accessories being used. /8

References (continued), Dimensions platform Fipio bus and Fipway network Fipway network/fipio bus connecting cables () Description Type Conditions of use Rep. Length Reference Weight kg Trunk cables 8mm In normal environment shielded twisted (2) pair 0 Ω andinsidebuilding 00 m TSX FP CA00.680 200 m TSX FP CA200 0.920 00 m TSX FP CA00 0.000 Tap link cables 9. mm, shielded twisted pair 0 Ω In harsh environment () outside building or in garland () 9. mm, shielded I/O IP 67, twisted pair 0 Ω In normal environment and x. mm 2 pair (2) and inside building for remote supply 8 mm, 2 shielded In normal environment twisted pairs 0 Ω (2) and inside building 00 m TSX FP CR00 7.680 200 m TSX FP CR200.920 00 m TSX FP CR00 0.000 00 m TSX FP CP00 7.680 00 m TSX FP CP00 0.000 00 m TSX FP CC00.680 200 m TSX FP CC200 0.920 00 m TSX FP CC00 0.000 CableforPCscard 2 shielded twisted pairs From TSX FPC0M card to TSX FP ACC/ box m TSX FP CE00 0.0 Fibre optic jumper Double fibre optic 62./2 For electrical/fibre optic repeater 2m TSX FP JF020 0.0 () The characteristics and performances of the Fipio bus/fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP accessories being used. (2) Normal environment: v without special environmental restrictions, v operating temperature between + C and + 60 C, v fixed installations. () Harsh environment: v resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder chips, v up to 00% humidity, v saline environment, v extreme variations in temperature, v operating temperature between - 0 C and + 70 C, v mobile installations. () Mobile installations: cables as per VDE 72, part 60/H: v for use on cable drag chain with minimum bend radius of 7 mm, v for use on gantry crane (strikethrough: portal support), subject to compliance with conditions for use such as acceleration, speed, length etc: contact our regional branch office for further information. v not authorized for use on robots, or multi-axis applications. Dimensions TSX FP ACC TSX FP ACC6 TSX FP ACC8M TSX FP ACC 80 20 = 0 = 7 = 60 = 27 220 6 = 20 = 0 20 = 6 = 80 20 20 20 RUN DEF ø = 0 = 2 8 20 RUN DEF ø = 0 = 2 79 68. /8

Wiring system platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, connection by 0BASE interface (AUI) Wiring system TSX ETY 0/0 WS modules can take an AUI connector which enables direct connection to an Ethernet 0BASE segment with the accessories and cables described below. Connection by 0BASE interface (AUI) 7 6 TSX ETY 0/0WS 2 7 TSX ETY 0/0 TSX ETY 0/0WS 8 2. TSX ETH CA pp0 trunk cable, triaxial cable (0 Ω coaxial with shielding) male N type connector to be fitted to each end. TSX ETH CD 02 trunk cable, triaxial cable equipped with N type connectors, length 2. m. Corresponds to minimum length between 2 TSX ETH ACC 2 transceivers. 2 TSX ETY CB 0pp drop cable, shielded twisted pair cable, AUI interface (a straight connector and an elbow connector). TSX ETY CC 0pp drop cable, shielded twisted pair cable, AUI interface (two straight connectors). TSX ETH ACC 2 transceiver, AUI interface. Enables a device to be connected to the Ethway network (obligatory when connecting two modules in point-to-point). TSX ETH ACC male N type connector for trunk cable. 6 TSX ETH ACC female/female adaptor for extension of trunk cable. 7 TSX ETH ACC (0 Ω) line terminator (includes an isolated terminator and a non isolated terminator which must be connected to the installation grounding network. One assembly per segment is required). Wiring system: page /86 /86

References platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, connection by 0BASE interface (AUI) TSX ETH ACC 2 AUI interface accessories for connecting to the Ethernet network Description Use No () Ethernet transceiver Access point to any network Order in Unit reference multiples of Weight kg TSX ETH ACC 2 0.76 Mini transceiver Canbeusedtoconnect 0BASE Ethernet station on a 0BASE-T network TSX ETH NTR Connector for trunk cable Must be fitted to both 0 TSX ETH ACC 0.00 ends of cable segment on trunk cable Female/female adaptor Extension of 2 cable segments on trunk cable 6 0 TSX ETH ACC 0.00 Line terminator kit Impedance adaptor 7 TSX ETH ACC 0.070 Ethernet network connecting cables Description Connectors No () Trunk cables (radius curvature min. 00mm) Length Reference Weight kg 2 type N 2. m TSX ETH CD 02 0.80 To be equipped with 2 TSX ETH ACC male N type connectors 2. m TSX ETH CA 020.60 7 m TSX ETH CA 00.600 20.6 m TSX ETH CA 200 8.00 Drop cables (radius curvature min. 6mm) -way, SUB-D straight, elbow (module side) 2 m TSX ETY CB 00 0.0 0 m TSX ETY CB 00 0.980 20 m TSX ETY CB 020.820 -way, SUB-D, m TSX ETH CC 00 0.0 2 straight (for FTX 7 or PC compatible connection) 0 m TSX ETH CC 00 0.980. 20 m TSX ETH CC 020.820 Description Use Reference (2) Ethernet 0BASE installation kit Masse kg FittingTSXETHACContrunkcable TSX ETH ACC 0M.800 () See page /86 for key. (2) The letter M at the end of a reference indicates that the product is supplied with documentation in English and in French. References: page /86 /87

Presentation platform Modbus Plus network Presentation Premium Ethernet TCP/IP or Fipway Premium Momentum 2 Quantum Momentum Lexium MHDA XBT-F Modbus Plus Bridge Premium Third-party device TSX Micro ATV 8 Modbus Plus Gateway 2 Modbus Quantum Modbus device The Modbus Plus network is a high-performance industrial local network which can respond to Client/Server type extended architectures,combining a high data rate ( Mbit/s), simple and economical transmission support and several message handling services. The main data exchange functions between all devices connected to the network are: b The message exchange function according to the Modbus protocol. b The global database function (Shared Table service, periodic, controlled by the application: a station with the token can send 2 words to a maximum of 6 other stations connected on the network). The Premium (or TSX Micro) client communicates with the Quantum server on the Modbus Plus network via function block (communication function). 2 The Quantum client communicates with the Premium server on the Modbus Plus network via MSTR function blocks.. A Premium (or TSX Micro) client connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP or Fipway network can communicate in read/write mode with a Modbus Plus station (the Premium PLC therefore acts as a gateway). A Premium (or TSX Micro) client connected to the Modbus Plus network can access a remote station via the Modbus Plus/Modbus gateway. A Premium client connected to the Modbus Plus network can make exchanges with the Momentum distributed inputs/outputs via the Peer cop function. /88

Description, characteristics platform Modbus Plus network Description The type III TSX MBP 00 card is used to connect the Premium/TSX Micro PLCs and Atrium slot-plcs to the Modbus Plus network. This card is installed in the slot reserved for processors or slot-plcs: A host slot on processors or slot-plcs. 2 A protective cover. A removable cover with fixing screw (access to 20-way miniature connector). Two indicator lamps: v ERR: card or link fault, v COM: activity on the line. 2 Connectors to be ordered separately: v TSX MBP CE 0pp drop cables. Characteristics Structure Type Industrial bus Physical interface RS 8 Method of access Token bus Transmission Mode Synchronous HDLC Data rate Medium Mbit/s Twisted pair Configuration Number of devices 2 per segment, 6 maximum on all segments (,800 m maximum) Number of addresses Length of bus Number of segments 6 devices maximum per segment 0 m maximum per segment,,800 m maximum with repeaters Cascaded: maximum using Modbus Plus BP8 bridges Services Global database - 096 byte common database - cyclical exchange of 2 broadcast words Peer to peer dialogue Peer Cop Read/write services (number of requests: 00 registers per transaction) Cyclical exchange service (on Premium only): 00 words per station (broadcast or point-to-point). /89

Connections platform Modbus Plus network Wiring system 6 8 9 7 7 7 2 2 0. TSX MBP 00: Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, for type III processor slot on TSX Micro or Premium platforms. 2 70 PNT 0 20: communication module for Momentum I/O base unit. 90 NAA 27 0p: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair with shielding drain (flying leads). In lengths of 0, 0, 00, 0 or,00 m. 70 MCI 020/02 pp: drop cable equipped at each end with an RJ connector (baset interface). In lengths of 0.2, 0.7, or 0 m. 990 NAD 20 00: IP 20 local site tap, provides a tap link from the trunk cable for connecting device (connection of conductors requires wiring tool 0 09 8). Integrates the line terminal. 6 Local site taps provides a tap link from the trunk cable for device (screw terminal connection). It also has an RJ connector for connecting a programming and maintenance terminals: - 990 NAD 20 20/2: IP 20 plastic tap, - 990 NAD 20 0: IP 6 zamac tap. 7 70 XTS 020 00: IP 20 tee, provides a tap link from the Modbus Plus cable (cable with connectors at each end of an RJ connector). It has a 9-way SUB-D female connector for connecting the device. 8 TSX MBP CE 00/060: drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, equipped on the PCMCIA side with a 20-way miniature connector and with flying leads on the 990 NAD 20 00/00 local site tap side. In lengths of or 6 m. 9 990 NAD 2 0/0: drop cable with a 9-way SUB-D male connector for connecting the device and with flying leads on the 990 NAD 20 00/00 local site tap side. In lengths of 2, or 6 m. 0TSX MBP CE 002: drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, equipped on the PCMCIA side with a 20-way miniature connector and on the network side with a 9-way SUB-D female connector. Can be used as an extension for cable 990 NAD 2 0/0. In lengths of 0.2 m. AS MBKT 8: set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) to be placed at each end of the segment. The AS MBKT 8 terminators are placed directly at the end of the cable (without a tap or tee). 990 NAD 20 : set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) for IP 6 local site tap 990 NAD 20 0, to be placed at each end of the segment. 2 70 XTS 02 00: set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) for tee 70 XTS 020 00, to be placed at each end of the segment. For wiring system: b Quantum platform: please refer to our catalog. b Lexium drive for brushless motors: please refer to our catalog Lexium movement command. b Altivar drive for asynchronous motors: please refer to our catalog Progressive starters and speed controllers. /90

References platform Modbus Plus network Reference TSX MBP 00 70 PNT 0 20 Description Number per PLC Use Addr. Composition Reference Weight kg Modbus Plus withtsxmicro Type III slot on: PCMCIA card TSX 7 2/22 - TSX 7 2/22 PLC with - Premium processor Premium/Atrium TSX 7 p/2p/p/p/p -Atriumslot-PLC T PCX /TSX PCI 7 2p/p - Magelis XBT F terminals PCMCIA type III card Description Connection Addr. Reference () Distributed I/O on Modbus Plus network TSX MBP 00 0.0 Weight kg Advantys STB network interface module STB NMP 222 0. Momentum communication module 2 70PNT020 0.0 Connection accessories () Description Use Mounting Addr. Reference Weight kg Modbus Plus taps Line terminators (soldinlot of 2) Mounting kit for IP 6 tee IP 20 tee, requires the wiring tool 990 NAD 20 00 0.20 0 09 28. Integrates the line terminal IP 20 tap for tap link connection (screw terminal connection), supports RJ connector on front panel DIN rail 6 990 NAD 20 20 Mounting plate 6 990 NAD 20 2 IP 6 tap for tap link connection (tee), Mounting plate 6 990 NAD 20 0 0.60 supports RJ connector on front panel IP 20 tee with 2 RJ connectors for Modbus Plus cable and 9-way SUB-D connector for tap link devices 7 70XTS02000 0.260 For tap (IP 20) 990 NAD 20 20/2 990 NAD 20 22 For tap (IP 6) 990 NAD 20 0 990 NAD 20 For tee (IP 20) 70 XTS 020 00 2 70XTS0200 Used directly at the end of the cable AS MBKT 8 (without a tap or tee) DIN rail mounting for 990 NAD 20 0 local site tap 990 NAD 20 2 Protector pack Wiring tool Replacement port protectors to prevent ingress into the RJ quick connect programming port of 990 NAD 20 0 tap Mounting trunk and tap wires in the local site tap. Sold in lot of 990 NAD 20 2 0 09 8 Connection cables () Description Use Addr. Length Reference Weight From To kg Modbus Plus Local site tap Local site tap 990 NAD 20 00/0 0 m 90 NAA 27 0 trunk cables 0 m 90 NAA 27 02 00 m 90 NAA 27 0 0 m 90 NAA 27 0,00 m 90 NAA 27 06 Drop cables IP 20 70XTS02000 tee IP 20 70 XTS 020 00 tee 0.2 m 70 MCI 020 0 m 70 MCI 020 6 m 70 MCI 02 20 0 m 70 MCI 020 80. PCMCIA card TSX MBP 00 (miniature connector) Drop cable with 9 way male SUB-D 0 0.2 m TSX MBP CE 002 connector Local site tap 990 NAD 20 00/0 8 m TSX MBP CE 00 0.0 6m TSX MBP CE 060 0.0 TSX MBP CE 00/060 Communication module for Momentum I/O base units Local site tap 990 NAD 20 00/0 9 2. m 990 NAD 2 0 0.0 6m 990 NAD 2 0 0.0 () For other Modbus Plus network connecting cables and accessories, please consult your Regional Sales Office. /9

Presentation, description, connectable devices platform Profibus DP bus Presentation PLC with Unity Pro/PL7 and DP software X-Way Premium Repeaters ( maxi) With Unity Pro/PL7 and DP software Third party device ATV Third party device Momentum The Profibus DP bus is a high-speed fieldbus which conforms to industrial communication requirements. The Profibus DP is a linear bus with a centralised access procedure of the master/slave type. Only master stations, also known as active stations, have access rights to the bus. The slave or passive stations can only respond to prompts. Dialogue between masters is also possible from some stations by means of a token bus protocol. The physical connection is a single shielded twisted pair, but fibre optic interfaces are available to create tree, star, or ring structures. Compared to the ISO model, only layers, 2 are implemented, since access from the user interface is made directly to the link layer via simple mapping of variables. Configuration The Profibus DP bus is configured usind dedicating SyCon software, which should be ordered separatly, reference SYC SPU LFp CD28M. This sofware is used to generate the file including the informations relating to the devices connected. This extension file is imported into the PLC application via the Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro programming software. Description. Premium PLCs and Atrium slot-plcs are connected to the Profibus DP bus by a TSX PBY 00 module. This module can be installed in any slot in the Premium PLC rack. It comprises: Host module for the PCMCIA card. 2 Profibus DP PCMCIA card with its integral connecting cable, 0.6 m long. T-junction box enabling the tap link of the main bus 90 NAE 9 00. Connectable devices 2 The TSX PBY 0 module performs the role of the master on the Profibus DP bus. The Telemecanique devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are: b TeSys model U starter-controllers, via Modbus gateway. b Advantys STB and Momentum distributed I/O. b Advantys FTB/FTM, IP 67 monobloc and modular I/O spliter boxes. b Altivar /8/8F/68, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors. b Twin Line TLC and Lexium MHDA servodrives for brushless motors. b Altistart ATS 8 soft starters. b And any third-party device which conforms to the Profibus DP standard profile. /92

Characteristics, references platform Profibus DP bus Characteristics of the bus supported by the module Type of bus Profibus DP Structure Type Industrial bus Physical interface RS 8 Method of access Master Transmission Mode NRZ Medium Shielded twisted pair, fibre optic, infra-red Physical configuration Data rate v to 9.6 K bit/s with the length of 200 m (800 m with repeaters) v from2mbit/swiththelengthof00m(00mwithrepeaters) Number of slaves 26 Number of inputs/outputs 872 inputs/872 outputs (22 %IW words, 22 %QW words) Services (VO) Subset of Class master function Subset of Class 2 master function Read/write DP slave I/O data Transfer slave diagnostic data Set slave parameters (on power-up) Check slave configurations (on power-up) Manage monitoring requests: Global_CONTROL et Get_Master_Diag master/master dialogue is not supported TSX PBY 00 90 NAD 9 0 + + + References Description Communication profile Profibus DP module Master/slave kit for Premium PLC 2 Mbit/s and Atrium slot-plc Services Reference Weight kg Class and Class 2 TSX PBY 00 0.870 V0 master functions, see characteristics Profibus FMS message handling not supported SyCon V2.8 Generates an Seepage/ configuration software ASCII configuration file for the module to be imported into the Unity Pro or PL7 application Description Type of license Reference Weight kg SyCon V2.8 configuration software licenses SyCon V2.8 configuration software update Single ( station) SYC SPU LFU CD28M Group ( stations) SYC SPU LFG CD28M Team (0 stations) SYC SPU LFT CD28M Site(upto0stations) SYC SPU LFF CD28M Single ( station) SYC SPU LRU CD28M SyCon V2.8 Group ( stations) SYC SPU LUG CD28M configuration Team (0 stations) SYC SPU LUT CD28M software update for Site(upto0stations) SYC SPU LUF CD28M previous version Elements for connection to Profibus DP bus Description Use Reference Weight kg Distributed I/O on Profibus DP Connectors for communication module Advantys STB network interface module STB NDP 22 0.0 Momentum communication module 70DTN000 Line terminator 90 NAD 9 0 Intermediate connection 90 NAD 9 0 Intermediate connection and terminal 90 NAD 9 0 port Description Length Reference Weight kg Profibus DP connecting cables 00 m TSX PBS CA 00 00 m TSX PBS CA 00. /9

Presentation platform INTERBUS bus Presentation The INTErBUS bus is a serial link type fieldbus for sensors and actuators which conforms to the requirements of an industrial environment. Quantum Premium/Atrium E/SIP6 Installation remote bus module ATV 8 c 2 V 2 Installation remote bus module Bus terminal module c 2 V E/S IP 6 Momentum The topology of the INTERBUS bus is designed as a ring system with master/slave central access procedure. It is subdivided into three parts: b The remote bus (bus devices use RS 8 point-to-point connection). b The installation remote bus 2 (remote bus tap link via a bus terminal module). Its technology is particularly suitable for IP 6 dust and damp proof systems. b The local bus with TTL technology is particularly suitable for buses within a control cabinet. Each bus subscriber comprises a transmitter and a receiver. The INTErBUS system is like a data ring and has the structure of a shift register distributed on the bus. With its registers, each module constitutes a component of this shift register ring. The INTErBUS master circulates the data in series on this ring.. Description: page /9 /9 Characteristics: page /96 References: page /97

Description, connectable devices platform INTERBUS bus 2 2 Description Premium PLCs are connected to the INTERBUS bus via the TSX IBY 00 INTERBUS bus module. The TSX IBX 00 communication coprocessor can be used to connect a Atrium slot-plc integrated in a PC compatible to the InterBus bus. The front panel on the TSX IBY 00/IBX 00 module comprises: A display block with 6 indicator lamps (on the card for the TSX IBX 00). 2 A 9-way female RS 22 SUB-D connector: CMD Tool software support (configuration software). A 9-way female RS 8 SUB-D connector: InterBus link (this connector integrates an additional power supply for the fibre optic link). Connectable devices The TSX IBY 00 module or the TSX IBX 00 card acts as the master on the INTERBUS bus, other Schneider Electric devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are: b ATV 8/8 variable speed drives for asynchronus motors. b Telefast IP 20 I/O interfaces. b Momentum IP 20 I/O. b Distributed discrete dust and damp proof I/O (IP 6). b Inductel inductive identification systems (XGP/XGK-S read/write stations). b AS-Interface/INTERBUS gateway. b Any third-party device conforming to InterBus standard profiles.. Presentation: page /9 Characteristics: page /96 References: page /97 /9

Characteristics, software configuration platform INTERBUS bus Characteristics of the bus supported by TSX IBY 00 modules or TSX IBX 00 coprocessors Type of bus Remote bus Installation rmote bus Structure Type Industrial bus Local bus INTERBUS loop Physical interface RS 8 RS 8 withc 2 V in cable Method of access Master/slave TTL Combined interface (vertically mounted signal and c 2 V power supply) Transmission Mode NRZ Data rate 00 K bit/s Medium - Twisted pair -Fibreoptic - Wave guide rail - Infra-red - Rotating collector Special cable for: Sensor and I/O module 2V power supply Data transmission Special cable 2x.mm 2 Physical configuration Length of segment 00 m maxi 200 m max. in the loop Maximum length of cable between: - Module and the st bus terminal module: 00 m - 2 bus term.modules: 00 m Module and last stationontheremote bus: 2.8 km - Bus terminal module and st module: 0 m - 2 modules: 0 m The bus terminal module and last module: 0 m - Bus terminal module and st module:. m - 2 modules:. m Bus terminal module and last module: 0 m - Bus terminal module and st interface: 20 m - 2 modules: 0 m Bus terminal module and last module: 00 m Number of tap links 6 maxi loop per bus terminal module Number of bus terminal modules 2 maxi Number of slaves 2 maxi Total current of connected modules:. A max. 8 6 Number of I/O 872 I/872 O max. (096 I/O in total) INTERBUS services Implicit exchange of process date: 22 %IW and 22 %QW Pre-processing Logical addressing Segmentation Software configuration The INTERBUS bus can be configured in modes: b Auto mode: This mode does not require the use of any special configuration software (I/O images are copied to %IW, %QW implicitly). It facilitates the wiring check.. b Mode Unity Pro/PL7 V IBY mode: This mode is used to define and load the configuration to the module (explicit assignment of %IW, %QW). The CMD Tool software () is required in order to generate the configuration text file. b CMD V IBY mode: Reserved for configurations > 8 K words, and requires the use of the CMD Tool software. PMS message handling (usable on PCP devices) is managed via standard OFs (Read-var, Write-var, etc). The catalogue file which enables Schneider Electric devices to be integrated in the CMD Tool software is available on our Web site: b Address: www.schneiderautomation.com b File for downloading: Schneider device catalog for CMD. () Contact your Phœnix Contact vendor. Presentation: page /9 /96 Description: page /9 References: page /97

References platform INTERBUS bus TSX IBY 00 References INTERBUS bus modules Description INTERBUS module for Premium PLC INTERBUS coprocessor Atrium slot-plc No. of modules Communication per PLC/PC profil See pages /2, / or / Seepage/2 or / Master/slave 0. Mbit/s Generation Master/slave 0. Mbit/s Generation Services Reference () Weight kg - cyclical TSX IBY 00 0.20 variable exchanges -PMS messaging - bus operating modes management cyclical TSX IBX 00 0.280 variable exchanges -PMS messaging - bus operating modes management TSX IBX 00 70 INT 0 00 Converter software Description Use Reference Weight kg Symbol converter software Used to convert CMD symbols into Unity Pro or PL7 symbols TLX LIBS CNVE Bus connection elements Description Use Length Reference () Weight kg Momentum communica-ti on module Remote bus cables Momentum I/O base units on INTERBUS bus 70 INT 0 00 Avantys STB distributed I/O STB NIB 222 00 m TSX IBS CA 00 00 m TSX IBS CA 00 Installation remote bus cables Connecting cable Preformed cables for linking 2 communication modules TSX IBp to PC connection (with CMD Tool software) 0.0 m 70 MCI 007 00 m 70 MCI 00 00 6m 990 NAA 26 20 m 990 NAA 26 0 9-way SUB-D Remote bus cables 70XTS00900 0.0 connectors (soldinlotsof2) () Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French.. Presentation: page /9 Description: page /9 Characteristics: page /96 /97

Presentation, description platform Modbus serial link Presentation Magelis ipc ATV 8 Modbus XBT TSX Micro/Premium April 000 Quantum The Modbus bus is used for master/slave architectures (it is necessary, however, to check that the Modbus services used by the application are implemented on the devices concerned). The bus comprises one master station and several slave stations. Only the master station can initiate the exchange (direct communication between slave stations is not possible). Two exchange mechanisms are possible: b Question/answer, where the requests from the master are addressed to a given slave. The master then waits for the response from the slave which has been interrogated. b Broadcasting, the master broadcasts a message to all the slave stations on the bus. These stations execute the order without transmitting a response. Description The TSX Micro/Premium PLCs or Atrium slot-plcs offer various Modbus bus connection possibilities. Built-in links to the TSX Micro processor or to the TSX SCY p60 Premium module Via integrated port on the TSX Micro processor. The TER port (8-way mini DIN) has Modbus RTU master/slave () protocol. TSX Micro 6 2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 60/260 module for Premium PLCs. This module has an isolated Half-duplex RS 8 serial link channel(2-way SUB-D connector) with multiprotocol (including Modbus); (for the TSX SCY 60 module, only the Modbus protocol is supported). TSX SCP multiprotocol PCMCIA cardsp.6 Premium TSX SCY 260 TSX SCY 60 2 A slot on the TSX Micro/Premium processors, the Atrium slot-plc and the TSX SCY 260 module(2) exists for the multiprotocol TSX SCPp cards, including Modbus, featuring: A protective cover. A removable cover with fixing screws (to access a 20-way miniature connector). 6 Two LEDs: v ERR lamp: card or link fault, v COM lamp: data transmission or reception. Cable connector to be ordered separately: TSX SCP/SCY cable. /98 References: pages /00 and /0 6 () Modbus RTU slave Protocol with TSX 7 0/08. (2) This slot is also designed for Fipway TSX FPP 20 or Jnet TSX JNP 2/ PCMCIA network cards.

Characteristics platform Modbus serial link Characteristics Physical Interface TSX Micro terminal port Non-isolated RS 8 PCMCIA card TSX SCY integrated port for integrated Premium RS 8 TSX 7 0/08 TSX 7 0/2/22 Isolated RS 8 () 20 ma CL Non-isolated RS 22D TSX SCY 60 TSX SCY 260 Structure Type Heterogeneous industrial bus Method of access Slave Master/slave Master/slave Type Transmission Mode Asynchronous in baseband Frame RTU RTU/ASCII Data rate.2...2 Kbit/s 0.6..9.2 Kbit/s (for TSX SCP ).2... 9.2 Kbit/s (for TSX SCP 2/) Medium Double shielded twisted pair Double shielded twisted pair, doubled Configuration Number of devices 28 max. in RS 8 Point-to-point in RS 22 Max. number of link addresses Length of bus Quintuple shielded twisted pair 6 max. 2 (point-to-point).2...9.2 Kbit/s Double shielded twisted pair 98 28 98 28 98 0 m max. non isolated link,00 m max. on isolated link (2),00 m excluding tap links 00 to,000 m according to rate 2 m max.,00 m excluding C Tap links m max. m Services Requests Bits:,920 bits per request Words: 20 words per request Security One CRC 6 check parameter on each frame Monitoring No flow control Diagnostic counters, event counters Modbus functions available on Premium/TSX Micro PLCs or on Atrium slot-plc Code Modbus slave Modbus master 0 Read n output bits Read bits 02 Read n input bits Read input bits () 0 Read n output words Read words 0 Read n input words Read input words () 0 Write output bit Write bit or n bits 06 Writeoutputword Write word or n words 07 Exceptional read status Exceptional read status 08 Diagnostic Diagnostic 0B Event counter Event counter 0C Event connection Event connection 0F Write n output bits 0 Writenoutputwords Identification Slave identification Other requests accessible via SEND_REQ generic function blocks () Point-to-point RS 22 compatible connection. (2) For an isolated link, you must use the TSX P ACC 0 terminal port cable connector. () Requests not available on TSX 7 0/2/22 terminal port..6 References: pages /99 and /00 /99

References platform Modbus serial link Modbus bus connection elements Description Protocol Physical layer Reference Weight kg TSX Micro PLC integrated link (TER port) Modbus (RTU) Uni-Telway character mode Non-isolated RS 8 Refer to our catalog TSX Micro automation platform Communication module for Premium/Atrium Modbus Character mode Uni-Telway - RS 8 isolated integrated channel (channel 0), ( to 97 slaves) - slot for PCMCIA card (channel ) () TSX SCY 260 0.60 TSX Micro Modbus RS 8 isolated integrated channel (channel 0),.2...9.2 Kbit/s ( to 27 slaves) TSX SCY 60 0.0 TSX SCY 260 TSX SCY 60 PCMCIA cards Modbus type III for Premium Character mode processor, Atrium Uni-Telway slot-plc, PLC TSX 7 2/22 or TSX SCY 260 module RS 8 (RS 22 compatible).2...9.2. Kbit/s RS 22D (9 signals) 0.6...9.2. Kbit/s TSX SCP 0.0 TSX SCP 0.0 TSX SCP p 20 ma CL.2...9.2. Kbit/s TSX SCP 2 0.0 Modbus connection accessories Description Use Reference Weight Passive junction box kg Bus tap link and extension, line termination adaptation TSX SCA 0 0.20 TSX SCA 0 2 channel passive subscriber socket (2 or wire) (2) Taplinkof2deviceswith2wires TSX SCA 6 0.70 Tap link of master device and/or slave device with wires Fitted with 2 female -pin SUB-D connectors Active adapter RS 22C/RS 8 Connection of an RS 22C device as RS 8 Isolation of signals and line termination adaptation TSX SCA 72 0.20 TSX SCA 6.6 TSX Micro PLC TER terminal port cable connector Bus tap link cable (2 or -wire) Isolation of Modbus signals Line termination adaptation Suppliedwithcable(lengthm)fittedwithamini-DIN connector (TER port) TSX P ACC 0 0.690 Line terminators (sold in lot of 2) 2/-wire cabling Can be connected to the front panel of the TSX SCA 6 subscriber socket TSX SCA 0 0.00 () PCMCIA type III slot for TSX SCP /2/, TSX FPP 20 or TSX JNP 2/ card. (2) 2 or wire cabling, compatible with the TSX SCA 6 subscriber socket requires a max. 0 mm external diameter Modbus cable. Characteristics: page /99 /00

References (continued) platform Modbus serial link Modbus connection cables Description Use Length Reference Weight From To kg RS 8 double shielded twisted pair trunk cables Modbus Bus 00 m TSX CSA 00.680 200 m TSX CSA 200 0.920 00 m TSX CSA 00 0.000 Cables for isolated RS 22/8 tap link TSX SCP card TSX SCA 0 housing 2wires() m TSX SCP CM 00 0.60 TSX SCA 6 subscriber socket, 2/ wires m TSX SCP CM 0 0,80 Modbus standard device, wires () (point-to-point) m TSX SCP CX 00 0.60 Built-in channel (channel 0) Premium TSX SCY 60, TSX SCY 260 module TSX SCA 0 housing, 2wires() TSX SCA 6 subscriber socket, 2wires m TSX SCY CM 600 0.60 m TSX SCY CM 60 0.60 RS 22D tap link cables TSX SCP card Communication device m TSX SCP CC 00 0.90 (Modem, converter, etc) (DCE) (2) Terminal device with point-to-point (DTE) (2) m TSX SCP CD 00 0.90 0 m TSX SCP CD 00 0.620 Cable for tap link 20 ma CL TSX SCP 2 card Multidrop Modbus () m TSX SCP CX 200 0.60 Other connecting cables See page /0.6 ()Endofcablefittedwithfreewires. (2) End of cable fitted with a male 2-pin SUB-D connector. Characteristics: page /99 /0

Presentation, characteristics platform Uni-Telway serial link Presentation The Uni-Telway bus is a standard means of communication between control system components (PLCs, MMI terminals, supervisors, variable speed drives, numerical controllers, weighing equipment, etc.). Premium It is suitable for architectures designed to manage control and monitoring devices via a PLC, or architectures used for MMI (supervision, etc.). The Uni-Telway bus requires a master station which manages the allocation of bus access rights to the various connected stations (known as slave stations). CCX 7 Uni-Telway ATV 8 TSX Micro Characteristics Physical interface RS 8 non isolated terminal port (TER/AUX) Premium RS 8 isolated module integrated port () Isolated RS 8/ 20 ma CL PCMCIA RS 22 PCMCIA card card Non-isolated RS 22D PCMCIA card Structure Type Heterogeneous industrial bus Link Multidrop Point-to-point Method of access Master/Slave principle Transmission Mode Asynchronous transmission in baseband Data rate.2 9.2 Kbit/s 0. 9.2 Kbit/s Medium Shielded double twisted pair Configuration Number of devices max. 28 max. 6 max. 2 Number of connection addresses Length of bus 8 max. 96 max.( device can occupy several datalink addresses) 0 m max.,,000 m with TSX P ACC 0,000 m max. excluding tap links 00 m max., excluding tap links m (unlimited via modem) Tap links 20 m 20 m m Service Uni-TE Point-to-point requests with confirmation (question/response), of up to 20 bytes (2) initiated by any connected device.6 Unsolicited point-to-point data, without confirmation, of up to 20 bytes(2) initiated by any connected device Broadcast messages of up to 20 bytes (2) initiated by the master device Other functions Transparent communication, via the master, with any device in an X-Way architecture Diagnostics, debugging, adjustment and programming of PLCs Security Monitoring Check character on each frame, acknowledgement and, if required, repetition of messages ensure security of transmission Bus status table, transmission error counters and device status can be accessed by program in each device Status of the bus and devices connected from the master PLC accessible using Unity Pro or PL7 software. () TSX SCY 260 single format module. (2) Limited to 28 bytes with TSX Micro/Premium PLC terminal port. Connections: page /0 References: page /0 /02

Characteristics (continued), description platform Uni-Telway serial link Performances BCT (ms) 00 00 200 00 2 The Uni-Telway bus cycle time depends on: b The number of devices polled (datalink addresses). b The data rate. b The turnaround time of each device. b The number, length and type of messages. BCT = Bus Cycle Time, is the interval between two polls from the same device. The curves opposite give the Uni-Telway cycle time as a function of the number of slaves operating at 9.6 Kbit/s or 9.2Kbit/s, with a typical turnaround time of ms per device (excluding messages). 8 2 6 20 2 27 = 9.6 Kbit/s 2 = 9.2 Kbit/s Device Event Uni-Telway bus Report CT CT CT CT BCT BCT The following table shows the time to be added (in ms) to obtain the true BCT value as a function of the traffic (N = Number of usable characters): Time (ms) Exchanges at 9.6 Kbit/s at 9.2 Kbit/s Master to slave 2 +.2 N () 7 + 0.6 N () SlavetoMaster 9+.2N() 2 + 0.6 N () Slavetoslave +2.N() 29 +. N () In a distributed control system architecture the application-to-application response time depends not only on the communication system, but also on: Device 2 CT2 BCT = Uni-Telway bus cycle time CT = Device bus cycle time CT2 = Device 2 bus cycle time CT2 Action b The processing times of the message source and destination devices. b The degree of asynchronism between the bus and processor cycle times. This response time must be evaluated by the designer of each application according to the devices which are connected. The processing time of a device may vary from one to two cycle times depending on the degrees of asynchronism. Description TSX Micro/Premium PLCs TSX Micro/Premium PLCs provide various ways of connecting to the Uni-Telway bus. TSX Micro By integrated TSX Micro/Premium processor or Atrium slot-plc port The AUX port (2) (8-way mini-din) has one non-isolated RS 8 serial link channel (maximum distance 0 m). 2 By TSX SCY 260 integrated port for Premium PLC or Atrium slot-plc This module has one Half-duplex isolated RS 8 serial link channel, which is multiprotocol, including Uni-Telway. Via multiprotocol PCMCIA card A slot on the TSX 7 2/22/Premium PLC processors, the Atrium slot-plc and the TSX SCY 260 module () accepts the following multiprotocol cards: v TSX SCP PCMCIA card Isolated RS 8/RS 22 link. This type of card corresponds to the Uni-Telway standard..6 2 v TSX SCP PCMCIA card Non isolated RS 22D link. This type of card can be used for direct point-to-point links or via Modem. Premium TSX SCY 260 v TSX SCP 2 PCMCIA card 20 ma current loop link. This type of card is used for a multidrop link (2 to 6 devices) and requires a c 2V external power supply. () N = Number of usable characters corresponding to the messages to be exchanged. (2) TER port for TSX 7 0/08/0 PLC. () This slot can also accept the TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card for Fipway networks, or the TSX JNP 2/ PCMCIA card for JNet networks. Connections: page /0 References: page /0 /0

Connections platform Uni-Telway serial link Uni-Telway bus wiring system 2 TSX 7 20 2 2 2 FT 200 2 TER AUX Device 0 8 Adaptor 9 7 TSX Micro (TER terminal port).6 ATV 8/8 6 TSX CSA ppp: bus cable, double shielded twisted pair. The shielding must be connected to the earth of each device. 2 TSX SCA 0: passive T-junction box, matches the impedance when it is installed at the end of the line. TSX SCA 62: passive 2-channel Uni-Telway subscriber socket, is used for coding the address of two connected devices, and matching the impedance when it is installed at the end of the line. TSX SCA 60/6: passive terminal block, used for intermediate devices that have a -way female SUB D connector: v TSX SCA 60 used for intermediate devices, v TSX SCA 6 used for end devices. TSX P ACC 0: connection box, used for connecting a TSX Micro/Premium PLC to the Uni-Telway bus via the PLC terminal port. The connecting cable (length m) is integrated in the connection box. It isolates the signals (for distances >0 m) and is used to match the end of line impedance. It is also used to set the operation of the terminal port (Uni-Telway Master/Slave or character mode). 6 TSX LES 6/7: cable connectors for extensions to the Uni-Telway bus, used to connect TSX model 0 PLC processors that have an integral Uni-Telway port as standard. They are used for coding the address of the connected device. 7 TSX SCP : PCMCIA card for connecting TSX Micro ()/Premium PLCs to the Uni-Telway bus. 8 TSX SCP CU 00: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCP PCMCIA card (on TSX P7 p0m processor or TSX SCY 260 module) and the TSX SCA 0 junction box. 9 TSX SCY CU 60: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCY 260 module integrated channel and the TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket. 0XBT-Z908: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the CCX 7 and the TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket. TSX PCX 0: universal connecting cable between a PC compatible (COM port, 9-way SUB D connector) and the TER or AUX port for TSX Micro/Premium PLCs or the TSX P ACC 0 connection box (8-way mini-din connector). 2TSX CSC 0: connecting cable between the TSX 7 micro-plc (via a TSX 7 ACC adapter or a TSX SCG 6 module) and TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket. Characteristics: pages /02 and /0 /0 Description: page /0 TSX DG UTW F: this manual describes the operating principles and the architectures of the Uni-Telway bus. It is required for setting up and installing the Uni-Telway bus. TSX DR NET F: this manual describes the X-Way architectures, services and address mechanisms. It includes the coding of Uni-TE requests as well as precautions for connecting earths for the networks. It also includes the principles of asynchronous serial transmission. ()WithTSX72/22PLCs. References: page /0

References platform Uni-Telway serial link Elements for connection to Uni-Telway bus Description Protocol Physical layer PLC Addr. Reference Integrated link on processor Uni-Telway Character mode Weight kg () NonisolatedRS8 TSXMicro Please consult our catalog Modicon TSX Micro Premium See page /2,/ or/ Atrium Seepage/2or/ TSX Micro Communication module Uni-Telway Modbus/Jbus Character mode isolated2-wirers8 integrated channel (channel 0), PCMCIA card slot (channel ) (2) Premium Atrium TSX SCY 260 0.60 Type III PCMCIA cards for Premium processors, Atrium slot-plcs, TSX 7 2/22 PLCs, or TSX SCY 260 modules Uni-Telway Modbus/Jbus Character mode RS 22 D (9 signals) 0. 9.2 Kbit/s RS 8 (RS 22 compatible).2 9.2 Kbit/s 7 TSX SCP 0.0 7 TSX SCP 0.0 20 ma CL.2 9.2 Kbit/s 7 TSX SCP 2 0.0 Premium TSX SCP p TSX SCY 260 SetofX-Waydriversfor PC compatibles Includes all the X-Way drivers CD-Rom TSX CD DRV 20M Uni-Telway bus connection accessories Description Use Addr. Reference Weight Terminal port connection box Isolation of Uni-Telway signals for bus length > 0 m, end of line adaptation, bus cable tap links. Supplied with cable ( m length) equipped with a mini-din connector (TER or AUX ports) kg TSX P ACC 0 0.690 Passive T-junction box Tap link and extension of bus cable, 2 TSX SCA 0 0.20 Passive 2-channel subscriber socket 2-channel tap link (-way female SUB-D connector) and extension of bus cable, address coding and end of line adaptation TSX SCA 62 0.70 TSX P ACC 0 Active adaptation box RS 22C/RS 8 Connection of an RS 22C device active adapter unit (using Uni-Telway protocol), adaptation and isolation of signals, end of line adaptation (no address coding) TSX SCA 72 0.20 TSX SCA 0 Uni-Telway bus connecting cables () Description Use Addr. Length Reference Weight From To () kg Double shielded twisted Uni-Telway bus 00 m TSX CSA 00.680 pair RS 8 cables 200 m TSX CSA 200 0.920 00 m TSX CSA 00 0.000 TSX SCA 62 TSX SCA 72 Cables for isolated RS 8 tap link RS 22 terminal port/peripheral device connecting cable TSX SCP card TSX SCY 260 module integrated channel (channel 0) TSX Micro/ Premium or Atrium port or TSX P ACC 0 box (TER or AUX) TSX SCA 0 T-jun. 8 m TSX SCP CU 00 0.60 box TSX SCA 62 sub. sock. m TSX SCP CU 0 0.80 TSX SCA 0 T-jun. m TSX SCP CU 600 0.80 box TSX SCA 62 sub. 9 m TSX SCP CU 60 0.200 sock. RS 22D port for 2. m TSX PCX 0 0.70 9-way SUB D type PC compatible USBportofPC 2. m TSX PCX 00.6 () Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. (2) Type III PCMCIA type III slot for TSX SCP /2/, TSX FPP 20 or TSX JNP 2/p card () For information on other connection cables, please see pages /08. TSX PCX 0 Characteristics: pages /02 and /0 Description: page /0 Connections: page /0 /0

Presentation, description, characteristics platform Jnet serial link Presentation The Jnet network enables an automatic exchange of data between several Series 000, SMC 0/600 and Premium PLCs, using the shared table service (exchange by each PLC of a memory zone, internal words, broadcast zone, to other PLCs on the network), see page /67. Jnet Premium April 000 April 2000 April 000 April 7000 SMC 0/600 The Jnet network services exchange data between Series 000, SMC 0/600 and Premium PLCs. The principle is based on broadcasting of a local zone by each PLC (word memory zone), which is automatically copied to other PLCs on the network ; no explicit programming for exchanges is required. Description Premium PLCs are connected to the Jnet network using type III PCMCIA communication cards: b TSX JNP 2 card for which the physical layer is a 20 ma current loop serial link. b TSX JNP card for which the physical layer is a RS 8 serial link. 2 These PCMCIA cards are installed in the host slot on the TSX SCY 260 module of communication. TSX JNP cards comprise: 2 A protective cover. A removable cover avec vis de fixation (accès au connecteur miniature 20 contacts. Two indicator lamps: v ERR: card or link fault, v COM: activity on the line. Connectors to be ordered separately: v TSX SCP CM 00/CM 0/CX 200 cable. Characteristics Structure Type Inter-PLC network Topology Bus with passive tap links Method of access Circulation by token Physical interface RS82wire,20mACL.6 Transmission Mode Half duplex on 2 wires Format 8 bits, no parity, stop Data rate 92.2 Kbps Medium Shielded twisted pair Configuration Number of devices 2 (6 if the network includes SMC PLCs) Length of bus 00 m maximum without tap links Tap links m maximum Services Data exchanged Distributed database: - 28 6-bit words for a network with 2 stations (Series 000/Premium), - 6 6-bit words for a network including SMC PLCs. Monitoring Network nominal duty control indicator lamp References: page /07 /06

Software configuration, references platform Jnet serial link Software configuration Installation procedures and access to the Jnet module configuration screen are identical to those for any PCMCIA type communication module, using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software. Configuration of a Jnet PCMCIA card is accessed using the screen below: Stations communicate between themselves automatically once they are configured and connected to the same Jnet network. A debug screen is also linked to the module. It gives the following information: b Status of each station (RUN/STOP/ABSENT). b Transmission error counter. TSX JNP 2/ References Connection elements to Jnet network Description Jnet type III PCMCIA Number per PLC Use maximum Type III slot on TSX SCY 260 module Physical layer Reference () 20 ma CL 9.2 Kbps RS 8 9.2 Kbps Connection accessories Description Use Power supply Reference () 2-channel subscriber socket (2 or -wire) (2) Weight kg TSX JNP 2 0.0 TSX JNP 0.0 Weight kg Taplinkof2x2-wiredevices Tap link of Master device and/ or x -wire Slave device Fitted with 2 x -way female SUB-D connectors TSX SCA 6 0.70 Line Connection to the front panel of terminators TSX SCA 6 subscriber socket (soldinlotsof2) 2/-wire cabling TSX SCA 0 0.00 TSX SCA 6 TSX SCA 0 T-junction box Connection to RS 8 viatap link (Tee) Connection cables Description Use From To Passive TSX SCA 0 0.20 Length Reference Weight kg Cables for TSX JNP TSX SCA 0 box m TSX SCP CM 00 0.60 isolated RS 22/8 tap card 2-wire () link TSX SCA 6 subscriber socket 2/-wire m TSX SCP CM 0 0.80 Cable for 20 ma CL tap link TSX JNP 2 card Multidrop Modbus m TSX SCP CX 200 0.60 () () Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. (2) 2 or -wire cabling, compatible with TSX SCA 6 subscriber sockets requires the use of a Modbus cable with an external diameter of 0 mm maximum. () Cable end fitted with flying leads..6 Presentation: page /06 /07

Presentation, description, characteristics platform Asynchronous serial links Premium TSX SCY 260 TSX Micro 2 Presentation TSX Micro/Premium PLCs provide, via their processor, slot-plc or TSX SCY 260 communication module, several possible ways for exchanging data in character mode with devices equipped with an asynchronous serial link interface: b RS 8 integrated port. b Type III PCMCIA card with RS 22D, RS 8 (RS 22 compatible) or 20 ma current loop link. Protocols supported are character mode (ASCII), Uni-Telway and Modbus. Other protocols are also available, or can be developed on request, on a RS 8 or RS 22D link, which enables TSX Micro/Premium PLCs to communicate on third-party architectures. These products are offered within the framework of the Schneider Alliances partnership programme. The list of modules available can be obtained from your Regional Sales Office, or from our Internet site www.schneideralliances.com..6 Characteristics Type Description Integrated links Via integrated port on the processor or slot-plc The AUX () port (8-way mini-din connector) has one non-isolated RS 8 serial link channel (maximum distance 0 m). 2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 260 module This module for Premium PLCs has one isolated RS 8 serial link channel (2-way SUB-D connector). Half duplex multiprotocol, including Uni-Telway. TSX SCP p multiprotocol PCMCIA cards A slot on the processor, slot-plc and on the TSX SCY 260 module takes cards which comprise: A removable cover with fixing screws for access to the 20-way miniature connector. Two indicator lamps: v ERR lamp: card or link fault, v COM lamp: data transmission or reception. Connector cable to be ordered separately: TSX SCP Cp ppp cable. () TER port for TSX Micro TSX 7 0/08/0 PLC. Non isolated RS 8 terminal port Isolated RS 8 TSX SCY 260 integrated port () PCMCIA cards RS 22D PCMCIA cards RS 8 RS 22 Compatible Physical layer Data rate.2 9.2 Kbit/s.2 9.2 Kbit/s 0. 9.2 Kbit/s.2 9.2 Kbit/s (2) Transmission Size 20 characters 096 characters max. Data 7or8bits Stop bit or2bits Parity bit Even, odd or none Stop on silence Services Reception echo Repeat st char. echo Auto LF Back space Beep Flow mgmt by Xon-Xoff byrts/cts RTS/CTS delay Stop on reception End of message PSR management PCMCIA cards 20 ma current loop () Parameters which can be accessed in configuration mode. () For characteristics of the communication module integrated channel. (2) With the TSX P7 p/ processor, data rate up to Kbit/s during program uploading. () Point-to-point or multidrop link. References: page /09 /08

References platform Asynchronous serial links References Asynchronous serial link elements (character mode) Description Protocol Physical layer PLC Reference () Integrated link on processor Character mode Uni-Telway RS 8 non-isolated Weight kg TSX Micro Please consult our catalog Modicon TSX Micro Premium See page /2, / or / Atrium See page /2 or / TSX Micro Communication module Character mode Uni-Telway Modbus/Jbus - isolated RS 8 integrated chan. (channel 0), -typeiiipcmcia card slot (channel ) (2) Premium Atrium TSX SCY 260 Type III PCMCIA cards for TSX 7 2/22, PLC, Premium processor, Atrium slot-plc or TSX SCY 260 module Character mode Uni-Telway Modbus/Jbus RS 22 D (9 signaux) 0, 9,2 K bits/s RS 8 (compatible RS 22),2 9,2 K bits/s TSX SCP TSX SCP Premium BC 20 ma,2 9,2 K bits/s TSX SCP 2 TSX SCY 260 Asynchronous serial link connection accessories Description Use Length Reference Weight kg Terminal port connection box Isolation of RS 8 signals, end of line adaptation, supplied with cable for connection to PLC Connecting cables for asynchronous serial links Description Use From To Cables for isolated RS 8 connection TSX SCP card RS 8/RS 22 device () Integrated channel (channel 0) module TSX SCY 260 RS 8/RS 22 device () via TSX SCA 0 box m TSX P ACC 0 0.690 Length Reference Weight kg m TSX SCP CX 00 0.60 m TSX SCY CU 600 0.80 TSX SCP p Universal cable for terminal port/rs 22 device TSX Micro/Premium/ Atrium port (TER or AUX) or TSX P ACC 0 box RS 22D of a terminal device (DTE) () 2. m TSX PCX 0 0.70 USBportofPC 2.m TSX PCX 00 TSX P ACC 0 Cables for RS 22D connection TSX SCP card Communication device: modem, converter, (DCE) () m TSX SCP CC 00 0.90 Point-to-point m TSX SCP CD 00 0.90 terminal device (DTE) () 0 m TSX SCP CD 00 0.620 TSX PCX 0 Cable for BC 20 ma connection TSX SCP 2 card Current loop device () m TSX SCP CX 200 0.60 () Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. (2) PCMCIA type III slot can receive one TSX SCP /2/, TSX FPP 20 or TSX JNP 2/ card. ()Endofcablefittedwithflyingleads. ()Endofcablefittedwitha2-waymaleSUB-Dconnector. () End of cable fitted with a 9-way male SUB-D connector. For use, to order separatly one TSX CTC 0 adaptator (9-way male SUB-D connector/2-way male SUB-D connectors)..6 Presentation: page /08 Description: page /08 Characteristics: page /08 /09

References platform Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports TSX Micro/Premium PLC TSX SCP PCMCIA card Device to be connected Physical link Protocol Length Reference Weight kg DTE terminal 2 RS 22D Character mode m TSX SCP CD 00 0.90 0 m TSX SCP CD 00 0.620 DCE terminal (Modem...) 2 RS 22D Character mode Uni-Telway m TSX SCP CC 00 0.90 TSX SCP PCMCIA card TSX SCA 0 T-junction box RS 8 Character mode (2-wire isolated) Uni-Telway m TSX SCP CU 00 0.60 RS 22/8 Character mode (2-wire isolated) Modbus m TSX SCP CM 00 0.60 TSX SCA 62 2-channel subscriber socket RS 8 Uni-Telway m TSX SCP CU 0 0.60 (2-wire isolated) TSX SCA 6 2-channel subscriber socket RS 22/8 (2/ wire) DTE Terminal RS 22/8 (-wire) Modbus m TSX SCP CM 0 0.80 Modbus m TSX SCP CX 00 0.60 TSX SCP 2 PCMCIA card Active or passive terminal 20 ma current loop Character mode Uni-Telway Modbus m TSX SCP CX 200 0.60 TER/AUX ports TSXPACC0 junction box RS 8 Uni-Telway m Included with TSX P ACC 0.6 TSXPACC0 junction box RS 8 Uni-Telway 2 m T FTX CB 020 0.00 m T FTX CB 00 0.90 DTE terminal (PC, printer) 6 RS 22 Character mode 2, m TSX PCX 0 () 0.70 7 RS 22 Character mode 2, m TSX PCX 00 2-way male miniature connector. 2 2-way male SUB-D connector. Flying leads. () Separate parts see page /. -way male SUB-D connector. 8-way female mini-din connector. 6 9-way female SUB-D connector. 7 USB type connector. /0

References (continued) platform Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports TSX Micro/Premium PLC TER/AUX ports (contin.) Device to be connected DTE terminal (slave PC ) 2 Physical link Protocol Length Reference Weight kg RS 22 Uni-Telway 2. m TSX PCX 0 0.70 RS 8 RS 22 RS 8 Uni-Telway 2. m TSX PCX 00 DTE terminal RS 22 (printer, slave PC without RTS) 2 Character mode Uni-Telway RS 22 Character mode Uni-Telway 2. m TSX PCX 0 () 0.70 2. m TSX PCX 00 DCE terminal RS 22 (Modem M/Sl. USA/Europe) Character mode Uni-Telway m TSX PCX 0 (2) 0.0 CCX 7, panel, XBT terminal RS 8 Uni-Telway 2. m XBT Z968 0.80 m XTB Z968 0.0 TSX SCY 260 communication module integrated port TSX SCA 0 RS 8 Uni-Telway m TSX SCY CU 600 0.80 T-junction box 6 (2-wire isolated) Modbus/Jbus m TSX SCY CM 600 0.80 TSX SCA 62 2-channel subscriber socket 7 RS 8 Uni-Telway m TSX SCY CU 60 0.200 (2-wire isolated) RS 8 terminal 6 RS 8 Character mode m TSX SCY CM 600 0.80 (2-wire isolated) Separate parts Description Description Reference Weight kg SUB-D adapter 9-way male SUB-D connector/2-way female SUB-D connectors TSX CTC 07 0.060.6 9-way male SUB-D connector/2-way male SUB-D connector TSX CTC 0 0.060 8-way female mini-din connector. 2 9-way female SUB-D connector. USB type connector. 9-way male SUB-D connector. 2-way male SUB-D connector 6 Flying leads. 7 -way male SUB-D connector () To be ordered separatly: TSX CTC 07 and TSX CTC 0 adapters, see above separate parts. (2) Point to point, supplied wih SUB-D adapter: TSX CTC 09 9-way female/2-way male SUB-D connector. /

6 6/0

Contents 6 - Software 6 6.-Unitysoftware Selectionguide:Unitysoftware...page6/2 b Unity Pro software v Presentation, setup... page6/ v Softwarestructure... page 6/7 v IEC languages... page6/0 v Functions... page6/6 v References... page 6/26 b Unity EFB Toolkit software... page6/28 b Unity SFC View software.... page6/0 b Unity Studio software suite v Presentation.... page6/ v Functions... page 6/ v References... page6/ b Unity Application Generator (UAG)... v Presentation... page6/2 v References... page6/7 b Process control v Presentation (user-definable and programmable control loops)... page6/8 v User-definable process control... page6/9 6.2-PL7software Selectionguide:PL7software...page6/ b PL7 Junior/Pro programming software v Presentation, setup... page6/6 v Softwarestructure... page 6/9 v languages... page6/6 v Functions... page6/6 v References... page 6/69 6 b SDKC software... page6/72 b PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing... page6/7 b PL7 DIF application comparison software... page6/76 b Process control v Presentation (user-definable control loops)... page6/78 v Functions... page6/79 v Control and operation... page6/8 6/

Selection guide platform 6 Unity software Unity Pro programming software 6 6. IEC 6- languages Programming services Debugging and display services Instruction List (IL) A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Ladder (LD) A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Structured Text (ST) A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Function Block Diagram (FBD) A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Sequential Function Chart (SFC)/Grafcet A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Multitask programming (Master, fast and A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q event-triggered) Multitask programming (Master, fast, auxiliary and event-triggered) Functional view and function modules A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q DFB editor A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q DDT compound data editor A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Data structure instances and tables A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Use of DFB instances A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q EF function block libraries and EFB function blocks A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q User-definable control loops Programmable control loops (with function block libraries) A (TSX PCI 2p)- P (TSX P7 2p) A (TSX PCI 2p/p) - P (TSX P7 2p/p/p) P (TSX P7 p)-q P (TSX P7 p) - Q (0 CPU 6/67) P (TSX P7 2p/p/p/p) P (TSX P7 p/p)-q Hot Standby PLC redundancy system Q (0 CPU 67 60) System diagnostics A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Application diagnostics A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Diagnostics with location of error source A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q PLC simulator A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Hypertext link animations in graphic A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q languages Step by step execution, breakpoint A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Watchpoint A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Runtime screens A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Diagnostic viewers A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Other services Creation of hyperlinks A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q XML import/export A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Application converters (Concept, PL7) A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Utilities for updating PLC operating systems A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Communication drivers for Windows 2000/XP A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q Compatible Modicon platforms Atrium slot-plcs A TSX PCI 20M TSX PCI 20M TSX PCI M Premium CPUs P TSX P7 Cp 02/02M TSX P7 0/6/M TSX P7 20/26/2M TSX P7 Cp 02/02M TSX P7 0/6/M TSX P7 20/26/2M TSX P7 0/6/M TSX P7 6/M Quantum CPUs Q 0 CPU 0 0 CPU 2/ U TSX PCI 20M TSX PCI M TSX P7 Cp 02/02M TSX P7 0/6/M TSX P7 20/26/2M TSX P7 0/6/M TSX P7 6/M TSX P7 6/M 0 CPU 0 0CPU2/U 0 CPU 6 0/60 0 CPU 67 60 Software name Unity Pro Medium Unity Pro Large Unity Pro Extra Large UnityProsoftwaretype UNY SPU MFp CD 20 UNY SPU LFp CD 20 UNY SPU EFp CD 20 Pages 6/27 6/2

6 EF/EFB function development software in C language Collaborative Control distributed project development software Software for designing and generating batch/process applications SFC View application diagnostic and monitoring software Pack for developing specific solutions Enhancement of EF and EFB function block libraries: v Creation of families v Development of functions in C language v Access to all data and variable types v Debugging functions (step by step, breakpoint) v Use of functions created in all languages Supplied with Microsoft Visual C++ Software suite for managing distributed and multi-application projects: v Used for developing and structuring control system applications in a Collaborative Automation environment v Ensures consistency when synchronizing applications on Ethernet v BasedontheMSVisio200 graphic software, the software suite includes: v Unity Studio Manager v Unity Pro XL v OFS (communication) v PowerSuite (drives and motor starters) v XBT-L000 (user interface) v VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) UAG specialist software for designing and generating batch/process applications in a Collaborative Automation environment. It provides the unique project database: v process and control (PLCs) v HMI user interface (Magelis) v SCADA supervision (Monitor Pro V7.2) Based around re-usable objects (PID, valves, etc) and complying with standard ISA S88, UAG generates the PLC code and the elements required for the HMI system. Complies with the GAMP standard (Good Automation Manufacturing Practice) ActiveX control component for monitoring and diagnostics of chart status (SFC or Grafcet) in sequential applications: v Overview of charts and detailed views v Canbeintegratedin human/machine interface (HMI) applications v Access to PLC data via OFS (OPC Factory Server) Includes EFB function block library for Unity Pro Specialist software for developing made-to-order solutions (for example interfaces with an electrical CAD system, automatic application generator, etc): v Access to Unity Pro object servers v Reserved for IT development engineers using Visual Basic or C++ UDE software only supplied after signature of a specific contract with Schneider Electric 6 6. Compatible with: v Unity Pro Medium, Large and Extra Large v All Atrium slot-plcs v All Premium Unity CPUs v All Quantum Unity CPUs Compatible with: v Unity Pro Medium, Large and Extra Large v All Atrium slot-plcs v All Premium Unity CPUs v All Quantum Unity CPUs Compatible with: v Unity Pro Large and Extra Large v TSX P7 6/M and TSX P7 6/M Premium Unity CPUs v All Quantum Unity CPUs Compatible with: v Unity Pro Medium, Large and Extra Large v All Atrium slot-plcs v All Premium Unity CPUs v All Quantum Unity CPUs Compatible with: v Unity Pro Medium, Large and Extra Large v All Atrium slot-plcs v All Premium Unity CPUs v All Quantum Unity CPUs Unity EFB Toolkit Unity Studio Unity Application Generator UAG Medium/Large Unity SFC View Unity Developer s Edition UNY SPU ZFU CD20E UNY SEW pf UNY SEW pfp CD2 UNY SDU MFp CD20 Please consult your Regional Sales Office 6/27 6/27 6/7 6/ 6/26 6/

Presentation platform 6 Unity Pro software User interface Unity Pro s welcome screen provides access to all available tools in a user-friendly format that has been redesigned on the basis of feedback received from users of Concept and PL7 Junior/Pro application design software. 6 6. File/Edit toolbar FBD language editor contextual toolbar PLC toolbar for debug mode Toolbar with zoom (in and out) This welcome screen consists of a general view made up of a number of windows and toolbars, which can be arranged as required on the screen: Menu bar from which all functions can be accessed 2 Toolbar consisting of icons from which the most frequently used functions can be accessed Application browser, which can be used to browse the application based on a conventional and/or a functional view Editor windows area, which can be used to view a number of editors at the same time (configuration editor, Structured Text/Ladder etc. language editors, data editor) Tabs for direct access to editor windows 6 Information window with tabs (User Errors, Import/Export, Search/Replace, etc.) 7 Status bar Accessing functions All functions can be accessed via drop-down menus from the menu bar. The toolbar, which consists of icons, provides more rapid access to the most frequently used functions. This toolbar, which is displayed by default, can be customized to meet the requirements associated with the various uses of Unity Pro software and is divided into three groups: b Main toolbars, which are visible at all times b Contextual toolbar, which is displayed when the corresponding editor is selected b Toolbar with zoom functions (in and out), full-screen view for editor window They are classified according to the category of functions available: b File management (New Project, Open, Save, Print) b Edit (Undo, Redo, Confirm, Go To) b Application services (Analyze Project, Build Project, Browse, Find, Access Library) b Automation platform operating mode (Upload/Download Project, Online/Offline, Run/Stop, Animate, PLC/Simulation Mode) b Debug mode (Set/Remove Breakpoint, etc.) b Window display (Cascade, Horizontal, Vertical) b Online help (non-contextual or contextual) Users can create their own toolbars and insert icons from the main and contextual toolbars into them. Setup: pages 6/ and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/

Setup platform 6 Unity Pro software Project browser The project browser can be used: b To display the content of an Atrium, Premium or Quantum PLC project b To move between the different components of the application (configuration, program, variables, communication, DFB user function blocks, DDT derived function blocks) created by the user The project can be displayed using two types of view: b The structural view, which provides an overall view of the various components of the application. This representation provides a view of the order in which the program sections are processed in the PLC. b The functional view, which provides a view of the project based on specific function modules. This representation provides a breakdown according to consistent functions in relation to the process to be controlled. These two types of view, which are available at any time, can be displayed separately or at the same time (horizontal or vertical windows) by clicking on the icons in the toolbar. Structural view 2 9 0 6 7 8 Structural view This conventional view allows you to access all the different components of the application (configuration, programming, function blocks, debugging, etc.) via the application browser. The browser gives an overall view of the program and offers fast access to all application components. Configuration editor 2 DFB (user function block) and DDT (Derived Data Type) editors Communication networks editor Program editor Variables editor 6 Animation tables editor 7 Runtime screens editor 8 Documentation editor From any level in the tree structure, you can: 9 Create a hyperlink to a comment or description 0 Create a directory for storing hyperlinks used to access a set of user folders From this level, it is also possible to zoom in and only view the detailed levels for a component on this level. Functional view Unity Pro software applications support the creation of an application structure for Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms based on function modules comprising: b Sections (program code) b Animation tables b Runtime screens The designer can define a multi-level tree structure for the application, independently of the multitask structure of the PLC. Program sections written in Ladder (LD), Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Function Block Diagram (FBD) or Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language can be associated with each level, along with animation tables and runtime screens.. 6 6. Functional view Exporting/Importing function modules All or part of the tree structure can be exported to function modules. In this case, all program sections on the various module levels are exported. Utilities make it easy to reuse these modules in new applications by means of data and module name reassignment services. Presentation: page 6/ Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/

Setup (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Configuration editor Hardware configuration The first step when creating an automation project based on an Atrium, Premium or Quantum platform is to select the processor for which a rack and power supply are defined by default. The configuration editor supports the intuitive and graphics-based modification and extension of this configuration with the following elements: b Racks, power supply b PCMCIA memory or communication cards (Atrium/Premium) on the processor b Discrete I/O, analog I/O or application-specific modules b Etc 2 The user has two options: Select the reference for the module chosen from the catalog list and drag it to an available slot in the rack. 2 Insert a new module into a free slot from the contextual file. Configuration and parameter settings for I/O and application-specific modules From the configuration screen for Atrium, Premium or Quantum racks, the parameters screen displayed for the module concerned can be used to define the operating characteristics and parameters for the selected application, e.g.: b Filter values for discrete I/O b Voltage or current range for analog I/O b Threshold counter values b Trajectory of axes for position control b Weigher calibration for weighing b Transmission speed for communication b Presymbolization for variables associated with modules b Etc Configuration and parameter settings for communication networks 6 6. The Communication folder in the structural view can be used to define the list of networks connected to the PLC station. Then, the parameters for all elements required for networks to function correctly can be set by: b Creating a logical network to which comments can be associated b Configuring a logical network defining the various associated network services. Once the network module has been created in the configuration, it must then be associated with one of the logical networks. Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus Plus and Fipway network modules are all configured in this way. The Unity Studio software suite provides the same parameter-setting services for the global automation project, see page 6/6. Configuration check The following information can be accessed at any time during configuration: b The power consumption statistics for the power supply in each of the racks in the PLC configuration, for all the different voltages provided by each of these power supplies b The number of inputs/outputs configured (with Atrium or Premium platform) Presentation: page 6/ Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/6

Software structure platform 6 Unity Pro software Software structure The Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms set up by Unity Pro software support two types of application structure: b Single-task: This is the more simple default structure, in which only the master task is executed. b Multitask: This structure, which is more suitable for high-performance real-time events, consists of a master task, a fast task, periodic tasks, and high-priority event-triggered tasks. The master, fast and periodic tasks are made up of sections and subroutines. The sections and subroutines can be programmed in any of the following languages: Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Ladder (LD) or Function Block Diagram (FBD) (). The event-triggered tasks use the same languages. Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet language is reserved for master task sections. The table below lists the possible program tasks for Atrium, Premium and Quantum type processors respectively. Platform Premium Atrium Quantum TSX P 7 pm TSX P 7 2p()M TSX P 7 p()m TSX P 7 M TSX P 7 6M TSX PCI 7 20 M TSX PCI 7 M 0 CPU 0 0 CPU 2A 0 CPU 6 p0 0 CPU 67 60 TSX P 7 p()m 0 CPU A Cyclic or periodic master task Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Periodic fast task Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Periodic auxiliary tasks Event-triggered 2 6 28 6 6 28 tasks (from modules) Event-triggered tasks (from timers) Total number of event-triggered tasks 2 6 2 2 6 28 6 6 28 ()Premium TSX P7 pm processors do not support Function Block Diagram (FBD) language. 6 Airlock (LD) Oven_ (SFC) Tunnel_ (SFC) Airlock_Alarm (LD) Mon_Sec (LD) Oven_Alarm (ST) Structure, modular and portable programming The tasks of a Unity Pro program for Atrium, Premium or Quantum platforms are composed of several parts known as sections and subroutines. Each of these sections can be programmed in the most appropriate language for the process to be executed. Such division into sections enables a structured program to be created and program modules to be generated or added with ease. 6. Extractor (FBD) SR0 Cleaning_Alarm (ST) SR0 Subroutines can be called from any section of the task to which they belong or from other subroutines in the same task. Cleaning (ST) Master task Fast task Compatibility of languages compliant with IEC standard 6-: UnityPro software can be configured (Tools/Project Settings/Language Extensions menu) to ensure that applications generated are compliant with IEC standard 6-. Furthermore, as long as you use only the standard instruction libraries, you will be able to reuse programs created in this way on any Atrium, Premium or Quantum platform. Presentation: page 6/ Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/7

Memory structure (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Internal processing Input acquisition (%I) RUN STOP Program processing Updating of outputs (%O) Start of period Input acquisition (%I) RUN Program processing STOP Updating of outputs (%O) Internal processing Single-task memory structure Two types of cyclic execution are supported: b Normal cyclic execution. This is the default option. b Periodic execution. This type of execution, as well as the period, are selected by the user during programming when the task parameters are set (master task). Normal execution (cyclic) At the end of each scan, the PLC system launches a new scan. The execution time of each scan is monitored by a software watchdog whose value is defined by the user (max. 00 ms). In the event of overrun, a fault occurs causing: b The scan to stop immediately (STOP) b A fault state to be displayed on the front panel of the processor b The alarm relay for the main rack power supply to be set to 0 End of period Periodic execution Cyclic execution Periodic execution A new scan is executed at the end of each period. The execution time of the scan must be less than the time of the period defined (max. 2 ms). In the event of overrun, the latter is stored in a system bit (%S9), which can be reset to 0 by the user (via the program or terminal). A software watchdog, which can be configured by the user (max. 00 ms), monitors the scan time. In the event of overrun, an execution fault is indicated (see normal execution). The scan execution times (the last scan, the longest scan and the shortest scan) are stored in system words %SW 0//2. Multitask software structure 6 6. Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms support a multitask structure comprising: b master task (divided into several sections programmed in ST, IL, LD, FBD, and SFC languages) b fast task (divided into sections) b 0 to auxiliary tasks (divided into sections) () b or more event-triggered tasks (only one section per task) These tasks are independent and are executed in parallel, with the PLC processor managing their execution priority. When an event occurs, or at the start of the fast task scan: b If any lower-priority tasks are currently being executed, they are suspended. b The event-triggered task or fast task is executed. b The interrupted task resumes once execution of the priority task has been completed. Event-triggered tasks Fast task Master task Auxiliary tasks () Timer_ Aux Airlock_Alarm (IL) Fast Airlock (LD) Mast Process value Aux0 EVT (FBD) Mon_Dry (LD) Oven_ (SFC) Oven Diag (ST) EVT0 Outside limits Oven_Alarm (ST) Tunnel_ (SFC) Temp. (FBD) Cleaning_Alarm (ST) Extractor (FBD) SR0 SR0 SR0 Priority + - Drying (LD) This structure optimizes the way in which processing power is employed and can be used to structure the application and simplify design and debugging, as each task can be written and debugged independently of the others. () Tasks reserved for top-of-the-range Premium TSX P7 pm and Quantum 0 CPU 6 p0/6760 processors. Presentation: page 6/ Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/8

Memory structure (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Multitask memory structure (continued) Master task This task, which can be periodic or cyclic, executes the main program. It is activated systematically. Each of its component sections and subroutines can be programmed in Ladder (LD), Function Block Diagram (FBD), Structured Text (ST) or Instruction List (IL) language. Several sections of the master task can be programmed in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet language. Fast task This task, which has a higher priority than the master task, is periodic in order to allow time for tasks with lower priorities to be executed. It should be used when fast periodic changes in discrete inputs need to be monitored and acknowledged. The execution of the master task (lower priority) is suspended while the fast task is being executed. Processing operations in this task must be as short as possible in order to avoid adversely affecting master task processing operations. Each of the component sections and subroutines of the fast task can be programmed in Instruction List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or FBD). Auxiliary tasks These tasks, which are available on top-of-the-range Premium TSX P7 pm and Quantum 0 CPU 6 p0/6760 processors, are designed for use with slower types of processing operation such as measurement, process control, HMI, application diagnostics, etc. Periodic type auxiliary tasks have the lowest level of priority and are executed once the higher-priority periodic tasks (master and fast) have completed their scan. Each of the component sections and subroutines of the fast task can be programmed in Instruction List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or FBD). Event-triggered tasks Unlike the tasks described above, these tasks are not linked to one period. The execution of these tasks is triggered asynchronously by: An event from certain application-specific modules (e.g.: overrun of a counter threshold, change of state of a discrete input) An event from the event timers These tasks are processed before all other tasks and are thus suitable for processing requiring very short reaction times in comparison to the arrival of the event. Atrium, Premium or Quantum platforms have levels of priority (these are, in descending order, module event EVT0, module events EVTi and timer events Timeri). These tasks, each comprised of a single section, can be programmed in Instruction List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or FBD). 6 6. Input acquisition Program processing Updating of outputs Assignment of I/O channels to tasks Each of the master, fast or event-triggered tasks reads (at the start of the scan) and writes (at the end of the scan) the inputs assigned to it. By default, they are assigned to the master task. For the Quantum platform, the remote inputs/outputs (RIO) are only assigned to the master task (these assignments can be made per station or for each of the component sections of the task), while the distributed inputs/outputs (DIO) are all assigned to the master task (without assignment to its component sections). For event-triggered tasks, it is possible to assign input/output channels () other than those relating to the event. Exchanges are then performed implicitly at the start of processing for inputs and at the end of processing for outputs. () These channel assignments are made per I/O module for Quantum and per channel for Atrium/Premium inputs/outputs. Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/9

IEC language platform 6 Unity Pro software ThefiveIEClanguages The five graphical or textual languages available in Unity Pro are used for programming Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms. The graphical languages are: b Ladder (LD) b Function Block Diagram (FBD) b Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet The 2 textual languages are: b Structured Text (ST) b Instruction List (IL) For these languages, you can use the standard set of instructions compliant with IEC standard 6- to create applications, which can be transferred from one platform to another. Unity Pro software also provides extensions to this standard set of instructions. As they are specific to Atrium/Premium and Quantum PLCs, these extensions support the development of more complex applications in order to maximize the potential of the specific features of each of these platforms. Functionalities common to all five language editors The editors for each of the languages provide a number of common tools used for writing, reading and analyzing programs in a user-friendly manner: 6 6. b The text editors for Instruction List (IL) and Structured Text (ST) support: v Text entry in insert or overwrite mode v The use of dialog boxes for the assisted entry of variables, functions, function blocks or assignment instructions v Checks on data entry to detect syntax or semantics errors. The user is informed of the result of this check by red wavy underlining or by a change in the color of the text concerned. v Access to a set of colors, which can be used to facilitate reading by distinguishing text (black) from operators (red), language key words (blue), and program comments (green) b The graphics editors for Ladder (LD) language, Function Block Diagram (FBD) language and Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language feature: v A set of graphic elements for direct access to the various graphic symbols in the language via the mouse or keyboard v A pop-up menu, which can be accessed by right-clicking with the mouse b Unlimited number and length of comments. These comments can be positioned as text objects in any cell (graphical languages) or at any point in expressions (textual languages). b Assisted data entry functions for: v Accessing DFB function libraries, the variables editor or the text object for entering comments v Initializing a variable reference v Initializing the animation table on selected variables v Displaying and modifying the properties of the selected variable v Creating variables in real time without having to use the data editor b Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete, Move, etc. b Setting bookmarks on lines of text or in the margin so that you can: v Easily locate lines in important program sections v Browse in an editor by bookmark, label or line and column number Presentation: page 6/ Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/0

IEC languages (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Ladder (LD) language Each section or subroutine using Ladder language consists of a series of rungs, which are executed sequentially by the PLC. Each rung consists of graphic objects (placed in cells arranged in columns and lines) corresponding to contacts, links, coils, operation blocks, EF/EFB/DFB function blocks, jumps, SR calls, etc. Program structure (section or subroutine) Each Ladder language section may contain: b Between and 6 columns (number set by user) b Up to 2000 lines (for all rungs in the section) 6 Graphics palette in the Ladder language editor Mixed Display mode supports the unrestricted display of comments, addresses and symbols for the variables used for rungs. 6. Presentation: page 6/ Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/

IEC languages (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Function Block Diagram (FBD) language, with Unity Pro Large and X Large version Function Block Diagram language is a graphical language based on function blocks associated with variables or parameters, which are linked together. This language is particularly suitable for process control applications. 6 6. Program structure (section or subroutine) The graphical language FBD supports three types of function block: b Elementary blocks (EFs) b Elementary Function Blocks (EFBs), sorted into different libraries depending on their type of use b Derived Function Blocks (DFBs), which have a structure identical to that of EFBs but are created by the user with the ST, IL, LD or FBD programming languages Within the same section, subroutines can be called using a specific block. Program jumps to a block instance can also be programmed. A section programmed in FBD language contains the equivalent of a grid with 0 columns and 2 rows. The blocks are positioned on this grid in minimum steps of /0 of a column and /0 of a line (called halftone dot). Presentation: page 6/ Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/2

IEC languages (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Sequential Function Chart (SFC) and Grafcet language Sequential Function Chart (and Grafcet) language can be used to describe the sequential part of an automation system in simple graphical format using steps and transitions. SFC language does not process charts in the same way as Grafcet language: b SFC only authorizes one token in one chart. b Grafcet language authorizes several tokens in one chart. Unity Pro software has one editor for these two languages with the option of defining behavior in the application settings (Tools/Project Settings/Language Extensions menu). Program structure (master task section) SFC language is only used in sections belonging to the master task. Each SFC section consists of a main chart sub-section CHART and sub-sections for each of the macro-steps. The component parts of the charts are: b Macro-steps, which are the sole representation of a set of steps and transitions (used to set up a hierarchical chart structure) b Steps b Transitions and directed links between steps and transitions Associated with steps and transitions respectively, the actions and transition conditions can be: b Integrated into the CHART or macro-step charts, in which case the actions or transition conditions are defined by a single variable b Processed in specific sections, in which case dedicated processing (to be programmed in Ladder, Function Block Diagram, Structured Text or Instruction List language) is necessary In order to check that machine scans have been completed successfully, activity times (minimum, maximum) can be associated with each step. These times are set by the user. Program structure (section in master task) For each SFC section, the graphics editor provides a maximum of: b One grid containing 2 columns and 200 rows, or 600 cells. Steps, transitions or jumps all need one cell respectively. b 02 steps (macro-steps and steps in macro-steps) b 20 actions assigned to the same step b 00 steps activated at the same time b 00 actions activated at the same time To help you to create basic charts, graphic screens can be used to create n steps in series and m steps in parallel in a single operation. Dialog boxes can be used to assign associated properties to steps (activity time, actions), transitions (variable linked to transition condition), etc. 6 6. Presentation: page 6/ Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/

IEC languages (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Structured Text (ST) language Structured Text language is a sophisticated algorithmic type language, which is particularly suitable for programming complex arithmetic functions, table operations, message handling, etc. Program structure (section or subroutine) 6 6. Structured Text language, which can be used to directly transcribe an analysis based on an organization chart, is structured into expressions composed of a series of instructions organized in lines. There is no limit to the number of characters an instruction line may contain (the only limit is the program memory available for the Premium and Quantum platforms, except on TSX P7 0 0 processors, where the limit is 6 Kb). The length of the section is only limited by the size of the application memory. Four preformatted expression structures can be called up directly from the toolbar: b Conditional action : IF THEN ELSIF THEN ELSE END-IF; b Iterative conditional action: WHILE DO END_WHILE; REPEAT UNTIL END_REPEAT; b Repetitive action: FOR TO BY DO END_FOR; b Selective action: CASE OF ELSE END_CASE; The operands used in the expressions are bit variables, word variables or variables linked to function blocks. To make the expressions easier to read, different colors are used to identify objects, language key words and program comments. Presentation: page 6/ Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/

IEC languages (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Instruction List (IL) language Instruction List language is a language representing the equivalent of a Ladder diagram in text form. It can be used to write Boolean and arithmetic equations using all the functions available in the Unity Pro language (calling of functions and function blocks, assignment of variables, creation of program jumps, branching to subroutines within a program section, etc.). Program structure (section or subroutine) A program in Instruction List language comprises a sequence of instructions classified into the following different families: b Bit instructions, e.g. read input: LD overspeed b Function block instructions, e.g. call timer: CAL MOTOR_TIMER b Numerical instructions using single, double and floating point integers, e.g.: LD Result ADD Surplus ST Archive b Word table or character string instructions, e.g. make assignment: LD Result:0:=Setpoint:0 b Program instructions, e.g. SR call: CALL SR0 The operands used in the expressions are bit variables, word variables or variables linked to function blocks. 6 6. Presentation: page 6/ Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/

Functions platform 6 Unity Pro software Data editor The data editor, which can be accessed from the structural view of the project, provides a single tool for performing the following editing tasks: b Declaration of data including variables and function blocks (declaration of their type, instants and attributes) b Use and archiving of function block data types in different libraries b Hierarchical view of data structures b Searching, sorting and filtering of data b Creation of a hyperlink to access a description from any variable comment The data is displayed under four tabs: b Variables tab for the creation and management of the following data instances: bits, words, double words, inputs/outputs, tables, and structures b DDT Types tab for the creation of derived data types (tables and structures) b Function Blocks tabs for the declaration of EFB and DFB function blocks b DFB Types for the creation of DFB user function block data types Each data instance has several attributes, of which: b The name and type of the variable are mandatory b The comment, physical address in the memory or initial values are optional The data editor columns can be configured (number of columns, order). All the attributes associated with a variable can be displayed in a properties window. This editor can be accessed at any time during programming by selecting variables for data modification or creation. 6 6. Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/6

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software DFB user function blocks The user can create his own function blocks for specific application requirements on Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms using Unity Pro software. Once created and saved in the library, these user function blocks can be reused as easily as EFBs (Elementary Function Blocks). These user function blocks can be used to structure an application. They are used when a program sequence is repeated several times in the application or for fixing a standard programming routine. They can be read-only protected or read/write-protected. They can be exported to all other Unity Pro applications. Using a DFB function block in one or more applications: b Simplifies program design and entry b Improves program readability and understanding b Facilitates program debugging (all variables handled by the DFB block function are identified in the data editor) b Enables the use of private variables specific to the DFBs, which are independent of the application A DFB function block is set up in several phases: b The DFB is designed by assigning a name, a set of parameters (inputs, outputs, public and private internal variables) and a comment to it via the data editor. b The code is created in one or more sections of the program, with the following languages selected according to requirements: Structured Text, Instruction List, Ladder or Function Block Diagram (ST, IL, LD or FBD). b The DFB may be stored in a library with an associated version number. b A DFB instance is created in the data editor or when the function is called in the program editor. b This instance is used in the program in the same way as an EFB (Elementary Function Block). (The instance can be created from within the program.) 6 6. Main characteristics Inputs 2 max. () Outputs 2 max. (2) Inputs/outputs 2 max. () (2) Public internal variables Unlimited (can be accessed via the application program) Private internal variables Comment Program sections Unlimited (cannot be accessed via the application program) 02 characters max. Unlimited, each section can be programmed independently in one of the languages (IL, ST, LD, and FBD). () The maximum cumulative total of inputs and inputs/outputs is 2. (2) The maximum cumulative total of outputs and inputs/outputs is 2. Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/7

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Function block libraries The function and function block libraries manager contains all the elements provided with Unity Pro software. The functions and function blocks are organized into libraries, which themselves consist of families. Depending on the type of PLC selected and the model of processor, the user will have a sub-set of these libraries available to write his/her applications. However, the Base Lib library contains a set of functions and function blocks, the majority of which are compatible with all platforms. In particular, it contains the blocks compliant with IEC 6-. The Base Lib library is structured into families: b Timers and counters b Internal process control b Array management b Comparison b Date and time management b Logic processing b Mathematical processing b Statistical processing b Character string processing b Type-to-type data conversion This library, which covers standard automation functions, is supplemented by other, more application-specific libraries, which are platform-specific: 6 6. b Management library for motion control and fast counting b Process control library. The CONT_CTL library can be used to set up process-specific control loops. In particular, it offers controller, derivative and integral control functions. b Communication library, providing an easy means of integrating communication programs from PLCs with those used by HMIs from the PLC application program. Like other function blocks, these EFBs can be used in all languages to share data or to deliver data to be displayed on an HMI. b Extended library, providing additional algorithms, e.g.: EFBs for calculating mean values, selecting a maximum value, performing movements with first-order interpolation, detecting edges or assigning a hysteresis to process variables, etc. b Diagnostics library, which can be used to monitor actuators and contains EFBs for active diagnostics, reactive diagnostics, interlocking diagnostics, permanent process condition diagnostics, dynamic diagnostics, monitoring of signal groups, etc. b System library, which provides EFBs for the execution of system functions: evaluation of scan time, availability of several different system clocks, SFC section monitoring, display of system state, etc. b Finally, a library named obsolete containing all function blocks used by legacy programming software needed to perform application conversions Management of user standards Users may create libraries and families in order to store their own DFB function blocks and DDT data structures. This enhancement allows users to take advantage of programming standards adapted to their needs, along with version management. This means that it is possible to: b Check the version of the elements used in an application program against those stored in the library b Perform an upgrade, if necessary Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/8

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Debugging tools Insertion/removal of watchpoint Execution command Unity Pro software offers a complete set of tools for debugging Atrium, Premium or Quantum applications. A tool palette provides direct access to the main functions: b Dynamic program animation b Setting of watchdogs or breakpoints (not authorized in event-triggered tasks) b Step-by-step program execution. A function in this mode enables section-by-section execution. Instruction-by-instruction execution can be launched from the previous breakpoint. Three execution commands are therefore possible when the element to be processed is a subroutine (SR) or DFB user block: v Detailed step-by-step or Step Into. This command is used to move to the first element of the SR or DFB. v Overall step-by-step or Step Over. This command is used to process the entire SR or DFB. v Outgoing step-by-step or Step Out. This command is used to move to the next instruction after the SR or DFB element. b Independent execution of the master (MAST), fast (FAST), auxiliary (AUX), and event-triggered (EVTi) tasks. Animation of program elements Animation of ST program Animation table Dynamic animation is managed section by section. A button in the toolbar is used to activate or deactivate animation for each section. When the PLC is in RUN, this mode can be used to view, simultaneously: b The animation of a program section, regardless of the language used b The variables window containing the application objects created automatically from the section viewed Several windows can be displayed and animated simultaneously. The Tool tip function, which uses help balloons, can be used to view a variable and its content simultaneously when the object is selected with the mouse (or other pointing device). Two types of animation are supported: b Standard: The variables of the active section are refreshed at the end of the master task (MAST). b Synchronized: The watchpoint can be used to synchronize the display of animated variables with a program element in order to determine their value at this precise point in the program. Animation table Tables containing the variables of the application to be monitored or modified can be created by data entry or initialized automatically from the selected program section. In addition to data animation it is possible to: b Modify bit variables or force them to 0 or b Change the display format b Copy or move variables b Search by cross-reference b Display the list of forced bits These tables can be stored in the application and retrieved from there at a later date. 6 6. Debugging of DFB user function blocks The parameters and public variables of these blocks are displayed and animated in real time using animation tables, with the possibility of modifying and forcing the required objects. In exactly the same way as with other program elements, the watchpoint, breakpoint, step-by-step execution, and program code diagnostics functions can be used to analyze the behavior of DFBs. Setting a breakpoint in a DFB user function block instance stops the execution of the task containing this block. Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/9

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Debugging in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language The various debugging tools are also available in SFC language. However, unlike other sections (IL, ST, LD or FBD) an SFC section executed step by step does not stop execution of the task but instead freezes the SFC chart. Several breakpoints can be declared simultaneously within a single SFC section. Numerous commands are available in this debugging mode via the control panel: b Deactivate active step(s) b Activate initial step(s) b Disable step execution times b Freeze chart regardless of transition conditions b Stop processing of steps b Move to the next step taking account of the transition conditions b Enable transition and move to next step(s) (detailed step-by-step command, Step Into ) b Enable transition in order to execute the end of the macro-step (outgoing step-by-step command, Step Out ) b Preposition chart on steps for which markers have been set, etc. SFC control panel PLC simulator 6 6. Simulator control panel Access to documentation editor The simulator integrated in Unity Pro can be used to test the application program for Atrium, Premium or Quantum PLCs from the PC terminal without having to connect to the PLC processor. The functions provided by the debugging tools are available for debugging the master, fast and auxiliary tasks. As the simulator does not manage the PLC I/O, animation tables can be used to simulate the state of inputs by forcing them to 0 or. The simulator can be connected to third-party applications via an OPC server with OFS (OPC Factory Server) software. Documentation editor The documentation editor is built around the Documentation Browser, which shows the file structure in tree form. It allows all or part of the application file to be printed on any graphics printer accessible under Windows and using True Type technology, in A or US letter print format. The documentation editor supports the creation of user-specific documentation files using the following headings: b Title page b Contents b General information b Title block b Configuration b EF, EFB and DFB type function blocks b User variables b Communication b Project structure b Program b Animation tables and cross-references b Runtime screens The documentation editor can generate the documentation file based on two different structures: b Structural view: All the objects in the project are associated with their corresponding headings. b Functional view: The objects in the project are associated with the function modules to which they belong. The documentation file can be created and saved as the project progresses, from one Unity Pro session to another. Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/20

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Integrated diagnostics Presentation Diagnostics integrated into Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms System diagnostics Diagnostics viewers Vijeo Look Monitor Pro Higher-level M.E.S. Processor for system bits and words In-rack I/O modules Remote I/O modules on Fipio Ethernet TCP/IP Quantum Cell level Application diagnostics Premium Magelis XBT/T XBT Machine level PC Unity Pro Functions System diagnostics The diagnostics offer for Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms is based on three components: b System diagnostics b DFB and EFB diagnostic function blocks (for system and application diagnostics) b Error message display system or viewers supplied as standard with Magelis XBT/T XBT terminals, Vijeo Look/ Monitor Pro supervisory software and Unity Pro setup software. The system diagnostics for the Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms supports the monitoring of system bits/words, I/O modules and activity times (minimum/maximum) of SFC steps. By simply choosing the relevant option in the application configuration, any event will result in time-stamped messages being generated automatically without the need for any additional programming thanks to these diagnostics viewers (). With the assistance of Unity Pro's integrated diagnostics, this function can be used to perform st level diagnostics of the elements in the configuration, up to and including each I/O module channel. 6 6. Configuration level Module level Viewer window (example with Unity Pro software) Channel level () Diagnostics viewers are tools used to display and acknowledge error messages relating to diagnostics. They are supplied as standard with Unity Pro, Vijeo Look and Monitor Pro software and with Magelis terminals. 6/2

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Integrated diagnostics Application diagnostics Unity Pro software also has a library of function blocks for monitoring, called diagnostic DFBs and EFBs. The library of diagnostic function blocks contains: b Manufacturer blocks for system diagnostics v IO_DIA input/output fault, which is used to monitor the state of inputs/outputs. v ASI_DIA, which monitors whether an error has occurred on the AS-i bus (module or bus fault, no slave, slave not configured or faulty). b Manufacturer blocks for application diagnostics, for example: v EV_DIA, which monitors whether an event (bit status) has the correct value at a given time (no notion of timing). v MV_DIA, D_GRP, D_REA, which monitor whether an event (change in the status of a bit) occurs in accordance with the specified time conditions. v ALRM_DIA, which monitors the combination of the status of 2 bits. v NEPO_DIA and TEPO_DIA, which can be used to check, control and perform diagnostics for elements in the working part of the system made up of the combination of 2 actuators and 2 sensors. Inputs Usrst_dia ED COND ERROR STATUS AREA_NR OP_CTRL Outputs b Open diagnostics blocks These enable users to create their own diagnostic function blocks to meet the specific requirements of their applications and therefore to supplement the manufacturer DFBs and EFBs described above. They can be created from 2 model blocks, which must be written in Ladder (LD), Structured Text (ST), Function Block Diagram (FBD) or Instruction List (IL) language. Diagnostics with fault finding Furthermore, when a fault occurs, Unity Pro analyzes the program sections concerned and opens a second window displaying the causes and probable sources of the fault. The user or process operator is guided though the fault-finding process, enabling machine downtimes to be reduced. 6 The configuration module or instruction, which is the source of the fault, can also be accessed via the diagnostics viewer integrated into Unity Pro, directly from the alarm in the viewer output window (see page 6/2). 6. Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/22

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Integrated diagnostics Diagnostics viewers All the diagnostic events processed by Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms via diagnostic DFBs/EFBs are stored in a buffer (specific data memory area on the PLC). The information contained in this buffer is sent (transparently for the user) to viewers for automatic display and for management of faults and alarms. The viewer function is supplied as standard with: b Vijeo Look and Monitor Pro V7 supervisory software b Unity Pro programming software b Magelis XBT F and Magelis ipc HMI terminals (function only available with Premium PLCs) The integrated viewer in Unity Pro can also be used to access the instruction or module, which is the source of the fault. See Diagnostics with fault finding, page 6/22. Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms have multiviewer capability (can be used with a maximum of viewers). A PC-compatible station with the viewer function can be multi-plc (can be used with a maximum of Atrium/Premium/Quantum platforms). Viewer The buffer/viewer structure supports: b A single point for fault management in each application b Time-stamping of the occurrence of faults at source b Storage of intermittent faults in memory b Independence with regard to the viewer functions. The frame sent from the PLC buffer is identical for all viewers. b Automatic archiving of all error messages Output window The diagnostics viewer takes the form of an output window divided into 2 sections: b A message list indicating, for each alarm: state, DFB type, geographical zone, dates and times of appearance/disappearance, associated message and status b An area for additional information about the selected message: type, comment, date of appearance, specific data, variables in error state, etc. Runtime screens The runtime screen tool is integrated into Unity Pro. The runtime screens are designed to facilitate the operation of automated processes during debugging, startup and maintenance. The runtime screens provide a set of information (explanatory texts, display of dynamic values, push buttons, and synoptics), enabling users to act quickly and easily to modify and dynamically monitor PLC variables. The runtime screens editor provides all the HMI (Human/Machine Interface) elements needed for the animated design and viewing of processes. It enables these screens to be designed using specific tools: b Screen: Creation of runtime screens, which can be classified according to family. b Message: Creation of messages to be displayed. b Objects: Creation of a graphic objects library using: v Geometrical elements (line, rectangle, ellipse, incorporation of images, controller front panels, etc.) v Control elements (buttons, data entry fields, screen browsing controls, etc.) v Animation elements (colors, flashing elements, bar graphs, etc.) When the station on which Unity Pro has been installed is connected to the PLC, the user can obtain a dynamic display of the screens according to the state of the process. Screen sequencing is possible, depending on the priority attributed, either via the keyboard or a PLC request. When online, the Unity Pro application program can be accessed directly from the runtime screens by clicking on the selected object in a synoptic screen view. It is also possible to activate the animation table or cross-reference functions by selecting one or more variables on the screen. To make the display easier to read, the synoptic views can be displayed in full-screen view. 6 6. Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/2

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Modifying the program with the PLC in RUN Unity Pro enables changes to be made to the program when the PLC connected to the programming terminal is in RUN. These modifications are made by performing the following operations: b Where necessary, transferring the application in the PLC to the PC terminal running Unity Pro. b Preparing the program changes offline. These program modifications can be of any type and in any language (IL, ST, LD, FBD, and SFC), for example adding/deleting SFC steps or actions. Furthermore, modifications can be made to the code of a DFB user function block (although its interface cannot be modified). b Updating the program in the PLC (in RUN) to reflect these program changes. This function allows program code and data in different parts of the application to be added or modified in a single modification session (thus making modification unified and consistent with regard to the controlled process). This increased flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the program memory volume required. Cross-References functions The Unity Pro Cross-References function, which is available in standalone mode (offline) and when connected to the PLC (online), allows users to view all the elements of a PLC application by searching for variables of any type. This view indicates where the declared variable is used as well as the mode in which it is used (write, read, etc.). This function also provides access to the Search/Replace function for variable names. The variables search can be initialized from any editor (language, data, runtime screen, animation table, etc.). Import/export function 6 6. The import/export function available in Unity Pro supports the following operations from the structural and functional project views: b Via the import function, to reuse all or part of a project created previously in the current project b Via the export function, to copy all or part of the current project to a file for subsequent reuse The files generated on export are generally in XML format (). However, variables can be exported or imported in the following formats in addition to XML: b.xvm format compatible with OFS data server software b Source format, in a.scy file compatible with PL7 design software b Text format with separator (TAB), in a.txt file for compatibility with any other system On import, data can be assigned to new instances of the following elements via an assistant: b DFB function blocks b DDT data structures b Simple data Furthermore, when importing a function module, the data associated with animation tables and runtime screens is also reassigned. The XML import function also supports the transfer of an Atrium, Premium or Quantum PLC configuration prepared in the SIS Pro costing and configuration tool for use in the creation of a project in Unity Pro. This import function means that the user does not have to repeat the PLC configuration process when this has already been completed in the SIS Pro tool. () XML language: Open text-based language providing structural and semantic information. Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/2

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software Application converters Unity Pro's integrated conversion tools can be used to convert PLC applications created with Concept and PL7 programming and setup software in Unity Pro applications. Concept/Unity Pro converter (Quantum PLC) The conversion can be performed from a Concept V2. application (possible in V2. or later but only once it has been updated to version V2.). In order to perform the conversion, the application must be exported to an ASCII file in Concept. The export file is converted into Unity Pro source files automatically. This source file is then analyzed by Unity Pro. At the end of the procedure, a conversion report is generated and an output window displays any conversion errors from which the part of the program to be modified can be accessed directly. The Concept application converter converts the application into Unity Pro but does not guarantee that it will operate correctly in real time. It is therefore essential to test or debug any converted application. PL7/Unity Pro converter (Premium and Atrium slot PLC) The conversion can be performed from a PL7 application V or later (Premium PLC or Atrium slot PLC). In order to perform the conversion, the source file (complete application) or source file (user function block) must be exported in PL7. The conversion procedure is similar to that of the Concept conversion described above. Operating system update utilities OS-Loader software is designed for updating operating systems on Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms and is supplied with Unity Pro software. It can be used to update the following for compatibility with Unity Pro: b Premium TSX P7 2pM/262M and TSX P7 pm/62m processors b Quantum 0 CPU 2A and 0 CPU A processors (requires PV 0 or later) b Ethernet TCP/IP TSX ETY and 0 NOE 77 communication modules These operating system updates are performed as follows for the various types of processor: b Uni-Telway RS 8 terminal link for Premium processors b Modbus or Modbus Plus terminal link for Quantum processors b Ethernet TCP/IP network for integrated Ethernet port on Premium processors and Ethernet Premium and Quantum processors 6 6. Communication drivers Driver type The drivers used most frequently on the Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms are installed at the same time as the Unity Pro software. Furthermore, Unity Pro also includes the following communication drivers, which can be installed as required: Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows 98 Millennium Windows 9 OSS/2 DOS Uni-Telway V.6 IE7 V.9 IE7 V.6 IE7 V7.8 IE8 V7. IE TSX FPC0 V. IE0 V. IE08 V. IE0 V2. IE V2. IE V2.2 IE TSX FPC20 V.2 IE0 V. IE08 V.2 IE0 V.2 IE0 V. IE0 TSX SCP V. IE0 V. IE0 V. IE0 V. IE0 Ethway V. IE02 V. IE0 V2.6 IE06 V2.6 IE06 V2.6 IE22 ISAway V.2 IE0 V. IE06 V.2 IE0 V.2 IE09 PCIway V.0 IE06 XIP V.7 IE V.7 IE V.7 IE V.7 IE Modbus V. IE06 V. IE06 V. IE06 V. IE06 USB for mini-din terminal port Included with PL7 USB for USB terminal port V.0 IE Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ References: pages 6/26 and 6/27 6/2

Functions (continued), references platform 6 Unity Pro software Advanced openness for experienced IT engineers Advanced openness, which is reserved for experienced IT engineers, supports the development of interfaces between Unity and expert tools as well as specific user-defined functions. This type of development requires expert IT knowledge in the following areas: b C++ or Visual Basic languages b Client/server architectures b XML and COM/DCOM technologies b Issues relating to data synchronization As a supplement to the Unity Studio software suite, the UDE (Unity Developer's Edition) development tool can be used to set up made-to-order solutions. In addition to a development kit, it includes the Unity servers, training, documentation, and technical support. Example of a made-to-order solution, which can be set up with UDE This UDE development tool can only be supplied once a specific contract has been signed with Schneider Electric. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. References Unity Pro Medium, Large and Extra Large software packages 6 6. The software is available in versions: b Unity Pro Medium for programming and setting up Unity automation platforms: v Atrium TSX PCI 7 20 v Premium TSX 7 0p, 7 0 and 7 20 b Unity Pro Large for programming and setting up automation platforms: v Atrium TSX PCI 7 20 and 7 0 v Premium TSX 7 0p, 7 0, 7 20, 7 0 and 7 0 v Quantum with 0 CPU 0, 2U and U processors b Unity Pro Extra Large for programming and setting up all Unity automation platforms: v Atrium TSX PCI 7 20 and 7 0 v Premium TSX 7 0p, 7 0, 7 20, 7 0, 7 0 and 7 0 v Quantum with 0 CPU 0, 2U, U, 6 0, 6 60 and Hot Standby 0 CPU 67 60 processors Furthermore, Unity Pro can be used to design and run programmable process control loops on Premium TSX 7 0 and 7 0 platforms and Quantum platforms with 0 CPU 6 0, 6 60 and 67 60 processors (access to CONT_CTL process control function block library). Upgrade kits for Concept, PL7 Pro and ProWORX software Users who have already purchased these installed base software programs and have a current subscription may purchase Unity Pro version V2.0 software at vastly reduced prices. These upgrades are only possible for licenses of the same type (from Concept XL group license to Unity Pro Extra Large group license). OS Windows composition and compatibility Unity Pro multilingual software is compatible with Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP operating systems. It comprises: b Documentation in electronic format in languages (English, French, German, and Spanish) This documentation can be ordered separately in paper format. b Converters for converting applications created with Concept and PL7 Pro programming software b PLC simulator Cables for connecting the processor to the programming PC must be ordered separately. Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 6/26

References (continued) platform 6 Unity Pro software TSX PCX 0 References (continued) Unity Pro Medium version 2.0 software packages For PLCs Description Type of license Reference Weight kg TSX 7 0p 7 20 TSX PCI 7 20 Unity Pro Medium software packages Software upgrades from: - Concept M - PL7 Junior Single-station UNY SPU MFU CD 20 Group(stations) UNY SPU MFG CD 20 Single-station UNY SPU MZU CD 20 Group(stations) UNY SPU MZG CD 20 Unity Pro Large version 2.0 software packages For PLCs Description Type of license Reference Weight kg TSX 7 0p 7 0 TSX PCI 7 20/0 0 CPU 0 0 CPU 2U 0 CPU U Unity Pro Large software packages Software upgrades from: - Concept M - PL7 Junior Single-station UNY SPU LFU CD 20 Group(stations) UNY SPU LFG CD 20 Team (0 stations) UNY SPU LFT CD 20 Site (> 0 stations) UNY SPU LFF CD 20 Single-station UNY SPU LZU CD 20 Group(stations) UNY SPU LZG CD 20 Team (0 stations) UNY SPU LZT CD 20 Site (> 0 stations) UNY SPU LZF CD 20 Unity Pro Extra Large version 2.0 software packages For PLCs Description Type of license Reference Weight kg TSX 7 0p 7 0 TSX PCI 7 20/0 0 CPU 0 0 CPU 2U 0 CPU U 0 CPU 6 0/60 0 CPU 67 60 Unity Pro Extra Large software packages Software upgrades from: - Concept M - PL7 Junior - ProWORX NxT -ProWORX2 Single-station UNY SPU EFU CD 20 Group(stations) UNY SPU EFG CD 20 Team (0 stations) UNY SPU EFT CD 20 Site (> 0 stations) UNY SPU EFF CD 20 Single-station UNY SPU EZU CD 20 Group(stations) UNY SPU EZG CD 20 Team (0 stations) UNY SPU EZT CD 20 Site (> 0 stations) UNY SPU EZF CD 20 Documentation for Unity Pro version 2.0 For PLCs Description Type of license Reference Weight kg Getting Started manuals (on CD-ROM) Hardware and software manuals (on CD-ROM) Assisted creation of a first Unity Pro application Platform setup for: Multilingual: English, French, -Atrium/Premium German, and Spanish - Quantum - Momentum - Electromagnetic compatibility of networks and fieldbuses Software setup for: -UnityPro - EF/EFB/DFB function blocks library English UNY USE 00 0E French UNY USE 00 0E UNY USE 909 CD M Separate parts Description Use from processor To PC port Length Reference Weight kg PC terminal connection cables Mini-DIN port for Premium TSx 7 p/2p/p/p Atrium TSX PCI 7 Modbus port -way SUB-D Quantum 0 CPU 0 0 CPU 2A 0 CPU A RJ connector for Modbus port Quantum 0 CPU 6p USB port Premium TSX 7 p Quantum 0 CPU 6p RS 22D (-way SUB-D connector) 2. m TSX PCX 0 0.70 USB port 2. m TSX PCX 00 0.0 RS 22D (-way SUB-D connector).7 m 990 NAA 26 20 0.00 m 990 NAA 26 0 0.80 RJ connector m 0XCA2820 m 0XCA28202 6m 0XCA2820 USB port. m UNY XCA USB 0 6 6. Presentation: page 6/82 Setup: pages 6/8 and 6/8 Software structure: pages 6/8 to 6/9 IEC language: pages 6/0 to 6/ Functions: pages 6/6 to 6/26 6/27

Presentation, setup platform 6 Unity EFB Toolkit software Presentation Unity EFB Toolkit is the software for developing EF functions and EFB function blocks in C language and is optional software for Unity Pro. It can be used to develop new functions (whose internal code is written in C language) to extend and complete the set of functions proposed as standard in Unity Pro. This software comes with Microsoft Visual C++ @.Net which can be used to debug the functions used on the Unity Pro PLC simulator. Unity EFB Toolkit also includes a service for creating and managing families of functions, with a view to their integration in the Unity Pro function libraries. Setup C language development software is a proper tool for managing the whole function while it is being performed: b A user-friendly creation interface, integrated in Unity Pro, with automatic file organization b Powerful tools for testing and debugging b Management of compatibilities and software versions of created functions b Generation of files for subsequent installation of functions on other development stations Managing function families 6 The software can be used to define different function families. These functions, also known as EFs/EFBs, are stored in families, making it possible to create an organized library of functions written in C language. Once created, these families can be distributed and integrated in the Unity Pro libraries. They are: b Arranged in families/functions b Used in all languages with the same flexibility as standard functions (data entry wizard) b Managed by the Unity Pro library tool (version management) 6. Editing functions The various tabs in the EFB Toolkit software editor allow the user to create the function by: b Declaring the interface, all data types are possible (elementary, structures, tables) b Supporting public and private variables Writing the source code file in C language A function written in C language can access numerous internal PLC services such as the real-time clock, PLC variables, system words, math functions. In particular, it is possible to perform numerical processing in floating point format. 6/28

Setup(continued), reference platform 6 Unity EFB Toolkit software Setup (continued) Debugging functions The function created can be tested after insertion in an application and loading into theunityproplcsimulator. The Microsoft Visual C++ tool is used to debug the function. It is used to: b Insert breakpoints b Perform step by step execution b Display the code with the breakpoints visible b Display manipulated data Enhancing the function library As the function has been debugged, it can be generated and distributed, and the updating tool supplied with Unity Pro can be used to enhance the libraries on a user station. Version management means that at any time the user knows the level of functions installed on a station and can update the application with the latest existing versions. References The companion software for Unity Pro, Unity EFB Toolkit can be used to create EF elementary blocks and EFB elementary function blocks. These are developed in Visual C++ language and are integrated in Unity Pro function block libraries. The Unity EFB Toolkit software and its documentation are supplied in electronic form on CD-ROM in English. Description Unity EFB Toolkit, kit for developing EF and EFB blocks Unity EFB Toolkit subscription renewal Type of license Single ( station) Language Reference Weight kg English (software and electronic documentation) UNYSPUZFUCD20E UNY CSP SPU ZBU 6 6. 6/29

Presentation platform 6 Unity SFC View software Presentation Unity SFC View is integrated in human/machine interface (HMI) applications for monitoring Unity Pro sequential applications written in sequential function chart language (SFC or Grafcet) executed by a PLC. Set up in the same way as an ActiveX control component, Unity SFC View is used to display status information relating to SFC charts executed by a Premium or Quantum PLC. Installed on an HMI station, Unity SFC View monitors and controls the status of SFC charts in real time, supplying detailed diagnostic data. Unity SFC View reads the necessary data from the Unity project database in offline mode. The PLC data is accessed online via the OFS (OPC Factory Server). Without needing to recreate SFC charts in the HMI environment, Unity SFC View reads the structure of the SFC charts directly from the Unity project database. Modifications made to the SFC application are detected and updated at any time. In online mode, Unity SFC View accesses the PLC diagnostic data, thus enabling awareness and tracking of the occurrence of the first fault and subsequent faults. System downtime is much reduced since Unity SFC View enables maintenance staff to locate the source of the problem much more quickly. Unity SFC View is designed for end users and system designers who wish to integrate this control into their HMI system. Unity SFC View is compatible with most HMI platforms handling ActiveX Control components such as Vijeo Look control software or Monitor Pro supervisory software or in a programming environment such as Visual Basic. 6 6. 6/0

Presentation (continued) platform 6 Unity SFC View software The Unity SFC View views Unity SFC View offers views: b An overview for managing selection of SFC charts b Two detailed views presenting the status and diagnostic data of the selected SFC chart Overview The overview provides a general view of all the SFC charts in a Unity project. It contains real-time data such as current step, simultaneous steps, chart error with indication of the SFC chart status. The overview makes it easy to browse through SFC charts and switch quickly to the detailed view of the desired SFC chart in the Unity Pro application. The simple detailed view shows the elementary data on the active step (or selected step) of the SFC chart in real time. The data displayed may include the name, comment, chart and step status, as well as the activity times (min, max, actual). You can also enable the chart navigation option. Simple detailed view Because of the compact size of the simple detailed view, it is possible to place several instances of it on a single HMI screen relating to a certain part of the process. From this simple detailed mode, you can navigate between HMI screens with SFC View controls and display the detailed view of SFC charts. Detailed view The detailed view illustrates the details of an SFC chart in real time. The display indicates the current step, the transition awaiting activation and the next step. The actions associated with the steps are displayed along with sequence selections or parallel branches. The detailed diagnostic data includes analysis of the causes of the fault at transition level. Depending on the diagnostic mode, the error grid contains the causes of errors or all the variables assigned to the transition logic. The current state of the various variables and selected errors are identified by different colors. Diagnostic mode Transition logic diagnostics is a key function of Unity SFC View. It minimizes system downtimes in the event of a fault. Two different diagnostic modes are available: b Unity SFC View reads the data in the Unity PLC diagnostic buffer. It provides information about faulty or missing events that are preventing the transition from being enabled. This mode does not require any configuration or additional programming in the PLC program. b Unity SFC View monitors the internal logic of the transition conditions back to front. This mode provides diagnostic data concerning all the inputs connected to the transition (not limited to faulty inputs). In this mode, Unity SFC View uses specific EFB function blocks linked to the transition conditions. The library for these blocks is supplied with the Unity SFC View software. Customization Unity SFC View offers a programming interface which can be used to integrate the ActiveX Control component in an HMI application and customize its functions and its operator interface. The ActiveX Control component in Unity SFC View can be customized. It accepts properties, methods and events (all the properties have a default value). The properties pages simplify configuration. Unity SFC View accepts scripts with methods such as browsing through charts, status control of charts, and also events such as error notification or chart selection. This data can be used to launch programs or operator screens. 6 6. SFC View properties page 6/

Presentation (continued) platform 6 Unity SFC View software Possible architectures Unity SFC View is used in a configuration where the OFS and Unity Pro software reside on the same PC platform as the HMI application. Basic architecture Operator station with HMI application and Unity Pro, OFS and SFC View programs and projects Quantum, Premium with Unity SFC program In a distributed configuration, the OFS and Unity Pro software can be installed on different servers. Distributed architecture Operator station with HMI application and SFC View projects Unity projects Ethernet TCP/IP COM or DCOM OFS server P Server (Unity) 6 6. PLC network Quantum, Premium with Unity SFC program 6/2

Presentation (continued) platform 6 Unity SFC View software References When integrated in an HMI application, Unity SFC View can be used to monitor and control charts in applications developed in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language running on Premium/Quantum Unity PLCs. The HMI station, compatible with Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional operating systems, must support ActiveX Control components. Unity SFC View V2.0 requires: b Unity Pro V2.0 (M, L or XL), to be ordered separately b OFS V. data server software, to be ordered separately Unity SFC View multilingual software, supplied on a CD-ROM, includes: b The SFC View ActiveX Control component b The EFB function block library for Unity Pro V2.0 b An example of how to integrate SFC View in Unity Pro projects b The electronic documentation (English, French, German and Spanish) The Unity SFC View integration example illustrates the main possibilities offered by Unity SFC View. This is an executable program which does not need HMI software in order to run. It helps the user understand how to configure and use the Unity SFC View ActiveX Control component. Description Type of license Reference Weight kg Unity SFC View software Single ( station) UNY SDU MFU CD20 packages (version V2.0) Team (0 stations) UNY SDU MFT CD20 Site (00 stations) UNY SDU MFF CD20 6 6. 6/

Presentation platform 6 Unity Studio software suite General presentation Unity Studio for the development of a distributed project 2 2 2 The Unity Studio software suite is the key component on design office workstations used for designing and structuring automation applications in a collaborative environment. This type of project consists of creating an automation application comprising various devices: Communication networks 2 Automation platforms and distributed I/O Variable speed drives, motion control Human machine interfaces (HMIs) Based on a horizontal approach, the software suite supports: b Project management for distributed control applications b Application and device management b The consistency and synchronization of Ethernet TCP/IP communication between devices The Unity Studio software suite offers designers of industrial automation distributed control projects the possibility of using all these tools in conjunction. From the design phase on, everyone involved has easy, user-friendly access to a single, shared representation of the project. The objective of the Unity Studio software suite is to: b Provide a unique structural representation of the project shared by experts in all application-specific domains b Increase the productivity of each expert All-in-one software suite 6 6. Unity Studio V2.0 is an all-in-one software suite based on Microsoft's Visio 200 Professional graphic design tool. It is supplied with the following software as standard: b Unity Studio Manager V2.0 for managing distributed control applications b Unity Pro XL V2.0 for programming Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms b OFS V. (OPC Factory Server) for accessing and exchanging data in the architecture b PowerSuite V. for setting up drives and motor starters b XBT-L000 V.0 for creating Magelis HMI applications b Microsoft VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) for developing customized functions b MS Visio 200 Professional, depending on the type of software license Unity Studio V2.0 is the ideal tool for integrating and configuring Transparent Ready products. Unity Studio Manager tools allow you to create direct links with other Schneider Electric applications or with third-party software applications. In addition, the Unity Developer's Edition (UDE) software package provides an advanced open development solution for the programming of user functions and the development of interactive interfaces with other software applications (programming in C++, VBA, VBA macros, etc.), see page 6/26. The Unity Studio software suite is the ideal software engineering platform for distributed control applications. Functions: Pages 6/ to 6/0 References: page 6/ 6/

Functions platform 6 Unity Studio software suite Project views Graphical project views In conjunction with the Visio 200 graphics editor, the Unity Studio software suite can be used to create project views in specific pages: b Process or machine view: A unique representation shared by all specialist experts/consultants working on the project (mechanical, hydraulic, electrical engineering, etc.). Graphical process or machine view b View of the distributed automation architecture: A graphical representation of the project's automation devices and communication networks. These views are composed using application-specific object libraries (construction, mechanical, hydraulic, electrical engineering, etc.). The Schneider component library extends the scope of the Visio libraries. Graphical views are created by dragging and dropping objects from the libraries to the tabbed pages. Objects, their links and related properties composing the project views are entered once into the graphical views and shared with: b Other views b Other Unity Studio suite software and external software applications Based on the Visio 200 editor, the graphical views are easy to use thanks to the standard user interface (Microsoft office tools). Graphic elements can be integrated from other market-standard CAD software (AutoCAD, Micro Station, etc.). Graphical view of the distributed automation architecture Functional view The functional view is a structured tree diagram of the entire set of machine or process functions. It is taken from the graphical view of the process or machine. Functional view This hierarchical structure comprises functional entities in the form of folders that can be nested at different levels. The project designer associates functional entities with stations making up the project. After generation (see page 6/9), the corresponding functional entities are made available in the structural view (configuration entity) of Unity Pro applications for Atrium/Premium/Quantum platforms. 6 6. Topological view Topological view The topological view is composed using the control architecture graphical view. This topological view displays the communication networks and connected devices in a folder structure. In a similar fashion, after generation (see page 6/9), elements of the topological view are made available in the structural view (communication element) of each Unity Pro application for the Modicon Atrium/Premium/Quantum platforms in the distributed automation architecture. Network names and the names and types of stations defined in the graphical view of Unity Studio are sent to Unity Pro applications. Presentation: page 6/ References: page 6/ 6/

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Studio software suite Communication view The communication view enables PLCs to be synchronized and data to be exchanged with the following types of distributed product: v Altivar drives v Advantys STB, Momentum distributed I/O v Or any other product connected to the Ethernet architecture, including those connected via Ethernet/Modbus Plus or Ethernet/Modbus gateways. Communication view Set using the symbolic variables editor in Unity Studio, parameters for communication services between the various devices or products (Global Data and I/O Scanning services) are loaded automatically in the files for each station during generation (see page 6/9), thereby ensuring that all stations benefit from: b Ensured communication consistency between the distributed applications concerned b Maximum productivity based on station configuration b Reduction in the risk of errors I/O Scanning The I/O Scanning service can be used to manage the exchange of remote I/O states on the Ethernet TCP/IP network following simple configuration, with no need for specific programming. I/O scanning is transparent and is carried out via read/write requests sent by the Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms in accordance with the Modbus TCP client/server protocol. This technique of scanning via a standard protocol enables communication with any product that supports a Modbus server on TCP/IP. Unity Studio can define a number of communication frames for each station. Each communication frame, reserved for reading inputs and writing outputs, is limited to 00 consecutive words. See page /22 for more information about the I/O Scanning service. 6 Ethernet TCP/IP Variable A Variable B Variable C Global Data The Global Data service on Ethernet TCP/IP communication networks can be used to exchange data between connected stations in real time. 6. Publication Subscription Subscription Publication This service enables a common database to be synchronized and shared between 6 stations. Each of the 6 stations in a distribution group can: b Publish a 02-byte variable on the network b Subscribe to between and 6 published variables Application Application 2 Application n The Global Data view in Unity Studio can be used to define Global Data distribution groups and set parameters for variables published and subscribed to by the stations. See page /2 for more information about the Global Data service. 6/6

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Studio software suite Object libraries The Unity Studio software suite supplies open libraries of objects that can be re-used in graphical views: b Visio200libraries b Schneider Electric automation product library Objects found in these libraries are of 2 types: b Process objects for the creation of a graphical view of a process or machine (motors, valves, actuators, pumps, etc.) b Automation objects for the creation of a control architecture view (PLCs, networks, drives, HMI terminals, Ethernet hubs, etc.) Each object can be given its own parameters (type of valve, etc.) using predefined properties or enhanced by applying customized properties. Process library Schneider Electric automation product library Adding new objects The numerous libraries supplied can be expanded as needed by: b Downloading Visio objects available online, covering all industrial fields (Microsoft Visio site, product reseller sites or sites specializing in Visio objects) b Creation of objects by the user A customized object can be created by: b Integrating a graphical thumbnail of your choice (.bmp format) into the library b Defining customized object properties b Creating XML-format rules for complex objects Complex objects (for automation devices) can be created by writing usage rules (for instance, the possibility of connecting a type of automation device to a type of communication network) in standard extensible Markup Language (XML) format. Thumbnails Parameters Rules XML-format rules PLCs Networks HMI Variablespeed drives Motor starters Hubs Switches etc. 6 6. Process objects (sensors, actuators, etc.) Automation objects (components, etc.) Hyperlinks can be defined from the objects in order to launch a software application or to open a document related to the object (see next page). Presentation: page 6/ References: page 6/ 6/7

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Studio software suite Direct-access hyperlinks From the Unity Studio project views, it is possible to create hyperlinks at any time to: b All document types in.xls,.doc,.pdf, etc. formats b Web pages via a URL address b Software tools, for example for configuration, network diagnostics, production management, etc. Creation of a link from an object Direct access to the configuration software tool relative to the object Managing distributed control applications The project is described in Unity Studio by different views, which: b Provide specific types of characteristic information b Provide access to associated information 6 6. 2 Assignment of an automation application to each station in the architecture 2 Launch of the application from the topological or functional view Creation and location of files for each station Assignment of functional process or machine entities to station applications Presentation: page 6/ References: page 6/ 6/8

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Studio software suite Project analysis operations In order to detect any errors as early as possible, the Unity Studio software suite analyzes application coherence and consistency. A report indicates any possible errors in the form of alarms. Checks are performed on: b Station addressing b The types of station defined b Data exchanged in real time on the Ethernet network between PLC stations via the I/O Scanning and Global Data services (reserved word zones, group, published and subscribed variables) b The hierarchical structure of functional entities Generation for each individual station Following the analysis (and after any corrections have been made to render the application compliant), generation using the Unity Pro software suite enables you to create specific parameter settings for each station in each corresponding station file. The parameter settings generated - consistent with the global project - are listed in the table below for each type of station. For PLC stations (Atrium, Premium and Quantum), this generation includes the creation of the functional view, the program structure and the parameter settings for the Global Data and I/O Scanning services. Generation in Unity Pro Type of data generated Application Device Name Project file Name Format Unity Pro XBT L000 Power Suite Concept PL7 OFS Network Routing path Creation of Unity Pro program structures Link Functional entity Group Name Format Address Name Structure Name Multicast address Global Data Variable name Variable type Producer/consumer I/O Scanning Variable name Variable type I/O Scanner setting 6 6. Data generated using Unity Studio with consistency check and updates Data created in Unity Studio XML data generated using Unity Pro Consistency check and update operations The check verifies the consistency of the project parameter settings with the files for each station. The update updates the parameter settings in the station files to correspond to those in Unity Studio (see table above). Any modifications made on the stations are checked and replicated at all other project levels. The existing parameter settings for a station added to the project are updated in Unity Studio (in the event of the re-use of an existing station). Presentation: page 6/ References: page 6/ 6/9

Functions (continued) platform 6 Unity Studio software suite Global project documentation The Unity Studio software suite is a single publishing resource for creating global project documentation including information about the following different levels: b Project (topology, networks, global data, functional modules, Visio graphical views, VBA macros) b Stations (station applications), see Unity Pro documentation editor, page 6/9 This documentation can be viewed on screen or printed. Openness of the Unity Studio software suite Better customer solutions with Unity Studio The inherent openness of Unity Studio means that project object models can be accessed for the purpose of using and extending their services. This adaptation of generic functions to meet user-specific requirements is achieved by: b Importing/exporting components in standard XML format b Launching VBA macros (Microsoft Visual Basic) b The option to include hyperlinks to third-party documents and software (MES, ERP, web, configurators, maintenance guide, etc.) b The use of COM/DCOM technology b The use of the UDE (Unity Developer's Edition) development tool, see page 6/27 The Unity Studio software suite is supplied with productivity examples based on VBA technology for creating language objects designed to enhance the Unity Pro design software. 6 Top-down approach Unrestricted approach Bottom-up approach Unrestricted design approach Unity software applications combine the assurance of overall project consistency with the freedom to select project design and debugging methods. A number of approaches are possible: b The top-down approach: In the Unity Studio software suite, this approach corresponds to the creation of graphical representations, the declaration of applications, the configuration of communications, the generation of station files (particularly in the Unity Pro setup software) and the publishing of global documentation. 6. b The bottom-up approach: Based on applications created at each station level, this approach enables all parameter settings to be updated to match those at Unity Studio project level. b The unrestricted approach: In the Unity Studio software suite, this approach allows users to freely select the design method for a distributed automation project. Information entered at one level is automatically replicated and distributed at other levels of the project. This design freedom facilitates, for example: b The integration of existing applications into the project with upgrading to Unity Pro software and Unity Studio global project level b The incorporation of modifications made to each application following testing and start-up or maintenance operations Presentation: page 6/ References: page 6/ 6/0

References platform 6 Unity Studio software suite References The multilingual Unity Studio software suite, compatible with the Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP Professional operating systems, can be used to design and structure distributed automation projects. The Unity Studio software suite includes the following software applications: b Depending on the software offer, Microsoft Visio 200 Professional for graphic design b Unity Studio Manager V2.0 for the management of distributed applications b Unity Pro Extra Large V2.0 for the programming and debugging of Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms b OFS V. (OPC Factory Server) for accessing and exchanging data in the architecture b PowerSuite V.0 for setting up drives and motor starters b XBT-L000 V.0 for creating Magelis applications b Microsoft VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) for developing customized functions b Communication drivers (see detailed information on page 6/26). Documentation is supplied in electronic format. Processor/PC programming terminal connection cables must be ordered separately (see page 6/27). Description MS Visio 200 Type of license Language () Unity Studio development software suite Reference Weight kg Included Single-station French UNY SEW XFU CD20F r English UNY SEW XFU CD20E r German UNY SEW XFU CD20D r Spanish UNY SEW XFU CD20S r Italian UNY SEW XFU CD20T r Not included Single-station Multilingual UNY SEW LFU CD20 r Group ( stations) Multilingual UNY SEW LFG CD20 r Team (0 stations) Multilingual UNY SEW LFT CD20 r Site (unlimited) Multilingual UNY SEW LFF CD20 r Upgrade from Unity Pro to Unity Studio Not included Single-station Multilingual UNY SEW LYU CD20 r 6 r Launch planned for th quarter of 200 () Defines the language for Visio 200 Professional and the electronic documentation. 6. Presentation: page 6/ Functions: pages 6/ to 6/0 6/

Presentation platform 6 Unity Application Generator Unity Application Generator for designing and generating process applications Unity Application Generator (UAG) is a specialized software productivity tool for modeling and generating process applications in a collaborative environment. For process type applications, UAG provides a single database containing all the project information (process model, control configuration and SCADA integration). Using an approach based on reusable control devices (PID, motor, valve,etc.), UAG which complies with the standard ISA S88 and generates the PLC code (Unity Pro & Concept), plus all the elements required by the HMI monitoring system (Magelis) or SCADA (Monitor Pro V7.2 () or third-party supervision system). Single entry and central information management ensure data consistency and the integration of the control (PLC) and monitoring (HMI/SCADA) systems. Process models Physical model (process view) Process components and logical structureation of the process are based on the ISA S88 standard. Adopting the ISA S88 standard provides the following benefits: b Considerable process flexibility. b Significant reduction in development and delivery timescales. b A standardized, uniform solution. b Reuse of sub-elements. 6 UAG offers the 6 structural levels from the ISA S88 standard (site, area, process cell, unit, equipment module and control module): These levels can be found again within the applications structure (supervision and PLC) generated by UAG. Process parameters for control devices, such as motors, control loops and valves, are set at control module level. 6. Topological model (automation view) In a Collaborative Control environment, UAG can be applied to the entire process control, monitoring and supervision topology. The topological view includes all devices with I/O points, as well as the communication channels between these devices. UAG supports: b Architectures comprising automation platforms. v Modicon Quantum, Premium and Atrium with Unity Pro. v Modicon Quantum and Momentum with Concept. b SCADA systems (Monitor Pro, ifix or generic), Magelis panels. b Ethernet TCP/IP and Modbus Plus communication networks. b Third-party devices. The process for configuration of networks, PLC applications with their I/O and other devices of the topological model, takes place directly in UAG. Complet model (project view) The physical and topological models are independent and can be created in parallel by independent process and automation experts. The models are integrated via simple drag & drop operations between the two views.. This integration simply involves assigning PLC I/O points to control devices (valves, motors, etc.). 6/2

Presentation (continued) platform 6 Unity Application Generator Flow loop control PLC Documentation PLC Logic Maintenance Locking Diagnostic Integrating your expertise in UAG Smart Control Devices (SCoDs) UAG software is an object-oriented tool based on these Smart Control Devices. These elements describe a part of the process, including all the aspects of the process control system: b Links to the PLC logic. b Links to the graphic representation in the supervisory system. b Description of I/O interfaces. b Description of interfaces intended for HMI/SCADA supervisory. b Information related for handling alarms and events. b Documentation. In UAG these multi-faceted elements are called SCoDs (Smart Control Devices). They are created using UAG s specific SCoD editor. Graphic representation Security Documentation IHM Alarms/ events I/O interfaces A SCoD is defined for each control devices, and is created with the help of the SCoD editor by: b Using the DFB or EFB interface of the PLC logic (Unity Pro/Concept) by importing FBD Language. b Assigning a supervisory graphic reference (Monitor Pro () or others). b Defining the Smart control Device parameters and their behavior in the process control system: v control device parameters and attributes from the process side (operating modes, threshold limits, alarm texts, etc.). v I/O parameters and attributes for PLC logic, v parameters and attributes for HMI/SCADA supervisory. b Defining configuration screens for the UAG user interface. b Defining default or initial parameters. This means that you can integrate your process expertise and know-how in your own SCoD libraries and reuse them again and again in all your UAG applications. Customization UAG can be used to define your own standards and apply them. It provides a uniform solution based on your standards, and prepares for validation operations. During the design phase, the risk of error is kept to a minimum, thereby reducing debugging and maintenance costs too. UAG can be used to customize: b The selection of SCoD libraries. b The symbols nomenclature used in UAG. b The selection of PLC platforms and modules. b The definition of access levels, display formats, units of measurement, etc. used for HMI/SCADA supervisory. b The user documentation. b Security. 6 6. This means that you can integrate your process expertise and standards in all your UAG applications. 6/

Presentation (continued) platform 6 Unity Application Generator Integrating your expertise in UAG (continued) Modeling process applications Once you have created the customization based on your standards and chosen your SCoD libraries, UAG offers you a simple, user-friendly, application-specific method of working. The process is defined using the physical model (process view), exploiting the expertise provided at customization and SCoD library creation stages. This means that the process behavior and the process configuration screens match exactly your requirements. The process control is defined using the topological model (automation view), again, in accordance with your customization. b Process design using UAG is made easy through functional analyses. It allows the user to reliably track the exact project status. In order to be able to detect any error or oversight as soon as possible, UAG analyzes the project and flags any bugs at the various levels of the project, for instance: b At physical model level: v SCoD instance attributes that are missing or over limit, v invalid or missing interlock parameters. b At topological model level: v Communication channels between devices that are not defined, v invalid or missing communication parameters. b At project level: v SCoD data is being transmitted from another PLC, but communication with this device has not been configured, v the SCoD data is not assigned to any PLC I/O variable, v behavior on response time for I/O variables that is not defined. This means that your process expertise and know-how is made available to be used in UAG, ensuring consistent process application modeling. Generating process applications 6 6. UAG provides at a single point all the process information intended for the project s multiple applications (PLCs, HMI/SCADA), along with the communication parameters. When applications are generated this information is used to create the configuration and part of the control logic in using IEC 6- FBD functional language. The following items are generated: b At PLC level: v Hardware configuration, v localized and non-localized data with its initial value and symbol, v initialization, v inter-plc communication and distributed I/O (I/O Scanning on Ethernet or Peer Coop on Modbus Plus), v DFB/EFB block data (information from SCoDs), v interlocks. b At HMI/SCADA level: v Data for graphic animations, v localized data with its corresponding symbol (display, alarm, archiving information, etc.), v user access rights. b At communication level: v Communication driver configuration (Monitor Pro () and ifix), v configuration data for third-party devices (via an XML interface). The generation process in UAG is incremental, which makes it possible to supplement the various applications with their dedicated tools outside UAG without any risk. Incremental generation in UAG only impacts changed elements within the applications, which ensures that any additions made using the dedicated tools are stored permanently. This means that your process expertise and know-how is quickly operational in your process without any errors or oversights. 6/

Presentation (continued) platform 6 Unity Application Generator Validation Validation UAG is a specialized functional tool for process experts and has been developed to comply with the following process standards: b ISA S88. b GAMP (Good Automation Manufacturing Practice). Implementing validation procedures Software Design Specification PLC/HMI Application Software User requirement specification Functional specification Design specification Related to Related to Related to Operational qualification Installation qualification Performances qualification Processcontrol system documentation Validation Qualification (IQ, OQ) Good Automation Manufacturing Practice System build UAG uses ISA S88 standard terminology for batch control and adopts the GAMP methodology for creating an automated system. The inclusion of these two standards provides major support in the task of approving and validating processes. Validation according to FDA 2CFR Part regulations is simplified by UAG, as it provides: b All process information at a single point, based on functional analysis. b Automatic generation of process applications by UAG. b Archiving in compliance with FDA regulations. b A log of all interactions by UAG. b Electronic documentation. UAG tracks and documents every modification made. The version control system, in compliance with regulation FDA 2 CFR Part, ensures simple, straightforward validation. Active collaboration Compatible with third-party tools UAG arranges existing information according to your operating objectives and constraints. Open import/export interfaces are available at every level, facilitating the connection of third-party tools at any time. This means that you can share your expertise by reusing, for example, data from your CAD tools. Total user accessibility With its multi-user environment and common language, UAG facilitates sharing among process and PLC developers, as well as maintenance engineers and operating staff. 6 6. UAG ensures optimum productivity throughout your application s entire life cycle. 6/

Presentation (continued) platform 6 Unity Application Generator Interfacing with SCADA applications UAG can openly interface with many of the SCADA systems currently available on the market. Direct integration Direct integration by UAG automatically generates the Monitor Pro V7.2 supervisory application elements, which are: b Variables with symbol and attributes. b Alarm server configuration. b Trend server configuration (real time and historical). b Mimics (graphic objects) of the devices. b Configuration of the Modbus TCP/IP communication driver. In addition, for each modification by UAG, the Monitor Pro V7.2 application is automatically updated without any conflicts or risk of disruption of added or changed elements. UAG therefore ensures data consistency between the automation control and the supervory level. This type of direct integration is also available with the ifix supervisory and control system (GE Fanuc). Open integration Open integration is based on all the UAG application information made available via XML file format. This XML file is generated by UAG and can be imported into many third-party SCADA systems, once it has been customized using the XLS style sheets specific to the third-party system. Regardless of whether direct or open integration is involved, UAG provides you with total consistency within your control, monitoring and supervision system throughout the application s entire life. 6 6. 6/6

References platform 6 Unity Application Generator References This specialized software program UAG (Unity Application Generator) is multilingual (available in English, French and German) and is compatible with the Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP operating systems. UAG can be used to model and generate process applications in a collaborative environment. It generates the PLC code (Unity Pro & Concept) and the elements required by the HMI monitoring system (Magelis), SCADA (Monitor Pro V7.2 or third-party supervision systems). There are two types of software license available for UAG: Medium (M) and Large (L). They are determined by the functional level of the HMI integration: b The Medium version generates HMI information using customizable XML files (XSL style sheets). b The Large version also provides customizable XML files, direct integration for Monitor Pro and ifix supervision systems featuring the generation of SCADA applications with variables and attributes, mimics (graphic objects), alarm tables and communication driver configuration. Documentation is supplied in electronic format. UAG software suites Description Type Code generated License type Reference Weight kg UAG software suites Medium Single UAG SEW MFUCD 2 (Unity Application Generator) ( machine) r Site UAG SEW MFFCD 2 r Large Single ( machine) UAG SEW LFUCD 2 r Site UAG SEW LFFCD 2 r r Available later 6 6. 6/7

Presentation platform 0 Process control Unity Pro The 2 Unity Pro process control offers User-definable control loops This offer of user-definable control loops is integrated as standard in Atrium PCI 7 2p/p and Premium TSX 7 2p/p/p/p platforms with Unity Pro Medium, Large and Extra Large software. This offer is identical to that offered with PL7 Junior/Pro, except for the runtime screens. See page 6/9. Programmable control loops The process control offer for Premium TSX 7 p/p platforms with Unity Pro Large and Extra Large software has been enhanced with the new programmable offer. This offer is based around the EF and EFB function block library specific to process control. More than 0 blocks are available, classified in 6 families: b EFB blocks for data preparation (for example, DTIME, INTEGRATOR, SCALING, etc) b Controller EFB blocks (for example, AUTOTUNE, PIDFF, SAMPLETM, etc) b Math EF blocks (for example, COMP_DB, MULTIV_M, SUM_W, etc) b Measurement processing EF/EFB blocks (for example, LOOKUP_TABLR, HYST_ppp, AVGMV,etc) b Output value processing EFB blocks (for example, PWM, SERVO, etc) b Reference value processing EFB blocks (RAMP, RATIO, SP8SEL) These blocks manage operating modes such as tracking, manual/automatic mode and process control algorithms on cyclic values (intervals between two consecutive sampling operations). For more information on this programmable process control offer, please consult your Regional Sales Office. 6 6. 6/8

Presentation (continued) platform 0 Process control Unity Pro User-definable process control The process control offer integrated as standard in Premium platforms can be used to set up and debug machine control-oriented control loops in Unity Pro Large and Extra Large. 2 User-definable process control functions TSX P7 2p/26/p/6//6//6M CPUs and TSX PCI 7 20/M slot PLCs make it possible, depending on the model, to manage between 0 and 0 process control channels (of loops each). These channels can be configured to execute algorithms for industrial processes: b Cascaded loop b Process loop b Autoselective loop b Setpoint programmer b Controller with three simple loops 6 6. Inputs/Outputs TSX P7 2p/26/p/6//6//6M CPUs and TSX PCI 7 20/M slot PLCs manage an entire station consisting of racks connected on Bus X. The I/O interfaces required for process control processing operations are analog or discrete channels in: b In rack I/O modules b TBX, Advantys STB or Momentum distributed I/O modules Control loops Software setup of the control loops is user-definable (Plug and Play technology) during configuration of the Premium CPU or Atrium slot PLC. The user enters information in the predefined loop diagrams which also integrate management of operating modes and the link with the I/O. Functions: pages 6/0 to 6/ 6/9

Presentation (continued), functions platform 0 Process control Unity Pro 6 6. Process loop Presentation TSX P7 2p/26/p/6//6//6M CPUs and TSX PCI 7 20/M slot PLCs offer the possibility of configuring 0,, 20 or 0 control channels for continuous or semi-continuous processes. The process control functions offered by these CPUs are particularly suitable for: b Sequential processes requiring auxiliary process control functions such as packaging machines, surface treatment machines, presses, etc b Simple processes such as metal treatment furnaces, ceramic ovens, refrigeration units b Servocontrol systems or mechanical process control where the sampling time is critical, such as torque control, speed control, etc Premium CPUs include the following characteristics: b Each configurable process control channel can be used to manage to loops depending on the type of loop selected b Process control processes can be inserted in the overall architecture of a site, thanks to the integration of the PLC in different communication networks b Process control-related calculations are performed in floating point arithmetic expressed in physical units Description and characteristics : TSX P7 pp/ppm CPUs, see pages /6 to /; TSX PCI 7ppM slot PLCs, see pages /6 to /20. Functions Control loops Premium CPUs can be used to set up 0 to 0 process control channels, each adopting one of the following control profiles: b Process-type loop: loop with a single controller b Controller with simple loops: controller used to increase the capacity of the number of loops b Autoselective loop, also called secondary loop: consisting of 2 loops in parallel with an algorithm for selecting the output b Cascaded loop: consists of 2 dependent loops (the master loop output is the slave loop setpoint) b Setpoint programmer: consisting of a maximum of 6 composite profiles, with a total of 8 segments As the channels are independent, configuration of 0 channels can be used for example to obtain: b 0 simple loops b setpoint programmers, each associated with control loops b 2 setpoint programmers and 8 process loops The various loops are characterized by: b Their different algorithms b processing branches (measurement, setpoint, Feed Forward, controller and output processing) b Calculation functions (gain, filtering, square root, etc) defined using parameters Types of control loop Predefined algorithms can be defined by the user and are represented as shown below: Simple loop Autoselective loop Cascaded loop Presentation: page 6/8 6/0

Functions (continued) platform 0 Process control Unity Pro Processing branches Parameter-setting (selection of the functions to be used) of the control loop profiles can be used to adapt the algorithm to the process to be controlled. Measurement processing Measurements can be processed either in the standard way or externally. b Standard processing: The user can access the following functions: filtering, setting measurement between limits, function generator with scaling, management of alarms on threshold overshoot, totalizer and simulation of the measured value. b External processing: This means there can be a process value PV at the controller input which has been processed outside the control loop. This is a handy solution if calculation of the measurement requires special or customized functions. Setpoint processing Depending on the type of loop selected, it is possible to opt for one of the following types of setpoint: ratio setpoint, selection setpoint, simple setpoint ( remote with scaling) or setpoint programmer. In the case of the controller with simple loops or the secondary loop (in an autoselective loop), only the simple setpoint and the setpoint programmer can be used. Feed Forward processing Feed Forward processing can be used to compensate for a measurable disturbance as soon as it appears. This open loop processing anticipates the effect of the disturbance. It features the Leading function (lead/lag phase). Controller and command processing The controller can be chosen from the following 6 types: Self-tuning PID, controller in discrete mode with 2 or states, hot/cool controller (PID or self-tuning model) or Split Range controller (PID or self-tuning model). Output processing There are types of output which can be processed: analog output, servomotor output or PWM output. Whatever the type of output, the command calculated by the controller crosses a gradient limiter and a limiter whose upper and lower limits are used to define the output variation range. 6 6. Setpoint programmer The setpoint programmer offers a maximum of 6 profiles consisting of a total of 8 segments. It is thus possible to create various programmer/segment configurations, e.g. one programmer with 8 segments, 6 programmers with 8 segments or one programmer with 2 segments plus one programmer with 6 segments and one programmer with 8 segments, etc. Each segment is configured as either a ramp or dwell step. It is characterized by: b The setpoint to be reached b The duration of the segment or slope of the segment (if it is a ramp) A profile can be executed once, a certain number of times or looped continuously. In addition, the concept of a guaranteed dwell step means the time is only counted down if the measurement is definitely within the specified range. Presentation: page 6/8 6/

Functions (continued) platform 0 Process control Unity Pro Configuring process control channels Special screens, accessible using Unity Pro software, can be used to configure control loops. Configuring process control channels: The Loops interface in Premium CPUs simplifies configuration by offering simple selections from menus: b The type of loop from options b The choice of functions used in the processing branches b The parameters linked to each of the functions b The assignment of PLC variables to the different loop branches (memory words, input words or output words depending on the processing branch) b Automatic presymbolization of the variables used in loops Configuring process control channels When configuring process, simple, autoselective and cascaded loops, default parameter settings are offered. The various functions integrated in the algorithms (square root, function generator, etc) and the initial value of each parameter are predefined. 6 6. Configuring a process loop Example: Configuring a process loop Once the type has been chosen, its parameters can be set by selecting or deselecting the options in the processing branches. No programming is therefore necessary, the loop diagrams are enhanced or simplified as and when the parameters are validated. Opposite, selecting the PID controller enables display of the various valid parameters for this type of controller (KP, TI, TD, etc). In the case of the setpoint programmer, the different profiles (6 maximum) are configured via a table defining each segment. After selecting the type of segment (ramp or dwell step), its configuration consists of defining the setpoint to be reached (with the ramp) and the duration (for the ramp or dwell step). As selections are made, the bottom of the screen displays the profile with the setpoint limit values. This screen can also be used to define the cycles for this profile: execution once, a certain number of times or looped continuously (2,767 times maximum). Executing process control channels The sampling period for the loops is predefined at 00 ms. This defines the controller processing period in automatic mode. It is possible to modify this period in the loop configuration screen. All the I/O and the parameters of the various configured process control channels can be accessed by the user at program level or via the various Unity Pro software tools (especially language editors and animation tables). Defining profile cycles Presentation: page 6/8 6/2

Functions (continued) platform 0 Process control Unity Pro Debugging functions Adjusting and debugging control loops is simple and user-friendly via, for example, the application-specific loop configuration screen which, in online mode, provides access to the following functions: b Display and animation of the loop algorithm diagram b Display of process alarms and channel faults b Simulation of the input interface values: for example when these are not connected (measurement, Feed Forward) b Addition, deletion or replacement of calculation functions in online mode b Modification of the adjustment parameters for each of the functions b Modification of the controller operating modes and manual control mode With the controllers integrated in the control loops, it is possible to use the autotuning function which calculates a set of adjustment parameters (Kp, Ti, Td or Ks, T, T-delay) on request. Once the loop has been debugged, it is possible to save the current values resulting from the tests in the initial loop parameters values. This means that, on restarting the loop, it will start off with the correct values. Debugging a loop The debug screen can be used to: b Display the values of the variables linked to the loop in real time b Know which parameters have been selected (and even modify them) b Display alarms The menus can be used for manual control of the loop, autotuning, parameter backup, etc. 6 Debugging a loop Debugging the setpoint programmer 6. The setpoint programmer channels have their own debug screen which can be used to display: b The number of the active segment and the iteration b The execution time for the active segment b The overall execution time Debugging the setpoint programmer Presentation: page 6/8 6/

Selection guide platform 0 PL7 software PL7 programming software Languages Instruction List (IL) M A-P-M A-P-M Ladder (LD) M A-P-M A-P-M Structured Text (ST) M A-P-M A-P-M Grafcet (SFC) M A-P-M A-P-M Grafcet with macro-steps (SFC) A-P A-P Programming services Multitask programming (master, fast and M A-P-M A-P-M event-triggered) Functional view and function modules A-P DFB editor A-P Use of DFB instances A-P A-P EF function libraries M A-P-M A-P-M Configurable control loops M A-P-M A-P-M User-definable control loops A-P(TSX P7 2p/p/p) A-P(TSX P7 2p/p/p) Warm Standby PLC redundancy system P (TSX P7 /M) System diagnostics M A-P-M A-P-M Application diagnostics A-P-M 6 Debugging and display services Step by step execution, breakpoint M A-P-M A-P-M Runtime screens A-P-M Diagnostic viewers A-P-M Other services PL7 2 application converters M A-P-M A-P-M PL7 and Orphee application converters A-P-M A-P-M Utilities for updating PLC operating systems M A-P-M A-P-M Communication drivers for Windows 2000/XP M A-P-M A-P-M 6.2 Compatible Modicon platforms Atrium slot-plcs A TPCX72p TPCX7p Premium CPUs P TSX P7 p TSX P7 2p TSX P7 p TSX P7 p TPCX72p TPCX7p TSX P7 p TSX P7 2p TSX P7 p TSX P7 p TSX Micro PLCs M TSX 7 0/08/0/2/22 TSX 7 0/08/0/2/22 TSX 7 0/08/0/2/22 Software name PL7 Micro PL7 Junior PL7 Pro UnityProsoftwaretype TLX CDp PL7M pm TLX CDp PL7J pm TLX CDp PL7J pp Pages 6/70 and 6/7 6/

0 EF function development software in C language Development of applications in C language Comparison of PL7 applications Availability of control systems based on Premium platforms Enhancement of EF function block libraries: v Creation of families v Development of functions in C language v Access to math calculation functions in floating point format v Debugging functions (step by step, breakpoint) v Use of functions created in all languages Development for processing process applications using fuzzy logic: v 2 linguistic rules for redefining expert knowledge using conditions/conclusions (If...Then) v Description of membership functions Screens for simulation in offline mode and debugging in online mode. Automatic comparison of 2 Premium applications with identification of all differences. Requires PL7 Pro software Continuity of operation in a Premium redundant PLC architecture. Provides access to shared I/O on the Fipio bus or redundant I/O. Typical Normal/Standby switching time: to 2 s Supplied with Microsoft Visual C++ 6 Compatible with: v PL7 Pro v All Atrium slot-plcs v All TSX Micro/Premium CPUs Compatible with: v PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro v All Atrium slot-plcs v All TSX Micro/Premium Unity CPUs Compatible with: v PL7 Pro v All Atrium slot-plcs v All TSX Micro/Premium CPUs Compatible with: v PL7 Pro v TSX P7 /M CPUs 6.2 SDK C PL7 FUZ PL7 DIF Warm Standby TLX SDKC PL7 M TLX L PL7 FUZ M TLX CDp PL7 DIF TLX CDp WSBY P0F 6/7 6/7 6/77 6/66 6/

Presentation platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Presentation PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software packages are designed for Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP () operating systems and therefore benefit from all the facilities relating to these. PL7 version. enables new TSX Micro/Premium modules to take advantage of additional functionalities: b PL7 software registrations by the Internet, electronic mail, fax or phone (obligatory registration before 22nd day). b Change in the Fipio catalogue for Momentum distributed I/O. b Transfer of PL7 user rights between PCs via floppy disk or network. b Enriched export files of the data application (FEF) for better compatibility with Unity software after migration. PL7 Micro Junior/Pro software packages are offered according to two alternatives depending on the type of PLCs/PC cable: connection on the RS 22C port, or the USBportofaPC. Ergonomics of the software More user-friendly and productive ergonomics thanks to: b Access to contextual menus by right-clicking with the mouse for fast access to the services available for the select ed object. b Contextual help: direct access to help correspondingto the selected object. b Tool tips: explanatory messages appear when skimming over the toolbar buttons. Furthermore, some important functions make the software easier and safer to use: Multi-instance 6 The multi-instance function enables several applications to be worked on simultaneously. This function enables: b Several different applications present on the PC to be opened in offline mode in order to check or copy data. b Debugging of two (or more) applications on two PLCs present on the same network in on-line mode. This is particularly useful when debugging inter-plc communication functions. Management of access rights 6.2 Use of the various PL7 software functions can be limited and controlled by managing the access rights. There are user profiles (differentiated by passwords) which characterize the functions available to users on the programming terminal. The profiles range from read-only access to an application (lowest profile) to full programming (profile with the most rights). Terminal PC Client Applicatifs Client Fipway OLE Automation Premium OLE Automation Terminal PC Serveur PL7 TSX Micro Application server PL7 Pro software can be launched in OLE Automation server mode from a third-party client application. In this case, certain PL7 program functions can be executed following commands sent by an OLE client application. This instance of the program then no longer reacts to commands from the operator keyboard. Server mode can be launched in offline mode (COM) if both programs are on the same machine, or in remote mode (DCOM), if the programs are installed on different machines. The commands available are as follows: b Manage an execution context (open/close an application, modification of the address and driver of the connected PLC; PLC status). b Control the PLC (connection/disconnection, send a RUN/STOP/INIT command, program uploading/downloading). b Read data (application or symbol export only in source format, read symbol/comment associated with an address, read application identity). () However, compatibility with the Windows 9 operating system is no longer provided and USB port is not compatible with Windows 9 and Windows NT.0. 6/6

Setup platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Application creation and debug tools Application browser (conventional view) 2 Access to all programming and debug tools is gained via the application browser. This gives a global view of the program and enables all the application components to be accessed quickly via contextual menus. Configuration editor. 2 Program editor. DFB user function block editor. Variable editor. Animation table editor. 6 Documentation editor. 7 Operating screen editor. Concept of sections and Grafcet enhancement 6 7 In order to make programs more comprehensible, the FAST and MAST tasks are split into sections. Each section has a name, a comment and is programmed in one of the four languages available in PL7. A section programmed in Grafcet language can contain a main chart 2 and macro-steps. Version u V.0 of PL7 allows comments to be added to each macro-step. To protect intellectual property or avoid any unwarranted modification, each section can be write-protected or read/write-protected. 2 Function views of an application PL7 Pro software can be used to structure an application for a Premium platform into functional modules that are broken down into sections (program code), animation tables and operating screens. Independently of the multitask structure of the PLC, the designer can define a multilevel tree structure of the automation application. At each level, it is possible to attach program sections written in Ladder language (LD), Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Grafcet (SFC), and animation tables. Two types of view are available at all times: b A representation showing a tree structure of modules can provide a breakdown according to consistent functions in relation to the process to control. b The classic representation of the application browser provides a view of the execution order of the program sections for each PLC. The operation services associated with the functional view are available in one or the other view. In particular, a single command can be used to force whether or not a functional module is executed. In this case, every section attached to the functional module is automatically forced. 6 6.2 Exporting/importing functional modules All or part of the tree structure can be exported into functional modules. In this case, all program sections of the different module levels are exported. During an import, an assistant can be used to reassign the data associated with the module in stages. 9/7

Setup (continued) platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Configuration editor Hardware configuration The configuration editor intuitively and graphically enables the declaration and configuration of the various components of the TSX Micro/Premium PLC application: b Processor, coprocessor. b Tasks. b Application-specific I/O modules. b Memory. b... By clicking on an unconfigured position, the display of a dialog box shows the available I/O modules, classed according to family. Once the various modules are positioned, selecting them accesses parameter entry for each module. Software configuration The configuration editor can also be used to set the software parameters of the application: choice of the number of constants, number of internal words and the number of each type of function block. The configuration editor provides access to parameter entry for the function blocks. The copy/paste function for these parameters is available from version u V.0 of the PL7 software onwards. Configuration of Grafcet objects When programming in Grafcet language, the configuration editor can define Grafcet objects (steps, macro-steps, etc.) and execution parameters (number of steps and active transitions). Setup of application-specific functions 6 6.2 A number of tools are provided as standard for setting up the various applications: discrete I/O, analog I/O, counting, motion control (), man-machine interface (MMI), communication, weighing (), Warm Standby redundancy (2). The parameter screens for the application-specific functions are accessed from the I/O configuration screen by clicking on the position in which the module has been defined. The screens enable the main operating characteristics of the chosen application to be defined, for example: b Filter values for discrete I/O. b Voltage or current range for analog I/O. b Threshold values for counting. b Path of axes for position control. b Calibration change during weighing. b Transmission speed for communication. () PL7 Junior/Pro function available on a Premium platform. (2) PL7 Junior/Pro function available on a Premium platform based on a TSX P7 / processor (version with integrated Fipio link). 6/8

Software structure platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Software structure PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers two types of structure: b Single task: this is the simplified structure offered by default, where a single master task consisting of a main program, comprising several sections and subroutines, is executed. b Multitask: this structure, which is better suited to high-performance real-time applications, consists of a master task, a fast task and event-triggered tasks, which have the highest priority. Master and fast tasks are divided into sections. Structured and modular programming Mast Sas(LD) Furnace_(Grafcet) PRE(LD) CHART POST(IL) SR0 Fast Alarm_Sas(LD) Safety_Mon(LD) Alarm_Furnace(ST) Alarm_Cleaning(ST) SR0 PL7 program tasks comprise several parts called sections and subroutines. Each section can be programmed in the appropriate language for the processing to be carried out. Such division into sections enables a structured program to be created and program modules can easily be generated or added. Subroutines can be called from any section of the task to which they belong or from other subroutines in the same task. Cleaning(ST) Simple task software structure There are two types of cyclic execution: b Normal cyclic execution. This is the default option. b Periodic execution. This type of execution, as well as the period, are selected by the user during configuration. Normal execution (cyclic) Internal processing Input acquisition (%I) RUN STOP Program processing At the end of each scan, the PLC system launches the execution of a new scan. The execution time of each scan is monitored by a software watchdog whose value is defined by the user. In the event of overrun, a fault occurs causing: b Thescantostopimmediately(STOP). b A display on the front panel of the PLC. b The alarm relay of the main rack power supply to be set to 0. 6 Update of outputs (%O) Launch of the period Input acquisition (%I) Periodic execution A new scan is executed at the end of each period. The execution time of the scan must be less than the time of the period defined ( to 2 ms). In the event of overrun, the latter is stored in a system bit (%S9), which can be set to 0 by the user (by program or by the terminal). 6.2 RUN STOP Program processing A software watchdog which can be configured by the user monitors the scan time. In the event of overrun, an execution fault is signaled (see normal execution). Update of outputs (%O) Internal processing End of period 9/9

Software structure (continued) platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Multitask software structure PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers a Multitask software structure, consisting of: b A master task (divided into sections, one of which may contain Grafcet). b A fast task (divided into sections). b One or more event-triggered tasks (only one section per task). These tasks are independent and are executed in "parallel", with the PLC processor managing the execution priority. When an event occurs, or at the start of the fast task cycle: b The current execution of lower priority tasks is stopped. b The event-triggered task or the fast task is executed. b The interrupted task takes over again when processing of the priority task is completed. Fast task Master task Event triggered tasks Alarm_Sas(LD) Sas(LD) Safety_Mon(LD) Furnace_(LD) Alarm_Furnace(ST) Alarm_Cleaning(ST) SR0 PRE(LD) CHART POST(IL) SR0 Drying(LD) Priority +... 6 6.2 This structure can optimize use of the processing power, and can be used to structure the application and simplify design and debugging, as it is possible to write and debug each task independently of the others. Master task This compulsory task, which executes the main program, is periodic or cyclic (see single task structures). It is activated systematically. It is intended for sequential processing. Each section can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language. One section is dedicated to Grafcet language; when this language is chosen, processing operations are proposed: b Preliminary processing (PRE) is programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language and processes initializations on power return, operating mode modifications, input logic. b Sequential processing (CHART) includes the graphic transcription and management of Grafcet charts. It provides access to processing of the actions and transition conditions. b Post-processing (POST). This is programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language and is used to process all the instructions from the 2 preceding processing operations and the indirect safety functions specific to the outputs. Fast task This task, which is higher priority than the master task, is periodic in order to leave time for execution of the lower priority task. Processing operations in this task must be as short as possible so as not to adversely affect the master task. It is useful when fast periodic changes in discrete inputs need to be monitored. Each section of this task can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language. Event triggered tasks Unlike the tasks described above, these tasks are not linked to a period. Their execution is triggered by an event occurring in an application-specific module (eg.: overrun of a counter threshold, change in state of a discrete input). These tasks have higher priority than all other tasks, and they are therefore suitable for processing operations requiring very short response times to the occurrence of an event. They can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language. Number of EVTi control events: b TSX Micro PLCs: 8 events with TSX 7 0 and 6 events with TSX 7 2/22. b Premium PLCs: 2 events with TSX 7 0 and 6 events with TSX 7 20/0/0 and PCX 7 20/0. TSX Micro TSX 7 2/22 and Premium PLCs have 2 priority levels (EVT0 event has priority over other EVTi events). 6/60

Ladder language, structured text language platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Ladder language (LD) Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered task) Programs written in Ladder language consist of a series of rungs which are executed sequentially by the PLC. Each rung may be: b Identified by a label. b Completed by a comment of up to 222 characters. A rung consists of 7 lines on TSX Micro and 6 lines on Premium, with columns, allowing a maximum of 0 contacts and one coil per line. Program editor: Ladder language The Ladder language editor offers several tools for constructing rungs in a userfriendly way: b A palette of graphic elements for direct access to the various graphic symbols of the language via the mouse or the keyboard: contacts, Boolean logic, coils, operation blocks, predefined function blocks b A rung can be drawn without having to fill in each element. b The language objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address format. b The symbol and address of each object can be displayed simultaneously. b A rung is constructed simply by selecting the symbol from the graphic palette and placing it in the correct position in the grid on-screen. b An automatic link line function optimizes the number of user actions. The Ladder language editor is used to call up immediately the functions which assist data entry: b Access to function libraries. b Access to the variables editor. b Cut, copy, paste. Structured Text language (ST) Structured Text language is a sophisticated algorithmic type language which is particularly suitable for programming complex arithmetic functions, table operations, message handling, etc. 6 Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered task) Structured Text language enables direct transcription of a flowchart analysis and is organized into statements. Each statement consists of a label (000 labels max), comments (26 characters max) and instructions. There are four methods for controlling statements: b Conditional action IF. b Conditional iterative action WHILE (action repeated while a condition is true). b Conditional iterative action REPEAT (action repeated until a condition is true). b Repetitive action FOR (action repeated a certain number of times). 6.2 Program editor: Structured Text language The editor enables statements to be entered one after another. The editor provides help with entering: b Modifications, insertion, etc. b Cut, copy, paste. Objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address format. Different colors are used for the objects, language key words and program comments to make it easier to read. 9/6

Grafcet language, Instruction List language platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software TSX Micro PLC b 96 steps maximum (2) on 8 pages for TSX 7-0 and 28 steps for TSX 7-2/22 b 02 transitions maximum (2) b elements maximum per divergence/convergence Premium PLC b maximum of 20 steps (2) on 8 pages b 6 macro-steps of 20 steps. b A "generic" comment can be associated with each macro-step b 02 transitions maximum (2) b elements maximum per divergence/ convergence b 02 steps maximum in the application Grafcet language (SFC) Grafcet language is used to describe, in a simple and graphic manner, the sequential part of control systems. It corresponds to the SFC "sequential function chart" language described in standard IEC -. Structure of the section in the master task Grafcet SFC language is only used in one section of the master task. This is structured in three processing operations, see page 6/60. Programs written in Grafcet SFC language consist of: b Macro-steps () which are the only representation of a set of steps and a transition. b Steps, with which the actions to be executed are associated. b Transitions, with which the conditions are associated (transition conditions). b Directed links, connecting the steps and transitions. See characteristics page 6/68. The actions (continual, pulsed on activation or deactivation) and transition conditions can be programmed in the desired language: Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List. Program editor: Grafcet SFC language The editor offers 8 pages, each consisting of columns and lines, giving cells per page. A palette of graphic objects is used for direct access to each graphic symbol (macro-steps, steps, transitions, sequence selection, simultaneous activation/ deactivation and connectors). Programming of the transition conditions and actions is performed simply by clicking on the required chart element. On a Grafcet page, comments of up to 6 characters can be entered in any cell. Functions which assist entry: cut, copy, paste, etc. are available to the user. Instruction List language (IL) 6 6.2 Instruction List language is a language representing, in the form of text, the equivalent of a Ladder diagram. It is used for writing Boolean equations and making use of the functions available in the language. Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered tasks) A program in Instruction List language comprises a sequence of instructions from the following different families: b Bit instructions, for example read input n : LD %I.. b Instructions on function blocks, for example start timer n 0: IN %TM0. b Numerical instructions on single, double and floating point integers, for example, perform an addition: [%MW0:= %MW0 + 00]. b Instructions on word tables, character strings, for example, perform an assignment: [%MW0:0:=%KW0:0]. b Program instructions, for example, call subroutine n 0: SR0. Each instruction is composed of an instruction code and a bit or word type operand. Program editor: Instruction List language As in Ladder language, instructions are organized into sequences of instructions (equivalent to a rung). Each sequence of instructions can be identified by a label %Li, with i being from 0 to 999 and accompanied by a comment of 222 characters maximum. Each sequence of instructions is composed of one or more test instructions. The result of these instructions is applied to one or more action instructions. Objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address format. The editor provides help with entering data. () With Premium PLCs only. 6/62

Functions platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Functions User DFB function blocks PL7 Pro software offers the user the possibility (for Premium PLCs) of creating their own function blocks which meet the particular needs of their applications. Once they have been created in the library, these function blocks can be used with PL7 Junior/Pro software. These user function blocks enable an application to be structured. They are used as soon as a program sequence is repeated several times in the application or to freeze a standard type of programming. They can be exported to all other PL7 applications. Using a DFB function block in one or more applications enables: b Simplification of program entry and design. b Improved program readability. b Easier debugging (all variables handled by the DFB function block are identified on its interface). b Use of DFB-specific internal variables (independent of the application). A DFB derived function block is set up in three phases: b Design of the DFB which has a name, parameters (I/O), variables and code in Structured Text or ladder language. b Creation of a DFB instance in the variables editor or when calling the function in the program editor. b Using this instance in the program in the same way as a standard function block. Main characteristics Inputs 6 max. () Outputs 6 max. (2) Inputs/outputs 6 max. () (2) Public internal variables 000 (can be accessed via the application program) Private internal variables 000 (cannot be accessed via the application program) Comment 22 characters max. Program sections One section in one of the 2 languages (ST, LD). () The maximum cumulative total of inputs and inputs/outputs is 6. (2) The maximum cumulative total of outputs and inputs/outputs is 6. Variables editor The variables editor is used to: b Symbolize the various application objects (bits, words, function blocks, I/O, ). b Define the parameters of the predefined function blocks (timers, counters, registers etc.). b Enter the values of the constants and select the display base (decimal, binary, hexadecimal, floating point, message). b Define the DFB user function block parameters. Each symbol (2 characters max, accented characters are permitted) can be accompanied by a comment (08 characters max). Editing services are available in the editor: b Find/replace an object in a part of the program or in a set of function modules (PL7 Pro). b Find a character string in a list of symbols or comments. Version u V.0 of PL7 offers enhanced functions due to: b Copy/paste function for one or more symbol(s) and comments. b Display in plain language of the overlap of different types of variable on a single memory address (for example, single and double format internal words, %MW0/%MD0). b Highlighting of objects used by the application program. b Opening the application variable database to third-party tools by importing/exporting text files (.txt). This new function makes it possible to create/modify application databases using a third-party software (for example TSX Microsoft Excel) that has extended edit functions. 6 6.2 v For each numerical variable, it is possible to select the display base (decimal, binary, hexadecimal, floating point, ASCII message). Version u V.0 of PL7 offers new options for animation tables: b Display of the comment associated with variables. b Assignment of a single value to a number of variables. b Change of display format for a number of variables. b Display of the list of forced bits. 9/6

Functions (continued) platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Animation table Tables containing the application variables to be monitored or modified can be created by entering them or automatically initialized from the selected phrase or rung. Variables can then be: b Modified. b Forced to 0 or for bit objects. For each numerical variable, it is possible to select the display base (decimal, binary, hexadecimal, floating point, ASCII message). Version u V.0 of PL7 offers new options for animation tables: b Display of the comment associated with variables. b Assignment of a single value to a number of variables. b Change of display format for a number of variables. b Display of the list of forced bits. Documentation editor The documentation editor is built around the Documentation Browser which displays the contents of the documentation file in a tree structure. It can be used to print all or part of the application documentation file on any graphic printer which can be accessed in Windows and uses True Type technology, in A or US letter print formats. The documentation editor is used to define: b A title page, including the name of the designer and project. b General information pages. b A footer. The documentation editor automatically generates: 6 b The contents. b The application documentation file: hardware and software configuration, program with its comments (including those relating to the macro-steps and subroutines). b The list of variables sorted by address or symbol. b The cross-references, sorted by address or symbol. Runtime screens The runtime screen tool is integrated in PL7 Pro software (creation and use of screens). It is intended in particular, for debugging when starting up installations and for diagnostics on faults or malfunctions. 6.2 It comprises data (explanatory texts, dynamic values, synoptics, etc.) and enables a simple and fast action (modification and dynamic monitoring of PLC variables). The editor enables the design of these screens using the following tools: b Screen: creation of runtime screens, which can be classed according to family. b Message: creation of messages used. b Objects: creation of a graphic objects library. When the station is connected to the PLC, the user can display screens dynamically depending on the state of the process. Screen sequencing is possible, depending on the attributed priority, via either the keyboard or PLC request. In online mode, runtime screens enable direct access to the PL7 program from synoptics by simply clicking on the selected object. It is also possible to activate the animation table functions or cross references once one or more variables have been selected on the screen. Version u V.0 of PL7 software also enables character string type objects to be displayed. Synoptics can be displayed on the full screen for ease of viewing. 6/6

Functions (continued) platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Debugging tools PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers a complete set of tools for debugging applications. A tool palette provides direct access to the main functions: b Setting stop points. b Step by step program execution. b Independent execution of the master (MAST), fast (FAST) and event-triggered (EVTi) tasks. Animation of program elements Parts of the program are animated directly when the TSX Micro/Premium PLC is in RUN (rung, Structured Text statement or sequence of instructions in Instruction List language) by activating the PL7 animation function. Animation is used to display the status of program variables, whatever the language used. The animation can be frozen. Several windows can be displayed and animated simultaneously. Animation tables Tables containing the application variables to be monitored or modified can be created by entering them or automatically initialized from the selected program part. Variables can then be modified, forced to 0 or to for bit objects. These tables can be stored in the application and therefore retrieved at a later date. Debugging the DFBs b Animation table: all public parameters and variables are displayed and animated in real time. It is possible to modify and force the desired objects. b As for the rest of the program, it is possible to use the following functions: breakpoint, step-by-step and program diagnostics. Grafcet debugging In online mode, the browser gives a hierarchical view of the chart with CHART module and macro-step nesting. Animation is characterized by the presence or absence of indicator colors. The Grafcet debug bar: b Displays the state of the chart. b Modifies the state of the chart. b Gives information on the state of the Master task. Debugging the application-specific functions The debug screens for the application-specific functions are accessed from the I/O configuration screen by clicking on the position in which the module has been defined, when the terminal is in online mode. These screens are used for: b Displaying and modifying the state of the I/O. b Forcing the I/O. b Displaying and modifying the current values. b... 6 6.2 Diagnostics The debug screens provide access to the general module or channel diagnostics. These screens identify: Internal module faults. b External faults from the application. b E.g.: range overrun fault for an analog module. With version u V.0 of PL7 software, the Premium platform system diagnostics are extended. It is possible to monitor system bits and words as well as to display associated time-stamped messages automatically, without the need for additional programming. This monitoring applies to the system elements (processor, memory,tasks, ), in-rack I/O and remote I/O on the Fipio bus. 9/6

Functions (continued) platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Integrated diagnostics. Presentation Integrated diagnostics in Premium automation platforms System diagnostics Display viewers Monitor Pro Higher level M.E.S Processor System bits and words In-rack I/O modules Remote I/O modules on Fipio Ethernet Cell level Application diagnostics Magelis XBT/T XBT Viewer Machine level CCX 7 The diagnostic offer of Premium platform is built on threeelements: b System diagnostic. b Diagnostic DFBs function blocks (system and application). b Display system of fault messages named viewers. This viewer function is included as standard PL7 Pro, Vijeo Look, Monitor Pro softwares and CCX 7, Magelis dialog terminals. 6 Functions System diagnostics With version V of PL7 software, the Premium platform system diagnostics has been enhanced by the monitoring of system bits/words and I/O (in-rack and remote via the Fipio bus). All events automatically display time and date-stamped messages, without any additional programming, using one of the display units (). 6.2 The diagnostic functions integrated in PL7 Junior/Pro software can be used for st level diagnostics of the configuration elements, and are effective for every module up to channel level. Configuration level Module level Viewer window (example with PL7 Pro software) Channel level () Viewers function is included as standard PL7 Pro, Vijeo Look, Monitor Pro software and CCX 7, Magelis dialog terminals see page 6/67. 6/66

Functions (continued) platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Integrated diagnostics Functions (continued) Application diagnostics PL7 Pro software has an integrated function block library containing monitoring function blocks known as Diagnostic DFBs. The Diagnostic DFB library comprises: System diagnostic manufacturer blocks: b IO_DIA input/output fault. It can be used to monitor the state of the inputs/outputs. b ASI_DIA checks for the appearance of any errors on the AS-Interface bus (module or bus fault, slave missing, slave not configured or faulty). Application diagnostic manufacturer blocks: b EV_DIA checks that an event (state of a bit) takes the correct value at the expected time (no notion of time). b MV_DIA checks the requested movement (change in the state of a bit) due to occur in a preset time period. b ALRM_DIA monitors the state of a bit (at or 0). b NEPO_DIA and TEPO_DIA can be used to monitor, control and diagnose the elements of the operating part created by wiring 2 preactuators and 2 sensors in conjunction. Open diagnostic blocks: Inputs Usrst_dia ED COND ERROR STATUS AREA_NR OP_CTRL Outputs These offer users the option of creating their own diagnostic function blocks to meet the specific requirements of their applications, thus complementing the manufacturer DFBs described above. They are created using 2 model blocks written in Ladder or Structured Text language. The following can be created simultaneously in one application: b a maximum of 26 types of system diagnostic DFBs b a maximum of 26 types of application diagnostic DFBs. Viewers The diagnostic events processed by the Premium PLC using the diagnostic DFBs are stored in a buffer (memory space for data specific to the Premium PLC). The information contained in this PLC buffer is sent transparently for the user to the viewers and can be displayed automatically and used to handle errors and alarms. The viewer function is included as standard in: 6 b PL7 Pro programming software b CCX 7 version > V 2. operator panels b Magelis XBT-F graphic terminals b Monitor Pro supervisor version V7.0. The Premium platform has a multi-viewer option (link to a maximum of viewers). A PC compatible station with the viewer function can be connected to several PLCs (link via X-Way communication to a maximum of Premium platforms). 6.2 *ACTIVE ALARMS: 0 * 002 0/0/97 :07:_NEPO_ACK Fault in left motor N <ALT>+<P> V Status <XI >V Return 2 This buffer/viewer structure offers: b A single point for managing faults per application b Time and date-stamping at source of the appearance of faults b Memorisation of transient faults b Independence from the viewer functions. The frame transmitted from the PLC buffer is identical for all viewers. Composition of messages: Each line displayed by the viewer represents a fault with, depending on the display capacity: state, type of DFB, geographical zone, dates and times of appearance/disappearance, associated message and status. Viewer window on PL7 Pro screen. Viewer screen on CCX 7 operator panel. 9/67

Functions (continued) platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Variable cross-references For every variable, this function can be used to: b Search for program modules where this variable is used. b Obtain the list of statements, rungs or expressions. b Display and check activation conditions. A log is used to keep track of this navigation. Options relating to the variable, can be associated with the search (extract bit, table object, function block elements, network object, etc.). This function can be initialized from the program or runtime screens. Application converters PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software includes application converters which make it possible to reuse in full or in part, applications already written in: b PL7 2, applications for TSX 7, TSX 27 or TSX 7 0/20/2 PLCs. b PL7 (), applications for TSX/PMX 7...TSX/PMX 07 PLCs. b ORPHEE (), applications for April Series 000 PLCs. The converters offer the following utilities: b Translation of language objects into the new PL7 syntax with retrieval of associated symbols and comments. b Possibility of manually reassigning objects. b Configuration check: the tool checks whether the configuration resources required by the program to be converted are compatible with the configuration of the destination application. b Conversion () with generation of source files (Ladder, Structured Text or Grafcet) in PL7 Junior/Pro format. b Conversion ensures that instructions which are translated are functionally identical to the original program. b A translation report gives a summary: v result of the conversion with the cause of non-translation where possible, v correspondence of variables in PL7 with original variables. () Function or functionality requiring PL7 Junior/Pro software. 6 6.2 6/68

Selection platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software X-Way communication drivers The communication drivers (Uni-Telway COM port ans USB port, PC side) are available in the PL7 software CD-Rom. Depending on needs, another drivers can be be installed from TLX CD DRV20M CD-Rom (to order separately). See following table. Type of drivers Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows 98 Millenium Windows 9 OS/2 DOS Uni-Telway V.6 IE7 V.9 IE7 V.6 IE7 V7.8 IE8 V7. IE TSX FPC0 V. IE0 V. IE08 V. IE0 V2. IE V2. IE V2.2 IE TSX FPC20 V.2 IE0 V. IE08 V.2 IE0 V.2 IE0 V. IE0 TSX SCP V. IE0 V. IE0 V. IE0 V. IE0 Ethway V. IE02 V. IE0 V2.6 IE06 V2.6 IE06 V2.6 IE22 ISAway V.2 IE0 V. IE06 V.2 IE0 V.2 IE09 PCIway V.0 IE06 XIP V.7 IE V.7 IE V.7 IE V.7 IE Modbus V. IE06 V. IE06 V. IE06 V. IE06 USB for mini-din terminal Inclus PL7 port USB for USB terminal port V.0 IE References Multilingual software packages (English, French, German, Spanish and Italian) for PC compatibles () equipped with Windows 98, Windows NT.0, Windows Millennium, Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP operating systems. For one station, these packages comprise: b A CD-ROM supporting the PL7 multilingual software, the PL7 demonstration applications and the terminal link Uni-Telway driver. b A cable reference TSX PCU 0, PC compatible with TSX Micro/Premium PLC (length 2. m). Not supplied with software upgrade or update packages and PL7 software licenses. b Two CD-ROMs containing multilingual technical documentation. b A CD-ROM containing the TSX Micro/Premium platform operating systems. For packages for stations, the above quantities are multiplied by three. For software licenses, TSX PCX 0 cables must be ordered separately, according to the required number of users. All documentation reference (software setup manuals) reference TLX DOC PL7 F should be ordered separately. 6 () Typical recommended configuration: Pentium processor, 266 MHz, 28 Mb of RAM memory, CD-ROM drive for installation of the PL7 program, VGA screen or above. 6.2 9/69

References platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software PL7 Micro software packages PL7 Micro software enables programming in Instruction List, Ladder, Structured Text and Grafcet language. It can also be used to set up application-specific functions and perform maintenance and diagnostics of the developed applications. It includes the PL7 2 application converter. Description For PLC Type of device and update Reference () Weight kg PL7 Micro TSX Micro Single ( station) TLX CD PL7M pm software packages Group ( stations) TLX CD PL7M pm PL7 Micro and SyCon V2.8 software package TSX Micro Single ( station) TLX CD PL7M PCM Mises à jour logiciels PL7 Micro Software updates TSX Micro Single ( station) TLX RCD PL7M P M for previous version of PL7 Micro Group ( stations) TLX RCD PL7M P M Software update for previous version of PL7 Micro supplied with SyCon V2.8 TSX Micro Single ( station) TLX RCD PL7M PCM PL7 junior software packages 6 PL7 Junior software enables programming in Instruction List, Ladder, Structured Text and Grafcet languages. It can also be used to set up application-specific functions and perform maintenance and diagnostics of the developed applications. It includes the PL7 2, PL7 and ORPHEE application converters. Description For PLCs Type Reference () PL7 Junior TSX Micro, software packages Premium, Atrium PCX Weight kg Single ( station) TLX CD PL7J pm Group ( stations) TLX CD PL7J pm 6.2 Software updates for previous version of PL7 Junior TSX Micro, Premium, Atrium PCX Single ( station) TLX RCD PL7J PM Group ( stations) TLX RCD PL7J PM Software upgrade packages from previous version of PL7 TSX Micro TSX Micro, Premium, Atrium PCX Single ( station) TLX UCD PL7J PM Group ( stations) TLX UCD PL7J PM () p in reference, defines the type of connecting cable PC/PLC (length 2. m) v P: TSX PCX 0 cable for RS 22C port of PC, v PU: TSX PCX 00 cable for USB port of PC. 6/70

References (continued) platform 6 PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Ensembles logiciels PL7 Pro Functions on PL7 Pro software are identical to those on PL7 Junior software. It also offers the user thepossibility of creating his own function blocks (DFBs) and graphic runtime screens. Description For PLCs Type Reference () PL7 Pro software package TSX Micro, Premium, Atrium PCX Weight kg Single ( station) TLX CD PL7P pm Group(stations) TLX CD PL7P pm Software updates for previous version of PL7 Pro Software upgrade packages from previous versions of PL7 Junior TSX Micro, Premium, Atrium PCX TSX Micro, Premium, Atrium PCX Single ( station) TLX RCD PL7P PM Group(stations) TLX RCD PL7P PM Single ( station) TLX UCD PL7P PM Group(stations) TLX UCD PL7P PM PL7 Micro/Pro software licenses Description For PLCs Type Reference Weight kg PL7 TSX Micro Open Team TSX Micro Team (0 stations) (2) TLX OT PL7M PM software license PL7 Pro Open Team software license PL7 Pro Open Site software license TSX Micro, Premium, Atrium PCX TSX Micro, Premium, Atrium PCX Team (0 stations) (2) TLX OT PL7P PM Site > 0 stations (2) TLXOSPL7PPM PL7 Pro Servi software license Separated elements TSX Micro, Premium, Atrium PCX Client/server network architecture server device. UseofthePL7Proviaclient station (Thin client) on network and with access rights. TLX S PL7P PM Description Use Reference Weight kg X-Way drivers package for compatible PC Includes all X-Way drivers (voir page 6/67) Includes multilingual user documentation. TLX CD DRV20M Description Used from processor to PC port Length Reference Weight kg Universal terminal port cable Mini-DIN port TSX Micro/Premium RS 22D (-way SUB-D connector) 2. m TSX PCX 0 0.70 6 6.2 TSX PCX 0 USB Port 2. m TSX PCX 00 0.0 Description Description Reference Weight kg SetofmanualsPL7 software (in english) Hard copy including PL7 reference manuals, functions, communication, converters and diagnostics TLX DOC PL7 E.0 () p in reference, defines the type of connecting cable PC/PLC (length 2. m) v P: TSX PCX 0 cable for RS 22C port of PC, v PU: TSX PCX 00 cable for USB port of PC. (2) Team user stations from the same geographical site. 9/7

Presentation, setup platform 6 SDKC software Presentation C language function development software, also called SDKC, is a PL7 Micro, PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro software option. It enables new functions to be developed (internal code written in C language) and extends and completes the standard set of functions offered by PL7 software. SDKC software also integrates a creation and management service for families of functions, so they can be integrated in the PL7 library. Finally, it can be used to generate the function which ensures the protection of PL7 applications by reading a signature in the PCMCIA card inserted in the PLC. Setup C language development software is a genuine tool for managing the entire function which has been created: b A user-friendly creation interface, integrated in PL7, with automatic file organisation. b Powerful debug and test tools. b Management of compatibility and software version for the functions created. b Generation of disks for the subsequent installation of functions on other development stations. Management of function families The software enables different function families to be defined. These functions, also known as EF, are classed according to family, allowing the user to create a sequential library of functions written in C language. These functions, which will eventually form a part of the PL7 library, can be: b Used in all languages. b Displayed by the PL7 library tool. b Classed according to family/function. 6 The user has the following data at his disposal: b Date of creation and generation of the function. b The version number of the function family. Editing functions 6.2 The various SDKC software editor tabs enable the user to create the function by: b Declaring the interface (name, type and comment) for each input, output or I/O parameter. b Writing the source code file in C language. b Declaring the constants as separate files. A function written in C language can access numerous internal PLC services such as real-time clock, PLC variables, system words, mathematical functions. In particular, it is possible to carry out numerical processing in floating point format, if the target PLC allows. 6/72

Setup (continued), reference platform 6 SDKC software Setup (continued) Debugging the functions The function created must be generated under the debug format to be tested. Once it has been inserted in an application and loaded to a PLC, the execution of a function can be checked using numerous debug tools. A specific function debug menu in C language accesses the following services: b Breakpoint insertion. b Step by step execution. b Display of code with breakpoints shown. b Display of data manipulations. Functions library enhancement After developing, generating, then debugging the function, the last step consists of generating a function family installation disk. This enables the function library on the user's programming terminal to be enhanced. Managing the versions allows the level of any functions installed on a station to be known at any time. These functions can be used in all PL7 languages. Reference This software extension enables standard functions offered by PL7 Micro, PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro version > V software to be extended. It comprises: b A set of /2 disks. b A bilingual user manual (English and French). 6 This software is supplied with a Microsoft Visual C++ software package registration card. PL7 SDKC procedure creation software Description Function Target PLC extension PL7 SDKC software extension Procedurewrittenin C language with access to floating point functions DebuginPLC PL7 Micro/ Junior/Pro TSX Micro/ Premium Reference Weight kg TLX L SDKC PL7 M 0.90 6.2 6/7

Presentation, setup platform 6 PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing Presentation PL7 FUZ software is a PL7 TSX Micro/Junior/Pro software option enabling fuzzy logic processing in order to optimise the control of processes from Micro and Premium PLCs. This is a software function which can be integrated in any PL7 program. lt includes setup and debug tools. This function is particularly suitable for controlling: b Systems which are difficult to model or non-linear systems, with wide variation of inputs or an insufficient sensor resolution. b Systems which are difficult to control and require experience and human intuition. It enables: b Boolean logic limits to be exceeded (true or false state). b The representation of physical measurements by gradual concepts. b Benefit to be gained from the expertise of operators when controlling a proces.s The fuzzy logic function is characterised by: b physical measurements used as inputs (temperature, pressure, speed ). b 20 graphic related functions which allow the physical measurement inputs to be represented by predefined associated linguistic terms. A temperature will be represented for example by the terms: low, average, high according to the limits for the various terminals. b 2 linguistic rules which determine the state to be applied to the outputs ( conditions and 2 conclusions per rule). b numerical variables as outputs, results applying to the function input values b The possibility of debugging its control offline. Once inserted in a program, the fuzzy function can either operate in continuous mode (function executed on each scan) or on request (a single iteration on each execution). The operating mode enables the function to be used in automatic mode (calculation of the outputs depending on the state of the inputs) or in manual mode (applications with predefined output values). Software setup 6 The fuzzy logic function software is set up in 2 steps: b Integration of the fuzzy function in the application program, in the same way as any other standard function. b Setting the fuzzy function parameters using the setup screen. Integration in the program 6.2 The fuzzy logic function is inserted in the program in all the available languages. The software checks the various function parameters: b The input variables. b The output variables (plus an error bit). b The internal variables necessary for the function to operate correctly. The function setup screen is used to access parameters (I/O), membership functions, linguistic rules, as well as debug functions. Membership functions The membership functions are described intuitively using a suitable layout. A membership function is characterised by: b The selection of one of the parameters (I/O). b The choice of associated linguistic terms from a library of terms predefined or created by the user. b The type of function to apply for the inputs (trapeze, triangle, etc) as well as its characteristic values and the functions to apply for the outputs (singleton). 6/7

Setup (continued), reference platform 6 PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing Setup software (continued) Linguistic rules Linguistic rules (2 maximum) enable experts' know-how to be transcribed using conditions/conclusions such as: If Then b The definition of a rule is made easier by selecting the input parameters ( per rule). b By assigning one of the possible linguistic terms to each input. b By defining the outputs affected by this rule (2 per rule) as well as the associated linguistic terms. Simulation and debug The fuzzy function is easily debugged using the setup and debug screen, especially simplified by the possibility of simulating the operation offline. Offline simulation Once the parameter entry screens have been completed, it is possible to perform the fuzzy function operation offline. The debug screen offers the possibility of: b Forcing values for the various input variables. b Starting the simulation using the Start key. The results achieved are: The values which will be applied to the outputs in normal operation. The percentages obtained under the various rules. Debuginonlinemode In online mode the debug screen enables: b Display of the state of the I/O. b Access to the involvement percentages obtained under the various rules. It can also: b Force the inputs for testing precise operating points. b Change to manual mode to apply predetermined values on the outputs. b Change the operating mode: on request, or continuously by defining a period of activation. Reference This software extension enables standard functions offered by PL7 Micro, PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro software to be extended into the domain of fuzzy logic. It comprises: b A set of "/2 disks. b A multilingual user manual (English, French and German). Software for fuzzy logic processing Description Function Target PLC extension PL7 FUZ software extension Development and debugging of fuzzy logic applications. Defines the membership functions and fuzzy rules for the applications. PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro TSX Micro/Premium Reference Weight kg TLX L PL7 FUZ M 0.60 6 6.2 6/7

Presentation, setup platform 6 PL7 DIF application comparison software Presentation PL7 DIF application comparison software for Premium platforms is an optional program which complements the PL7 Pro programming software. It is used to compare two PL7 applications generated by PL7 Pro and automatically provide an exhaustive list of all the differences between them. The PL7 DIF program increases productivity in the main life phases of a control system based on a Premium platform: b Application development and debugging. b Starting up installations and processes. b Operation and maintenance of installations and processes. PL7 DIF software is an efficient tool for handling PL7 applications for: b Control system design offices. b Operation and maintenance managers. b Installers and systems integrators. Software setup The PL7 DIF software can be used in one of two modes: b Interactive mode, when the comparison is launched by an operator command (double-click on thepl7diff software icon). b Batch mode, when it is launched by a previously established call command. These comparison commands locate all the differences between two applications in terms of: 6 b The hardware configuration. b The application access protection. b The software structure with the section validation conditions. b The application program regardless of the language(s) used. b The function modules. b The code for the DFB user function blocks. b All the variables. The result of the comparison between the two applications can be: b Displayed. b Printed. b Saved in.txt format in a differences list. 6.2 Comparison The end of the comparison operation is signalled by the appearance of the application browser with its three tabs. 2 Identification tab for accessing the characteristics of the two applications being compared. The differences are marked by the sign #. 2 Browser tab for accessing the application multilevel tree structure. List tab for accessing: v Printing the comparison list, v Creating the comparison file. 6/76

Setup (continued), references platform 6 PL7 DIF application comparison software Setup (continued) Display of results The representation of the application multilevel tree structure, which can be accessed via the browser tab after launching a comparison, is annotated by symbols in which the information associated with application appear in blue and those associated with application 2 appear in red: This branch, found in this level of the tree structure, contains at least one difference This block contains at least one difference This section is only present in application This section is only present in application 2 The programming language of this section differs between application and application 2 In the example opposite, a difference on the rung causing changeover to manual mode is detected: 2 This line [7] displayed in blue belongs to application. 2 This line [7] displayed in red belongs to application 2. The source code extracts of both applications can be used to locate the differences precisely. Printing a comparison list/creating a comparison file The list tab is the means of accessing the functions for printing a comparison list or creating a comparison file: Access to the list form for printing a comparison list (or creating a comparison file) 6 Used to include the block selected in the tree structure in the comparison list (or the comparison file) Used to exclude the block selected in the tree structure of the comparison list (or the comparison file) Used to create the comparison list (or the comparison file) according to the selections above Starts printing the comparison list (or saving the comparison file) 6.2 References This software extension can be used to compare two PL7 applications generated by PL7 Pro and designed for TSX Micro/Premium platforms. It comprises one CD-Rom (three disks), containing the PL7 DIF software with its documentation (English and French). A software subscription is available for this extension (please consult your Regional Sales Office). PL7 DIF application comparison software Function Target extension PLC Type of device Reference Weight kg target Using for comparing PL7 Pro station TLX CD PL7 DIF applications generated TSX Micro/ by PL7 Pro version u V Premium stations TLX CD PL7 DIF 6/77

Presentation platform 6 Process control PL7 The process control range integrated as standard in Premium platforms enables the setup and debugging of process control loops specifically designed for machine control. 2 User-definable process control functions 6 TSX P7 2p/2p2/p/62//82M processors and T PCX 7 20/M slot-plcs can be used, depending on the model, to manage 0 to 20 control channels (of loops each). These channels can be configured in order to execute algorithms used in industrial processes: b Cascaded loop. b Process loop. b Autoselective loop. b Setpoint programmer. b Controller with three simple loops. Inputs/outputs 6.2 TSX P7 2p/2p2/p/62//82M processors and TPCX 7 20/M slot-plcs manage an entire station consisting of racks connected on Bus X. The I/O interfaces necessary for process control processing are analog or discrete module channels in: b In-rack I/O modules. b TBX or Momentum distributed I/O modules. Control loops The software setup of control loops is performed by entering parameters (Plug and Play technology) when configuring the TSX P7/T PCX 7 processor or slot-plc. The user completes predefined loop diagrams which also integrate management of the operating mode and the link with the I/O. Operator dialogue and control XBT F operator dialogue terminals have preconfigured screens dedicated to process control which simplify loop operation and control. These screens show the controller front panels as well as trending views and monitoring views. 6/78

Presentation, functions platform 6 Process control PL7 Process loop Presentation TSXP72p/2p2/p/62//82M processors andt PCX 7ppM slot-plcs can be used to configure 0, or 20 continuous or semi-continuous process control channels. The control functions of these processors are particularly suitable for: b Sequential processing requiring auxiliary control functions such as packaging machines, surface treatment machines, presses, etc. b Simple processes such as metal processing furnaces, ceramic furnaces, refrigeration units, etc. b Feedback or mechanical control where sampling time is critical, eg torque control, speed control, etc. b Premium processors have, amongst others, the following characteristics: b Each configurable control channel can be used to manage to loops depending on the type of loop chosen. b Process control processors can be inserted in the overall architecture of a site as the PLC can be integrated in various communication networks. b Calculations related to process control are performed in floating point mode, expressed as physical units. Description: TSX P7 pp/pp2m processors, see pages /27 to /29; TPCX 7 ppm slot-plcs, see pages / and /. Functions Control loops Premium processors can be used to set up 0 to 20 control channels, each one adopting one of the following loop profiles : b Process loop: loop with a single controller. b Controller with simple loops: controller which can increase the capacity of the number of loops. b Autoselective loop also known as secondary: comprises 2 loops in parallel with an output selection algorithm. b Cascaded loop: comprises 2 dependent loops (the master loop output is the slave loop setpoint). b Setpoint programmer: comprises a maximum of 6 compound profiles with a total of 8 segments. Since the channels are independent, configuration of 0 channels can be used to obtain: b 0 simple loops. b setpoint programmers, each one associated with control loops. b 2 setpoint programmers and 8 process loops. The various loops are characterised by: b Their different algorithms. b processing branches (process value, setpoint, Feed Forward, loop controller and output processing). b Calculation functions (gain, filtering, square root, etc) defined using parameters. Type of control loops Predefined algorithms, whose parameters can be defined by the user, are shown below: Simple loop 6 6.2 Autoselective loop Cascaded loop 6/79

Functions (continued) platform 6 Process control PL7 Processing branches Parameter definition (choice of functions to be used) of control loop profiles enables the algorithm to be adapted to the process to be controlled. Process value processing Process value processing can be performed either in standard fashion or externally. b Standard processing, the user has the following functions at his disposal: filtering, process value between limits, function generator with scaling, alarm management on threshold overrun, totalizer and simulation of the measured value. b External processing is used to obtain, at the loop controller input, a process value, PV, which was processed outside the control loop. This solution is useful if measurement calculation of the process value requires specific or customised functions. Setpoint processing Depending on the type of loop chosen, it is possible to opt for one of the following setpoints: ratio setpoint, selection setpoint, simple setpoint (remote with scaling) or setpoint programmer. When using the controller with single loops or the secondary loop (in an autoselective loop), only the simple setpoint and the setpoint programmer can be used. Feed Forward processing Feed Forward processing corrects a measurable disturbance as soon as it appears. This open loop processing anticipates the effect of the disturbance. It has the Leading function (phase lead/lag). Loop controller and command processing 6 6.2 There are 6 different types of loop controller to choose from: autotuning PID, controller in discrete mode with 2 or states, hot/cool controller (PID or autotuning model) or Split Range controller (PID or autotuning model). Output processing There are types of output processing: analog output, servomotor output or PWM output. Whatever the type of output, the control calculated by the controller crosses a ramp limiter and a limiter where the lower and higher limits can be used to define the output variation range. Setpoint programmer The setpoint programmer offers a maximum of 6 profiles with a total of 8 segments. It is therefore possible to create a 8-segment programmer, six 8-segment programmers or one 2-segment programmer with one 6-segment programmer and one 8-segment programmer, etc. Each segment is configured as a ramp or dwell time. It is characterised by: b The setpoint to be reached. b Duration of the segment or gradient of the segment (if a ramp). A profile can be executed once, a certain number of times or continually looped back. Moreover, due to the concept of guaranteed dwell time, the time will only need to be downcounted if the process value is actually in the specified range. 6/80

Functions (continued) platform 6 Process control PL7 Configuration of control channels Special screens, accessible using PL7 Junior/Pro software, enable the configuration of control loops. Configuration of control channels By simply selecting from the menus, the Loops interface on PMX process control processors enables the following to be configured: b The type of loop (out of the existing ones). b The choice of functions used in the processing branches. b Parameters linked to each function. b Assignment of PLC variables to different loop branches (memory words, input words or output words depending on the processing branch). b Automatic presymbolization of variables used in the loops. Configuration of control channels Configuration of process, single, autoselective and cascaded loops proposes parameter entry by default. The various functions integrated in the algorithms (square root, function generator, etc) and the initial value of each parameter are predefined. Configuration of a process loop Example: configuration of process loop Once the type of loop has been chosen, parameter entry is performed by selecting or deselecting options in the processing branches. No programming is therefore necessary, loop diagrams are enhanced or simplified as parameters are validated. The screen opposite shows how selecting the PID controller can display the various parameters valid for this type of controller (KP, TI, TD, etc). For the setpoint programmer, configuration of the various profiles (6 maximum) is done using a table defining each segment. Once the type of segment has been chosen (ramp or dwell time), configuration consists of defining the setpoint to be reached (for the ramp) and duration (for the ramp or dwell time). While making selections, the lower part of the screen shows the profile display with the setpoint limit values. This screen also allows the cycles of this profile to be defined: execution once, a certain number of times or continually looped back (2,767 times maximum). 6 Execution of control channels The loop sampling period is predefined at 00 ms. This defines the loop controller processing period in automatic mode. It is possible to modify this period in the loop configuration screen. The user can access all the I/O and parameters for the various configured control channels via the program or by using the various PL7 Junior/Pro software tools (in particular language editors and animation tables). 6.2 Defining of the cycles of profiles 6/8

Functions (continued) platform 6 Process control PL7 Debug functions Adjustment and debugging of control loops is performed in a simple and user-friendly way using the loop configuration application-specific screen which, when online, can access the following functions: b Display and animation of the loop algorithm diagram. b Display of alarms linked to the process and channel faults. b Simulation of input interface values: for example when they are not connected (process value, Feed Forward). b Addition, removal or replacement of calculation functions in online mode. b Modification of adjustment parameters for each function. b Modification of loop controller operating modes and manual control. With the controllers integrated in control loops, it is possible to use the autotuning function which calculates a set of adjustment parameters (Kp, Ti, Td or Ks, T, T-delay) upon request. Once the loop has been debugged, it is possible to save the current test values as the initial loop parameter values. Hence, on restarting the loop, it will contain the correct values. Loop debugging The debugging screen: b Displays the values of variables linked to the loop dynamically. b Shows the parameters chosen (or can even modify them). b Displays alarms. The menus enable manual control of the loop, autotuning, parameter backup, etc. Loop debugging Setpoint programmer debugging 6 Setpoint programmer channels have their own debugging screen which displays: b The number of the current segment and the iteration number. b Execution time of the current segment. b Overall execution time. 6.2 Runtime screens Setpoint programmer debugging The runtime screen tool available in PL7 Pro software integrates front panel views and trending views in its object library which can be used to adjust and operate control loops. Front panel views and trending views Predefined controller front panel views provide the user with the traditional appearance of controller front panels. The user only enters the variables used by the loop being dealt with in the various fields in this view. Similarly, trending views display changes in loop parameters in graph form as well as useful operating information: operating mode, alarms, etc. 6/82

Functions (continued) platform 6 Process control PL7 Control and operation Tools integrated in PL7 software (loop debugging screens, runtime screens, etc) which are associated with XBT F Magelis graphic screen terminals offer screens dedicated to the control and operation of control loops. Setup These predefined screens offer runtime and control views. As standard, PL7 Junior/Pro software contains the application developed with XBT L00/L00 development software, which comprises predefined runtime and control views. When using this dialogue application, animation of runtime and control views is automatic. Presentation of views Each control loop is associated with a certain number of views depending on the size of the Magelis terminal screen. b With screen terminals, the user has 7 views at his disposal: v monitoring view, v front panel (bar chart), v supervisory control view (trending), v adjustment view, v autotuning view, v setpoint programmer view, v alarm view. With this type of terminal, it is possible to operate 8 loops. b With 0 screen terminals, the user has views at his disposal: v monitoring view, v front panel view integrating the display of the front panel, loop adjustment and autotuning, v supervisory control view, v setpoint programmer view, v alarm view. With this type of terminal, it is possible to operate 6 loops. 6 Adjustment view All runtime pages are based on the same presentation module: b An alarm zone is positioned at the bottom of the screen. It shows the last active alarm. b Dynamic function keys execute one and only one function (access to the adjustment page, starting autotuning, navigation between the various pages, selecting a loop, etc.). It is of course possible for the user to customise the screens to suit his requirements. 6.2 6/8

7 7/0

Contents 7 - Human/Machine Interfaces 7 7 - Human/Machine Interfaces SelectionguideMagelisdisplayunitsandterminals...page7/2 SelectionguideMagelisgraphicterminals...page7/ Selection guide Magelis ipcindustrialpcs...page7/6 SoftwareandWebservers...page7/8 b OFS data server software... page7/0 b Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces v Presentation, description... page7/ v Tego Dial/Tego Power installation system.... page7/6 7 7/

Selection guide 7 Operator dialogue terminals 7 Magelis display units and terminals Applications Display of text messages Display of text messages and/or semi-graphics Type of unit Compact display units Display units Display Type Back-lit green LCD, height. mm or Back-lit green, orange or red LCD, height. 7.6 mm Fluorescent green matrix ( x 7 pixels), height mm or Back-lit LCD ( x 7 pixels), height 9 mm Back-lit monochrome matrix LCD (20 x 6 pixels), height. or 0.6 mm Capacity 2 lines of 20 characters or tolinesofto20 characters 2 lines of 20 characters to 8 lines of 20 to 0 characters Data entry Viakeypadwith 8 keys ( with changeable legends) Display only or via keypad with function keys + service key or service keys Memory capacity Application 2 Kb Flash 28 Kb/26 Kb Flash 8 Kb Flash EPROM Extension via type II PCMCIA Functions Maximum number of pages 28/200 application pages 26 alarm pages 00/200 application pages 28/26 alarm pages 26 print-out form pages () 600 application pages 26 alarm pages 26 print-out form pages () 7 Variables per page 0 0 0 Representation of variables Alphanumeric Alphanumeric, bargraph, gauge Recipes Curves Alarm logs Depending on model Real-time clock Access to the PLC real-time clock Alarm relay No Communication Asynchronous serial link RS 22 C/RS 8 RS 22 C/RS 8/RS 22 Downloadable protocols Uni-Telway, Modbus Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens Bus and networks AS-Interface using 22. pitch module Printer link RS 22 C asynchronous serial link () Development software Operating systems XBT L00 and XBT L00 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP) Magelis Type of terminal XBT N XBT H XBT HM Pages Consult our catalog Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces () Depending on model. 7/2

7 7 Display of text messages Control and parametering of data Display of text messages and/or semi-graphics Control and parametering of data Terminals Fluorescent green matrix ( x 7 pixels), height mm or Back-lit LCD ( x 7 pixels), height 9 mm Fluorescent green matrix ( x 7 pixels), height mm or Back-lit LCD ( x 7 pixels), height mm Back-lit monochrome matrix LCD (20 x 6 pixels), height. or 0.6 mm 2 lines of 20 characters 2orlinesof0characters to 8 lines of 20 to 0 characters Viakeypadwith 8 function keys + 9 service keys or keypad with 2 function keys + 0 service keys + 2 numeric keys Viakeypadwith 2 function keys + 0 service keys + 2 alphanumeric keys Viakeypadwith 2 function keys 0 service keys 2 numeric keys soft function keys 26KbFlashEPROM 8KbFlashEPROM 2 Kb Flash EPROM 00 application pages 26 alarm pages 26 print-out form pages () 800 application pages 26 alarm pages 26 print-out form pages () 800 application pages 26 alarm pages 26 print-out form pages () 0 Alphanumeric Alphanumeric, bargraph, gauge Depending on model Access to the PLC real-time clock Built-in Access to the PLC real-time clock No Yes No 7 RS 22 C/RS 8/RS 22 Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens AS-Interface using 22. pitch module AS-Interface using 22. pitch module RS 22 C asynchronous serial link () XBT L00 and XBT L00 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP) Magelis XBT P XBT E XBT PM Consult our catalog Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces 7/

Selection guide 7 Operator dialogue terminals 7 Magelis graphic terminals Applications Display of text messages and graphic objects Control and parametering of data Type of unit Graphic terminals Display Type Back-lit monochrome LCD (20 x 20 pixels) or Colour LCD STN with touch-sensitive screen (20 x 20 pixels) with optimum viewing angle () Capacity.7" Data entry Via touch-sensitive screen tactile feedback keys (XBT-FC) Viakeypadwith 0 static function keys 8 soft function keys 2 service keys 2 alphanumeric keys Memory capacity Application 8 Mb Flash EPROM (via PCMCIA type II card) Extension By PCMCIA type II card, 8 or 6 Mb Functions Maximum number of pages 0 to 720 application, alarm, help and print-out form pages depending on the memory card used (2 alarms maximum) Variables per page 6 Representation of variables Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, potentiometer, selector 7 Recipes 2 records maximum with 000 values maximum Curves 6 Alarm logs Yes Real-time clock Access to the PLC real-time clock Alarm relay Yes Communication Asynchronous serial link RS 22 C/RS 8/RS 22 Downloadable protocols Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens Bus and networks Printer link Modbus Plus, Fipio/Fipway with add-on PCMCIA type III card, Ethernet 0/00 TCP/IP () (2) RS 22 C asynchronous serial link (depending on model) Development software Operating systems Type of terminal XBT L00 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP) Magelis XBT F0/F0/FC Pages Consult our catalog Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces () Depending on model. (2) TCP/IP with Modbus protocol for XBT F. () Uni-Telway version V2 for Nano/Micro/Premium PLCs. 7/

7 7 New Technology touch-sensitive graphic terminals Back-lit monochrome LCD (60 x 80 pixels) or Back-lit colour LCD TFT (60 x 80 pixels) with optimum viewing angle () 9." (monochrome) 0." (colour) Via touch-sensitive screen 8, 2 or 6 tactile feedback keys (XBT-FC) () Viakeypadwith 2 static function keys 0 soft function keys 2 service keys 2 alphanumeric keys Back-lit monochrome (blue or black and white mode) or colour LCD STN or LCD TFT (20 x 20 pixels) or Back-lit colour LCD TFT (60 x 80 pixels or 800 x 600 pixels) or Back-lit colour LCD STN (60 x 80 pixels).7" (monochrome or colour) 7.", 0." and 2." (colour) Via touch-sensitive screen () 8 Mb () By "Compact Flash" card, 6 or 2 Mb 0 to 80 application, alarm, help and print-out form pages depending on the memory card used (2 alarms maximum) Limited by the internal Flash memory capacity or "Compact Flash" card memory capacity Unrestricted Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, button, light, clock, flashing light, keypad Yes, with log Built-in 7 RS 22 C/RS 8 Uni-Telway (), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet (), IEEE 802. 0BaseT, RJ For future use VJD SPUL FUCDV0M (under Windows 2000 and XP) Magelis (CPU 00 MHz RISC) XBT F02/F0/FC XBT G Consult our catalog Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces 7/

Selection guide 7 Magelis ipc industrial PCs 7 Applications All in One compact products Screen 2 SVGA (800 x 600), Data entry Screen XGA (02 x 768) Data entry By keyboard By keyboard and touch screen By touch screen By keyboard By keyboard and touch screen By touch screen p p Page Control box For modular products, to usewithfrontpanel screen or in stand-alone () Type Smart ipc Compact ipc Processor VIA 667 MHz Intel Pentium Mobile.7 GHz Internal hard disk u 20 Gb RAM memory 26 Mb extendable to 2 Mb 26 Mb extendable to 2 Mb CD-Rom drive Yes 7 Floppy disk drive Yes Extension slots 2 PCMCIA slots PCI bus slot, 2PCMCIAslotsandCompactFlashslot Ethernet TCP/IP network x 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX (RJ) Input/output ports 2xUSB,xCOM, 2 x USB, x COM, x COM2, x COM, x parallel xcom2,xparallel x PS/2 keyboard x USB on front panel, x PS/2 keyboard, x PS/2 pointing device Operating system Windows XPe integrated operating system Windows 2000 pre-installed operating system Pre-installed software or software package Transparent Ready Web browser Vijeo Look Vijeo Look Supply voltage c 2 V a...20 V Type of PC or Control box MPC ST 2NDJ 00T MPC KT 2NAA 00p MPC KT NAA 00p Pages Consult our catalog Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces 7/6

7 7 Modular products Control box to use with front panel screen or in stand-alone () MPC NA2 0NNN 00N MPC NA 0NNN 00N MPC NA2 0NNN 00N MPC NA 0NNN 00N MPC NA2 0NNN 00N MPC NA 0NNN 00N Modular ipc Small Modular ipc Medium Modular ipc Large Intel Celeron 66 MHz Intel Pentium III 80 MHz Intel Celeron 66 MHz Intel Pentium III 80 MHz u 20 Gb, removable Optionnal Yes, removable Yes, removable ISA bus slot, PCI bus slot and ISA/PCI bus slot 2 ISA bus slots, PCI bus slots and ISA/PCI bus slot 7 2xUSB,xCOM,xCOMandxparallel x external VGA video screen, x PS/2 keyboard (2), x PS/2 pointing device (2) Windows pre-installed operating system (Windows 2000 or Windows XPe) Pack A Pack A, B, C or D (a 20 V) Pack E (a 20 V model) a...20 V c 2 V a 20 V ou c 2 V depending on model MPC AN0 2NAp 00N MPC AN0 2NDp 00N MPC BN0 2NpA 00N MPC BN0 NpA 00N MPC CN0 2NpA 00N MPC CN0 NpA 00N Consult our catalog Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces () To use the Control box without a front panel, you will require the MPC NP0 0NNN 00N mounting panel. (2) Port not operational when the Control box is used with the front panel screen. 7/7

Selection guide 7 Software and Web servers 7 Applications Traditional architecture, HMI executed on dedicated terminal or PC platform Configuration software for user interface applications Target products Type Magelis XBT N/H/P/E Magelis XBT HM/PM Magelis XBT F/FC () Operating system on terminals Proprietary Magelis operating system Magelis XBT G () Functions Reading/writing of PLC variables Yes Display of variables Yes Data processing Yes, with Java programming Sharing of variables between HMI applications Saving of variables to external database Development of graphics applications Native library of graphic objects Yes Container Active X Java Beans Yes Curves and alarms Yes, with XBT F/FC terminal Yes, with log Scripts VBA Java Yes Online modification of applications Communication between PLCs and HMI application Via I/O drivers Uploading of applications Yes No 7 Simulation of HMI applications Redundancy Yes Recipe management Yes No Report printing Form, historical data and alarm pages Access security Linked to user profiles Software compatible with OS Windows 98, 2000 or XP Windows 2000 or XP Type of software XBT L000 Vijeo Designer Pages Consult our catalog Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces () Magelis XBT terminals behave transparently on restoration of power. 7/8

7 7 Web architecture, embedded HMI in PLC SCADA supervisory software Ethernet TCP/IP modules with embedded Web server Magelis Compact ipcindustrialpcs Magelis Modular ipc industrial PCs PC micro-computers Magelis Modular ipc industrial PCs PC micro-computers TSXMicroTSXETZ Premium TSX ETY Quantum 0 NOE 77 Premium TSX WMY 00 Quantum 0 NWM 00 00 Microsoft Windows Yes Yes MSDE 2000 interface supplied (2) Yes Application tasks Yes Client/server architecture Yes SQL server 2000 interface supplied Yes Yes + e-mail transmission triggered by event Yes Yes Alarms via diagnostics buffer () Yes Yes + compiled math and logic Yes Yes Via OFS data server Via OFS data server or I/O drivers Via internal bus on Premium/Quantum platforms Yes Yes Yes 7 Yes Alarms and setpoints All information in the real-time database Windows 98, 2000, NT or XP Windows 2000 or XP Vijeo Look Monitor Pro FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI Consult our catalog Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces (2) Compatible with SQL server 2000 interface. () Specific memory area with Modicon Premium (with PL7 or Unity Pro software) and Quantum (with Unity Pro software) PLC platforms. 7/9

Presentation 7 Software and Web servers 7 OFS data server software Presentation OPC Factory Server (OFS) version.0 software uses the OLE for Process Control (OPC) standard, allowing "Client" software applications (supervisors, databases, spreadsheet programs) to access the following data: b Internal variables (words, bits) and inputs/outputs of Modicon Premium/Quantum PLCs. b Internal variables (words, bits) of Modicon TSX Micro PLCs, Modicon Momentum/Quantum PLCs (), TSX Series 7 and April PLCs. OFS software is a multi-plc data Server that enables several communication protocols to be used by providing Client application programs with a set of services for accessing the control system variables. This software is aimed at two types of user in particular: b End users who seek to develop applications on a PC and require access to PLC data. In this context, it is possible, for example, to create Client applications (supervisory control screens, Excel tables, etc.) with access to a number of PLCs connected to the PC supporting these applications. b Suppliers of control system or industrial data processing products (supervision, Human/Machine Interfaces, etc.) seeking to develop, within their standard products, an OPC Client application capable of accessing data stored in PLCs via the OPC Server. The OFS offer comprises: b A tool for configuring the OPC Server. b An OPC Server software application that receives requests from an OPC Client and retransmits them to the PLCs. b Low-level drivers for communication with Modicon PLCs. b An OPC Client enabling verification of Client/Server communication between the various connected elements. b A simulator enabling verification of operation of one or more Clients, without a connected PLC. b The electronic setup documentation. () With Concept/ProWORX software. 7 Setup: page 7/ 7/0 Functions: page 7/2 References: page 7/

Setup 7 Software and Web servers 7 OFS data server software Setup Ethernet TCP/IP 7 OFS Station (V.0) Databases 7 2 symbols.xvm (Unity Pro) symbols.prj (Concept) symbols.scy (PL7) 6 8 Unity Pro project station Ethernet TCP/IP Quantum Premium Momentum TSX Micro OFS software can be integrated into control system architectures such as the one shown above: PC running OFS software including the OPC Server. 2 PC running the Client application, which accesses the PLC data via OFS. Communication networks linking the PC, running OFS software, with the PLCs. OPC communication protocol. Modbus on TCP/IP communication protocol. 6 Uni-TE on TCP/IP communication protocol. 7 OFS software program accesses Unity Pro project variables directly. Additionally, it conducts a check to verify that these variables are consistent with those of the Premium or Quantum PLC. Depending on the usage, the Client application and OFS software can be located on the same PC or on two different PCs and 2, linked by a TCP/IP Ethernet network 7. Nota : Depending on the software used for Modicon PLCs: - PL7 software generates PLC variable symbol export files. These export files (symbols.scy) should be integrated in the OPC Server. - Concept: the variables can be accessed directly in the project (file.prj) of the Concept application. This direct link requires Concept (version > V2.0) to be installed on the OFS station. - Unity Pro programming software generates export files from PLC variable symbols. These export files (.xvm symbols) should be integrated into the OPC Server when the Unity Pro project development station 8 is not accessible via the OFS station. If the Unity Pro project station is permanently accessible via the OFS station, the former exchanges directly with the variables of the Unity Pro project (via P. server). 7 Presentation: page 7/0 Functions: page 7/2 Reference numbers: page 7/ 7/

Functions 7 Software and Web servers 7 OFS data server software Functions Development of Client applications OFS software has two interfaces: b OPC Automation interface. Particularly suitable for end users, it enables the development of OPC Client applications in Visual Basic, in Visual Basic for Excel, but also in C++. b OPC Custom interface. Used primarily by suppliers of automated control system or industrial IT products. It enables the development of applications in C++ in order to access the OFS software OPC Server. This interface is aimed at software development experts in particular, so that they can integrate the Client application into their standard products. This is the interface with the highest performance, in terms of access time, to data stored in the OPC Server but it requires extensive knowledge of C++ programming. OFS software services The various OFS software services enable: 7 b Access to the Server in local or remote mode. Symbols are accessed either: v via an.xvm/.prj/.scy-format export file (depending on the software used), v or via direct access to the Unity Pro project in the case where it is accessible via the OFS station. b With Unity Pro software, when accessing the Unity Pro project directly, the OFS software program transparently manages the consistency of the Unity Pro project symbol database with that of the Premium or Quantum PLC. In the event of inconsistency, three types of operation are possible: v "strict" mode, which stops exchanges, v "symbolic" mode, which signals an alert to the user, v "debug" mode, which does not hold up debugging of the architecture. b Access to variables in the form of addresses or symbols. b Reading and writing of variables to one or more PLCs present on the communication network connected to the PC running the OFS software. These variables can be: v the sum of all variables belonging to the Unity Pro projects (bits, words, spreadsheets, DDT/IODDT-type compound data), v system variables (OPC System Group: PLC status, diagnostics, etc.), v internal variables representing the PLC words or registers (OPC User Group). b Use of a notification mechanism that transmits change of status values to the Client. Communication between the OPC Server and the PLC uses polling or can be initiated by the PLC in order to decrease the volume of exchanges ( push data ). b Definition of dead bands for measurement noise filtering (floating variables). Communication with PLCs The various variables contained in the PLCs are accessed via standard Telemecanique communication protocols using the following: b Uni-Telway bus and Ethernet/Fipway networks, Uni-TE protocol on TCP/IP, as well as the PCIway communication driver when TSX PCI 7 Atrium coprocessors (with Unity Pro) are used. b Modbus serial link, Ethernet/Modbus Plus networks and Modbus protocol on TCP/IP. The various corresponding communication drivers are supplied in the OFS software (except Modbus Plus driver, which is supplied with the PC Modbus Plus card). Presentation: page 7/0 7/2 Setup: page 7/ References: page 7/

References 7 Software and Web servers 7 OFS data server software References OFS software for PC compatible stations (minimum configuration: Pentium 266 MHz processor, 6 Mb of RAM) running Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP. The OFS offer comprises: b OPC Server software, compatible with the OPC Data Access 2.0 standard. b OPC Server simulator (for debugging the application when no PLCs are present). b A tool for configuring the Server on the PC. b A example of OPC Client for setting up applications. b The setup documentation on CD-Rom. Supplied on CD-Rom, this software operates independently on a PC. Nevertheless, export files for variables generated by PL7 or ProWORX development software are required. The direct link with Concept applications requires Concept software (version > 2.0) to be installed on the same station. Description Function Type of license OFS data server software (version V.0) Enables the development of Client applications, accessing data of Premium and Quantum (with Unity Pro) via the OFS Server. Also compatible with: - TSX Micro/Premium (with PL7), - Momentum/Quantum (with Concept/ProWORX), - TSX Series 7 and April PLCs Reference Weight kg Single station TLX CD OFS 0M 0 stations TLX CD 0OFS 0M 200 stations TLX CD UNOFS 0M OFS software update Enables you to update a previous version of OFS data server software Consult your Regional Sales Office. 7 Presentation: page 7/0 Setup: page 7/ Functions: page 7/2 7/

Presentation, description Installation system 7 Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces Presentation The modular Tego Dial system is used to define human-machine interfaces. It facilitates the installation of Ø 22, Ø 6 and Ø 0 mm control and signalling units, DIN format display units, Magelis terminals and display units, XBL keypads and other products. Tego Dial simplifies an HMI application by : - definition of the application by Tego Dial Design software, - quick assembly of dialogue and display units, through the use of modular elements, - standard connections from the dialogue units to PLCs, bus and other products, - facilitates the integration of the dialogue application into the machine, control panel, enclosure, machine housing or intermediate suspension arm. Description p Tego Dial Design definition software This software on CD-ROM facilitates graphical definition of the dialogue application in relation to the control units, pilot lights and display units necessary for the device. It selects the correct Tego Dial components that are required for the application and also features a legend design and printing function, both for the front panel and the connections. p Dialboard front panels The front panels basically comprise a grey, RAL 706, painted aluminium frame which is covered by a polycarbonate film. Six sizes are available based on a modular pattern of height H = 0 mm and width W = 7 mm 2. ThesizesareHxW,Hx 6W, 6H x W, 9H x 2W, 9H x W and 9H x 6W. H = 0 mm, L = 7 mm H 6 L p Dialpack control console enclosers Four control consoles are available in the following modular sizes:hxw,6hxw,9hxwand9hx6w. The Dialpack console is an assembly comprising a Dialboard type front panel and a sheet steel folded and welded enclosure, painted with textured grey RAL 706. The front panel is hinged and can be opened to 20. Closing is by a /-turn device, with stop, and locking by Ronis key no.. Double bar or CNOMO triangular key locks are also available. A customising component in 2 versions - yellow or unpainted - enhances the Dialpack unit and makes it more ergonomic. A Dialpack S version in stainless steel type 0 is available for corrosive environments. This version conforms to enclosure standard EN 0298. 7 6 H H 2 L 9 H L 2 L 9 H L 9 H 6 L p Plates and cross-pieces A range of modular dimensioned plates facilitates the installation of all combinations of control and signalling units, operator dialogue terminals and other devices. These plates are attached directly to the framework of the front panel. The plates, made from sheet steel and painted grey RAL 706, are designed for the following product ranges : - Ø 22, Ø 6 and Ø 0 control and signalling units, - DIN format display units, - Electronic operator terminals and displays (Magelis and others), - keypads, - other units: joystick controllers, cam switches, etc. Cross-pieces aid vertical mounting of several rows of plates. Cut-outs in the plates are dimensioned to suit the dialogue or display units that are to be installed. Some plate versions for Ø 22 units are available with knock-outs, which need to be removed before mounting the unit. Other versions incorporate cut-outs for the transparent polycarbonate legend holders (included with the plate). Alternatively, solid plates are also available for mounting any special equipment required. p Toolkit The installation of dialogue and display units requires cut-outs to be made through the polycarbonate film. To simplify this operation, the plate is marked with cut-out guides and a toolkit is available, comprising : a mallet, cutting tools and replacement blades. p Pre-assembled kits Dialboard and Dialpack with pre-assembled plates and crosspieces are available. 7/ Schneider Electric

Presentation Installation system 7 Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces Standard connections 2 P O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A APEB20 Dialbase 6 points Ue = 20Vac P O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A Other products 7 AS-i bus 6 Tego Dial offers a range of interface components and cabling accessories that simplify connections between control and signalling units and PLCs, buses and other products. The main components which make up this range are : -prefabricated connection cables and insulation displacement connectors, mm pitch, for connecting control and signalling units to Dialbase interfaces, - Dialbase 8I/8O or 6I interfaces 2 with integrated commons, for connecting control and signalling units to PLCs via prefabricated Telefast connection cables, - an active splitter block 7 for connecting a Dialbase 8I/8O interface to PLCs with a connection modularity greater than 8I/8O, - a Dialbase 20 V interface for connecting control and signalling units to any product up to 20V, - a Dialbase AS-i I/O interface with integrated commons, for connecting control and signalling units to the AS-i bus. The selection guide on page 7/6 indicates the type and quantity of components (Dialbase interfaces, active splitter block, Telefast connection cables) required to connect the control and signalling units to the various types of PLC. The most efficient connection is achieved using the Dialbase 8I/ 8O interface and the Telemecanique TSX Micro PLC TSX DMZ6DTK card 6. Q Q 0 0 0 08 20 0 20 20 206 Dialfix and Dialmove suspension arms Dialpack control consoles can be fitted directly using adjustable lugs, ref. AE-FX22. However, for improved ergonomy, they are usually mounted on a suspension arm. This can either be fixed (Dialfix) or moving (Dialmove). Dialfix fixed arms Two versions are available : - a straight fixed arm kit, comprising a straight Ø 70 mm tube, 00 or 000 mm in length, and a pair of clamps (one for each end). Depending on the positioning of the clamps, an inclination of ± from the natural position can be achieved, - an elbowed (90 ) fixed arm kit, 00 mm in length. This kit also includes the pair of clamps described above. Arms for corrosive environments Thearmsarein0typestainlesssteelandprovide0 rotation on the Dialpack fixing side. Two models are available: - straight arm kit, length 000 mm, - 90 elbowed arm kit, length 00 mm. Dialmove moving arm This arm enables an extensive choice of mounting configurations. The cabling runs through the elements, which have removable side covers for easy access. Numerous configuration possibilities can be achieved by combining the following components: - straight tubes (00 to 000 mm long), - fixed 90 joint, - wall fixing bracket (straight or elbowed, fixed or mobile), - straight fixing plates (one fixed, other rotating) for Dialpack, - tilted joints, - pivoting joint (-90 to +90 in the same plane). 7 Schneider Electric 7/

Compatibility platform 7 Tego Dial/Tego Power installation system Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces and Tego Power for motor power-starter components Automation platforms Tego Dial components Tego Power components Type Modularity of connection to the PLC Compatible I/O modules Tego Dialbase 8 I/8 O Tego Dialbase 6 I Communication module or control splitter box with 8 I/8 O APE-B2M APE-B2E APP-CH, APP-2RH/H Micro platform Tego Dial Tego Power 8 inputs TSX DMZ 6DTK + 8 outputs 6 inputs TSX DMZ 6DTK () + 6 outputs 6 inputs TSX DMZ 6DTK/28DTK 8 inputs TSX DMZ 6DTK + 8 outputs 6 inputs TSX DMZ 6DTK + 6 outputs Premium platform 7 Tego Dial Tego Power Quantum platform 6 inputs + 6 outputs TSX DEY 6FK/2D2K/6D2K TSX DSY 2T2K/6T2K 6 inputs TSX DEY 6FK/2D2K/6D2K 6 inputs + 6 outputs TSX DEY 2D2K/6D2K/6FK TSX DSY 2T2K/6T2K () Tego Dial 2 inputs + 2 outputs 0 DDI 00/0, 0 DDI 8 00, 0 DD0 00/0 () 2 inputs 0 DDI 00/0, 0 DDI 8 00 Tego Power 2 inputs + 2 outputs 0 DDI 00/0, 0 DDI 8 00, 0 DD0 00/0 () For the connection of a second Dialbase APE-B2M, use 2 x TSX DP pp connecting cables. 7/6

7 Connecting components Control splitter box 6 I/8 O Splitter box 6 I + 6 O to2x(8i+8o) Splitter box 6to2x8 Telefast connecting cables APP-2RH2/H APE-R628 ABE-7ACC02 TSX CDP pp ABF-M2Hpp0 2 (2) () 2 2 7 (2) () 2 (2) 2 () 2 (2) 8 I + 8 O remain available. To connect a second APP-CH module or APP-2ppp 8 E + 8 S control splitter box, use a additional TSX CDP pp cable. () 8 O remain available on ABE-7ACC02. To connect them a second AAP-2ppp 6 I/8 O control splitter box, use a additional TSX CDP pp cable. 7/7

8 8/0

Contents 8 - Connection interfaces and power supplies 8 8. - Telefast 2 pre-wired system Selection guide Telefast 2 pre-wired system...page8/2 b Presentation... page8/8 b References v Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals... page8/0 v Sub-bases with soldered solid state... page8/2 v Sub bases equipped with plug-in relays... page8/ v Sub-bases for analogue channels... page8/6 b Dimensions... page8/8 8.2 - Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Selection guide Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies....page8/20 b Presentation... page8/22 b Selection... page8/2 b Characteristics.... page8/26 b References... page8/ b Dimensions and schemes... page8/2 8 8/

Selection guide 8 Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Discrete input and/or output sub-bases Applications Discrete input or output 876 877 878 Relay amplification Equipped with relay Control voltage Output voltage c 2 V c 2 V Output current per channel 0. A Modularity 6 8-2-6 No. of terminals per channel to 2 Type of connection terminals Signal Signal, common (configurable c 2 V or 0 V) Signal Signal, Common (configurable c 2 V or 0 V) Connectors 20-way HE0 connector Terminal block Removable No No Type of terminals Screw Screw or spring Additional or optional* function Low cost version fitted with cable Miniature sub-bases Compact size * Type 2 input * () Isolator * 8 Device type ABE- 7H20Eppp 7H2Eppp ABE- 7H6Cpp Pages 8/0 8/ ABE- 7HppRp 7HppR0 ABE- 7HppR2p ABE- 7HppS2 () For TSX Micro and Premium PLCs. 8. 8/2

8 8 Discrete input and output 872 200 Removable electromechanical or solid state No Yes c 2 V c 2 V c 2 V (solid state) c... 2 V, a 20 V (electromechanical) 0. A 0. A A(E.M.),2A(solidstate) A(th) 6 6 8 passive inputs 8 relay outputs 2 Signal, 2 common connections between the inputs and the outputs. Signal, common, 2 common connections between the inputs and the outputs. N/O contact and common, output channels 2 input connection points 20-way HE0 connectors No Screw Miniature sub-base Synergy with Tego Power and API Micro PLC Miniature sub-base - Common per channels SynergywithTegoPowerandAPIMicroPLC ABE-7H6CM ABE-7H6CM2 ABE-7P6M ABE-7R6M 8/0 8/ 8/ 8 8. 8/

Selection guide (continued) 8 Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Discrete input and output sub-bases Applications Discrete output 870 Relay amplification Electromechanical, fixed Electromechanical or solid state Equipped with relay Yes Yes No No Control voltage c 2 V Output voltage c V...0V a 20 V c V...0V a 20 V c 2 V (solid state) c V...2V,a 20 V (E.M.) c V...0V a 20 V Output current per channel 2A(th) A(th) A(th) 2 A (solid state), 6 A (electromechanical) Depends on relay mounted 0.to0A Modularity 8 8-6 6 8or6 No. of terminals per channel 2 2 2to Type of connection terminals N/O contact and common Volt-free N/O contact N/O contact and common N/O contact Signal, Polarities Connectors 20-way HE 0 connector Terminal block Removable Yes Yes Yes No No Type of terminals Screw or spring Screw Screw or spring Additional or optional* function Miniature sub-base Bistable relay Volt-free or common per 8 channels Miniature sub-bases Common per channels Isolator and fuse 8 Device type ABE- 7R08S26p ABE- 7RppSpp ABE- 7RppS2pp ABE- 7R6T ABE- 7P6T ABE- 7P6T2ppp 7P08Tppp 8. Pages 8/2 8/ 8/ () For TSX Micro and Premium PLCs. 8/

8 8 Discrete input 879 Electromechanical, removable Solid state, fixed Solid state, fixed Solid state, removable Yes Yes Yes No From c 2 V to a 20 V From V TTL to a 20 V c V... 0 V a 20 V c 2 V A (th) 8A(th) from0.to2a 2 ma 0. A 2 ma 2 ma 6 2to 2to6 2 2 C/O contact or N/O contact and common C/O contact or 2 C/O contacts and common Signal and 0 V Signal c 2Vand0V Signal can be isolated, Protected common Signal Signal and common No Yes No No Yes No Screw Screw or spring Screw Screw or spring Volt-free or common per: Fault signal Isolator and fuse (indicator) -wire proximity sensor Isolator and fuse (indicator) 8 channels channels ABE- 7R6T2pp ABE- 7R6Tpp ABE- 7SppS2Bp ABE- 7H6F ABE- 7H6Rp ABE- 7H6S ABE- 7S6E2pp ABE- 7P6Fp 8 8/ 8/2 8/ 8/2 8/ 8. 8/

Selection guide (continued) 8 Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Analogue sub-bases Applications Analogue signals and special functions 87 Compatibility TSX Micro Premium Standard Type of signal Counter inputs and analogue I/O Counter inputs Axis control Position control Analogue inputs Current Voltage Pt 00 Analogue outputs Current Voltage Functions Passive connection, point-to-point with shield continuity Modularity counter channel or 8 analogue inputs + 2 analogue outputs 8 channels channels Control voltage Output voltage Output current per channel c 2 V c 2 V 2 ma Number of terminals per channel 2 2or 2or Type of connector -way SUB-D + 9-way SUB-D 2-way SUB-D Terminal block Removable No No Type of terminals Screw Screw Device type ABE-7CPA0 ABE-7CPA02 ABE-7CPA2 8 Pages 8/6 8. 8/6

8 8 87 87 87 Premium TSX AEY80 Premium TSX CAYp TSX CTY2C Premium TSX AEY6 Premium TSX PAY2p2 Analogue inputs Current Voltage Pt 00 Isolated analogue inputs Inputs Counter Inputs for thermocouples I/O Distribution of sensor power supplies per limiter (2 ma) Distribution of isolated sensor power supplies per converter Acquisition of value from an absolute encoder Connection of 6 thermocouples with cold junction compensation Safety module (BG) 8 channels 8 channels channel 6 channels 2 Emergency stops 2or 2-way SUB-D 2-way SUB-D -way SUB-D 2-way SUB-D 0-way SUB-D No No No No No Screw Screw or spring Screw Screw Screw ABE-7CPA0 ABE-7CPAp ABE-7CPA ABE-7CPA2 ABE-7CPA 8 8. 8/7

Presentation Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Connector cables for Modicon PLCs 867 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 2 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 8 8. -2 Cabled connectors combine a standard terminal block equipped with screw terminals, two multicore (AWG 22) cables and two 20-way HE 0 connectors. Two cabled connectors are available for the Quantum range and two others for the 98-A20-Compact range. The products have the following functions: - ABF-M2Hpp0 for Quantum relay inputs or outputs, with 2 x HE 0 connectors each integrating 6 channels. - ABF-M2Hpp 2 for outputs directly connected to the Quantum, with 2 x HE 0 connectors each integrating 6 channels and an external power supply with a direct connection to the output terminal marked. - ABF-M6Hpp0 for 98-A20-Compact inputs or relay outputs, with x HE 0 connector each integrating 6 channels. - ABF-M6Hpp for 98-A20-Compact directly connected outputs, with 2 x HE 0 connectors each integrating 8 channels. The splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02 may be used to connect sub-bases with 8-channel modularity. A single type of cable equipped with 20-way HE 0 connectors irrespective of the 8, 2 or 6-channel modularity. The HE 0 connectors may be moulded (TSX-CDPppp) or self-perforating (ABF-H20Hppp). 8 and 6-channel sub-bases from the Telefast 2 range. () The c 2 V power supply is connected using Telefast 2 sub-bases only. The c 0 V connections must be equipotential. 8/8

Compatibility Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Modicon PLC and NUM numerical control I/O modules with interface sub-bases I/O modules Modicon PLCs NUM numerical controllers 98-A20-Compact Quantum NUM 00/ NUM 020 060 Inputs Outputs TOR TOR Analogue Inputs/ Inputs/ Inpupuput Outputs In- Out- Inputs Outputs Outputs Outputs 6E 6S 2E 2S 96E 96S 8E 6E S 8S 6E+8S 2E+2S DEP DEP DAO DAO DAP DDI DDO DDI DDO 0 0 0 0 0 6 I 8 O 2 I 2 O 220 27 26 26 27 6 6 AVI ACI AVO ACO ACO DEO 26 DEP 26 DAP 26 DAP 26 DDI 8 0000 0000 0 ACI 0000 02000 02000 000 Connection terminal blocks Included NUM cables not supplied Cabled connectors ABF- M6 M6 M2 M2 M08 M6 M0 M0 M08 Hpp0 Hpp Hpp0 Hpp S20 S20 S200 S20 S202 Splitter sub-bases ABE-7 CDPppp ACC0 ACC0 ACC0 ACC0 Connection sub-bases () 8 channels ABE-7H08Rpp () () () (2) (2) (2) (2) ABE-7H08S2 () (2) (2) (2) 2 channels ABE-7H2Rpp ABE-7H2S2 6 channels ABE-7H6Rpp/H6Cpp () ABE-7H6S2 ABE-7H6R2 () ABE-7H6F ABE-7H6S () Input adaptor sub-bases 6 channels ABE-7S6E2pp/7P6Fpp ABE-7P08T0 (2) Output adaptor sub-bases 8 channels ABE-7S08S2pp (2) ABE-7R08Sppp/7P08T0 (2) (2) 6 channels ABE-7R6Sppp ABE-7R6Tppp/7P6Tppp ABE-7S6Sppp Sub-bases for analogue/counter I/O ABE-7CPA0 ABE-7CPA02 (6) 8 ABE-7CPA0 (6) ABE-7CPA2 ABE-7CPA (6) () With Telefast 2 sub-bases with no channel LED. (2) With the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02. () Only with module DDI 8. () Only with module DDI. () With the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02 or with a cabled connector ABF-M6Hpp directly. (6) 2 sub-bases are required. 8. Pre-wired cabled connectors 8/9

References Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Passive connection sub-bases Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals 866 8660 ABE-7H20Eppp "Low cost" sub-bases Function No. No.ofterminals For PLCs Length Type Reference Weight of per on of PLC of chan- chan- row connection connection nels nel number cable m kg Input 6 2 Modicon TSX Screw ABE-7H20E00 0.0 or Micro/Premium Output 2 Screw ABE-7H20E200 0.0 Screw ABE-7H20E00 0.80 Siemens S7. Screw ABE-7H2E0 0.60 Screw ABE-7H2E00 0.60 "Miniature" sub-bases Function No. No. of terminals LED Polarity Type Reference Weight of per on per distribution of chan- chan- row chan- connection nels nel number nel kg Input 6 No No Screw ABE-7H6C0 0.60 or Output Yes No Screw ABE-7H6C 0.60 8 8662 2 2 Yes 0 or 2 V Screw ABE-7H6C2 0.20 ABE-7H6C2 Yes 0 and 2 V Screw ABE-7H6C 0.260 8. 866 Input 6 Yes No Screw ABE-7H6CM 0.60 and Output() ABE-7H6CM2 2 2 Yes 0 or 2 V Screw ABE-7H6CM2 0.200 () 8 I + 8 Q: these products have 2 commons connections which enable inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time. 8/0

References Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Passive connection sub-bases Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals (continued) 866 Function No. No. of terminals LED Polarity Isolator (I) Type of Reference Weight of per on per distribution Fuse (F) connection chan- chan- row chan- per nels nel number nel channel kg ABE-7H6R0 Input 8 No No Screw ABE-7H08R0 0.87 or Output Yes No Screw ABE-7H08R 0.87 2 2 Yes 0 or 2 V Screw ABE-7H08R2 0.28 I Screw ABE-7H08S2 0.2 2 No No Screw ABE-7H2R0 0.27 Yes No Screw ABE-7H2R 0.27 2 No No Screw ABE-7H2R0 0.96 2 2 No 0or2V Screw ABE-7H2R20 0.00 Yes 0 or 2 V Screw ABE-7H2R2 0.00 I Screw ABE-7H2S2 0.7 866 6 No No Screw ABE-7H6R0 0.27 Yes No Screw ABE-7H6R 0.27 Spring ABE-7H6RE 0.27 ABE-7H6R 2 No No Screw ABE-7H6R0 0.96 Spring ABE-7H6R0E 0.96 2 2 No 0or2V Screw ABE-7H6R20 0.00 Yes 0 or 2 V Screw ABE-7H6R2 0.00 Spring ABE-7H6R2E 0.00 I Screw ABE-7H6S2 0.7 Spring ABE-7H6S2E 0.7 8666 No 0 and 2 V Screw ABE-7H6R0 0.6 Yes 0 and 2 V Screw ABE-7H6R 0.6 Type 2 6 2 2 Yes 0 and 2 V Screw ABE-7H6R2 0.20 input () Input 6 2 Yes 2 V I, F (2) Screw ABE-7H6S 0.60 8 8. ABE-7H6p Output 6 2 Yes 0 V I, F (2) Screw ABE-7H6F 0.60 () For Modicon TSX Micro, Premium and Numerical Controller NUM 020/060. (2) With LED to indicate blown fuse. 8/

References Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Connection sub-bases with soldered relays and plug-in terminal blocks Sub-bases with soldered solid state inputs, plug-in terminal blocks 8667 Number No. of Isolation Voltage Type Reference Weight of terminals PLC/application of channels per channel V connection kg 6 2 Yes c 2 Screw ABE-7S6E2B 0.70 ABE-7S6E2pp Spring ABE-7S6E2BE 0.70 c 8 Screw ABE-7S6E2E 0.70 8 8668 Spring ABE-7S6E2EE 0.70 a 8 Screw ABE-7S6E2E0 0.86 Spring ABE-7S6E2E0E 0.86 a 0 Screw ABE-7S6E2F0 0.97 Spring ABE-7S6E2F0E 0.97 a 20 Screw ABE-7S6E2M0 0.07 Spring ABE-7S6E2M0E 0.07 Sub-bases with soldered solid state outputs, plug-in terminal blocks No. of Isolation Output Output Fault Type Reference Weight channels PLC/ voltage current detection of application V A signal () connection kg 8 No c 2 0. Yes (2) Screw ABE-7S08S2B0 0.22 Spring ABE-7S08S2B0E 0.22 2 Yes (2) Screw ABE-7S08S2B 0.8 Spring ABE-7S08S2BE 0.8 6 No c 2 0. Yes (2) Screw ABE-7S6S2B0 0.0 Spring ABE-7S6S2B0E 0.0 No Screw ABE-7S6SB2 0.00 Spring ABE-7S6SB2E 0.00 Sub-bases with soldered electromechanical relays, plug-in terminal blocks No. of Relay No. of Output Polarity Type Reference Weight channels width contacts current distribution/ of mm A application connection kg 8 N/O 2 Contact common Screw ABE-7R08S 0.2 per group of channels Spring ABE-7R08SE 0.2 Bistable 2 Volt-free Screw ABE-7R08S26 0.20 Spring ABE-7R08S26E 0.20 8. ABE-7R08S26 0 N/O Volt-free Screw ABE-7R08S20 0.2 Spring ABE-7R08S20E 0.2 6 N/O 2 Contact common Screw ABE-7R6S 0.2 per group of 8 channels Spring ABE-7R6SE 0.2 0 N/O Volt-free Screw ABE-7R6S20 0.7 Spring ABE-7R6S20E 0.7 Common per Screw ABE-7R6S22 0.7 group of 8 chan. Spring ABE-7R6S22E 0.7 on both poles () A fault on a sub-base output Qn will set PLC output Qn to safety mode which will be detected by the PLC. (2) Can only be used with modules with protected outputs. 8/2

References Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Plug-in relay sub-bases Sub-bases for plug-in solid state input relays () 8669 No. of Term- For Isolation Input Type Reference Weight chan- inals/ relay PLC/ connection of nels channel type application connection kg ABE-7R6T20 6 2 ABS-7E Yes Volt-free Screw ABE-7P6F0 0.80 ABR-7 ABS-7SE Spring ABE-7P6F0E 0.80 Polarity distribution Screw ABE-7P6F2 0.80 Output sub-bases, equipped with plug-in electromechanical relays (2) No. of Relay Type No. and Polarity Reference Weight chan- width of type of distribution/ nels mm relay contacts application kg 867 6 ABR-7S N/O Contact common ABE-7R6T 0.600 per group of channels ABE-7R6M Contact common ABE-7R6M () 0.600 per group of output channels + 2 input common terminals 0 ABR-7S2 N/O Volt-free ABE-7R6T20 0.7 Common ABE-7R6T22 0.70 on both poles () ABR-7S2 C/O Contact common () ABE-7R6T2 0.70 Volt-free ABE-7R6T20 0.77 2 ABR-7S C/O Volt-free ABE-7R6T0.00 8 Common ABE-7R6T2.200 on both poles () 8. ABR-7S7 2 C/O Volt-free ABE-7R6T70.00 () Not equipped with relays. (2) Both technologies (electromechanical and solid state) may be combined on the same sub-base. () 2 connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time. () Per group of 8 channels. () Per group of channels. 8/

References Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Plug-in relay sub-bases Sub-bases for solid state and/or electromechanical output relays, plug-in () No. of Relay For Isolator Fuse Polarity Type Reference Weight chan- width relay per per distribution/ of nels type channel channel application connection mm kg 6 ABR-7S No No Contact common ABE-7P6T 0.0 ABS-7SCB per group of channels Contact common ABE-7P6M (2) 0.0 per group of output channels and 2 common input terminals 0 ABR-7S2p No No Volt-free Screw ABE-7P6T20 () 0.6 ABS-7SA2p ABS-7SC2p ABE-7P6T20 () 0.6 ABE-7ACC20 Spring ABE-7P6T20E () 0.6 Yes Volt-free Screw ABE-7P6T2 0.67 867 No Common Screw ABE-7P6T22 0.6 on both poles () ABE-7P6T2pp Yes Common Screw ABE-7P6T2 0.670 on both poles () 8 2 ABR-7S No No Volt-free Screw ABE-7P08T0 0.0 ABS-7SAp ABS-7SCpp ABE-7ACC2 Spring ABE-7P08T0E 0.0 6 2 ABR-7S No No Volt-free Screw ABE-7P6T0 0.900 ABS-7SAp ABS-7SCpp ABE-7ACC2 Spring ABE-7P6T0E 0.900 8 8. Common Screw ABE-7P6T2 0.900 on both poles () ABR-7S No Yes Volt-free Screw ABE-7P6T 0.900 ABS-7SAM ABS-7SCE ABE-7ACC2 Yes Yes Common Screw ABE-7P6T8.000 on both poles () Spring ABE-7P6T8E.000 () Not equipped with relays (2) 2 connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time. () With relay ABR-7S2 for sub-base ABE-7P6T20, with relay ABR-7S2 for sub-base ABE-7P6T20p. () Per group of 8 channels. () Per group of channels. 8/

References Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Plug-in relays 867 ABS-7SCB Plug-in solid state relays (Order in multiples of ) Relay Func- Input circuit Output circuit Unit Weight width tions Current Nominal Current () Nominal reference voltage voltage mm V A V kg Output c 2 2 c 2 ABS-7SCB 0.00 0 Output c 2 0. c 8 ABS-7SC2E 0.06 a 2 20 ABS-7SA2M 0.06 2 Input c TTL c 2 ABS-7ECAL 0.0 2 Type 2 c 2 ABS-7ECB2 0.0 8 Type 2 c 2 ABS-7ECE2 0.0 a 0 Hz 8 c 2 ABS-7EAE 0.0 a 60 Hz 0 0 c 2 ABS-7EAF 0.0 a 0 Hz 20 20 c 2 ABS-7EAM 0.0 Output c 2 2 c 2 ABS-7SCBA 0.06 Self-protected. c 8 ABS-7SCE 0.06. a 2 20 ABS-7SAMA 0.06 8676 Plug-in electromechanical relays Relay Control Output No. of Order in Unit Weight width voltage current () contacts multiples of reference mm V A (Ith) kg c 2 N/O ABR-7S 0.00 ABR-7S2p 0 c 2 N/O ABR-7S2 0.008 867 C/O ABR-7S2 0.008 2 c 2 0 C/O ABR-7S 0.07 8 2 C/O ABR-7S7 0.07 c 8 8 C/O ABR-7SE 0.07 8 8. ABR-7Sp Accessory Description Reference Weight kg Extractor for mm miniature relays ABE-7ACC2 0.00 () See characterics table for specifications of relays in the sub-bases 8/

References Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Connection sub-bases for counter and analogue channels 8678 ABE-7CPA0 Connection sub-bases for counter and analogue channels Functions For Compatible Type of Type of Reference Weight Modicon modules connection connection PLCs Telefast 2 side kg Counting and TSX Micro Integrated -way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA0 0.00 analogue analogue and counter TSX 7.22 TSX CTZpA Counting Premium TSX CTYpA -way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA0 0.00 Axis control TSX CAYp Position control Parallel output Premium TSX CTYpA -way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA 0.0 absolute TSX CAYp encoder connection Distribution Premium TSX AEY6 2-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA2 0.00 of 6 thermocouples 8677 ABE-7CPA02 Passive Premium TSX ASY80 2-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA02 0.290 distribution TSX AEY600 of 8 channels TSX ApY800 on screw Quantum 0 AVI 0000 terminal block 0 ACI 0000 with shielding 0 ACI 0000 continuity 0 ACO 000 Distribution Premium TSX ASY0 2-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA2 0.20 of analogue TSX AEY20 output Quantum 0 AVO 02000 channels 0 ACO 02000 8 8. Distribution Premium TSX AEM8p 2-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA0 0.0 and supply TSX AEM6pp of 8 analogue TSX AEY800 channels TSX AEY600 with limitation Quantum 0 AVI 0000 of each 0 ACI 0000 current loop 0 ACI 0000 Distribution Premium TSX AEY80 2-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA 0.0 and supply Quantum 0 AVI 0000 of 8 analogue 0 ACI 0000 input channels 0 ACI 0000 isolated from each other Spring ABE-7CPAE 0.0 with 2 ma/ channel limiter Safety Premium TSX PAY2p2 2-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA 0.290 8/6

References Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Accessories for connection sub-bases Software Description Operating system Reference Weight kg 868 8680 ABE-7ACC02 Software for Under Windows ABE-7LOGV0 0.0 client label marking version. or 9 Pack of 2 pre-cut label ABE-7LOGF2 0.200 sheets (60 labels) Accessories Description No. of Characteristics Order in Unit Weight channels multiples of reference kg Kit for fixing on solid plate 0 ABE-7ACC0 0.008 Splitter sub-base 6as2x8channels ABE-7ACC02 0.07 Redundant output sub-base 6 as 2 x 6 channels ABE-7ACC0 0.07 Redundant input sub-base 6 as 2 x 6 channels ABE-7ACC 0.07 868 ABE-7ACC80 + ABE-7ACC8 Removable continuity 0 mm wide ABE-7ACC20 0.007 blocks 2 mm wide ABE-7ACC2 0.00 Locating device for removable terminal block 00 ABE-7ACC0 0.00 Enclosure feedthrough 2 0-way ABE-7ACC80 0.00 with industrial connector Plug-in 0-way 2 For mounting on ABE-7ACC8 0.70 male connector ABE-7ACC80 8682 ABE-7BV20 0 2 0 2 0 2 6 7 8 9 0 2 Enclosure feedthrough 6 9-way ABE-7ACC82 0.0 with CNOMO M2 connector ( x 20-way HE 0 8 and 2 9-way ABE-7ACC8 0.0 connector, PLC end) Impedance adaptor UsedwithABE-7ACC82 ABE-7ACC8 0.02 for Type 2 compatibility and ABE-7ACC8 IP 6 cable gland For cables ABE-7ACC8 0.00 Additional snap-on 8 0 screw terminals ABE-7BV0 0.00 terminal blocks (shunted terminals) 0 spring terminals ABE-7BV0E 0.00 6 20 screw terminals ABE-7BV20 0.060 20 spring terminals ABE-7BV20E 0.060 8679 868 ABE-7TES60 AR-SB ABF-C08Rppp I/O simulator 6 Display, forcing ABE-7TES60 0.0 sub-base inhibition, continuity Adhesive label holder For 6 characters 0 AR-SB 0.00 Fast blow fuses 0.2 A 0 ABE-7FU02 0.00 x 20, 20 V, UL 0. A 0 ABE-7FU00 0.00 A 0 ABE-7FU00 0.00 2A 0 ABE-7FU200 0.00 A 0 ABE-7FU00 0.00 6. A 0 ABE-7FU60 0.00 Flexible commoning links accessories Description For Colour Distance between Reference Weight common cable ends kg cm Flexible Coil White 2 ABF-C08R2W 0.020 commoning 2 ABF-C08R02W 0.00 links a Red 2 ABF-C08R2R 0.020 Modularity 2 ABF-C08R02R 0.00 8xmm 2 c Blue 2 ABF-C08R2B 0.020 2 ABF-C08R02B 0.00 8 8. 8/7

Dimensions Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system Common side view ABE-7H20Eppp ABE-7H6R0, ABE-7H2R0, ABE-7H6Cpp/ABE-7H6CMpp, ABE-7H2Eppp ABE-7H08Rp, ABE-7H08R2, ABE-7p6M/ABE-7p6T ABE-7R08S/SE, ABE-7H08S2, ABE-7CPA2 b b b c c + 9 8 a 70 8 8. 8 67 89 ABE- 7H20E/7H2Eppp 7Hppppp/CPA2 7R08Sp ABE- 7H6Cpp/CMpp 7p6M/T b 67 70 77 a 06 0 b 6 8 8 b 9 89 c 9 8 8 b, 8 Additional shunt terminal block ABE-7BV0/7BV20 c 60 Common side view ABE-7H6R2p, ABE-7H2R2p, ABE-7H6Rp, ABE-7R6S2p, ABE-7H6p ABE-7H6Rp, ABE-7H2Rp, ABE-7H2S2, ABE-7S6S2B0/S2B02E, ABE-7H6S2p, ABE-7R6Sp, ABE-7R08S20, ABE-7S6E2pp/S6E2ppE, ABE-7S08S2B0, ABE-7CPA02, ABE-7CPA0 ABE-7S08S2B/S08S2BE ABE7S6SB2, ABE-7R08S26 ABE-7CPA b b b + 2 77 70 2 c c ABE- 7pppppp 7pR08S20p, 7S6SB2p, 7R08S26 All sub-bases b 70 77 b 8 b 8 8 c 8 c 8 8 Additional shunt terminal block ABE-7BV0/7BV20 ABE-7R6T2pp, ABE-7P6T2pp ABE-7CPA0, ABE-7CPA/CPA2/CPA 206 89 8 89 8 2 6 7 ABE-7R6Tpp, ABE-7P6Tpp, ABE-7P6Fp Common side view Note: details of the front view are the same as for the ABE-7CPA0. ABE-7P08T0 272 7 8 0 8/8

Dimensions Connection interfaces 8 Telefast 2 pre-wired system ABE-7ACC02 ABE-7ACC0 ABE-7ACC0, ABE-7ACC0 ABE-7ACC0, ABE-7ACC A A B C A B C D B C D 89 8 0 8 7 8 7 88 0 88 70 89 8 8 8 7 66 Note: Drawing representing ABE-7ACC0 and ABE-7ACC0 ABE-7ACC80 ABE-7ACC82, ABE-7ACC8 0 2 0 2 6 2 2 7 6, 2 ABE-7ACC8 ABE-7TES60 20 80 0 89 8 70 72 0 2 0 9 8 Fixing centres for sub-bases using mounting kit ABE-7ACC0 a G = a-2 6 b H = b+2 ABE-7 G H ABE-7 G H ABE-7 G H ACC02 8 82 H2Rp 82 H6F 9 82 ACC0 0 H2R2p 82 H6S 9 82 ACC0 0 H6Rp 82 S6E2pp 9 82 ACC0 0 H6R2p 82 S6SB2 82 ACC0/ 0 H6Rp 82 S6S2pp 9 82 H08Rpp 72 82 H2S2 82 R6T2pp 99 0 H08S2 72 82 H6S2 82 P6T2pp 99 0 H2R0 72 82 R08S20 82 R6Tpp 260 0 H6R0 72 82 R6S 82 P08T0 0 0 R08S 72 82 R6S2p 9 82 P6Tpp 260 0 CPA0 82 S08S2B0 82 P6Fpp 260 0 CPA02 82 S08S2B 9 82 CPAp 82 CPA0 82 8. 8/9

Selection guide 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Functions Supplies for d.c. control circuits Type of product Single-phase, modular switch mode power supplies Single-phase, regulated switch mode power supplies Applications Industrial, commercial or residential applications. Modular format allowing integration into panels. Simple, low power equipment. Industrial applications, low and medium power. Machine equipment applications. Industrial or commercial applications on sites sensitive to mains interference. Protection against accidental restarting. Nominal power 22 W 0 W 7 W 0 W 8 20 W 60 20 W Input voltage a 00 20 V single-phase a 00 20 V single-phase c 0 220 V compatible () a 00 20 V single-phase a 00 20 V single-phase, c 0 220 V compatible () Output voltage c 2 V adjustable c 2 V adjustable c 2 V adjustable c 2 V adjustable c 2, 2 V or 8 V adjustable Technology Primary switch mode electronic power supplies. Secondary protection Integrated, against overloads and short-circuits, with automatic reset. Integrated, against overloads and short-circuits, with manual and automatic reset. Signalling Output indicator lamp. Output and input indicator lamp. Other characteristics Connection by lugclamps possible Anti-harmonic distortion filter 8 Mounting Direct on 7 rail Direct, on 7 rail and on panel Disturbance (conforming to EN0/22) Conducted and radiated cl.b cl.a (7/ W) cl.b (0 W) Direct on 7 rail cl.b 8.2 Conforming to standards EN 008-, IEC 6000-6-2 (EN 0082-2), IEC 90, EN6-2/A EN 008-2, IEC 6000-6-2, EN 6090 EN 008-, IEC 6000-6-2, (EN 0082-2), IEC 90 Approvals UL, CSA, TÜV culus, TÜV UL, CSA, TÜV, CTick EN 008-, IEC 6000-6-2, (EN 0082-2), IEC 90, 6000--2 Device type ABL-7RM ABL-7CEM ABL-7RE ABL-7RP Pages Please consult our catalog: 8/22 Automation & Control, Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies () Compatible input voltage, not indicated on the product. 8/20

8 8 2-phase regulated switch mode power supplies -phase regulated switch mode power supplies Regulated switch mode power supplies for AS-Interface Industrial applications. Industrial applications. In-line continuous process equipment, machine tools, injection presses, etc. Industrial applications. Supply of d.c. voltage necessary for AS-Interface systems. 20 and 20 W 20 and 80 W 20 W 20 960 W 72 W W 2x72W a 2 x 80 V 2-phase a x 80 V -phase a x 00 20 V -phase a x 00 20 V -phase a 00 20 V single-phase c 2 V adjustable c 0 V c 2 V adjustable Primary switch mode electronic power supplies. Integrated, against overloads and short-circuits, with manual and automatic reset. Integrated, against overloads and short-circuits, overvoltage and undervoltage. Output indicator lamp. Output and input indicator lamps. Anti-harmonic distortion filter Direct on 7 rail Direct on 7 rail (except ABL-7UPS 2200 and ABL-7UPS200) Direct on 7 rail 8 cl.b cl.b cl.b EN 008-, EN 0082-2, EN 6090 EN 008-, EN 0082-2, EN 6090 EN 008-, EN 0082-2, EN 6090, IEC 6000--2 culus, c us UL, CSA, TÜV EN 008-, IEC 6000-6-2, EN 022 class B 8.2 ABL-7REQ ABL-7UEQ ABL-7UES ABL-7UPS ASI-ABL 8/22 8/22 Please consult our catalog AS-Interface cabling system 8/2

Presentation 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies ABL-7 power supplies The ABL-7 range of power supplies is designed to provide the d.c. voltage necessary for the control circuits of automation system equipment. Split into three families, this range meets all the needs encountered in industrial, commercial and residential applications. Single-phase or -phase, of the electronic switch mode type, they provide a quality of output which is suitable for the loads supplied and compatible with the mains supply available in the equipment. Clear guidelines are given for selecting protection devices which are often used with them and thus a comprehensive solution is provided, which can be used in total safety. Phaseo switch mode power supplies ABL 7CEM These switch mode power supplies are totally electronic and regulated. The use of electronics makes it possible to significantly improve the performance of these power supplies, which offer: - very compact size, - integrated overload, short-circuit, overvoltage and undervoltage protection, - a very wide range of permissible input voltages, without any adjustment, - a high degree of output voltage stability, - good performance, - LED indicators on the front panel. Phaseo power supplies are available in single-phase and -phase versions. They deliver a voltage which is precise to %, whatever the load and whatever the type of mains supply, within a range of 8 to 26 V for single-phase, or 60 to 0 V for -phase. Conforming to IEC standards and UL and CSA certified, they are suitable for universal use. The inclusion of overload and short-circuit protection makes downstream protection unnecessary if discrimination is not required. ABL-7 RE and ABL-7 RP supplies are also equipped with an output undervoltage control which causes the product to trip if the output voltage drops below 9 V, in order to ensure that the voltage delivered is always usable by the actuators being supplied. All the products are fitted with an output voltage adjustment potentiometer in order to be able to compensate for any line voltage drops in installations with long cable runs. Most of our power supplies are designed for direct mounting on and 7 mm 7 rails. These power supplies are available in single-phase and -phase versions and are split into three families: Compact single-phase supply ABL-7CEM: b power less than or equal to 0 W (.2 A), b compact size, b for all low power equipment, b suitable for use in automation system environments based on the Nano and Twido platforms, or in any automation system configuration requiring a c 2 V supply. 8 8.2 ABL-7RP Universal single-phase supplies ABL-7RE and ABL-7RP: b ABL-7RE v power between 8 W (2 A) and 20 W (0 A), v compact size, v for all machine equipment, v suitable for use in automation system environments based on the Micro and Premium platforms, or in any automation system configuration requiring a c 2 V supply. b ABL-7RP v power between 60 W (2. A) and 20 W (0 A), v output voltage available: c 2, 2 and 8 V, v input filter (PFC) for commercial and residential environments (conforming to standard EN 6000--2), v two operating modes possible for handling of overload and short-circuit faults: - "AUTO" mode which provides automatic restarting of the power supply on elimination of the fault, - "MANU" mode which requires manual resetting of the power supply to restart. Resetting is achieved by switching off the mains power. Characteristics : pages 8/26 to 8/29 References : page 8/ Dimensions : page 8/2 Schemes : page 8/ 8/22

Presentation (continued) 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies 0887-2-M ABL-7UPS 089 ABL-7REQ Phaseo switch mode power supplies (continued) -phase and single-phase process supplies ABL-7U and ABL-7REQ: b ABL-7UE v power between 20 W ( A) and 80 W (20 A), v compact size, v voltages between x 80 V and x 00 V, v for use in industrial applications, for all in-line or continuous process equipment, machine tools and injection presses, etc. v suitable for use in automation system environments based on the Premium and Quantum platforms, or in any automation system configuration requiring a c 2 V supply. b ABL-7UPS v power between 20 W (0 A) and 960 W (0 A). Identical to the ABL-7UE range, this power supply differs in that it includes a filter (PFC) which means that it can be connected directly to the public mains supply, in compliance with standard EN 6000--2. This product, for world-wide use, is UL certified. b ABL-7 REQ v power between 20 W ( A) and 20 W (0 A), v compact size, v can be connected to 2-phase input voltages between 80 V and V, to replace older power supplies connected by only two wires. Economical, more competitive, yet with a smaller input voltage range it can, in certain cases, be used in place of the - phase versions. Using c 2 V b Using c 2 V enables so-called protection installations (PELV) to be built. Using PELV is a measure designed to protect people from direct and indirect contact. Measures relating to these installations are defined in publication NF C 2-20 and in standard IEC 6--. b The application of these measures to the electrical equipment in machines is defined in standard NF EN 6020- and requires: v that the voltage used is below 60 V d.c. in dry environments and below 0 V in damp environments, v the connection of one side of the PELV circuit, or one point of the source, to the equipotential protection circuit associated with higher voltages, v the use of switchgear and control gear on which measures have been taken to ensure "safety separation" between power circuits and control circuits. b A safety separation is necessary between power circuits and control circuits in PELV circuits. Its aim is to prevent the appearance of dangerous voltages in c 2 V safety circuits. b The reference standards involved are: v IEC 68-2-6 and EN 68-2-6 (safety transformers), v IEC 66 (coordination of isolation). Telemecanique power supplies meet these requirements. b Moreover, to ensure that these products will operate correctly in relation to the demands of their reinforced isolation, it is recommended that they be mounted and wired as indicated below: v they should be placed on an earthed mounting plate or rail, v they should be connected using flexible cables, with a maximum of two wires per connection, and tightened to the nominal torque, v conductors of the correct insulation class must be used. b If the d.c. circuit is not connected to an equipotential protection conductor, an earth leakage detector will indicate any accidental earth faults (please consult your Regional Sales Office). Operating voltage b The permissible tolerances for the operating voltage are listed in publications IEC -2 and DIN 920. b For nominal voltage Un = c 2 V, the extreme operating values are from - % to + 20 % of Un, whatever the supply fluctuations in the range -0 % to + 6 % (defined by standard IEC 8) and load variations in the range 0-00 % of In. All Telemecanique c 2 V power supplies are designed to provide a voltage within this range. b It may be necessary to use a voltage measurement relay to detect when the normal voltage limits are being surpassed and to deal with the consequences of this (please consult your Regional Sales Office). 8 8.2 Characteristics : pages 8/26 to 8/29 References : page 8/ Dimensions : page 8/2 Schemes : page 8/ 8/2

Selection 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies Selection of power supplies The characteristics to be taken into account when selecting a power supply are: - the required output voltage and current, - the mains voltage available in the installation. An initial selection can be made using the table opposite. This may however result in several products being selected as suitable. Other selection criteria must therefore be taken into account. b The quality of the mains power supply The Phaseo range is the solution because it guarantees precision to % of the output voltage, whatever the load current and the input voltage. In addition, the wide input voltage range of Phaseo power supplies allows them to be connected to all mains supplies within the nominal range, without any adjustment. The Phaseo RP family can also be connected to c 0 and 220 V emergency supplies. b Harmonic pollution (power factor) The current drawn by a power supply is not sinusoidal. This leads to the existence of harmonic currents which pollute the mains supply. European standard EN 6000--2 limits the harmonic currents produced by power supplies. This standard covers all devices between 7 W and 000 W, drawing up to 6 A per phase, and connected directly to the public mains power supply. Devices connected downstream of a private, low voltage general transformer are therefore excluded. Regulated switch mode supplies always produce harmonic currents; a filter circuit (Power Factor Correction or PFC) must therefore be added to comply with standard EN 6000--2. Phaseo ABL-7RP and ABL-7UPS power supplies conform to standard EN 6000--2 and can therefore be connected directly to public mains power supplies. b Electromagnetic compatibility Levels of conducted and radiated emissions are defined in standards EN 0 and EN 022. The majority of products in the Phaseo range have class B certification and can be used without any restrictions due to their low emissions. ABL-7CEM200 and ABL-7CEM2006 power supplies have class A certification. It is recommended that they should not be used in the following equipment: trains, aircraft, nuclear applications and in any environment where malfunctioning could cause serious injuries or lead to death. These products are designed for use in industrial equipment and are not suitable for use in residential environments. 8 8.2 b Behaviour in the event of short-circuits Phaseo power supplies are equipped with an electronic protection device. This protection device resets itself automatically on elimination of the fault (around second for ABL-7 RE/RP, around seconds for ABL-7 UE/UP/REQ) which avoids having to take any action or change a fuse. In addition, the Phaseo ABL-7RP/U/REQ ranges allow the user to select the reset mode in the event of a fault: - in the "AUTO" position, resetting is automatic, - in the "MANU" position, resetting occurs after elimination of the fault and after switching the mains power off and back on. This feature allows Phaseo ABL-7RP/U/REQ power supplies to be used in installations where the risks associated with untimely restarting are significant. b Behaviour in the event of phase failure In the event of failure of one phase, all Phaseo -phase power supplies switch to relaxation mode for as long as the input voltage is < 0 V. For operation on higher voltages (e.g. 80 V), use of an upstream GV2 type residual current protection device is recommended. b Selection of reset mode v on the ABL-7RP family of products: By microswitch on the front panel of the product. v on the ABL-7U/REQ family of products: By jumper on the front panel. Warning: selection of the function is only possible after the mains power supply has been switched off for at least minutes. The jumper is moved using a pair of insulated, flat-nose pliers. Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/2 Characteristics : pages 8/26 to 8/29 References : page 8/ Dimensions : page 8/2 Schemes : page 8/ 8/2

Selection (continued) 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies Selection according to application characteristics Type of mains supply Single-phase 2-phase -phase Rated mains supply voltage Permissible variation a 00 20 V 0/60 Hz c 0 220 V () Wide range 8 26 V, 7 6 Hz c 00...20 V (), c 0...70 V (2) 00 20 V 0/60 Hz Wide range 8 26 V 7 6 Hz 2 x 80 V 0/60 Hz 0 60 V 7 6 Hz x 80 V 0/60 Hz 0 60 V 7 6 Hz x00 20V 0/60 Hz Wide range 60 0 V 7 6 Hz x 80 20 V 0/60 Hz Wide range 0 0 V 7 6 Hz Output voltage 2V 8V 2V 2V 2V 2V 2V 2V Output current 0. A ABL- 7CEM200 0.6 A ABL- 7CEM2006.2 A ABL- 7CEM202 2 A ABL- 7RE202 2. A ABL- 7RP80 A ABL- ABL- 7RP20 7RE20 A ABL- ABL- ABL- ABL- ABL- 7RP20 7RP20 7RE20 7REQ200 7UES200 0 A ABL- ABL- ABL- ABL- ABL- 7RP20 7RE20 7REQ200 7UEQ200 7UPS200 20 A ABL- ABL- 7UEQ2200 7UPS2200 0 A ABL- 7UPS200 Conforming to EN 6000--2 Yes (not applicable for ABL-7CEM) No No No No Yes Integrated automatic protection Yes Automatic or manual restart on ABL-7RP Automatic restart only on ABL-7CEM Yes Automatic restart Yes Automatic or manual restart () Values for ABL-7RP power supplies, not indicated on the product. (2) Values for ABL-7CEM power supplies, not indicated on the product. 8 8.2 Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/2 Characteristics : pages 8/26 to 8/29 References : page 8/ Dimensions : page 8/2 Schemes : page 8/ 8/2

Characteristics 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies 8 8.2 Technical characteristics Type of power supply ABL-7CEM ABL-7RE ABL-7RP Product certifications culus, TÜV UL,CSA,TÜV,CTick Conforming to standards UL 08 UL 08, CSA 22.2 n 90 Safety IEC/EN 6090, FELV IEC/EN 696--2, FELV EMC EN 008-2, EN 0082-2 EN 008-, IEC 6000-6-2 (EN 0082-2) Low frequency harmonic currents EN 6000--2 Input circuit LED indication Orange LED Orange LED Input voltages Rated values V a 00 20, c 0 220 compatible () a 00 20 Permissible values V a 8 26, a 8 26 single-phase c 0 70 compatible () Permissible frequencies Hz 7 6 Efficiency at nominal load > 70% > 8% Output circuit Current consumption Ue = 20 V A 0. (7 W)/0.2 ( W)/0. (0 W) Ue = 00 V A 0.7 (7 W)/0. ( W)/0.68 (0 W) 0.6 (8 W)/0.8 (72 W).2 (20 W)/2. (20 W).2 (8 W)/.6 (72 W).9 (20 W)/.6 (20 W) a 00 20, c 0 220 compatible () a 8 26, c 00 20 compatible () 0. (72 W)/0.6 (20 W). (20W) 0.8 (72 W)/ (20 W)/2.8 (20 W) Current at switch-on A <0 <0 Power factor 0. approx. 0.6 approx. 0.98 approx. LED indication Green LED Green LED Green LED Nominal output voltage (U out) V c 2 2, 2 and 8 Nominal output current A 0./0.6/.2 2///0 2.//0 Precision Output voltage Adjustable from 90 to 0 % Adjustable from 00 to 20 % Line and load regulation 2%max ±% Residual ripple - interference mv < 200 (peak-peak) Micro-breaks Holding time at I max and Ve min ms >20 >0 >20 Temporary overloads Permissible inrush current (U out >9V) See curves page 8/29 Protection Short-circuit Permanent/automatic restart Permanent/automatic restart Overload.0 In. In Overvoltage U>.2 Tripping if U >. Un Undervoltage Tripping if U < 0.8 Un Operating and environmental characteristics Permanent/automatic restart or restart after switching off mains power Connections Input mm 2 2 x 2. + earth Output mm 2 2x2. 2 x 2. + earth, multiple output, depending on model Ambient conditions Storage temperature C -2 + 70 Operating temperature C - 0 + 60 (derating as 0 + 60 (derating as from 0 C, mounted vertically) from 0 C, mounted vertically) Max. relative humidity 20 90 % 9 % without condensation or dripping water Degree of protection IP 20 conforming to IEC 29 Vibrations Conforming to IEC 6-2 Operating position Vertical and horizontal Vertical (see derating curve, page 8/28) MTBF at 0 > 00 000 h Connections Series Possible (see page 8/29) Parallel No Possible (max. temperature 0 C) Dielectric strength Input/output 000 V/0 and 60 Hz min 000 V/0 and 60 Hz min Input/earth 2000 V/0 and 60 Hz min 000 V/0 and 60 Hz min Output/earth (and output/output) 00V/0and60Hzmin 00V/0and60Hzmin Input fuse incorporated Yes (not interchangeable) Disturbance EN 008-2 (generic) EN 008- Conducted EN 0/EN 022 class A EN 0/EN 022 class B (7 and W) EN 0/ EN 022 class B (0W) Radiated EN 0/EN 022 class B Immunity IEC 6000-6-2 (generic) Electrostatic discharge EN 6000--2 ( kv contact/8 kv air) Electromagnetic EN 6000-- level (0 V/m) Conducted interference EN 6000-- level (2 kv), EN 6000--, EN 6000--6 level, EN 6000--8 level Mains interference EN 000-- (voltage drops and cuts) () Compatible input voltage, not indicated on the product. Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/2 References : page 8/ Dimensions : page 8/2 Schemes : page 8/ 8/26

Characteristics (continued) 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies Technical characteristics Type of power supply ABL-7REQ2p ABL-7UEQ2p ABL-7UES2p ABL-7UPS2p Product certifications culus, c us Conforming to standards Safety EN 6090, FELV EMC EN 008-, EN 0082-2 Low frequency harmonic currents EN 6000--2 Input circuit LED indication Input voltages Rated values V a 2 x 80 a x 80 a x 00 20 a x 00 20 Permissible values V a 2 x 0 60 a x 0 60 a x 60 0 a x 60 0 Permissible frequencies Hz 0 60 Efficiency at nominal load >8% >90% Current consumption Ue = 00 V A 0.6 (20 W)/.2 (20 W) 0.7 (20 W)/. (80 W) 0.7 (20 W)/.2 (80 W)/.7 (960 W) Current at switch-on A < Power factor 0.6 0. 0.7 0.7/0.9 (960 W) 2-phase operating mode V Relaxation if input voltage < a 0 Output circuit LED indication Green LED Nominal output voltage (U out) V c 2 Nominal output current A /0 0/20 0/20/0 Precision Output voltage Adjustable from 00 to 6% Line and load regulation %max Residual ripple - interference mv < 200 (peak-peak) Micro-breaks Holding time for I max and Ve min ms 0 Between 8 and Temporary overloads Permissible inrush current (U out >9V) See curves, page 8/29 Protection Short-circuit Permanent/automatic or normal restart Overload.20 In < 0 ms Overvoltage V 28. typical Undervoltage V 9 typical Operating and environmental characteristics Connections Input mm 2 2 x. 2. mm 2 +earth Output mm 2 x. 2. mm 2 x 6mm 2 x. 2. mm 2 x. 2. mm 2 +earth (20 W) x 6mm 2 + earth (80 W) x 0mm 2 + earth (960 W) Ambient conditions Storage temperature C - 2 + 70 Operating temperature C 0 C + 60 C Maximum relative humidity 0 90 % Degree of protection IP 20 or IP XXB Vibrations Conforming to IEC 6-2 Operating position Vertical MTBF >00000h Connections Series Possible Parallel Seepage8/29 Dielectric Input/output 70 V/0 and 60 Hz min strength Input/earth 00 V/0 and 60 Hz min Output/earth (and output/output) 00V/0and60Hzmin Input fuse incorporated No Disturbance Conducted/radiated EN 0/EN 022 - class B Immunity Electrostatic discharge EN 6000--2 ( kv contact/8 kv air) Electromagnetic EN 6000-- level (0 V/m) Conducted interference EN 6000-- level (2 kv), EN 6000--, EN 6000--6 level, EN 6000--8 level (for ABL-7RE/RP) Mains interference EN 6000-- (voltage drops and cuts) 8 8.2 Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/2 References : page 8/ Dimensions : page 8/2 Schemes : page 8/ 8/27

Output characteristics 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies Derating The ambient temperature is a determining factor which limits the power that an electronic power supply can deliver continuously. If the temperature around the electronic components is too high, their life will be significantly reduced. Conversely, a power supply can deliver more than its nominal power if the ambient temperature remains largely below the rated operating temperature. The rated ambient temperature for Phaseo power supplies is 0 C. Above this, derating is necessary up to a maximum temperature of 60 C. The graph below shows the power (in relation to the nominal power) which the power supply can deliver continuously, according to the ambient temperature. P/Pn (%) 0 20 00 80 2 60 0 0 20 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 60 70 Maximum operating temperature ( C) ABL-7RE, ABL-7RP, ABL-7U mounted vertically 2 ABL-7CEM mounted vertically ABL-7CEM mounted horizontally Derating should be considered in extreme operating conditions: - intensive operation (output current permanently close to the nominal current, combined with a high ambient temperature), - output voltage set above 2 V (to compensate for line voltage drops, for example), - parallel connection to increase the total power. General rules to be complied with 8 Intensive operation Rise in output voltage Parallel connection to increase the power (except ABL-7CEM) See derating on above graph. Example for ABL-7RE: - without derating, from 0 C to 0 C, - derating of nominal current by 2%, per additional C, up to 60 C. The nominal power is fixed. Increasing the output voltage means that the current delivered must be reduced The total power is equal to the sum of the power supplies used, but the maximum ambient temperature for operation is 0 C. To improve heat dissipation, the power supplies must not be in contact with each other 8.2 In all cases, there must be adequate convection round the products to ensure easier cooling. There must be a clear space of 0 mm above and below Phaseo power supplies and of mm at the sides. Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/2 References : page 8/ Dimensions : page 8/2 Schemes : page 8/ 8/28

Output characteristics (continued) 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies Load limit ABL-7CEM2ppp 00 % U out (%) ABL-7RE2pp/ABL-7RPpppp ABL-7Upp2pp/ABL-7REQpppp U out 0 % 9 V 2 Temporary overloads ABL-7CEM T (ms) I out 00 I out:(0...00%) 90 80 70 60 0 0 0 20 0 0 ABL-7U T (ms) 800,8 2 2,2 2, 2,6 x In In I out,2 x In, x In,2 x In I out ABL-7RE2pp/ABL-7RPpppp 2 ABL-7Upp2pp/ABL-7REQpppp ABL-7RE/ABL-7RP T (ms) 20 8 6 2 0 0 I out I out:(0...00%),2,,,,6,7,8 x In 700 600 00 00 00 20 200 00 I out=0% I out=0% I out=80% I out=00% Example: For an ABL-7UPS2ppp power supply with 0 % loading. (I out = 0 %), this power supply can absorb a current peak of.6 x In for 20 ms with an output voltage u 9 V. 0,2,,,,6,7,8 x In Series or parallel connection Series connection Parallel connection 8 ABL 7 ABL 7 ABL 7 ABL 7 + + + + () () 2xc 2 V / I out Family Series Parallel ABL-7CEM 2 products max () No ABL-7RE/RP 2 products max 2 products max ABL-7U/REQ 2 products max 2 products max () 2 Shottky diodes 2 A/00 V on ABL-7CEM only. c 2 V / 2 x I out 8.2 Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/2 References : page 8/ Dimensions : page 8/2 Schemes : page 8/ 8/29

Selection 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies Upstream protection ABL-7CEM, ABL-7RE and ABL-7RP power supplies: protection of the power supply line Type of mains supply a V single-phase a 20 V single-phase Type of protection Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker gg fuse Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker gg fuse ABL-7CEM200 GB2-CD06 28 MG26 () ABL-7CEM2006 GB2-CD07 28 MG27 () ABL-7CEM202 GB2-CD07 28 MG27 () GB2 C60N GB2 C60N 2A GB2-CD07 28 MG27 () 2A GB2-CD08 28 MG28 () 2A GB2-CD08 28 MG28 () ABL-7RE202 GB2-pB07 MG27 () 2A GB2-DB06 MG26 () 2 A 2A 2A 2A ABL-7RE20 GB2-pB07 MG27 () 2 A GB2-DB06 MG26 () 2 A ABL-7RE20 GB2-pB08 MG28 () A GB2-DB07 MG7 () 2 A ABL-7RE20 GB2-pB2 MG7 () 6 A GB2-DB08 MG28 () A ABL-7RP20 GB2-pB07 MG27 () 2 A GB2-DB07 MG26 () 2 A ABL-7RP20 GB2-pB07 MG27 () 2 A GB2-DB07 MG26 () 2 A ABL-7RP20 GB2-pB09 MG29 () A GB2-DB07 MG26 () 2 A ABL-7RP80 GB2-pB07 MG27 () 2 A GB2-DB07 MG26 () 2 A ABL-7REQ power supplies: protection of the power supply line Type of mains supply a 00 V 2-phase Type of protection Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker gg fuse 2-pole GB2-DBpp C60N ABL-7REQ200 DB07 200 0 A ABL-7REQ200 DB08 200 0 A ABL-7UEQ, ABL-7UES and ABL-7UPS power supplies: protection of the power supply line Type of mains supply a 00 80 V -phase Type of protection Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker gg fuse 2-pole GV2-MEpp C60N ABL-7UEQ200 GV2-ME08 () 222 A ABL-7UEQ2200 GV2-ME08 () 22 6A ABL-7UES200 GV2-ME08 () 220 2A ABL-7UPS200 GV2-ME08 () 220 2A 8 ABL-7UPS2200 GV2-ME08 () 22 A ABL-7UPS200 GV2-ME08 () 222 A () UL certified circuit-breaker. 8.2 Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/2 References : page 8/ Dimensions : page 8/2 Schemes : page 8/ 8/0

References 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies 08700--M ABL 7CEM single-phase regulated switch mode power supplies Mains input voltage 7...6 Hz Output voltage Nominal power Nominal current Autoprotect reset Conforming Reference to standard EN 6000--2 Weight V c V W A kg a 00 20 single-phase wide range c 0 220 () 2 7 0. auto no ABL-7CEM200 0.0 0.6 auto no ABL-7CEM2006 0.80 ABL-7CEM 0.2 auto no ABL-7CEM202 0.220 ABL-7RE single-phase regulated switch mode power supplies Mains input voltage 7...6 Hz Output voltage Nominal power Nominal current Autoprotect reset Conforming Reference to standard EN 6000--2 Weight V c V W A kg 67--M a 00 20 single-phase wide range 2 8 2 auto no ABL-7RE202 0.20 72 auto no ABL-7RE20 0.20 20 auto no ABL-7RE20.000 ABL-7RE20 ABL-7RP20 ABL-7RP80 20 0 auto no ABL-7RE20 2.200 ABL-7RP single-phase regulated switch mode power supplies Mains input voltage 7...6 Hz Output voltage Nominal power Nominal current Autoprotect reset Conforming Reference to standard EN 6000--2 Weight V c V W A kg a 00...20 single-phase wide range c 0...220 () 2 60 auto/man yes ABL-7RP20.000 2 72 auto/man yes ABL-7RP20 0.20 20 auto/man yes ABL-7RP20.000 20 0 auto/man yes ABL-7RP20 2.200 089 8 2. auto/man yes ABL-7RP80.000 ABL-7REQ 2-phase regulated switch mode power supplies Mains input voltage 7...6 Hz Output voltage Nominal power Nominal current Autoprotect reset Conforming Reference to standard EN 6000--2 Weight V c V W A kg 0887-2-M ABL-7REQ a 80 2 20 auto/man no ABL-7REQ200 0.80 20 0 auto/man no ABL-7REQ200.200 ABL-7U -phase regulated switch mode power supplies Mains input voltage 7...6 Hz Output voltage Nominal power Nominal current Autoprotect reset Conforming Reference to standard EN 6000--2 Weight V c V W A kg 8 a x80 2 20 0 auto/man no ABL-7UEQ200.200 80 20 auto/man no ABL-7UEQ2200 2.00 ABL-7UPS a x00 20 2 20 auto/man no ABL-7UES200.00 20 0 auto/man yes ABL-7UPS200.00 80 20 auto/man yes ABL-7UPS2200 2.00 8.2 960 0 auto/man yes ABL-7UPS200.00 () Compatible input voltage, not indicated on the product. Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/2 Characteristics : pages 8/26 to 8/29 Dimensions : page 8/2 Schemes : page 8/ 8/

Dimensions 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies ABL-7RE2pp/ABL-7RPpppp Commonsideview Mounting on and 7 mm rails ABL-7RE202/20 ABL-7RP20 ABL-7RE20 ABL-7RP20/20/80 ABL-7RE20 ABL-7RP20 20 20 20 27 ABL-7CEM2ppp ABL-7CEM200 ABL-7CEM2006/ ABL-7CEM202 Common front view ABL-7REQ2ppp/ABL-7UEQ200/ABL-7UES200/ ABL-7UPS200 20 20 70 Panel mounting () 60 (62,) 7 27 9 a P 6 68 (8,) ()2xMor2xØ. ABL-7UEQ2200 ABL- P mm a mm 7REQ200 0 7REQ200 7UEQ200 7UES200 7 7UPS200 7 ABL-7UPS2200 60 70 97 209 8 20 6 20 8 8 ABL-7UPS200 8 8.2 20 22 27 06 Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/2 Characteristics : pages 8/26 to 8/29 References : page 8/ Schemes : page 8/ 8/2

Schemes 8 Power supplies 8 Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies ABL-7RE202/20 ABL-7RE20 ABL-7RE20 + L N + N L + + N L + + ABL-7RP20 ABL-7RP20/20/80 ABL-7RP20 N/ + L/+ Filter N/ L/+ + Filter + N/ + L/+ Filter + + ABL-7CEM2ppp + NC N L ABL-7REQ2ppp ABL-7UEppppp ABL-7UPppppp + + + + + L N L L2 L L L2 L 8 8.2 Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/2 Characteristics : pages 8/26 to 8/29 References : page 8/ Schemes : page 8/2 8/

9 9/0

Contents 9 -Services 9 Technical information b Documentation... page9/2 b Power supply module selection document... page9/ b Standards and certifications... page9/6 b Environment conditions... page9/7 b Optional conformal coating... page9/9 b Automation product certifications... page9/0 b Community regulations... page9/ Schneider Electric worldwide b Addresses... page9/2 Index b Product reference index... page9/8 9 9/

References platform 0 Documentation An electronic documentation (hardware and software) in languages (English, French, German and Spanish) is included in the software package (). Each software includes online contextual help in languages (2). These electronic documentation are added to following paper documentation: b B7 format multilingual data sheet (9 x 27 mm), supplied with each application-specific module and communication module. b B7 format mini-book (9 x 27 mm) for hardware installation of processors, slot-plcs, racks and power supplies, to be ordered separately. b Kit of manuals (78 x 26 mm) for hardware installation of: v Premium processors and Atrium slot-plcs, v discrete I/O modules, v analog I/O modules, v communication overview, v grounding and cabling system installation. b Unity Pro quick start manual. () Only with Unity Pro software. (2) English, French, German, Spanish and Italian for PL7 software. Unity documentation manuals Description Use Reference Weight kg Premium et Atrium reference manual: bases, discrete/analog modules, communication, grounding and cabling system installation To be ordered separately UNY USE 200 V20E Minibook: hardware installation of processors, slot-plcs, racks and power supplies languages (English, French, German, Spanish and Italian) Sold in lots of 0 To be ordered separately UNY USE 2090 V0M UnityProquickstart manual To be ordered separately UNY USE 000 V20E PL7 documentation manuals Description Use Reference Weight kg Premium et Atrium reference manual: bases, discrete/analog modules, communication To be ordered separately TSX DM 7 E Minibook: hardware installation of processors, slot-plcs, racks and power supplies languages (English, French, German, Spanish and Italian) Sold in lots of 0 To be ordered separately UNY USE 2090 V0M All PL7 software installation software: reference, application-specific functions, communication, converters, runtime screen ans diagnostics To be ordered separately TLX DOC PL7 E 9 Documentation on CD-Rom Description Use Reference Weight kg Full documentation, languages (English, French, UNY USE 909 CDM hardware (Atrium, Premium German and Spanish) and Quantum) and Unity To be ordered separately software 9/2

References (continued) platform 0 Documentation Bus/network documentation manuals (78 x 26 mm) Grounding and cabling system installation guide Included in Premium and Atrium reference manual UNY USE 200 V20E UNY USE 000 VE Ethernet network (0BASE-) reference manual CANopen bus module Installation manual X-Way communication reference manual To be ordered separately TSX DR ETH E 0,20 To be ordered separately TSX DM CPP 00E To be ordered separately TSX DR NET E 0,20 Fipio bus reference manual To be ordered separately TSX DR FIP E 0,20 Fipway network installation and setup Fipio/Fipway optic fibre transceiver setup Modbus Plus network installation guide Modbus serial link user s manual Uni-Telway serial link installation and setup Jnet serial link user s manual (English and French) Profibus DP module installation manual To be ordered separately TSX DG FPW E 0,0 To be ordered separately TSX DM OZD 0E 0,0 To be ordered separately 890 USE 00 00 0,00 To be ordered separately TSX DG MDB E 0,00 To be ordered separately TSX DG UTW E 0,060 To be ordered separately TSX DG JNT M 0,60 To be ordered separately TSX DM PBY 00E 0,0 INTERBUS modules installation manual To be ordered separately TSX DM IBY 00E 0,0 9 9/

TSX PSY power supply module selection document (specimen to be photocopied) platform 9 The power required to supply each TSX RKY rack depends on the type and number of modules installed. It is therefore necessary to create a power consumption table for each rack in order to define the most suitable TSX PSY power supply module for each rack. The table below can be used to calculate the consumption on the three different voltages to be supplied (c V,c 2 V, c 2 VR). Procedure : b Check and choose a power supply module corresponding to the power supplies available for the voltages. b Check that the total power absorbed on these three voltages does not exceed the overall power of the power supply module. b Values to be entered according to the type of Premium PLC configuration. Reference Format Number Consumption in ma () Rack n S : standard Voltage c V Voltagec 2 VR Voltage c 2 V D : double Module Total Module Total Module Total Unity processors with memory extension card PL7 processors with memory extension card TSX P7 Cp 02M Configuration 90 TSX P7 02M S 90 TSX P7 0M S 80 TSX P7 6M D 60 TSX P7 M S 90 TSX P7 20M D 80 TSX P7 26M D 60 TSX P7 2M D 90 TSX P7 0M D 80 TSX P7 6M D 900 TSX P7 M D 80 TSX P7 M D 680 TSX P7 6M D 880 TSX P7 M D 680 TSX P7 6M D 880 TSX P7 0M S 0 TSX P7 M S 80 TSX P7 20M D 70 TSX P7 262M D 0 TSX P7 2M D 820 TSX P7 282M D 80 TSX P7 0M D 000 TSX P7 62M D 60 TSX P7 M D 060 TSX P7 M D 080 TSX P7 82M D 0 9 Discrete I/O TSX DEY 08D2 S 80 TSX DEY 6A2 S 80 TSX DEY 6A S 80 TSX DEY 6A S 80 TSX DEY 6A S 80 TSX DEY 6D2 S 80 TSX DEY 6D S 80 TSX DEY 6FK S 20 7 TSX DEY 2D2K S 60 TSX DEY 2DK S 0 27 TSX DEY 6D2K S TSX DSY 08RD S 80 TSX DSY 08R S 70 TSX DSY 08RA S 80 TSX DSY 08S S 2 TSX DSY 08T2 S TSY DSY 08T22 S TSX DSY 08T S TSX DSY 6R S 80 TSX DSY 6S S 220 TSX DSY 6S S 220 TSX DSY 6T2 S 80 TSX DSY 6T S 80 TSX DSY 2T2K S 0 TSX DSY 6T2K S TSX DMY 28FK S 00 7 TSX DMY 28RFK S 00 7 Bus X remote TSX REY 200 S 00 Analogue I/O TSX AEY S 660 TSX AEY 20 S 00 TSX AEY 800 S 270 TSX AEY 80 S 7 TSX AEY 600 S 270 TSX AEY 6 S 00 TSX ASY 0 S 900 TSX ASY 800 (2) S 200 00 Safety TSX PAY 262 S 0 200 TSX PAY 282 S 0 200 Total (cary ovet to page 9/) Current (ma) 9/

TSX PSY power supply module selection document (specimen to be photocopied) platform 9 Reference Format Number Consumption n ma () Rack n S : standard Voltage c V Voltage c 2 VR Voltage c 2 V D : double Module Total Module Total Module Total Carried forward Counting, motion, control and weighing TSX CTY 2A S 280 0 TSX CTY A S 0 6 TSX CTY 2C S 80 TSX CCY 28 S 660 TSX CAY 2 S 00 TSX CAY D 00 0 TSX CAY 22 S 00 TSX CAY 2 D 00 0 TSX CAY D 00 0 TSX CFY S 0 0 TSX CFY 2 S 60 00 TSX CSY 8/6 D 800 TSX ISP Y0 S 0 Communication TSX ETY 0 () S 800 TSX ETY 0 () S 200 TSX ETY 0 WS () S 800 TSX ETY 0 WS () S 200 TSX ETY 0/0 S 60 TSX IBY 00 S 00 TSX PBY 00 S 00 TSX SAY 00 S 0 TSX SAY 000 S 00 TSX SCY 60 S 0 TSX SCY 260 S 0 TSX SCP 0 TSX SCP 2 20 TSX SCP 0 TSX FPP 0 0 TSX FPP 20 0 TSX JNP 2 20 TSX JNP 0 TSX MBP 00 220 TSX CPP 0 60 TSX P ACC 0 0 Terminal T FTX 7 ADJ 02 0 Consumption per voltage Total current (ma) xv x2vr x2v Power (mw) + + = Total of the powers Power available in mw Overall Choice of power supply TSX PSY 60 S c 2 V non isolated 000 000 0 000 TSX PSY 2600 S a 00 20 V 2 000 000 2 000 26 000 TSX PSY 60 D c 2 V non isolated 000 9 000 0 000 TSX PSY 20 D c 2 8 V isolated 000 9 000 0 000 TSX PSY 00 D a 00 20 V 000 9 000 9 000 0 000 a 200 20 V TSX PSY 800 D a 00 20 V a 200 20 V 7 000 8 000 77 000 () () Typical value given for 00% of inputs or outputs at state. (2) If using an external c 2 V sensor power supply, the consumption on the c 2 V voltage should not be included. () Without remote power supply (RJ ). () With remote power supply (AUI). () 77,000 mw at 60 C, 8,000 mw at C or 00,000 mw at C when using TSX FAN fan modules. 9 9/

Standards and certifications platform 0 Standards, certifications and environment conditions Standards and certifications Modicon Premium and Atrium PLCs have been developed to conform to the principal national and international standards concerning electronic equipment for industrial automation systems. b Requirements specific to programmable controllers: functional characteristics, immunity, resistance, safety, etc.: IEC 6-2, CSA 22.2 N 2, UL 08. b Merchant navy requirements of the main international bodies: ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LR, RINA, RMRS, etc. b Compliance with European Directives: v Low Voltage: 7/2/EEC amendment 9/68/EEC, v Electromagnetic Compatibility: 89/6/EEC amendments 92//EEC and 9/68/EEC. b Electrical qualities and self-extinguishing capacity of insulating materials: UL 76C, UL 9. b Hazardous areas calssification: CSA 22.2 No. 2, Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D. Characteristics Service conditions and recommendations relating to environment Temperature Operation C 0...+ 60 (to IEC 6-2, +...+ ) () 0...+ 70 with TSX FAN fan modules () Storage C -2...+ 70 (according to IEC 6-2) Relative humidity Operation % 0 9 without condensation Storage % 9 without condensation (according to IEC 6-2) Altitude m 0 2000 Supply voltage TSX PSY p60 TSX PSY 20 TSX PSY 2600 TSX PSY p00 Nominal voltage V c 2 c 8 a 00...20 a 00...20 a 200...20 Limit voltages c 9..0 c 9...60 a 90...26 a 0/90...26 Nominal frequencies Hz 0/60 0/60 Limit frequencies Hz 7/6 7/6 Protective treatment of Modicon Premium PLCs Premium/Atrium PLCs meet the requirements of "TC" treatment (Treatment for all Climates). For installations in industrial production workshops or environments corresponding to "TH" treatment (treatment for hot and humid environments), Premium PLCs must be embedded in envelopes with a minimum IP protection, in compliance with IEC 6066 and NF C 20 00. Premium/Atrium PLCs themselves offer protection to IP 20 level (). They can therefore be installed without an envelope in reserved-access areas which do not exceed pollution level 2 (control room with no dust-producing machine or activity). The pollution level 2 does not take account of more severe environmental conditions: air pollution by dust, smoke, corrosive or radioactive particles, vapours or salts, attack by fungi, insects,... If the control system needs to operate in a corrosive environment, some of then Premium modules and racks can be ordered with a conformal applied to the cover and bezel, see page 9/9. 9 () TSX P7 02/0/M and TSX P7 /6//6M: 0...+ 7 C (or 0...67 )C with TSX FAN fan modules) when some of then I/O modules are insert adjacent to above processors. (2) In the case where a position is not occupied by a module, a TSX RKA 02 protection cover must be installed. 9/6

Environment tests platform 0 Standards, certifications and environment conditions Environment tests Name of test Standards Levels Immunity to LF interference (e) () Voltage and frequency variation IEC/EN 6-2 0.8 Un/0.9 Fn for 0 minutes;. Un/.0 Fn for 0 minutes; 0.8 Un/0.9 Fn for seconds;.2 Un/. Fn for seconds Direct voltage variation IEC/EN 6-2 0.8 Un...2 Un for 0 minutes with % ripple (peak values) Harmonic IEC/EN 6-2 0 % Un; 0 / min...80 / min Short momentary interrupt IEC/EN 6-2 0 ms with a supply; ms with c supply Voltage shut-down/start-up IEC/EN 6-2 Un-0-Un; Un for 60 s; cycles separated by 0 s Un-0-Un; Un for s; cycles separated by to s Un-0.9-Udl; Un for 60 s; cycles separated by to s Where: Un: nominal voltage Fn: nominal frequency Udl: detection level when powered Name of test Standards Levels Immunity to HF interference. (e) () Damped oscillatory wave IEC 6000--2 a / c supply: kv in serial mode Discrete I/O u 2V:kVinserialmode Electrical fast transient bursts IEC 6000-- a / c supply: 2 kv in wire/common mode Discrete I/O > 8V: 2 kv in common mode; other ports: kv in common mode Surge IEC 6000-- a / csupply: 2 kv in wire mode/ kv in serial mode; Discrete I/O a: 2 kv in wire mode/ kv in serial mode; Discrete I/O c: 2 kv in wire mode/0. kv in serial mode; shielded cable: kv in common mode Electrostatic discharges IEC 6000--2 6 kv contact, 8 kv air Radiated electromagnetic field IEC 6000-- 0 V/m; 80 MHz...2 GHz Sinusoidal modulation amplitude 80 %/ khz Conducted interference induced by radiated field IEC 6000--6 0 V/0, MHz...80 MHz Sinusoidal modulation amplitude 80%/ khz Electromagnetic emissions (e) () (2) Interference voltage IEC 6000-6- Class A 0 khz...00 khz quasi-peak 79 db (µv); average 66 db (µv) 00 khz...0 MHz quasi-peak 7 db (µv); average 60 db (µv) Interference field () IEC 6000-6- Class A, 0 m measurement 0 MHz...20 MHz quasi-peak 0 db (µv); 20 MHz... GHz quasi-peak 7 db (µv) Immunity to climatic variations Dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bd 60 C for 6 hours (D.O); 0 C for 6 hours (D.C) Cold IEC 60068-2- Ad 0 C for 6 hours Continuous humid heat IEC 60068-2- Ca 60 C with 9 % relative humidity/96 hours (D.O); 0 C with 9...9 % relative humidity/96 hours (D.C); Cyclical humid heat IEC 60068-2- Db [ C (D.O)/0 C (D.O)] - 2 C with 9...9 % relative humidity; 2 cycles: 2 hours/2 hours Cyclical temperature variations IEC 60068-2- Nb 0 C...60 C/ cycles: 6 hours/6 hours (D.O) 0 C...0 C/ cycles: 6 hours/6 hours (D.C) Temperature Rise IEC 6-2/UL 08 CSA 22-2 No.2 Ambient temperature: 60 C Withstand to climatic variations Dry heat (power off) IEC 60068-2-2 Bb 70 C for 96 hours Cold (power off) IEC 60068-2- Ab -2 C for 96 hours Humid heat (power off) IEC 60068-2-0 db 60 C-2 C with 9...9 % relative humidity; 2 cycles: 2 hours/2 hours Heat shocks when not operational IEC 60068-2- Na - 2 C...70 C; 2 cycles: hours/ hours D.O:DeviceOpen(devicetobeembeddedinanenvelope D.C: Device Closed (device can be installed without envelope), see () page 9/6 (e): tests required by European directives e. and based on IEC / EN 6-2 standards. () Devices mustbe installed and wired in compliance with the instructions provided in the UNY USE 000 VE manual Grounding and cabling system intallation guide. (2) These tests are performed without a cabinet, with devices fixedonametalgridand wired as per the recommendations in the industrial UNY USE 000 VE manual Grounding and cabling system intallation guide. () In the case where the limits of electromagnetic emissions between 0 MHz and GHz must be supervised, it is recommended to use the TSX RKY 6EX/8EX racks instead of the TSX RKY 6/8 racks. 9 9/7

Environment tests (continued) platform 0 Standards, certifications and environment conditions Environment tests Name of test Standards Levels Immunity to mechanical constraints Sinusoidal vibrations IEC 60068-2-6 Fc Hz...00 Hz/ mm amplitude/0.7 g; endurance: fr/90 min/axis (application coefficient < 0) IEC 60068-2-6 Fc 0...0 Hz/7 µm amplitude/ g; endurance: 0 cycles of octave/min Shocks IEC 60068-2-27 Ea g- ms; shocks/direction/axis Withstand to mechanical constraints Flat freefall IEC 60068-2-2 Ed 0 cm/2 falls Controlled position freefall IEC 60068-2- Ec 0 or 0 cm/2 falls Random freefall, equipment in packaging IEC 60068-2-2 method m/ falls Equipment and personnel safety () Dielectric strength and insulation resistance (e) UL 08/CSA 22-2 No. IEC 6090 Continuity of earth(e) UL 08 CSA 22-2 No.2 Leakage current (e) Protection offered by enclosures (e) Withstand to impacts CSA 22-2 No.2/IEC 6090 <. ma fixed device CSA 22-2 No.2 IP 20 IEC 6090 c 2/8V supply:,00 V rms; a 00/220V supply: 2,000 V rms Discrete I/O u 8 V: 00 V rms; Discrete I/O > 8 V: 2,000 V rms; > 0 MΩ <0,Ω/0 A/2 min CSA 22-2 No.2/IEC 6090 00 g sphere: fall from. m D.O:DeviceOpen(devicetobeembeddedinanenvelope D.C: Device Closed (device can be installed without envelope), see () page 9/6 (e): tests required by European directives e. and based on IEC / EN 6-2 standards. () Devices must be installed and wired in compliance with the instructions provided in the UNY USE 000 VE manual Grounding and cabling system intallation guide. (2) These tests are performed without a cabinet, with devices fixedonametalgridand wired as per the recommendations in the industrial UNY USE 000 VE manual Grounding and cabling system intallation guide. 9 9/8

Optional conformal coating platform 0 Standards, certifications and environment conditions If the control system needs to operate in a corrosive environment, some of then Premium modules and racks can be ordered with a conformal coating applied to components of the product. Conformal coating will extend its life and enhance its environmental performance capabilities. For more information or to order, please contact your Regional Sales Office. Mixed flowing gas (power on) Standard Pollutant Parts/billion Quantum's performance EIA 6-6 level III CI 2 20 (±) Meets the standard NO 2 200 (±0) Exceeds standard (20 parts/billion) H 2 S 00 (±20) Meets standard ISA-S7.0 GX severe CI 2 0 Exceeds standard (20 parts/billion) NO 2 20 Meets standard H 2 S 0 Exceeds standard (00 parts/billion) SO 2 00 Meets standard Humidity (operating) Standard Concentration (%) Quantum's performance IEC-68-2- 9 @ 60 C (0 F) Meets standard Salt mist (non-operating) Standard Concentration (%) Quantum's performance IEC 68-2- (±) Exceeds standard (.7%) Fungus resistance Standard MIL-I-608C Quantum's performance Designed to meet standard Temperature cycling (operating) Standard Cycles Quantum's performance IEC 68-2- 00 @ 0 60 C (2 0 F) Meets standard Dust (non-operating) Standard Pollutant Weight (%) Quantum's performance EIA 6-TP9 (pending) Silica 6 Meets standard Calcite 29 Meets standard Iron oxide 2 Meets standard Alumina 8 Meets standard Gypsum Meets standard Paper fiber Meets standard Cotton fiber Meets standard Polyester fiber 2 Meets standard Carbon black Meets standard Human hair 0. Meets standard Cigarette ash 0. Meets standard 9 9/9

Technical information 9 Automation products certifications In some countries, certification of certain electrical components is enforced by law. A standard conformity certificate is then issued by the official organization. Each certified product must carry approval symbols when enforced. Use on board merchant navy vessels generally requires prior approval (= certification) of an electrical device by certain marine classification authorities. Key Certification body Country CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada C-Tick Australian Communication Authority Australia UL Underwriters Laboratories USA Key Classification authority Country ABS American Bureau of Shipping USA BV Bureau Veritas France DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway GL Germanischer Lloyd Germany GOST Institut de recherche Scientifique Gost Standardt C.I.S., Russia LR Lloyd's Register United-Kingdom RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italiy RMRS Register of Shipping C.I.S. The table below shows the situation as of the 0.07.200 for certifications obtained or pending from organizations for base PLCs. An overview of certificates for Telemecanique products is available on our Internet web site : www.telemecanique.com Product certifications Certifications C-Tick Certified Hazardous Pending certification UL CSA ACA SIMTARS GOST locations Class Div 2 () USA Canada Australia Australia CEI, Russia US Advantys STB ConneXium (2) Lexium MHD/BPH Magelis ipc Magelis XBT-F/FC Magelis XBT-G/H/P/E/HM/PM Momentum Premium PL7 CSA Unity CSA Quantum Concept FM Unity FM TBX Telefast 2 TSX Micro TSX/PMX7à07 Twido (2) Twin Line () Hazardous locations: CSA 22.2 no. 2, certified products are suitable for use in Class I, division 2, groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous locations only. (2) Depending on product, see pages /6 to /0. () culus north-american certification (Canada and US). 9 Local certifications BG Germany TSX DPZ 0D2A safety module (TSX Micro) TSX PAY 262/282 safety modules (Premium) AS-Interface Europe TSX SAZ 0 master module (TSX Micro) TSX SAY 00/000 master modules (Premium) TBX SAP 0 Fipio bus/as-interface bus gateway 9/0

Technical information 9 Automation products certifications Community regulations Marine classification Marine classification des authorities Certified Pending certification ABS BV DNV GL LR RINA RMRS USA France Norway Germany Unit.-Kingdom Italiy C.I.S. Advantys STB ConneXium () Lexium MHD/BPH Magelis ipc Magelis XBT-F/FC Magelis XBT-H/P/E/HM/PM Momentum Premium PL7 Unity (2) Quantum Concept Unity (2) TBX Telefast 2 TSX Micro TSX/PMX 7 à 07 Twido Twin Line () Depending on product, see pages /6 to /0. (2) Request for Marine certifications forecast th quarter 200. Community regulations European directives The opening of European markets implies a harmonization of regulations in the various European Union member states. European Directives are documents used to remove obstacles to the free movement of goods and their application is compulsory in all states of the European Union. Member states are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and, at the same time, to withdraw any conflicting regulations. The Directives, particularly those of a technical nature with which we are concerned, only set objectives, called general requirements. The manufacturer must take all necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to the requirements of each Directive relating to his equipment. As a general rule, the manufacturer affirms that his product conforms to the necessary requirements of the Directive(s) by applying the e label to his product. e marking is applied to Telemecanique products where relevant. The significance of e marking b e marking on a product means that the manufacturer certifies that his product conforms to the relevant European Directives ; it is necessary in order that a product which is subject to a Directive(s) can be marketed and freely moved within the European Union. b e marking is intended solely for the national authorities responsible for market regulation. d For electrical equipment, only conformity of the product to standards indicates that it is suitable for use, and only a guarantee by a recognised manufacturer can ensure a high level of quality. One or more Directives, as appropriate, may apply to our products, in particular : b The Low Voltage Directive 72/2/EEC amended by Directive 9/68/EEC : e marking under the terms of this Directive is compulsory as of January 997. b The Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/6/EEC, amended by Directives 92//EEC and 9/68/EEC : e marking on the products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since January 996. The system designer must use devices external to the SCADA to protect against active faults, which are not indicated and are judjed to be dangerous to the application. This may require solutions from various different technologies such as mechanical, electromechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices (for example, directly wiring a limit switch and emergency stop switches to the coil of a movement control contactor). 9 9/

Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Afghanistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India Albania Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Austria Up-dated: 0-07-200 9 Algeria b Schneider Electric voie A Lot C22 Zone industrielle Rouiba - Alger Andorra Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric France Angola Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa Anguilla Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Antartica Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Brazil Antigua & Barbuda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Argentina b Schneider Argentina Viamonte 280-678 Caseros (provincia Buenos Aires) Armenia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Aruba Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Australia b Schneider Electric (Australia) Pty. Limited 2 Solent Circuit Norwest Business Park Baulkham Hill _ NSW 2 Austria b Schneider Austria Ges.m.b.H. Birostrasse 29 Wien Azerbaijan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Bahamas b Schneider Electric Union Village PO Box 90 - Nassau Bahrain b Schneider Electric Floor - Juma Building Abu Horaira Avenue PO Box - 0 Manama Bangladesh Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India Barbados Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Belarus b Schneider Electric Industries SA Prospect Macherova, of. 202 22000 Minsk Belgium b Schneider Electric nv/sa Dieweg B - 80 Brussels Belize Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric USA Benin Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Bermuda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Bhutan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India Bolivia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Chile Bosnia and Herzegovina Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Croatia Botswana Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa Bouvet island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Brazil b Schneider Electric Brazil Ltda. Avenida Das Nações Unidas 222 Jurubatuba - CEP 079-907 São Paulo-SP Brunei (Darussalam) Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Singapore Bulgaria b Schneider Electric Expo 2000, Boulevard Vaptzarov 07 Sofiav Burkina Faso Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Burundi Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya Cambodia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Viet Nam Cameroon b Schneider Electric Cameroon 66, rue de l'hôtel de Ville BP2087 - Douala Canada b Schneider Canada 9, Waterman Avenue M BY2 Toronto - Ontario Cape Verde Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal Caribee Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Cayman islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Central African Republic Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon Chad Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon Chile b Schneider Electric Chile S.A. Avda. Pdte Ed. Frei Montalva, 600- Conchali - Santiago China b Schneider Beijing Landmark bldg-room 80 8 North Dong Sanhuan Rd Chaoyang District 0000 Beijing Tel. : +2 2 92 97 02 à 09 Fax : +2 2 92 97 00 à 0 Tel.: + 76 88 88 Fax: + 76 88 Tel.: +6 298 28 00 Fax: +6 296 29 8 0 Tel.: + 60 0 Fax: + 60 Tel. : + 22 27 2 9 Fax : + 22 27 2 9 Tel.: +97 22 7897 Fax: +97 2 8 Tel. : +7 72 2 7 0 Fax : +7 72 2 97 6 Tel.: +22777 Fax: +22788 Tel.: + 2 2 Fax:+22 Tel.: +92 99 2 Fax: +92 962 9 Tel.: +27 8 8 Fax: +27 9 Tel.: + 6 72 8020 Fax: + 6 72 20 Tel.: +6 2 000 Fax: +6 2 2 9 Tel.: +86 0 6 90 69 07 Fax:+86069000 www.schneider-electric.com.ar www.schneider.com.au www.schneider-electric.at www.squared.com www.schneider-electric.be www.schneider-electric.com.br www.schneiderelectric.bg www.schneider-electric.ca www.schneider-electric.co.cl www.schneider-electric.com.cn 9/2

Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Christmas island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Cocos (Keeling) islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Up-dated: 0-07-200 Colombia b Schneider Electric de Colombia S.A. Calle A #02-8 Bogota DC Comoros Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric la Reunion Congo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon Cook islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Costa Rica b Schneider Centroamérica Ltda.. kmts oeste de la Embajada Americana, Pavas, San José, Costa Rica C.A. Apartado: 2-000 San Jose Croatia b Schneider Electric SA Fallerovo Setaliste 22 HR - 0000 Zagreb Cuba b Schneider Electric Bureau de Liaison de La Havane Calle 6- N 06-Apto Entre ra y ta Avenida Miramar Playa Habana Cyprus b Schneider Electric Cyprus 28 General Timayia Avenue Kyriakos Building, Block #A0 Larnaca 606 Czech Republic b Schneider Electric CZ, s.r.o. Thámova Praha 8-86 00 Democratic Rep. of Congo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon Denmark b Schneider Electric A/S Baltorpbakken DK-270 Ballerup Djibouti Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt Dominican Republic b Schneider Electric Calle Jacinto Manon Esq. Federico Geraldino Edificio D' Roca Plaza Suite 02, Ens. Paraiso - Santo Domingo Ecuador b Schneider Electric Ecuador SA Av.Republica del Salvador 082 y Nac Edificio Mansion Blanca-Quito Egypt b Schneider Electric Egypt sae 68, El Tayaran Street Nasr City, 7 - Cairo El Salvador Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric USA Equatorial Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon Eritrea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt Estonia b Lexel Electric Ehitajate tee 0 EE 268 Talinn Ethiopia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt Falkland islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Brazil Faroe islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Fiji Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Finland b Schneider Electric Oy Sinimäentie 0260 Espoo France b Schneider Electric SA, rue Nadar 9200 Rueil Malmaison French Polynesia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia French West Indies Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Gabon Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon Gambia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal Georgia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Germany b Schneider Electric GmbH Gothaer Straße 29 D-0880 Ratingen Ghana b Schneider Electric Ghana PMB Kia rd Floor Opeibea House Airport Commercial Center Liberation road - Accra Gilbraltar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Spain Greece b Schneider Electric AE th km - RN Athens-Lamia GR - 6 Kifissia Greenland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States Grenada Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Guadeloupe Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Martinique Guam Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Tel.: +7 26 97 00 Fax: +7 26 97 0 Tel.: +06 22-60- Fax: +06 22-0-26 Tel.: +8 67 00 Fax: +8 67 Tel.: + 72 9 Fax: + 72 2 7 Tel.: +007 28 266 Fax: +007 26 782 Tel.: +20 2 80 88 Fax:+20228089 Tel.: + 7 78 88 Fax: + 68 2 Tel.: + 809 66 6 Fax: + 809 66 68 Tel. : +9 2 22 2 2 Fax : +9 2 22 2 9 Tel.: +20 2 0 0 9 Fax:+20206687 Tel. : +72 60 97 00 Fax : +72 60 97 22 Tel. : +8 9 27 000 Fax : +8 9 270 076 Tel.: + (0) 29 82 00 Fax:+(0)78020 Tel.: +920 20 0 Fax: +92 0 20 9 26 Tel. : +2 2 70 687 Fax : +2 2 77 96 22 Tel.: +02 06 29 2 00 Fax: +02 06 29 2 0 www.schneider-ca.com www.schneider-electric.cz www.schneider-electric.dk www.schneider.com.eg www.schneider-electric.fi www.schneider-electric.fr www.schneiderelectric.de www.schneider-electric.com.gr 9 9/

Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Up-dated: 0-07-200 Guatemala Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States Guinea-Bissau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Sénégal Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Guyana Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States Haiti Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Heard & Mac Donald isl. Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Honduras Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States 9 Hong Kong Hungary b Schneider Electric (Hong Kong) Ltd b Schneider Electric Hungária Villamossági Rt. Room 08-28, th Floor, Sun Hung Kai Centre, 0 Harbour Road, Wanchai Fehérvári út 08 2 H-6 Budapest Iceland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Denmark India b Schneider Electric India Max House, Dr Jha Marg, Okhla 0 020 New Dehli Indonesia b P.T. Schneider Indonesia Ventura Building 7th Floor Jalan R.A. Kartini Kav.26 Cilandak - 20 Jakarta Iran (Islamic Republic of) b Telemecanique Iran 07 Avenue VALI ASSR P.O. Box 87-7 6 Teheran Tel.: +82 2 6 06 2 Fax: +82 28 0 29 Tel.: +6 82 26-06 Fax: +6 206 29 Tel. : +9 6 8 8 Tel. : +9 6 7 6 Tel.: +62 +2 70 06 Fax: +62 +2 70 / 6 Tel.: +98 28 7 0 2 Fax: +98 28 7 8 87 Irak b Schneider Electric Industries SA 800 Grenoble Cedex 9 Tel.: + 0 76 60 27 Fax:+07660660 Ireland b Schneider Electric Ireland Maynooth Road Cellbridge - Co. Kildare Italy b Schneider Electric S.p.A. Centro Direzionale Colleoni Palazzo Sirio - Viale Colleoni, 7 200 Agrate Brianza (Mi) Ivory Coast b Schneider Electric Afrique de l'ouest Rue Pierre et Marie Curie 8 BP 2027 Abidjan 8 Jamaica b Schneider Electric Shop#, Plaza Dunrobin 0 Dunrobin Avenue - Kingstown Japan b Schneider Electric Japan Ltd Torigoe F. Bldg -8-2, Torigoe Taito-Ku - -00 Tokyo Jordan Kazakstan b Schneider Electric Industr. Jordan Jordan University Street Abu Al Haj Commercial Complex 2nd Floor - Office # 202 - Amman b Schneider Electric Kazakhstan Liaison Office Prospekt Abaia 7 off 9 80009 Almaty Kenya b Schneider East Africa Power Technics Complex Monbasa Road - PO Box 6 Nairobi Kiribati Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Korea b Schneider Electric Korea Ltd Floor, Cheil Bldg., 9-6, 7-Ka Youngdeungpodong, Youngdeungpo-ku 0-07 Seoul Kuwait b Schneider Electric Kuwait Al Gaas Tower - Sharq 2nd Floor PO Box 20092-06 Safat Kyrgyz Republic Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Laos Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Thailand Latvia b Lexel Electric 60A A.Deglava str. LV0 Riga Lebanon b Schneider Electric Liban Tabaris, Avenue Charles Malek Immeuble Ashada, 8 P.O. Box 6622 - Beyrouth Lesotho Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa Liberia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ghana Libya Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Tunisia Liechtenstein Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Switzerland Lithuania b Lexel Electric, Verkiu str. LT-202 Vilnius Loro Sae Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Luxembourg b Schneider Electric Industrie SAS Agence de Metz, Rue Graham Bell - BP n 90 707 Metz cedex - France Macau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric China Tel.: ++0 602200 Fax: ++0 60220 Tel.: +9 9 6 8 Fax: +9 9 60 627 Tel.: +22 2 7 00 0 Fax: +22 2 7 00 0 Tel. : +876 7 27 Tel. : +9 87 7 Tel.: +8 8 8 Fax: +8 8 8 Tel.: 962 6 6 78 87 Fax: 962 6 6 79 Tel. : +7 27 20 9 88 Tel. : +7 27 20 6 70 Tel. : +2 2.82.6 Fax : +2 2.82.7 Tel. : +82 2 260 9700 Fax : +82 2 260 9800 Tel.: +96 20 7 6 Fax: +96 20 7 06 Tel. : +7 780 2 7/7 Fax : +7 7 62 80 Tel.:+9620620 Tel.:+96209 Tel. : +70 278 9 9/6 Fax : +70 278 9 60 Tel.:0879060 Fax: 0 87 7 2 96 www.schneider-electric.hu www.schneiderelectric-in.com www.schneider-electric.co.id www.schneiderelectric.ie www.schneiderelectric.it www.schneider-electric.co.jp www.csinfo.co.kr/schneider/ www.schneider-electric.fr 9/

Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Up-dated: 0-07-200 Macedonia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Bulgaria Madagascar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric la Reunion Malawi Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa Malaysia b Schneider Electric (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd No. Jalan U/9, Seksyen U Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park 00 Shah Alam Selangor Darul Ehsan Maldives Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion Mali Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal Malta Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Tunisia Marshall islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Martinique b Schneider Electric Schneider Electric Immeuble Cottrell - ZI de la Lézarde 9722 Le Lamentin Mauritania Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal Mauritius b Schneider Electric Route côtière Calodyne - Mauritius Mayotte Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion Mexico b Groupe Schneider Mexico Calz. Rojo Gomez N 2-A Col. Guadalupe del Moral México, D.F. - C.P. 0900 Micronesia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Moldova Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Romania Monaco Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric France Mongolia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Montserrat Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Morocco b Schneider Electric Morocco 26, rue Ibnou Khalikane Quartier Palmiers 2000 Casablanca Mozambique Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa Myanmar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Singapore Namibia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa Nauru Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Nepal Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India Netherlands b Schneider Electric BV Waarderweg 0 - Postbus 86 200 RV Haarlem Netherlands Antilles Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. New Caledonia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia New Zealand b Schneider Electric (NZ) Ltd Charann Place Avondale P.O. Box - New Lynn Auckland Nicaragua Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States Niger Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Nigeria b Schneider Electric Nigeria Limited Biro plaza - 8th Floor - Plot 6 Abeyemo Alakija Street Victoria Islan - Lagos Niue Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Norfolk island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia North Korea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric China Northern Mariana islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Norway b Schneider Electric Norge A/S Solgaard Skog 2 Postboks 28-0 Moss Oman b Schneider Electric CA c/o Arab Development Co PO Box 9 - Muscat Pakistan b Schneider Electric Pakistan -L, 2nd floor, M.M. Alam Road, Gulberg II - Lahore Palau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Panama Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States Papua New Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Paraguay Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Uruguay Peru b Schneider Electric Peru S.A. Los Telares n 2 Urb. Vulcano, Ate Lima 0 Tel. : (60) 788 6 Fax : (60) 788 688 Tel.: +0 96 06 00 Fax:+09626 Tel.: 20 282 8 8 Fax: 20 282 8 8 Tel.: +2 686 0 00 Fax: +2 686 2 09 Tel.: +22 299 08 8 to 7 Fax: +22 299 08 67 and 69 Tel.: + 2 2 2 Fax: + 2 2 00 Tel. : +6 9 829 0 90 Fax : +6 9 829 0 9 Tel. : +2 270297 Fax : +2 2702976 Tel.: +7 692 9700 Fax: +7 692 787 Tel.: +968 77 6 6 Fax: +968 77 0 9 Tel.: +92 2 77 à 7 Fax: +92 2 77 Tel.: + 8 Fax: + 8 0 2 www.schneiderelectric.com.my www.schneiderelectric.com.mx www.schneider.co.ma www.schneider-electric.nl www.schneider-electric.co.nz www.schneider-electric.no www.schneider-electric.com.pe 9 9/

Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Up-dated: 0-07-200 9 Philippines b Schneider Electric Philippines, Inc th Floor, ALCO Building 9 Sen, Gil Puyat Avenue Makati 209 Pitcairn Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Poland b Schneider Electric Polska Sp.zo.o. ul. Lubinowa a 0-878 - Warszawa Portugal b Schneider Electric Portugal Av.do Forte, Edificio Suécia II, Piso -A CP 2028 Carnaxide 279 Linda-A-Velha Puerto Rico Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States Qatar b Schneider Electric Qatar Branch c/o Khalifa BinFahred Al Thani Trad.and Co - P.O. Box 8 Doha Reunion b Schneider Electric Immeuble Futura, 90, rue des 2 canons BP 66-9797 Sainte Clothilde Romania b Schneider Electric Bd Ficusului n 2 Apimondia, Corp.A, et., Sector Bucuresti Russian Federation b Schneider Electric ZAO Enisseyskaya 7 29 28 Moscow Rwanda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya Samoa Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia San Marino Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy Sandwich & Georgia island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Sao Tome & Principe Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal Saudi Arabia b Schneider Electric Second Industrial City P.O. Box 8929-682 Riyadh Senegal b Schneider Electric Sénégal BP 92 - Dakar-Fann Rond point N'Gor - Dakar Seychelles Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion Sierra Leone Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ghana Singapore Slovak Republic b Schneider Electric Singapore Pte Ltd b Schneider Electric Slovakia spol s.r.o. 0 Ang Mo Kio Street 6 #02-7/20 TechPoint Singapore 6909 Borekova 0 SK-82 06 Bratislava Slovenia b Schneider Electric, d.o.o. Dunasjka 7 000 Ljubljana Solomon islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Somalia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt South Africa b Schneider Electric South Africa (PTY) Ltd Private Bag X9 Halfway House 68 - Midrand. Spain b Schneider Electric España, S.A. Pl. Dr. Letamendi, -7 08007 Barcelona Sri Lanka b Schneider Electric Industries SA Liaison office SRI Lanka Level B Valiant towers 6/7 Nawam Mawatha-Colombo 2 St Helena Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy St Kitts & Nevis Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. St Lucia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. St Pierre et Miquelon Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. St Vincent & Grenadines Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Sudan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt Suriname Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States Svalbard & Jan Mayen isl. Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Denmark Swaziland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa Sweden b Schneider Electric AB Djupdalsvägen 7/9 929 Sollentuna Switzerland b Schneider Electric (Switzerland) S.A. Schermenwaldstrasse CH - 06 Ittigen Syrian Arab Republic b Schneider Electric Syria Elba Street - Malki Gheibeh and Qassas bldg, st floor PO Box 876-Damascus Tel. : +62 896 606 Fax : +62 896 7229 Tel.: +8 22 8 200 Fax: +8 22 8 20 Tel.: + 2 6 800 Fax: + 2 6 87 Tel.: +97 28 Fax: +97 28 Tel.: +262 28 28 Fax: +262 28 9 7 Tel.: +0 20 06 0 Fax: +0 22 98 Tel.: +709 797 0 00 Fax: +709 797 0 0 Tel.: +966 26 Fax: +966 26 860 Tel.: +22 820 68 0 Fax: +22 820 8 0 Tel.: +6 8 78 77 Fax: +6 8 78 00 Tel. : +02 2 0 0 and 0 0 Fax:+022000 Tel. : +86 2 6 Fax : +86 2 6 9 Tel.: +27 2 600 Fax: +27 880 Tel.: + 9 8 00 Fax: + 9 8 08 Tel. : +9 77 8 89 Tel.: +6 8 62 8 00 Fax: +6 8 62 8 8 Tel.: + 97 Fax: + 97 Tel. : +96 7 9 88 00 Fax : +96 7 7 9 www.schneider-electric.pl www.schneiderelectric.pt www.schneider-electric.ro www.schneider-electric.ru www.schneider-electric.com.sg www.schneider-electric.sk www.schneider-electric.si www.schneider-electric.co.za www.schneiderelectric.es www.schneiderelectric-in.com www.schneider-electric.se www.schneider-electric.ch 9/6

Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Up-dated: 0-07-200 Taiwan, Republic of China b Schneider Electric Taiwan Co Ltd 2FI., N 7, Ji-Hu Road, Nei-Hu Dist., Taipei Tajikistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Tanzania, United Rep. of Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya Thailand b Schneider (Thailand) Ltd 20th Floor Richmond Building 7 Sukhumvit 26 Road, Klongtoey Bangkok 00 Togo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Tokelau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Tonga Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Trinidad & Tobago b Schneider Electric 6, st Street West Ext. Beaulieu Avenue Trincity Trinidad West Indies Tunisia b Schneider Electric Tunisia Rue du Lac Oubeira 0 Les Berges du Lac - Tunis Turkey Turkmenistan b Schneider Elektrik Sanayi Ve Ticaret A.S. b Schneider Electric Turkmenistan Liaison Office Tütüncü Mehmet Efendi Cad. N :0 Kat -2-8080 Göztepe Istanbul rue Neitralny Turkmenistan 28, off.26/27 7 000 Achgabad Turks & Caicos islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Tuvalu Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Uganda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya Ukraine b Schneider Electric Rue Krechtchalik 2 2260 Kiev United Arab Emirates b Schneider Electric Abu Dhabi PO Box 2980 Office Floor 2/Lulu Street Al Marina Plaza Tower Abu Dhabi United Kingdom b Schneider Electric Ltd Braywick House East Windsor Road - Maidenhead BerkshireSL6DN United States b Schneider Electric North American Division Roselle Road Palatine - IL 60067 Uruguay b Schneider Electric Uruguay S.A. Ramon Masini 90 Montevideo Uzbekistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Vanuatu Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Vatican city St./Holy See Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy Venezuela b Schneider Mg SD TE, S.A Calle 62/ Piso 2 Edificio Centro Cynamid La Urbina, 070-79 Caracas Viet Nam b R.R.O. of Schneider Electric Industries S.A.S. in Viet Nam Unit 2.9, 2nd Floor, e-town Building 6 Cong Hoa Street Tan Binh District - Ho Chi Minh City Virgin islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Wallis & Futuna islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Western Sahara Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Morocco Yemen Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric U.A.E. Yugoslavia b Schneider Electric Jugoslavija d.o.o. Ratarski put 27d 86 Belgrade Zambia b Schneider Zambia Zambia Office c/o Matipi Craft Center Building Plot 06 - Accra Road PO Box 22792 - Kitwe Zimbabwe b Schneider Electric Zimbabwe Liaison Office 7A Second Street (corner Livingstone Avenue) Harare Tel. : +886 2 87 688 Fax : +886 2 87 689 Tel.: +662 20 9888 Fax: +662 20 986 Tel.: 868 60 2 0 Fax: 868 60 2 0 Tel.: +26 7 960 77 Fax: +26 7 960 2 Tel.: +90 2 6 86 9 70 Fax:+90268687 Tel. : +99 2 6 29 2 Fax : +99 2 6 29 2 Tel.: +80 62 0 2 Fax: +80 62 0 2 Tel.: +972 6 9 Fax: +972 6 6606 Tel.: + (0) 628 08 00 Fax: + (0) 628 08 08 Tel.: + 87 97 2600 Fax: + 87 92 700 Tel. : +9 82 707 292 Fax : +9 82 707 28 Tel.: +8 2 2 Fax: +8 2 2 60 09 Tel.: +8 8 80 0 Fax: +8 8 820 77 Tel.: +8 92 Fax: +8 07 2 Tel.: +260 222 22 2 Fax: +260 222 8 89 Tel.: +26 707 79/80 Fax: +26 707 76 www.schneider-electric.com.tw www.schneider-electric.co.th www.schneiderelectric.com.tr www.schneider-electric.com.ua www.schneider.co.uk www.squared.com www.schneider-electric.com.ve 9 9/7

Product reference index 0 9 0 0 09 8 /9 0 0 XCA 282 0 6/27 0 XCA 282 02 6/27 0 XCA 282 0 6/27 0 0 NWM 00 00 /2 70 70 DTN 0 00 /9 70 EDI 6 00 /7 70 EDO 6 00 /7 70 ENO 96 00 /7 70INT000 /97 70 MCI 007 00 /97 70 MCI 020 0 /9 70 MCI 020 6 /9 70 MCI 020 80 /9 70 MCI 02 20 /9 70 MCI 00 00 /97 70PNT020 /9 70XTS00900 /97 70XTS02000 /9 70XTS0200 /9 70XTS0000 /69, et /7 7 7 CEV 200 0 /0 7 CEV 200 0 /0 7 CEV 00 20 /0 90 90 NAA 27 0 /9 90 NAA 27 02 /9 90 NAA 27 0 /9 90 NAA 27 0 /9 90 NAA 27 06 /9 90 NAD 9 0 /9 90 NAD 9 0 /9 90 NAD 9 0 /9 90 NOC 000 0 / 90 NOR 000 0 / 90 NOT 000 0 / 90 NTC 000 02 / 90 NTC 000 02U / 90 NTC 000 0 / 90 NTC 000 0U / 90 NTC 000 2 / 90 NTC 000 2U / 90 NTC 000 0 / 90 NTC 000 0U / 90 NTC 000 80 / 90 NTC 000 80U / 90 NTW 000 02 / 90 NTW 000 02U / 90 NTW 000 0 / 90 NTW 000 0U / 90 NTW 000 2 / 90 NTW 000 2U / 90 NTW 000 0 / 90 NTW 000 0U / 90 NTW 000 80 / 90 NTW 000 80U / 99 99 NEH 0 0 /6 99 NEH 00 /6 99 NES 7 00 /9 99 NES 8 00 /9 99 NES 2 00 /8 99 NMS 2 0 /8 99 NMS 2 02 /8 99 NOH 0 0 /6 99 NOS 7 00 /9 99 NSS 2 0 /8 99 NSS 2 02 /8 99NTR000 /7 99NTR000 /7 8 870 USE 00 00 /7 9 990MCO0000 / 990MCO0000 / 990MCO0000 / 990MCO000 / 990MCO000 / 990MCO0007 / 990MCO002 / 990 MCO KIT 00 / 990 MCO KIT 0 / 990 NAA 26 20 6/27, et /97 990 NAA 26 0 /97, et 6/27 990 NAD 2 0 /9 990 NAD 2 0 /9 990 NAD 20 00 /9 990 NAD 20 0 /9 990 NAD 20 /9 990 NAD 20 2 /9 990 NAD 20 20 /9 990 NAD 20 2 /9 990 NAD 20 22 /9 990 NAD 20 2 /9, ABE ABE 7ACC0 8/7 ABE 7ACC02 8/7 ABE 7ACC0 8/7 ABE 7ACC 8/7 ABE 7ACC2 8/ ABE 7ACC20 8/7 ABE 7ACC2 8/7 ABE 7ACC0 8/7 ABE 7ACC80 8/7 ABE 7ACC8 8/7 ABE 7ACC82 8/7 ABE 7ACC8 8/7 ABE 7ACC8 8/7 ABE 7ACC8 8/7 ABE 7BV0 8/7 ABE 7BV0E 8/7 ABE 7BV20 /9, /2, /7, et 8/7 ABE 7BV20E 8/7 ABE 7CPA0 /9 /2 / et 8/7 ABE 7CPA02 /27 et 8/6 ABE 7CPA0 /27, et 8/6 ABE 7CPA /2, /26, /, et 8/6 ABE 7CPA2 /27, et 8/6 ABE 7CPA /8, et 8/6 ABE 7CPA2 /27, et 8/6 ABE 7CPA /27, et 8/6 ABE 7CPAE /27, et 8/6 ABE 7FU02 8/7 ABE 7FU00 8/7 ABE 7FU00 8/7 ABE 7FU200 8/7 ABE 7FU00 8/7 ABE 7FU60 8/7 ABE 7H08R0 8/ ABE 7H08R 8/ ABE 7H08R2 8/ ABE 7H08S2 8/ ABE 7H2R0 8/ ABE 7H2R 8/ ABE 7H2R20 8/ ABE 7H2R2 8/ ABE 7H2R0 8/ ABE 7H2S2 8/ ABE 7H6C0 8/0 ABE 7H6C 8/0 ABE 7H6C2 8/0 ABE 7H6C 8/0 ABE 7H6CM 8/0 ABE 7H6CM2 8/0 ABE 7H6F 8/ ABE 7H6R0 8/ ABE 7H6R 8/ ABE 7H6RE 8/ ABE 7H6R20 /9, /2, /26, /7, /, et 8/ ABE 7H6R2 8/ ABE 7H6R2E 8/ ABE 7H6R2 8/ ABE 7H6R0 8/ ABE 7H6R 8/ ABE 7H6R0 8/ ABE 7H6R0E 8/ ABE 7H6S2 8/ ABE 7H6S2E 8/ ABE 7H6S 8/ ABE 7H20E00 8/0 ABE 7H20E200 8/0 ABE 7H20E00 8/0 ABE 7H2E0 8/0 ABE 7H2E00 8/0 ABE 7LOGF2 8/7 ABE 7LOGV0 8/7 ABE 7P08T0 8/ ABE 7P08T0E 8/ ABE 7P6F0 8/ ABE 7P6F0E 8/ ABE 7P6F2 8/ ABE 7P6M 8/ ABE 7P6T 8/ ABE 7P6T20 8/ ABE 7P6T22 8/ ABE 7P6T2 8/ ABE 7P6T2 8/ ABE 7P6T20 8/ ABE 7P6T20E 8/ ABE 7P6T8 8/ ABE 7P6T8E 8/ ABE 7P6T0 8/ ABE 7P6T0E 8/ ABE 7P6T2 8/ ABE 7P6T 8/ ABE 7R08S 8/2 ABE 7R08SE 8/2 ABE 7R08S20 8/2 ABE 7R08S20E 8/2 ABE 7R08S26 8/2 ABE 7R08S26E 8/2 ABE 7R6M 8/ ABE 7R6S 8/2 ABE 7R6SE 8/2 ABE 7H6R0 8/ ABE 7H6R 8/ ABE 7H6R0 8/ ABE 7H6R0E 8/ ABE 7H6S2 8/ ABE 7H6S2E 8/ ABE 7H6S 8/ ABE 7H20E00 8/0 ABE 7H20E200 8/0 ABE 7H20E00 8/0 ABE 7H2E0 8/0 ABE 7H2E00 8/0 ABE 7LOGF2 8/7 ABE 7LOGV0 8/7 ABE 7P08T0 8/ ABE 7P08T0E 8/ ABE 7P6F0 8/ ABE 7P6F0E 8/ ABE 7P6F2 8/ ABE 7P6M 8/ ABE 7P6T 8/ ABE 7P6T20 8/ ABE 7P6T22 8/ ABE 7P6T2 8/ ABE 7P6T2 8/ ABE 7P6T20 8/ ABE 7P6T20E 8/ ABE 7P6T8 8/ ABE 7P6T8E 8/ ABE 7P6T0 8/ ABE 7P6T0E 8/ ABE 7P6T2 8/ ABE 7P6T 8/ ABE 7R08S 8/2 ABE 7R08SE 8/2 ABE 7R08S20 8/2 ABE 7R08S20E 8/2 ABE 7R08S26 8/2 ABE 7R08S26E 8/2 ABE 7R6M 8/ ABE 7R6S 8/2 ABE 7R6SE 8/2 ABE 7R6S20 8/2 ABE 7R6S20E 8/2 ABE 7R6S22 8/2 ABE 7R6S22E 8/2 ABE 7R6T 8/ ABE 7R6T20 8/ ABE 7R6T22 8/ ABE 7R6T20 8/ ABE 7R6T2 8/ ABE 7R6T0 8/ ABE 7R6T2 8/ ABE 7R6T70 8/ ABE 7S08S2B0 8/2 ABE 7S08S2B0E 8/2 ABE 7S08S2B 8/2 ABE 7S08S2BE 8/2 ABE 7S6E2B 8/2 ABE 7S6E2BE 8/2 ABE 7S6E2E0 8/2 ABE 7S6E2E0E 8/2 ABE 7S6E2E 8/2 ABE 7S6E2EE 8/2 ABE 7S6E2F0 8/2 ABE 7S6E2F0E 8/2 ABE 7S6E2M0 8/2 ABE 7P6F2 8/ ABE 7P6M 8/ ABE 7P6T 8/ ABE 7P6T20 8/ ABE 7P6T22 8/ ABE 7P6T2 8/ ABE 7P6T2 8/ ABE 7P6T20 8/ ABE 7P6T20E 8/ ABE 7P6T8 8/ ABE 7P6T8E 8/ ABE 7P6T0 8/ ABE 7P6T0E 8/ ABE 7P6T2 8/ ABE 7P6T 8/ ABE 7R08S 8/2 ABE 7R08SE 8/2 ABE 7R08S20 8/2 ABE 7R08S20E 8/2 ABE 7R08S26 8/2 ABE 7R08S26E 8/2 ABE 7R6M 8/ ABE 7R6S 8/2 ABE 7R6SE 8/2 ABE 7R6S20 8/2 ABE 7R6S20E 8/2 ABE 7R6S22 8/2 ABE 7R6S22E 8/2 ABE 7R6T 8/ ABE 7R6T20 8/ ABE 7R6T22 8/ ABE 7R6T20 8/ ABE 7R6T2 8/ ABE 7R6T0 8/ ABE 7R6T2 8/ ABE 7R6T70 8/ ABE 7S08S2B0 8/2 ABE 7S08S2B0E 8/2 ABE 7S08S2B 8/2 ABE 7S08S2BE 8/2 9/8

Product reference index 0 ABE 7S6E2B 8/2 ABE 7S6E2BE 8/2 ABE 7S6E2E0 8/2 ABE 7S6E2E0E 8/2 ABE 7S6E2E 8/2 ABE 7S6E2EE 8/2 ABE 7S6E2F0 8/2 ABE 7S6E2F0E 8/2 ABE 7S6E2M0 8/2 ABE 7S6E2M0E 8/2 ABE 7S6SB2 8/2 ABE 7S6SB2E 8/2 ABE 7S6S2B0 8/2 ABE 7S6S2B0E 8/2 ABE 7TES60 /6, et 8/7 ABF ABF C08R02B 8/7 ABF C08R02R 8/7 ABF C08R02W 8/7 ABF C08R2B 8/7 ABF C08R2R 8/7 ABF C08R2W 8/7 ABF Y2S0 /27 ABF Y2S200 /27 ABF Y2S00 /27 ABF Y2S00 /27 ABL ABL 7CEM200 8/ ABL 7CEM2006 8/ ABL 7CEM202 8/ ABL 7RE202 8/ ABL 7RE20 8/ ABL 7RE20 8/ ABL 7RE20 8/ ABL 7REQ200 8/ ABL 7REQ200 8/ ABL 7RP20 8/ ABL 7RP20 8/ ABL 7RP20 8/ ABL 7RP20 /, et 8/ ABL 7RP80 8/ ABL 7UEQ200 8/ ABL 7UEQ2200 8/ ABL 7UES200 8/ ABL 7UPS200 8/ ABL 7UPS2200 8/ ABL 7UPS200 8/ ABR ABR 7S 8/ ABR 7S2 8/ ABR 7S2 8/ ABR 7S 8/ ABR 7SE 8/ ABR 7S7 8/ ABS ABS 7EAE 8/ ABS 7EAF 8/ ABS 7EAM 8/ ABS 7ECAL 8/ ABS 7ECB2 8/ ABS 7ECE2 8/ ABS 7SA2M 8/ ABS 7SAMA 8/ ABS 7SCB 8/ ABS 7SC2E 8/ ABS 7SCBA 8/ ABS 7SCE 8/ AR AR SB 8/7 ASp AS MBKT 8 /9 ASI ABLB002 /6 ASI ABLB00 /6 ASI ABLD002 /6 ASI ABLD00 /6 ASI ABLM02 /6 O OZD FIP G /8 SF SF CPY00 /60 SF CPY00 /60 SF CPY0 /60 SF CPY020 /60 SF CPY02 /60 SF CPY00 /60 SF PY200 /6 SF PY200 /6 SF PY2020 /6 SF PY200 /6 SF PY200 /6 SF PY200 /6 SF PY2060 /6 SF PY2080 /6 SF PY220 /6 SF PY2200 /6 SF PY200 /6 SM SM PS7 /60 SM PS8 /60 SM PY2 /60 STB STB NDP 22 /9 STB NIB 222 /97 STB NMP 222 /9 SYC SPU LFF CD28M /, et /9 SPU LFG CD28M /, et /9 SPU LFT CD28M /, et /9 SPU LFU CD28M /, et /9 SPU LRU CD28M /, et /9 SPU LUF CD28M /, et /9 SPU LUG CD28M /, et /9 SPU LUT CD28M /, et /9 T TFTXCB020 /0 TFTXCB00 /0 T PCX 7 20M / T PCX 7 M / TBX TBX AES 00 / TBX AMS 620 / TBX ASS 200 / TBX BAS 0 /8, et /7 TBX BLP 0 /, /, et /8 TBX CBS 00 / TBX CEP 622 /0 TBX CSP 622 /0 TBX CSP 62 /0 TBX DES 622 /0 TBX DES 6 /0 TBX DES 6C22 /0 TBX DES 6F22 /0 TBX DES 6S0 /0 TBX DMS 02 /0 TBX DMS 62 /0 TBX DMS 6C22 /0 TBX DMS 6C222 /0 TBX DMS 6P22 /0 TBX DMS 6S /0 TBX DSS 2 /0 TBX DSS 622 /0 TBX DSS 62 /0 TBX DSS 6C22 /0 TBX EEP 08C22 /8 TBX EEP 622 /8 TBX ESP 08C22 /8 TBX ESP 622 /8 TBXFPACC0 /8 TBX GND 0 / TBX LEP 020 / TBX LEP 00 / TBX LEP 00 / TBX RV 0 / TBX SEP 08 / TBX SSP 08 / TBX SUP 0 / TLX CD 0OFS 0M 7/ CD OFS 0M 7/ CD DRV 20 M /79, et 6/7 CD FCHMI VM /9, et /2 CD GTW 0M /2, et / CD PL7 DIF 6/77 CD PL7J pm 6/70 CD PL7M pm 6/70 CD PL7M PCM 6/70 CD PL7P pm 6/7 CD PL7 DIF 6/77 CD PL7J pm 6/70 CD PL7M pm 6/70 CD PL7P pm 6/7 CD TCPAE /9 CD UNOFS 0M 7/ CD WSBY P0F /66 CD0 GTW 0M /2, et / CD WSBY P0F /66 CDUNT GTW 0M /2, et / DOC PL7 F 6/7 LIBS CNVF /97 LSDKC PL7M /9 LPL7FUZM 6/7 SDKC PL7 M 6/7 OS PL7P PM 6/7 OT PL7M PM 6/7 OT PL7P PM 6/7 RCD PL7J PM 6/70 RCD PL7M PM 6/70 RCD PL7M 6/70 PCM RCD PL7P PM 6/7 RCD PL7J PM 6/70 RCD 6/70 PL7M PM RCD PL7P PM 6/7 SPL7PPM 6/7 UCD PL7J PM 6/70 UCD PL7P PM 6/7 UCD PL7J PM 6/70 UCD PL7P PM 6/7 TSX TSX AAK2 /27, et / TSX ACC VA62 2/0 TSX ACC VA62 2/7 TSX AEY 600 /26 TSX AEY 6 /26 TSX AEY /26 TSX AEY 20 /26 TSX AEY 800 /26 TSX AEY 80 /26 TSX ASY 0 /26 TSX ASY 800 /26 TSX BAT M02 /2, et /7 TSX BAT M0 /2, et /7 TSX BLY 0 /6, et /27 TSX CAP 00 /27 TSX CAP S /9, /2, /26, /7, et / TSX CAP S9 / TSX CAY 2 / TSX CAY 22 / TSX CAY / TSX CAY / TSX CAY 2 / TSXCBRY200 2/ TSXCBRY200F 2/ TSXCBRYK 2/ TSX CBY 00K 2/0 TSX CBY 00K 2/0 TSX CBY 00K 2/0 TSX CBY 000 2/0 TSX CBY 000K 2/0 TSX CBY 20K 2/0 TSX CBY 80K 2/0 TSX CBY 280K 2/0 TSX CBY 80K 2/0 TSX CBY 00K 2/0 TSX CBY 720K 2/0 TSX CBY ACC 0 2/0 TSX CBY K9 2/0 TSX CCP 0 /2 TSX CCP S /9, /2, /26, et /2 TSX CCP S 00 /9, /2, /26, /2, TSX CCP S 00 /9, /2, /26, et /2 TSX CCT 200 / TSX CCY 28 /26 TSX CD DRV 20M /0 TSX CDP 0 /6, /9, /2, /26, /7, et /2 TSX CDP 00 /6, /9, /2, et /7 TSX CDP 00 /6 TSX CDP 02 /6, /9, et /2 TSX CDP 0 /6, /9, /2, /26, /7, et /2 TSX CDP 202 /6, /9, et /2 TSX CDP 20 /6, /9, /2, /26, /7, et /2 TSX CDP 0 /6, /9, /26, /7, et /2 TSX CDP 02 /6, /9, et /2 TSX CDP 0 /6, /9, /2, /26, /7, et /2 TSX CDP 0 /6, /9, /2, /26, et /2 TSX CDP 0 /6, /9, /2, /26, /7, et /2 TSX CDP 6 /2 TSX CFY /7 TSX CFY 2 /7 TSX CPP 02 /8 TSX CPP 0 / TSX CPP 202 /8 TSX CPP 0 /8 TSX CPP 02 /8 TSX CSA 00 /0, et /0 TSX CSA 200 /0, et /0 TSX CSA 00 /0, et /0 TSX CSY 6 / TSX CSY 8 / TSX CTC 07 / TSX CTC 0 / 9 9/9

Product reference index 9 TSX CTY 2A /9 TSX CTY 2C /2 TSX CTY A /9 TSX CXP 2 /2 TSX CXP 22 /2 TSX CXP 2 /2 TSX CXP 2 /2 TSX CXP 2 /2 TSX CXP 2 /2 TSX CXP 26 /7 TSX CXP 27 /2 TSX CXP 6 /2 TSX CXP 6 /2 TSX CXP 6 /2 TSX CXP 6 /2 TSX CXP 6 /2 TSX CXP 66 /7 TSX CXP 67 /2 TSX DEY 08D2 / TSX DEY 6A2 / TSX DEY 6A / TSX DEY 6A / TSX DEY 6A / TSX DEY 6D2 / TSX DEY 6D / TSX DEY 6FK / TSX DEY 2D2K / TSX DEY 2DK / TSX DEY 6D2K / TSX CTC 07 / TSX CTC 0 / TSX CTY 2A /9 TSX CTY 2C /2 TSX CTY A /9 TSX CXP 2 /2 TSX CXP 22 /2 TSX CXP 2 /2 TSX CXP 2 /2 TSX CXP 2 /2 TSX CXP 2 /2 TSX CXP 26 /7 TSX CXP 27 /2 TSX CXP 6 /2 TSX CXP 6 /2 TSX CXP 6 /2 TSX CXP 6 /2 TSX CXP 6 /2 TSX CXP 66 /7 TSX CXP 67 /2 TSX DEY 08D2 / TSX DEY 6A2 / TSX DEY 6A / TSX DEY 6A / TSX DEY 6A / TSX DEY 6D2 / TSX DEY 6D / TSX DEY 6FK / TSX DEY 2D2K / TSX DEY 2DK / TSX DEY 6D2K / TSX DMY 28FK /6 TSX DMY 28RFK /6 TSX DSY 08RD / TSX DSY 08R / TSX DSY 08RA / TSX DSY 08S / TSX DMY 28FK /6 TSX DMY 28RFK /6 TSX DSY 08RD / TSX DSY 08R / TSX DSY 08RA / TSX DSY 08T2 / TSX DSY 08T22 / TSX DSY 08T / TSX DSY 6R / TSX DSY 6S / TSX DSY 6S / TSX DSY 6T2 / TSX DSY 6T / TSX DSY 2T2K / TSX DSY 6T2K / TSX EEF 08D2 /68 TSX EEF 6D2 /68 TSX EF ACC 2002 /69 TSX EF ACC 200 /69 TSX EF ACC 2020 /69 TSX EF ACC 2020 /69 TSX EF ACC 200 /69 TSX EF ACC 2070 /69 TSX EF ACC 7 /68, et /8 TSX EF ACC 99 /68, et /8 TSXEFCF0 /68 TSXEFCF02 /68 TSXEFCF0 /68 TSX EF CM 0 /68 TSX EF CM 0 /68 TSXEFCT0 /68 TSX EMF 6DT2 /68 TSX ESF 08T22 /68 TSX ETH ACC 0M /87 TSX ETH ACC 2 /87 TSX ETH ACC /87 TSX ETH ACC /87 TSX ETH ACC /87 TSX ETH CA 020 /87 TSX ETH CA 00 /87 TSX ETH CA 200 /87 TSX ETH CC 00 /87 TSX ETH CC 00 /87 TSX ETH CC 020 /87 TSX ETH CD 02 /87 TSX ETH NTR /87 TSX ETY 0 /9 TSX ETY 0 WS /9 TSX ETY 20 /66 TSX ETY 0 /9 TSX ETY 0 /9 TSX ETY CB 00 /87 TSX ETY CB 00 /87 TSX ETY CB 020 /87 TSX FAN AP 2/ TSX FAN AP 2/ TSX FAN D2P 2/ TSX FP ACC2 /8 TSX FP ACC2 /68, et /7 TSX FP ACC /8 TSX FP ACC2 /68, /7, et /8 TSX FP ACC /7, et /8 TSX FP ACC /8, /7, et /8 TSX FP ACC6 /8 TSX FP ACC7 /68 TSX FP ACC8M /8 TSX FP ACC9 /8 TSX FP C00 /8 TSX FP C200 /8 TSX FP C00 /8 TSXFPCA00 /69, et /8 TSXFPCA200 /69, et /8 TSXFPCA00 /8 TSX FP CC 00 /69, et /8 TSXFPCC200 /69, et /8 TSXFPCC00 /69, et /8 TSXFPCE00 /8 TSXFPCG00 /7, et /79 TSXFPCG00 /7, et /79 TSXFPCP00 /69, et /8 TSXFPCP00 /69, TSXFPCP00 et /8 TSXFPCR00 /69 TSXFPCR200 /69 TSXFPCR00 /69 TSXFPJF020 /8 TSX FPC0M /8 TSX FPP 0 /7, et /8 TSX FPP 20 /79 TSX FPP OZD 200 /8 TSX IBI CP DD9 00 /7 TSX IBI CP DD9 00 /7 TSX IBI CP DD9 00 /7 TSX IBI CP DD9 070 /7 TSX IBI CP DD9 20 /7 TSX IBI CP DD9 20 /7 TSX IBS CA 00 /97 TSX IBS CA 00 /97 TSX IBX 00 /97 TSX IBY 00 /97 TSX ISP Y0 /60 TSX ISP Y /60 TSX JNP 2 /07 TSX JNP /07 TSX MBP 00 /9 TSX MBP CE 002 /9 TSX MBP CE 00 /9 TSX MBP CE 060 /9 TSX MCP C002M /2 TSX MCP C22K /6, et /7 TSX MCP C22K /2 TSX MCP C2K /2 TSX MFP 028P /6, et /7 TSX MFP 02P /6, et /7 TSX MFP 06P /6, et /7 TSX MFP 22P /6 TSX MFP 22P/26P /7 TSX MFP 26P /6 TSX MFP B096K /2, et /7 TSX MFP BAK 02P /7 TSX MFP C8K /7 TSX MFP P00M /2 TSX MFP P002M /2 TSX MFP P00M /7 TSX MFP P00M /2 TSX MFP P28K /2, /6, et /7 TSX MFP P22K /2, /6, et /7 TSX MFP P8K /2, et /6 TSX MFP P2K /2 TSX MRP 028P /6, et /7 TSX MRP 026P /6, et /7 TSX MRP 02P /6, et /7 TSX MRP 02P /6, et /7 TSX MRP 06P /6, et /7 TSX MRP 228P /6, et /7 TSX MRP 22P /6 TSX MRP /7 22P/26P TSX MRP 26P /6 TSX MRP 26P /6, et /7 TSX MRP 8P /6, et /7 TSX MRP C00M /2, /6, et /7 TSX MRP C002M /2, /6, et /7 TSX MRP C00M /2, /6, et /7 TSX MRP C007M /2, /6, et /7 TSX MRP C0M7 /2, /6, et /7 TSX MRP C8K /2, /6, et /7 TSX MRP C768K /2, /6, et /7 TSX MRP DS 208P /7 TSX MRP F00M /2 TSX MRP F008M /2 TSX MRP P28K /2, /6, et /7 TSXMRPP22K /2, /6, et /7 TSX MRP P8K /2, /6, et /7 TSX P ACC 0 /00, /0, /09 TSX P CAP /2 et/7 TSX P7 0M / TSX P7 M / TSX P7 6M /8 TSX P7 20M / TSX P7 2M / TSX P7 262M /, et /8 TSX P7 26M /8 TSX P7 282M /, et /8 TSX P7 0M / TSX P7 62M /, et /8 TSX P7 6M /8 TSX P7 M / TSX P7 6M /8 TSX P7 82M / /8 TSX P7 6M /8 TSX PAY 262 /8 TSX PAY 282 /8 TSX PBS CA 00 /9 TSX PBY 00 /9 TSX PCI 7 20M /2 TSX PCI 7 M /2 TSX PCI ACC /2 TSX PCX 0 /, /0, /09, /0, /, 6/27, et 6/7 TSX PCX 0 / TSX PCX 00 /0, /09, /0, /, 6/27, et 6/7 TSX PLP 0 /2, et 2/ TSX PLP 0 /2, et 2/ TSX PSI 200 /2 TSX PSY 60M 2/ TSX PSY 2600M 2/ TSX PSY 60M 2/ TSX PSY 00M 2/ TSX PSY 20M 2/ TSX PSY 800M 2/ TSX REY 200 2/ TSX RKA 02 2/7, et 2/0 TSX RKY 2 2/7 TSX RKY 2EX 2/0 TSX RKY EX 2/0 TSX RKY 6 2/7 TSX RKY 6EX 2/0 TSX RKY 8 2/7 TSX RKY 8EX 2/0 TSX SAY 00 /7 TSX SAY 000 /7 TSX SCA 0 /00 /07 TSX SCA 0 /00, /0, et /07 TSX SCA 62 /0 TSX SCA 6 /00, et /07 TSX SCA 72 /00 et /0 TSX SCP /00, /0, et /09 TSX SCP 2 /00, /0, et /09 TSX SCP /00, /0, et /09 TSX SCP CC 00 /0, /09, et /0 TSX SCP CD 00 /0, /09, et /0 TSX SCP CD 00 /0, /09, et /0 TSX SCP CM 00 /0, /07, et /0 TSX SCP CU 0 /0, et /0 9/20

Product reference index TSX SCP CX 200 /0, /07, /09, et /0 TSX SCP CX 00 /0, /09, et /0 TSX SCY 60 /00 TSX SCY 260 /79, /00, /0, et /09 TSX SCY CM 600 /0, et / TSX SCY CM 60 /0 TSX SCY CU 600 /0, /09, et / TSX SCY CU 60 /0, et / TSX TAP MAS / TSX TAP S 0 /9, /2, /26, et / TSX TAP S 2 /9, /2, et /26 TSX TLY EX 2/0, et 2/ TSX WMY 00 /2, et /9 TSX XBT H00 /60, et /9 SPU ZFU CD 20E 6/29 USE 000 VE 9/ USE 200 V20E 9/2 USE 2090 V0M 9/2 USE 000 V20E 6/27 USE 909 CD M 6/27 XCA USB 0 6/27 V VY XCA /2 X XBT Z968 /, et / XBT Z968 / XPS MC6X / XPS MC2X / XPS MCCPC / XPS MCTC6 / XPS MCTC2 / XPS MCTS6 / XPS MCTS2 / XPS MCWIN / XZ LG0 /69 XZ LG02 /69 XZ-CB020 /7 XZ-CB00 /7 XZ-CB00 /7 UAG SEW LFFCD 2 6/7 SEW LFUCD 2 6/7 SEW MFFCD 2 6/7 SEW MFUCD 2 6/7 UNY CSP SPU ZBU 6/29 SDU MFF CD20 6/ SDU MFT CD20 6/ SDU MFU CD20 6/ SEW LFF CD20 6/ SEW LFG CD20 6/ SEW LFT CD20 6/ SEW LFU CD20 6/ SEW LYU CD20 6/ SEW XFU CD20D 6/ SEW XFU CD20E 6/ SEW XFU CD20F 6/ SEW XFU CD20S 6/ SEW XFU CD20T 6/ SPU EFF CD 20 6/27 SPU EFG CD 20 6/27 SPU EFT CD 20 6/27 SPU EFU CD 20 6/27 SPU EZF CD 20 6/27 SPU EZG CD 20 6/27 SPU EZT CD 20 6/27 SPU EZU CD 20 6/27 SPU LFF CD 20 6/27 SPU LFG CD 20 6/27 SPU LFT CD 20 6/27 SPU LFU CD 20 6/27 SPU LZF CD 20 6/27 SPU LZG CD 20 6/27 SPU LZT CD 20 6/27 SPU LZU CD 20 6/27 SPU MFG CD 20 6/27 SPU MFU CD 20 6/27 SPU MZG CD 20 6/27 SPU MZU CD 20 6/27 9 9/2

Schneider Electric Industries SAS ART. 80262 Headquarters 89, bd Franklin Roosevelt F - 9206 Rueil Malmaison Cedex http://www.schneider-electric.com http://www.telemecanique.com Owing to changes in standards and equipment, the characteristics given in the text and images in this document are not binding us until they have been confirmed with us. Production: Schneider Electric Industries Photos: Schneider Electric Industries Printed by: Pozzo Gros Monti - Italy July 200 MKTED20072EN